:' k.";;
aVest Virginia
university
Graduate Catalog 1988-90 Bulletin
WEST VIRGINIA
UNIVERSITY
1988-90
Graduate Catalog
This two year bulletin represents the planned schedules
and offerings for 1988 through 1990.
The 1988-90 West Virginia University Graduate Cata-
log is a general source of information about course
offerings, academic programs and requirements, ex-
penses, rules, and policies. The courses, requirements,
and regulations contained herein are subject to con-
tinuing review and change by the West Virginia Board
of Regents, University administrators, and the faculties
of the schools and colleges to best meet the goals and
objectives of the University. The University, therefore,
reserves the right to change, delete, supplement, or
otherwise amend at any time the information, course
offerings, requirements, rules, and policies contained
herein without prior notice.
UNIVERSITY CALENDAR, 1988-89
Summer Sessions, 1988
May 18, Wednesday Registration, First Summer Session
May 18, Wednesday First Classes
May 30, Monday Memorial Day Recess
June 30, Monday Final Exam for First Six- Week Session
July 1, Friday Registration, Second Summer Session
July 1, Friday First Classes
July 4, Monday Independence Day Recess
August 12, Friday Final Exam for Second Six-Week Session
First Semester, 1988-89
August 18, 19, Thursday and Friday New Student Orientation
August 19, Friday General Registration
August 22, Monday First Classes
August 22, Monday Late Registration Fee in Effect for All Students
August 26, Friday Last Day to Register, Add New Courses,
Make Section Changes, Change Pass/Fail and Audit
September 5, Monday Labor Day Recess
September 12, Monday Rosh Hashannah — Day of Special Concern
September 21, Wednesday Yom Kippur— Day of Special Concern
October 7, Friday Mid-Semester
October 11, Tuesday Mid-Semester Reports Due
October 28, Friday Last Day to Drop a Class
November 8, Tuesday Election Day Recess
November 19, Saturday,
to November 27, Sunday, inclusive Thanksgiving Recess
December 8, Thursday Last Day to Withdraw From University
December 9, Friday Last Day of Classes
December 12, Monday,
to December 17, Saturday, inclusive Final Examinations
December 18, Sunday,
to January 5, Thursday, inclusive Christmas Recess
Second Semester, 1988-89
January 6, Friday General Registration
January 9, Monday First Classes
January 9, Monday Late Registration Fee in Effect for All Students
January 13, Friday Last Day to Register, Add New Courses,
Make Section Changes, Change Pass/Fail and Audit
January 16, Monday Martin Luther King, Jr. Birthday Recess
February 7, Tuesday (Not a Holiday) West Virginia University Day
February 24, Friday Mid-Semester
February 28, Tuesday Mid-Semester Reports Due
March 4, Saturday, to March 12, Sunday, inclusive Spring Recess
March 24, Friday Friday Before Easter Recess
March 27, Monday Last Day to Drop a Class
April 11, Tuesday Faculty Assembly
April 20, Thursday Passover— Day of Special Concern
April 27, Thursday Last Day to Withdraw From University
April 28, Friday Last Day of Classes
May 1, Monday, to May 6, Saturday, inclusive Final Examinations
May 8, Monday Grade Reports for All Graduates Due in Dean's Office
May 8, Monday Dean's Reports for All Graduates Due in
Office of Admissions and Records
May 13, Saturday Alumni Day
May 14, Sunday Commencement
The WVU academic year is divided into two semesters of about seventeen weeks
each and two summer sessions of six weeks each.
TENTATIVE UNIVERSITY CALENDAR, 1989-90
Summer Sessions, 1989
May 18, Thursday Registration, First Summer Session
May 18, Thursday First Classes
May 29, Monday Memorial Day Recess
June 30, Friday Final Exam for First Six- Week Session
July 3, Monday Registration, Second Summer Session
July 3, Monday First Classes
July 4, Tuesday Independence Day Recess
August 11, Friday Final Exam for Second Six-Week Session
First Semester, 1989-90
August 17, 18, Thursday and Friday New Student Orientation
August 18, Friday General Registration
August 21, Monday First Classes
August 21, Monday Late Registration Fee in Effect for All Students
August 25, Friday Last Day to Register, Add New Courses,
Make Section Changes, Change Pass/Fail and Audit
September 4, Monday Labor Day Recess
September 13, Saturday Rosh Hashannah— Day of Special Concern
October 6, Friday Mid-Semester
October 9, Monday Yom Kippur— Day of Special Concern
October 10, Tuesday Mid-Semester Reports Due
October 27, Friday Last Day to Drop a Class
November 18, Saturday,
to November 26, Sunday, inclusive Thanksgiving Recess
December 7, Thursday Last Day to Withdraw From University
December 8, Friday Last Day of Classes
December 11, Monday,
to December 16, Saturday, inclusive Final Examinations
December 17, Sunday,
to January 4, Thursday, inclusive Christmas Recess
Second Semester, 1989-90
January 5, Friday General Registration
January 8, Monday First Classes
January 8, Monday Late Registration Fee in Effect for All Students
January 12, Friday Last Day to Register, Add New Courses,
Make Section Changes, Change Pass/Fail and Audit
January 15, Monday Martin Luther King, Jr. Birthday Recess
February 7, Wednesday (Not a Holiday) West Virginia University Day
February 23, Friday Mid-Semester
February 27, Tuesday Mid-Semester Reports Due
March 3, Saturday, to March 11, Sunday, inclusive Spring Recess
March 23, Friday Last Day to Drop a Class
April 10, Tuesday Faculty Assembly
April 10, Tuesday Passover— Day of Special Concern
April 13, Friday Friday Before Easter Recess
April 26, Thursday Last Day to Withdraw From University
April 27, Friday Last Day of Classes
April 30, Monday, to May 5, Saturday, inclusive Final Examinations
May 7, Monday Grade Reports for All Graduates Due in Dean's Office
May 7, Monday Dean's Reports for All Graduates Due in
Office of Admissions and Records
May 12, Saturday Alumni Day
May 13, Sunday Commencement
The WW academic year is divided into two semesters of about seventeen weeks
each and two summer sessions of six weeks each.
West Virginia Board of Regents
950 Kanawha Boulevard, East
Charleston, WV 25301
Charles Connor, Beckley
Louis Costanzo, Wheeling
Thomas L. Craig, Jr., Huntington
Kenneth M. Dunn, Charleston
the Reverend Paul J. Gilmer, Institute
Sister Mary Jude Jochum, Wheeling
James, McCartney, Morgantown
William T. McLaughlin, Fairmont
Thomas W. McNeel, Charleston
Clifton T. Neal, Jr., Bluefield
Charles Printz, Charles Town
Michael Niggemyer, ex officio, Morgantown
Suzanne Snyder, ex officio, Fairmont
William Simmons, Chancellor, Glenville
West Virginia University Board of Advisors
Office of the President
Morgantown, WV 26506
David Hardesty, Jr., Chairman, Charleston
Joseph Powell, Vice-Chairman, Charleston
J. Reginald Dietz, Weirton
Sue Seibert Farnsworth, Wheeling
Lawson Hamilton, Jr., Lewisburg
the Honorable Robert E. Maxwell, Elkins
Victorine Monroe, Clarksburg
Margaret Lucas, Administrative Appointee
Brad Hoylman, Student Representative
James Arbogast, Faculty Representative
Paul Martinelli, Classified Staff Representative
Neil S. Bucklew, President
West Virginia University Bulletin (USPS 676-980) (ISSN 0362-3009)
Series 88, No. 9-1, March, 1988
Issued Monthly in January, February, April, and October;
four times in March; and twelve times in June.
Second-class postage paid at Morgantown, WV 26505
and at additional mailing offices.
POSTMASTER: Send Form 3579 to
West Virginia University, Morgantown, WV 26506.
CONTENTS
University Calendars, 1988-89, 1989-90 2,3
West Virginia Board of Regents 4
West Virginia University Board of Advisors 4
Correspondence 6
Part 1— West Virginia University 7
President's Cabinet, Deans 7
Directors, Distinguished Professors 8
General Information 9
Degree Programs Offered by WVU 11
Academic Common Market 14
Part 2— Graduate Programs and Courses 15
Part 3— Other Graduate Courses and Facilities 343
Part 4 — General Policies and Procedures 356
Graduate Education at WVU 356
Government and Organization of WVU 357
Organization of Graduate Education 358
Application for Graduate Study 358
Admission to Graduate Study 359
Transfer Procedures 363
Credit Limitations 364
Time Limits 365
Undergraduates in Graduate-Level Courses 366
Enrollment and Registration Requirements 366
Advising 370
Scholarship 371
Off-Campus Graduate Study 374
Part 5— Graduate Degrees 375
Candidacy 375
Master's Degrees 377
Doctoral Degrees 379
Special Additional Requirements and Information 383
College of Agriculture and Forestry 383
College of Creative Arts 384
School of Dentistry 384
College of Engineering 385
College of Human Resources and Education 387
Part 6— Other Information 393
Fees 402
Fellowships/Assistantships 403
Other Services 404
Part 7— Graduate Faculty 406
Index 434
CORRESPONDENCE
Address as follows:
Academic Programs
Vice President for Academic Affairs
and Research
West Virginia University
P.O. Box 6001
Morgantown, WV 26506-6001
Admissions, Catalogs, Records
Office of Admissions and Records
West Virginia University
P.O. Box 6009
Morgantown, WV 26506-6009
Graduate Programs
Assistant Vice President
for Curriculum and Instruction
West Virginia University
P.O. Box 6001
Morgantown, WV 26506-6001
Housing and Residence Life
Director, Housing and Residence Life
West Virginia University
Morgantown, WV 26506
Scholarships and Work-Study
Student Financial Aid Office
West Virginia University
P.O. Box 6004
Morgantown, WV 26506-6004
Student Life
Dean, Student Life
West Virginia University
Morgantown, WV 26506
Veterans Educational Assistance
Student Financial Aid Office
West Virginia University
P.O. Box 6004
Morgantown, WV 26506-6004
6
Parti
WEST VIRGINIA UNIVERSITY
West Virginia University Administration
President's Cabinet
Neil S. Bucklew, Ph.D., President
James Arbogast, M.D., Faculty Representative
Dianne Brown, Ph.D., Special Assistant to the President for Social Justice
Marion F. Dearnley, J.D., Interim Associate Vice President for Student Affairs
Edwin Flowers, J.D., Vice President for Institutional Advancement
Frank A. Franz, Ph.D., Provost and Vice President for Academic Affairs
and Research
James K. Hackett, M.B.A., Associate Vice President for Health Sciences
Mary Jane Hitt, M.A., Special Assistant to the President
Brad Hoylman, Student Body President
John E. Jones, M.D., Vice President for Health Sciences
Paul Martinelli, Staff Council President
Herman Mertins, Jr., Ph.D., Vice President for Administration and Finance
Jon A. Reed, J.D., Executive Officer
John Signorelli, M.B.A., Associate Vice President for Finance
Rachel B. Tompkins, Ed.D., Associate Vice President for
University Extension and Public Service
William E. Vehse, Ph.D., Associate Vice President for Academic Affairs
and Research
Deans
College of Agriculture and Forestry/Agricultural and Forestry
Experiment Station, Robert H. Maxwell, Ph.D., Dean/Director
College of Arts and Sciences, Gerald E. Lang, Ph.D.
College of Business and Economics, Cyril M. Logar, Ph.D. (Interim)
College of Creative Arts, Margaret O. Lucas, Ed.D.
School of Dentistry, W. Robert Biddington, D.D.S.
College of Engineering/Engineering Experiment Station,
Curtis J. Tompkins, Ph.D., Dean/Director
College of Human Resources and Education, Diane L. Reinhard, Ph.D.
Perley Isaac Reed School of Journalism, Guy H. Stewart, Ph.D.
College of Law, Carl M. Selinger, J.D.
Library Services, Stokely B. Gribble, M.S. (Interim)
School of Medicine, James M. Stevenson, M.D.
College of Mineral and Energy Resources, John L. Schroder, Jr., M.S.E.M.
School of Nursing, Lorita D. Jenab, Ed.D.
School of Pharmacy, Sidney A. Rosenbluth, Ph.D.
School of Physical Education, J. William Douglas, Ph.D.
Potomac State College, Joseph M. Gratto, Ph.D.
School of Social Work, Sung Lai Boo, Ph.D. (Interim)
Student Life, Herman L. Moses, M.A.
University Extension and Continuing Education, R. Rudy Filek, Ph.D.
WEST VIRGINIA UNIVERSITY 7
Directors
Admissions and Records, Glenn G. Carter, Ed.D.
Air Force Aerospace Studies (ROTC), Col. Michael D. Edwards, M.P.A.
Alumni Activities, Stephen L. Douglas, M.S. (Interim)
Book Stores, John J. Porter, M.B.A.
Budget Office, Richard M. Gardner, M.B.A.
Bureau of Business Research, Tom S. Witt, Ph.D.
Career Services Center, Robert L. Kent, M.A.
Center for Women's Studies, Judith G. Stitzel, Ph.D.
Computing Services, William J. Logar, B.S.
Controller, William A. McCune, M.B.A.
Counseling Service, James F. Carruth, Ph.D.
Energy and Water Research Center, Richard A. Bajura, Ph.D.
Facilities Planning and Management, James R. Shaub, M.B.A.
Gerontology Center, Rick A. Briggs, M.A. (Interim)
Housing and Residence Life, Stephen S. Showers, M.Ed.
Human Resources, S. Thomas Serpento, M.A. (Interim Assistant
Vice President)
Institutional Analysis and Planning, Kathleen K. Bissonnette, Ph.D.
Intercollegiate Athletics, Fred A. Schaus, M.S.
Internal Auditing, William R. Quigley, B.S., C.P.A.
Military Science (Army ROTC), Lt. Col. Jerald W. Fisher, M.A.
Mountainlair, Daniel N. Adams, Ed.D.
News and Information Services, Robert L. Verbosky, M.A.
Off-Campus Credit, Arthur L. Morris, M.A. (Interim)
Parking, Robert Roberts
Physical Plant, Dorsey D. Jacobs
Printing Services, Paul H. Stevenson, B.S.
Publications Services, John Luchok, B.S.J.
Public Safety, William S. Strader, B.A.
Purchasing, Phillip A. Ondo, B.S. (Interim Associate Director)
Radio, Television, and Telecommunications, C. Gregory Van Camp, M.S.J.
Regional Research Institute, Andrew M. Isserman, Ph.D.
Sponsored Programs, William W. Reeves, M.P.A.
Student Activities and Educational Programs, Robert F. McWhorter, M.S.
Student Financial Aid, Brenda Thompson, M.B.A.
Summer Sessions, R. Rudy Filek, Ph.D.
Telecommunications and Network Services, Floyd R. Crosby, M.B.A.
Transportation, and Mail Service, Robert J. Bates, B.S.M.E.
University Honors Program, William E. Collins, Ph.D.
Distinguished Professors
Franklin D. Cleckley, J.D., Arthur B. Hodges Professor of Law.
Bernard R. Cooper, Ph.D., Claude Worthington Benedum Professor of Physics.
William W. Fleming, Ph.D., Professor, Mylan Chair of Pharmacology.
Edmund B. Flink, M.D., Ph.D., Claude Worthington Benedum Professor
of Medicine.
Ruel E. Foster, Ph.D., Claude Worthington Benedum Professor
of American Literature, Emeritus.
Frank Gagliano, M.F.A., Claude Worthington Benedum Professor of Theatre.
George A. Hedge, Ph.D., Edward J. Van Liere Professor of Physiology.
8 WEST VIRGINIA UNIVERSITY
C. Lawrence Kien, Ph.D., Professor, Charles E. (Jimj Compton Chair of
Nutrition.
Joan M. Krauskopf, J.D., William J. Maier, Jr. Visiting Professor of Law.
Thomas P. Meloy, Ph.D., Claude Worthington Benedum Professor
of Mineral Processing.
Hayne W. Reese, Ph.D., Centennial Professor of Psychology.
Martin W. Schein, Sc.D., Centennial Professor of Biology.
George W. Weinstein, M.D., Professor, Jane McDermott Shott Chair of
Ophthalmology.
General Information
West Virginia University combines many of the advantages of a large
institution with those of a small one. It is both a comprehensive university
offering 178 degree programs from the bachelor's through the doctoral level
and a decentralized group of 15 colleges and schools on two campuses in
Morgantown, which helps maintain the friendly, informal atmosphere of
smaller institutions.
With 17,175 students and 1,529 full-time faculty, WVU is large enough to
support academic diversity. WVU students come from all 55 West Virginia
counties, 48 other states, and 73 foreign countries. Over the years, the
University has had 21 students appointed Rhodes Scholars to continue their
studies at Oxford University. WVU freshman students score well in the
American College Testing Program— 20.0 compared to 18.7 nationally (1985).
West Virginia University is one of only 24 state universities in the nation
that serve as both the comprehensive and land-grant institutions in their
states. They are called land-grant institutions (there are 72) because the
Congressional act establishing them in 1862 gave federally owned land to
each state, which then sold the land and used the funds to begin a college
offering programs in agriculture and engineering.
Since its founding in 1867, WVU has developed into the center of graduate
and professional education, research, and extension programs in West
Virginia. Coal and energy are a major focus of University research because of
WVU's location in the heart of the eastern coal fields.
The Personal Rapid Transit (PRT) System, which was built by the U.S.
Department of Transportation as a national research and demonstration
project, connects downtown Morgantown and the campuses. The PRT,
perhaps the largest research and demonstration project ever built on a
university campus, consists of computer-directed, electric-powered cars that
operate on a concrete-and-steel guideway without drivers on board.
The Morgantown campuses contain 140 buildings on over 1,000 acres,
valued at $360 million; libraries with 1,113,455 books, 1,446,066 microforms
and microfilms, and over 9,000 periodicals; and five computer sites utilizing
an IBM 3081KK, an IBM 3081D, and four DEC VAX ll/780s.
Branches include the Charleston Division of the WVU Health Sciences
Center; Wheeling Division of the School of Medicine; Potomac State College at
Keyser, the state's only residential junior college; and five off-campus
graduate centers at Jackson's Mill near Weston, in Parkersburg, at Potomac
State College, Shepherd College in the Eastern Panhandle, and West Liberty
State College in the Northern Panhandle.
WEST VIRGINIA UNIVERSITY 9
West Virginia University operates eight experiment farms in Hardy,
Jefferson, Monongalia, Monroe, and Preston counties; five experiment forests
in Monongalia, Preston, Randolph, and Wetzel counties; a geology camp in
Greenbrier County; and the State 4-H Camp and a museum of mid-nineteenth
century life at Jackson's Mill, the boyhood home of Confederate General
Stonewall Jackson that has been entered in the National Register of Historic
Places.
Equal Opportunity/ Affirmative Action Policy
West Virginia University is an Equal Opportunity-Affirmative Action
institution. In compliance with Federal Executive Order No. 11246 as
amended, Title VII of the Civil Rights Act, West Virginia Human Rights Act,
Title IX (Educational Amendments of 1972), Sections 503 and 504 of the
Rehabilitation Act of 1973, and other applicable laws and regulations, the
University provides equal opportunity to all prospective and current members
of the student body, faculty, and staff on the basis of individual qualifications
and merit without regard to race, sex, religion, age, national origin, or
handicap, as identified and defined by law.
The University neither affiliates knowingly with nor grants recognition
to any individual, group, or organization having policies that discriminate on
the basis of race, color, age, religion, sex, national origin, or handicap, as
defined by applicable laws and regulations.
—Office of the President
10 WEST VIRGINIA UNIVERSITY
Degree Programs
College of Agriculture and Forestry
Degree Program Bachelor Master Doctorate/
Professional
Agricultural Biochemistry M.S Ph.D.
Agricultural Economics M.S.
Agricultural Education B.S.Agr M.S.
Agricultural Microbiology M.S Ph.D.
Agriculture M. Agr.
Agronomy M.S Ph.D.
Animal Nutrition Ph.D.
Animal and Veterinary Sciences B.S., B.S.Agr M.S.
Entomology M.S.
Family Resources B.S.Fam.Res. . .M.S.
Forest Resources Management B.S.F.
Forest Resources Science Ph.D.
Forestry M.S.F.
Horticulture M.S.
Landscape Architecture B.S.L.A.
Plant Pathology M.S Ph.D.
Plant and Soil Sciences B.S.Agr.
Recreation and Parks Management ..B.S.R M.S.
Resource Management B.S., B.S.Agr.
Wildlife Management M.S.
Wildlife Resources B.S.
Wood Industries B.S.F.
College of Arts and Sciences
Biology B.A M.S Ph.D.
Chemistry B.A., B.S M.S Ph.D.
Communication Studies B.A M. A.
Computer Science B.S M.S.
Economics B.A.
English B.A M.A Ph.D.
Foreign Languages B.A M.A.
Geography B.A M.A.
Geology B.A., B.S M.S Ph.D.
History B.A M.A Ph.D.
Interdepartmental Studies B.A.
Mathematics B.A M.S.
Philosophy B.A.
Physics B.A., B.S M.S Ph.D.
Political Science B.A M.A Ph.D.
Psychology B.A M.A Ph.D.
Public Administration M.P.A.
Sociology and Anthropology B.A M.A.
Statistics B.S M.S.
WEST VIRGINIA UNIVERSITY 11
Degree Program
Bachelor
Master
Doctorate/
Professional
Board of Regents Bachelor of Arts Degree
Board of Regents B. A.
(Intended for older students who wish to resume and complete their college studies.
Detailed information available from the Coordinator, Board of Regents B.A. Degree
Program, Student Services Center, West Virginia University, Morgantown, WV 26506.)
College of Business and Economics
Accounting B.S.B. Ad.
Business Administration B.S.B. Ad M.B.A.
Business Management B.S.B. Ad.
Economics B.S M.A Ph.D.
Finance B.S.B.Ad.
Industrial Relations M.S.
Marketing B.S.B.Ad.
Professional Accountancy M.P. A.
College of Creative Arts
Art B.A M.A.
Music B.M M.M D.M.A.,
Ph.D.
Theatre B.F.A M.A.,* M.F.A.
Visual Art B.F.A M.F.A.
*The M.A. program will be phased out.
School of Dentistry
Dental Hygiene B.S.
Dentistry D.D.S.
Endodontics M.S.
Orthodontics M.S.
College of Engineering
Engineering
Aerospace Engineering
Chemical Engineering .
Civil Engineering
Computer Engineering
Electrical Engineering .
Industrial Engineering
Mechanical Engineering
Occupational Health and
Safety Engineering M.S
M.S.E
...B.S.A.E M.S.A.E.
...B.S.Ch.E M.S.Ch.E.
...B.S.C.E M.S.C.E.
...B.S.Cp.E.
...B.S.E.E M.S.E.E.
...B.S.I.E M.S.I.E.
...B.S.M.E M.S.M.E.
.Ph.D.
12 WEST VIRGINIA UNIVERSITY
Degree Program
Bachelor
Master
Doctorate/
Professional
College of Human Resources and Education
Education Ed.D.,
C.A.S.
Counseling M. A.
Education Administration.
Educational Psychology. . .
Elementary Education
Reading
Rehabilitation Counseling
Secondary Education
Special Education
Speech Pathology and Audiology
Technology Education
B.S.E.Ed
B.S.S.Ed
B.S. ".
..M.A.
..M.A.
..M.A.
..M.A.
..M.S.
..M.A.
..M.A.
..M.S.
..M.A.
Interdisciplinary Programs
Genetics and Developmental Biology M.S Ph.D.
Liberal Studies M. A.L.S.
Reproductive Physiology M.S Ph.D.
Perley Isaac Reed School of Journalism
Journalism B.S.J M.S.J.
College of Law
Law
.J.D.
School of Medicine
Anatomy M.S Ph.D.
Biochemistry (Medical) M.S Ph.D.
Biomedical Sciences Ph.D.*
Medical Technology B.S M.S.
Medicine M.D.
Microbiology (Medical) M.S Ph.D.
Pharmacology and Toxicology M.S Ph.D.
Physical Therapy B.S.
Physiology (Medical) M.S Ph.D.
* Awarded under the auspices of the degree-granting authority of WVU, but in cooperation with
the Basic Sciences Departments of Marshall University School of Medicine.
College of Mineral and Energy Resources
Engineering of Mines B.S.E.M M.S.E.M.
Mineral and Energy Resources M.S Ph.D.
Mineral Engineering Ph.D.
Mineral Processing Engineering B.S.
Petroleum Engineering B.S. Pet. E M.S.Pet.E.
WEST VIRGINIA UNIVERSITY 13
Degree Program Bachelor Master Doctorate/
Professionl
School of Nursing
Nursing B.S.N M.S.N.
School of Pharmacy
Pharmaceutical Sciences M.S .Ph.D.
Pharmacy B.S.Pharm.
School of Physical Education
Education Ed.D.,
C.A.S.
Community Health Education M.S.
Physical Education B.S.P.Ed M.S.
Sport and Exercise Studies B.S.P.Ed.
Safety Studies M.S.
School of Social Work
Social Work B.S.W M.S.W.
Academic Common Market
West Virginia provides its residents opportunity, through the Academic
Common Market (ACM) and through contract programs, to pursue academic
programs not available within the state. Both programs permit West Virginians
to enter out-of-state institutions at reduced tuition rates.
Contract programs have been established for study in optometry,
podiatry, and veterinary medicine. The ACM provides access to numerous
graduate and undergraduate programs. The programs are restricted to West
Virginia residents who have been accepted for admission to one of the specific
programs at designated out-of-state institutions.
Through reciprocal agreement, WVU allows residents of states within the
ACM to enroll in graduate and undergraduate programs on an in-state tuition
basis.
Further information may be obtained through Dr. Elaine K. Ginsberg,
Assistant Vice President for Curriculum and Instruction, Stewart Hall, West
Virginia University, P.O. Box 6001, Morgantown, WV 26506-6001. Application
must be made through the higher education authority of the state of residence.
For West Virginia residents this is the West Virginia Board of Regents, 950
Kanawha Boulevard, East, Charleston, WV 25301.
West Virginia University is a member of the North Central Association of
Colleges and Schools. The University's educational programs are accredited
by the North Central Association and by the appropriate accreditation
agencies for professional programs.
14 WEST VIRGINIA UNIVERSITY
Part 2
GRADUATE PROGRAMS
AND COURSES
Plan for Numbering Courses
For convenience, each course is designated by an acronym for the
department in which it is given and by a number particular to that course. The
plan for numbering is as follows:
Courses 200 to 299— Courses for advanced undergraduate students and selected
graduate students. No more than 40 percent of the credits counted for meeting
requirements for a graduate degree can be at the 200 level.
Courses 300-399— Courses for graduate students; students in professional programs
leading to the doctorate; and selected, advanced undergraduates. Undergraduates in
any class carrying a 300-level course number must have a 3.0 cumulative grade-point
average and have written approval on special forms from their instructors and
advisers. Seniors within 12 semester hours of graduation may, with prior approval of
their advisers, enroll in 300-level graduate courses for graduate credit. (In summary,
200-level courses are intended primarily to serve undergraduate students; 300-level
courses are intended primarily to serve introductory graduate and master's degree
course needs.)
Courses 391 (Advanced Topics) and 397 (Master's Degree Research or Thesis) —
Courses are approved for University-wide use by any academic unit. These courses
may be graded S or U.
Courses 400 to 499— Courses for graduate students only. All doctoral degree dissertation
hours shall be awarded at the 400-level— specifically under course number 497.
Courses numbered 497 may be graded S or U.
Courses 492 to 495— Courses are approved by the Assistant Vice President for
Curriculum and Instruction. Approved requests are forwarded to the Office of
Admissions and Records for entry into the WVU Schedule of Courses.
Graduate degree credit-hour requirements must include at least 60
percent at the 300 and 400 level.
Abbreviations Used in Course Listings
I — a course given in the first semester
II — a course given in the second semester
I, II — a course given in each semester
I and II — a course given throughout the year
Yr. — a course continued through two semesters
S. — a course given in the summer
hr. — credit hours per course
lee. — lecture period
rec. — recitation period
lab. — laboratory period
Cone. — concurrent registration required
PR — prerequisite
Coreq. — corequisite
Consent — consent of instructor required
CR — credit, but no grade
Schedule of Courses
Before the opening of semesters and summer sessions, a Schedule of
Courses is printed to announce the courses that will be offered by the colleges
and schools of WVU. Courses in this catalog are subject to change without
notice.
15
ACCOUNTANCY, PROFESSIONAL
Jay H. Coats, Director of Graduate Program in Accounting
437 Armstrong Hall
M.P.A. Program, College of Business and Economics, West Virginia University, P.O.
Box 6025, Morgantown, WV 26506-6025
Telephone: (304) 293-5335
Degree Offered: M.P.A.
Graduate Faculty: Members G. Smith and Coats. Associate Members Doran, Maust,
Neidermeyer, Pushkin, Shaw, Titard, and Wilner.
The objective of the Master of Professional Accountancy (M.P.A.) degree
is to provide the student with professional competence in accounting and
executive level business education, including a broad understanding of the
managerial process. The American Institute of Certified Public Accountants
( AICPA) has stated that a C.P. A. candidate should have 150 semester hours of
formal education in order to be prepared to cope with the increasingly
complex nature of accounting practice. Many states have passed, or are
considering passing, legislation requiring C.P. A. candidates to have completed
a fifth year of education before receiving permission to sit for the examination.
The additional accounting education also aids a student in successfully
preparing for any of the professional accounting examinations (C.P. A.,
CM. A., C.I. A.), and students are encouraged to take these examinations while
in the M.P.A. program.
The majority of the M.P.A. graduates have accepted employment in
public accounting; the remainder have entered doctoral programs in ac-
counting, industrial accounting, governmental accounting, or college teaching.
A large number of employers visit the campus and offer access to the national
job market.
Financial aid in the form of graduate assistantships and tuition scholar-
ships is available to qualified students on a competitive basis. Most graduate
assistants will have the opportunity to teach accounting principles. Graduate
students are also eligible for the following awards:
The Harmon/Witschey Award: To honor an accounting graduate student
in memory of Robert E. Witschey.
The Prentice-Hall, Inc. Award: To a graduate student in accounting who
has demonstrated academic performance and exceptional service.
The M.P.A. program at WVU follows the 150-hour recommendation of the
AICPA, as published in its report entitled Education Requirements for Entry
into the Accounting Profession. The College of Business and Economics is
fully accredited by the American Assembly of Collegiate Schools of Business.
The graduate courses leading to the M.P.A. degree are intended to be
completed in one calendar year of full-time studies. The program requires that
the student have an undergraduate degree with a minimum of 24 hours in
accounting. Work experience is not a requirement for admission. Students
may enter the program on either a full-time or part-time basis in either
Summer or Fall. Careful selection of degree candidates limits the size of
classes, leads to high quality efforts in the program, and permits frequent and
direct contact between students and faculty.
To obtain approval for entry into the M.P.A. program an applicant must
have a baccalaureate degree from an accredited college or university and an
undergraduate grade-point average of at least 3.0 overall or in the last 60
credit hours taken. The student must also have an accounting grade-point
average of at least 3.0. In addition, the applicant must submit a score of 500 or
16 ACCOUNTANCY, PROFESSIONAL
above on the Graduate Management Admission Test (GMAT). Applicants
with a GPA below 3.0 (or GMAT scores below 500) must show correspondingly
higher GMAT (or GPA) achievement.
To assure that all students in the program have the same foundation in
business, the following prerequisite courses, or their equivalent, must be
completed before enrolling in M.P.A. graduate courses: principles of ac-
counting (6 hours), intermediate accounting (6 hours), advanced accounting,
cost accounting, tax accounting, auditing, principles of economics (6 hours),
principles of marketing, principles of management, principles of finance,
production management, statistics, business law, business policy, and
computer science.
A student without the necessary prerequisite courses may be approved to
enter the M.P.A. program as a provisional graduate student. All applications
for approval to enter the M.P.A. program must be received in the WVU Office
of Admissions and Records as early as possible and no later than one month
before the date for which enrollment is requested.
Master of Professional Accountancy (M.P.A.)
The candidate's program will be planned with the assistance and
approval of the Director of Graduate Programs. The M.P.A. degree requires 39
hours of graduate credit and is normally completed in one calendar year. The
program of study is as follows:
Fall Semester
Accounting 325— Accounting Information Systems, 2 hr.
Accounting 330 — Financial Accounting Theory and Practice, 3 hr.
Accounting 333— Income Taxes and Business Decisions, 3 hr.
Management 302— Quantitative Analysis of Business Data, 3 hr.
Speech Pathology and Audiology 280— Oral/Written Skills for Profes-
sionals, 3 hr.
Spring Semester
Accounting 335— Computer Systems Auditing, 2 hr.
Accounting 338— Controllership, 3 hr.
Economics 318— Economic Policy, 2 hr.
Finance 321— Corporate Financial Administration, 3 hr.
Elective Course— 3 hr.
Summer I
Accounting 332— Governmental and Nonprofit Accounting, 3 hr.
Accounting 340— Reporting Practices and Problems, 3 hr.
Accounting 345— Auditing and Professional Accounting Standards, 3
hr.
Elective Course— 3 hr.
No thesis is required in the program, but communication skills are
emphasized in all courses. Extensive use is made of microcomputers in
accounting applications.
The M.P.A. program requires that the student maintain a grade-point
average of at least 3.0 on all work taken as a graduate student while enrolled
in the College of Business and Economics, including prescribed work taken to
remove undergraduate deficiencies. A student whose cumulative grade-point
average falls below 2.75 will be placed on probation. If the average is not
brought up to 2.75 by the end of the following semester, the student will be
suspended from the program. A grade below C in any course taken while
enrolled as a graduate student will result in suspension from the graduate
program.
ACCOUNTANCY, PROFESSIONAL 17
Complete information about the M.P.A. program may be obtained by
contacting the Director of Graduate Programs.
Accounting (Acctg.)
200. Special Topics. S. 1-4 hr. PR: Acctg. Ill or consent. Special topics relevant to
accounting. (Maximum of 9 semester hours in any or all courses numbered 200
offered by the College may be applied toward bachelor's and master's degrees.)
211. Accounting Systems. 3 hr. PR: C.S. 5, Acctg. 112 or consent. Analysis of data-
processing fundamentals and information systems analysis, design, and imple-
mentation, including necessary computer hardware and software components
with particular reference to accounting information systems and the controls
necessary therein.
214. Income Tax Accounting. 3 hr. PR: Acctg. 213 or consent. The study of Federal
income tax treatment of partnerships, corporations and estates, and the treatment
of those property transfers subject to the Federal Gift Tax, together with an
introduction to tax research and tax procedure.
216. Advanced Managerial Accounting. 3 hr. PR: Acctg. Ill and 115 or 116 or consent.
Special problems in cost accounting, including tax planning, inventory control,
and decision models on C. P. A. /CM. A. examination. Selected problems and cases
will be used.
217. Auditing Theory. 3 hr. PR or Cone: Acctg. 210 or consent. Auditing fundamentals;
objectives, ethics, statistical samplings, standards and procedures. Emphasis on
FASB and SAS disclosures.
224. Advanced Accounting Problems. 3 hr. PR: Minimum of 18 hr. in accounting with
an average grade of B or higher. Analysis and solution of representative C.P.A.
problems.
230. Advanced Accounting Theory. 3 hr. PR: Acctg. 112, 115, and consent. Critical
analysis of accounting concepts and standards with emphasis on their origin,
development, and significance.
325. Accounting Information Systems. 2 hr. PR: Consent. The design and use of
computerized accounting information systems to support the transaction pro-
cessing, reporting and decision-making systems of most organizations, including
the use and critical analysis of currently available accounting packages.
330. Financial Accounting Theory and Practice. 3 hr. PR: Acctg. 112. Comprehensive
examination of financial accounting theory as established by the opinions,
statements and interpretations of professional organizations with special emphasis
on their application and problem solving.
332. Governmental and Nonprofit Accounting. 3 hr. PR: Acctg. 112. Fund accounting
and control in governmental and nonprofit entities; identification and control of
cost centers; cost analysis and cost centers; cost analysis cand cost finding, and
planning and control of operations and resources.
333. Income Taxes and Business Decisions. 3 hr. PR: Acctg. 213. Advanced federal
income-tax problems with emphasis on tax planning for business decisions and
tax research methodology.
335. Computer Systems Auditing. 2 hr. PR: Acctg. 325. The analysis and design of
control systems in a computerized accounting environment. Special emphasis on
evaluating evidence to determine whether a computing system safeguards assets
and maintains data integrity.
18 ACCOUNTANCY, PROFESSIONAL
338. Contro/lership. 3 hr. PR: Manag. 304. Examination of the role of the controller in
large entities in planning, measuring, evaluating, and controlling performance and
in reporting to stockholders and governmental agencies.
340. Reporting Practices and Problems. 3 hr. PR: Consent. Evaluation of financial
reporting practices and trends, including an examination of the reporting require-
ments of the SEC and other regulatory agencies. Practitioners will be used
extensively for class discussion and presentations.
345. Auditing and Professional Accounting Standards. 3 hr. PR: Acctg. 217. Professional
objectives, principles, and standards of auditing; audit reports and related
communications; and cash studies of audit sampling, professional ethics, legal
liability and reporting.
349. Seminar. 3 hr. PR: Consent.
491. Advanced Study. 1-6 hr.
AGRICULTURAL BIOCHEMISTRY
William G. Martin, Program Chairperson
1022 Agricultural Sciences Building
Degrees Offered: M.S., Ph.D.
Graduate Faculty: Members Brooks, Hoover, Ingle, Kaczmarczyk, Martin, Reid, Stelzig,
and Ulrich.
The Interdivisional Program of Agricultural Biochemistry of the College
of Agriculture and Forestry offers graduate studies leading to the degrees of
Master of Science and Doctor of Philosophy. Each student selects and
conducts research in the broad areas of biochemical genetics, nutritional
biochemistry, or plant biochemistry. The research project selected by the
student represents the base upon which the graduate program is built.
The objective of the agricultural biochemistry graduate program is to
prepare the student for a career in biochemistry in agricultural, biological,
food and veterinary medical sciences. Each student, in concert with the
adviser and graduate committee, will design the student's research program
at the beginning of the first semester. The student and adviser then prepare
the research proposal which, when approved by the graduate committee, will
become the distinguishing feature of the program and, when completed, will
provide the data for the thesis or dissertation.
In addition to the admission requirements on page 383, students must
have an overall grade-point average of at least 2.5 in general, analytical,
organic, and physical chemistry. Deficiencies in these courses may be
removed during the first year of graduate enrollment if prior consent is
obtained from the agricultural biochemistry faculty. Courses in biology and
physiology are beneficial, though not required, for admission.
Master of Science
The Master of Science (M.S.) degree in Agricultural Biochemistry
combines the academic and research programs of the student, yielding a
biochemist prepared for a career in agricultural, biological, food, or veterinary
medical sciences. The academic program is composed of graduate courses and
selected supporting courses in genetics, physiology, nutrition, or plant
sciences. The student will be advised by a committee of three or more faculty.
Thirty hours of graduate credit is required for the degree, of which no more
than 6 hours may be for research. The research program terminates with a
AGRICULTURAL BIOCHEMISTRY 19
thesis which is presented to the graduate committee and defended in a
comprehensive examination.
Doctor of Philosophy
The program for the degree of Doctor of Philosophy (Ph.D.) is a research-
oriented, advanced-level study tailored to the interests of the motivated
student. This program offers the student the opportunity to conduct original
research, with course work providing the base from which this independent
study is launched. The student, aided by graduate-student and faculty
exchange in seminar, laboratory, and formal courses, becomes prepared for
the candidacy examinations, which are taken at the end of the first year.
The candidacy examinations are administered to the student by the
student's graduate committee, usually five members, and contain a written
and an oral part. The student is given one written examination by each
committee member during the first week, and upon the satisfactory completion
of these, the oral examination is administered during the following week.
Research is generally initiated during the first semester or when the
committee and student feel it is appropriate for that individual. The student
begins the original research, in association with the adviser, and upon its
completion the research is presented to the committee as a Ph.D. dissertation.
This work is defended by the candidate in a final oral examination, given as a
seminar open to the public, and followed by the committee examination.
Agricultural Biochemistry (Ag. Bi.)
210. Introductory Biochemistry. I, II, S. 3 hr. PR: 8 hr. General chemistry, Chem. 131 or
equiv. Introduction to the chemistry of cellular constituents (proteins, amino
acids, carbohydrates, lipids, nucleic acids, enzymes and coenzymes) and their
metabolism in animals and plants.
211. Introductory Biochemistry Laboratory. I. 1 hr. Cone: Ag. Bi. 210. Experiments to
demonstrate certain principles and properties of animal and plant biochemicals.
212. Nutritional Biochemistry. II. 3 hr. PR: Ag. Bi. 210 or consent. Nutritional
biochemistry of domestic animals.
213. Nutritional Biochemistry Laboratory. II. 1 hr. PR: Ag. Bi. 210, 211; Cone: Ag. Bi.
212. Experiments to determine the nutritional constituents in animal and plant
tissues.
310. General Biochemistry. 1. 4 hr. PR: 8 hr. organic chemistry. The first half of a general
course of biochemistry designed for graduate students of biological sciences. The
course emphasizes the chemical properties of cellular constituents.
311. Laboratory Experiments in Biochemistry. I. 2 hr. PR or Cone: Ag. Bi. 310.
Experiments designed to demonstrate some of the basic tools and procedures of
biochemical research.
312. General Biochemistry. II. 4 hr. PR: Ag. Bi. 310 or consent. The second half of a
general course of biochemistry designed for graduate students of biological
sciences. The course emphasizes reactions and control of intermediary metabolism.
414. Enzymes. II. 3 hr. PR: Ag. Bi. 312 or consent. A survey of enzymology covering
general principles as well as current concepts and methods.
415. Advanced Biochemistry Laboratory. II. 2 hr. PR or Cone: Ag. Bi. 312. Experiments
in the areas of intermediary metabolism and enzymology.
20 AGRICULTURAL BIOCHEMISTRY
416. Vitamin and Coenzyme Biochemistry. II. 2 hr. PR: Ag. Bi. 312, or Bioch. 231, or
consent. Chemical and physical properties, analysis, biosynthesis, metabolism,
pathobiology, pharmacology, and toxicology of vitamins, vitamin-like compounds,
and coenzymes. (Offered in Spring of odd years.)
422. Plant Biochemistry. I. 3 hr. PR: Ag. Bi. 312 or consent. Advanced treatment of the
composition and metabolism of plants. Topics include cell wall structure, sulfur
and nitrogen metabolism, and photosynthesis. (Offered in Fall of odd years.]
424. Advanced Nutritional Biochemistry. I. 4 hr. PR: Ag. Bi. 310, 311, 312 or consent.
Advanced treatment of the biochemistry and metabolism of amino acids, carbo-
hydrates and lipids in the diets of ruminants and nonruminants. (Offered in Fall of
even years.]
428. Biomembranes and Muscle Biochemistry. II. 3 hr. PR: Ag. Bi. 312, or Bioch. 231, or
consent. Chemical, organization, and physiological aspects of membranes and
muscles; molecular and cellular interactions and integrative mechanisms. 3 hr. lee.
(Offered in Spring of even years.]
450. Seminar. I, II. 1 hr. per sem.
491. Advanced Study. I, II, S. 1-6 hr. PR: Consent. Investigations of biochemistry in
animal and plant systems. Study may be independent, with staff approval, or
through specially scheduled lectures.
496. Seminar. I, II. 1 hr. per sem. Presentation and discussion of current topics in
agricultural biochemistry, membrane biophysics, and biochemical genetics.
497. Research. I, II, S. 1-15 hr. Research in biochemical genetics, nutritional biochem-
istry, or plant biochemistry under staff supervision for agricultural biochemistry
majors.
NOTE: See other courses listed under "Biochemistry."
AGRICULTURAL ECONOMICS
Virgil J. Norton, Chairperson of Division of Resource Management
2018 Agricultural Sciences Building
Degree Offered: M.S.
Graduate Faculty: Members Colyer, Jack, Nesselroad, and Smith. Associate Members
Barr, D'Souza, Eagan, Ferrise, Hock, Mcintosh, Norton, and Templeton
Master of Science (M.S.)
The Master of Science in Agricultural Economics provides advanced
training in the areas of agricultural, resource, and rural development
economics. The degree prepares students for further graduate study and a
wide variety of careers in business and government.
Requirements for Admission
Students seeking the degree of Master of Science in Agricultural
Economics may be accepted for graduate study on a regular or provisional
basis. The Admissions Committee reviews and evaluates all applications.
In addition to general requirements on page 383, students must have:
1. Twelve or more semester credits in economics, agricultural economics,
statistics, or appropriate social science courses (should include principles of
economics).
2. Three or more semester hours of credit in calculus. (May be made up
after admission but not for graduate credit.)
AGRICULTURAL ECONOMICS 21
3. A grade-point average of 2.75 for all credit in economics and agricultural
economics.
Options and Plan of Study
A thesis or course work option may be selected. Students should select
the option by the time 12 hours of course work are completed and after
consulting with their graduate committees. Candidates with graduate re-
search assistantships should select the thesis option.
Thesis Option— A minimum of 30 credit hours of approved work to
include not more than 6 hours of credit for the thesis, and enough courses to
provide proficiency in economics and agricultural economics. Courses in
closely related social sciences may be included. The student's graduate
committee must approve the student's course of study and thesis topic.
Course Work Option— A minimum of 36 credit hours of approved course
work to provide proficiency in economics and agricultural economics.
Courses in closely related social sciences may be included if approved by the
student's graduate committee.
Plan of Study— Each candidate's plan of study is developed by the
student in consultation with his/her major professor and graduate committee.
Normally, the plan of study will include graduate-level courses in economic
theory, statistics, and agricultural economics. The plan of study should be
developed during the first full term of study.
Standards of Achievement
A minimum grade-point average of 3.0 is required for all graduate credit
courses taken as part of the approved program for the degree. This includes
graduate credit transferred and graduate credit accumulated while pursuing a
degree in agricultural economics. Persons requesting transfers of graduate
credit must obtain approval of their graduate committee for such transfers.
Examinations
Thesis Option— Satisfactory completion of an oral examination and, at
the discretion of the student's graduate committee, a written examination.
Course Work Option— Satisfactory completion of a written and an oral
examination.
Agricultural Economics (Ag. Ec.)
200. Land Economics. II. 3 hr. Classification, development, tenure, use, conservation,
valuation, and taxation of rural, urban, mineral, forest, water, and recreational
land resources. Private and public rights in land and the effect of population on the
demand for land.
206. Farm Planning. I. 3 hr. PR: Ag. Ec. 104 or consent. Planning use of labor, soil, crops,
livestock, buildings and equipment; principal factors influencing returns on
farms. (Farm visits required.)
211. Rural Economic Development. I or II. 3 hr. Resource utilization, economic behavior
and economic systems and subsystems, trade, public revenue and its allocation,
distribution of income, manpower problems, development policies, and region-
alization in rural areas.
231. Marketing Agricultural Products. I or II. 3 hr. Market organization, policies,
practices, and factors affecting the marketing of agricultural products. (Tour of
market agencies and facilities required.}
22 AGRICULTURAL ECONOMICS
235. Marketing Dairy Products. II. 2 hr. Milk-marketing policies and practices,
including milk-market orders. (Offered in Spring of odd years.)
240. Agricultural Prices. I. 3 hr. Analysis of price-making forces which operate in the
market places for the major agricultural commodities.
261. Agribusiness Finance. II. 3 hr. Credit needs for agricultural businesses, financing
farm and market-agency firms, and organization and operation of credit agencies
which finance agricultural business firms.
271. Agricultural Policy. II. 3 hr. Examination of economic aspects of governmental
price programs, production and marketing controls, subsidies, parity, export and
import policies, and other programs affecting agriculture.
330. Cooperative Organization. II. 3 hr. Organization, functions, and contributions of
cooperatives in an economic system.
342. International Agricultural Economic Development. I. 3 hr. Current problems,
theories, policies, and strategies in planning for agricultural and rural development
for increased food production and to improve the well-being of rural people in the
developing countries of the world.
343. Agricultural Project Analysis and Evaluation. II. 3 hr. PR: Consent. Design,
analysis, and evaluation of development projects; economic and financial aspects
of project analysis; identification and measures of comparing projects costs and
benefits; preparation of feasibility reports.
355. Resource Analysis. I. 3 hr. PR: Senior standing. Construction of models consistent
with economic reality for allocating the factors of production available on farms,
in forests, and in nonfarm agricultural businesses to produce profit maximizing
plans through use of linear and dynamic programming and electronic equipment.
431. Advanced Agricultural Marketing. II. 3 hr. PR: Consent. Structure of agricultural
marketing; economic theory as applied to agricultural marketing with emphasis on
theoretical and practical applications.
440. Advanced Farm Management. I. 3 hr.
441. Production Economics. I or II. 3 hr. PR: Consent. Economic principles of production
with special application to agriculture.
Resource Management (Res. M.)
491. Advanced Study. I, II, S. 1-6 hr. PR: Consent.
496. Graduate Seminar. I, II, S. 1 hr. PR: Consent.
497. Research. I, II, S. 1-15 hr.
AGRICULTURAL EDUCATION
Virgil J. Norton, Chairperson of Division of Resource Management
2018 Agricultural Sciences Building
Degree Offered: M.S.
Graduate Faculty: Members Gartin and Lawrence. Associate Members Bean and Odell.
The agricultural education faculty offers master's programs for persons
desiring advanced study in teaching vocational agriculture or in agricultural
extension education. Candidates for the Master of Science degree in Agricul-
tural Education may be admitted on a regular or provisional basis. A student
who does not have a B.S. in Agriculture with a major in agricultural education
may be required to complete undergraduate courses in agriculture and
professional education which are prerequisites to essential graduate courses.
AGRICULTURAL EDUCATION 23
Students shall combine graduate courses in agriculture and professional
education by taking 16 to 20 hours in agriculture and 10 to 14 hours in
education. Programs are planned to ensure that candidates develop an
understanding of:
— The teaching/learning process.
—The design and operation of instructional programs in agriculture.
—Research and evaluation processes.
—The philosophy and purposes of public agricultural education.
All graduate courses offered toward the degree must be approved by the
student's adviser. A thesis is required as a part of the 30-hour graduation
requirement.
Agricultural Education (Ag. Ed.)
260. Principles of Cooperative Extension. I. 2 hr. PR: Consent. Background, philosophy,
and history of cooperative extension. Activities of county cooperative extension
agents and cooperative extension programs in West Virginia.
261. Methods and Materials in Extension Education. II. 2 hr. PR: Consent. Organization
and preparation for extension teaching and the processes of communication.
(Offered in Spring of odd years.)
263. Teaching Young, Adult Farmer, and Off-Farm Agricultural Occupations Classes.
I. 2 hr. PR: Ed. P. 105, 106 or consent. Participation in conducting young farmer,
adult farmer, and off-farm agricultural occupations classes; organization, course
of study, method in teaching, and supervision of classes, young farmers' associ-
ations, adult farmers' organizations and off-farm agricultural occupations organi-
zations. (Also listed as C&I 263.)
264. Cooperative Vocational Education. II. 4 hr. PR: Consent. Preparation for planning,
organizing, and conducting high school programs of cooperative vocational
education, and familiarization with business organization and operation. (Also
listed as C&I 264.)
362. Program Building in Cooperative Extension. II. 3 hr. PR: Consent. Organization in
relation to program building. Leadership and group action. Overall working and
educational objectives, principles, method, and goals in developing county
extension programs. [Offered in Spring of even years.)
364. Organizing and Directing Supervised Farming and Supervised Occupational
Experience Programs. S. 2 hr. PR: Ag. Ed. 160 or consent. Planning programs of
supervised farming and supervised occupational experience; supervising and
evaluating such programs for day students, young farmer, adult farmer, and
off-farm agricultural occupations classes and groups. [Also listed as C&I 364.)
460. Planning Programs and Courses for Vocational Agriculture Departments. S. 2 hr.
PR: Ag. Ed. 160, 188. Gathering data, studying farming and off-farm agricultural
occupations problems of day students, young farmers, adult farmers, and off-farm
agricultural occupational groups and formulating total programs for school
communities. [Also listed as C&I 460.)
492. Seminar. I, II, S. 1-3 hr. Overview and analysis of problems, literature, and
research in agricultural education.
Resource Management
491. Advanced Study. I, II, S. 1-6 hr. PR: Consent.
496. Graduate Seminar. I, II, S. 1 hr. PR: Consent.
497. Research. I, II, S. 1-15 hr.
24 AGRICULTURAL EDUCATION
AGRICULTURAL MICROBIOLOGY
Gary K. Bissonnette, In Charge of Graduate Program in Agricultural Microbiology
401 Brooks Hall
Degrees Offered: M.S., Ph.D.
Graduate Faculty: Members Anderson, Bissonnette, Hindal, Morton, and Sexstone.
The graduate curriculum in agricultural microbiology in the College of
Agriculture and Forestry places emphasis on the interrelationships of
microorganisms and their environments. Options leading to the M.S. and
Ph.D. degrees are designed to prepare students with specialization in
microbiology as applied to soil, water, wastewater, agriculture, and food.
The teaching and research faculty have special interests in the areas of
environmental microbiology, biotransformation of environmental pollutants,
pollution abatement, public health and sanitary aspects of aquatic, terrestrial,
and food environments, and the general microbial ecology of such environ-
ments.
Graduate training is designed to offer qualified students a broad
background in the environmental sciences through cooperation with other
disciplines in the College of Agriculture and Forestry, College of Arts and
Sciences, College of Engineering, and School of Medicine. A thesis (M.S.) or
dissertation (Ph.D.) is required. Admission requirements are those listed on
page 383.
Agricultural Microbiology (Ag. Micro.)
201. Environmental Microbiology. II. 4 hr. PR: Ag. Micro. 141 or consent. Microbiology
as applied to soil, water, wastewater, sewage, air, and the general environment.
Occurrence, distribution, ecology, and detection of microorganisms in these
environments.
347. Food Microbiology. I. 4 hr. PR: Ag. Micro. 141 and Ag. Bi. 210, or consent. Ecology
and physiology of microorganisms important in the manufacture and deterioration
of foods. Techniques for the microbiological examination of foods. (Offered in Fall
of odd years.)
348. Sanitary Microbiology. I. 3 hr. PR: Ag. Micro. 141 or consent. Microbiology and
health hazards associated with food handling, water treatment, and sanitary
waste disposal. (Offered in Fall of even years.)
Plant Science (PI. So)
420. Special Topics. I, II, S. 1-6 hr. Special study in agricultural microbiology, crop
science, horticulture, plant pathology, or soil science.
450. Seminar. I, II. 1 hr. Graduate seminar in agricultural microbiology, crop science,
horticulture, plant pathology, or soil science.
497. Research. I, II, S. 1-15 hr. Graduate research in agricultural microbiology, crop
science, horticulture, plant pathology, or soil science.
AGRICULTURAL MICROBIOLOGY 25
AGRICULTURE
Robert H. Maxwell, Dean of the College of Agriculture and Forestry
1170 Agricultural Sciences Building
Degree Offered: M.Agr.
Graduate Faculty: Members Amrine, Anderson, Baker, Balasko, Baugher, G. K.
Bissonnette, Blizzard, Brooks, Bryan, Butler, Colyer, Dailey, Diener, Gartin, Hindal,
Hogmire, Hoover, Horvath, Ingle, Inskeep, Jack, Jencks, Jordan, Kaczmarczyk,
Keefer, Koes, Kotcon, Kvashny, Lawrence, Lewis, MacDonald, Martin, Morton, Nath,
Nesselroad, Norton, Prigge, Reid, Sencindiver, Sexstone, Singh, Singha, D. K. Smith,
Stelzig, Ulrich, Wagner, and R. J. Young. Associate Members D. R. Armstrong,
Baniecki, Barr, Barratt, Bean, Bearce, Boyer, Collier, Dozsa, D'Souza, Eagan, Elliott,
Ferrise, Galvin, Hickman, Hock, Karther, Kimmons, Longenecker, Lynch, McBride,
Mcintosh, Odell, Osborne, Peterson, Skousen, P. M. Smith, Sperow, Templeton, van
Eck, Weaver, Yoder, R. S. Young, Yuill, Zimmerman, and D. W. Zinn.
Students desiring this degree must obtain approval from the Master of
Agriculture Committee and meet the minimum admission requirements on
page 383. The committee charged with administering the degree program is
appointed by the Dean of the College of Agriculture and Forestry. The
student's baccalaureate degree should be in a field sufficiently related to the
course of study contemplated to provide the necessary background. A student
whose baccalaureate degree is in a field considered not sufficiently related to
the study contemplated may be admitted as a regular or provisional student
until specific requirements are met or the student may be admitted on the
basis of evidence of satisfactory professional experience.
Requirements. Satisfactory completion of 36 hours of course work is
required for this degree. The student will select a minimum of 27 hours from
the course offerings of the three divisions in the College of Agriculture
(Divisions of Animal and Veterinary Sciences, Plant and Soil Sciences, and
Resource Management). A minimum of 9 hours will be selected from the
offerings of each division. No more than 3 hours of special topics or advanced
study from each division may be counted towards the degree. A 3-hour
problem report may be included at the option of the student and the program
committee.
The student may choose the additional courses from within the College of
Agriculture and Forestry or from offerings of other colleges and schools of
WVU. An overall grade-point average of 3.0 is required for graduate courses
included as part of the approved program for the degree. Upon completion of
the course work, each candidate must undergo a written and oral examination
by the candidate's graduate committee.
The graduate committee of each candidate shall have one member of the
administering committee as a member. This member shall not be the
chairperson or student adviser.
Agriculture (Ag.)
200. Agricultural Travel Course. S. 1-6 hr. Tour and study of production methods in
major livestock and crop regions of the United States and other countries.
Influence of population, climate, soil, topography, markets, labor, and other
factors on agricultural production.
360. Problem Report for the Degree of Master of Agriculture. I, II, S. 1-3 hr.
26 AGRICULTURE
AGRONOMY
Robert F. Keefer, In Charge of Graduate Program in Agronomy
1108 Agricultural Sciences Building
Degrees Offered: M.S., Ph.D.
Graduate Faculty: Members Baker, Balasko, Bryan, Jencks, Keefer, Singh, and Sencin-
diver. Associate Members Boyer, Sperow, and van Eck.
The agronomy faculty in the College of Agriculture and Forestry offers
the Master of Science and Doctor of Philosophy degrees. Agronomy is
customarily divided into crop sciences and soil sciences and deals with the
problems in plant development and crop production and the properties and
uses of soils.
Thesis and dissertation problems in crop sciences are selected in forage
production, forage quality, forage/livestock systems, grazing management,
brush and weed control in forage crops, and intercropping of annual forage
crops. In soil sciences, the problems are selected in the areas of pre-mining
overburden analyses and minesoils properties, characteristics and utilization
of sewage sludge, flyash and other soil amendments, and mineral nutrition of
crops or other soils problems. Research problems change in response to needs
of the state and region. Cooperative research with other units of WVU, and
with research units in other states and overseas, are undertaken as the need
and opportunity occurs.
Facilities for graduate research include several farms, greenhouses,
growth chambers, modern laboratories, and specialized equipment.
The student must have a bachelor's degree from any approved college and
an adequate background in the physical and biological sciences. Admission
requirements are those listed on page 383. Additional undergraduate work
may be required according to the needs of the field of specialization of the
student. The courses required for graduate study will vary depending on the
crops and soils emphasis. They are developed in consultation with the
student's adviser and advisory committee. Normally, a candidate for a Ph.D.
degree in Agronomy (Crops or Soils) is required to have completed an M.S.
degree.
Ph.D. students wishing to emphasize entomology or horticulture enroll in
the Crop Science option of the graduate program in agronomy. (See Entomology
and Horticulture courses listed in Part 2.)
Agronomy (Crop Science) (Agron.)
251. Weed Control. I. 3 hr. PR: Pi. Sc. 52, Agron. 2, or consent. Fundamental principles of
weed control. Recommended control measures for and identification of common
weeds. 2 lee, 1 lab. (Offered in Fall of odd years.)
252. Grain and Special Crops. II. 3 hr. PR: PI. Sc. 52, Agron. 2, or consent. Advanced
study of methods in the production of grain and special crops. Varieties,
improvement, tillage, harvesting, storage, and uses of crops grown for seed or
special purposes. (Offered in Spring of even years.)
254. Pasture and Forage Crops. I. 4 hr. PI. Sc. 52, Agron. 2, or consent. All phases of
pasture and forage crop production, including identification, seeding, management,
use, seed production, and storage of forage crops. (3 lee, 1 lab.)
325. Forage Harvesting and Storage. 3 hr. PR: Agron. 254, or consent. Advanced study
of processes associated with harvesting and storage of forages. 3 hr. lee. (Offered
in Fall of odd years.)
354. Pasture Managment and Utilization. 3 hr. PR: Agron. 254 and An. Nu. 101, or
consent. Advanced study of pastures and their management and utilization with
emphasis on temperate species. 3 hr. lee. (Offered in Spring of odd years.)
AGRONOMY 27
374. Tropical Grasslands. 3 hr. PR: Agron. 254 and An. Nu. 101, or consent. Advanced
study of tropical grasslands and their management and utilization in animal
production. (Offered in Fall of even years.)
432. Forage Chemistry and Quality. 3 hr. PR: An. Nu. 301 and Agron. 254, or consent.
Advanced course in chemistry and biochemistry of pastures and forages, empha-
sizing factors affecting their quality and principles governing their utilization by
herbivorous animals. (Also listed as An. Nu. 432.) (Offered in Spring of even
years.) (3 hr.lec)
Agronomy (Soil Science) (Agron.)
210. Soil Fertility. I. 3 hr. PR: Agron. 2 or 10. Soil properties in relation to fertility and
productivity of soils; scrutiny of essential plant nutrients; use of fertilizers and
lime; evaluation of soil fertility.
212. Soil Conservation and Management. I. 3 hr. PR: Agron. 2 or 10. Using soil
technology to solve soil management problems relating to cropping systems. Field
diagnosis of soil problems stressed. (2 lee, 2 lab.)
230. Soil Physics. II. 3 hr. PR: Agron. 2 or 10. Physical properties of soils, water and air
relationships and their influence on soil productivity. (Offered in Spring of even
years.)
255. Reclamation of Disturbed Soils. II. 3 hr. PR: Consent. Pedologic definitions and
principles will be applied to advance planning and analysis, handling and
placement, reclamation, and revegetation practices, and continuing use of disturbed
soils resulting from mining and urbanization activities. (Field trip required.)
315. Soil Genesis and Classification. 1. 3 hr. PR: Agron. 2 or 10. Origin and formation of
soils. Study of soil profiles and soil-forming processes in field and laboratory.
Principles of classification and techniques of soil mapping. 2 lee, 1 lab. (Saturday
field trips required.) (Offered in Fall of even years.)
410. Advanced Soil Fertility. II. 3 hr. PR: Agron. 210, Biol. 169 or consent. Influence of
soil chemical and physical properties on availability of plant nutrients; intensive
study of individual plant nutrients and interactions of nutrients in soils and crops.
(Offered in Spring of even years.)
416. Soil Chemistry. I. 3 hr. PR: Consent. Chemistry of soil development; chemical and
mineralogical composition of soils; nature and properties of organic and inorganic
soil colloids; cation and anion exchange phenomena; soil chemistry of macro- and
micro-nutrients. (Offered in Fall of odd years.)
418. Chemistry of Soil Organic Matter. II. 3 hr. PR: Organic chemistry or consent.
Chemical composition of soil organic matter studied in relation to its physico-
chemical properties and humus formation. Methods involving extraction, frac-
tionation, and purification of soil organic components examined. 2 lee, 1 lab.
(Offered in Spring of odd years.)
421. Identification of Clay Minerals in Soil. II. 3 hr. PR: Physical chemistry or consent.
Characterization of clay minerals is an important aspect in soils, geology, civil
engineering, and related fields. Study of methods used in qualitative and
quantitative identification of these secondary minerals in soils and rocks. 1 lee, 2
lab. (Offered in Spring of even years.)
28 AGRONOMY
451. Seminar in Micropedoiogy. I. 2 or 3 hr. PR: Second-year graduate and consent.
Principles of optical mineralogy and of the polarizing microscope as applied to the
study of soil minerals and soil fabrics. {Offered in Fall of even years.)
Plant Science (PI. Sc.)
420. Special Topics. I, II, S. 1-6 hr. Special study in agricultural microbiology, crop
science, horticulture, plant pathology, or soil science.
450. Seminar. I, II. 1 hr. Graduate seminar in agricultural microbiology, crop science,
horticulture, plant pathology, or soil science.
497. Research. I, II, S. 1-15 hr. Graduate research in agricultural microbiology, crop
science, horticulture, plant pathology, or soil science.
ANATOMY
James L. Culberson, Acting Chairperson of the Department
4052 Basic Sciences Building
Degrees Offered: M.S., Ph.D.
Graduate Faculty: Members Beresford, Burr, Cilento, Culberson, Overman, Pinkstaff,
Reilly, and Walker. Associate Members Friedman, Hilloowala, and Pope.
The Department of Anatomy in the School of Medicine offers graduate
programs which are committed to the training of competent researchers and
capable teachers. This is accomplished by the completion of a carefully
designed plan of study tailored to the individual student's interests. The
program begins with instruction in basic morphological, developmental, and
functional aspects of human anatomy. Additional related course work and
electives are required. These selected courses strengthen the area of interest
of the student. The student then conducts an original research project which
culminates in a dissertation (Ph.D.) or a thesis (M.S.).
Admission Requirements
In addition to the admission procedure of the University, the Department
of Anatomy requires that each applicant complete a departmental application
form obtained from the department. After an application is favorably
reviewed by the departmental graduate studies committee, applicants are
invited for a personal interview whenever practical. The applicant is
admitted by a majority vote of the departmental graduate faculty.
It is recommended that the following courses be completed before
entering the graduate program: algebra, trigonometry, general physics,
inorganic and organic chemistry, general biology or zoology, comparative
anatomy, embryology, genetics, cell biology or general physiology, and two
years of French, German, or Russian. At the discretion of the department, a
student may be allowed to complete a limited number of prerequisites after
enrolling in the program. A grade-point average above 3.0 is desirable. The
aptitude portion and an advanced section of the Graduate Record Examination
are generally required. Also, three letters of recommendation from persons
who can best evaluate the applicant's potential for graduate study should
either accompany the application or be mailed to the Department of Anatomy
separately. Applicants desiring consideration for financial aid should complete
the application process as early as possible.
Doctor of Philosophy (Ph.D.)
The first year of study usually consists of required course work within
the Department of Anatomy. These courses include gross anatomy, micro
ANATOMY 29
anatomy, neurobiology, introduction to research, and seminar in anatomy.
Required courses in other basic medical sciences, such as biochemistry and
physiology, are usually taken in the second year. Twelve hours of additional
graduate-level courses are also required. These requirements will have been
satisfied when the student earns a grade of at least B in each of the courses
taken in the Department of Anatomy and has maintained a 2.75 overall
grade-point average.
To be admitted to candidacy for the Ph.D. degree, the student must satisfy
the above requirements, pass a written and oral comprehensive preliminary
examination, and prepare a plan for a research project to be undertaken for the
dissertation. To be recommended for the Ph.D. degree, each student must
complete a dissertation based on original research and defend the dissertation
at an oral examination.
This program allows flexibility for each student. The precise plan of
study is designed by the student and an advisory committee that is composed
of faculty members selected by the student.
The student often culminates the training period with presentations at
regional and/or national scientific meetings.
Master of Science (M.S.)
The master's program in anatomy is offered as a terminal degree
primarily for students in certain specialized fields, such as physical therapy
or in a conjoint program in dentistry or medicine. It is not necessary for the
student to complete the M.S. degree in order to qualify for admission into the
Ph.D. program, although the student may elect to complete the requirements
for this degree in progress toward the Ph.D.
An applicant who shows a special need for the M.S. degree must generally
be as well qualified as applicants for the doctoral program. The M.S. student
must complete courses in gross anatomy and microanatomy and 6 to 9 hours
of required and elective courses. A 2.75 grade-point average must be
maintained. In addition to course work, the student must complete a thesis
based on original research and defend the thesis at an oral comprehensive
examination.
Research and Instruction
Gross anatomy: anatomical variations and anomalies, and electromyo-
graphic studies of specific muscle groups;
Microscopic anatomy: studies of cells, tissues and organs, under normal
and experimental conditions with in vivo microscopic, histochemical, electron
microscopic, autoradiographic, and fluorescent techniques;
Developmental anatomy: experimental and descriptive embryology,
cellular differentiation, and dedifferentiation, regeneration and the effects of
drugs and other environmental agents on development;
Neuroanatomy: experimental, comparative, and embryological studies of
specific nerve cell groups and nerve pathways in the spinal cord, brain stem,
cerebellum, and cerebrum.
Anatomy (Anat.)
301. Gross and Developmental Anatomy: Trunk. (For medical and a limited number of
regular full-time graduate students in the medical basic sciences.) I. 5 hr. PR:
Medical student standing or consent of chairperson. Gross anatomical study of the
back, thorax, abdomen, pelvis, and perineum emphasizing clinically-related
concepts.
30 ANATOMY
302. Gross and Developmental Anatomy: Head-Neck. (For medical and a limited
number of regular full-time graduate students in the medical basic sciences.) I. 3
hr. PR: Medical student standing or consent of chairperson. Gross anatomical
study of the head and neck emphasizing clinically-related concepts.
304. Gross and Developmental Anatomy: Extremities. (For medical students and a
limited number of regular full-time graduate students in the medical basic
sciences.) I. 2 hr. PR: Medical student standing or consent of chairperson. Gross
anatomical and developmental study of the upper and lower limbs emphasizing
clinically-related concepts.
305. Microanatomy. (For medical students and a limited number of regular full-time
graduate students in the medical basic sciences.) II. 5 hr. PR: Medical student
standing or consent of chairperson. Cells, tissues, and organs.
306. Gross Anatomy of the Trunk and Extremities. (For dental students and a limited
number of regular full-time graduate students in the medical basic sciences.) I. 4
hr. PR: Dental student standing or consent of instructor or chairperson. Gross
anatomical study of the back, upper extremities, thorax, abdomen, and pelvis.
307. Gross Anatomy of the Head and Neck and Neuroanatomy. (For dental students
and a limited number of regular full-time graduate students in the medical basic
sciences.) II. 5 hr. PR: Dental student standing or consent of instructor or
chairperson. Gross anatomical study of the head and neck and a brief gross and
microscopic anatomical study of the central nervous system.
308. Neuroanatomy. (For students in physical therapy and a limited number of regular
full-time graduate students in the medical basic sciences, and students in other
health sciences.) II. 2 hr. PR: Consent of instructor or chairperson. Gross and
microscopic structure of the central nervous system.
309. Microanatomy and Organology. (For dental students and a limited number of
regular full-time graduate students in the medical basic sciences.) I. 5 hr. PR:
Dental student standing or consent of chairperson. Cells, tissues, and organs.
312. Special Topics in Anatomy. I, II. 2-4 hr. per. sem. PR: Anat. 301 or 306; and Anat.
305 or 309; consent of chairperson. Different topics of current interest in anatomy
that are not included in the regular graduate courses.
314. Applied Anatomy. I, II. 2-6 hr. per sem. PR: Consent of instructor or chairperson.
Detailed study of anatomy adapted to the needs of the individual student.
316. Craniofacial Growth and Maturation. I. 3 hr. PR: Anat. 315 or consent of
instructor. The current concepts of craniofacial growth and maturation are
presented and integrated for application to clinical problems.
318. Oral Histology and Embryology. (For dental students and a limited number of
regular full-time graduate students in the medical basic sciences.) II. 2 hr. PR:
Dental student standing or consent of instructor or chairperson. Structure,
function, and development of oral tissues.
319. Advanced Head and Neck Anatomy. II. 1 hr. PR: Dental, medical, or graduate
student, or consent. Advanced head and neck craniofacial embryology and related
functions as they apply to specialties in dental or medical practice.
401. Advanced Gross Anatomy. I, II. 2-6 hr. per sem. PR: Anat. 301, 302, 304, or 306, 307,
and consent of instructor or chairperson. Morphological and functional analysis of
a selected region, with dissection.
ANATOMY 31
402. Advanced Developmental Anatomy. II. 2-4 per sem. PR: Anat. 301, 302, 304, and
consent of instructor or chairperson. Detailed developmental anatomy of the fetal
period and infancy. With dissections and analysis of variations and malformations.
403. Seminar. I, II. 1-6 hr. (1 hr. per sem.) (Course may be repeated.) PR: Consent of
Graduate Committee. Special topics of current or historical interest.
405. Experimental Embryology. II. (Alternate Years.) 3 hr. PR: Embryology and
cellular physiology and biochemistry and consent of instructor or chairperson.
Development, differentiation, and regeneration.
406. Advanced Neuroanatomy. I. 2-4 hr. per sem. (Course may be repeated.) PR: CC MD
375 and consent of instructor or chairperson. Detailed study of selected areas of
the nervous system.
408. Histochemistry. II. 3 hr. PR: Anat. 305 or 309, biochemistry, and consent of
instructor or chairperson. Histochemical theory and techniques. (Offered in odd
numbered years.)
451. Advanced Microanatomy. I, II, or S. 2-4 hr. PR: Anat. 305 or 309, or Biol. 263 and
consent of instructor or chairperson. An extension of the major topics included in
Anat. 305 or 309. Special emphasis on recent contributions.
490. Teaching Practicum I and II. 1-3 hr. Consent of chairperson. Supervised practice in
college teaching of anatomy. Graded a S or U.
491. Advanced Anatomy. I, II. 1-6 hr. PR: Consent of chairperson.
497. Research. I, II, S. 1-15 hr. PR: Consent of Graduate Committee. (May be repeated as
needed with consent of Graduate Studies Committee.)
ANIMAL NUTRITION
Paul E. Lewis, Chairperson of Division of Animal and Veterinary Sciences
G-038 Agricultural Sciences Building
Degree Offered: Ph.D.
Graduate Faculty: Members Hoover, Horvath, Martin, Prigge, and Reid. Associate
Members Peterson and Thomas.
The Division of Animal and Veterinary Sciences offers a Doctor of
Philosophy in Animal Nutrition which allows maximum flexibility in courses
and research problems. Students may work with beef and dairy cattle, sheep,
swine, poultry, or laboratory animals. Research problems in domestic
animals form the basis for many studies, but a comparative approach is
emphasized.
Admission requirements are similar to those in other biological sciences.
The student should have completed basic courses in the physical and
biological sciences, including genetics, nutrition, and physiology. In addition,
analytical chemistry and organic chemistry (one year) are required. Deficien-
cies may prolong the time needed to complete degree programs.
Admission requirements are listed on page 383. Applicants meeting the
above requirements are not guaranteed admission since each professor will
accept only the number of advisees which can be supervised adequately with
available facilities, time, and funds. All students prior to the completion of
this degree must accumulate no fewer than 6 credit hours at the 300 or 400
level or equivalent in each of the following disciplines: agricultural or medical
biochemistry, statistics, and animal nutrition.
See courses listed under the Animal and Veterinary Sciences Master of
Science Degree Program, pages 33-35.
32 ANIMAL NUTRITION
ANIMAL AND VETERINARY SCIENCES
Paul E. Lewis, Chairperson of Division of Animal and Veterinary Sciences
G-038 Agricultural Sciences Building
Degree Offered: M.S.
Graduate Faculty: Members Dailey, Hoover, Horvath, Inskeep, Jordan, Lewis, Martin,
Prigge, Reid, and Wagner. Associate Members Dozsa, Kidder, Osborne, Peterson,
Smith, Thomas, Welch, and Zinn.
Master of Science (M.S.)
The Master of Science in Animal and Veterinary Sciences in the College of
Agriculture and Forestry allows maximum flexibility in courses and research
problems. Students may emphasize physiology, production, breeding, nutri-
tion, food, or veterinary sciences. They may work with beef and dairy cattle,
sheep, swine, poultry, or laboratory animals. Research problems in farm
animals form the basis for many studies, but a comparative approach is
emphasized.
Admission requirements are listed on page 383. Additional requirements
are similar to those in other biological sciences. The student should have
completed basic courses in the physical and biological sciences, including
genetics, nutrition, and physiology. Deficiencies may prolong the time needed
to complete degree programs.
A composite Graduate Record Examination score of 1,000 or better will be
considered as a basis of admission. The fact that an applicant meets the above
requirements shall not guarantee admission since each professor will accept
only the number of advisees which can be supervised adequately with
available facilities, time, and funds.
A minimum of 24 approved hours of course work and a thesis are required
for all master of science degrees.
Animal and Veterinary Science (A&vs)
420. Special Topics. I, II, S. 1-4 hr. (1 hr. credit in special cases only). Advanced study in
particular phases of such animal science topics as animal production, nutrition,
physiology, breeding and genetics, veterinary science, and food. (For the Master's
Degree, Special Topics ordinarily may count 2 to 4 hr.; max. credit, 6 hr.).
491. Advanced Study. I, II, S. 1-6 hr.
497. Research. I, II, S. 1-15 hr. Research in animal nutrition, physiology, breeding and
production, and veterinary science.
Animal Nutrition (An. Nu.)
301. Principles of Nutrition and Metabolism. I. 3 hr. PR: Ag. Bi. 210 or consent. A basic
course in principles of nutrition with emphasis on the major classes of dietary
nutrients and their digestion and utilization.
302. Nutrition and Physiological Function. II. 3 hr. PR: An. Nu. 301 or consent.
Sequence to An. Nu. 301. Techniques used in nutritional studies and the
relationship of nutrient requirements to physiological function in species of
laboratory and domestic animals and man.
430. Rumen Metabolism and Physiology. I. 3 hr. PR: Course in biochemistry. The
anatomy and physiology of the forestomachs of ruminants and the rumen
microbial population. Emphasis on the microbial metabolism as it pertains to the
utilization of feeds by ruminants. (Offered in Fall of odd years.]
ANIMAL AND VETERINARY SCIENCES 33
432. Forage Chemistry and Quality. 3 hr. PR: An. Nu. 301 and Agron. 254, or consent.
Advanced course in chemistry and biochemistry of pastures and forages, empha-
sizing factors affecting their quality and principles governing their utilitzation by
herbivorous animals. (Also listed as Agron. 432.) (Offered in Spring of even
years.)
434. Minerai Nutrition of Animals. II. 3 hr. PR: An. Nu. 301 or consent. Mineral
nutrition of livestock and man; soil-plant-animal interactions. Detailed treatment
of function of individual elements and their involvement in deficiency and toxicity
conditions on an international basis. (Offered in Spring of odd years.)
450. Seminar. I, II. 1 hr.
491. Advanced Study. I, II, S. 1-6 hr. (Repeat registration permitted for maximum of 6
credit hours per year.) Topics in advanced nutrition. Subject will be selected by
staff for formal presentation.
Animal Physiology and Breeding (An. Ph.)
200. Animal Growth and Lactation Physiology. 3 hr. PR: An. Ph. 100, or consent.
Animal life cycles; nature of growth and lactation; effects of biological, environ-
mental, and social-psychological variants; physiological regulation and control.
204. Animal Physiology Laboratory. I. 2 hr. PR: An. Ph. 100 or consent. Laboratory
study of the physiological systems of animals and the influences of environment
on these systems.
225. Physiology of Reproduction. II. 3 hr. PR: Course in biology. Comparative
physiology of reproduction in higher animals; endocrine functions involved in
reproduction; genetic and environmental variations in fertility mechanisms.
226. Breeding of Farm Animals. I. 3 hr. PR: Course in genetics or consent. Application of
principles of quantitative genetics to the improvement of farm animals.
280. Behavioral Patterns of Domestic Animals. II. 3 hr. Examination of the bases for
exhibition and control of behavioral patterns of domestic animals. 1 lab.
425. Endocrinology of Reproduction. II. 4 hr. (2 labs.). PR: An. Ph. 225 or Biol. 268 or
equiv. Discussion of and laboratory experience in classical and current concepts of
hormonal and neurohormonal regulations of reproductive phenomena with empha-
sis on species differences and similarities. (Offered in Spring of odd years.)
426. Advanced Animal Selection. II. 3 hr. PR: Course in statistics and course in genetics
or equiv. An advanced course dealing with the basic concepts of experimental and
statistical approaches in the analysis of quantitative inheritance with special
reference to the magnitude and nature of genotypic and nongenotypic variability.
(Offered in Spring of even years.)
450. Seminar. I, II. 1 hr.
Animal Production (An. Pr.)
240. Poultry Production. I. 3 hr. PR: An. Nu. 101. Special phases of broiler and egg
production, disease control, labor-saving studies, and recent designs in housing
and equipment for all types of poultry. 1 lab.
250. Current Literature in Animal Science. I. 3 hr. PR: An. Nu. 101. Evaluation of
current research in animal science and its application to production and manage-
ment.
422. Advanced Milk Production. II. 3 hr. PR: An. Nu. 101 or consent. Advanced study of
the feeding, breeding, and management of dairy cattle.
34 ANIMAL AND VETERINARY SCIENCES
Food Science (Fd. Sc.)
267. Advanced Meat Science. I, S. 3 hr. PR: Fd. Sc. 167. Theoretical and experimental
aspects of meat science, meat product/process systems, and the quantitative
biology of muscle systems used for food.
Veterinary Science (Vet. s.)
205. Parasitology. II. 3 hr. PR: Course in biology or consent. Common parasites of farm
animals, their life cycles, effects on the host, diagnosis, control, and public health
importance. 3 hr. lee, 1 hr. lab.
210. Principles of Laboratory Animal Science. I. 3 hr. PR: Consent for undergraduates.
The management, genetics, physiology, nutrition, disease, and germ-free quartering
of common laboratory animals. 1 lab.
ART
Urban Couch, Chairperson, Division of Art and Graduate Adviser
419-A Creative Arts Center
Degrees Offered: M.A., M.F.A.
Graduate Faculty: Members Anderson, Couch, Freedman, Harvey, Rajam, and Thomas.
Associate Members Colangelo, Faulkes, Lucas, and Schultz.
The graduate programs in art lead to a Master of Arts in Art (one to two
years or 30 credit hours) and to a Master of Fine Arts in Visual Art (two to
three years or 60 hours). Both of these programs are highly selective and
closely integrated parts of the professional education in art offered by the
Division of Art. All applicants are expected to have artistic maturity and the
motivation to achieve excellence in their areas of concentration.
The Division of Art is an accredited institutional member of the National
Association of Schools of Art, the only nationally recognized accrediting
agency for professional art instruction. Applicants to programs in art must
comply with the standards for admission set by West Virginia University, the
College of Creative Arts, and the Division of Art.
All students enter the graduate programs in art as probationary candi-
dates. Students in the M.F.A. program are reviewed for advancement at the
end of their first year of study or upon the completion of 28-30 credit hours.
Students in the M. A. program are reviewed at the end of their first semester of
study or upon the completion of 12-15 credit hours. A satisfactory review
allows students to have degree candidate status. Candidacy status must be
approved by the student's graduate committee. All students in degree
programs, either M.F.A. or M.A., must prepare a written problem report. A
graduate exhibition may be required of a student on the recommendation of
his/her graduate committee.
General Requirements
Deficiencies: Before students are admitted, they must meet any deficiencies
in their undergraduate preparation. Credits taken to erase deficiencies do not
count toward a graduate degree.
Academic Standards: The Division of Art has high expectations for its
graduate students. Because of this, certain standards of achievement exceed
the minimum standards set by the University for all graduate students. The
Division of Art reserves the right to impose stricter limitations on all art
graduate students. Credit hours in courses with an earned grade of "C" do not
automatically count toward graduate degree requirements. The graduate
ART 35
committee and the divisional chairperson have the right to declare such credit
hours unacceptable.
Materials and Equipment: All graduate art majors are required to
purchase most of their personal equipment and expendable supplies. Some
studio areas purchase bulk supplies for student use in their courses. The
average cost to students sharing the cost of bulk purchases ranges from $100
to $150 per semester.
Problem Report: All candidates for a graduate degree in art must prepare
a written problem report related to their work and activity as a graduate
student. The chairperson of the student's graduate committee supervises the
preparation of the problem report, which must be completed at least one
month before the anticipated graduation date. The problem report must be
prepared according to the form prescribed in the WVU regulations governing
the preparation of dissertations and theses unless an exception is authorized
in advance by the student's graduate committee and the divisional chairperson.
Change of Graduate Program: A probationary candidate in a graduate art
program is not guaranteed acceptance into another graduate art program. A
change from the M.F. A. program to the M. A. program (or the reverse) must be
approved by the graduate faculty of the Division of Art. Under normal
conditions, such a change is not considered until the student has established
credibility by successfully completing 12-15 approved credit hours of study
at WVU. A change to a program outside the Division of Art must be approved
by the receiving unit. To make an application for a double degree program or
special interdepartmental programs at the graduate level, students must have
prior approval of the divisional chairperson.
Application Procedures
Requests for application forms for admission to graduate degree programs
in art must be addressed to the Office of Admissions and Records, West
Virginia University, P.O. Box 6009, Morgantown, WV 26506-6009. Applicants
must specify the degree and subject area of their choice and return the
application and transcripts from each college or university previously
attended to the above address with a $20 non-refundable processing fee.
All applicants, for both the M.F. A. and the M. A., must present a portfolio
for admission to the Department of Art. Applicants should take care to select
slides of recent and representative work for inclusion in the portfolio. The
portfolio must contain a statement of purpose, and three letters of recommen-
dation from college faculty or persons knowledgeable of the applicant's
interests and abilities, and twenty 35mm slides as they come from the
processing laboratory, (neither remounted nor retaped). Each slide should be
labeled with name, date of completion, size of work, and type of medium and
arranged in an 8" by 11" transparent plastic slide holder for mailing. The
complete portfolio, with the purpose statement, three letters, and 20 slides,
should be submitted to:
Graduate Adviser
Division of Art
College of Creative Arts
West Virginia University
P.O. Box 6111
Morgantown, WV 26506-6111
Provide a stamped, self-addressed envelope to assure prompt, safe return of
the slides.
36 ART
Master of Fine Arts in Visual Arts
The M.F.A., a professionally oriented terminal degree in the studio arts,
requires a baccalaureate degree in art or its equivalent for admission.
Preparation should include 12 hours of art history, 70 hours of studio art
related to professional needs, and 36 hours of general education.
Requirements: The suggested distribution of studies for the 60 credit hour
program is:
Art Studio Major Area 36 hours
Art Studio Elective 6 hours
Teaching practicum or Professional Practice 6 hours
Art History 6 hours
Graduate Exhibition and Problem Report 6 hours
To earn the M.F.A., a student must complete a combined (undergraduate and
graduate) total of 118 hours in studio, 18 hours in art history, and the
appropriate number of credit hours in general education courses.
All students in the M.F.A. program are required to submit a statement of
intention after completion of 12 credit hours, to indicate the direction and
implementation of their studio involvement, with an outline of their problem
report.
Transfer M.F.A. Credit: In addition to the application materials listed,
transfer students must ask to transfer graduate work completed elsewhere.
Transcripts must accompany the written request. Transfer credit is not
automatic. The art faculty review committee, the graduate adviser, and the
division chairperson will determine how much, if any, previous graduate-
level work may be transferred. At least 60 percent of the work for the M.F.A.
must be completed at WVU in the studio arts.
M.F.A. Curriculum: The M.F.A. student must complete the stated require-
ments in order to graduate, usually in a two-year period. Most students take
15 hours per semester. All students accepted into the M.F.A. program are
required to spend four full-time semesters (excluding summer sessions) in
residence. A waiver of this requirement may be requested from the graduate
adviser of the Division of Art, based on accepted transfer credit or previously
completed requirements. Concentrations for the M.F.A. include ceramics,
graphic design, painting, printmaking, and sculpture.
The following is the recommended distribution of required M.F.A.
courses:
First Year— Probationary Candidate Hr.
Art Studio Major Area 18
Art Studio Elective 3
Teaching Practicum or Professional Practice* 6
Art History** 3
30
*Professional practice courses will be practical, including business studies for students
intending to maintain studios as a private enterprise; administrative studies for those intending to
work in art centers, museums, or school administration; teaching practicum for those who expect to
teach at the college or university level. Graduate Assistants expecting to teach during their second
year should complete 6 hours of teaching practicum during the first year. Students with teaching
experience may be exempt from this restriction.
**Graduate credits in art history must be at the 300-level (graduate) and are in addition to
courses taken or required at the undergraduate level.
ART 37
Second Year— M.F.A. Candidate Hr.
Art Studio Major Area 18
Art Studio Elective 3
Art History* 3
Graduate Exhibition and Problem Report** 6
30
*Graduate credits in art history must be at the 300-level (graduate) and are in addition to
courses taken or required at the undergraduate level.
**Graduate exhibition and problem report (Art 400) will include organized graduate seminars,
problem report review periods, committee meetings, and exhibition preparation discussions.
Master of Art in Art
Art Education Concentration
(30 credit hours)
Art education is a popular option for graduate study in art. Specialization
in art education requires the completion of 30 credit hours program. The exact
course of study is determined through consultation with a student's adviser.
The art education concentration may be completed in one year of full time
study. The general distribution of graduate credits is as follows:
Hr.
Art studio major area 9
Art studio elective 6
Art education or approved studies 15
Art 400 (Problem report) 3
30
Every graduate student is required to prepare a written problem report. The
graduate art faculty recommend those students who may be required to hold a
graduate exhibition.
Art History Concentration
(30 credit hours)
The art history concentration is accredited by the National Association of
Schools of Art and Design. For information about this option, please contact
the coordinator of art history or the graduate adviser in the Division of Art.
The general distribution of graduate credits for a concentration in art history
is as follows:
Hr.
Art history 21
Cognate courses 6
Art 400 (Problem report) 3
30
Studio Art Concentration
(30 credit hours)
The studio art concentration allows students to specialize in ceramics,
graphic design, painting, printmaking, or sculpture.
Admission Requirements: Applicants desiring to begin a course of study
leading to the Master of Arts in Art and concentration in the studio arts must
have a baccalaureate degree in art or the equivalent. Undergraduate study
should include 12 hours of art history, 45 hours of studio art related to
professional needs, and 36 hours of general education courses.
38 ART
The concentration in studio art requires:
Hr.
Art Studio Major Area 18
Art Studio Elective or Professional Practice* 3
Art History** 6
Art 400 (Problem report) 3
30
*In lieu of art studio elective instruction, students may take professional practice courses
which are practical in nature. Exact courses of study are determined in consultation with the
graduate adviser.
**Graduate credits in art history must be at the 300-level (graduate) and are in addition to
courses taken or required at the undergraduate level.
The student must complete the stated degree requirements in order to
graduate. These credits can be earned in one year. After consultation with the
graduate adviser, students specializing in studio arts are required to prepare a
study list of course to be taken to satisfy Division of Art requirements.
Changes in this list must be requested in writing and approved by the
chairperson of the division.
Financial Aid and Graduate Assistantships: Financial aid information is
available through the Student Financial Aid Office, West Virginia University,
P.O. Box 6004, Morgantown WV 26506-6004. Graduate assistantships in art
are awarded to students of exceptional promise by the faculty of the Division
of Art. Application forms must be requested from the graduate adviser,
Division of Art, College of Creative Arts, West Virginia University, P.O. Box
6111, Morgantown, WV 26506-6111, and submitted with the portfolio.
Art (Art)
200. Directed Art Studies. I, II, S. 1-15 hr. (May be repeated for credit.) PR: Consent.
Studies in painting, sculpture, printmaking, graphic design, ceramics, drawing,
art education, art history; includes independent study.
211. Figure Drawing. I, II, S. 3 hr. (May be repeated for credit.) PR: Art 12, 121orequiv.
A course in compositional structure from the figure.
212. Advanced Drawing. I, II, S. 3 hr. (May be repeated for credit.} PR: Art 211 orequiv.
Advance tutorial drawing course.
300. Graduate Art Studies. I, II, S. 1-15 hr. (May be repeated for credit.) PR: Consent.
Studies in painting, sculpture, printmaking, graphic design, ceramics, drawing,
art education, art history; includes independent study.
400. Graduate Exhibition and Problem Report. I, II. 3-6 hr. PR: Consent.
490. Teaching Practicum. I, II. 3 hr. PR: Consent. Supervised practices in college
teaching of studio art.
496. Graduate Seminar. I, II. 1 hr. PR: Consent. It is anticipated that each graduate
student will present at least one seminar to the assembled faculty and graduate
student body.
ART 39
BIOCHEMISTRY
Diana S. Beattie, Chair
3124 Basic Sciences Building
Degrees Offered: M.S., Ph.D.
Graduate Faculty: Members Beattie, Blair, Butcher, Canady, Caterson, Durham, Harris,
Jagannathan, Kien, Kletzien, Miller, Rafter, Spearman, Sprague, Tryfiates, Vrana,
Wimmer, and Wirtz.
Graduate programs in the Department of Biochemistry are designed to
assist students in the development of their own capabilities for independent
thought and research. All students are provided with a strong biochemistry
background; however, the program has sufficient flexibility to allow individual
students to select advanced specialty courses in biochemistry which are of
particular importance to their career goals. Faculty research problems are of
current interest and are diverse, reflecting the broad spectrum of areas
encompassing biochemistry.
Admission Requirements
A prospective graduate student should hold a bachelor's degree with a
science major and should have successfully completed courses in qualitative-
quantitative chemical analysis, organic chemistry, calculus, physics, and
physical chemistry. In some cases, a deficiency in the above may be made up
after admission into the program.
Application is made by submission of the following items to the
Department of Biochemistry: (a) the completed departmental application
form (sent on request); (b) three letters of recommendation from professors
who can evaluate the student's present abilities and potential; (c) official
transcript of the applicant's college grades; and (d) official copy of Graduate
Record Examination scores. Due to the sequence of courses, entrance in the
fall is preferred, but exceptions may be made as necessary. Application
material and program details may be obtained by writing: The Graduate
Coordinator, Department of Biochemistry, School of Medicine, West Virginia
University, Morgantown, WV 26506. The deadline for receipt of applications
and supporting documents by the department is June 1; to be considered for
financial support, applications should be submitted by February 1.
Doctor of Philosophy (Ph.D.)
To assure that all students become familiar with the basic principles of
biochemistry, the first year of the Doctor of Philosophy (Ph.D.) program is
devoted primarily to course work. In addition to formal courses during the
first semester, students participate in a laboratory program which involves
all faculty members. This laboratory experience is designed to illustrate the
basic research skills involved in biochemistry. During the second semester,
students will undertake research in at least two laboratories of their choice.
Upon successful completion of the first year, students will choose a
dissertation research adviser, at which time emphasis will be placed on
research. During the second year, specialized courses in biochemistry will be
offered as the students continue their research programs. During subsequent
years, the students emphasize independent thesis research, and a few formal
courses are taken.
An essential component of the Ph.D. program is participation in depart-
mental journal clubs and seminars. Both students and faculty participate,
40 BIOCHEMISTRY
thus students learn to effectively organize and present research material to a
large group of people.
Completion of the Ph.D. program is realized when the student successfully
presents the research results to both the Department of Biochemistry and a
graduate advisory committee. Typically, four years are required to realize
this goal.
Master of Science (M.S.)
The Department of Biochemistry offers the thesis master's degree. This
program involves completion of a master's research project in addition to
formal course work. Two to three years are generally required to complete the
M.S. program.
Research and Instruction
Research Areas— Hormonal regulation of metabolism. Structure and
function of nucleic acids. Chemistry of enzymes and serum proteins. Structure
of connective tissue. Nutritional oncology. Secretory mechanisms. Biogenesis
of membranes. Regulation of gene expression.
Biochemistry (Bioch.)
231. Genera] Biochemistry. I. 7 hr. PR: General chemistry, organic chemistry. (For
medical students; others by consent.) Consists of seven main lectures, one clinical
correlation lecture, and one problem session per week.
239. Clinical Chemical Techniques. II. 4 hr. PR: Bioch. 139, 231 or equiv. (Primarily for
medical technology students; open to other qualified students by consent.)
305. General Biochemistry. II. 4 hr. PR: Inorganic chemistry, organic chemistry, and
consent. (For dental and graduate students.) Lecture, conference, and demonstra-
tion.
399. Special Topics. I, II. 1-2 hr. PR: Consent. Journal Club, Teaching and Laboratory
Rotations.
490. Teaching Practicum / and II. 1-3 hr. Consent of chairperson. Supervised practice in
college teaching of biochemistry. Graded as S or U.
491. Advanced Study. I, II. 1-6 hr. PR: Consent. Physical techniques in biochemistry;
nucleic acids and protein biosynthesis; enzymology and protein chemistry;
metabolic regulation (each topic— one semester; offered alternate years). Designed
primarily to provide a background for students who will do research in biochem-
istry and molecular biology. (Nucleic Acids— Fall, 1987; Cell Biology— Spring,
1988; Metabolic Regulation— Fall 1988; Enzymology— Spring, 1989.)
496. Graduate Seminar. I, II. 1 hr. PR: Consent. Presentation and discussion of special
topics.
497. Research. I, II, S. 1-15 hr. PR: Consent.
BIOCHEMISTRY 41
BIOLOGY
Leah A. Williams, Chairperson of the Department
200 Brooks Hall
Degrees Offered: M.S., Ph.D.
Graduate Faculty: Members Blaydes, Clarkson, DeCosta, Gallagher, Garbutt, Katula,
Keller, Kotarski, Lang, McGraw, Marshall, Quinlan, Schein, Sutter, and Williams.
The Department of Biology offers graduate studies leading to the degrees
of Doctor of Philosophy and Master of Science. The Doctor of Philosophy
degree is offered in the area of cellular and molecular biology with research
concentration in the areas of gene regulation and transcriptional control
during development; repair to DNA damaged by radiation and chemicals;
positional effect on gene expression in drosophilia; cellular and molecular
bases of regulation of cell proliferation; pheromonal communication. The
Master of Science provides specialization in population genetics, plant
ecology, environmental plant systematics, plankton ecology, environmental
ecology, and animal behavior as well as in cellular and molecular biology.
Each degree requires completion of an original research project which
represents the principal theme about which the graduate program is construc-
ted. Students may work toward an advanced degree only with the approval of
the department.
Master of Science (M.S.)
Applicants for the master of science program in biology must show at the
minimum the equivalent of a bachelor's degree from an accredited institution,
an undergraduate grade-point average of 3.0, a 50th percentile ranking for the
verbal and 50th percentile ranking for the quantitative sections of the
Graduate Record Examination; an adequate science background, which
normally includes one year of physics and two years of chemistry; and a
sufficient knowledge in biology as reflected in scores normally greater than
the 50th percentile on all three sections of the advanced Biology Test of the
GRE. Applicants are requested to submit an essay describing past research
experience and expectations for career goals. Three letters of recommendation
from individuals familiar with the applicant's academic performance are
required as well as the official transcript from all colleges or universities
attended as an undergraduate. The graduate committee of the department
reviews the applicant's records and makes the decision to admit or reject the
applicant.
The WVU general requirements for the master of science degree are
outlined elsewhere in the graduate catalog. Students in the biology M.S.
program may apply up to 6 hours of research credit toward the 30-hour
requirement; the remaining 24 hours of credit must be earned in graduate
courses which reflect a diversified exposure to biology. The establishment of
an advisory committee and the generation of a program of study are explained
in detail in the department's Graduate Student Handbook. A final oral
examination is administered by the advisory committee after the program of
study has been completed and the thesis has been submitted.
Doctor of Philosophy (Ph.D.)
The program for the degree of doctor of philosophy concentrating in
cellular and molecular biology reflects a flexible, research-oriented approach
geared to develop the interests, capabilities, and potentials of mature
students. Applicants must have met all the entrance requirements for the M.S.
42 BIOLOGY
program. In addition, each applicant must find a sponsor from among the
department's graduate faculty. Usually the sponsor will subsequently serve
as the student's major adviser. Acceptance into the Ph.D. program is by vote
of the Graduate Admissions Committee. The admissions committee insures
that all entrance requirements are met or that provisions have been made to
remedy the deficiencies, and that facilities and personnel are adequate to
support the program to a successful conclusion.
Each student admitted to the Ph.D. program works under the close
supervision of a faculty adviser and an advisory committee, both of which
must be approved by the graduate committee; details on the composition and
establishment of an advisory committee are available in the Graduate
Student Handbook. Students must have a program of study formulated and
approved by their advisory committee and by the graduate committee within
15 months of entering the Ph.D. program; all deficiencies must have been
removed earlier. Significant deviations from an established program of study
require approval from the advisory committee and the graduate committee.
The advisory committee is responsible for overseeing the progress of the
student and for administering and judging performance in the several
required examinations; it insures that all Department of Biology, College of
Arts and Sciences, and University requirements are met during the course of
the student's study program. The program of study outlines the research to be
conducted and specifies the courses to be taken in support of the proposed
research. Doctoral candidates enroll in basic graduate courses, which present
the essentials of the specialty at an advanced level; specific details are
available in the Graduate Student Handbook. In addition to the designated
courses required of all students in the specialty area, the program of study
includes additional courses tailored to meet the individual needs of each
student. Thus, no two students are likely to have identical programs of study.
Students must successfully complete a series of three written and oral
intermediate examinations in order to be promoted to candidacy. The first, a
dissertation proposal examination, consists of a written dissertation research
proposal submitted to the advisory committee and to the graduate committee
for approval. Thereafter, the proposed research is presented orally in the form
of a departmental seminar. The next is a series of written qualifying
examinations Each member of the student's advisory committee contributes
questions to the overall test, and performance is judged by all. The written
qualifying examination is followed by an oral examination designed to
determine the student's ability to deal with a specific area of research
(approved by the advisory committee) not directly related to his/her own
research proposal; the student must present a public seminar on the topic and
be prepared to answer questions on any matter related to the topic. Judgment
is based on presentation style, demonstrated understanding of the topic,
synthesis, creativity, and scholarship.
The three intermediate examinations are usually taken during the third,
fourth, and fifth semesters of the program. In the event the student does not
pass an examination, the student may repeat the examination during the
following semester; a second failure leads to termination in the program.
Successful passage of the three intermediate examinations leads to promotion
to candidacy, wherein the student may concentrate fully upon the dissertation
research and prepare for the final examination. The final examination
consists of the submission of a completed and acceptable written dissertation,
an oral dissertation defense, and the presentation of a formal departmental
seminar covering the dissertation research.
BIOLOGY 43
Biology (Biol.)
201. History of Biology. I. 3 hr. PR: Biol. 1, 3 and 2, 4 or equiv. History of development of
biological knowledge, with philosophical and social backgrounds.
209. Topics and Problems in Biology. I, II, S. 1-4 hr. (May be repeated for max. of 6 hr.)
PR: Permit required. Topics and problems in contemporary biology. All topics or
problems must be selected in consultation with the instructor.
211. Advanced Cellular /Molecular Biology. II. 3 hr. PR: Biol. 16 or 104 or consent.
Advanced study of fundamental cellular activities and their underlying molecular
processes.
212. Advanced Cellular/Molecular Biology— Laboratory. II. 1 hr. PR or Cone: Biol. 211
or consent. Experimental approaches to the study of cellular systems. 1 hr. lab.
214. Molecular Basis of Cellular Growth. I. 3 hr. PR: Biol. 16 or 104 or consent. Study of
the integration of molecular events as they regulate the growth and division of
cells. Topics include: hormones as cell effectors, control of gene expression, and
the cancer cell as a model system.
216. Cell and Molecular Biology Methods. I. 3 hr. PR: Biol. 16 or 104 or consent.
Introduction to the theory and application of basic analytical tools used in
molecular biology. Selected topics included are: hydrodynamic methods, chroma-
tography, electrophoresis, and general laboratory methods. [Offered in Fall of
even years.)
219. Introduction to Recombinant DNA Technology. I. 4 hr. PR: Biol. 16 or 104 or
consent. An introductory course covering the basic principles and techniques of
recombinant DNA technology. Includes molecular cloning, isolation of plasmid
DNA, agarose/acrylamide gel electrophoresis, restriction enzyme mapping, nucleic
acid hybridization, and DNA sequencing.
231. Animal Behavior. I. 4 hr. PR: Biol. 1, 3 and 2, 4 or 15, Psych. 1, or consent.
Introduction to animal behavior (ethology) emphasizing the biological bases and
evolution of individual and social behaviors; laboratory includes independent
investigation of behavioral phenomena.
232. Physiological Psychology. I. 3 hr. PR: 9 hr. psychology, behavior, physiology, or
graduate standing. Introduction to physiological mechanisms and the neural basis
of behavior. (Also listed as Psych. 232.)
233. Behavioral Ecology. I. 3 hr. PR: Biol. 18 or consent. Consideration of the influences
of environmental factors on the short- and long-term regulation, control, and
evolution of the behaviors of animals. [Offered in Fall of even years.)
234. Physiology of Animal Behavior. II. 3 hr. PR: Biol. 231 or consent. Explores the way
behavior is controlled in a wide variety of animals so that commonalities and
varieties of neural and endocrine mechanisms may be better understood. [Offered
in Spring of even years.)
235. Primate Behavior. II. 3 hr. PR: Biol. 1, 3 and 2, 4 or 15 or consent. Primates as they
exist in their natural habitats, as they suggest clues to human behavior and the
evolution of behavior. Case studies and comparative primate behavior of prosim-
ians to monkeys, to apes, to human hunters and gatherers. (Also listed as Soc. 8rA.
257.)
240. Methods in Ecology and Biogeochemistry. II. 3 hr. PR: Biol. 18 or consent.
Introduction to the theory and application of basic analytical tools used in ecology
and biogeochemistry. Topics include sampling of terrestrial and aquatic organisms
and their environment, and chemical analyses of biological materials. [Offered in
Spring of odd years.)
44 BIOLOGY
242. Acid Precipitation on Aquatic Ecosystems. II. 3 hr. PR: Biol. 1, 3 and 2, 4, or Biol. 15,
or equiv. Acid precipitation and its effects on freshwater ecosystems including all
biological communities as well as overall effects on system functions and studies
to assess the recovery from whole lake treatments.
243. Plant Ecology. I. 4 hr. PR: Biol. 1, 3 and 2, 4, or 18, or consent. Environmental and
ecological relationships of plants.
246. Limnology. I. 4 hr. PR: Biol. 1, 3 and 2, 4, or 18, or consent. Physical, chemical, and
biological characteristics of inland waters with an introduction to the principles of
biological productivity.
247. Aquaculture. I. 3 hr. PR: Biol. 1, 3 and 2, 4, or 15, or consent. An introduction to the
farming and husbandry of freshwater and marine organisms. (Overnight field
trips are voluntary. J (Offered in Fall of odd years.)
250. Aquatic Seed Plants. I. 3 hr. PR: Biol. 1, 3 and 2, 4, or 18, or consent. Classification,
ecology, and economic importance of aquatic seed plants.
251. Principles of Evolution. I. 3 hr. PR: Biol. 1, 3 and 2, 4, or 15, 16, 17, 18, or consent.
Introduction to the study of evolution.
252. Flora of West Virginia. II. 3 hr. PR: Biol. 1, 3 and 2, 4, or consent. Consideration of
the native plant life of the state.
253. Structure of Vascular Plants. II. 4 hr. PR: Biol. 1, 3 and 2, 4, or 18, or PI. Sc. 52, or
consent. Development and evolution of vegetative and reproductive structures of
vascular plants.
254. Plant Geography. II. 3 hr. PR: Biol. 1, 3 and 2, 4, or 15, or consent. Study of plant
groupings and worldwide distribution of plants.
255. Invertebrate Zoology. II. 4 hr. PR: Biol. 1, 3 and 2, 4, or 18. Advanced study of
animals without backbones.
256. Ornithology. II. 3 hr. PR: Biol. 1, 3 and 2, 4, or 18, or consent. Lecture and laboratory
studies on ancestry, evolution, topography, anatomy and physiology, systematics,
behavior, migration, and ectoparasites of birds. Field studies will be limited in
scope. (Also listed as W. Man. 122. J
257. Ichthyology. II. 3 hr. PR: Biol. 1, 3 and 2, 4, or 18, or consent. Internal and external
structure of fishes, their systematic and ecological relationships, and their
distribution in time and space. (Dissection kit required.)
258. Mammalogy. II. 3 hr. PR: Biol. 18 or W. Man. 224 or consent. Mammals and their
biological properties with emphasis on life history, ecology, and distribution of
regional forms. (Also listed as W. Man. 225. )
259. General Parasitology. II. 4 hr. PR: Biol. 1, 3 and 2, 4, or 18, or consent. Introduction
to the biology of parasites. (Dissection kit required.] (Also listed as M. Bio. 224.)
260. Plant Development. I. 4 hr. PR: Biol. 15, 16, 17, and 18, and organic chemistry or
biochemistry, or consent. Experimental studies of plant growth and development.
261. Comparative Anatomy. I. 4 hr. PR: Biol. 15, 16, 17, and 18, or consent. A functional
and evolutionary study of vertebrate structure. (Dissection kit required.]
262. Vertebrate Embryology. II. 4 hr. PR: Biol. 15, 16, 17, and 18, or consent. An
experimental and descriptive analysis of vertebrate development.
263. Vertebrate Microanatomy. II. 5 hr. PR: Biol. 15, 16, 17, and 18, or consent.
Structural and functional approach to the study of tissues and organs of
vertebrates.
BIOLOGY 45
268. Physiology of the Endocrines. I. 3 hr. PR: Biol. 15, 16, 17, and 18, or consent.
Regulation of the organs of internal secretions, and mechanisms of action of the
hormones produced.
269. Physiology of the Endocrines— Laboratory. I. 1 hr. PR or Cone: Biol 268.
Experimental techniques used in study of the endocrine system.
270. General Animal Physiology. I. 3 hr. PR: Biol. 15, 16, 17, and 18, or consent.
In-depth, current treatment of physiological principles which operate at various
levels of biological organization in animals of diverse taxonomic relationships.
Understanding is developed from background lectures and student analysis in
discussion sessions of research literature.
271. Genera] Animal Physiology— Laboratory. I. 1 hr. PR or Cone: Biol. 270. After
learning basic techniques, students are provided the opportunity to design,
execute, and report on an independent research project in physiology.
309. Topics and Problems in Biology. I, II, S. 1-4 hr. PR: Consent. Topics and problems
in contemporary biology, to be selected in consultation with instructor.
311. Biology Seminar. I, II. 1 hr. Discussions and presentations of general interest to
biologists.
315. Molecular Basis of Virology. I. 3 hr. PR: Biol. 16 or equiv., or consent. Lectures on
bacterial, animal, and plant viruses; their structure, replication, and interaction
with host cells. Discussion of the contributions virology has made to the
understanding of molecular mechanisms in biology.
340. Ecosystem Dynamics. I. 3 hr. PR: Biol. 18 or equiv. Studies of modern approaches
to ecosystem analysis. Emphasis will be on energy and material transfers.
Approach will be holistic.
345. Fisheries Science. II. 4 hr. PR: Biol. 257 or equiv., or consent. Population dynamics
in relation to principles and techniques of fish management. [Offered in Spring of
even years.)
355. Advanced Plant Systematics 1. II. 3 hr. PR: Biol. 151 or equiv. Taxonomy of
pteridophytes, gymnosperms, and monocotyledons.
356. Advanced Plant Systematics 2. II. 3 hr. PR: Biol. 151 or equiv. Taxonomy of
dicotyledons.
362. Developmental Biology. I. 3 hr. PR: Biol. 262 or equiv., organic chemistry or
biochemistry, or consent. The molecular and cellular basis of differentiation and
morphogenesis. [Offered in Fall of odd years.)
364. Advanced Plant Physiology. I, II. 3 hr. PR: Biol. 169 or equiv., organic chemistry,
general physics, and consent. Advanced studies of plant processes including
recent advances in the field. I. Second Semester, odd-numbered years— Water
relations and mineral nutrition and translocation. II. First Semester, odd-
numbered years— Plant growth and development. III. Second Semester, even-
numbered years — Environmental physiology.
497. Research. I, II, S. 1-15 hr.
46 BIOLOGY
BIOMEDICAL SCIENCES— MARSHALL UNIVERSITY
Frederick J. Lotspeich, Coordinator of the Program
Marshall University Medical Education Building, 1542 Spring Valley Dr.,
Huntington, WV 25704
Degree Offered: Ph.D.
Graduate Faculty: Members Belshe, Berk, DeMesquita, Fenger, Gruetter, Kasvinsky,
Larson, McCumbee, Moore, Mufson, Rankin, Reichenbecher, Valentovic, Wang, and
Wright. Associate Members Brown, Fix, Guyer, Lotspeich, and Moat.
The Basic Science Departments of Marshall University School of Medicine
offer a program of study conjointly with West Virginia University which
leads to the degree of Doctor of Philosophy in the Biomedical Sciences. The
work for this degree is done on the Marshall University campus in Huntington,
West Virginia, with the degree awarded by West Virginia University.
The primary aim of the program is to graduate doctoral students who are
broadly based in the biomedical sciences, but who have definite interests and
special training in anatomy, biochemistry, microbiology, pharmacology, or
physiology. The program is designed to be flexible and research oriented in
order to prepare a student for a career in one of the areas of academic or
industrial biomedical science.
Admission. Students who wish to enroll in the Doctor of Philosophy
program must apply for admission through the Marshall University Graduate
School. They must meet the admission requirements of West Virginia
University, the Marshall University Graduate School, and the Graduate
Study Committee of the Marshall University School of Medicine. Interested
persons should contact the Biomedical Program Coordinator, Department of
Biochemistry, Marshall University School of Medicine, Huntington, WV
25701.
Applicants to the Doctor of Philosophy in Biomedical Sciences program
must possess a baccalaureate degree with undergraduate-level course work
including: 1 year of general biology, 1 year of general physics, 1 year of
introductory chemistry, and 1 year of organic chemistry, all with associated
laboratories. Although not required for admission, undergraduate course
work in calculus and physical chemistry is desirable as it may be prerequisite
for advanced course work in certain areas of specialization.
Applicants should submit to the Biomedical Program Coordinator three
letters of recommendation and Graduate Record Examination scores (aptitude
and advanced). In addition, transcripts and an admission application must be
sent to the Marshall University Office of Admissions, Huntington, WV 25701.
Applicants who already possess a Master of Science in Biomedical
Sciences, or equivalent experience, are eligible to apply for full admission
directly into the Doctor of Philosophy program in Biomedical Sciences. The
requirements for full admission into the program are essentially the same as
those as those required for award of the Master of Science in Biomedical
Sciences with the exception that a requirement for a master's thesis may be
waived.
Applicants who do not possess a Master of Science in Biomedical Science,
or equivalent experience, but who do meet all of the other requirements listed
above can be provisionally accepted into the doctoral program. Provisional
acceptance requires the student to successfully complete the master's course
work prior to full acceptance.
Program Requirements. Every student must take courses in cellular and
molecular biology, statistics, and seminar. In addition, each student, with
approval of his/her advisory committee, must successfully complete at least
BIOMEDICAL SCIENCES-MARSHALL UNIVERSITY 47
one basic course (minimum 4 credit hours) in a minimum of three basic
biomedical science departments. Elective courses, chosen with concurrence of
the student's advisory committee, will provide the remainder of the required
credit hours (a minimum of 18).
Upon admission to the doctoral program, the student's doctoral advisory
committee will be formed. The doctoral advisory committee consisting of six
members will periodically review the student's progress as well as act as the
examination committee. One member, the student's research adviser, will
serve as the committee chairperson. One other member from the student's
major department and two from other departments (one each from the
student's two minor departments) will be recommended to the Marshall
Graduate School Dean for appointment to the committee by the student's
research adviser. The two remaining members of the advisory committee will
be appointed from faculty in appropriate departments at West Virginia
University.
The doctoral student's plan of study and research will be guided by the
student's advisory committee. Course work will consist of seminar each
semester and electives as directed by the student's advisory committee. After
satisfactory completion of all general and specialty course work requirements,
the student must successfully complete a preliminary qualifying examination
to be admitted to candidacy for the Doctor of Philosophy degree.
The preliminary qualifying examination, the most rigorous and compre-
hensive examination that the student must take, will be given at the discretion
of the student's advisory committee and must be completed by the end of the
second year or 48 credit hours after full admission into the doctoral degree
program. This examination will consist of both written and oral portions.
After admission to candidacy and completion of course work and
research, the student must prepare and successfully defend in a final
examination a dissertation of his/her research. Satisfactory performance on
the examination requires approval by five members of the student's advisory
committee, which then recommends award of the Doctor of Philosophy
degree.
To receive a degree, all students in the Biomedical Sciences graduate
program must have a scholastic grade-point average of not less than 3.0 (B) in
all graduate work completed in the program. All grades of C or less are
counted in computing averages, but no more than 6 credit hours of C, and no
credit hours below C, may be applied toward degree requirements. Credit/No
Credit hours may be included toward degree requirements, but they will not
affect the quality grade-point computation.
Residence. The doctoral program will normally require 2xk to 3 years of
full-time graduate work beyond the M.S. degree. This must include a
minimum of two semesters of residence in full-time graduate study at
Marshall University. In addition, all doctoral students in this program,
regardless of receipt of financial assistance, must participate in the teaching
and research programs as an integral part of their advanced training.
Research. Experimental neuroanatomy/sensorimotor pathways, hypo-
thalamic pathways, mammalian male reproductive morphology, retinoids
and vitamin D interactions, physical anthropology, neuropathology, autora-
diography and axonal transport, lipid metabolism, mechanisms of enzyme
regulation, retinoids and carcinogenesis, estrogen receptors in human breast
cancer, structure and function of mammalian ribosomes, measle virus
proteins, microbial genetics, B vitamins, cyclic nucleotides, calcium in
hypertension, metabolism of monamine oxidase inhibitors, behavioral neuro
48 BIOMEDICAL SCIENCES -MARSHALL UNIVERSITY
pharmacology, sleep physiology, respiratory mechanics, cartilage metabolism,
human aging and hypertension and Ca>+.
Courses of Instruction: For courses of instruction, see the Marshal]
University Graduate School Catalog (contact: Office of Admissions, Marshall
University, Huntington, WV 25701).
BUSINESS ADMINISTRATION
Robert S. Maust, Director of Master of Business Administration Program
302 Armstrong Hall
M.B.A. Degree Program, College of Business and Economics, West Virginia University,
P.O. Box 6025, Morgantown, WV 26506-6025
Telephone: (304) 293-5408
Degree Offered: M.B.A.
Graduate Faculty: Members Brewer, Coats, Cook, Fuller, Mansour, Riley, Rose,
Schaupp, Scherr, G. Smith, and Wilson. Associate Members Abbott, Beggs, Bone,
Britt, Gunter, Harpell, Lane, Lin, Logar, McClung, Maust, Neidermeyer, Ponzurick,
Pushkin, Rahmatian, Shaw, Speaker, Sypolt, Titard, Twomey, Wilner, and Wilson.
The Master of Business Administration (M.B.A.) program is accredited
by the American Assembly of Collegiate Schools of Business (AACSB) and is
the only M.B.A. program in West Virginia so accredited. It is offered as a
full-time, day-class program in Morgantown and as a part-time, weekend-
class program in Morgantown, Wheeling, and Parkersburg. The standards of
excellence that support accreditation by the AACSB are maintained at all
instructional sites.
The M.B.A. degree program recognizes the need for a manager of the
future to be able to anticipate and recognize change and then manage
resources advantageously in that environment. Thus, the curriculum empha-
sizes a general, broad-based approach to graduate educatiort in management
which provides the student with the qualitative and quantitative skills
necessary for a manager to succeed in such an environment. The program
develops a managerial perspective that is primarily line as opposed to staff
oriented and is relevant to those in both private and public organizations.
The plan of study requires a total of 48 semester hours of graduate credit.
The program is designed for individuals with varying educational and
professional backgrounds. No prior course work in business administration
is required as a condition of admission to the program. No master's thesis is
required for completion of the degree.
The M.B.A. degree program is completed in 13V2 months of full-time study
on the Morgantown campus. A full-time student can enter the program only
on July 1 of each year and graduates in mid-August of the following year.
Students may enter the part-time M.B.A. program in any semester. A
minimum of three years is required for the part-time student to complete the
program, assuming that the student takes at least two courses in each of the
three semesters per year.
To gain admission into the Master of Business Administration (M.B.A.)
program, an applicant must have a bachelor's degree (in any field) from an
accredited institution and a grade-point average (GPA) of at least 3.0 based on
the last 60 hours of undergraduate and/or graduate work completed. In
addition, the applicant must have a minimum score on the Graduate
Management Admission Test (GMAT) of at least 500. Applicants with a GPA
below 3.0 (or GMAT scores below 500) must show correspondingly higher
GMAT (or GPA) achievement. Depending on the number of qualified
BUSINESS ADMINISTRATION 49
applicants, preference is given to those with GMAT scores above 540.
Significant experience at increasing levels of responsibility and evidence of
leadership potential (such as class officer) is given consideration. Such
information should be summarized and attached to the application for
admission. No action is taken on an application for admission until a GMAT
score is submitted. Since GMAT is given only in January, March, June, and
October, an applicant should take the test no later than March for July
admission.
In addition to the above requirements, international student applicants
are required to submit a "Test of English As a Foreign Language" (TOEFL)
score in the range of 570-600 or above. International students may be required
to take up to 6 hours of prerequisite course work in English as a foreign
language, such as EFL 53, 54, or 55.
Applications for admission to the M.B. A. program and official transcripts
of all prior academic work should be submitted to the WVU Office of
Admissions and Records as early as possible. Applicants who have attended
institutions other than WVU must request the registrar or records office of
those institutions to forward a complete official transcript directly to the
WVU Office of Admissions and Records. The absolute deadline for receipt of
applications and transcripts at the Office of Admissions and Records is two
months prior to the admission date. Thus, the deadline for July admission is
April 30.
Master of Business Administration (M.B.A.)
The M.B.A. degree program requires 48 hours of graduate credit,
including the following courses:
Preparatory Modules:
Economics 319 — Applied Business and Economics Statistics, 3 hr.
Management 302— Introduction to Management Science, 3 hr.
Foundation Courses:
Accounting 311 — Financial Accounting for Decision Making, 3 hr.
Business Law 311 — Legal and Regulatory Environment, 2 hr.
Economics 317 — Economic Decision Making, 2 hr.
Finance 311 — Managerial Finance, 2 hr.
Management 301 — Organizational Behavior and Ethics, 3 hr.
Management 311— Management Information Systems, 3 hr.
Marketing 311 — Marketing Management, 2 hr.
Application Courses:
Accounting 321— Managerial Control, 2 hr.
Economics 318 — Economic Policy, 2 hr.
Finance 321 — Corporate Financial Administration, 3 hr.
Management 321— Operations Management/Applied Quantitative
Analysis, 3 hr.
Management 325— Seminar in Organizational Processes, 3 hr.
Marketing 321— Marketing Strategy, 3 hr.
Integration and Elective Courses:
Management 351— Policy and Strategy 2 hr.
Seminar — 3 hr.
Seminar — 3 hr.
Selected graduate courses may be waived depending on an individual's
undergraduate degree and the recency of the degree; however, other graduate
courses must be substituted for waived courses.
50 BUSINESS ADMINISTRATION
The M.B. A. requires that the candidate achieve a cumulative grade-point
average of at least 3.0 on all work counting toward the graduate degree. A
Regular Graduate Student whose cumulative grade-point average falls below
2.75 will be placed on probation. If the average is not brought up to 2.75 by the
end of the following semester, the student will be suspended from the
program. A grade below C in any course taken while enrolled as a graduate
student will result in suspension from the program. In addition, the student
must maintain a 3.0 average in all work counting toward the graduate degree.
Students in the part-time program are subject to the same requirements
and restrictions as students enrolled in the full-time program. Classes in the
part-time program are taught by the same graduate faculty members as teach
in the full-time program. The M.B. A. program is offered in its entirety at
off-campus locations in Parkersburg and Wheeling. There is no requirement
that an off-campus student travel to Morgantown; however, Saturday classes
in Morgantown increase the number of courses available to off-campus
students in any semester. Off-campus classes normally meet on Friday
evenings (7:00 to 10:00) and Saturdays (9:00 a.m. to 2:00 p.m. or 9:00 a.m. to
4:00 p.m.). A 3 semester-hour course normally meets for 5 weekends and a 2
semester-hour course for 3 weekends. Part-time classes in Morgantown meet
on Saturdays (9:00 a.m. to 4:30 p.m.) for six weekends (3 semester-hour
course) or four weekends (2 semester-hour course). Part-time classes may
have examinations scheduled on weekday evenings.
Complete information about the M.B. A. program may be obtained by
contacting the Director of Graduate Programs.
Accounting (Acctg.)
200. Special Topics. 1-4 hr. PR: Acctg. Ill or consent. Special topics relevant to
accounting. (Maximum of 9 semester hours in any or all courses numbered 200
offered by the College of Business and Economics may be applied toward
bachelor's and master's degrees.)
210. Advanced Accounting. 3 hr. PR: Acctg. 112. Accounting for partnerships,
consolidations, foreign exchanges, and governmental (nonprofit) entities.
211. Accounting Systems. 3 hr. PR: C.S. 5, Acctg. 112 or consent. Analysis of data-
processing fundamentals and information systems analysis, design, and imple-
mentation, including necessary computer hardware and software components
with particular reference to accounting information systems and the controls
necessary therein.
213. Income Tax Accounting. 3 hr. PR: Acctg. Ill or 115 or 116 or consent. Tax laws and
the investment and business decisions they affect. Taxes are presented in
meaningful relationships in order to form a general pattern of knowledge that is
easier understood.
214. Income Tax Accounting. 3 hr. PR: Acctg. 213 or consent. The study of federal
income tax treatment of partnerships, corporations and estates, and the treatment
of those property transfers subject to the Federal Gift Tax, together with an
introduction of tax research and tax procedure.
216. Advanced Managerial Accounting. 3 hr. PR: Acctg. Ill and Acctg. 115 or 116.
Special problems in cost accounting, including tax planning, inventory control,
and decision models on C. P. A. /CM. A. examination. Selected problems and cases
will be used.
217. Auditing Theory. 3 hr. PR or Cone: Acctg. 210. Auditing fundamentals; objectives,
ethics, statistical samplings, standards and procedures. Emphasis on FASB and
SAS disclosures.
BUSINESS ADMINISTRATION 51
218. Auditing Practice. 3 hr. PR: Consent. Application of auditing theory and procedures,
with emphasis on decisions which invoke judgment and are important in
independent audits; audit working papers and reports; case studies.
224. Advanced Accounting Problems. 3 hr. PR: Minimum of 18 hr. in accounting with
an average grade of B or higher. Analysis and solution of representative C.P.A.
problems.
230. Advanced Accounting Theory. 3 hr. PR: Acctg. 112, 115, and consent. Critical
analysis of accounting concepts and standards with emphasis on their origin,
development, and significance.
311. Financial Accounting for Decision Making. 3 hr. PR: Consent. Basic accounting
assumptions and standards underlying financial statements, the significance of
financial statement measurements, and the relevance of such data for planning
and control. Emphasis on financial statement and cash-flow analysis.
321. Managerial Control. 2 hr. PR: Acctg. 311 or consent. Managerial accounting
concepts and techniques used for planning and control. Interpretation and use of
internal accounting reports. The use of accounting information in decision making.
Emphasis on development of an effective management control system.
325. Accounting Information Systems. 2 hr. PR: Consent. The design and use of
computerized accounting information systems to support the transaction proces-
sing, reporting and decision-making systems of most organizations, including the
use and critical analysis of currently available accounting packages.
330. Financial Accounting Theory and Practice. 3 hr. PR: Acctg. 112. Comprehensive
examination of financial accounting theory as established by the opinions,
statements and interpretations of professional organizations with special emphasis
on their application and problem solving.
332. Governmental and Nonprofit Accounting. 3 hr. PR: Acctg. 112. Fund accounting
and control in governmental and nonprofit entities; identification and control of
cost centers; cost analysis and cost centers; cost analysis and cost finding, and
planning and control of operations and resources.
333. Income Taxes and Business Decisions. 3 hr. PR: Acctg. 213. Advanced federal
income-tax problems with emphasis on tax planning for business decisions and
tax research methodology.
335. Computer Systems Auditing. 2 hr. PR: Acctg. 325. The analysis and design of
control systems in a computerized accounting environment. Special emphasis on
evaluating evidence to determine whether a computing system safeguards assets
and maintains data integrity.
338. ControIIership. 3 hr. PR: Manag. 304. Examination of the role of the controller in
large entities in planning, measuring, evaluating, and controlling performance and
in reporting to stockholders and governmental agencies.
340. Reporting Practices and Problems. 3 hr. PR: Consent. Evaluation of financial
reporting practices and trends, including an examination of the reporting require-
ments of the SEC and other regulatory agencies. Practitioners will be used
extensively for class discussion and presentations.
345. Auditing and Professional Accounting Standards. 3 hr. PR: Acctg. 217. Professional
objectives, principles, and standards of auditing; audit reports and related
communications; and case studies of audit sampling, professional ethics, legal
liability and reporting.
349. Seminar in Accounting. 3 hr. PR: Consent.
491. Advanced Study. 1-6 hr.
52 BUSINESS ADMINISTRATION
Business Law (B. Law)
200. Special Topics. 1-4 hr. PR: B. Law 112 or consent. Special topics relevant to
business law. (Maximum of 9 semester hours in any or all courses numbered 200
offered by the College of Business and Economics may be applied toward
bachelor's and master's degrees.)
211. Personnel Relations and the Law. 3 hr. The legal principles guiding employer-
employee relations, including agency law and the law regulating employee health,
safety, compensation and benefits, job opportunity, and labor organizing.
311. LegaJ and Regulatory Environment. 2 hr. PR: Consent. Examination of the legal
environment in which business decisions are made and the response of the legal
environment to change. Familiarization with the role of administrative agencies in
the regulatory process.
491. Advanced Study. 1-6 hr.
Economics (Econ.)
317. Economic Decision Making. 2 hr. PR: Econ. 54 or consent. [Primarily for M.B.A.
students.) Analysis of the firm as an optimizing unit operating in the market place.
Examination of product demand, production and costs, pricing theory and
practices, risk, and capital budgeting.
318. Economic Policy. 2 hr. PR: Econ. 317 or consent. (Primarily for M.B.A. and M.P.A.
students.) Microeconomic analysis of macroeconomic phenomena is considered
with particular attention paid to the reaction by firms to price and interest rate
effects of fiscal and monetary policy.
319. Applied Business and Economics Statistics. 3 hr. PR: Consent. Primary statistical
methods used in business and economics research including hypothesis testing,
estimation, linear regression, time series, and business forecasting. Statistical
computer software is an integral part of the course.
Finance (Fin.)
200. Special Topics. 1-4 hr. PR: Fin. Ill, orFin. 311, orconsent. Special topics relevant
to finance. (Maximum of 9 semester hours in any or all courses numbered 200
offered by the College may be applied toward bachelor's and master's degrees.)
212. Working Capita/ Management. 3 hr. PR: Fin. Ill or Fin. 112, Econ. 125.
Management of current assets and liabilities. Topics include management of cash,
marketable securities, accounts receivable, inventories, trade accounts payable,
and short-term bank borrowings. Decision models are used extensively.
216. Risk Management. 3 hr. PR: Fin. 115 or consent; PR or Coreq.: Fin. 112.
Transferable risks with which the entrepreneur must deal. Emphasis on the
process by which decisions are made for handling these risks, including an
examination of contributions and limitations of insurance system.
220. Social Insurance. 3 hr. PR: Fin. 115 or consent. Our social and political efforts to
provide economic security for the general public. An examination of the parallel
developments of private insurance.
250. Security Analysis and Portfolio Management. 3 hr. PR: Fin. 150 or consent; PR or
Coreq.: Fin. 112. The systematic selection, assessment, and ranking of corporate
securities in a portfolio framework through a synthesis of fundamental analysis,
technical analysis, and random walk.
252. Bank Management. 3 hr. PR: Fin. 251 or consent. An advanced course in
commercial banking involving problems of management of the money position,
loan and investment portfolio, and capital adequacy. The student simulates actual
bank operation, conducts case studies, and analyzes bank performance.
BUSINESS ADMINISTRATION 53
261. Real Estate Appraising. 3 hr. PR: Fin. 161. The appraisal problem, plan the
approach, acquire, classify, analyze and interpret data into an estimate of value by
the cost or replacement approach, income approach and market approach.
262. Real Estate Finance. 3 hr. PR: Fin. Ill, or Fin. 311, or consent. How financing, the
tax system, and supply and demand interact to create values which, when coupled
with investment decision, leads to choosing an investment strategy in real estate.
263. Real Estate Investments/Land Development. 3 hr. PR: Fin. 161 or consent.
Designed to investigate various types of real estate investments including
apartments, office buildings, shopping centers, and residential land developments
with emphasis on financial analysis, profitability analysis, and rates of return.
311. Managerial Finance. 2 hr. PR: Acctg. 311, Econ. 319. Analysis of the standard
financial activities of the firm including: financial planning, structure of financing,
and asset selection. Introduction to microcomputer problem solution.
321. Corporate Financial Administration. 3 hr. PR: Fin. Ill, or Fin. 311, or consent. A
study of theoretical concepts of corporate financial administration and the
application of these concepts to real world case studies.
331. Bank Management. 3 hr. PR or Coreq.: Fin. 311 or consent. (May not be taken for
both undergraduate and graduate credit.) Management of bank funds. Principles
of organization lending and investment. Policy relationships to bank productivity,
organization, and profitability; preparation of financial reports; management of a
simulated bank in a changing environment. [Same as Fin. 251 with the addition of a
research paper.)
335. Money and Capital Markets. 3 hr. PR: Fin. Ill, or Fin. 311, or consent. Advanced
study of money and capital markets, institutions involved, effect of monetary and
fiscal policies on private finance, and detailed study of major managerial problems
of financial institutions.
337. Capital Budgeting. 3 hr. PR: Fin. Ill, or Fin. 311, or consent. Advanced study in
modern techniques and theory of the capital budgeting process. Emphasis is
placed on the application of quantitative models and the methods of handling risk.
349. Seminar in Finance. 3 hr. PR: Fin. 321.
491. Advanced Study. 1-6 hr.
Management (Manag.)
200. Special Topics. 1-4 hr. PR: Consent. Special topics relevant to management.
(Maximum of 9 semester hours in any or all courses numbered 200 offered by the
College may be applied toward bachelor's and master's degrees.)
201. Business Information Systems. 3 hr. PR: Manag. 101 and 105 or consent. Use of
EDP for management control and decision making with emphasis on application in
the functions of finance, marketing, personnel, accounting, and operations
management. 3 hr. lee.
206. Organizational Theory and Analysis. 3 hr. PR: Manag. 105 or consent. Influences
of structure on the behavior and dynamics of the business organization. Attention
on how to be an effective manager.
211. Advanced Production Management. 3 hr. PR: Manag. 111. Integration of quanti-
tative techniques and their application to production problems. Utilizes cases and
projects.
212. Management Science. I. 3 hr. PR: Manag. 105. The study and application of
quantitative methods to business problems in which deterministic conditions
prevail.
54 BUSINESS ADMINISTRATION
216. Personnel Management. 3 hr. PR: Manag. 105. Fundamental principles and
practices related to the procurement, development, maintenance and utilization of
human resources. Focus on areas such as human resource planning, selection,
training, performance appraising, compensation, safety and health, and labor
relations.
217. Personnel and Compensation. 3 hr. PR: Manag. 216 or consent. Designing and
implementing total compensation systems in both private and public sectors. The
emerging elements of total compensation systems are included providing insights
into problems and opportunities for personnel.
218. Focal Pointsin Management. 1-3 hr. PR: Manag. 105. In-depth study of specialized
management subjects, e.g., personnel interviewing, job descriptions, consulting,
or organizational development. (Each subject is self-contained, spans one-third of
a semester, and is valued at 1 credit hour.)
222. Management Science. II. 3 hr. PR: Manag. 212 or consent. The study and
application of quantitative methods to business problems in which probabilistic
conditions prevail.
230. Entrepreneurship. 3 hr. PR: Consent. The role of the entrepreneur in business and
society; includes an analysis of the individual entrepreneur, and investigates the
nature and problems of establishing a new business enterprise.
260. Practicum in Small Business. 3 hr. PR: Consent. A practical training ground in the
identification and solution of small business problems. Through interaction with
the business community, students are exposed to the opportunities and difficulties
of small business entrepreneurship.
301. Organizational Behavior and Ethics. 3 hr. PR: Consent. Interpersonal relation-
ships through which administration becomes effective. Emphasis on human
factors, but influences of economic and technological factors also are considered.
Focus on ethics and importance of harmony between individual needs and
organization goals.
302. Introduction to Management Science. 3 hr. PR: Consent. Study of management
science models and techniques with applications in business decision making
problems. Coverage includes mathematical programming models, decision theory,
simulation, network models, and other current management science topics.
304. Quantitative Business Methods. 3 hr. PR: Consent. Quantitative methods useful to
the professional accountant. Emphasis on techniques which appear on profes-
sional accounting certification examinations.
311. Management Information Systems. 3 hr. PR: Consent. Examines computer
technology, applications, information systems, and performance. Computer system
planning, selection and implementation. Computer impact upon management,
organization, and society from a managerial viewpoint.
321. Operations Management/Applied Quantitative Analysis. 3 hr. PR: Consent.
Review of concepts, techniques, and models encountered in manufacturing and
service operations. Modeling approach and computer applications in operations
management and management science are emphasized.
325. Seminar in Organizational Processes. 3 hr. PR: Consent. Examination of the
dynamics of the successful organization. Emphasis on the organization as an
institution and the role of the manager in the organization. Implications of
international competition will be addressed.
330. Organizational Development. II. 3 hr. PR: Manag. 325. Emphasis on using
knowledge of the behavioral sciences to aid organizations in adjusting to changing
environments. A systems view is employed in order to simultaneously consider
organizational structure, environment and climate, and social awareness.
BUSINESS ADMINISTRATION 55
335. Human Resource Management. 3 hr. PR: Manag. 301. Examination of interrelated
issues in human resource management. Focus on role of human resources,
manpower development, performance measurement, and compensation.
336. Managerial Skills Seminar. 3 hr. PR: Consent. Emphasis on management skills.
Focuses on such topics as stress reduction, power, decision making, conflict
resolution, supportive communication, and employee instruction.
340. Methodology of Management Science. 3 hr. PR: Manag. 300, 302, or consent.
Philosophy, methodology, and applications of management science to decision
making in business functional areas. Extensive use of cases and projects to
integrate topical material with the functional areas of management, marketing,
and finance.
349. Seminar in Management. 1-6 hr. PR: Consent.
351. Policy and Strategy. 3 hr. PR: Consent. Capstone course. Integrates functional
knowledge with strategy formulation and strategy implementation concepts.
Cases of organizations varying in size, national affiliation, and profit orientation
are analyzed with special emphasis on ethics and social responsibility.
491. Advanced Study. 1-6 hr.
Marketing (Mrktg.)
200. Special Topics. S. 1-4 hr. PR: Mrktg. Ill or consent. Special topics relevant to
marketing. (Maximum of 9 semester hours in any or all courses numbered 200
offered by the College may be applied toward bachelor's and master's degrees.)
201. Focal Points in Marketing. 1-3 hr. PR: Mrktg. Ill or consent. In-depth study of
specialized marketing subjects, e.g., franchising, tourism, packaging, or product
development. (Each subject is self-contained, spans one-third of a semester, and is
valued at 1 credit hour.]
203. Sales Management. 3 hr. PR: Mrktg. 114 or consent. Concentrates on the
managerial responsibilities of sales managers for directing, motivating, and
controlling a sales force plus the techniques of selling including handling
objections and closing.
205. Consumer Behavior. 3 hr. PR: Mrktg. Ill or consent. The consumer decision
process in a marketing framework. Emphasis on psychological and sociological
concepts which influence the decision process.
207. Business Logistics Management. 3 hr. PR: Mrktg. 115 or consent. Examination of
transportation, warehousing, materials handling, containerization, inventory
control, purchasing, and warehouse location. Significant use made of problem
solving with analytical tools.
210. Industrial Marketing. 3 hr. PR: Mrktg. Ill or consent. A study of marketing to
three classes of customers: the industrial market, the institutional market, and
governmental agencies.
311. Marketing Management. 2 hr. Introduction to marketing management with
specific emphasis on consumer behavior and market segmentation, product
planning, promotion, distribution, and pricing.
321. Marketing Strategy. 3 hr. PR: Mrktg. 311. Emphasis on formulating a marketing
strategy and developing analytical and decision-making capabilities. Cases will
be used to illustrate specific business situations.
330. Management of Product Development. 3 hr. PR: Mrktg. 321. An advanced analysis
of the problems in the conceptualization, development, and marketing of new
products.
56 BUSINESS ADMINISTRATION
335. Management of Distribution Systems. 3 hr. PR: Mrktg. 321. Advanced analysis of
the design and operations of distribution systems. Topics include distribution
channel selection, administration and control; demand forecasting facility location,
choice and scheduling of transport, and the allocation and control of inventories.
349. Seminar in Marketing. 3 hr.
491. Advanced Study. 1-6 hr.
CHEMICAL ENGINEERING
J. D. Henry, Chairperson of the Department
425 Engineering Sciences Building
Degrees Offered: M.S.Ch.E., M.S.E., Ph.D.
Graduate Faculty: Members Bailie, Cilento, Dadyburjor, Henry, Kono, Shaeiwitz,
Stiller, Turton, Whiting, Yang, and Zondlo.
The Department of Chemical Engineering, with 11 faculty members, 75
undergraduates, and over 30 graduate students, has one of the oldest doctoral-
granting programs in the University. From the initial doctoral degree in 1932,
the graduate course program has been based on advanced chemical engineering
fundamentals, while the research program has reflected a balance of funda-
mental research areas and their application to relevant technological areas
such as coal conversion.
Chemical engineering faculty are presently involved in the following
research areas: biochemical engineering, bioengineering, catalysis, fluid
mechanics, heat transfer, mathematical modeling and simulation, reaction
engineering, separation processes, solution chemistry, and thermodynamics.
These fundamental areas are finding applications in biomass conversion
technology, blood flow, coal gasification and liquefaction, in-situ combustion,
and synthetic fuels.
Faculty members possess a wide variety of industrial experience and are
routinely in contact with their counterparts in industry. This contact with
real engineering problems enables them to convey a practical experience to
students while keeping in perspective many of the fundamental concepts
involved in the graduate program.
During the last 10 years, the chemical engineering faculty have authored
or co-authored 5 books, published 190 journal articles, have been issued 8
patents, made 174 presentations at professional meetings, and supervised the
completion of 95 master's and 19 doctoral degrees. In addition, several faculty
members have written textbooks and taught short courses throughout the
United States.
The department is authorized to admit students to the following degree
programs: Master of Science in Chemical Engineering (M.S.Ch.E.), Master of
Science in Engineering (M.S.E.), and College of Engineering interdisciplinary
Doctor of Philosophy (Ph.D.). Students in these programs must comply with
the rules and regulations as presented in the general requirements for
graduate work in the College of Engineering and in the Department of
Chemical Engineering. Students interested in pursuing work for a master's or
doctoral degree in chemical engineering should contact the department for
copies of the required guidelines. Students should refer to Part 5 of this
catalog for a general description of the graduate programs in engineering.
CHEMICAL ENGINEERING 57
Master of Science in Chemical Engineering (M.S.Ch.E.)
Master of Science in Engineering (M.S.E.)
Admission Requirements. Admission to the M.S.Ch.E. program is restrict-
ed to those holding a baccalaureate degree in chemical engineering or its
equivalent. The M.S.E. program is available to students holding baccalaureate
degrees in other fields of engineering and the physical sciences who wish to
pursue a broad interdisciplinary program relevant to the major graduate
areas administered by the department.
To be admitted as a regular graduate student, an applicant must have a
B.S. degree and a sound record in previous college work with a minimum
3.0/4.0 cumulative grade-point average. Applicants who cannot meet these
conditions may be considered for admission in a conditional category (see
Part 4 of this catalog). Students admitted with deficiencies in their under-
graduate programs are required to take some chemical engineering courses as
prerequisites for graduate courses. These requirements are stated as a
condition for admission.
M.S.Ch.E. candidates should expect to obtain their degree in about 18
months. M.S.E. students typically require I-IV2 years beyond completion of
prerequisite courses.
All M.S. degree candidates are required to perform research and will
follow a planned program which conforms to either of the following outlines:
1. A minimum of 30 semester credit hours, excluding seminar, not more
than 6 of which are in research leading to an acceptable thesis.
2. A minimum of 33 semester credit hours, excluding seminar, not more
than 3 of which are in research leading to an acceptable problem report.
The non-thesis M.S. degree option is not offered by the Department of
Chemical Engineering.
Courses. All students are required to take Ch.E. 301, 344, and 345, and all
full-time students are required to take one credit of journal club/seminar
(Ch.E. 400) for each semester enrolled. The research adviser, in conjunction
with an advisory and examining committee (AEC) to be designated by each
student, will be responsible for following departmental guidelines to determine
the plan of study appropriate to the student's program.
Research Proposal. A written research proposal and oral presentation of
this proposal is required of all M.S. students. This oral defense is administered
by the student's AEC and must be completed by the end of the second semester
of the first year for M.S.Ch.E. candidates, and as soon as possible but not later
than the end of the second semester of the second year for M.S.E. candidates.
Final Examination. All students are required to pass a final oral
examination, administered by their AEC, covering both the thesis or problem
report (depending on the program selected) and related course material.
Doctor of Philosophy (Ph.D.)
A candidate for the degree of Doctor of Philosophy in the Ph.D. program
must comply with the rules and regulations as outlined in the general
requirements for graduate work in engineering and the specific requirements
stated in the departmental guidelines. Students who are interested in
pursuing a Ph.D. degree in the Department of Chemical Engineering should
contact the department for specific information about the interdisciplinary
Ph.D. degree program. (See also Part 4 of this catalog.) A program with a
major in chemical engineering, designed to meet the needs and objectives of
each student, will be developed in consultation with the student's research
58 CHEMICAL ENGINEERING
adviser and advisory and examining committee (AEC). It should be emphasized
that the Ph.D. degree is primarily a research degree and therefore the research
work for a doctoral dissertation should show a high order of originality on the
part of the student and must offer an original contribution to the field of
engineering science.
Admission Requirements. Admission to the Ph.D. program is open to
students who qualify as regular graduate students (see Part 4 of this catalog)
and who have obtained a B.S. or M.S. degree in science or engineering.
Students admitted must have demonstrated an excellent academic
record in previously completed college course work with a minimum cumula-
tive grade-point average of 3.0/4.0. Three letters of recommendation are
required, and GRE scores may be requested by the department. Students who
enter the Ph.D. program should complete the requirements in 2-4 years.
Course Requirements. All B.S. students entering the Ph.D. program are
required to take Ch.E. 301, 344, and 345, while M.S. students entering the
program must demonstrate equivalent courses taken for graduate credit in
their previous work. In addition, all full-time students must take one credit of
seminar/journal club (Ch.E. 400) each semester. For a student admitted
directly after the B.S. degree, the Ph.D. program consists of a minimum of 36
course credit hours, excluding research (Ch.E. 497) and seminar/journal club
(Ch.E. 400). If the student has an M.S. in chemical engineering from WVU, the
program consists of a minimum of 12 course credit hours (excluding Ch.E. 497
and Ch.E. 400). If the student has an M.S. in chemical engineering from
another institution, the program consists of a minimum of 18 course credit
hours (excluding Ch.E. 497 and Ch.E. 400). Students must complete a minor,
consisting of a minimum of 9 semester hours of a coherent set of courses taken
outside the department. These courses may be related to the major research
area. Non-technical courses would be considered only under exceptional
circumstances. Courses at the 200-level may be acceptable. All courses must
be approved by the AEC and the academic adviser. Students must complete
graduate courses with an overall course work average of 3.0 or better
(exclusive of research credits) and complete all Ch.E. courses with an overall
grade-point average of 3.0 (exclusive of research credits). A minimum of 24
graduate credits in dissertation research is required. Also, two semesters of
full-time attendance at West Virginia University, Morgantown campus, is
required to complete the residency requirement.
Qualifying Examination. All students must pass the Ph.D. qualifying
examination given in their first summer at WVU. This examination is
designed to assess the basic competency of students in the chemical
engineering field to determine if they have sufficient knowledge to undertake
independent research.
Original Research Proposition. Within six months of passing the qualifying
examination or of entering the Ph.D. program, whichever is later, the student
must successfully defend an original research proposition in an oral exam-
ination. The written proposition, developed by the student alone, remains the
intellectual property of the student and must be on a topic unrelated to the
student's own research work for the dissertation.
Dissertation Research Proposal. A student must receive acceptance of a
written dissertation research proposal and must also successfully defend this
proposal to the student's AEC. This requirement must be completed within
six months of passing the qualifying examination or of entering the Ph.D.
program, whichever is later. The research work for the doctoral dissertation
CHEMICAL ENGINEERING 59
should show a high order of originality on the part of the student and must
offer an original contribution to the field of engineering science.
Candidacy. A student who has successfully completed all course work,
passed the qualifying examination, and successfully defended the original
research proposition and research proposal is defined as one who is a
candidate for the Ph.D. degree.
Final Examination. In order to complete the Ph.D. requirements, a student
must pass a final oral examination on the results embodied in the dissertation.
This examination is open to the public, and in order to evaluate critically the
student's competency, may include testing on material in related fields, as
deemed necessary by the AEC. In addition, since the Ph.D. degree is primarily
a research degree that embodies the results of an original research proposal
and represents a significant contribution to the scientific literature, the
student must submit a manuscript on this research to the AEC.
Chemical Engineering (Ch. E.)
224. Process Development. 3 hr. PR: Chem. 134, 144; Ch. E. Ill, 145, or consent. Coal
conversion process systems from the modified unit operations-unit process
concept. Thermodynamics and kinetics in evaluation of system requirements and
performance. 3 hr. rec.
231. Mathematical Methods in Chemical Engineering. 3 hr. PR: Math. 18. Classification
and solution of mathematical problems important in chemical engineering.
Treatment and interpretation of engineering data. Analytical methods for ordinary
and partial differential equations including orthogonal functions and integral
transforms. 3 hr. rec.
251. Metallurgical Engineering. 3 hr. PR: Phys. 12. Principles of production of metals
and alloys, plastic deformation of metals, corrosion, and metal failure. 3 hr. rec.
258. Polymers and Polymer Processing. 3 hr. PR: Chem. 134, Ch. E. 110. Polymers and
their handling. Properties of macromolecules as influenced by molecular weight,
polymerization methods, plastics technology, polymer engineering, polymerization
kinetics, polymer characterization, commercial production processes, injection
molding processes, blow molding and composites. 3 hr. lee.
270. Strategy of Process Engineering. 3 hr. PR: Ch. E. Ill or consent. Latest theories of
process design and process optimization, proven through regular use by practicing
engineers, are applied to the major problems of process engineering. 3 hr. rec.
280. Chemical Engineering Problems. 1-6 hr. For juniors, seniors, and graduate
students. May be used to correct deficiencies preparatory to or following courses
such as Ch. E. 170 and 171, or for other students desiring to take only a portion of a
course.
301. Transport Phenomena. 3 hr. PR: Consent. Introduction to equations of change
(heat, mass and momentum transfer) with a differential balance approach. Use in
Newtonian flow, turbulent flow, mass and energy transfer, radiation, convection.
Estimation of transport coefficients. 3 hr. rec.
330. Process Dynamics and Control. 3 hr. PR: Consent. Dynamic response of processes
and control instruments. Use of Laplace transforms and frequency response
methods in analysis of control systems. Application of control systems in chemical
reactors, distillation, and heat transfer operations. Introduction to nonlinear
systems. 3 hr. rec.
60 CHEMICAL ENGINEERING
331. Mathematical Methods in Chemical Engineering. 3 hr. PR: Math. 18 and consent.
Classification and solution of mathematical problems important in chemical
engineering. Treatment and interpretation of engineering data. Analytical methods
for ordinary and partial differential equations including orthogonal functions and
integral transforms. Vector calculus.
344. Thermodynamics. 3 hr. PR: Consent. Logical development of thermodynamic
principles. These are applied to selected topics including development and
application of the phase rule, physical and chemical equilibria in complex
systems, and nonideal solutions. Introduction to nonequilibrium thermodynam-
ics. 3 hr. rec.
345. Chemical Reaction Engineering. 3 hr. PR: Consent. Homogeneous reactions, batch
and flow reactors, ideal reactors, macro and micro mixing, nonideal flow reactors,
heterogeneous reaction systems, catalytic and noncatalytic reactions, reactor
stability analysis, reactor optimization. 3 hr. rec.
351. Fluidization Engineering. PR: Consent. Fundamentals of fluidization, two-phase
flow theory and powder characteristics, structure and property of the emulsion
phase and bubbles, mass- and heat-transfer in fluidized beds with and without
chemical reaction.
371. Advanced Separation Processes. 3 hr. PR: Ch. E. 301 or consent. Design and
selection of separation processes including crystallization, leaching, extraction,
distillation, absorption, filtration, membrane, and diffusional separation processes.
Similarities between separation processes based on mode of operation are
emphasized.
391. Advanced Topics. 3 hr. PR: Consent. Investigation of topics not covered in
regularly scheduled courses.
400. Chemical Engineering Seminar. 1 hr. Seminars on current research by visitors and
graduate students.
402. Advanced Fluid Dynamics. 3 hr. PR: Consent. Analysis of flow of fluids and
transport of momentum and mechanical energy. Differential equations of fluid
flow; potential flow, flow in porous media, laminar boundary layer theory, and
non-Newtonian fluids. 3 hr. rec.
404. Advanced Heat Transfer. 3 hr. PR: Consent. Theory of transport of thermal energy
in solids and fluids as well as radiative transfer. Steady and transient conduction;
heat transfer to flowing fluids; evaporation; boiling and condensation; packed and
fluid bed heat transfer. 3 hr. rec.
406. Advanced Mass Transfer. 3 hr. PR: Consent. Theory of diffusion, interphase mass
transfer theory, turbulent transport, simultaneous mass and heat transfer, mass
transfer with chemical reaction, high mass transfer rates, multicomponent
macroscopic balances. 3 hr. rec.
432. Optimization of Chemical Engineering Systems. 3 hr. PR: Consent. Optimization
in engineering design, unconstrained optimization and differential calculus
equality constraints optimization, search technique, maximum principles, geo-
metric and dynamic programming, linear and nonlinear programming, calculus of
variations. 3 hr. rec.
446. Catalysis. 3 hr. PR: Ch. E. 345 or consent. Physical and chemical properties of
catalytic solids, nature and theories of absorption, thermodynamics of catalysis,
theories of mass and energy transport, theoretical and experimental reaction rates,
reactor design and optimization. 3 hr. rec.
CHEMICAL ENGINEERING 61
447. Non-Catalytic Solid-Fluid Reactions. 3 hr. PR: Ch. E. 345 or consent. Reaction
models, pseudo-steady approximation, effectiveness factor, transport and chemical
reaction properties, geometric, thermal and transitional instabilities, simultaneous
multiple reactions, selectivities in fixed, moving and fluidized bed reactor design.
3 hr. rec.
480. Advanced Independent Study. 1-6 hr. PR: Consent. Designed to increase the depth
of study in a specialized area of chemical engineering.
491. Special Topics. 3 hr. PR: Consent. Investigation of advanced topics not covered in
regularly-scheduled courses. Recent topics have included: Biochemical Engineering,
Fluidization, Mathematical Methods, Numerical Methods, Powder Technology,
and Surfaces and Colloids.
497. Research. 1-15 hr.
CHEMISTRY
Anthony Winston, Chairperson of the Department
222 Clark Hall or 471 Chemistry Research Laboratory
Degrees Offered: M.S., Ph.D.
Graduate Faculty: Members Dalai, Finklea, Fodor, Gibson, Hall, Jagodzinski, Lovett,
MacDowell, Magriotis, Mintz, Nakon, Penn, Petersen, Showalter, Smart, Wang, and
Winston. Associate members Moore, Muth, and Strohl.
The Department of Chemistry offers graduate studies leading to the
degrees of Master of Science and Doctor of Philosophy with research
concentration in the areas of analytical, inorganic, organic, physical, and
theoretical chemistry. The Master of Science and Doctor of Philosophy
degrees require completion of a research project which represents the
principal theme about which the graduate program is constructed.
Applicants for graduate studies in chemistry must have a bachelor's
degree as a minimum requirement. Applicants must have a major or
concentration in chemistry and an appropriate background in physics and
mathematics. All entering graduate students in chemistry are required to take
departmental guidance examinations in the major areas of chemistry. These
examinations, on the undergraduate level, are administered before registration
and serve to guide the faculty in recommending a course program for the
beginning graduate student. Deficiencies revealed on the departmental
guidance examinations need to be corrected in a manner prescribed by the
faculty. All graduate students pursuing M.S. and Ph.D. degrees in chemistry
are required to teach in the instructional laboratories for a minimum of two
semesters.
The WVU general requirements for the Master of Science degree are
outlined in Part 5 of this catalog. Graduate students in the M.S. program in
chemistry are required to submit a research thesis. They may apply up to 6
hours of research credit toward the 30-hour requirement. The remaining 24
hours of credit must be earned in the basic graduate courses which reflect a
diversified exposure to chemistry; no more than 9 hours of 200-level
chemistry courses may be included; no more than 10 hours may be elected
outside the department; and course work taken at the 300 to 400-level must
include at least three, 3-credit-hour courses distributed in two of the three
areas of chemistry outside the student's major area of research. A final oral
examination is administered after completion and submission of the thesis.
The program for the degree of Doctor of Philosophy reflects a flexible,
research-oriented approach geared to develop the interests, capability, and
62 CHEMISTRY
potential of mature students. A program of courses is recommended to suit
individual needs based on background, ability, and maturity. These courses
are classified as basic graduate courses which present the essentials of a
given discipline on an advanced level, and specialized graduate courses which
take one to the frontiers in a specific area of research. The course offerings are
designed to provide guidelines from which students can launch their inde-
pendent studies in preparation for candidacy examinations. Students are
required to enroll in the departmental seminar program and are expected to
attend special lectures and seminars offered by visiting chemists.
Graduate students in the Ph.D. program are required to complete
satisfactorily a minimum of three 3-hour courses at the 300-400-course level
which are offered by the Department of Chemistry and which are distributed
in two areas of outside their major area of research. In addition, each major
area in chemistry requires students in that area to enroll in basic graduate
courses which present the essentials of that discipline on an advanced level.
Candidacy examinations consist of both a written and oral portion. The
written examinations are of the cumulative type, and are offered eight times a
year. The oral examination is based on a proposition for a research problem
not intimately related to the student's own problem, or any particular
research problem being actively pursued at WVU. This proposition is
presented in writing to the student's research committee and defended before
that group and any other interested faculty members.
Each candidate for the Ph.D. must satisfy a departmental language
requirement in a language approved by the student's research committee.
Research, which is the major theme of graduate studies, may be initiated
as early as the student and faculty feel appropriate for each individual case.
Normally, a student will begin laboratory work no later than the second
semester. Upon successful completion of an original piece of research, the
candidate will present results in a Ph.D. dissertation and at the appropriate
time defend the work in a final oral examination.
Chemistry (Chem.)
Note: A charge is made for breakage and supplies in laboratory courses and for failure to
check out of the laboratory.
201. Chemical Literature. I. 1 hr. PR: Chem. 134 and Chem. 141 or 246. Study of
techniques of locating, utilizing, and compiling information needed by the
research worker in chemistry. 1 hr. lee.
202. Selected Topics. I, II. 1-3 hr. (May be repeated for credit.) PR: Written consent,
with at least a 2.0 grade-point average in chemistry courses. Individual instruction
under supervision of an instructor.
210. Instrumental Analysis. II. 2 hr. PR: Chem. 115 and Physical chemistry. Lectures
and demonstrations. Basic electronics, electrochemistry, spectroscopy, mass spec-
trometry and gas chromatography. 2 hr. lee, 1 hr. demonstration.
211. Intermediate Analytical Chemistry. I. 3 hr. PR: Chem. 115 and physical chemistry.
Principles of analytical procedures and separations at an intermediate level. 3 hr.
lee.
212. Environmental Chemistry. II. 3 hr. PR: Chem. 115, 134, and physical chemistry.
Study of the nature, reactions, transport, and fates of chemical species in the
environment.
213. Instrumental Analysis Laboratory. I. 1 hr. PR: Chem. 210. Experiments using
modern chemical instrumentation. 3 hr. lab.
CHEMISTRY 63
214. Computer Interfacing Laboratory. I. 1 hr. PR: Chem. 210; Cone: Chem. 213.
Computer interfacing of chemical instruments.
222. Chemistry of Inorganic Compounds. I. 3 hr. PR: Physical chemistry. Correlation of
reactions and properties of elements and compounds based on modern theories of
chemical bonding and structure. Acid-base theory, non-aqueous solvents, ligand
field theory, and stereochemistry. 3 hr. lee.
235. Methods of Structure Determination. I. 4 hr. PR: Chem. 134 and 136. Use of
chemical methods and uv, ir, nmr, esr, Raman and mass spectroscopy to elucidate
structures of organic compounds. For students in chemistry and related fields who
may need these methods in research and applied science. 2 hr. lee, two 3-hr. lab.
237. Polymer Chemistry. I. 3 hr. PR: Chem. 134 and physical chemistry. Methods,
mechanisms, and underlying theory of polymerization. Structure and stereochem-
istry of polymers in relation to chemical, physical, and mechanical properties. 3 hr.
lee.
239. Organic Syntheses. II. 3 hr. PR: Chem. 134, 136. Modern synthetic methods of
organic chemistry. One 1-hr. lee, two 3-hr. lab.
241. Crystallography. II. 3 hr. PR or Cone: Physical chemistry or consent. Applications
of X-ray diffraction of crystals to the study of crystal and molecular structure.
Includes theories of diffraction and crystallographic methods of analysis. 3 hr. lee
[Not offered in 1988-90.}
243. Introduction to Radiochemistry and Radiation Chemistry. I. 3 hr. PR or Cone:
Physical chemistry. Fundamentals of radiochemistry and the use of tracer
techniques. An introduction to radiation chemistry and how ionizing radiation
interacts with matter. 2 hr. lee, 3 hr. lab. (Not offered in 1988-90.)
244. Colloid and Surface Chemistry. II. 3 hr. PR: Physical chemistry. Selected topics in
the properties and physical chemistry of systems involving macromolecules,
lyophobic colloids, and surfaces. 3 hr. lee [Not offered in 1988-90.)
246. Physical Chemistry. I. 3 hr. PR: Chem. 134, Math. 16, and Phys. 12. A first course in
physical chemistry. Topics include a study of thermodynamics and chemical
equilibria. 3 hr. lee (Students may not receive credit for Chem. 246 and for Chem.
141.)
247. Physical Chemistry Laboratory. II. 1 hr. PR: Chem. 18 or 115 and Chem. 246.
Experimentation illustrating the principles of physical chemistry and offering
experience with chemical instrumentation. One 3-hr. lab.
248. Physical Chemistry. II. 3 hr. PR: Chem. 246 and Math. 17. Continuation of Chem.
246. Chemical dynamics and the structure of matter. 3 hr. lee (Students may not
receive credit for Chem. 248 and for Chem. 141.)
249. Physical Chemistry Laboratory. I. 2 hr. PR: Chem. 246, 247, 248. Continuation of
Chem. 247. Two 3-hr. lab.
250. Chemical Bonding and Molecular Structure. I. 3 hr. PR: Chem. 248. Introduction to
the quantum theory of chemical bonding. Atomic structure, theoretical spectro-
scopy, predictions of molecular structures and bond properties. 3 hr. lee
315. Chemical Separations. 3 hr. PR: Chem. 115, 133, and physical chemistry. Modern
methods of chromatography from a theoretical and practical standpoint. General
principles of separation stressing the practical implementation of these principles
with particular emphasis on high performance liquid chromatography and gas
chromatography. 3 hr. lee [Offered Fall 1989 and every third semester.)
331. Advanced Organic Chemistry 1. I. 3 hr. PR: Chem. 134. Structural concepts,
bonding, tautomerism, static and dynamic stereochemistry, mechanistic classi-
fications of reagents, and reactions including some applications. 3 hr. lee
64 CHEMISTRY
332. Advaced Organic Chemistry 2. II. 3 hr. PR: Chem. 331. Continuation of Chem. 331
with emphasis upon synthetic methods and reaction mechanisms. 3 hr. lee.
341. Chemical Thermodynamics. I. 3 hr. PR: Chem. 248. Principles of classical and
statistical thermodynamics and their application to chemical problems. 3 hr. lee.
(Not offered in 1988-90.)
411, 412. Seminar in Analytical Chemistry. I, II. 1 hr. per sem. Current literature and
research.
413. Electrochemistry and Instrumentation. I. 3 hr. PR: Chem. 210. Electronic instru-
mentation applied to study of mass transfer kinetics of electrode reactions,
voltammetry, and high-frequency methods. 3 hr. lee. (Offered Spring 1989 and
every third semester.)
414. Spectroscopic Methods. II. 3 hr. PR: Chem. 213. Problems in design of instruments
for each of the various spectral regions. 3 hr. lee. (Offered Fall 1988 and every third
semester.)
417, 418. Advanced Topics in Analytical Chemistry. I, II. 1-3 hr. per sem. Recent
advances and topics of current interest.
421, 422. Seminar in Inorganic Chemistry. I, II. 1 hr. per sem. Current literature and
research.
423. Advanced Inorganic Chemistry. I. 3 hr. PR: Chem. 222. Bonding theories,
stereochemistry, nonaqueous solvent systems, physical methods and current
topics. 3 hr. lee. (Not offered in 1988-89.)
424. Coordination Chemistry. II. 3 hr. PR: Chem. 222. Ligand field theory, spectral
interpretations, stability considerations, synthetic methods, unusual oxidation
states, organometallic compounds, other topics of current interest. 3 hr. lee. (Not
offered in 1989-90.)
425. Inorganic Reactions and Mechanisms. I. 2 hr. PR: Chem. 222 and 443. Substitution,
isomerization, racemization, and oxidation-reduction reactions. 2 hr. lee. (Not
offered in 1989-90.) Register for Chem. 427—1 hr.
427, 428. Advanced Topics in Inorganic Chemistry. I, II. 1-3 hr. per sem. Recent
advances and topics of current interest.
431, 432. Seminar in Organic Chemistry. I, II. 1 hr. per sem. Current literature and
research.
433. Physical Organic Chemistry. II. 3 hr. PR: Chem. 331. Theoretical considerations of
organic molecules, kinetics and other methods used in the study of organic
structure and reaction mechanisms, linear free energy relationship and other
related topics. 3 hr. lee. (Not offered in 1989-90.)
436. Heterocyclic Chemistry. I. 3 hr. PR: Chem. 331. Major heterocyclic systems and
discussion of selected natural products containing heterocycles. 3 hr. lee. (Offered
on demand.)
437, 438. Advanced Topics in Organic Chemistry. I, II. 1-3 hr. per sem. Recent
advances and topics of current interest.
441, 442. Seminar in Physical Chemistry. I, II. 1 hr. per sem. Current literature and
research.
443. Chemical Kinetics. I. 3 hr. PR: Chem. 248. Theories and applications of kinetics in
gaseous state and in solution. 3 hr. lee. (Not offered in 1988-89.)
444. Statistical Mechanics. I or II. 3 hr. PR: Chem. 446. Theory and application of
statistical mechanics to chemical systems. 3 hr. lee. (Offered on demand.)
CHEMISTRY 65
445. Theoretical Chemistry 1. I or II. 3 hr. PR: Differential equations. Theoretical
background for quantum mechanics. 3 hr. lee. (Not offered in 1989-90.)
446. Theoretical Chemistry 2. 1 or II. 3 hr. PR: Chem. 445. Theories and applications of
quantum mechanics in chemistry. 3 hr. lee. (Offered on demand.]
447. Molecular Spectroscopy and Structure. II. 3 hr. PR: Chem. 250. Advanced
applications of spectral methods to a study of molecular structure. 3 hr. lee. [Not
offered in 1989-90.)
448. 449. Advanced Topics in Physical Chemistry. I, II. 1-3 hr. per sem. Recent
advances and topics of current interest. (Offered on demand.)
491. Advanced Study. I, II, S. 1-6 hr. PR: Consent. Investigation in advanced subjects
which are not covered in regularly scheduled courses. Study may be independent
or through specially scheduled lectures.
492. Research Seminar. I, II. 1 hr. PR: Graduate student in chemistry. Research
seminars by visiting lecturers.
497. Research. I, II, S. 1-15 hr.
499. Graduate Colloquium. I, II, S. 1-6 hr. PR: Consent. For graduate students not
seeking course work credit but who wish to meet residence requirements, use the
University's facilities, and participate in academic and cultural programs.
CIVIL ENGINEERING
Lyle K. Moulton, Chairperson of Department
623 Engineering Sciences Building
Degree Offered: M.S.C.E.
M.S.E., Ph.D. available with civil engineering options
Graduate Faculty: Members Bowders, Dean, Eck, Eli, Gidley, Gray, Halvorsen, Head,
Hota, Jenkins, Luttrell, Moulton, Neumann, Sack, Siriwardane, Spyrakos, and
Usmen.
The Department of Civil Engineering offers the Master of Science in Civil
Engineering in conjunction with the College of Engineering. The Master of
Science in Engineering and the Doctor of Philosophy degrees are available
with emphases in civil engineering.
The Department of Civil Engineering has a full-time faculty of 17, who are
active in teaching, research, and professional commitments. There are four
major areas of interest of the faculty and graduate studies:
1. Environmental engineering and water resources, which include air
pollution, occupational health, solid-hazardous waste management, water
supply and pollution, groundwater hydraulics, and hydrology.
2. Geotechnical and materials engineering, which covers soil mechanics,
foundations engineering, soil-structure interaction, groundwater and seepage,
and earthwork design, as well as construction materials and waste product
utilization.
3. Transportation engineering, which includes transportation systems
principles, design, and planning.
4. Structural engineering, which involves work and study in advanced
structural analysis, bridge engineering, and building design.
With few exceptions, the members of the faculty are registered profes-
sional engineers in one or more states and are involved in state, regional, and
national professional organizations, serving on numerous technical commit-
tees. They are successful researchers and have published extensively in
various technical journals. The civil engineering faculty is concerned with
66 CIVIL ENGINEERING
more than the technical education of students; it is concerned with the
development of a professional engineer, able to assume the roles of a problem
solver, decision maker, and technical leader, and with the educational
background to undergird the continuing development required during an
engineer's professional career.
Each graduate student can tailor a program of study to satisfy the
student's own special interest. Opportunities abound within the master's and
doctoral tracks for a research experience which provides a chance for a
student to tackle an engineering problem individually, with guidance from a
faculty adviser. The graduate program in civil engineering has been established
with the philosophy of developing in the student the ability to use today's
contemporary methods of engineering analysis and design so that they can
solve tomorrow's engineering problems.
Master of Science in Civil Engineering (M.S.C.E.)
Master of Science in Engineering (M.S.E.)
Students must comply with rules and regulations as outlined in the
general requirements for graduate work. Each candidate will, with the
approval and at the discretion of the graduate committee, follow a planned
program which must conform to one of the following outlines:
1. A minimum of 30 semester credit hours, not more than 6 of which are in
research leading to an acceptable thesis.
2. A minimum of 33 semester credit hours, not more than 3 of which are in
research leading to an acceptable problem report.
3. A minimum of 36 semester credit hours, with no thesis or problem
report required.
Courses: No rigid curricula are prescribed for the degrees of Master of
Science in Civil Engineering and Master of Science in Engineering. Graduate-
level work in mathematics, mechanics, or other appropriate areas of science is
customary; however, at least 15 semester hours of credit should normally be
selected from graduate civil engineering courses.
Thesis or Problem Report. A thesis or problem is normally required of all
candidates. While required credit in research (C.E. 497) is devoted to the
thesis or report preparation, the thesis or problem report is not automatically
approved after the required number of semester hours of research work have
been completed. The thesis or problem report must conform with the general
WVU requirements for graduate study and with any additional requirements
established by the Department of Civil Engineering.
Final Examination. A candidate shall be required to pass an examination
which may be written, oral, or both, to be administered by the student's
Advisory and Examining Committee. The examination shall cover course
material and the thesis or problem report, depending upon the program
followed.
Approval for the M.S.C.E. degree is restricted to those holding a
baccalaureate degree in civil engineering.
Master of Science in Engineering (M.S.E.)
The Master of Science in Engineering (M.S.E.) program is available to
students approved for the graduate program who possess a baccalaureate
degree in a technical area other than civil engineering. Students entering this
graduate program must complete appropriate undergraduate work as specified
CIVIL ENGINEERING 67
by departmental regulations. This degree program is administered by the
College of Engineering; the program may emphasize civil engineering.
Doctor of Philosophy (Ph.D.)
The Doctor of Philosophy (Ph.D.) degree is administered through the
College of Engineering Interdisciplinary Program; it may have civil engineering
as an option. A candidate for the degree of Doctor of Philosophy must comply
with the rules and regulations outlined in the general requirements. The
research work for the doctoral dissertation must show a high degree of
originality on the part of the student and must constitute an original
contribution to the art and science of civil engineering.
Civil Engineering (C.E.)
201. Principles of Boundary Surveying. 3 hr. PR: C.E. 101 or consent. A study of the
retracement requirements for metes and bounds survey systems. The study will
include interpretation and writing of the property descriptions, legal principles
related to boundary establishment, and analytical approaches to boundary
location. 3 hr. rec.
208. Control Surveying. 3 hr. PR: C.E. 101. A study of the measurement and
computation techniques used to locate positions on the surface of the earth. 2 hr.
rec, 3 hr. lab.
212. Concrete and Aggregates. 3 hr. PR: C.E. 110 or consent. Considerations and
methods for the design of concrete mixes. Properties of portland cement and
aggregates and their influence on the design and performance of concrete
mixtures. Testing of concrete and aggregate and the significance of these tests. 2
hr. rec, 3 hr. lab.
213. Construction Methods. 3 hr. PR: Junior or senior standing in civil engineering.
Study of construction methods, equipment, and administration with particular
emphasis on the influence of new developments in technology. 3 hr. rec.
220. Computational Fluid Mechanics. 3 hr. PR: C.E. 120, E. 2 or consent. Use of the
computer in elementary hydraulics, open channel flow, potential flow, and
boundary layer flow, numerical techniques for solution of algebraic equations,
ordinary differential equations, and partial differential equations. 3 hr. rec.
231. Highway Engineering. 3 hr. PR: C.E. 132, 181. Highway administration, economics
and finance; planning and design; subgrade soils and drainage; construction and
maintenance. Design of a highway. Center-line and grade-line projections,
earthwork and cost estimate. 2 hr. rec, 3 hr. lab.
233. Urban Transportation Planning and Design. 3 hr. PR: C.E. 132 or consent.
Principles of planning and physical design of transportation systems for different
parts of the urban area. Land use, social, economic, and environmental compatibil-
ities are emphasized. Evaluation and impact assessment.
235. Railway Engineering. 3 hr. PR: C.E. 101. Development and importance of the
railroad industry. Location, construction, operation, and maintenance. 3 hr. rec.
240. Applied Hydrology. 3 hr. PR: Consent. The hydrologic cycle with emphasis on
precipitation and runoff as related to design of hydraulic structures, soil and water
conservation, and flood control. 3 hr. rec.
245. Properties of Air Pollutants. 3 hr. PR: Consent. Physical, chemical, and biological
behavioral properties of dusts, droplets, and gases in the atmosphere. Air
pollutant sampling and analysis. Planning and operating air pollution surveys. 2
hr. rec, 3 hr. lab.
68 CIVIL ENGINEERING
251. Public Health Engineering. 3 hr. PR: Consent. Engineering aspects involved in
control of the environment for protection of health and promotion of comfort of
humans. Communicable disease control, milk and food sanitation, air pollution,
refuse disposal, industrial hygiene, and radiological health hazards. 3 hr. rec.
252. Water Resources Engineering. 3 hr. PR: C.E. 146. Application of hydrologic and
hydraulic principles in the design and analysis of water resources systems. Topics
include hydraulic structures, economics and water law irrigation, hydroelectric
power, navigation, flood-drainage litigation, and water-resources planning. 3 hr.
rec.
260. Structural Analysis 2. 3 hr. PR: C.E. 160. Fundamental theory of statically
indeterminate structures. Analysis of indeterminate beams, frames and trusses by
stiffness and flexibility methods; computer-aided structural analysis by standard
computer codes; study of influence lines for beams, frames, and trusses. 3 hr. rec.
270. Reinforced Concrete Design. 3 hr. PR: C.E. 110, 160; PR or Cone: C.E. 260. Behavior
and design of reinforced concrete members. Material properties; design methods
and safety considerations; flexure; shear; bond and anchorage; combined flexure
and axial load; footings; introduction to torsion, slender columns, and prestressed
concrete. 2 hr. rec, 3 hr. lab.
271. Steel Design. 3 hr. PR: C.E. 110, 160; PR or Cone: C.E. 260. Design of steel bridge
and building systems with emphasis on connections, beams, columns, plastic
design, and cost estimates. 3 hr. rec.
274. Timber Design. 3 hr. PR: C.E. 110, 160; PR or Cone: C.E. 260. Fundamentals of
modern timber design and analysis. Topics include wood properties, design of
beams, columns, trusses and pole structures using dimension lumber, glue-
laminated products, and plywood. 3 hr. rec.
281. Foundations Engineering. 3 hr. PR: C.E. 181. The practice of geotechnical
engineering, subsurface explorations, geotechnical analysis and design of shallow
and deep foundations, retaining structures, stability of earth slopes, soil and site
improvement. 3 hr. rec.
283. Earthwork Design. 3 hr. PR: C.E. 181. Use of soil mechanics principles in the
analysis, design, and construction of earth structures. Principles of compaction
and compaction control; an introduction to slope stability analysis and landslides,
earth reinforcement systems, and ground improvement techniques. 3 hr. rec.
290. Civil Engineering Problems. 1-6 hr. PR: Junior or senior standing. Special topics in
various aspects of civil engineering analysis, design, and construction.
291. Comprehensive Project for Civil Engineering. 3 hr. PR: Senior standing in civil
engineering. Application of civil engineering principles, through group studies, to
develop a solution for a comprehensive engineering problem. Consideration given
to a problem involving all aspects of civil engineering. 1 hr. rec, 3 hr. lab.
293. Basic Finite Element Methods. 3 hr. PR: Senior standing or consent. Simplified
treatment of theoretical basis of finite element method, background theory,
formulation and applications: stress analysis in axial columns, one-dimensional
heat and fluid flow, consolidation, beam-column analysis, mass transport, and
overland flow.
296. Civil Engineering Studies. 1-3 hr. (Only 3 hr. credit may he applied toward the
B.S.C.E. degree.) PR: Consent. Supervised internships and field experience in civil
engineering analysis, design, 'and construction.
307. Photogrammetry. 3 hr. PR: C.E. 101. Camera calibration, stereoscopy, parallax,
geometry of vertical and oblique photographs, theory and techniques of orientation,
stereoscopic plotting instruments and analytical methods. 2 hr. rec, 3 hr. lab.
CIVIL ENGINEERING 69
310. Bituminous Materials and Mixtures. 3 hr. PR: C.E. 110 or consent. Manufacture,
testing, and nature of bituminous mixtures including the influence of aggregates,
temperature, and other variables on mix design. Significance of test methods and
specifications. Construction practice. 2 hr. rec, 3 hr. lab.
311. Pavement Design. 3 hr. PR: C.E. 281 or consent. Effects of traffic, soil, environment,
and loads on the design and behavior of pavement systems. Design of pavement
systems. Consideration of drainage and climate. Pavement performance and
performance surveys. 3 hr. rec.
320. Groundwater Dynamics. 3 hr. PR: Consent. Introduction to groundwater, formu-
lation of equations for saturated and unsaturated flow, analytical solutions for
steady and transient cases, transport of pollutants and numerical techniques. 3 hr.
rec.
321. Environmental Fluid Mechanics. 3 hr. PR: Consent. Equations of motion including
buoyancy and Coriolis force, mechanics of jets and plumes, diffusion, dispersion
and mixing in rivers, lakes, reservoirs, and estuaries. 3 hr. rec.
332. Airport Planning and Design. 3 hr. PR: C.E. 132 or consent. Financing, air travel
demand modeling, aircraft trends, traffic control, site selection, ground access,
noise control, geometric design, pavement design, terminal facilities. 3 hr. rec.
333. Geometric Design of Highways. 3 hr. PR: Consent. The theory and practice of
geometric design of modern highways. Horizontal and vertical alignment, cross-
slope, design speed, sight distances, interchanges, and intersections. Critical
analysis of design specifications. 2 hr. rec, 3 hr. lab.
334. Introduction to Traffic Engineering. 3 hr. PR: C.E. 132 or consent. The purpose,
scope, and methods of traffic engineering. Emphasis on the three basic elements of
each element and interactions between the elements. Laboratory devoted to
conducting simple traffic studies, solving practical problems, and designing
traffic facilities. 2 hr. rec, 3 hr. lab.
336. Highway Planning. 3 hr. PR: Consent. Theory and practice of highway investment
decision-making with emphasis on quantitative techniques of traffic assignment
and travel demand forecasting, system evaluation, establishing priorities and
programming. Both rural and urban highway systems are considered. 3 hr. rec
337. Public Transportation Engineering. 3 hr. PR: Consent. Design of rail and highway
modes for urban and rural areas. Consideration of vehicle technology, facility and
route design, conventional and paratransit services, and related marketing,
finance and coordination issues. 3 hr. rec
338. Highway Safety Engineering. 3 hr. PR: C.E. 231 or consent. Relationship between
human, vehicular, and roadway factors which impact safety; functional require-
ments of highway safety features; legal aspects; accident analysis; evaluation of
highway safety projects. 3 hr. rec
339. Traffic Engineering Operations. 3 hr. PR: C.E. 334. Theory and practice of
application of traffic engineering regulations; traffic control concepts for urban
street systems and freeways; freeway surveillance and incident management;
driver information systems; traffic control system technology and management. 3
hr. rec
349. Solid Waste Disposal. 3 hr. PR: Consent. Patterns and problems of solid waste
storage, transport, and disposal. Examinations of various engineering alternatives
with appropriate consideration for air and water pollution control and land
reclamation. Analytical approaches to recovery and reuse of materials. 2 hr. rec, 3
hr. lab.
70 CIVIL ENGINEERING
350. Sanitary Chemistry and Biology. 3 hr. PR: C.E. 147 or consent. Study of physical
and chemical properties of water. Theory and methods of chemical analysis of
water, sewage, and industrial wastes. Biological aspects of stream pollution
problems. 2 hr. rec, 3 hr. lab.
353. Hazardous Waste Control Engineering. 3 hr. PR: Consent. Definition of hazards;
unit processes for hazardous waste treatment; secure land disposal of hazardous
wastes; cleanup of hazardous material spills and abandoned waste dumps; and
related topics. 3 hr. rec.
356. Principles of Biological Waste Treatment. 3 hr. PR: C.E. 350 or consent. Examination
of biological treatment systems related to microbiology and function. Models used
to describe system behavior and kinetics are developed. Laboratory and field
experiments are performed to understand the relation between operation and
design. 2 hr. rec, 3 hr. lab.
361. Statically Indeterminate Structures. 3 hr. PR: C.E. 260 or consent. Force and
displacement methods of analysis; energy principles and their application to
trusses, frames, and grids; effects of axial forces; influence lines for frames,
arches, and trusses; secondary stress analysis. 3 hr. rec.
363. Introduction to Structural Dynamics. 3 hr. PR: C.E. 361 or 460. General theory for
dynamic response of systems having one or several degrees of freedom. Emphasis
on the application of dynamic response theory to structural design. 3 hr. rec.
373. Prestressed Concrete. 3 hr. PR: C.E. 260, 270 or consent. Behavior and design of
prestressed concrete members. Materials, bending, shear, torsion, methods of
prestressing, prestress losses, deflections, compression members, composite
members, indeterminate structures. 3 hr. rec.
380. Soil Properties and Behavior. 3 hr. PR: C.E. 281 or consent. Soil mineralogy and the
physico-chemical properties of soils and their application to an understanding of
permeability, consolidation, shear strength, and compaction. Prediction of engi-
neering behavior of soils in light of physico-chemical concepts. 3 hr. rec.
381. Soil Testing. 3 hr. PR: C.E. 181 or consent. Experimental evaluation of soil
properties and behavior. Emphasis is placed on the proper interpretation of
experimental results and application of such results to practical problems. 1 hr.
rec, 6 hr. lab.
385. Airphoto Interpretation. 3 hr. Study of techniques for obtaining qualitative
information concerning type and engineering characteristics of surficial materials.
Use of airphoto interpretation for evaluation of engineering problems encountered
in design and location of engineering facilities. 3 hr. rec.
393. Advanced Finite Element Methods. 3 hr. PR: C.E. 293 or consent. Formulation
procedures and applications of finite element methods to two- and three-
dimensional problems, techniques for nonlinear analysis computer implementation;
applications in field problems, flow, and dynamics.
431. Traffic Flow Theory. 3 hr. PR: I.E. 213 and C.E. 438 or consent. Basic concepts of
quantitative analysis of traffic systems. Probability theory, queuing theory,
pedestrian and traffic delay at traffic signals, turning at intersections, parking
problems, merging traffic on two-lane roads, simulation of traffic problems. 3 hr.
rec. (Also listed as I.E. 431.}
432. Transportation Systems Analysis. 3 hr. PR: Consent. Systematic examination of
the interaction between transport technology, activity systems, and traffic flows.
Quantitative analysis of the relationship among vehicle cycles, networks, con-
gestion, choice behavior, cost functions, and resulting travel-market equilibration.
3 hr. rec.
CIVIL ENGINEERING 71
434. Urban Problems. 3 hr. PR: Consent. Problems of transportation in the urban area
as they relate to general development of the city. Emphasis on the engineer in
planning for urban transportation and relationship of engineer to the city planner
and city administration. 3 hr. rec.
440. Deterministic Hydrology. 3 hr. PR: Consent. An in-depth treatment of the
dynamics of the accumulation of runoff, including the formulation of the unsteady
surface flow equations and the unsteady saturated-unsaturated subsurface flow
equations. Both analytical and numerical solutions are presented with applications.
3 hr. rec.
441. Stochastic Hydrology. 3 hr. PR: Consent. The use of probabilistic and random
processes techniques in the study of hydrologic problems, including multivariate
time series and frequency-domain analyses of hydrologic data, and stochastic
modeling of multidimensional hydrologic processes. 3 hr. rec.
450. Environmental Systems Engineering. 3 hr. PR: C.E. 252 or consent. Mathematical
and computer modelling of environmental systems with emphasis on decision-
making; applications will be selected from some or all of the following areas: water
quality, water resources planning, solid waste management, waste treatment. 3 hr.
rec.
452. Water Treatment Theory. 3 hr. PR: C.E. 350. Theory of various procedures and
techniques utilized in treatment of water for municipal and industrial use. Review
of water quality criteria. Design of water purification facilities. 2 hr. rec, 3 hr. lab.
454. Industrial and Advanced Waste Treatment. 3 hr. PR or Cone: C.E. 350 or consent.
Basic physical and chemical unit operations used in industrial and advanced
waste treatment; applications for waste water reclamation and reuse; study of
industrial wastes from standpoint of process, source, and treatment. 2 hr. rec, 3 hr.
lab.
457. Hydraulics of Sanitary Engineering Works. 3 hr. PR: C.E. 120. Hydraulics of
sanitary sewers, storm sewers, and water distribution systems; design of special
structures including pumping stations, siphons and retention basins; analysis of
flow sources including sewer infiltration studies, material selection, and construc-
tion methods. 3 hr. rec.
458. Design of Sanitary Works. 3 hr. PR: C.E. 120. Water supply and waste water
disposal problems. Design of treatment facilities. 2 hr. rec, 3 hr. lab.
460. Finite Element Methods in Structural Analysis. 3 hr. PR: C.E. 361 or consent.
Relationships of elasticity theory; definitions and basic element operations; direct
and variational methods of triangular and rectangular elements related to plane
stress, plane strain, and flat plates in bending; variational principles in global
analysis. 3 hr. rec.
461. Bridge Engineering. 3 hr. PR: C.E. 361 or consent. Statically indeterminate trusses,
continuous trussels; steel and concrete arches; long-span and suspension bridges;
secondary stresses. 3 hr. rec.
462. Numerical Analysis of Engineering Systems. 3 hr. PR: C.E. 361 or consent.
Numerical methods for the solution of equilibrium, eigenvalue and propagation
problems of discrete and continuous structural systems with special emphasis on
weighted residual techniques. 3 hr. rec.
470. Behavior of Steel Members. 3 hr. PR: C.E. 271 or consent. Elastic behavior of steel
members subjected to axial load, bending, and torsion. Elastic and inelastic
response of beams, columns, and beam-columns to load and the resulting design
implications. Comparison with standard steel codes and specifications. 3 hr. rec.
72 CIVIL ENGINEERING
471. Light Gage Metal Design. 3 hr. PR: C.E. 260, 271, or consent. Analysis and design of
light gage material systems; flexural and compression members design; investi-
gations into post buckling strength and optimum weight systems. 3 hr. rec.
473. Structural Design for Dynamic Loads. 3 hr. PR: C.E. 363 or consent. Nature of
dynamic loading caused by earthquakes and nuclear weapons blasts; nature of
dynamic resistance of structural elements and structural systems; criteria for
design of blast-resistant and earthquake resistant structures; simplified and
approximate design methods. 3 hr. rec.
475. Analysis and Design of Multistory Structures. 3 hr. (May be repeated once.) PR:
C.E. 363, and C.E. 270 or 271. Introduction; service, structural and construction
systems; analysis and design for lateral and gravity forces; structural modeling;
computer applications; approximate methods; connections; foundations; review of
standard building codes; special topics. 3 hr. rec.
476. Behavior of Reinforced Concrete Members. 3 hr. PR: C.E. 270 or consent. Studies of
actual member behavior; members in flexure, combined flexure, shear, and
torsion; bond and anchorage; combined axial load and flexure; slender columns;
deep beams; derivation of current code provisions. 3 hr. rec.
477. Behavior of Reinforced Concrete Structures. 3 hr. PR: C.E. 476. Continuation of
C.E. 476. Limit state design; continuous beams and frames; moment redistribution;
flat plates and flat slabs; two-way slabs; yield line theory; comparison of theory
with standard practice; results of recent research; special topics. 3 hr. rec.
481. Advanced Mechanics of Soils. 3 hr. PR: C.E. 181, 381, M.A.E. 318 or consent. Stress
invariants, stress history and stress path, elastic and quasi-elastic models for
soils; soil plasticity, failure theories for soils; critical state soil mechanics, and
determination of construction parameters. 3 hr. rec.
482. Advanced Foundation Analysis. 3 hr. PR: C.E. 281 or consent. Study of soil-
structure interaction. Applications of principles of soil mechanics and numerical
methods for analysis and design of geotechnical structures: strip footings, axially
and laterally loaded piles, braced excavations, sheet pile walls, tunnel lining, and
buried pipes and culverts. 3 hr. rec.
483. Advanced Earthwork Design. 3 hr. PR: C.E. 283 or consent. Application of the
principles of theoretical soil mechanics to the design of embankments of earth and
rock. In-depth study of compaction theory, stability of natural and man-made
slopes by limit equilibrium and deformation considerations. 3 hr. rec.
484. Groundwater and Seepage. 3 hr. PR: Consent. Flow of groundwater through soils
and its application to the design of highways and dams and to construction
operations. Emphasis is placed on both the analytical and classical flow net
techniques for solving seepage problems. 3 hr. rec.
485. Geotechnical Risk Assessment. 3 hr. PR: C.E. 281, 283 or consent. Application of
probabilistic and statistical principles to geotechnical analysis and design.
Random and spatial variability of soil properties; decision under uncertainty;
reliablity of geotechnical structures. 3 hr. rec.
486. Soil Dynamics. 3 hr. PR: C.E. 380 and consent. Consideration of the simple damped
oscillator, wave propagation in elastic media, dynamic field and laboratory tests,
dynamic soil properties, and foundation vibrations. Introduction to geotechnical
aspects of earthquake engineering. 3 hr. rec.
487. Design of Earth Dams. 3 hr. PR: C.E. 283 and 484, or consent. Application of the
principles of geotechnical engineering to the analysis, design and construction of
earth and earth-rock embankment dams. 3 hr. rec.
CIVIL ENGINEERING 73
488. Geotechnical Case Histories. 3 hr. PR: C.E. 281 and 283 or consent. Application of
principles of geotechnical engineering to professional practice as taught through
the case histories approach. Study of ctual problems in geotechnical engineering
and their solutions. 3 hr. rec.
490. Teaching Practicum. 1-3 hr. PR: Consent. Supervised practices in college teaching
of civil engineering.
491. Advanced Study. 1-6 hr. PR: Consent. Investigation in advanced subjects which
are not covered in regularly scheduled courses. Study may be independent or
through specially scheduled lectures.
495. Seminar. 1-2 hr. PR: Consent. Studies and group discussion of structural, fluid
mechanics, surveying, transportation, soil mechanics and foundations, and
sanitary problems.
496. Graduate Seminar. 1 hr. PR: Consent. Each graduate student will present at least
one seminar to the assembled faculty and graduate student body of the student's
program.
497. Research. 1-15 hr.
498. Thesis. 2-4 hr. PR: Consent.
499. Graduate Colloquium. 1-6 hr. PR: Consent. For graduate students not seeking
course-work credit but who wish to meet residence requirements, use the
University's facilities, and participate in its academic and cultural programs.
COMMUNICATION STUDIES
James C. McCroskey, Chairperson of the Department
130 Armstrong Hall
Degree Offered: M.A.
Graduate Faculty: Members Booth-Butterfield, Davis, Gorham, Klopf, McCroskey,
Richmond, L. Wheeless, V. Wheeless, and Zakahi
Master of Arts (M.A.)
The Department of Communication Studies offers work leading to the
degree of Master of Arts (M.A.), with a concentration in communication
theory and research. Persons who possess a bachelor's degree from an
accredited college or university may be admitted to the program. Qualified
graduate students from a variety of disciplines are admitted to the program.
The master of arts degree program is intended to qualify the student to:
1. Assume a variety of professional roles in educational, industrial,
governmental, or media institutions.
2. Teach the subject matter in high school and/or college.
3. Undertake advanced training toward a doctorate in the behavioral
sciences.
In addition to the general WVU requirements, the graduate student in
communication studies must meet departmental requirements. These include
successful completion of the minimum number of required graduate hours as
set forth in Program A, B, or C, below with a grade of B or above in each class
and the maintenance of a minimum grade-point average of 3.0.
Applicants for admission must specify the program they wish to pursue.
Program A is open only to full-time resident students. Programs B and C are
open to both part-time and full-time students.
74 COMMUNICATION STUDIES
Program A— Thesis Program
All students planning to continue graduate study past the M.A. level are
encouraged to enter this program. The following are required:
1. At least 36 hours of graduate credit, 30 of which must be in the
Department of Communication Studies. A maximum of 6 hours of thesis
credit will be allowed.
2. Completion of Comm. 401 and 420.
3. A thesis.
4. An oral examination on the thesis.
Program B— -Non-Thesis Program
All students planning a professional career in a field other than education
are encouraged to enter this program. This is normally a terminal degree
program in communication studies. The following are required:
1. A minimum of 36 hours of course work with at least 30 hours in the
Department of Communication Studies:
2. Completion of Comm. 401 and 420.
3. Successful completion of written and oral comprehensive exami-
nations. The oral examination may be waived with the approval of the
student's examination committee and the departmental coordinator of graduate
studies
Program C— Non-Thesis Program
All students planning a professional career in elementary or secondary
education are encouraged to enter this program. This is normally a terminal
degree program in communication studies. Students may complete this
program through off-campus study, on-campus study, or a combination. The
following are required:
1. A minimum of 33 hours of course work with at least 24 hours in the
Department of Communication Studies including Comm. 361, 362, 363, and
491.
2. Successful completion of written and oral comprehensive examina-
tions. The oral examination may be waived with the approval of the student's
examination committee and the departmental Coordinator of Graduate
Studies.
Communication Studies (Comm.)
201. Principles of Communication Education. I. 3 hr. PR: 15 hr. communication studies.
Literature, principles, and current practices of communication education in public
schools with directed application. Intended for teachers in communication and
language arts.
206. Advanced Study in Nonverbal Communication. I, II. 3 hr. PR: Spch. 106. Functions
of nonverbal communication including status, power, immediacy, relationship
development, regulation, turn-taking, leakage and deception, intuition, person
perception, and emotional expressions.
221. Persuasion. I, II. 3 hr. PR: Spch. 11. Theory and research in persuasion,
emphasizing a critical understanding and working knowledge of the effects of
social communication on attitudes, beliefs, and behavior.
230. Survey of Rhetorical-Communication Theory. I, II. 3 hr. PR: Spch. 11. A survey of
theory in the rhetorical communication context with emphasis upon periods
preceding the twentieth century.
COMMUNICATIONS STUDIES 75
231. Communication and Symbol Analysis. I, II. 3 hr. PR: Spch. 131. Advanced study of
language in communication. Specific attention to conversational analysis.
361. Communication in the Classroom. I, II, S. 3 hr. PR: Teaching experience or consent.
Role of interpersonal communication in classroom environment, with particular
emphasis on communication between students and teachers. Recommended for
elementary, secondary, and college teachers in all fields.
362. Nonverbal Communication in the Classroom. I, II, S. 3 hr. PR: Spch. 361. Impact of
nonverbal communication behaviors of students and teachers on teacher-student
interaction and student learning. Recommended for elementary, secondary, and
college teachers in all fields.
363. Communication in the Educational Organization. I, II, S. 3 hr. PR: Spch. 361.
Problems of communication within educational organizations with emphasis on
elements that impact educational change, conflict management, and interpersonal
influence. Recommended for elementary, secondary, and college teachers in all
fields.
364. Communication Problems of Children. I, II, S. 3 hr. PR: Spch. 11. (Primarily for
elementary and secondary school teachers and language arts supervisors.] Normal
maturational development of listening and speaking skills, their relationships to
language acquisition, and influence upon achievement.
365. Media in Communication and Education. I, II, S. 3 hr. Use of the media in
educational and other communication environments with emphasis on communi-
cation processes and principles relevant to television and film.
370. Interpersonal Communication: Theory and Research. I, II, S. 3 hr. PR: Consent.
Survey of the theory and research in dyadic interpersonal communication.
Attention to accuracy, coordination, and congruency models with emphasis upon
relational communication and intimate communication in interpersonal relation-
ships.
371. Theory and Research in Language. II. 3 hr. Syntactics, semantics, and pragmatics
of language behavior. Analyses of contemporary linguistic theories.
372. Theory and Research in Mass Communication. I, II. 3 hr. Mass communication
from a consumer's viewpoint. Use of consumer-oriented mass media research also
stressed.
373. Theory and Research in Persuasion. I, II, S. 3 hr. Various theories and principles of
persuasion with emphasis on contemporary research literature.
374. Intercultural Communication: Theory and Research. 3 hr. Advanced seminar in
communication of various cultures. Special emphasis on research in diffusion of
innovations.
375. Communication Apprehension and Avoidance. 3 hr. PR: Graduate standing.
Theory and research related to individuals' predispositional and situational
tendencies to approach or avoid communication. Emphasis on work in the areas of
willingness to communicate, communication apprehension, reticence, and shyness.
376. Theory and Research in Organizational Communication. I, II. 3 hr. Contemporary
research linking communication variables and networks to organizational change,
effectiveness, leadership, power, and management practices. Analysis of com-
munication problems within a variety of organizations.
377. Small Group Theory and Practice. I, II, S. 3 hr. Specific research areas in
interpersonal communication with intensive emphasis on small groups.
76 COMMUNICATION STUDIES
401. Introduction to Graduate Study in Human Communication. I. 3 hr. Major emphasis
on designing and conducting experimental and laboratory research in human
communication. Computer applications to social science research also given
consideration. Should be taken the first semester of graduate study.
402. Advanced Seminar in Research Methods. II. 3 hr. PR: Spch. 401. Research
techniques necessary to conduct original communication research. Emphasis on
advanced statistical techniques.
420. Survey of Human Communication Theory. I. 3 hr. Broad overview of contemporary
theories in human communication. Should be taken the first semester of graduate
study.
433. SpeciaJ Topics. I, II, S. 3-12 hr. PR: Consent. Thorough study of special topics in
human communication including interpersonal and small group, language, inter-
cultural, organizational, persuasion, and mass communication, nonverbal com-
munication, and communication education.
475. Independent Study. I, II, S. 1-3 hr. PR: Consent. Open to graduate students
pursuing independent study in communication.
490. Teaching Practicum. I, II. 3 hr. PR: Consent. (Open only to graduate assistants in
the Department of Speech Communication.) Supervised experience in classroom
teaching.
491. Advanced Study. I, II, S. 3 hr. Advanced study in a variety of areas in human
communication.
496. Seminar in Human Communication. I, II, S. 3-9 hr. Current problems and research
in human communication.
497. Research. I, II, S. 1-15 hr.
499. Thesis. I, II, S. 3-6 hr.
COMMUNITY HEALTH EDUCATION
J. William Douglas, Dean, School of Physical Education
Daniel E. Della-Giustina, Chairperson, Department of Safety and Health Studies
274 Coliseum
Degrees Offered: M.S., M.A.
Graduate Faculty: Member Simon. Associate Member Douglas.
The Master of Science in Community Health Education and the Master of
Arts Degree in Secondary Education through the Department of Education
with an emphasis in school health are available. These programs involve a
core of courses in health education combined with other courses designed to
satisfy individual needs and professional objectives. All applicants must
comply with the WVU requirements for graduate study and the requirements
of the Department of Community Health Education.
Community Health Education (M.S.)
To be admitted to the M.S. program in community health education, an
applicant must have sufficient background in the area of specialization to
qualify for admission to graduate courses in community health education.
Students with inadequate backgrounds may be required to take additional
course work which may not apply to the program.
COMMUNITY HEALTH EDUCATION 77
Secondary Education (M.A.)
Applicants who are interested in admission to the M.A. program in
secondary education with an emphasis in school health through the Depart-
ment of Education should see a faculty member in health education.
Health Education (HI. Ed.)
220. Drug and Alcohol Abuse Prevention. 3 hr. Experiences designed to prevent the
development of abusive drug-taking relationships by focusing on psychological
variables such as self-esteem, coping skills, and development of support networks.
290. Women and Health. 3 hr. Examination of theories, myths, and practices surrounding
women's physical and mental health from both historical and present-day
perspectives. Exploration of specific health issues and controversies and the rise
of the women's health movement.
301. Advanced School Health. 3 hr. PR: Graduate standing and consent. Analysis of
problems in school health services, healthful school living, nature of health
education, and scope of health instruction which confronts teachers and adminis-
trators.
305. Philosophy of Health Education. 3 hr. PR: Graduate standing and consent.
Analysis of the scientific bases, purposes, procedures, and content, with impli-
cations for school and public health education.
306. Community Health. 3 hr. PR: Graduate standing and consent. Health problems
requiring community action, basic public health activities, community organi-
zations for health protection, voluntary health agencies, school health programs,
and the role of state and federal agencies in the community health program.
307. Community Health: Human Sexuality. 3 hr. PR: Consent. Analysis of sex-related
issues including parenting, sex education, sexual sanctions, pornography, sexual
dysfunction, and sexual variance. Designed for teachers, health professionals, and
interested laypeople.
308. Community Health: Death Education. 3 hr. PR: Consent. Surveys death/dying
from humanistic viewpoint. Examines philosophical, psychological, legal, and
sociological aspects of death, grief, and mourning. Appropriate for teachers,
health professionals, and others desiring understanding of death as a part of
living.
309. Community Health: Drug Education. 3 hr. PR: Consent. Designed to help students
learn appropriate components of a drug education program, gain an understanding
of drug taking in this society, and acquire insights into dependent behaviors.
320. Roles and Functions of Health Educators. 3 hr. PR: Graduate standing and consent.
An investigation of the roles and functions of the health educator in a variety of
community settings including hospitals, clinics, voluntary agencies, etc.
330. Health Education and Behavioral Science. 3 hr. PR: Consent. Integrates the
concepts of health education and behavioral science to facilitate changes in health
behavior of individuals and groups.
373. Professional Development. 1-6 hr. (May be repeated for credit.) PR: Departmental
consent. Specially designed experiences for those interested in advancing profes-
sional skills in a particular specialty. [Not for degree credit in programs in the
College of Human Resources and Education.)
376. Evaluation of Health Education Research. 3 hr. PR: Ed. P. 311 or consent. Study of
published research to determine basic scientific accuracy and value.
78 COMMUNITY HEALTH EDUCATION
385. Practicum (Field). 1-15 hr. PR: Graduate standing and consent. Under the guidance
of faculty and counselors, students may assume major responsibility during a
semester in a community-wide program. (Required of all students in the M.S.
program.)
391. Advanced Topics. 1-6 hr.
397. Master's Degree Thesis. 1-15 hr.
401. Health Care Organization and Management. 3 hr. PR: Consent. To provide future
managers, present practitioners, and interested students with organizational and
managerial concepts and theories to help analyze and resolve administrative
problems in planning and delivering health services in the community.
402. Designing Public Health Education Programs. 3 hr. PR: HI. Ed. 306 and/or HI. Ed.
and consent. Theory and practice of developing health education programs for
community health agencies. Students will work in task groups as consultants to
local agencies and design comprehensive programs consistent with theory.
482. Supervised Applied Health Education Project. 1 hr. PR: Advanced graduate
standing or consent. Doctoral students only. Plan and conduct a health education
intervention in other than a classroom setting, i.e., a defined community.
483. Supervised Health Education Research Report. 1 hr. PR: Advanced graduate
standing and consent. Doctoral students only. A written report of empirical
research of either a survey or an experiment.
490. Teaching Practicum. 1-3 hr. PR: Graduate standing and consent. Supervised
practices in college teaching of health-related learning experiences.
491. Advanced Study. 1-6 hr. PR: Graduate standing and consent. Investigation in
advanced subjects which are not covered in regularly scheduled courses. Study
may be independent or through specially scheduled lectures.
496. Graduate Seminar. 1 hr. PR: Graduate standing and consent. Graduate students
will present at least one seminar to the assembled faculty and graduate student
body of this program.
497. Research. 1-15 hr. PR: Graduate standing and consent.
498. Thesis. 2-4 hr. PR: Graduate standing and consent.
499. Graduate Colloquium. 2-4 hr. PR: Graduate standing and consent.
COMPUTER SCIENCE
Donald F. Butcher, Chairperson of Department of Statistics and Computer Science
George E. Trapp, Director of Computer Science Graduate Programs
302 Knapp Hall
Degree Offered: M.S.
Graduate Faculty: Members Atkins, Butcher, Henry, Lane, Mooney, Muth, Reddy,
Trapp, and Van Scoy. Associate Members Chilko, Dodrill, Hiergeist, and Nassif.
The Department of Statistics and Computer Science offers a Master of
Science (M.S.) degree with a major in computer science. The degree is
intended to qualify the student to assume a professional role in an educational,
industrial, or governmental research project, teach in a junior or senior
college, or undertake advanced training toward a doctorate in computer
science.
Because many students receive baccalaureate degrees from colleges
which do not offer undergraduate programs in computer science, a student
with an outstanding undergraduate record does not need a degree in computer
science to enter the M.S. degree program in computer science.
COMPUTER SCIENCE 79
Applications from students not eligible for admission as regular graduate
students and from foreign students are normally evaluated during January for
admission to the summer session.
The Graduate Record Examination is required for admission into the M.S.
program in computer science.
Students are expected to know the material contained in the following
courses upon admission to the program. Otherwise, the deficiencies must be
removed as early as possible in the student's degree program.
1. One year of calculus (Math. 15, 16, or equiv.).
2. Thorough knowledge of the PL/1 or Pascal programming language
(C.S. 1, 2, or equiv.).
3. Assembler Language and Computer Organization (C.S. 50).
4. Data Structures and File Processing Methods (C.S. 51).
5. Discrete Mathematics (C.S. 120).
6. Probability and Statistics (Stat. 201 or equiv.).
Two options are available for students seeking a Master of Science in
Computer Science. They are:
1. Problem Report Option: 36 hours of course work including 3 hours of
credit for a problem report.
2. Thesis Option: 30 hours of course work including 6 hours of credit for a
thesis. Students with a B.S. in Computer Science or equivalent should pursue
this option.
Minimum required courses for either option are:
(a) Three courses from C.S. 320 (or 325 in lieu of 320), 330, 340, 350, 360,
370, 380.
(b) Two additional 300-level computer science courses.
(c) Three additional 200- or 300-level courses in statistics, computer
science, mathematics, industrial engineering, or electrical and computer
engineering approved by the student's graduate committee.
All students must pass a final oral examination over the problem
report/thesis and course work.
No more than one course in which a grade of C is received may be counted
toward meeting degree requirements.
More information concerning graduate studies may be found in "Graduate
Programs in Computer Science" available from the department.
(For statistics courses of instruction, see "Statistics.")
Computer Science (C.s.)
220. Numerical Analysis 1. I, II. 3 hr. PR: Math. 17 or C.S. 120 and a programming
language. Computer arithmetic, roots of equations, interpolation, Gaussian
Elimination, numerical integration and differentiation. Numerical solution of
initial value problems for ordinary differential equations. Least square approxi-
mations. (Equiv. to Math. 220.)
221. Numerical Analysis 2. 1, II. 3 hr. PR: C.S. 220 and Math. 241 or consent. Solutions of
linear systems by direct and iterative methods. Calculation of eigenvalues,
eigenvectors, and inverses of matrices. Applications to ordinary and partial
differential equations. (Equiv. to Math. 221.)
228. Discrete Mathematics 2. II. 3 hr. PR: C.S. 120 and Math. 16 or equiv. Applications
of discrete mathematics to computer science. Methods of solving homogeneous
and non-homogeneous recurrence relations using generating functions and char-
acteristic equations; digraphs to analyze computer algorithms; graph theory and
its ramifications to computer algorithms. (Equiv. to Math. 228.)
80 COMPUTER SCIENCE
230. Programming Languages. I, II. 3 hr. PR: C.S. 51. Formal definition of programming
languages including specification of syntax and semantics. Structure of simple
statements and algorithmic languages. List processing and string manipulation
languages.
235. Principles of Programming Languages. I. 3 hr. PR: C.S. 51 or consent. Survey of
several programming languages: historical, current, special-purpose, and experi-
mental. Emphasis on comparison of languages features, implementation techniques,
and selection of appropriate language for given application.
240. Systems Programming. I, II. 4 hr. PR: C.S. 51. Software organization for the
support of computer components. Addressing techniques, process and data
modules, file system organization and management. Traffic control and communi-
cation with peripheral devices.
241. Systems Programming. II. 3 hr. PR: C.S. 240. Memory management; name
management; file systems; segmentation; protection; resource allocation; pragmatic
aspects in the design and analysis of operating systems.
245. Microcomputer Programming and Interfacing. II. 3 hr. PR: C.S. 51. Detailed study
of a typical microcomputer system including its architecture, operating system,
assembly language programming, data communication, computer networking and
microcomputer applications (3 hr. lee, 1 2-hr. lab.).
260. Information Analysis. I, II. 3 hr. PR: C.S. 51. Information analysis and logical
design of a computer system. Exercises and case studies are used to give students
proficiency in information analysis techniques. Projects are assigned to provide
practical experience in systems development and implementation.
270. System Design. I. 3 hr. PR: C.S. 51. Underlying principles of system design and
techniques. A theme to be carried throughout the course is the iterative nature of
the analysis and design process. Implementation and conversion problems also are
considered. Practical projects are assigned to give students experience in actual
situations.
275. Software Engineering. I, II. 3 hr. PR: Two 200-level computer science courses or
equivalent. The study of software life cycle, programming methodologies, and
project management, with emphasis on an engineering approach to the software
development process. Relies on a project-based approach for applying software
engineering principles.
280. Introduction to Computer Graphics. I. 3 hr. PR: C.S. 51, 120. Overview of computer
graphics systems. Topics include software, algorithms for graphics primitives,
two-dimensional viewing and transformations, segmentation, methods of input,
and three-dimensional concepts.
281. Introduction to Artifical Intelligence. I. 3 hr. PR: C.S. 51 or consent. Introductory
treatment of foundations of AI and the symbol manipulation language LISP.
Survey of the field of AI, production systems, search strategies, game playing,
knowledge engineering, weak methods. Applications of AI will be briefly studied.
285. Computer Organization and Architecture. I. 3 hr. PR: C.S. 50 and 51. Architecture
of current computers and their effects on software design. Von Neumann
machines; gates and registers; instruction and address decoding; memory systems;
input-output systems; micros, supercomputers, specialized systems.
291. Topics in Computer Science. I, II, S. 3 hr. PR: C.S. 51 or equiv. Advanced study of
topics in computer science.
301. Computers in Research. I. 3 hr. (Statistics and Computer Science majors should
obtain their graduate committee approval before registering.) Use of computers in
research. Algorithms and programming. Scientific and statistical programming
packages.
COMPUTER SCIENCE 81
303. Microcomputers in Mathematics/Science. S. 3 hr. PR: Math. 3 or consent. An
integrated course in computer science, statistics and mathematics for secondary
educators. Focuses on programming techniques and uses problems from the areas
of statistics and mathematics at the high school level as examples.
311. Scientific Computing Applications. II. 3 hr. PR: C.S. 51. Application of mathe-
matical modelling and simulation methodology, languages, and systems. Discrete
simulation using GPSS-V language. Linear programming. Finite difference methods
using higher-level languages.
320. Solution of Nonlinear Systems. II. 3 hr. PR: C.S. 220 or Math. 241 or consent.
Solution of nonlinear systems of equations. Newton and Secant Methods.
Unconstrained optimization. Nonlinear overtaxation techniques. Nonlinear
least squares problems. (Equiv. to Math. 320.)
325. Numerical Interpolation and Approximation. I. 3 hr. PR: C.S. 220 or consent.
Interpolation and approximation using Chebychev polynomials, Pade approxi-
mations, Chebychev economization of Taylor Series. Hermite interpolation,
orthogonal polynomials and Gaussian Quadrature.
330. Design of Language Processors. II. 3 hr. PR: C.S. 230. Study of the design and
construction of automatic programming language processors. Investigation of the
structure of scientific and business oriented compilers, list processors, and
information processing languages.
340. Theory of Operating Systems. I. 3 hr. PR: C.S. 240. Theoretical aspects of
multiprogrammed and virtual operating systems. Topics include: concurrent
processes, processor management, storage management, scheduling alogrithms,
and resource protection.
341. Computer Systems. II. 3 hr. PR: C.S. 340 and Stat. 312, or consent. Simulation,
evaluation, and measurement of computer systems. Techniques of measurement
and evaluation using hardware and software monitors, methods of model
validation, and creation of management reports.
350. Software Engineering in Data Communications. I. 3 hr. PR: C.S. 240 or consent.
Data communication principles, software design techniques for implementing
data communications systems, testing and debugging techniques, networks and
data link control, software design in a network environment. A "hands-on" project
in data communications design is included.
360. Design of Database Systems. I. 3 hr. PR: C.S. 260 or consent. Design, evaluation,
implementation, and user interface of database systems. Topics include: storage
structures, data languages, security, and relational, hierarchial and network
implementation approaches.
365. Distributed Database Management Systems. II. 3 hr. PR: C.S. 260. Reference
architectures for distributed database management systems. Integration of local
databases stored at different sites into a global database. Heterogeneity of data
models. Query translation and optimization. Synchronization of concurrent
access. Integrity and reliability.
370. System Implementation. II. 3 hr. PR: C.S. 220 or 260 or consent. Underlying
principles of system implementation are covered both from a theoretical and from
a practical point of view. As part of the course, each student will participate with
other students in the implementation of a production system.
380. Interactive Computer Graphics. II. 3 hr. PR: C.S. 230 or 240 or 260 or consent. Data
structures and list handling; picture structures and transformations; rendering of
surfaces and solids; interaction handling; display processors and programming
systems; and graphics system organization.
82 COMPUTER SCIENCE
390. Teaching Practicum. I and II. 1-3 hr. PR: Consent. Supervised practices in college
teaching of computer science.
391. Advanced Topics in Computer Science. I, II, S. 3-6 hr. PR: Consent. Investigation in
advanced computer science subjects which are not covered in regularly scheduled
courses. Study may be independent or through specially scheduled lectures.
396. Graduate Seminar. I, II. 1 hr. PR: Consent.
397. Research in Computer Science. I, II, S. 1-15 hr. PR: Consent.
COUNSELING
Jeffrey K. Messing, Division Director, Department Chairperson
502 Allen Hall
Degree Offered: M.A.
Graduate Faculty: Members L. S. Cormier, W. H. Cormier, Jacobs, Majumder, Marinelli,
Masson, Messing, Srebalus, Tunick, and Yura. Associate Members DeLo, Greever,
and Moriarty.
Master of Arts in Counseling
The Department of Counseling Psychology and Rehabilitation of the
College of Human Resources and Education offers a master's program in
counseling. Variations in the curricula allow emphasis in school counseling,
community agency/mental health counseling, human resource development
counseling for business, industrial, or health settings, and student personnel
work in higher education. All candidates for the Master of Arts in Counseling
enroll for a common departmental core during the first semester of study.
Selection of an area for concentration is made at the beginning of the second
semester; this area governs the choice of courses for the balance of the
graduate program. All applicants must comply with University requirements,
the College of Human Resources and Education requirements, and depart-
mental requirements.
Students are encouraged to pursue their studies on a full-time basis;
however, part-time students are accepted.
Required Counseling Courses
All students who are candidates for a master's in counseling are required
to take the following core courses:
Coun. 301 — Counseling Techniques
Coun. 302— Human Relationships
Coun. 303 — Introduction to the Counseling Profession
Coun. 305 — Theory and Practice of Human Appraisal
Coun. 306 — Counseling Theories
Coun. 308 — Organization of School Guidance Services*
Coun. 320 — Vocational Development and Occupational Choices
Coun. 330/382— Counseling Children/Counseling Adults
Coun. 331— Consultation Theory and Techniques*
Coun. 382— Internship
Coun. 385— Practicum
*Courses required for school counselor certification only. A special school counselor certificate
is available for individuals without a teaching background. The program includes an additional 12
hours of course work. During the first half of the degree program, the student must complete
successfully an assessment of his competency in basic skill, language, comprehension, and
computer literacy.
Please note: Doctoral level courses in counseling have the prefix "CoPsy".
COUNSELING 83
Ed. Psych. 320 — Introduction to Educational Research
Coun. 331 — Consultation Theory and Techniques*
Electives (2)
*Courses required for school counselor certification only. A special school counselor certificate
is available for individuals without a teaching background. The program includes an additional 12
hours of course work. During the first half of the degree program, the student must complete
successfully an assessment of his competency in basic skill, language, comprehension, and
computer literacy.
Please note: Doctoral level courses in counseling have the prefix "CoPsy".
Admission Requirements
Applications for admission to the counseling program should be made to
West Virginia University, Office of Admissions and Records. In addition to
the admission requirements of the University and the College of Human
Resources and Education, the Department of Counseling Psychology and
Rehabilitation has the following admission requirements:
• A baccalaureate degree with course work in appropriate areas;
• A minimum undergraduate grade-point average of 2.8, based on a 4.0
system;
• Three letters of reference;
• Completion of the application to the counseling program.
The initial screening decision is based upon this information. Successful
applicants are then interviewed by program faculty. Final decisions about
admission are based on both the requirements and the interview process. Of
the two steps in the process, the grade-point average and interpersonal skills
demonstrated during the interview have the greatest input into the decision
process.
Counseling provides a broad opportunity to work with children at the
elementary-school level, adolescents at the secondary-school level, young
adults at the college level, and adults in business and industry and in
community agencies. The school counselor is involved in personal counseling,
career guidance, vocational and educational counseling, family counseling,
and consultation on classroom problems with teachers and administrators.
Counselors must be equipped to work with both individuals and groups.
Much of the school counselor's work is carried out in classrooms with
teachers and students. The school counselor also is active in working with
community agencies. At the college level, the counselor may work extensively
with the special educational services available for the benefit of the college
student. Degree requirements include completion of the core curriculum, and
additional required courses, required counseling course work, and 6 semester
hours of pre-practicum under faculty direction. A minimum of 48 hours of
course work with a 3.0 grade-point average is required.
In addition to completing all course work and the pre-practicum and
internship satisfactorily, the candidate must demonstrate the ability to
assume the responsibility required of a professional counselor and the
personal characteristics and ethical standards essential to effective working
relationships with others.
These personal characteristics are assessed during the clinical course
work components of the program and during the pre-practicum and field
experience. Students who do not meet professional and clinical standards in
these areas are provided feedback, and resources for remediation are recom-
mended. In these cases, successful remediation is required as a prerequisite
84 COUNSELING
for successful program completion, with an additional 6-9 hours of internship.
Students who violate AACD ethical standards are dismissed from the
program.
Please contact the program for a listing of the additional required courses
in this area.
Areas of Specialization
Community Counseling: In reviewing the curriculum available in coun-
seling, the applicant will note that much of the course work provides the
background applicable for employment in general community agency work.
Some graduates who do not take employment directly in rehabilitation or
school settings find a limited number of opportunities as general counselors in
the fields of public welfare, mental health, drug and alcohol counseling,
employment security, and corrections.
Human Resource Development Counseling: A limited number of oppor-
tunities exist to emphasize counseling and employee development training for
application in business, industry, and health settings. This program prepares
personnel to deal with employee assistance needs (i.e., substance abuse),
organizational development and human relations training, employee career
development, performance assessment, and productivity enhancement. An
undergraduate program in business, management, or nursing is helpful but
not required. Admission preference is given to persons currently employed in
business and industry.
Please contact the program for a listing of additional required courses in
this area.
All students enrolled in the Master of Arts in Counseling program are
expected to attend a minimum of eight different continuing education/profes-
sional development training seminars. These seminars or workshops must be
related to counseling. The counseling program will provide many of these
activities. The student should check with the assigned adviser for a list of
seminar options.
Counseling programs are available for both full-time and part-time
students. An active summer program is available for part-time students.
Degree requirements may be completed in four consecutive summers. Since
there is a limited number of summer sites, there can be no guarantee of
summer practicum placement.
Certification Requirements For School Counselors in West Virginia
Admission requirements for the certification program in school counseling
are the same as for the Masters of Arts in Counseling, except as noted below:
1. A minimum grade-point average of 3.0.
2. Recommendation of the faculty.
3. A valid professional teaching certificate at the level for which
counseling and guidance endorsement is desired, or the completion of a 9-hour
block of professional education course work and competency assessment in
addition to the 48-hour master's degree program.
4. Completion of the required pattern of certification courses. (Contact
the department for this list.)
5. A one-year experience in supervision during the first year of employ-
ment as a West Virginia school counselor.
6. Specialization area examination. Satisfactory performance is required
for certification eligibility.
COUNSELING 85
Counseling Option for C.A.S.
Additional Admission Requirements
All applicants must comply with the WVU requirements, requirements of
the College of Human Resources and Education, and the Counseling Psychology
and Rehabilitation Department.
1. Completion of a master's degree in counseling or equivalent, comparable
to the WVU master's degree in counseling with approved practicum experience.
2. Minimum graduate grade-point average of 3.0.
3. A total score of 1,000 on the Graduate Record Examination aptitude
test.
4. Personal interview with faculty members in counseling psychology.
5. Demonstration of competency in counseling, measurement, statistics,
and the guidance function in education as evidenced by letters of reference
and appropriate examinations.
6. Evidence of successful appropriate work experience.
7. Written justification for choice in area of specialization.
8. Three references for recommendation.
9. Plan of study approved by adviser.
Areas of Specialization
Elementary-School Counseling
Student Personnel Work
Employment Counseling
Pupil Personnel Services
Secondary-School Counseling
Requirements for Graduation
1. Completion of 36 semester hours of approved graduate work.
2. A minimum grade-point of 3.2 on all course work attempted under the
Certificate of Advanced Study program.
3. Demonstration of competencies as a specialist in the chosen area of
specialization.
4. Recommendation of the department.
Program
1. 12 semester hours core from Counseling:
Coun. 331 — Consultation Theory and Techniques, 3 hr.
Coun. 385— Practicum, 3 hr.
Psych. 401 — Advanced Counseling Techniques, 3 hr.
Psych. 469 — Theory and Practice of Student Appraisal, 3 hr.
2. 12 semester hours elected with adviser's consent in specialty area of
advanced courses either internal or external to the counseling program.
3. 6 hours to achieve competence in consumption and production of field
research.
4. 6 hours research problem in area of specialization.
Residency (Minimum)
1. One semester or two summers (12 hr.) on campus.
2. Program completion of 12 hr. off-campus and transfer, or approved
interuniversity cooperative program.
86 COUNSELING
Counseling Psychology Option for Ed.D.
All applicants must comply with the graduate requirements of the
College of Human Resources and Education and the program of counseling
psychology. The program includes course work hours in addition to the
College of Human Resources and Education requirements for the Ed.D.
degree.
The area of specialization for the doctoral degree is oriented primarily
toward training practitioners who have a substantial background in the
philosophy and methods of psychology as a comprehensive science. Students
are expected to work closely with faculty in doing research and in supervised
therapy practice. Successful completion of the program requires core course-
work in counseling psychology, as well as in clinical psychology, statistics
and research, and supervised practice.
Additional Entrance Requirements
The admission process is a two-stage procedure. Each spring, applications
received by January 15th are reviewed for admission to the next academic
year.
Stage I
Applicants are screened based on written information and credentials
provided to the admissions committee, including the following:
1. Completion of a master's degree in an area related to counseling
pyschology.
2. Graduate grade-point average of 3.5, vertified by official transcripts of
graduate course work.
3. Three letters of recommendation to support applicant's competency in
counseling, testing, research, and personal qualities of readiness for comple-
tion of a doctoral degree.
4. A minimum total score of 1,000 on the Graduate Record Examination.
5. At least two years of relevant work experience.
Stage II
Those persons who are successful in the Stage I process are invited to
campus for a personal interview with the program faculty. The personal
interview is required for a final admission decision. The interview helps to
determine the applicant's interpersonal and clinical skills, which are predictive
of success in graduate study, internship, and post-degree placement.
Announcements regarding admission are made on or before May 15.
Materials received after January 15th are not reviewed until the following
year, unless space is available. Students are accepted for study toward the
Ed.D. degree upon admission into the department. Requirements for doctoral
candidacy are the following:
1. Completion of prerequisite doctoral coursework with a 3.0 grade-point
average;
2. A written comprehensive examination of major areas in counseling
psychology and research;
3. Completion of an approved research prospectus.
After admission to candidacy, students are eligible to enroll in internship.
The internship is a full-time academic or calendar year in an off-campus
training site approved by the internship committee. After successful comple-
tion of the internship and the research dissertation, students take a final oral
examination regarding their dissertation research.
COUNSELING 87
The College of Human Resources and Education is currently undergoing
curriculum review and revision. Deviations may occur in the following published
pattern of anticipated course availability by semester.
Counseling (Coun.)
216. Behavior Problems and the School. II. 3 hr. A course primarily oriented toward
assisting educators utilize current psychological principles related to classroom
discipline, as well as academic and social adjustment.
283. Workshop in Counseling and Guidance. I, II, S. 1-12 hr. PR: Consent. To take care
of credits for special workshops and short intensive limit courses on methods,
supervision, and other special topics.
301. Counseling Techniques. I, II, S. 3 hr. PR: Consent. Development and application of
basic counseling skills including interviewing, clinical observation, and a general
orientation to counseling settings. Evaluation will be based on strengths and
deficits in intra and interpersonal skills and on demonstration of counseling skills
in checkout situations. In-setting laboratory experience required.
302. Human Relationships. I, II, S. 1-3 hr. PR: Consent. Experientially based learning
model which focuses on group processes and procedures. Provides self-screening
opportunities for prospective counselors. Evaluation is based on personal char-
acteristics essential to effective working relations with others.
303. Introduction to the Counseling Profession. I, II, S. 3 hr. An overview of the
counseling profession, treating current practices and issues.
305. Theory and Practice of Human Appraisal. I, II, S. 3 hr. An overview of
standardized evaluation methods commonly utilized in educational and rehabili-
tation settings. Experience is provided in selection, administration, and interpre-
tation of selected instruments.
306. Counseling Theories. II, S. 3 hr. PR: Coun. 301, 302, 303 and consent. A study of
counseling approaches commonly used in public schools, colleges, and rehabili-
tation agencies. Application of theory emphasized.
308. Organization/Development: School Guidance Services. I, S. 3 hr. PR: Coun. 303,
305, 306, 320, and consent. Design and conduct of a school needs assessment,
development of an annual guidance program, and review of current professional
legal issues.
309. Group Counseling Theory and Techniques. II, S. 3 hr. PR: Coun. 306 and consent.
Theories of group counseling and demonstrations of specific group techniques.
Evaluation will be based on expertise in group facilitation.
310. Introduction to Student Personnel Work in Higher Education. I. 3 hr. PR: Consent.
A historical and topical study of the development of student personnel structure
and functions in higher education.
320. Lifespan Career Counseling. II, S. 3 hr. PR: Coun. 303, 305. Principles and methods
involved in career counseling with diverse populations. Emphasis on theories of
career development and life-style planning, career choices, and life-long work
adjustment.
330. Counseling Children. I, S. 3 hr. PR: Consent. Practical application of the principles
of guidance to the elementary school.
331. Consultation Theory and Techniques. II, S. 3 hr. PR: Coun. 306 and consent. A
specialized multiple training experience covering advanced theory, techniques
and practices, skill development in teacher, and parental consulting.
88 COUNSELING
382. Special Topics. I, II, S. 1-6 hr. PR: Advanced standing and consent. Independent
study and directed readings in specialized areas of counseling and guidance.
(Some sections of Coun. 382 have prerequisite requirements. Check with the
instructor.)
385. Practicum. I, II, S. 1-12 hr. PR: Preregistration; liability insurance; cleared for
internship at close of semester, or M.A. degree, and consent of department
practicum evaluation committee. An intensive supervised practical experience in
public schools or agencies, in counseling with individual critique and appropriate
small-group experiences. Demonstration of high professional standards, counseling
skills, and personal characteristics appropriate to the counseling relationship are
essential. (Due to the limited number of summer sites, there can be no guarantee of
Summer practicum placement.] [Practicum is a prerequisite for internship
placement. Internship is a one-semester, minimum four-day per week field
experience following practicum. This two-semester sequence replaces the previous
one-semester practicum.]
391. Advanced Topics. I, II, S. 1-6 hr.
395. Problem in Counseling and Guidance. I, II, S. 1-12 hr. PR: Consent. Study and
research for master's degree in counseling and guidance.
Counseling Psychology (Co. Psy.)
401. Advanced Counseling Psychology Techniques. I. 3 hr. PR: Advanced standing and
consent. Comprehensive development of counseling psychology techniques related
to generic and specific theoretical models. In-setting laboratory experience and
demonstration of therapy techniques required.
431. Advanced Consultation Techniques. I. 3 hr. PR: Coun. 331 or equiv., or consent.
Multiple training and experiences in theories and techniques of consultation and
delivery of human services to educational and community personnel. Simulated
classroom and laboratory experiences.
463. Advanced Theories of Counseling Psychology. II, S. 3 hr. PR: Coun. 385; admission
to graduate study; and consent. A comprehensive study of the theoretical issues in
contemporary counseling.
464. Intellectual Assessment. II. 4 hr. PR: Advanced standing and preregistration with
instructor (9 hr. psychology, and demonstration of proficiency in measurement
needed for admission). Administering, scoring, and interpreting individual intel-
ligence tests.
466. Vocational Psychology. II. 3 hr. PR: Coun. 320 or equiv., advanced standing or
consent. Advanced study of theory development and research in vocational
psychology and counseling; emphasis on counseling psychology, women's issues
and cross-cultural counseling.
469. Personality Testing and Interpretation. I. 3 hr. PR: Coun. 305 and consent.
Advanced study in the application of personality assessment procedures and
consideration of alternative methods for measuring human behavior.
472. Internship. I, II, S. 1-12 hr. PR: Written approval from the Department Internship
Committee, satisfactory completion of written doctoral comprehensive exams and
approval of research prospectus. Full-time supervised practice in an approved
counseling psychology internship training program; minimum duration one
academic year.
480. Seminar. I, II, S. 1-6 hr. PR: Advanced standing and consent. Seminar in counseling
psychology for students in certificate of advanced study and doctoral programs.
COUNSELING 89
483. Counseling Psychology Supervision Models. I. 3 hr. PR: Coun. 401, advanced
standing and consent. Overview of major assumptions and techniques of major
counseling supervision models. Training activities include simulated and actual
demonstrations of each of the supervision models and critique of their assumptions,
advantages, and constraints.
490. Teaching Practicum. I, II. 1-3 hr. PR: Consent. Intended for graduate students with
college teaching responsibility in counseling psychology.
491. Advanced Study. I, II, S. 1-6 hr. PR: Consent. Investigation in advanced areas of
counseling psychology and rehabilitation counseling.
492. Professional and Ethical Issues in Counseling and Psychology. II. 3 hr. PR:
Advanced standing and consent. Overview of current ethical, legal, and profes-
sional issues in counseling psychology. Readings, discussion, and a written
literature review of a topic related to the practice of counseling psychology.
496. Graduate Seminar. I. 3 hr. PR: Advanced standing and consent. Written and oral
presentation of methodology and results of one's own research study with
supervision and critique by the instructor and members of the seminar.
497. Research. I, II, S. 1-15 hr. PR: Consent. Dissertation.
498. Thesis. I, II, S. 2-4 hr. PR: Consent.
499. Graduate Colloquium. I, II, S. 1-6 hr. PR: Consent. For graduate students not
registered in regular course work but who have need to use University facilities for
completion of their research or program.
ECONOMICS
Jay H. Coats, Director of Graduate Programs
223 Armstrong Hall
Graduate Programs in Economics, College of Business and Economics, West Virginia
University, P.O. Box 6025, Morgantown, WV 26506-6025
Telephone: (304) 293-5721
Degrees Offered: M.A., Ph.D.
Graduate Faculty: Members Adams, Bhandari, Cushing, Dorsey, Hawley, Hwang,
Isserman, Kraft, Kymn, Labys, Mann, Mitchell, and Rahmatian. Associate Members
Bell, Britt, Cornwell, Rupert, Trumbull, and Witt.
The Master of Arts and Doctor of Philosophy degrees in economics enable
students to broaden and refine their knowledge of the concepts and methods
of economic analysis. These programs are designed to prepare students for
careers in business, government, and higher education. Student programs are
planned with the assistance of a faculty adviser and approval of the Director
of Graduate Programs. Complete information about the graduate programs in
economics, and the regulations and requirements pertaining to them, may be
obtained by securing a copy of "Graduate Programs in Economics" from the
graduate director. Students are bound by these regulations and requirements,
as well as those of the College of Business and Economics.
Admission. To be admitted as a regular student, applicants must have a
grade-point average of 2.75 or better for all undergraduate work completed
and a minimum combined score of 1,500 for the three parts of the general
aptitude portion of the Graduate Record Examination. All students must
submit their scores on the general aptitude portion of the Graduate Record
Examination (GRE) and international students must also submit their scores
on the TOEFL. In addition, it is required that all applicants will have
completed at least one semester of each of the following courses: intermediate
90 ECONOMICS
microeconomic theory, intermediate macroeconomic theory, calculus, and
statistics. Applicants not meeting these entrance requirements may be
admitted on a provisional and/or deficiency basis, subject to certain perfor-
mance conditions during their first semester in residence.
Financial Aid. A limited number of graduate assistantships and tuition
scholarships are available on a competitive basis to full-time students. Major
selection criteria include prior academic performance and GRE scores.
Graduate assistants receive a cash stipend that is comparable in amount to
that offered at other universities. Graduate assistants engage in research
and/or teaching activities. The faculty of the Department of Economics also
nominates outstanding applicants for University fellowships. Special scholar-
ships are also available on a competitive basis to minority students. Further
information and applications can be obtained from the Director of Graduate
Programs.
Academic Performance. To qualify for a graduate degree in economics,
students must earn a cumulative grade-point average (GPA) of 3.0 or better
for all courses attempted as a graduate student at WVU. A regular graduate
student in economics whose cumulative GPA falls below 3.0 (B) upon
completion of the first 9 hours of graduate study is not in good standing and
will be placed on probation. A student in the program whose cumulative GPA
falls below 3.0 will be placed on probation as of the close of the semester in
which the GPA fell below 3.0. Such a student, placed on probation, who fails
to raise his/her cumulative GPA to 3.0 by the end of the semester succeeding
that in which his/her GPA fell below 3.0 is subject to suspension from the
program at the end of that probationary semester.
Other academic reasons for suspension from the program include failing
grades on more than 50 percent of the course work taken in any semester, a
third failure on either a microeconomic theory or macroeconomic theory
comprehensive examination, a fourth failure on comprehensive field exami-
nations, or failure to complete all degree requirements within the specified
time limits.
Master of Arts (M.A.)
The Master of Arts (M.A.) program requires a total of 36 hours of
graduate credit, including 21 hours of economics. At least 24 hours of course
work completed must be at the 300 level. To qualify for the M.A. degree,
graduate students in economics must earn a grade of B- or better in Economics
310 and 312, and a grade-point average of 3.0 in all courses attempted as a
graduate student at WVU. The M.A. program contains a thesis and a
nonthesis option. Specific course requirements include:
Core Courses-
Economics 220— Introduction to Mathematical Economics, 3 hr.
Economics 310— Advanced Microeconomic Theory 1, 3 hr.
Economics 312— Advanced Macroeconomic Theory 1, 3 hr.
Economics 316— History of Economic Development and Analysis, 3 hr.
(If the student has recently successfully completed Economics 216
(History of Economic Thought) or its equivalent before entering the
M.A. program, then this requirement may be waived by approval of the
graduate director.)
ECONOMICS 91
Statistics Requirement — [6 credit hours are required.)
Option A:
Statistics 231— Sampling Methods, 3 hr.
Economics 226 — Applied Econometrics, 3 hr.
Option B: For students who consider going into the Ph.D. Program.
Economics 320— Mathematical Economics, 3 hr. (substitute for Eco-
nomics 220 in the core)
Statistics 262— Statistics and Probability, 3 hr.
Economics 325 — Econometrics, 3 hr.
Thesis/Nonthesis Options—
a. Thesis Option: An acceptable thesis, 6 hr. With the thesis option,
the student must pass a final oral examination.
b. Nonthesis Option: In lieu of a thesis, the requirements for the M.A.
are met by: (1) completion of two 300-level courses in one field of
concentration in economics; and (2) submission of a research paper that
gives evidence of substantial ability to conduct scholarly research.
Program Options
The M.A. program in economics includes special options administered by
the College of Business and Economics jointly with other units on campus.
These options include business analysis, energy economics, law and eco-
nomics, mathematical economics, public policy, and statistics and economics.
To earn the M.A. in Economics, students must complete the M.A. requirements
(above) and fulfill other requirements pertaining to the particular option. The
options are best viewed as coherent sample programs developed in conjunction
with other units and are designed to prepare students for employment in a
particular area or specialty of economics.
Business Analysis— Conducted in cooperation with other departments of
the College of Business and Economics, this option is designed to prepare
students for employment in the business analysis area. As part of their M.A.
program in economics, students complete 12 hours of business courses:
Managerial Control, Administrative Practices, Financial Administration, and
Marketing Administration.
Energy Economics— Conducted in cooperation with the College of Mineral
and Energy Resources, this option is designed to prepare students in the area
of resource economics, including energy and environmental issues. Courses
include: Economics of the Energy and Petrochemical Sectors, Theory and
Policy of Mineral Economics, Models of Mineral Commodity Markets
(COMER), Energy Economics and Environmental Economics (B&E). Students
are required to submit three graduate papers.
Law and Economics— Conducted in cooperation with the College of Law,
this option is designed to enable students to develop a degree of expertise and
knowledge in both law and economics. Law students may receive the M.A. in
economics by combining their law courses with 24 hours of economics. The
economics major may receive the M.A. by completing 21 hours of economics
and 12 hours of law courses.
Mathematical Economics— This option is conducted in cooperation with
the Department of Mathematics. Students entering this option must previously
have taken 12 hours in mathematics, including a course in calculus equivalent
to Math. 15. Courses include Advanced Micro Theory 2, Advanced Macro
Theory 2, Econometrics, Mathematical Economics, Seminar in Mathematical
Economics, Introduction to Linear Algebra, and Introduction to Real Analysis.
92 ECONOMICS
Public Policy— Conducted in cooperation with the Department of Political
Science (PS), this option is designed to provide students with sufficient
analytical and research skills to become competent researchers, particularly
with regard to public policy problems. Field training on an optional basis may
be obtained through a research residency or internship in a public agency.
Courses include Politics of Planned Development, Theory of Public Policy
Development, Seminar in Policy Development, Political Science Methodology
(PS), and economics electives selected on the basis of the student's special
interests. For the M.A. degree in economics, students must complete 21 hours
in economics, including the core.
Statistics and Economics— Conducted in cooperation with the Department
of Statistics and Computer Science (Stat.), this option is designed to prepare
students for employment in the public or private sector which demands the
use of quantitative skills. Courses include Statistics and Probability, Applied
Regression Analysis (Stat.), and Econometrics (B&E).
Doctor of Philosophy (Ph.D.)
Usually four years of full-time graduate work beyond the baccalaureate
degree are required to complete the doctorate. A minimum of two consecutive
semesters in actual residence as a full-time graduate student is required. To
qualify for the Doctor of Philosophy (Ph.D.) degree in economics, a student
must earn a cumulative grade-point average of 3.0 in courses completed at
WVU.
The Ph.D. degree is not awarded for the mere accumulation of course
credits nor for the completion of the specified residence requirements. All
students are required to complete the graduate core curriculum, prepare
themselves in three fields of concentration, and submit an acceptable
dissertation. A minimum of 39 hours of graduate work in economics at the 300
level is required for all candidates for the Ph.D. degree in economics.
Core Courses (each, 3 hr.):
Economics 310— Advanced Microeconomic Theory 1
Economics 311— Advanced Microeconomic Theory 2
Economics 312— Advanced Macroeconomic Theory 1
Economics 313 — Advanced Macroeconomic Theory 2
Economics 316 — History of Economic Doctrines and Analysis
Economics 320 — Mathematical Economics
Economics 325 — Econometrics
Statistics 262 — Statistics and Probability
Fields of Concentration. Six semester hours (or the equivalent) must be
taken in each of the student's three fields of concentration. Areas of
concentration include: econometrics, monetary economics, public finance,
international economics, regional and urban economics, laboreconomics, and
energy and environmental economics. One of the fields of concentration may
be in an outside area; selection must be approved by the graduate economics
faculty.
Comprehensive Examinations. Students must pass written comprehensive
examinations in economic theory (microeconomics and macroeconomics) and
in three fields. For possible waiver of one field examination, and other
detailed rules, see departmental "Graduate Programs in Economics" filed in
the Office of Graduate Director.
Candidacy and Dissertation. When an applicant has successfully passed
the written comprehensive examinations, the applicant will be formally
promoted to candidacy for the Ph.D. degree. The candidate must submit a
ECONOMICS 93
dissertation pursued under the supervision of a member of the graduate
faculty in economics on some problem in the area of the candidate's major
interest. The dissertation must present the results of the candidate's individual
investigation and must embody a definite contribution to knowledge. It must
be approved by a committee of the graduate faculty in economics. After
approval of the candidate's dissertation and satisfactory completion of other
graduate requirements, a final oral examination on the dissertation is
required.
Each Ph.D. candidate is required to present a dissertation proposal to the
Graduate Director subsequent to approval by at least three members of his or
her dissertation committee including the chairperson. This proposal will
include a statement of the problem (topic summary), a preliminary survey of
the literature, a description of the research methodology, and other pertinent
material. With the approval of the graduate director, the student is then
required to present the proposal in a faculty-student seminar.
Credit for dissertation research and writing is available under Economics
497, but only if the student has a dissertation chairperson and the approval of
the graduate director.
Ph.D. Program Options
The Ph.D. program includes special options conducted in cooperation
with other units on campus. These include energy economics, industrial
relations, and mathematical economics. The options specify certain concen-
trations of course work and comprehensive examinations. Acceptable dis-
sertations are required of all students.
Energy Economics— Conducted in cooperation with the College of Mineral
and Energy Resources (COMER), the energy economics option is designed for
students wishing to specialize in the area of energy, resource, and environ-
mental economics. In addition to the core theory courses, students are
expected to complete a field (12 semester hours at the 300 level) in mineral
resource economics (COMER), and fields in energy and environmental
economics and econometrics in the Department of Economics. One field in the
Department of Economics may be substituted for econometrics, provided the
student successfully completes Economics 325.
See Appendix B, Ph.D. Options, Energy Economics of departmental
"Graduate Programs in Economics," for regulations governing comprehensive
examinations.
Industrial and Labor Relations— Graduate work in industrial and labor
relations typically is interdisciplinary in nature. The Ph.D. option retains the
interdisciplinary orientation while providing students with a Ph.D. -level of
understanding of economic theory and economic analysis. Students in the
industrial and labor relations option take the eight core courses in the Ph.D.
program and take comprehensive examinations in microeconomic and macro-
economic theory.
Students are required to complete three fields of concentration. One field
must be industrial and labor relations. Since industrial and labor relations is
within the College of Business and Economics at WVU, it is not necessary that
both of the two remaining fields be in economics. However, it is necessary that
there be a 12-hour (four courses) field in this discipline within the WVU
94 ECONOMICS
College of Business and Economics. The 12-hour field of industrial and labor
relations is listed below and consists of four courses:
Industrial and Labor Relations 334 — Leadership and Work Group
Dynamics
Industrial and Labor Relations 342— Advanced Collective Bargaining
Industrial and Labor Relations 491A— Practicum in Research Methods
Industrial and Labor Relations 491B— Research Theory
Of the two remaining fields, each typically 6 credit hours, one must be from
within the Department of Economics. Most commonly, this field is labor
economics. The second field may be selected from economics, industrial
psychology, public administration, statistics, human resources management,
industrial engineering, or law, and ideally should complement the student's
research interest.
Students must pass written comprehensive examinations in their three
fields of concentrations.
Mathematical Economics— The mathematical economics option is con-
ducted in cooperation with the Department of Mathematics. To be admitted
into this option, students must have completed a minimum of 12 hours in
mathematics, including a course in calculus equivalent to Mathematics 15. In
addition to the Economics Ph.D. core, students are required to take the
following courses:
Economics 326— Econometrics 2
Economics 328— Advanced Mathematical Economics
Economics 329— Seminar in Econometrics
Mathematics 241— Introduction to Linear Algebra
Mathematics 251, 252— Introduction to Real Analysis
(Math. 251 and 252 may be replaced by Math. 317, 318.)
Mathematics 490— Seminar in Mathematical Economics
Mathematics Elective— 3 hr.
Students are required to successfully complete comprehensive exami-
nations in microeconomic and macroeconomic theory, mathematical econom-
ics, econometrics, and one other field in economics or mathematics.
For further details, see "Graduate Programs in Economics" Appendix B,
Ph.D. options, Mathematical Economics.
Economics (Econ.)
Specialized Courses
200. Special Topics. 1-4 hr. PR: Econ. 51 or 55 or consent. Special topics relevant to
economics. (Maximum of 9 semester hours in any or all courses numbered 200
offered by the College of Business and Economics may be applied toward
bachelor's and master's degrees. J
205. Current Economic Problems. 3 hr. PR: Econ. 51 or 55 or consent. (For students in
Education only.) Acquaints public school teachers with reliable source materials
in economics and instructs them in studying current economic problems.
297. Internship. 1-12 hr. PR: Econ. 51 or 55 and departmental approval. Field experience
in the analysis and solution of economic problems in the public and private
sectors.
317. Economic Decision Making. 2 hr. PR: Econ. 54 or consent. (Non-credit for Graduate
students in Economics.) Analysis of the firm as an optimizing unit operating in the
market place. Examination of product demand, production and costs, pricing
theory and practice theory and practices, risk and capital budgeting.
ECONOMICS 95
318. Economic Policy. 2 hr. PR: Econ. 317 or consent. (Non-credit for Graduate students
in Economics.] Microeconomic analysis of macroeconomic phenomena is considered
with particular attention paid to the reaction by firms to price and interest rate
effects of fiscal and monetary policy.
319. Applied Business and Economics Statistics. 3 hr. PR: Consent. Primary statistical
methods used in business and economics research including hypothesis testing,
estimation, linear regression, time series, and business forecasting. Statistical
computer software is an integral part of the course.
343. Economic Analysis of Public Policies. 3 hr. Application of economic analysis to
questions of public policy. Consideration of problems of public goods and other
market failures and usefulness of cost-benefit analysis to policy-making. (Equiv.
to Pol. S. 331.)
Economic Theory
211. Intermediate Microeconomic Theory. 3 hr. PR: Econ. 51 or 54. Consumer choice and
demand; economics of time; price and output determination and resource allocation
in the firm and market under a variety of competitive conditions; welfare
economics, externalities, public goods, and market failure.
212. Intermediate Macroeconomic Theory. 3 hr. PR: Econ. 51 or 55. Forces which
determine the level of income, employment, and output. Particular attention to
consumer behavior, investment determination, and government fiscal policy.
216. History of Economic Thought. 3 hr. PR: Econ. 51 or 55. Economic ideas in
perspective of historic development.
310. Advanced Micro Theory 1. 3 hr. PR: Econ. 211 and 220 and graduate standing or
consent. Theory of production and allocation, utility theory, theory of the firm,
pricing in perfect and imperfect markets, models of firm's operations.
311. Advanced Micro Theory 2. 3 hr. PR: Econ. 310. General equilibrium analysis,
distribution theory, welfare economics.
312. Advanced Macro Theory 1. 3 hr. PR: Econ. 212 and 220 and graduate standing or
consent. Classical, Keynesian, and Post-Keynesian theories.
313. Advanced Macro Theory 2. 3 hr. PR: Econ. 312. Model of economic growth and
fluctuations, and other advanced topics in macroeconomic theory.
316. History of Economic Doctrines and Analysis. 3 hr. PR: Econ. 310 and graduate
standing or consent. Writings of the major figures in the development of economic
doctrines and analysis.
Quantitative Economics
220. Introduction to Mathematical Economics. 3 hr. PR: Math. 15 or 128, and Econ. 51 or
55; or consent. Principal mathematical techniques including set operation, matrix
albegra, differential and integral calculus employed in economic analysis. Partic-
ular attention given to static (or equilibrium) analysis, comparative-static
analysis and optimization problems in economics.
225. Applied Business and Economic Statistics. 3 hr. PR: Econ. 125 or Stat. 101 or
consent. Continuation of Econ. 125. Principal statistical methods used in applied
business and economic research including multiple regression, index numbers,
time series analysis, forecasting models and methods, and sampling design.
226. Introductory Econometrics. 3 hr. PR: Econ. 125 or consent. Statistical methods
applied to the analysis of economic models and data. Emphasis placed on multiple
regression, multicollinearity, seasonality, heteroscedasticity, autocorrelation,
dummy variables, time series analysis, distributed lags and simultaneous equations
with economics and computer applications.
96 ECONOMICS
320. Mathematical Economics. 3 hr. PR: Econ. 220 or consent. Linear programming,
input-output analysis, complex numbers, linear difference and differential equa-
tions, comparative-static and dynamic analysis and optimization techniques.
325. Econometrics 1. 3 hr. PR: Stat. 262 or consent. Specification, estimation, and
verification of single-equation models. Topics covered include multicollinearity,
autocorrelation, heteroscedasticity, dummy variables, time series analyses and
forecasting, functional form, and specification error analysis. Students should be
familiar with matrix algebra.
326. Econometrics 2. 3 hr. PR: Econ. 325 or consent. Identification and estimation of
simultaneous equation models and their use in forecasting and simulation. Other
advanced topics include distributed lags, autoregressive models, errors in variables
models, aggregation problems, and pooled cross-section/time-series models.
328. Advanced Mathematical Economics. 3 hr. PR: Consent. Mathematical properties
of microeconomic models of general equilibrium and welfare, existence, uniqueness,
and stability of equilibrium. Applications of Hamiltonian and maximum principles
to growth models and economic control problems. Investigation of separability
theorems.
329. Seminar in Econometrics. 3 hr.
Monetary Economics
330. Monetary Economics. 3 hr. PR: Econ. 312 or consent. Sources and determinants of
supply of money; demand for money for transactions and speculative purposes;
general equilibrium theory of money, interest, prices, and output; role of money in
policy.
334. Seminar in Monetary Economics. 3 hr. PR: Econ. 312 or consent.
Public Finance
241. Public Finance. 3 hr. PR: Econ. 51 or 55. Governmental fiscal organizations and
policy; taxes and tax systems with particular emphasis on federal government and
state of West Virginia.
340. Theory of Public Finance. 3 hr. PR: Econ. 310 and graduate standing or consent.
Economic role of government in a mixed economy with regard to resource
allocation between public and private sectors, influence of government upon
income distribution and economic stability and growth.
344. Seminar in Public Finance. 3 hr.
Public Regulation and Control
245. Government and Business. 3 hr. PR: Econ. 51 or 55. Market structure, conduct and
performance: analysis of the antitrust laws — judicial interpretation and effect on
the business sector.
246. Transportation Economics. 3 hr. PR: Econ. 51 or 55. Economic and institutional
analysis of the domestic transportation system of the United States. Topics
include role of transportation, carrier characteristics and services, transportation
rates and costs, regulation of transportation.
345. Industrial Organization. 3 hr. PR: Econ. 310 and graduate standing or consent.
Economic analysis of market structure, conduct, and performance: in-depth
evaluation of markets and industries in the United States and the effect of
government intervention on firm behavior.
349. Public Regulation of Business. I or II. 3 hr. Economic analysis of regulation of
specific industries such as public utilities.
ECONOMICS 97
International Economics
250. International Economics. 3 hr. PR: Econ. 51 or 55. Development of trade among
nations; theories of trade, policies, physical factors, trends, and barriers in
international economics.
350. Advanced International Economics. 3 hr. PR: Econ. 211 and 212. Contemporary
theories of international economics; analysis of current problems in world trade
and finance.
354. Seminar in international Economics. 3 hr. PR: Econ. 212.
Regional Economics
255. Regional Economics. 3 hr. PR: Econ. 51 or 55. Analysis of the regional economy's
spatial dimension, emphasizing interregional capital and labor mobility, the role
of cities, objectives and issues of regional policy, lagging regions and Appalachia,
growth poles, and regional growth and income distribution.
257. Urban Economics. 3 hr. PR: Econ. 51 or 55. Analyzes the spatial dimensions of the
urban economy, emphasizing both urban economic theory and urban policy. Issues
include cities and income inequality, urban upgrading function, blight, economics
of ghettos, the economics of urban size.
355. Advanced Regional Economics. 3 hr. PR: Econ. 310 and graduate standing or
consent. Regional income and flow of funds estimation, regional cyclical behavior
and multiplier analysis, industrial location and analysis, techniques of regional
input-output measurement, impact of local government reorganization on regional
public service and economic development.
357. Advanced Urban Economics. 3 hr. PR: Econ. 310 and graduate standing or consent.
Analyzes the spatial dimensions of the urban economy, emphasizing urban theory,
policy, and empirical research. Major subjects include urban income distribution,
residential location theory, spatial structure, neighborhood change, blight, ghettos,
segregation, renewal, and city size.
359. Seminar in Regional Economics. 3 hr.
Labor Economics
360. Advanced Human Resource Economics. 3 hr. PR: Econ. 310 and graduate standing
or consent. Examination and analysis of our social and economic efforts to solve
current manpower problems in the U.S., including structural unemployment and
inflation.
364. Seminar in Labor Economics. 3 hr. PR: Econ. 310 and graduate standing or consent.
Economic History
270. Growth of the American Economy. 3 hr. PR: Econ. 51 or 55. Central issues in
development of the American economy.
370. Economic History. 3 hr. Examination of the methods of research and issues in
economic history of the United States.
374. Seminar in Economic History. 3 hr.
Economic Development
213. Economic Development. 3 hr. PR: Econ. 54 and 55. The problems, changes, and
principal policy issues faced by nonindustrialized countries.
98 ECONOMICS
Energy and Environmental Economics
380. Energy Economics. 3 hr. PR: Graduate standing and consent. Welfare analysis of
supply interruptions and the foreign dependence question. Study of various
energy resources in reference to policy alternatives under variant growth
conditions and input-output models. Examination of coal industry and coal
externalities.
384. Environmental Economics. 3 hr. PR: Econ. 310 and Econ. 380 or M.E.R. 345 and
graduate standing or consent. Examination of the theoretical and empirical
literature dealing with externalities (pollution), the relationships between pollution
and social costs, the relationships between energy production and environmental
quality, and the optimal strategies for pollution abatement.
Other Economics Courses
299. Independent Readings in Economics. 3-6 hr. Supervised readings for undergraduate
and graduate students in special areas.
390. Independent Reading in Economics. 3-6 hr. Supervised readings. For graduate
students in special areas.
491. Seminar in Applied Economic Analysis. 3 hr. PR: 12 hr. of graduate-level
economics.
497. Research. 1-15 hr.
EDUCATION
Diane L. Reinhard, Dean of College of Human Resources and Education
802 Allen Hall
Degrees Offered: C.A.S., Ed.D. (M.A. and M.S. programs are listed separately, by
program major, in this catalog.)
Graduate Faculty: Members Andes, B. Bailey, Baker, Bontempo, Bower, Childress,
Clements, S. Cormier, W. Cormier, Deay, DeCosta, DeVore, Fraley, Gibbins, Goeres,
Goodwin, Grasso, Haas, Hartnett, Hazi, Helfeldt, Holtan, Hursh, Ianonne, Jacobs,
Kaczmarek, Koay, Lass, Leary, Lilley, Lombardi, Lundeen, McAvoy, McCrory,
Majumder, Marinelli, Martin, Masson, Maughan, Meckley, Monahan, Moriarty,
Moxley, Murphy, A. Nardi, Neal, Obenauf, Phillips, Piatt, Pytlik, Reed, Reinhard,
Ruscello, Saltz, Shea, Shuck, Shuster, E. R. Smith, P. Smith, Srebalus, Stepp,
St. Louis, C. Sunal, D. Sunal, Thomas, Tompkins, Tseng, Tunick, E. Vargas, J. Vargas,
Walls, Wienke, Woodford, Woodrum, Yeazell, and Yura. Associate Members Atkins,
N. Bailey, Carline, DeLo, Freeman, Gordon, Greever, Hall, Hayes, Hobbs, Hunt,
Hursh, Joyce, Ludlow, Messing, G. Nardi, J. Paterson, Queen, Savage, Shuman,
Sloane, Stead, Toth, Vaughn, Wolf, J. Yeager, and Young.
Certificate of Advanced Study (C.A.S.)
This program is designed to prepare school and related personnel who
wish professional training beyond the master's degree. Candidates for the
Certificate of Advanced Study in Education may choose from among the
following areas of study for their area(s) of concentration: administration and
supervision, curriculum and instruction, counseling and guidance, educational
psychology, reading, or special education. Persons interested in the certificate
should consult with the chairpersons of the appropriate department or the
Dean of the College of Human Resources and Education.
Doctor of Education (Ed.D.)
The program of study leading to the degree of Doctor of Education (Ed.D.)
is planned with the student's graduate adviser and committee and is made
EDUCATION 99
available through the faculty and support services of the College of Human
Resources and Education. It combines courses of instruction, seminars,
supervised research, and ancillary experience intended to provide the
candidate with a variety of educationally related competencies. Special
requirements, such as tools of research, also may be specified by the student's
committee.
The Ed.D. is a program based on competencies and thus given may
provide a broad overview of education or it may delve very deeply into a
single aspect. College facilities and faculty expertise make it possible for
students wishing to do so to concentrate more heavily in such fields as
curriculum development, counseling and guidance, education administration,
rehabilitation services, special education, and technology education.
Curriculum and Instruction
Options in curriculum and instruction are available for the C.A.S., the
Ed.D., and the various M. A. programs. Since the development of curricula and
teaching methodology is central to all levels of education, specific tracks in
curriculum and instruction have been designed for elementary, secondary,
and reading options in the masters' programs offered by the Division of
Education. In addition, discrete subject areas may also serve as the core of
specialization within curriculum and instruction.
Additional information about curriculum and instruction within the
Division of Education may be obtained through writing to:
Cynthia S. Sunal
Chairperson of Graduate Programs
Division of Education
604 Allen Hall, P.O. Box 6122
West Virginia University
Morgantown, WV 26506-6122
EDUCATION ADMINISTRATION
Richard A. Hartnett, Chairperson
606 Allen Hall
Degrees Offered: M.A.
Graduate Faculty: Members Andes, Childress, Gibbins, Goeres, Goodwin, Hartnett,
Hazi, Leary, Lilley, Martin, Meckley, Monahan, Neal, E. R. Smith, Stepp, and
Tompkins. Associate Members N. Bailey, Freeman, Gordon, Hall, Hayes, Hunt,
Queen, Sloane, Toth, J. E. Yeager, and Young.
The education administration program prepares individuals for leader-
ship positions primarily in elementary, secondary, and postsecondary insti-
tutions. Although most students are pursuing administrative careers, some
are training for research or staff positions. The unit offers graduate programs
leading to the Master of Arts and for certification in the principalship,
supervision, and superintendency. Upon admission to the program, all
students are assigned an academic adviser. All students should contact their
adviser for specific program and certification requirements.
At all degree levels, the program is dedicated to the preparation of
outstanding individuals to administer and improve education.
Graduates of education administration occupy such prominent positions
as:
1. Administrative posts in school systems as superintendents, super-
visors, and principals.
100 EDUCATION ADMINISTRATION
2. Administrative posts in colleges and universities, including general
administration, academic affairs, financial affairs, student affairs, adult and
continuing education, and institutional research and planning.
3. Administrative posts in governmental and public service agencies,
including the West Virginia State Department of Education, regional educa-
tional service agencies, and vocational rehabilitation agencies.
Applicants must comply with the WVU requirements, the requirements
of the College of Human Resources and Education, and the education
administration program. Admission to all programs is contingent on assess-
ment of complete official transcripts of all higher-education work attempted
and other evidence the faculty may deem necessary to judge probable success
in the graduate program.
The College of Human Resources and Education and the West Virginia
Department of Education are in the process of reviewing and revising all certification
programs. Students are warned that programs printed in the Catalog may not be in
effect at the time of their registration and are advised to see their adviser upon
arrival on campus.
Master of Arts (M.A.)
Optional programs are available in public school administration and
supervision, higher education administration, and extension and continuing
education. A two-semester, field-based experience is required before perma-
nent professional certification can be acquired in public school administration
and supervision. In order to graduate, the student must earn at least a 3.25
grade-point average on all program work attempted. Students seeking WV
certification must pass a West Virginia Department of Education content
specialization examination upon completion of their academic program.
Certificate of Advanced Study Concentrations
Advanced work beyond the master's degree may be taken with emphasis
in school district central office administration or in principalship. A research
project or a 6-hour planned field-based experience is required. In order to
graduate, the student must defend the research project and earn at least a 3.25
grade-point average on all program work attempted.
Doctor of Education Concentrations
The Doctor of Education degree is offered with tracks in public school
administration, higher education, and related educational organizations
(such as state departments of education). Consistent with the regulations of
the University, the College of Human Resources and Education, and the
program of education administration, each track is individually designed by
the doctoral student, the student's adviser, and the doctoral committee to meet
the student's career aspirations.
Education Administration (Ed. A.)
300. Public School Organization and Administration. I, II, S. 3 hr. Basic concepts
through which administrators, supervisors, and teachers gain understanding of
general problems related to operation of schools and school systems.
318. School Business Administration. I, II, S. 3 hr. PR: Consent. Sound business
administration for central office school administrators.
EDUCATION ADMINISTRATION 101
320. Personnel Administration. I, II, S. 3 hr. PR: Consent. The determination of student,
employee, and organizational personnel needs and the development of plans and
programs to meet these needs.
330. Principles of Education Leadership. I, II, S. 3 hr. PR: Consent. Problems of school
leaders in the areas of administration, supervision, and instruction.
331. Principles of Supervision. I, II, S. 3 hr. PR: Consent. Elementary, junior high, and
senior high supervision.
333. School Law. I, II, S. 3 hr. PR: Consent. Overview of the generally accepted legal
principles which affect the student, teacher, and principal in a public school
setting.
351. Administrative Procedures in Adult Education. I, II, S. 3 hr. PR: Consent. (Offered
off-campus only.) Theories and principles of administering adult education
organizations as they relate to planning, organizing, staffing, initiating, delegating,
integrating, motivating, decision making, communicating, establishing standards,
financing, budget defense and control, and measuring results.
352. Professionalism in Extension Service. II, S. 3 hr. PR: Consent. (Offered off-campus
only.) Role of Extension Service professionals in social change, study community
systems; professional relationships, accountability, ethics, obligations to clientele.
353. Community Education: Administration and Organization. I. 3 hr. PR: Consent.
(Offered off-campus only.) Study of the rationale, methods, and procedures in
administering and programming community education. Experiences in planning,
adapting, and evaluating programs independently and in consort with school and
community plans.
354. Management of Youth Development Programs. II, S. 3 hr. PR: Consent. (Offered
off-campus only.) Study of the management of youth programs. Emphasis on
relationships of management principles to program development, youth needs,
work plans, curriculum, resources, and evaluation.
355. Leadership Development for Youth Programs. I, II, S. 3 hr. PR: Consent. (Offered
off-campus only.) Fundamentals of administrative leadership development in
youth programs. An overview analysis of the tools, tasks, and competencies with
emphasis on group dynamics in developing leadership skills of volunteers.
373. Professional Development. I, II, S. 1-6 hr. (May be repeated for credit.) PR:
Department consent. Specially designed experiences for those interested in
advancing professional skills in a particular specialty. (Not for degree credit in
programs in the College of Human Resources and Education.)
385. Practicum. I, II, S. 1-12 hr. PR: Consent.
388. Research-Evaluation-Assessment. I, II, S. 3 hr. PR: Consent. Research, evaluation,
and assessment procedures related to administrative decision making and
problem solving to increase the general effectiveness of educational institutions.
389. School-Community Relations. I, II, S. 3 hr. PR: Consent. A study of the systems
through which the school can be interpreted to its community.
391. Advanced Topics. I, II, S. 1-6 hr.
395. The Principalship. I, S. 3 hr. A study of the active role of principals in Early,
Middle, and Adolescent schools. Specific emphasis is placed upon the areas of
effective schools, instructional leadership, special services and facilities man-
agement.
397. Master's Degree Research or Theory. I, II, S. 1-15 hr.
102 EDUCATION ADMINISTRATION
402. Superintendency. I, II, S. 3 hr. PR: M.A. in education administration, or equiv., or
consent. Roles, relationships, behaviors, and competencies which characterize the
school superintendent and staff. (Offered in Fall and Summer of even years.]
403. Education Administration Theory. I, II, S. 3 hr. PR: M.A. in education adminis-
tration, or equiv., or consent. Interdisciplinary study of the major concepts of
education administration theory and the application to educational settings.
404. Public Education Finance. I, II, S. 3 hr. PR: M.A. in education administration, or
equiv., or consent. Basic concepts. (Offered in Spring of even years.}
405. Administration of Educational Facilities. I, II, S. 3 hr. PR: M.A. in education
administration, or equiv., or consent. The planning, evaluation, and management
of current and future school facilities. (Offered in Spring of even years.)
406. Public Education and the Law. S. 3 hr. PR: M.A. in education administration or
equiv., or consent. Legal permissives and limitations involved in setting policy for
organization of, and administration of public schools. (Offered in Fail and Summer
of even years.)
407. Collective Bargaining in Public Education. II. 3 hr. PR: M.A. in education
administration, or equiv., or consent. This course is designed to inform school
administrators about the concepts and principles of negotiating and implementing
collective bargaining agreements. (Offered in Spring of even years.)
408. Organizational Analysis. I. 3 hr. PR: M.A. in education administration, or equiv.,
or consent. An examination of alternative means for the analysis of organizational
structures, interrelationships, and functions. A field analysis is required.
409. Politics of Education. II. 3 hr. PR: M.A. in education administration, or equiv., or
consent. An examination of the internal political nature of school systems, and of
the external influence of legislative, judicial, and administrative bodies, and
interest groups.
458. College Business Management. I. 3 hr. PR: M.A. in education administration, or
equiv., or consent. Covers knowledge of such areas as budgeting, grants and
contracts preparation and administration, formula funding, management infor-
mation systems, purchasing procedures and practices, and zero base budgeting.
(Offered in Fall of odd years.)
459. Adult and Continuing Education. I, II, S. 3 hr. Principles, concepts, and processes
involved in programming for adults in a community setting. Nature of adult
learning, subject matter, and learning environment. (Offered in Summer of even
years.)
460. Development of Administration in American Higher Education. I, II, S. 3 hr. The
administrative development of American higher education from 1636 to the
present, including internal trends and external forces.
461. Higher Education Administration. I, II, S. 3 hr. Organization and administration of
higher education institutions.
462. Higher Education Law. I, II, S. 3 hr. Critical legal issues of higher education —
public and private — using a case study approach.
463. Higher Education Finance. I, II, S. 3 hr. Financial concerns in higher education with
emphasis on taxation and legislative actions, sources of income, budgeting, and
cost analysis. (Offered in Fall of even years.)
464. Issues in Higher Education. I, II, S. 3 hr. Current societal and institutional issues
which tend to shape the mission and life-style of an institution. (Offered in Fall of
odd years.)
EDUCATION ADMINISTRATION 103
465. Institutional Research and Planning. I, II, S. 3 hr. Accumulation, analysis, and
interpretation of data relevant to decision making and the allocation of institutional
resources. (Offered in Spring of even years.]
466. The College Student. I, II, S. 3 hr. Review of research and literature on college
students from freshman through graduate school. Emphasis on student subcultural
patterns. (Offered in Spring of odd years.)
467. Higher Education Collective Bargaining. I, II, S. 3 hr. The process and content of
collective bargaining in higher education and its impact on institutional governance
and academic jurisdictions. (Offered in Spring of even years.)
468. Community and Junior Colleges. I, II, S. 3 hr. Development, role, functions,
organization, and curriculum of community and junior colleges in the United
States, with special emphasis on West Virginia.
469. Higher Education Internship. I, II, S. 3 hr. (May be repeated for credit.) Practical
experiences in the administration of an organizational unit under supervision of
the unit's chief administrator.
470. Principal's Planned Field-Based Experience. I, II. 3 hr. PR: Three years of
successful experience as a teacher and have a position as principal or assistant
principal. Consists of problem-solving techniques and seminar activities as
applied to explicit problems in the professional environment. (Required for
permanent certification as a principal.]
471. Supervisor's Planned Field-Based Experience. I, II. 3 hr. PR: Three years of
teaching experience, 15 hours completed in a master's degree program, and be
employed full-time as a supervisor. Consists of problem-solving techniques and
seminar activities as applied to explicit problems in the professional environment.
(Required for permanent certification as a supervisor.]
472. Superintendent's Planned Field-Based Experience. I, II. 3 hr. PR: Five years of
successful experience as a teacher or supervisor, and employed as a superintendent
or assistant superintendent. Consists of problem-solving techniques and seminar
activities as applied to explicit problems in the professional environment.
(Required for permanent certification as a superintendent.)
480. Seminar. I, II, S. 1-6 hr. PR: Consent.
485. Special Topics. I, II, S. 1-6 hr. PR: Consent.
491. Advanced Study. I, II, S. 1-6 hr. PR: Consent. Advanced subjects which are not
covered in regularly scheduled courses. Study may be independent or through
specially scheduled lectures.
497. Research. I, II, S. 1-15 hr. PR: Consent.
EDUCATIONAL PSYCHOLOGY
Anne H. Nardi, Department Chairperson
608 Allen Hall
Degree Offered: M.A.
Graduate Faculty: Members B. Bailey, Baker, Fraley, Grasso, Hursh, McAvoy, A. H.
Nardi, Reinhard, M. Tseng, E. A. Vargas, J. S. Vargas, and Walls. Associate Members
Paterson and Stead.
The educational psychology program in the College of Human Resources
and Education offers opportunities for graduate study and research leading to
the Master of Art. The principal goal of the program is to educate professionals
in instruction, service, and research. Professional preparation focuses on
learning and development, instructional development, and measurement,
104 EDUCATIONAL PSYCHOLOGY
research, and statistics. Accordingly, students are expected to achieve
competencies in these areas.
Programs are planned jointly by the student, the student's adviser, and
the student's committee to meet particular career needs. Minor fields of study
are also planned for each student as appropriate. In addition to the general
requirements of the University and the College of Human Resources and
Education, the department requires a core of courses and supporting compe-
tencies of all graduate students.
Educational psychologists function in a variety of settings. The program
prepares and places competent educational psychologists in educational
settings at all levels, such as educational agencies at local, state, and federal
levels; public and private human service centers; medical centers; and
business and industrial settings.
The educational psychology doctoral option is being revised. Students who
wish to pursue the Ed.D. degree are advised that the Ed.D. option printed in this
section may not be in effect at the time of their registration and are advised to see the
department chairperson for details upon arrival.
Requirements
All applicants must comply with the general requirements of the
University and the College of Human Resources and Education. The applicant
must have an undergraduate degree from an accredited institution and must
submit official transcripts of the undergraduate work, the official scores for
either the Graduate Record Examination (GRE) or the Miller Analogy Test
(MAT), and three letters of reference.
Each student is expected to complete the following core of courses as part
of the master's plan of studies:
Ed. P. 300— Advanced Educational Psychology
Ed. P. 311— Statistical Methods 1
Ed. P. 320 — Introduction to Research
Ed. P. 330— Foundations of Educational Measurement
Doctor of Education (Ed.D.) Option
All applicants must comply with the graduate requirements of the
University, the College of Human Resources and Education, and the option in
educational psychology. Admission to candidacy for the Ed.D. degree is
granted only to individuals holding a master's degree. Students may enter the
doctoral program without a master's degree within the program before
advancing to candidacy for the Ed.D. degree. A master's thesis is required of
all the students. If a student enters the program with a master's degree, the
relevant part of that degree, but no more than 30 hours, may be accepted into
the student's doctoral program of study.
Performance Standards
The credentials for all applicants are screened by a three member
admissions committee of the department. The guidelines employed in evalu-
ating applications are:
1. Total GRE scores of 1,100 or MAT score of 60,
2. An undergraduate GPA of 3.0,
3. Level of graduate work completed to date,
EDUCATIONAL PSYCHOLOGY 105
4. The sources and strength of letters of recommendation,
5. Nature and quality of former scholarly work,
6. The degree to which the applicant's goals and objectives may be
accomplished if admitted to the program, and
7. The applicant's potential for contributing to the department if awarded
financial aid.
To remain in good standing, a student must have an average grade of B or
better for all courses in the program and make satisfactory progress toward
the completion of the program competencies (as described in the following
section).
Option Requirements
The option requires a minimum of 72 hours of graduate credit beyond a
bachelor's degree or 42 hours beyond a master's degree. In addition, completion
of a core of required courses, fulfillment of competency requirements, and an
approved dissertation are mandatory.
Each student is expected to complete the following core courses as part of
the doctoral plan of studies:
Ed.P. 420— Advanced Educational Research (PR: Ed.P. 311)
Ed. P. 440 — Human Development and Behavior
Ed.P. 450 — Psychological Foundations of Learning
Ed.P. 451 — Principles of Instruction
The student is also expected to enroll in a doctoral seminar, Ed.P. 496, for
two semesters for in-depth coverage of specialized content issues in educa-
tional psychology.
There are three competency areas in the program. They are learning and
development, instructional development, and measurement, research, and
statistics. Students are expected to fulfill the program competency require-
ments by meeting the goals and objectives specified for the program. The
learning and development competency product will take the form of a
theoretical paper, the instructional development competency product will be
a course or other type of instructional sequence of comparable magnitude, and
the measurement, research, and statistics competency product will be a data-
based research paper of publishable quality.
Application Information
Inquiries should be addressed to the Chairperson of the Department of
Educational Psychology, Allen Hall, College of Human Resources and
Education, West Virginia University, P.O. Box 6122, Morgantown, WV
26505-6122.
Educational Psychology (Ed. P.)
231. Sampling Methods. I. 3 hr. PR: An introductory course in statistics. Methods of
sampling from finite and infinite populations, choice of sampling unit, sample
survey design, estimation of confidence limits and optimum sample size, and
single- and multi-stage sampling procedures. (Aiso listed as Stat. 231.)
260. Media and Microcomputers in Instruction. I, II, S. 3 hr. The effective operation and
educational uses of educational media including microcomputers. Hands-on
experience with equipment, and in designing materials for an instructional unit
incorporating media and/or microcomputers.
106 EDUCATIONAL PSYCHOLOGY
269. Behavioral Technology for Education. I, II, S. 3 hr. PR: Ed. P. 105 recommended.
Behavioral science applied to instructional systems. Complex systems; feedback
loops; measuring relevant variables, collecting data. Applying schedules of
reinforcement. Effective stimulus control for students and administrators. Rela-
tionship between system and institution. Behavioral ethics.
300. Advanced Educational Psychology. I, II, S. 3 hr. Design for beginning graduate
students. Psychological principles of learning and development as they relate to
processes of classroom instruction.
301. Introductory Behavior Analysis: Human Resources. I, II, S. 3 hr. Introduction to
behavior analysis in education and human resources. Basic practice in measuring
and shaping human behavior. A comprehensive examination of relationships
among human organisms, environment, and behavior.
311. Statistical Methods 1. I, II, S. 3 hr. PR: Math. 3. Basic concepts of statistical
models, distributions, probability, random, variables, tests of hypotheses, con-
fidence, intervals, regressions, correlation, transformation, F and X2 distributions,
analysis of variance and sample size.
312. Statistical Methods 2. I, II, S. 3 hr. PR: Stat. 311. Extension of basic concepts of
statistical models, design of experiments, multiway classification models, facto-
rials, split plot design, simple covariance, orthogonal comparisons, multiple linear
and nonlinear regression and correlation analysis, chi-square and nonparametric
statistics.
320. Introduction to Research. I, II, S. 3 hr. PR: Ed. P. 311. Basic concepts, strategies,
methodologies, designs, and procedures of research in education. Major emphasis
on integrating research designs, measurements, and statistics for initiating
research projects, collecting and analyzing data, and interpreting and reporting
findings.
321. Design of Experiments. I, II, S. 3 hr. PR: Ed. P. 320 or 330 or equiv. Elements of
experimental design and their implications for (including computergraph) setting
up research, sampling methods, recording and display of data, interpretation of
data, design and analysis of experiments over time, trend analysis statistics
appropriate in individual and group designs.
330. Foundations of Educational Measurement. I, II, S. 3 hr. An examination and
application of norm-referenced and criterion-referenced principles and procedures
to the measurement and prediction of pupil performance.
333. Nonparametric Statistics. II. 3 hr. PR: Introductory course in statistics. Single
sample tests; for related samples, two independent samples, K related samples, K
independent samples, and measures of correlation.
341. Multivariate Methods 1. I. 3 hr. PR: Stat. 311 or equiv. Basic matrix operations,
multiple regression analysis, discriminant analysis for two groups, multivariate
analysis of variance for one- and two-way designs, and analysis of covariance
involving multiple covariates. Applying SAS Procedure Matrix for data analyses.
342. Multivariate Methods 2. II. 3 hr. PR: Stat. 311 or equiv. Matrix operations,
multivariate multiple regression analysis, canonical correlation analysis, dis-
criminant analysis for multiple groups, qualitative discriminant analysis applying
Bayes' theorem, principal component analysis, and fundamentals of common
factor analysis. Data analyses with SAS Procedure Matrix.
343. Statistical Analysis in Education. I, II, S. 3 hr. PR: Ed. P. 330 or consent. Review
measures of central tendency, percentiles, and correlation. Emphasis placed on
correlation, regression, testing hypothesis, non-parametric tests, and other mea-
sures in analysis and inference.
EDUCATIONAL PSYCHOLOGY 107
350. Applied Behavior Analysis. I. 3 hr. PR: Ed. P. 301 or equiv. Application of
reinforcement theory as an instructional technique in changing human behavior.
Analysis of problems in terms of behavior and the design of instruction and
treatment programs to produce desired change.
359. Conceptual Foundations of Behavior Analysis. I. 3 hr. Comprehensive introduction
to the basic science of human behavior and its philosophy. Provides a conceptual
framework for a variety of applied fields.
360. Behavior Analysis: Teaching/Training Systems. II. 3 hr. PR: Consent. Analyzing
behavior of teachers/trainers; behavior analytic designs for teaching arrangements
that respect scientific principles of human behavior from perspectives of both
teachers and students; comparative analysis of teaching systems; cybernetic
teaching; practice designing instruction.
361. Cybernetic Systems of Individualized Instruction. II. 3 hr. PR: Ed.P. 360.
Advanced analysis of behavioral education systems. Principles of designing and
developing behavioral teaching systems. Applied design. Instructional system
projects will be undertaken either individually or in teams.
362. Instructional Systems— Administration and Management. II, S. 3 hr. PR: Ed. P.
361 or consent. The conduct of instructional operations within instructional
systems; the administration and management of organizational arrangements to
support system approaches to instruction.
364. Precision Teaching. II. 3 hr. Design and adapt materials for precision teaching for
educational decisions and for research.
370. Programmatic Research. II. (Alternate Years.) 3 hr. How to conduct programmatic
research: how to phrase the question, select a measurement procedure, collect
data, and use data to make experimental decisions as work progresses.
371. Behavioral Measurement. I, II. (Alternate Years.) 3 hr. Analysis of the behavior of
measuring. Measurements of the behavior of individuals and in groups in applied
settings. The role of measures in contingencies governing the behavior of subjects
and practitioner. Techniques for graphic analysis.
385. Practicum. I, II, S. 1-12 hr. PR: Consent.
391. Problems in Advanced Educational Psychology. I, II, S. 1-6 hr.
397. Master's Degree Research or Theory. I, II, S. 1-15 hr.
400. Verbal Behavior 1. 1. 3 hr. PR: Ed. P. 350 or consent. Behavioral analysis of complex
verbal behavior in person to person contacts in text materials, and in instructional
systems.
401. Verbal Behavior 2. II. 3 hr. PR: Ed. P. 400 or consent. Advanced concepts in the
analysis of verbal behavior. Review of current theoretical and experimental
literature.
420. Seminar in Educational Research. I, II, S. 3 hr. PR: Ed. P. 311 and consent.
Identification of research problems in education, consideration of alternative
designs and methods of investigations, and development of a research proposal at
the advanced graduate level.
423. Designing Single Case/Group Research. I. 3 hr. Strategies and tactics for
observation, measurement, and experimental investigation of functional relation-
ships between the behavior of individuals and their environment are presented as
a means for understanding what controls human behavior.
440. Human Development and Behavior. I, II, S. 3 hr. Psychological theories of human
development. Contemporary theories analyzed and compared with emphasis on
their implication for classroom behavior and the educational process.
108 EDUCATIONAL PSYCHOLOGY
450. Psychological Foundations of Learning. I, II, S. 3 hr. Psychological and philosophi-
cal foundations of major learning theories and their implications for instructional
procedures.
451. Principles of Instruction. I, II, S. 3 hr. PR: Consent. Basic principles of teaching-
learning process implied in major learning theories; study of factors in learning,
variables in instructional program, and principles of instructional design.
452. Stimulus Conditions in Learning. II. 3 hr. Stimulus conditions and stimulus
control in human association learning, discrimination learning, sequence learning,
concept learning, and problem solving.
480. Seminar in Educational Psychology. I, II, S. 1-6 hr. PR: Consent.
481. Special Topics in Educational Psychology. I, II, S. 1-6 hr. PR: Consent.
490. Teaching Practicum. I, II. 1-3 hr. PR: Consent. Intended for graduate students with
college teaching responsibility. Provides a supervised experience for graduate
students in a teaching situation.
491. Advanced Study. I, II, S. 1-6 hr. PR: Consent. Investigation in advanced areas of
educational psychology.
496. Graduate Seminar. I, II. 1 hr. PR: Consent. Designed to permit graduate students an
opportunity to present research to the assembled faculty and the graduate student
body.
497. Research. I, II, S. 1-15 hr. PR: Consent. Dissertation.
498. Thesis. I, II, S. 2-4 hr. PR: Consent.
ELECTRICAL AND COMPUTER ENGINEERING
Ronald L. Klein, Chairperson of the Department
823 Engineering Sciences Building
Degrees Offered: M.S.E.E., M.S.E., Ph.D.*
Graduate Faculty: Members Alajajian, Choudhry, Cooley, Feliachi, Jerabek, Joseph,
Klein, Kumar, McConnell, Middleton, Mikhael, Noore, Nutter, Roumeliotis, Sims,
Smith, and Swartwout.
The Department of Electrical and Computer Engineering, with 17 faculty
members, 275 undergraduate students, and over 65 graduate students, offers
excellent graduate areas of emphasis in:
1. Digital systems design, including microprocessor applications, ad-
vanced computer architecture, and computer engineering.
2. Control systems, including classical and modern theory and appli-
cations.
3. Signal processing, including digital filtering and communications.
4. Electric power systems, including stability, transients, real time
control, protection and steady state analysis.
5. Electromagnetics, including antennas and microwave systems.
6. Electronics, including circuit analysis, integrated circuit devices, and
VLSI design.
Approximately seven M.S. and two Ph.D. degrees are awarded each year
and these graduates are in great demand by industry.
*The department is authorized to award the B.S.Cp.E. degree (Computer Engineering). At this
time the department is planning for the M.S.Cp.E. degree, however it has not yet been authorized.
The Ph.D. is awarded by the College of Engineering and is available with emphasis in electrical or
computer engineering.
ELECTRICAL AND COMPUTER ENGINEERING 109
Digital Systems Design
Digital computer and microprocessor systems design is the most techno-
logically intensive component in the electrical and computer engineering
curriculum. Integrated circuits with increasing capabilities are rapidly being
developed. In turn, the demand for electrical engineers and computer
engineers with strong educational backgrounds is rising very rapidly. The
electrical and computer engineering curriculum offers a large selection of both
required and elective graduate courses in computer systems. These cover
such topics as digital logic, microprocessor applications, interfacing, computer
architecture, computer arithmetic, computer networks, performance evalua-
tion, VLSI testing techniques, and fault tolerant computing. In addition, the
department cooperates closely with the University's computer science faculty
so that E.C.E. graduate students are able to include computer science courses
in real-time operating systems, data structures, digital communication
software, artificial intellegence, and interactive graphics in their program. A
number of research projects utilizing computers and/or design of computer
systems has been completed or are being completed by faculty and graduate
students in the department. Some examples are real-time monitoring of
environmental conditions in a coal mine using digital communications and a
minicomputer, a distributed microprocessor monitoring system, a study of
the methodology whereby reliability of an environmental monitoring system
can be established, and a knowledge based decision support system for
mining.
The Department of Electrical and Computer Engineering operates and
maintains a number of dedicated computers running the UNIX operating
system. These computers support both the instructional and research activities
of the department. These systems are a VAX 11/780, several PDP ll's, a
variety of stand-alone microcomputers, and workstations. In addition the
department is linked to two College of Engineering computers, a Harris HCX-
9 and a VAX 11/785, and to the extensive computing facilities of WVNET by
means of an ETHERNET system. Through this link and a 1.5 megabit
microwave link to the computers in Computer Science, the department has
access to several additional VAX systems and to many computing networks
as well as to the Pittsburgh Supercomputing Center.
Control Systems
The study of control systems is a highly mathematical topic with a broad
range of applications. This subject area interests those who wish to apply
technology to control dynamical systems. Signals from sensors, usually
processed by a computer, are necessary for proper control of a system.
Consequently, the student interested in control systems will also take course
work in computer systems and in digital signal processing.
The graduate curriculum in control and systems engineering consists of
courses in both classical and modern control theory and applications. These
include modeling techniques in both the frequency and time domains for
continuous and discrete time systems, optimal control, digital control, and
estimation theory. Classical techniques for control systems and design tools
such as root locus, Nyquist, and Bode methods for linear time-variant systems
are also included. Also offered are courses in adaptive control, large scale
systems, and stochastic control.
Currently, the faculty in the control area are actively involved in a
number of research areas. These include both sponsored and unsponsored
110 ELECTRICAL AND COMPUTER ENGINEERING
research activities with some projects related to a specific application and
some being of a theoretical nature having a wide range of applications.
Research projects in control and systems engineering include the following:
1. Research in Large Scale Systems. The primary emphasis is on
designing fast estimate algorithms for distributed systems.
2. Analysis and design of tracking systems. Signal processing algorithms
are designed to improve the position estimates provided by a tracking radar.
Kalman filtering is the principal algorithm used in this study.
3. Reduced order systems design. The optimization of reduced-order
models, filters, and controllers is considered in this investigation. Optimal
control theory is applied to linear stochastic models to obtain designs having
limited complexity but excellent performance.
4. Deconvolution methods for seismic signal processing. Methods of
deconvolution for nonstationary seismic signals are investigated. These
include modified Wiener and Kalman filtering techniques.
5. Fast algorithm design. Minimum mean-square-error signal processing
algorithms are developed subject to a constraint on the allowable number of
multiplications per iteration.
6. Modeling of power-system load dynamics. The daily variations in an
electric utility's power demand are quite significant. For operational control
of generation to meet user's demands, a dynamic model of the variations is
useful. When developed, this model can be used to forecast future demand
values and schedule power generation accordingly.
The faculty in the control area has research sponsored by the U.S. Office
of Naval Research, the National Science Foundation, the state of West
Virginia, and private organizations. In addition to the topics listed above, the
control group is beginning to be involved with control research in the robotics
and flexible manufacturing area.
Signal Processing and Communications
Signal processing and communications is an area of emphasis and
strength in the department. Faculty and graduate students conduct basic and
applied research covering a wide range of topics. Signal detection, and circuit
and system designs for processing these signals, particularly those using
digital hardware, have experienced dramatic evolution recently. Important
areas of application of research results obtained in the department include:
medical diagnosis, geophysical prospecting, speech and speaker recognition,
echo cancellation in satellite communications, and noise cancellation in
acoustic systems. The graduate program includes several courses to support
ongoing research in adaptive systems, fundamentals of digital signal process-
ing (DSP), applications of DSP, and advanced topics in DSP. Also the
department has a well established and equipped DSP research laboratory.
Specific examples of research in progress are: speech modeling and compres-
sion, adaptive noise cancellation, and three-dimensional tomographic imaging.
In the speech modeling area, several new techniques for representing
speech signals that promise more accurate representation without increasing
the data rate are under investigation. The noise cancellation research
addresses the generation of optimum algorithms as well as their time and
frequency domain implementations. Hardware realizations of these algorithms
using DSP microprocessors for acoustic noise cancellation are in progress.
The three-dimensional tomographic research under way explores nondestruc-
tive methods which are attractive ecologically, technically, and economically
and which identify the properties to characterize underground resources.
ELECTRICAL AND COMPUTER ENGINEERING 1 1 1
Electrical communications have made dramatic impacts on human life.
The department offers courses in the basics of communications as well as
more contemporary new developments, such as digital communications,
pulse code modulation, frequency shift keying, and spread spectrum systems.
Examples of research projects in communications engineering being conducted
by faculty and graduate students are: development of an improved communi-
cation system for an urban transportation system, electronically program-
mable active filters, and the use of spread spectrum techniques.
Electric Power Systems
Electric power systems historically have been an area of emphasis in the
electrical engineering curriculum, and the graduate program in power
systems at WVU is quite mature. Five graduate courses are offered in this area
on a regular basis. In addition, there are four senior elective/graduate courses
on such subjects as distribution, industrial power systems, power electronics,
and advanced power systems analysis. Outside research funding for work on
reliability, grounding, transmission, electric transportation, and optimal
design provides excellent support for both graduate students and faculty
research. Extensive cooperation with industry also provides ample opportu-
nity for field study.
Electromagnetics, Antennas, and Microwave Systems
Electromagnetics encompasses the generation, radiation, propagation,
scattering, interaction with matter, and reception of electromagnetic energy
from radio to optical frequencies. The electromagnetics faculty has strong
credentials for, and interest in, theoretical, experimental, and numerical
techniques. The department offers senior/graduate courses in antennas,
microwaves, and radar. In addition, graduate-level courses in advanced
electromagnetics, wave propagation, relativistic field theory, antenna theory,
and guided waves are offered on a regular basis. Research projects, most of
which have been funded by sponsors outside the University, have been
conducted in the following areas: Fourier transform inversion methods,
geometrical theory of diffraction, numerical techniques, electromagnetic
wave propagation, electrical properties of coal at radio frequencies, tomo-
graphical reconstruction methods, electromagnetic instrumentation for coal-
related applications, microwave communication analysis (terrestrial and
satellite), relativisitic rotational electrodynamics, and new solutions to the
Einstein-Maxwell field equations.
Electronics, Circuit Analysis, Integrated Circuits and VLSI
Electronics, circuit analysis, IC's and VLSI are all areas of emphasis in the
department. Courses are offered in advanced circuit analysis, integrated
circuits (both analog and digital), radio frequency electronics, noise and
grounding and power electronics. Recent research efforts in electronics
include the development of electronic systems for monitoring and control
with applications in mining and agriculture, RF high voltage electronics, and
power electronics. Work in power electronics applications includes the
development of an arc reduction controller for mine transportation systems
and the design of a power system stabilizer.
A major new thrust in the department is in the area of VLSI systems
design. Circuit fundamentals, device physics, and system principles are
emphasized along with teaching the fundamentals of CAD/CAE tools.
Structured design and testing is also an active area of research.
1 12 ELECTRICAL AND COMPUTER ENGINEERING
The Department of Electrical and Computer Engineering is authorized to
admit students to the degree programs of the Master of Science in Electrical
Engineering (M.S.E.E.) and the Master of Science in Engineering (M.S.E.). It
also participates in the College of Engineering interdisciplinary Ph.D. degree
program. M.S. graduate students must comply with the rules for Master's
degrees as set forth in the Guidelines for Masters Degree Programs Offered in
the College of Engineering. Ph.D. students must comply with the rule set forth
in the brochure, The College of Engineering Doctor of Philosophy in Engi-
neering.
Master of Science in Electrical Engineering (M.S.E.E.)
Master of Science in Engineering (M.S.E.)
Admission Requirements
1. An applicant must have an excellent record in previous college work.
To be admitted as a regular graduate student in Electrical and Computer
Engineering, a cumulative grade-point average of 3.0 (of 4.0), or its equivalent,
is required.
2. An applicant who cannot meet condition 1 may be considered for
admission in one of several conditional categories (See "Classification of
Graduate Students," Part 4.)
3. Applicants who are not WVU graduates must submit scores of the
Aptitude Test of the Graduate Record Examination.
4. All international applicants whose native language is not English
must submit Test of English as a Foreign Language (TOEFL) scores. A
minimum of 550 is required for admission.
Course Requirements. All M.S. degree candidates will be required to meet
the following minimum requirements:
1. E.C.E. 325 and at least one course selected from the following: E.C.E.
315, 333, 340, 350 or 357, 364, and 370—6 hr. (min.).
2. Selected courses offered outside the Department of Electrical and
Computer Engineering to provide analytical techniques supporting the
student's graduate program. (For example: mathematics, physics, computer
science, etc.)— 6 hr. (min.).
Each graduate student will be required to make an oral presentation of
his/her research program to a graduate seminar near the conclusion of the
student's research but before scheduling the final examination.
Entrance Interview. All students beginning graduate study in the
department will be given an entrance interview. The interview determines if a
student needs any course work in order to pursue a graduate degree program
and aids the faculty in advising the student. As a result of the interview, the
student and the committee will prepare a mutually acceptable preliminary
plan of study.
Students with deficiencies in their undergraduate programs may be
required to take some engineering or other courses as prerequisites for
graduate courses. These deficiencies are usually noted as a condition for
admission. However, they may also be specified as a result of the entrance
interview.
Qualifying Examination. Each student entering graduate study leading to
the M.S. or the Ph.D. degree must pass the qualifying examination at the level
of competence appropriate to the degree sought. Details regarding this exami-
nation are available from the departmental graduate academic adviser.
Thesis. Normally, a thesis is required of all M.S. candidates in electrical
engineering. Approval by the Advisory and Examining Committee is necessary
ELECTRICAL AND COMPUTER ENGINEERING 113
before the thesis will be accepted. The thesis must be presented in a form that
conforms to general requirements of the University.
Final Examination. Each candidate for an M.S. degree shall pass a final
examination administered by the student's Advisory and Examining Com-
mittee. This examination will be oral and shall cover the defense of the thesis,
or report, when applicable.
Students may be admitted to the M.S.E.E. program if they hold a
baccalaureate degree in electrical engineering or its equivalent. Students who
lack this requirement may either make up the necessary undergraduate
course work or may apply for admission to the M.S.E. program with emphasis
in electrical engineering.
The M.S.E. program is available to students who are interested in
graduate work in electrical engineering, but who hold a baccalaureate degree
from another field of engineering or from another discipline. Students with a
baccalaureate degree from another field of engineering, or from one of the
sciences, should contact the department for further information. In general, a
student in the M.S.E. program will be expected to either complete certain
undergraduate prerequisite courses or attain equivalent competence but will
not be required to complete all of the requirements equivalent to the B.S.E.E.
degree. However, all graduate students will be required to meet the prerequi-
sites for each course taken for credit.
Doctor of Philosophy (Ph.D.)
Students interested in the graduate program in Electrical and Computer
Engineering and who wish to pursue the Ph.D. degree should contact the
department for information about the interdisciplinary Ph.D. program in
engineering. While it is possible for a student with only a B.S. degree to enroll
directly in the Ph.D. program, it is usually advisable for the student to earn an
M.S. degree first. The reason for this is the fact that a student's performance in
an M.S. degree program with thesis provides insight into the student's
research ability whereas most B.S. degree programs do not. Students in the
Ph.D. program must comply with the regulations set forth in the College of
Engineering brochure describing the Doctor of Philosophy in Engineering.
A Typical Ph.D. Degree Program
A typical Ph.D. program will take between three and four years beyond
the baccalaureate degree. The courses chosen for a student's program are
selected to develop the student's expertise in his/her area of interest and to
strengthen knowledge of other areas that will support the student's research
endeavors. A possible outline for a Ph.D. program:
First Year — M.S. degree
Second Year —
(a) An approved plan of study consisting mainly of courses in the
300 and 400 series.
(b) A pass in the qualifying examination for a Ph.D.
(c) Admission to candidacy for the Ph.D. degree.
(1) Passes on written and oral comprehensive examinations.
(2) Successful defense of research proposal.
(3) Completion of all program requirements set by the student's
advisory and examining committee.
Third Year-
fa) Completion of research and the dissertation,
(b) Dissertation defense in the final examination.
1 14 ELECTRICAL AND COMPUTER ENGINEERING
Research work for the doctoral dissertation is expected to represent a
significant contribution to engineering. It may entail a fundamental investi-
gation into a specialized area or a broad and comprehensive system analysis
or design.
Electrical and Computer Engineering (E.C.E.)
208. Power Electronics. 3 hr. PR: E.C.E. 130 and E.C.E. 158, 159 (concurrently) or
consent. Application of power semiconductor components and devices to power
systems problems: power control, conditioning processing, and switching. Course
supplemented by laboratory problems. 3 hr. rec.
216. Fundamentals of Control Systems. 3 hr. PR: E.C.E. 124, 127. Introduction to
classical and modern control; signal flow graphs; state-variable characterization;
time-domain, root locus, and frequency techniques; stability criteria. 3 hr. rec.
230. Electrical Power Distribution Systems. 3 hr. PR: E.C.E. 131, 136 or consent.
General considerations; load characteristics; subtransmission and distribution
substations; primary and secondary distribution; secondary network systems;
distribution transformers; voltage regulation and application of capacitors;
voltage fluctuations; protective device coordination. 3 hr. rec.
231. Power Systems Analysis. 3 hr. PR: E.C.E. 131, 136 or consent. Incidence and
network matrices, Y-Bus, symmetrical and unsymmetrical faults, load-flow and
economic dispatch, MW-frequency and MVAR-voltage control. The power system
simulator will be used for demonstrations. 3 hr. rec.
244. Introduction to Antennas and Radiating Systems. 3 hr. PR: E.C.E. 141 or consent.
Fundamentals, parameters, radiation integrals, linear antennas, far-field approx-
imations, loop antennas, arrays and continuous distributions, broadband dipoles
and matching techniques, broadband antennas, frequency independent antennas,
and aperture antennas. 3 hr. rec.
245. Microwave Circuits and Devices. 3 hr. PR: E.C.E. 141. UHF transmission line
theory, impedance matching techniques and charts, general circuit theory of one
port and multiports for waveguiding systems, impedance and scattering matrices,
wave-guide circuit elements, microwave energy sources. Course will be supple-
mented by laboratory problems. 3 hr. rec.
246. Radar and RFSystems Engineering. 3 hr. PR: E.C.E. 126, 141, 156, 157, 158, 159. An
introduction to radar system fundamentals and techniques, including a discussion
of modulation and detection theory, RF amplifiers, mixers, antennas, and propa-
gation effects. Application of probability and statistics to signal processing and
detection in noise. 3 hr. rec.
248. Fiber Optic Communications. 3 hr. PR: E.C.E. 126, 141, 151. Fundamentals of optics
and light wave propagation, guided wave propagation and optical wave guides,
light sources and light detectors, couplers, connections, and fiber networks,
modulation, noise, and detection in communication systems. 3 hr. rec.
251. Noise and Grounding of Electronic Systems. 1 hr. PR: E.C.E. 158, 159 or consent.
Analysis of extrinsic and intrinsic noise in electronic circuits. Design techniques
to reduce or eliminate noise. 1 hr. rec.
252. Operational Amplifier Applications. 3 hr. PR: E.C.E. 158, 159. Linear integrated
circuit building blocks applied to such functions as amplification, controlled
frequency response, analog-digital conversion, sampling, and waveform genera-
tion. 2 hr. rec, 3 hr. lab.
257. Transistor Circuits. 3 hr. PR: E.C.E. 158, 159 or equiv. Analysis and design of
subcircuits used in analog integrated circuit modules. Transistor models, low-
frequency response of multistage amplifiers, current sources, output stages and
active loads. 3 hr. rec.
ELECTRICAL AND COMPUTER ENGINEERING 115
259. Solid State RF Engineering. 3 hr. PR: E.C.E. 126, 141, 156, 158 or corequisite.
Analysis and design of electronic circuitry for RF telecommunications systems.
Treatment of electrical noise, RF amplifiers, oscillators and mixers. Applications
of AM/FM/TV. Receiver and transmitter technology for HF/VHF/UHF and
satellite communication. 3 hr. rec.
264. Introduction to Communication Systems. 3 hr. PR: E.C.E. 126. Introduction to the
first principles of communication system design. Analysis and comparison of
standard analog and pulse modulation techniques relative to band-width, noise,
threshold, and hardware constraints. Communication systems are treated as
opposed to individual circuits and components of the system. 3 hr. rec.
268. Digital Signal Processing Fundamentals. 3 hr. PR: E.C.E. 126, 127, 156, 157.
Theories, techniques, and procedure used in analysis, design, and implementation
of digital and sampled data filters. Algorithms and computer programming for
software realization. Digital and sampled data realizations, switched capacitor
and charge-coupled device IC's. 3 hr. rec.
270. Digital Systems Design. 3 hr. PR: E.C.E. 71. Hierarchical design methods, from the
machine architecture, through data flow concepts and control flow concepts, to
implementation. Topics include: design methodology, design techniques, machine
organization, control unit implementation and interface design. 3 hr. rec.
272. Introduction to Computer Architecture. 3 hr. PR: E.C.E. 71. Basic digital systems
and computer architecture. Definition of information storage concepts, central
processor designs, and input/output concepts. Content addressable memories,
microprogrammed control, addressing techniques, interrupts, and cycle stealing. 3
hr. rec.
273. Computer Interfacing Techniques. 3 hr. PR: E.C.E. 274. Analysis and design of
computer systems with emphasis on interfacing and data communications. Bus
and memory systems, parallel serial and analog interfaces, the man-machine
interface. 3 hr. rec.
274. Introduction to Microprocessor-Based Design. 3 hr. PR: E.C.E. 156, 157, 272 or
consent. Coreq.: E.C.E. 276. Microprocessor terminology and system design. A
systems approach is taken to individual student designs of microprocessor
systems. A "hands-on" electronic development approach is taken using state-of-
the-art computer technology. 3 hr. rec.
275. Microprocessor Interfacing Techniques. 3 hr. PR: E.C.E. 274. Interfacing com-
ponents and methods are analyzed in terms of their applications and electronics
requirements. Includes driver/receiver circuits, high power interace devices, A/D-
D/A interfacing, timing margins, series/parallel communications, interrupt-
driven and direct memory access. (A working microprocessor is required.) 3 hr.
rec.
276. Microprocessor Laboratory. 1 hr. Coreq.: E.C.E. 274. Laboratory to accompany
E.C.E. 274. A microprocessor-based single board computer (SBC) is designed and
built using wire wrap techniques. Once operational, the SBC is programmed in
assembly language. A semester project is required. 2 hr. lab.
280. Electrical Problems 1. 1-3 hr. PR: Junior, senior, or graduate standing.
281. Biomedical Electrical Measurements. 2 hr. PR: E.C.E. 158 and 159 or consent.
Biomedical instrumentation for human subjects. Origin and characteristics of
biological and electrical signals. Instrument design requirements and detailed
analysis of cardiac support and intensive-care monitoring equipment. 2 hr. rec.
312. Stochastic Systems Theory. 3 hr. PR: Consent. Probability distribution and
density functions. Bayes rule and conditional probability. Stochastic processes
and linear systems. Gauss-Markov Processes. Optimal linear estimation. Intro-
duction to Wiener and Kalman filtering. Decision theory fundamentals. 3 hr. rec.
116 ELECTRICAL AND COMPUTER ENGINEERING
314. Stochastic Systems Theory. 3 hr. PR: Consent. Probability distribution and
density functions. Bayes rule and conditional probability. Stochastic process and
linear systems. Gauss-Markov Process. Optimal linear estimation. Introduction to
Wiener and Kalman filtering. Decision theory fundamentals. 3 hr. rec.
315. State Variable Analysis of Systems. 3 hr. PR: Consent. Matrix theory and linear
transformations as applied to linear control systems. The state-space on time-
domain study of stability, controllability, observability, etc. 3 hr. rec.
316. Optimal Control. 3 hr. PR: E.C.E. 312, 364. Methods of direct synthesis and
optimization of feedback systems; Wiener theory; Pontryagin's maximum principle;
dynamic programming; adaptive feedback systems. 3 hr. rec.
317. Introduction to Digital Control. 3 hr. PR: E.C.E. 216 or equiv. or consent. Sampling
of continuous-time signals; transform analysis; analysis of discrete-time systems.
Translation of analog design. Controllability and observability; State-space
design methods; and introduction to optimal control for discrete systems. 3 hr. rec.
325. Advanced Linear Circuit Analysis. 3 hr. PR: Consent. Systematic formulation of
circuit equations. Use of operational techniques to find total solutions. Applications
and characteristics of the Laplace and Fourier transforms, matrix algebra,
complex variable theory and state variables are made to circuit analysis and
elementary ciruit synthesis. 3 hr. rec.
330. Advanced Electrical Machinery. 3 hr. PR: E.C.E. 131, 136 or consent. Theory and
modeling of synchronous, induction, and direct-current machines, and their
steady-state and transient analysis. 3 hr. rec.
331. Electrical Power Systems 2. 3 hr. PR: E.C.E. 231 or consent. Electrical transients on
power systems including traveling waves due to lightning and switching.
Principles of lightning protection. 3 hr. rec.
333. Application of Digital Computers to Power System Analysis 1. 3 hr. PR: E.C.E. 231
or consent. Incidence and network matrices; algorithms for their formulation;
three-phase networks; short-circuit calculations; load-flow studies. 3 hr. rec.
334. Power System Control and Stability. II. 3 hr. PR: E.C.E. 131, 315. Review of
stability theory, classical transient analysis, dynamical models of synchronous
machines, power system stability under small and large perturbations, dynamic
simulation of power systems. 3 hr. rec.
340. Electromagnetic Fields and Guided Waves 1. 3 hr. PR: E.C.E. 141 or equiv. Plane
waves in dielectrics, conducting, and anistropic media; polarization, radiation;
duality; image theory; equivalence principle; Green's functions; integral equations;
plane wave functions. 3 hr. rec.
344. Advanced Antenna Theory. 3 hr. PR: E.C.E. 244 or equiv. Aperture antennas;
geometrical theory of diffraction; horns; reflectors and lens antennas; antenna
synthesis and continuous sources; moment method; Fourier transform methods;
antenna measurements. 3 hr. rec.
350. Electronic Circuits. 3 hr. PR: E.C.E. 158 and 159, or equiv. Analysis and design of
electronic circuits; low-pass amplifiers, feedback, frequency response and stability
of feedback amplifiers, nonlinear analog circuits. 3 hr. rec.
357. Linear Integrated Circuits. 3 hr. PR: E.C.E. 158, 159 or equiv. (Primarily for
students specializing in communication and electronics.) Techniques of integrated
circuit design and fabrication. Development of models descriptive of linear and
nonlinear transistor operation. Design and analysis of high-frequency turned,
direct-current, and differential amplifiers. 3 hr. rec.
ELECTRICAL AND COMPUTER ENGINEERING 117
358. Integrated Logic Circuits. 3 hr. PR: E.C.E. 156, 157 or equiv. or consent. (Intended
for students specializing in digital circuits.) Techniques of integrated circuit
design and fabrication. Development of transistor model for nonlinear operation.
Design, analysis, and comparison of emitter-coupled direct-coupled, diode-
transistor, and transistor-transistor integrated logic circuits. 3 hr. rec.
364. Communication Theory. 3 hr. PR: E.C.E. 264 or consent. Detailed study of
probability theory and its use in describing random variables and stochastic
processes. Emphasis on applications to problems in communication system
design. 3 hr. rec.
366. Information Theory 1. 3 hr. PR: E.C.E. 364. Probability concepts; theory of discrete
systems; encoding; theory of continuous systems; systems with memory; the
fundamental theorem of information theory. 3 hr. rec.
370. Switching Circuit Theory 1. 3 hr. PR: E.C.E. 71 or equiv. Course presumes an
understanding of the elements of Boolean or switching algebra. Study of both
combinational and sequential switching circuits with emphasis on sequential
networks. Advanced manual design and computer-aided design techniques for
single and multiple output combinational circuits. Analysis and design of
sequential circuits. Detection and prevention of undesired transient outputs. 3 hr.
rec.
372. Advanced Computer Architecture. 3 hr. PR: E.C.E. 71 and 272 or consent. Formal
tools for designing large digital systems are introduced; formal descriptive
algebras such as ISP, PMS, AHPL, CDL, and others. An in-depth study of
computer system designs including instruction design and data path design. 3 hr.
rec.
373. Design of Computer Arithmetic Circuits. 3 hr. PR: E.C.E. 71 or equiv. Study of logic
networks usable in performing binary arithmetic. Emphasis is on design of high-
speed, parallel arithmetic units using binary numbers. Consideration of systems
for representation of negative numbers. Available arithmetic subsystems are
studied. 3 hr. rec.
380. Electrical Problems 2. 1-6 hr. PR: Graduate standing.
390. Advanced Independent Study. 1-6 hr. PR: Consent. Individual investigation in
advanced electrical engineering subjects not covered in formal courses.
411. Nonlinear Control System Analysis. PR: Consent. Application of Liapunov's and
Popov's methods to nonlinear control systems, together with classical techniques.
3 hr. rec.
413. Sample-Data Control Systems. 3 hr. PR: E.C.E. 312 or consent. A study of control
systems in which the activating signal is represented by samples at regular time
intervals. 3 hr. rec.
416. Stochastic Estimation and Control. 3 hr. PR: E.C.E. 316 or consent. Techniques of
optimal estimation and control for linear systems. Balanced emphasis is placed on
both continuous and discrete time systems. Some advance topics of interest will be
considered. 3 hr. rec.
430. Real-Time Control of Electrical Power Systems. 3 hr. PR: E.C.E. 231 or consent.
Application of computers to modern control theory for reliable and economic
real-time operation of integrated power systems. 3 hr. rec.
432. Protection of Power Systems. 3 hr. PR: E.C.E. 231 or consent. Principles of relay
protection for faults on transmission lines and other devices. Use of overcurrent,
differential distance, and pilot relaying systems. Special relay applications.
Determination of short-circuit currents and voltages from system studies. 3 hr.
118 ELECTRICAL AND COMPUTER ENGINEERING
440. Electromagnetic Fields and Guided Waves 2. 3 hr. PR: E.C.E. 340 or equiv. General
theory of waveguides, cavity resonators, modes, losses, discontinuities, power
considerations, scattering, perturbational and variational techniques. 3 hr. rec.
466. Informational Theory 2. 3 hr. PR: E.C.E. 366. Continuation of E.C.E. 366. 3 hr. rec.
471. Switching Circuit Theory 2. 3 hr. PR: E.C.E. 370, Math. 236, or equiv. Switching
circuit theory is used to model the operations of networks of logic gates and
flip-flops. Networks of this type are one form of discrete parameter systems.
Studies the use of linear sequential machine as a means of modeling the general
class of discrete parameter information systems. Systems approach and the
techniques of abstract algebra used throughout. 3 hr. rec.
472. Digital Systems Design 2. 3 hr. PR: E.C.E. 372 or consent. Students will design a
specific digital system, i.e., CPU control, interrupt structure, memory, or input/
output system. They will design and test a project oriented toward one specific
objective.
491. Advanced Study. 1-6 hr. PR: Consent. Investigation in advanced subjects which
are not covered in regularly scheduled courses. Study may be independent or
through specially scheduled lectures.
496. Graduate Seminar. 1 hr. PR: Consent. Technical presentations by faculty members,
outside speakers, and graduate students. Each student will give an oral presentation
describing the student's research before the student's final examination. This will
typically be a 40-minute presentation before the faculty and graduate students.
497. Research. 1-15 hr.
ELEMENTARY EDUCATION
Cynthia Sunal, Chairperson of Graduate Programs
604 Allen Hall
Degree Offered: M.A. in Elementary Education
Graduate Faculty: Members Bontempo, Bower, Deay, DeCosta, Haas, Helfeldt, Holtan,
Iannone, Moxley, Obenauf, Phillips, Reed, Saltz, P. Smith, C. S. Sunal, D. W. Sunal,
and Thomas. Associate Members Carline and Hobbs.
The Division of Education provides opportunities forgraduate study and
research leading to the degree of Master of Arts (M.A.) for educators and other
professionals with educational responsibilities. The primary purpose of the
masters program in elementary (early/middle) education is to provide
increased knowledge, skill, and competence for teachers working with
children in the elementary (early/middle) school setting. The graduate
elementary (early/middle) teacher education program has three major areas
of emphasis: general education, subject area curriculum and methods, and
electives.
These emphases are planned jointly by the student, the student's adviser,
and the student's committee to meet the career needs of the student. In
addition to the general requirements of the University and the College of
Human Resources and Education, there is a core of courses or course areas and
supporting competencies required of all graduate students in the department.
The purpose of the program is to prepare master teachers who work with
children from nursery through elementary school. The program provides the
opportunity to specialize in early childhood, middle childhood, or a subject
area. With adviser approval, electives may be selected that enhance the
student's personal goals. While teacher certification is not a part of the
master's program, students, through careful planning, may be able to
complete some courses that are required for certification while working on a
graduate degree.
ELEMENTARY EDUCATION 119
For further information on admission and program requirements, write
Chairperson of Graduate Programs, Division of Education, College of Human
Resources and Education, 604 Allen Hall, P.O. Box 6122, Morgantown, WV
26506-6122.
Master of Arts in Elementary Education
All applicants must comply with the general requirements of the
University, the College of Human Resources and Education, and the Division
of Education.
Hours
I. Required Courses Program ABC
C&I 301 3 3 3
C&I330 3 3 3
C&I 340 3 3 3
C&I 350 3 3 3
C&I 388 0 0 3
C&I 391 0 3 0
C&I 497 6 0 0
Ed. F. 320 or 340 3 3 3
Ed. P. 320 3 3 0
Ed. P. 300 or 330 3 3 3
Rdng. 321, or 323, or 327, or 330 _3_ 3_ 3_
Total Required Courses 30 27 24
General Education Electives 0 3 12
(All elective courses must be approved by the
adviser before enrollment.)
Total for Master's Degree 30 30 36
Program A — Thesis required.
Program B— Research problem required.
Program C— 36-semester hour course work program.
Master of Arts
Emphasis: Early Childhood Education
Hours
I. Required Courses Program ABC
C&I 312 3 3 3
C&I 314 3 3 3
C&I 316 3 3 3
C&I 391 0 3 0
C&I 497 6 0 0
C&I 317 or Rdng. 323 3 3 3
CDFS 341 3 3 3
Ed. P. 320 3 3 0
Ed. P. 330 _3_ _3_ J_
Total Required Courses 27 24 18
II. Approved Electives
Restricted Electives in Early Childhood Education 3 3 3
Supportive Electives in Education 0 0 15
(All elective courses must be approved by the
adviser before enrollment.)
Total for Master's Degree 30 30 36
Program A — Thesis required.
Program B— Research problem required.
Program C — 36-semester hour course work program.
120 ELEMENTARY EDUCATION
Curriculum and Instruction (C&i)
205. The Junior High School. I, II, S. 2 hr. PR: Consent. Developing philosophy,
program, and practices of the junior high school.
210. Early Childhood Education 1. 1, II, S. 3 hr. PR: CDFS 216, Ed. P. 103 or 105. (A field
experience with children 3-5 years of age is required.) Introduction to methods and
materials in early childhood education for curriculum, instruction and program
organization, development, and evaluation. The content of this course is applicable
to field placement in a preschool, nursery school, day care, and/or child develop-
ment center.
211. Early Childhood Education 2. 1, II, S. 3 hr. PR: CDFS 216, Ed. P. 103 or 105. (A field
of experience with children 3-5 years of age is required.} This course is designed
for individuals who will be working within early childhood programs for children
under 8 years of age. The various aspects of early childhood education are studied
in relationship to organizational and administrative structures. This includes
planning, budgeting, staffing, supervising, and evaluating comprehensive learning
facilities for young children.
212. Methods in Preschool Education. I. 3 hr. PR: Ed. F. 1 or C&I 7 or equiv. Development
of an experiential model of teaching young children. Application of methods in
basic needs areas of nursery-early childhood education consistent with an
experiential model of teaching. Emphasis on safety, multicultural education,
classroom management, working with special needs populations and main-
streaming, and cooking and nutrition.
214. Creative Experiences in Early Childhood. II. 3 hr. PR: Ed. F. 1 or C&I 7 or equiv.
Examination of creative experiences for young children and their relationship to
child development. A special focus on play behavior as a learning medium with
emphasis on program planning, curriculum development, and instructional
strategies.
216. Early Language and Communication Experiences. I. 3 hr. PR: Ed. F. 1 or C&I 7 or
equiv. This course presents activities for developing language and communication
skills in children 2-5 years of age. It covers a broad range of temporary and
enduring forms of communication in visible and audible media.
218. Management of Preschool Education. II. (Alternate Years.) 3 hr. PR: Ed. F. 1 or C&I
7 or equiv. (A field experience with children 2-5 years of age is required.) Planning,
designing, and assessing programs for children ages 2-5 years with emphasis on
management skills.
224. Approaches to Teaching Language. II. 2 hr. PR: Lingu. 1 and Engl. 111. Designed for
prospective teachers of English and language arts. Focus is upon planning and
implementing methods of teaching English as a language. Materials and resources
appropriate to public school instruction are analyzed and utilized.
225. Approaches to Teaching Literature. II. 2 hr. PR: Junior standing. Designed for
prospective teachers of English and language arts. Course focuses upon method-
ologies for teaching literature in public schools. Workshop format will provide
opportunities for peer teaching activities as students apply methods of teaching
literature.
The College of Human Resources and Education and the West Virginia
Department of Education are in the process of reviewing and revising all certification
programs. Students are warned that programs printed in the catalog may not he in
effect at the time of their registration and are advised to see their adviser upon
arrival on campus.
ELEMENTARY EDUCATION 121
267. The Music Education Program. S. 3 hr. PR: Consent. Organization and adminis-
tration of the complete music education program for grades 1-12.
280. Special Problems and Workshops. I, II, S. 2-4 hr. (Maximum of 8 semester hours
may be applied toward the master's degree.] PR: 14 hr. in education. Credits for
special workshops and short intensive unit courses on methods, supervision, and
other special topics.
287. Advanced Clinical Experience. I, II, S. 1-6 hr. PR: Consent. Clinical experience in
teaching-learning situations at any level.
301. The Elementary-School Curriculum. I, II, S. 3 hr. PR: 20 hr. of undergraduate credit
in elementary education, or consent. Analysis of curriculum designs in elementary
education with emphasis on methods and techniques of development.
306. Curriculum for Middle Childhood. I, S. 3 hr. Survey course which includes:
historical, social, and cultural influences on the curriculum; the learner character-
istics; curriculum and instructional organization and their relationship to facilities
available; evaluation and implementation of middle childhood curriculum.
307. Curriculum Development. I, II, S. 3 hr. PR: C&I 301 or 304 or C&I 312 and Ed. F. 320
or consent. Basic foundation in the concepts underlying the school curriculum in
American society.
308. Introduction to Alternative Learning Environments. I. (Alternate Years.) 3 hr.
This course will provide opportunities for educators to explore and analyze the
trends and issues in alternative learning environments in public education.
309. Experiences in Alternative Learning Environments. S. (Alternate Years.) 6 hr. PR:
C&I 308, Ed. F. 320, consent. This course helps teachers to learn and practice skills
that are needed to be an effective teacher in an alternative teaching environment.
312. Early Childhood Curriculum. I. 3 hr. PR: C&I 210, 211, or consent. Historical,
theoretical perspectives in curriculum development for early childhood education
including social, creative, cognitive, and physical goals.
314. Early Childhood Instruction. II. 3 hr. PR: C&I 210, 211, or consent. Design of
instruction for individualization and development of mastery in curriculum goals
for early childhood.
316. Eariy Childhood Program Development and Evaluation. I. 3 hr. PR: C&I 210, 211 or
consent. Development and evaluation of facilities, programs, and support systems
for early childhood education.
317. Language Skills in Early Childhood. S. 3 hr. PR: Consent. An examination of
language skills and the sequence in which they are learned in early childhood with
special attention to the environment of instructional influences which could
contribute to their acquisition. [Offered in alternate summers.)
318. Storytelling in Early Childhood. I, II. 3 hr. This course will assist students in
telling, reading, and creating stories for children. Techniques, methods, and
research effective in the art of storytelling will be examined and applied as they
relate to total child development.
319. Behavior Modification: Early Childhood Education. S. 3 hr. PR: Consent. Appli-
cation of behavior modification to early childhood education with special
attention to an examination of the methods and values involved. [Offered in
alternate summers.)
330. Mathematics in the Elementary School. I, II, S. 3 hr. PR: 20 hr. of undergraduate
credit in elementary education or consent. Materials and methods of instruction
for modern mathematics programs.
122 ELEMENTARY EDUCATION
333. Corrective Techniques in Mathematics Education. I, S. 3 hr. PR: Consent.
Materials and methods used in diagnosis and remediation of learning difficulties
in mathematics.
337. Mathematics in the Junior High School and Middle School. II. 3 hr. PR: 6 hr. college
mathematics or consent. Study of teaching of mathematics in the junior high
school and/or middle school; application of mathematics content to teaching;
instructional techniques and materials.
340. Science in the Elementary School. I, II, S. 3 hr. PR: 20 hr. of undergraduate credit in
elementary education, or consent. Analysis of methods, curriculum patterns, and
trends in elementary school science. Understanding and development of scientific
attitudes appropriate at the elementary-school level.
350. Social Studies in the Elementary School. I, II, S. 3 hr. PR: 20 hr. of undergraduate
credit in elementary education, or consent. Comprehensive consideration of
objectives, content, methods, including unit procedures; materials including
objects, models, exhibits, and museum items, as well as textbooks, collateral
reading, maps, and graphs; means of evaluating social growth and development.
357. Principles of Economic Education. S. 3 hr. Workshop for principals, teachers, and
supervisors with emphasis on the economic structure of our society and methods
of integrating economics into the school program. (Sponsored jointly by College of
Human Resources and Education and College of Business and Economics.]
359. Classroom Simulation Techniques. II, S. (Alternate Years.) 3 hr. To provide
experience in the use of learning games and simulations as an instructional
technique and the opportunity to develop — under supervision — simulated activities
and games to be used in a variety of learning environments.
373. Professional Development. I, II, S. 1-6 hr. (May be repeated for credit.) PR:
Department consent. Specially designed experiences for those interested in
advancing professional skills in a particular specialty. (Not for degree credit in
programs in the College of Human Resources and Education.) (Graded as S/U.)
377. Children's Television: Problems and Potentials. S. 4 hr. PR: Consent. Provides
parents and teachers with strategies for monitoring, evaluating, and directing
television viewing habits of youth; pertinent research studies, school and
community action programs, and home and school education programs are
discussed and practiced.
380. Special Topics. I, II, S. 1-6 hr. PR: Consent.
383. Seminar. I, II, S. 1-6 hr. PR: Consent.
385. Supervision of Student Teachers. I, II, S. 3 hr. PR: Consent. For persons working or
intending to work with education students in field experiences. Course focuses on
the development and application of supervisory skills involved in effective
guidance of student teachers and education students.
386. Teaching Strategies for Middle Childhood. II, S. 3 hr. Surveys instructional
strategies appropriate for facilitating preadolescent learning. Includes the role of
the teacher; how the teacher uses resources within and outside the classroom as
they relate to instruction of the learner, age 10-14 years.
387. Advanced Teaching Strategies. I, II, S. 3 hr. PR: Graduate standing. Deals with
methods as one critical variable in teaching. Examines ways and means to
describe, plan the use of, implement, and evaluate teaching methods. Analysis and
implementation of teaching methods and component skills of teaching.
388. Classroom Organization and Management. I, S. 3 hr. Discusses research identifying
components of classroom organization and environment which influence learning;
reviews teacher behaviors and learning activities which research indicates lead to
more effective teaching. Stresses implementation strategies relevant to classroom
settings.
ELEMENTARY EDUCATION 123
389. Education That Is Multicultural. I, S. 3 hr. PR: Graduate standing or consent.
Provides opportunities for educators to increase awareness of their own ethnic
backgrounds, foster understanding of racial/ethnic diversity, and develop appro-
priate teaching materials and methods for elementary and secondary curricula.
391. Advanced Topics. I, II, S. 1-6 hr.
395. Practicum. I, II, S. 1-12 hr. per sem. or session— aggregating not more than 12 hr.
PR: 9 graduate hr. in Education. (Enrollment with permission of adviser or
instructor in consultation.) Special individual and group projects. To provide
appropriate residence credits for special workshops, prolonged systematic con-
ference, or problems and projects in education.
407. Instructional Models of Teaching. II. 3 hr. PR: Ed. F. 320 or consent. Concepts and
processes involved in teaching and their relationship to the development of
teacher education programs.
408. Contemporary Determinants of Curriculum. II, S. 3 hr. PR: C&I 307 and Ed. F. 340
or consent. Contemporary determinants of curriculum development.
409. Curriculum Theories. I, II, S. 3 hr. PR: C&I 408 or consent. Theories underlying
curriculum from the past to the present and projected to the future.
438. Survey of Major Issues in Mathematics Education. II, S. 3 hr. PR: Consent.
Individual and group research on selected topics in mathematics education.
457. Social Studies Curriculum Development, K-12. 1. 3 hr. PR: C&I 301 or 304 and C&I
350 or 354. Stresses the application of principles and procedures pertinent to the
development of social studies programs in elementary and secondary schools.
Strong emphasis will be placed on the analysis of current social studies
curriculum materials.
488. Higher Education Curriculum. II. 3 hr. Analysis and evaluation of post-secondary
curriculum with emphasis on organizing, translating, and applying findings.
Topics include curriculum shaping forces; institutional patterns; policy, compo-
nents and change; and principles and techniques of development, experimentation,
and evaluation.
489. Teaching in Higher Education. I. 3 hr. PR: Graduate standing. A general methods
course involving instructional concepts and strategies for present/prospective
faculty in higher education. Comprehensive consideration of objectives, planning
criteria and methods, teaching strategies, and evaluation in meeting the needs of
adult learners.
490. Teaching Practicum. I, II, S. 1-3 hr. PR: Consent. Intended for graduate students
with college teaching responsibility. Provides a supervised experience in a
teaching situation. (Graded as S/U.)
491. Advanced Study Project in Education. I, II, S. 3-6 hr. Research for the program
leading to the Certificate of Advanced Study in Education (C.A.S.).
496. Advanced Seminar. I, II. 1 hr. PR: Consent. Opportunity for the advanced graduate
student to present the student's research to faculty and/or student groups.
497. Research. I, II, S. 1-15 hr.
499. Colloquium in Curriculum and Instruction. I, II, S. 1-6 hr. PR: Consent. For
graduate students not seeking course work credit, but who wish to participate in
academic programs.
124 ELEMENTARY EDUCATION
ENDODONTICS
Arthur E. Skidmore, Chairperson of the Department
1067 Basic Sciences Building
Degree Offered: M.S.
Graduate Faculty: Members Alberico, Balaban, Biddington, Griffin, and Skidmore.
Master of Science (M.S.)
The School of Dentistry and its Department of Endodontics offer a
program of advanced study and clinical training leading to the degree of
Master of Science (M.S.). The program requires a minimum of 24 months (two
academic years and two summer sessions) of full-time residency in the School
of Dentistry and is designed to qualify dentists for careers in endodontic
clinical practice, teaching, and research.
Inquiries concerning this program should be directed to the Office of the
Associate Dean for Postdoctoral Programs. Applicants will be processed in
the School of Dentistry. Applicants approved for admission to the program
will be notified soon after January 15.
Requirements for Admission to the Endodontic Program
1. Graduation from an accredited school of dentistry.
2. Evidence of scholastic and clinical achievement that would indicate
the applicant's ability to progress in a program of this nature.
3. Each applicant must file with the Department of Endodontics all
information requested in the departmental application form.
Requirements for Master of Science Degree
1. Fulfillment of general requirements of the University.
2. Twenty-four months (two academic years and two summer sessions)
of consecutive residency at the WVU School of Dentistry.
3. An approved master's thesis based on original research completed
during the period of residency in an area related to endodontics.
4. Must satisfactorily pass a final oral examination.
5. Must complete a minimum of 57 credit hours. These include 32 hours of
endodontic courses, a minimum of 18 hours of selected basic sciences
subjects, and a thesis (7 hours).
6. Must have demonstrated satisfactory clinical competency in the
student's field.
7. Must have maintained a grade level commensurate with graduate
education.
Dentistry (Dent.)
400. Advanced Oral Surgery. I, II, S. 1-12 hr. PR: Consent. Advanced study of
therapeutics, hospital protocol, and surgical aspects of oral surgery involving
lectures, seminars, demonstrations, and clinical applications.
Endodontics (Dent.)
390. Clinical Endodontics. I, II, S. 1-5 hr. (May be repeated for credit.) PR: Graduate of
an accredited dental school and admission to the Advanced Education Program in
Endodontics or consent. Clinical endodontic practice in the areas of: ordinary
endodontic cases, complex endodontic cases, hemisection, root amputation,
replantation, transplantation, endodontic implantation, vital pulp therapy, apexifi-
cation, and bleaching.
ENDODONTICS 125
391. Endodontic Theory. I, II, S. 2 hr. PR: Consent. Provides seminar discussions in the
topics of: basic endodontic techniques, advanced endodontic techniques, endo-
dontic literature review, case presentation, and advanced endodontic theory.
490. Endodontic Teaching. S. 2 hr. PR: Consent. Selected teaching experiences
including lecture, clinical, and laboratory teaching of undergraduate endodontic
courses.
497. Endodontic Research. I, II, S. 2-3 hr. PR: Consent. Students will prepare a research
protocol.conduct experimental research, and prepare a thesis of original endodontic
research.
Microbiology (M. Bio.)
317. Special Problems in Microbiology. I, II, S. 1-7 hr. per sem. with a total of 24 hr.
available. Pathogenic microorganisms, including immunology and antimicrobial
agents.
Pathology (Path.)
382. Oral Histopathology. I, II. 1-2 hr. PR: Path. 338, 353, consent. Microscopic study of
head and neck lesions.
401. Special Studies in Oral Pathology. I, II. 1-3 hr. PR: Consent. Advanced seminar or
independent study of local and/or systemic disease processes affecting oral and
facial structures.
Pharmacology and Toxicology (Pcol.)
360. Pharmacology. I. 4 hr. PR: Dental student standing or consent. Lecture and
demonstrations on pharmacologic actions and therapeutic uses of drugs.
Statistics (Stat.)
311. Statistical Methods 1. I, II. 3 hr. PR: Math. 3. Statistical models, distributions,
probability, random variables, tests of hypotheses, confidence intervals, regression,
correlation, transformations, F and Chi-square distributions, analysis of variance
and multiple comparisons. (Also listed as Ed. P. 311 and Psych. 311.)
ENGLISH
Rudolph P. Almasy, Interim Chairperson of the Department
Frank Scafella, Ph.D. Supervisor
Elizabeth Madison, M.A. Supervisor
Stansbury Hall
Degrees Offered: M.A., Ph.D.
Graduate Faculty: Members Adams, Allen, Blaydes, Conner, Davis, Elfenbein, Foster,
French, Gandolfo, Gaskins, Ginsberg, Johnston, Nelson, Scafella, Stasny, Stitzel,
Torsney, B. Ward, and H. Ward. Associate Members Almasy, Buck, Daniell, Eaton,
Fuller, High, MacDonald, Madison, Miles, Peterson, and Racin.
Master of Arts (M.A.)
Admission. To be admitted to the Department of English as prospective
candidates for the degree of Master of Arts (M.A.), students are expected to
have completed work comparable to the department's undergraduate re-
quirement for English majors (but with records distinctly above the average),
and to present as part of their applications their scores on the Graduate
Record Examination General Aptitude Test, and, if non-native speakers of
English, their TOEFL scores. Past experience has shown that successful
graduate students usually score at least at the 60th percentile in the verbal
section of the GRE.
126 ENGLISH
The applicant may be admitted as a regulargraduate student— one who is
approved for a degree program; as a provisional graduate student— one who is
accepted for study but at the time of acceptance does not meet all the
requirements for regular admission; or as a non-degree graduate student. (The
GRE and TOEFL scores are not required of non-degree graduate students.)
Course Requirements. A candidate for the M.A. degree is expected to
complete courses covering the major periods and the works of the major
authors of English and American literature. The minimum requirement is 30
hours of graduate work in English, 24 hours of which must be on the 300-400
course levels. English 492, Introduction to Literary Research, is required of all
master's degree candidates, and must be taken in the first year of graduate
study. Two 400-level seminars are also required. (Neither English 490,
required of all teaching assistants, nor English 492 may be substituted for the
seminar requirements.) No more than 6 hours of course work outside the
Department of English may apply towards the 30-hour requirement. Any
hours outside the Department of English to be applied to the requirement must
be relevant to the student's program and approved by the graduate supervisor
before registration.
Thesis Option. A candidate for the M.A. degree has the option of taking 30
hours of course credit, with the above requirements, or of taking 24 hours of
course work and writing a thesis, for 6 hours credit, under the supervision of a
thesis adviser. Information about the procedure for filing application for
approval of projects, and about dates for the submission of theses, is available
at the department office. The thesis may be a work of scholarship, of criticism,
or of creative writing (original poetry, drama, or fiction). A candidate may
register for up to 12 hours of thesis credit, but only 6 hours may be included in
the 30 hours required for the degree. Thesis hours will be graded as S
(Satisfactory) or U (Unsatisfactory) progress.
Examinations. A student electing to write a thesis is expected to make an
oral defense of the finished work before his/her thesis committee. All
students, whether they elect the thesis option or the 30-hours' course work
option, are required to take two 3-hour comprehensive written examinations
in English and American literature. Each student taking these examinations
will have the option, elected and approved in advance of the examination date,
of having part of the comprehensive examination restructured to provide that
student the opportunity of being examined in a specialized area of expertise in
literary, linguistic, or writing studies. The only question for which such a
substitution may not be made is the analysis of a short poem: answering this
question is required of all students taking the examinations.
The student will normally take these examinations in the semester or
session following that in which the student has established acceptable credit
in 24 hours of graduate course work with a minimal average of 3.0. The
examinations will be conducted not later than four weeks before the last day
of classes of a semester, or three weeks before the end of a summer session.
With the permission of the examining committee, an unsuccessful candidate
may be reexamined. Success in the examinations admits the student to
candidacy for a graduate degree.
Foreign Language Requirement. A candidate for the degree of Master of
Arts in English must demonstrate proficiency in one foreign language by
passing the Graduate Reading Examination in that language.
ENGLISH 127
Doctor of Philosophy (Ph.D.)
Admission. An applicant for admission to the program will be judged on
the bases of academic record, three recommendations from former teachers, a
personal, written statement outlining the applicant's academic and profes-
sional goals, and the Graduate Record Examination Advanced Test scores. If
a non-native speaker of English, the applicant must also present the TOEFL
scores
Provisional admission to the program may be granted to students whose
credentials, while not exhibiting the high standards of prior academic
achievement the department expects of doctoral candidates, promise excel-
lence in the graduate study of English literature. Students admitted provi-
sionally are expected to show high academic achievement during their first
semester of doctoral study. All decisions on admission and status shall be
made by the Graduate Admissions Committee.
Course Requirements: The doctoral program will normally require three
years of full-time study beyond the master's degree or its equivalent. Thirty
hours of credits in courses of the 300 and 400 series are normally required;
however, exceptionally well-prepared students may be granted permission to
take fewer than 30 hours of course work, upon recommendation of the
Graduate Admissions Committee, in consultation with the Ph.D. Supervisor
and the Graduate Program Committee. Of the normally required 30 hours, 9
must be taken in 400-level seminars. All doctoral candidates, unless they have
previously had what the department recognizes as an equivalent course, must
take English 492 (Introduction to Literary Research). Neither English 490
(required of all teaching assistants) nor English 492 may be substituted for
the seminar requirements. English 488, Current Directions in Literary Study,
is also required of every doctoral student in the program.
No credit will be given for courses in which the grade is C or less. A
student who makes C or less in more than three courses will be dropped from
the program.
The writing of the doctoral dissertation will carry a value of 12 additional
hours.
Preliminary Qualifying Examinations. A doctoral student who did not
receive the M.A. in English from WVU may be asked to take and pass the
department's M.A. Comprehensive Examination. This must be done no later
than the end of the student's first year of study.
Examination for Formal Admission to Candidacy. When the student has
completed the course work and has fulfilled the foreign language requirement,
an examination committee will be appointed. The student and the examination
committee will draw up a list of books on which the examination for formal
admission to candidacy will be based. The reading list must be approved by
the Graduate Program Committee at least one semester before the examination
is administered. The examination will be both written and oral.
Ph.D. candidates will be questioned in three areas of special expertise: (1)
the proposed dissertation project and immediately related critical readings;
(2) the larger literary-historical period (e.g. the areas identified in the M.A.
Comprehensive Examination) in which the project fits or out of which it
grows; and (3) a major period or area — historical, theoretical, or generic — that
may be related to the first two fields of questioning but should not overlap.
The oral examination, approximately two hours in length, is meant to
permit the examination committee to pursue issues raised by the written
examination, and to permit the student to clarify, expand on, or to raise
questions about the texts and issues on which the examination was based.
128 ENGLISH
Teaching Requirement. While in the program, the doctoral student must
teach successfully in the department for two semesters, one semester devoted
to composition, the other to literature. Concurrent with the teaching practicum,
the student must take one 400-level course in the teaching of composition and
one 400-level course in the teaching of literature (neither of which qualifies as
a 400-level seminar). This requirement will be optional for those candidates
who possess teaching experience approved by the department.
Minor Subject. A student may, though need not, choose a minor, not to
exceed 12 hours in 300- or 400-level courses, in a related subject offered by
another department. Choice of the minor is subject to the approval of the Ph.D.
Supervisor.
Foreign Language Requirement. The student must demonstrate proficiency
in a foreign language acceptable to the Department of English by passing a
graduate reading examination in that language.
Doctoral Dissertation. After completing course work, passing the exami-
nations for formal candidacy, and fulfilling the language requirement and
teaching requirements, the student shall submit a prospectus of the disserta-
tion, as specified by the department, to the adviser. On approval of the
prospectus by the student's dissertation committee, the student may apply for
admission to candidacy for the Ph.D. degree.
The topic of the proposed dissertation should be such that a candidate can
reasonably complete the project in one year of full-time work. It is the
responsibility of the dissertation committee and adviser to see that the topic is
sufficiently limited.
Final Examination. When the dissertation has been accepted and approved
by the candidate's adviser and the dissertation committee, the candidate will
be given an oral examination by the committee. The examination will deal
with the dissertation and the field it represents.
English (Engl.)
201. Creative Writing Workshop: Fiction. I, II. 3 hr. Advanced workshop in creative
writing for students seriously engaged in writing fiction.
202. Creative Writing Workshop: Poetry. I, II. 3 hr. Advanced workshop in creative
writing for students seriously engaged in writing a major group of poems.
208. Scientific and Technical Writing. I, II. 3 hr. PR: Engl. 1 and 2. Writing for scientific
and technical professions. Descriptions of equipment and processes; reports and
proposals; scientific experiments; interoffice communications; articles for trade
and research journals.
210. Structure of the English Language. I, II. 3 hr. Historical, comparative, and
descriptive grammar, together with an introduction to English linguistics.
211. History of the English Language. I, II. 3 hr. Study of the nature of the language;
questions of origins, language families, development, relationships of English as
one of the Indo-European languages.
220. American Poetry. 1,11.3 hr. Major American poets of the nineteenth and twentieth
centuries.
223. Modern American Poetics. I, II. 3 hr. A close study of those poets who have shaped
the aesthetics of contemporary American poetry.
232. Literary Criticism. I, II. 3 hr. Literary criticism from Aristotle to modern times.
235. American Drama. I, II. 3 hr. Representative American dramas and history of
theatre in America.
ENGLISH 129
236. Tragedy. I, II. 3 hr. Masterpieces of tragedy from Greek times to modern, with
consideration of changing concepts of tragedy and of ethical and ideological values
reflected in works of major tragic authors.
240. Folk Literature. I, II. 3 hr. The folk ballad, its origin, history, and literary
significance, based on Child's collection and on American ballad collections.
241. Folk Literature of the Southern Appalachian Region. I, II. 3 hr. Traditional
literature of southern Appalachian region, including songs, prose, tales, languages,
customs, based on material collected in the region — especially in West Virginia.
245. Studies in Appalachian Literature. I, II, S. 3 hr. Studies of authors, genres, themes,
or topics in Appalachian literature.
250. Shakespeare's Art. I, II, S. (Alternate Years.) 3 hr. Special studies in Shakespeare's
tragedies, comedies, and/or history plays, with some attention given to his non-
dramatic poetry. With emphases varying from year to year, studies may include
textual, historical, critical, and dramaturgical-theatrical.
255. Chaucer. I, II. 3 hr. Early poems, Troilus and Criseyde, and The Canterbury Tales.
In addition to an understanding and appreciation of Chaucer's works, the student
is expected to acquire an adequate knowledge of Chaucer's language.
256. Milton. I, II. 3 hr. All of Milton's poems and a few selected prose works.
261. Sixteenth Century Prose and Poetry. I, II. 3 hr. Studies from Caxton to Bacon, from
Skelton to Shakespeare.
262. Seventeenth Century Prose and Poetry. I, II. 3 hr. Studies from Donne to Dryden.
263. Literature of the Eighteenth Century. I, II. 3 hr. Literature of the period 1660-1744
in relation to social, political, and religious movements of the time.
264. Literature of the Eighteenth Century. I, II. 3 hr. Continuation of Engl. 263, covering
the latter half of the century. May be taken independently of Engl. 263.
265. The Romantic Movement. I, II. 3 hr. A survey of the works of the major British
Romantic writers along with an introduction to works of scholarship in British
Romanticism.
266. American Romanticism. I, II. 3 hr. Writings of Ralph Waldo Emerson, Henry David
Thoreau, and Nathaniel Hawthorne. A study of relations of these men to history of
their own time; their contributions to American thought and art.
267. Victorian Poetry. I, II. 3 hr. The major Victorian poets— Tennyson, Browning,
Arnold, Rossetti, Morris, Swinburne, Fitzgerald— and a few of the later Victorian
poets.
268. Modern British Poetry. I, II. 3 hr. British poetry from 1880 to present, including the
Decadents, Counter-Decadents, Hopkins, Housman, Hardy, the Georgians, the
Imagists, World War I poets, Yeats, Eliot, the Auden Group, and post-World War II
poets.
280. Southern Writers. I, II. 3 hr. Twentieth-century Southern essayists, poets, short-
story writers, and novelists in relation to ideological background.
283. Study of Selected Authors. I, II. 3 hr. Study of the works of one or more major
authors. (May be repeated with a change in course content for a maximum of 9
credit hours.)
288. Women Writers in England and America. I, II. 3 hr. Syllabus may vary from year to
year to include writers in a particular country, historical period, or genre; or
writing on a particular theme.
130 ENGLISH
290. Independent Study. I, II. 1-3 hr. (With departmental consent, may be repeated for a
maximum of 9 credit hours.) PR: Departmental consent. Individual study of
literary, linguistic, and writing problems.
293. Practicum in Teaching Composition. I. 1 hr. PR: Engl. 108, 295. Designed to give
prospective English and language arts teachers supervised practical experiences
in individual writing tutorials.
294. Fiction for Adolescents. II. 3 hr. Designed for prospective teachers of English and
language arts. Course focuses on recent fiction for adolescents as well as on
traditional literature appropriate to the needs, interests, and abilities of youth.
Evaluation criteria emphasized.
295/ 391. Approaches to Teaching Composition. I. 3 hr. (May not be taken for both
undergraduate and graduate credit.) Surveys attitudes toward and techniques of
teaching writing in elementary and secondary schools. Provides frequent oppor-
tunities for students to write, to analyze their writing, and to experiment in class
with methods of teaching writing.
310. Old English 1. I, II. 3 hr. Study of Anglo-Saxon with selected readings from the
literature of the period.
311. Old English 2. I, II. 3 hr. PR: Engl. 310. Beowulf and other texts in Old English.
330. Early English Drama. I, II. 3 hr. Study of the medieval and early Tudor drama to the
age of Shakespeare.
331. Elizabethan Drama. I, II. 3 hr. Study of dramas of Shakespeare's contemporaries
and successors to the closing of the theatres in 1642. Includes Kyd, Marlowe,
Jonson, Heywood, Chapman, Webster, Beaumont, and Fletcher.
332. Restoration and Eighteenth Century Drama. I, II. 3 hr. Comedy, tragedy, the heroic
play, the drama of sensibility and the reaction against it: Etherege, Wycherley,
Farquhar, Congreve, Vanbrugh, Dryden, Otway, Goldsmith, and Sheridan.
334. Contemporary Drama. I, II. 3 hr. Recent developments in the drama, with special
attention to Miller, Williams, Sartre, Anouilh, Osborne, Pinter, Bolt, and the
Absurdists. (Content altered as new playwrights representing new developments
come into prominence.]
335. The English Novel to the Time of Scott. I, II. 3 hr. Study of the English novel from
the sixteenth century to the time of Scott, showing the development of the
novelistic art from early narrative beginnings.
336. The English Novel, 1832-1900. 1, II. 3 hr. Continuation of Engl. 335. Development of
the English novel from the early nineteenth century to the beginning of the
twentieth century.
337. The Modern Novel I, II. 3 hr. Twentieth-century novel, with emphasis on works of
selected British novelists.
340. The American Novel to 1915, 1. I, II. 3 hr. History of American novel, based on
reading of ten to twelve novels, from the beginning to World War I.
341. The American Novei, 2. 1, II. 3 hr. History of the American novel, based on readings
of ten to twelve novels from World War I to the present.
345. Appalachian Literature. I, II, S. 3 hr. Intensive study of selected topics, works, and
writers of Appalachia.
350. Shakespeare. I, II. 3 hr. Intensive study of selected plays. Special attention to
textual problems and to language and poetic imagery, together with the history of
Shakespearean criticism and scholarship.
ENGLISH 131
356. Romantic Poetry. I, II. 3 hr. Reading and study of the works of selected poets of the
British Romantic movement with emphasis on related criticism and scholarship.
365. Victorian Prose. I, II. 3 hr. Study of the nonfictional writings of the great Victorian
prose critics: Carlyle, Ruskin, Arnold, Newman, Macaulay, Huxley, and Morris.
366. English Literature, 1880-1918. I, II. 3 hr. Study of the more important writers and
literary movements of the late Victorian and the Edwardian periods; emphasis on
Hardy, Housman, Hopkins, Henley, Pater, Gissing, Moore, Butler, and writers of
the "Aesthetic Movement."
369. American Literature to 1830. I, II. 3 hr. The major genres and themes of American
literature in the colonial and early national periods (1620-1830) with special
attention to the cultural context of the literature.
370. American Literature, 1830-1865. I, II. 3 hr. The Romantic period in American
literature, concentrating on Emerson, Thoreau, Poe, Hawthorne, and Melville.
371. American Literature, 1865-1915. I, II. 3 hr. The literature of transcendentalism,
realism, and naturalism in America between the Civil War and World War I,
concentrating on Whitman, Twain, James, Dickinson, Crane, Adams, and Dreiser.
372. American Literature, 1915-Present. I, II. 3 hr. American prose and poetry.
383. Recent Literary Criticism. I, II. 3 hr. Brief survey of theories of major schools of
modern criticism and an application of these theories to selected literary works.
391/295. Approaches to Teaching Composition. I. 3 hr. (May not be taken for both
undergraduate and graduate credit.) Surveys attitudes toward and techniques of
teaching writing in elementary and secondary schools. Provides frequent oppor-
tunities for students to write, to analyze their writing, and to experiment in class
with methods of teaching writing.
392. Special Topics. I, II, S. 1-9 hr. PR: Consent. Advanced study of special topics in
language, literature, or writing.
400. Thesis. I, II. 3 hr.
401. Thesis. I, II. 3 hr.
440. Seminar in Medieval Studies. I, II. 3 hr. Topics from English literature, 1100-1500.
446. Seminar in Renaissance Studies, 1550-1660. 1, II. 3 hr. Studies in major authors and
special topics in the Renaissance.
456. Seminar in Folklore and Folk Literature. I, II. 3 hr. Research projects in folklore,
including field work in collecting folklore in the Appalachian region and the
analysis of the use of folklore in the works of British and American authors.
460. Seminar in Restoration and Eighteenth Century Studies. I, II. 3 hr.
470. Seminar in British Romanticism. I, II. 3 hr. Studies in major authors and special
topics in the field of British Romanticism.
476. Seminar in Victorian Studies. I, II. 3 hr. Research and discussion in selected topics
in the literature and history of the period.
484. Seminar in American Studies. I, II. 3 hr. Seminar in principal authors and
movements in American literature.
488. Current Directions in Literary Study. II. 3 hr. PR: Advanced graduate standing
(English 383 recommended). Intensive study of one or more current approaches to
literature and theories of criticism, with some emphasis on the interrelations of
literary study with other disciplines.
132 ENGLISH
490. Teaching Practicum. I, II. 3-6 hr. I— Supervised practices in college teaching of
expository writing. II— Supervised practices in college teaching of literature.
491. Advanced Study. I, II. 3 hr. Specific topics approved by the instructor.
492. Introduction to Literary Research. I, II. 3 hr. Bibliography; materials and tools of
literary investigations; methods of research in various fields of literary history
and interpretation; problem of editing. Practical guidance in the writing of theses.
493. Folger Institute Seminar. I, II. 3 hr. PR: Graduate standing. (Enrollment is by
special application only. Contact department chairperson for information.) Seminar
conducted by distinguished scholars and held at the Folger Institute of Renaissance
and Eighteenth Century Studies in Washington, D.C. Topics vary. (Aiso listed as
Hist. 493.)
494. Seminar. I, II. 3 hr. Specific authors to be approved by instructor.
496. Seminar. I, II. 1 hr. PR: Consent. Research paper to be presented orally to the
faculty and students of the Department of English.
497. Research. I, II. 1-15 hr. PR: Consent.
498. Doctoral Thesis. I, II. 1-6 hr. PR: Consent.
499. Graduate Colloquium. I, II. 1-6 hr. PR: Consent. Credit for this course may not be
applied toward satisfaction of the 30-hour degree requirements at either the
master's or doctoral level.
ENTOMOLOGY
Linda Butler, Chairperson of the Entomology Graduate Program
G-166 Agricultural Sciences Building
Degree Offered: M.S.
Graduate Faculty: Members Amrine, Butler, and Hogmire. Associate Members Baniecki
and Weaver.
Entomology is the study of insects and their arthropod relatives.
Students entering the M.S. program in entomology are expected to have an
adequate background in biological and physical sciences. Admission require-
ments are those listed on page 383 for the College of Agriculture and Forestry.
Additional undergraduate course work may be required to make up deficien-
cies or to meet the needs of the area of specialization of the student.
Thesis problems in entomology may be selected in areas of pest manage-
ment; entomology of crops, forests, or urban environments; apiculture;
aquatic entomology; medical or veterinary entomology; acarology; araneology;
or insect physiology, morphology, ecology, behavior, or systematics. The
entomology curriculum is offered by the entomology faculty in the College of
Agriculture and Forestry.
Course work and thesis research in entomology are designed to prepare
students for professional careers in entomology and closely related areas of
agricultural, biological, and environmental sciences. Graduates of the ento-
mology program are employed by state and federal agencies, private industry,
educational institutions, or become self employed.
Facilities for graduate research include experiment farms, greenhouses,
laboratories, specialized equipment, and the WVU Arthropod Collection.
Entomology students seeking to pursue a Ph.D. program should enroll in
the Crop Science option of Agronomy.
ENTOMOLOGY 133
Entomology (Ento.)
201. Apiculture. II. 4 hr. PR: Biol. 1 and 2, or consent. Development, physiology, and
behavior of the honey bee with emphasis on colony management, pollination,
diseases of bees; properties of honey and beeswax. Laboratory emphasizes study
of anatomy, equipment organization, and field management.
204. Principles of Entomology. I. 4 hr. PR: Biol. 1 and 2 or equiv. Basic course dealing
with the anatomy, morphology, physiology, reproduction, systematics, ecology,
and management of insects.
210. Insect Pests in the Agroecosystem. I. 3 hr. PR: Ento. 204 or consent. Life cycle,
damage, and economic impact of pestiferous insects in the agroecosystem.
Included are insect pests of agricultural and ornamental plants, stored products,
structures, and livestock. 2 lee, 1 lab.
212. Pest Management. II. 3 hr. PR: Ento. 204 or consent. An in-depth look at current
problems and solutions in controlling insect pests in an environmentally compatible
manner. Management techniques include cultural, mechanical, physical, biological,
regulatory, and chemical practices. 3 lee.
390. Special Topics. I, II, S. 2-6 hr. PR: Ento. 204 or equiv., or consent. Each of the
following courses is given every other year: Exopterygota; Endopterygota Part I,
Part II; Larval Insects; Acarology; Araneology; Pesticides in the Environment;
Insect Morphology; Insect Physiology; Medical Entomology.
450. Seminar. I, II. 1 hr. per sem.
497. Research. I, II, S. 1-15 hr.
Plant Science (PI. Sc.)
200. Recognition and Diagnosis of Plant Disorders. 1. 4 hr. PR: P. Pth. 201 and Ento. 204.
Creates an ability for the student to use systematic inspection to determine cause
or causes of a plant disorder.
201. Principles and Methods of Plant Pest Control. II. 4 hr. PR: P. Pth. 201 and Ento. 204.
Concepts of control and how they are implemented by exclusion, eradication,
protection, and immunization.
FAMILY RESOURCES (Home Economics)
Mary K. Head, Interim Division Director, Program Coordinator
702 Allen Hall
Degree Offered: M.S.
Graduate Faculty: Members Albrink, Franz, Head, Lee, Liddell, Nomani, and Rodriguez.
Associate Members Guthrie and MacDonald.
Master of Science (M.S.)
Family Resources offers work leading to the degree of Master of Science.
All candidates for the degree must conform to the general WVU regulations,
the regulations of the College of Agriculture and Forestry, and the Family
Resources Program. Applicants must present Graduate Record Examination
(GRE) scores before they will be accepted as regular graduate students.
Applications are reviewed by the program graduate admissions commit-
tee. At that time, the applicant will be notified by the chairperson of the
graduate admissions committee of acceptance to pursue graduate study
toward candidacy for the master of science degree, according to the three
types of admission described in the graduate catalog general policies and
procedures, with the following exception: A student who does not have an
134 FAMILY RESOURCES (HOME ECONOMICS)
overall undergraduate grade-point average of 2.75 may be admitted only in
the special provisional category. Reclassification will be considered upon
completion of 12 hours of course work in Family Resources with a grade-point
average of 3.0. Additional information may be obtained by writing the
Program Coordinator of Family Resources.
The program is designed to offer opportunity to work in a variety of
different specializations, as well as the opportunity to take graduate-level
course work in supporting disciplines.
The following master of science concentrations are offered:
1. Home Economics Education— A dual program is offered enabling the
student to be granted a vocational certificate with the master's degree. An
applicant must have graduated from an accredited institution. Teaching
and/or work experience is strongly recommended.
2. Child Development— The program is structured to give the students a
basis from which to do research and/or clinical work with children.
3. Human Nutrition— The program in human nutrition has two emphases:
experimental nutrition and applied nutrition. Background in nutritional
biochemistry at the undergraduate level is recommended.
4. Homemaker Rehabilitation— A program to prepare home economists
for working with the disabled. A practicum and an internship are included in
the curriculum. A bachelor's degree in home economics is required of all
applicants. An internship is included in the curriculum.
If a student does not have a bachelor's degree in a home economics field or
has an otherwise inadequate background, undergraduate courses which do
not apply to the master's degree may be required.
Students pursuing a master's degree in family resources will have a
choice of the following two options:
1. A minimum of 36 semester hours, of which 6 hours will be thesis or
internship credit. The student's graduate committee will be consulted by the
student selecting a thesis topic and completing the thesis requirement.
Approval of the thesis, following an oral examination by the graduate
committee of the student, will be required before the degree is granted.
2. A minumum of 36 semester hours, of which 3 hours is a written
research report to be submitted to the student's graduate committee.
Certain areas have higher requirements.
After the student has completed 12 semester hours, graduate committee
will review the course work for academic performance with reference to
admission to candidacy for the degree of master of science.
Additional credit hours may be required (beyond the above minimum
requirements) by the graduate committee if the committee determines a need
for further strength in specific areas.
Approval in writing must be secured in advance from the student's
committee to elect graduate courses offered at other institutions or off-
campus, with final approval by the student's committee chairperson.
Doctor of Education (Ed.D.)
The Doctor of Education (Ed.D.) is offered through the Division of
Education for those interested in advanced graduate work in teaching,
curriculum, and/or research.
FAMILY RESOURCES (HOME ECONOMICS) 135
Courses of Instruction in Family Resources
Due to curricular review, course offerings and sequence may vary from
semester listed.
(Where permit is required to register for a course offered by Family
Resources, it may be given only by the instructor or the Program Coordinator.)
Child Development and Family Studies (CD&FS)
211. Middie Childhood-Early Adolescent Development. I. 3 hr. PR: CD&FS 10. Analysis
and investigation of developmental factors in middle childhood-early adolescence.
Consideration and diagnosis of physical, emotional, social, familial, moral, and
intellectual interactions affecting the child, age 6-14. [Offered in Fall of odd years.}
212. Adolescent Development. I. 3 hr. PR: CD&FS 10. Adolescent in contemporary
American culture, including normative physical, social, and personality devel-
opment; relationships within various typical social settings (e.g., family, school,
community, peer group). (Offered in Spring of even years.)
215. Parenting Strategies. II. 3 hr. PR: Senior or graduate standing or consent. Focus on
the interactions between parent and child. Analysis of typical problems which
occur in parenting. Deals solely with normal daily situations which often occur in
the home.
216. Child Development Practicum. I, II. 3-4 hr. Application of child development
principles. Involves planning developmentally appropriate activities for 3- and
4-year-old children at the University Child Development Laboratory.
219. The Growing Years. II. 3 hr. A televised course offered primarily for off-campus
students to become familiar with development of children during their growing
years. How to recognize the diversity of approaches in child development research
and theory.
341. Cognitive Development of the Child. II. 3 hr. Piaget's basic theory, including his
view of perceptual, symbolic, motor and logico-mathematical development, across
the life span.
345. Socio-Emotional Development of the Child. I. 3 hr. A study and examination of
contemporary theory and research into various facets of the socialization process
in infancy and childhood. (Offered in Fall of odd years.)
348. Theories of Child Development. II. 3 hr. Examination of major theoretical
conceptions of child development. Work of Werner, Piaget, Freid. Erikson, and the
American learning theorists compared and contrasted. (Offered in Fall of even
years.)
Family Resources (Fam. R.)
373. Professional Development. I, II, S. 1-6 hr. (May be repeated for credit.) PR:
Departmental consent. Specially designed experiences for those interested in
advancing professional skills in a particular specialty. (Not for degree credit in
programs in the College of Human Resources and Education.) (Graded as S or U.)
390. Research Methods in Family Resources. II. 3 hr. PR: Introductory statistics or
written consent. Research methodology, experimental design, and statistical
analysis as relevant to problems in family resources.
391. Special Topics. I, II, S. 1-4 hr. per sem.; max. 9 hr. PR: Consent.
394. Practicum/Internship. I, II, S. 1-6 hr. PR: Consent.
397. Master's Degree Research or Thesis. I, II, S. 1-15 hr. PR: Consent.
136 FAMILY RESOURCES (HOME ECONOMICS)
490. Teaching Practicum. I, II. 1-3 hr. PR: Consent. Supervised practices in college
teaching of home economics.
491. Advanced Study. I, II, S. 1-6 hr. PR: Consent. Investigation in advanced subjects
which are not covered in regularly scheduled courses. Study may be independent
or through specially scheduled lectures.
494. Graduate Seminar. I, II, S. 1-4 hr. PR: Consent of graduate adviser.
497. Research. I, II, S. 1-15 hr. PR: Consent.
498. Thesis. I, II, S. 1-6 hr. PR: Consent.
499. Graduate Colloquium. I, II, S. 1-6 hr. PR: Consent. For graduate students not
seeking course work credit but who wish to meet residence requirements, use the
University's facilities, and participate in its academic and cultural programs.
Home Economics Education (H.E. Ed.)
219. Occupational Home Economics. II. 3 hr. Prepares teachers to implement occupa-
tional home economics programs. Emphasis on organizing and administering
programs, developing laboratory and work experiences, recruiting students, and
evaluating progress.
278. Vocational Home Economics. II. 3 hr. PR: Senior standing or consent. Develops an
understanding of federal vocational legislation to enable an individual to develop
and implement programs in vocational education.
281. Contemporary Problems in Home Economics. I. 3 hr. Applies the broad-based
philosophy of home economics to current individual family and community
problems, e.g., societal impact on families, changing consumer market, changing
roles, day care, diminishing energy resources, career education, etc.
311. Home Economics Curriculum. I, II, S. 3 hr. PR: Experience in teaching home
economics or consent. Theory and research in home economics curriculum. Change
in existing programs and development of new programs.
312. Supervision in Home Economics. I, II, S. 3 hr. PR: Teaching experience and
consent. For home economics teachers preparing to serve as supervising teachers
in off-campus training centers.
313. Evaluation in Home Economics. I, II, S. 3 hr. PR: 30 hr. of family resources, 7 hr. of
education or consent. Experience in devising, selecting, and using a variety of
techniques for evaluating progress toward cognitive, affective, and psychomotor
objectives in home economics.
314. Adult Education. I, II, S. 3 hr. PR: Consent. Psychology of adult learning,
philosophy, types of programs to include organization, methods and techniques,
and leadership training in working with adult groups.
Home Management and Family Economics (HMFE)
261. Consumer Economics. II. 3 hr. Understanding the consumer's role in our economy.
Study of research methods and techniques used to identify, understand, and solve
consumer problems.
262. Introduction to Homemaker Rehabilitation. II. 3 hr. PR: Consent. A comprehensive
coverage of the historical development, philosophy, legislation, community
resources, research and professional literature provides a base of knowledge
needed by the student to enter the field of homemaker rehabilitation.
FAMILY RESOURCES (HOME ECONOMICS] 137
363. Community Resources for Disabled Homemakers. I. 3 hr. Provides students with
knowledge and skills needed to utilize other disciplines in the team approach to
rehabilitating handicapped homemakers. Presentations by team members, such as
physicians, nurses, counselors, therapists, social workers, etc.
364. Home Management for Disabled Homemakers. II. 3 hr. PR: HMFE 262 or consent.
Provides students with skills to teach home management concepts related to the
disabled homemaker in performance of household tasks. Emphasis on work
simplification, body mechanics, equipment selection, and adaptation to promote
independent living.
Human Nutrition and Foods (HN&F)
254. Experimental Foods. II. 4 hr. PR: HN&F 55, organic chemistry or consent. Study of
basic chemical processes that occur within food systems including the effects of
storage, processing, and alterations in formulation on qualities of food products;
introduction to laboratory methodology in foods research.
257. Food, Labor, and Cost Control. II. 3 hr. PR: HN&F 153, Acctg. 51. Food systems
accounting and cost control. Techniques for analyzing, managing, and controlling
food and labor costs. (Offered in Spring of even years.)
258. Food Systems Management Practicum. II. 4 hr. PR: HN&F 153 and consent. Ten
weeks or 400 hours of practical experience in operations of the type in which the
student is majoring.
260. Advanced Nutrition. I. 3 hr. PR: HN&F 71, physiology. Coreq.: Biochemistry. Role
of food nutrients in physiological and biochemical processes of the body;
nutritional needs of healthy individuals under ordinary conditions.
261. Nutrition Laboratory Experimentation. I. 1 hr. Coreq.: HN&F 260 or consent.
Nutrient analysis and introduction to nutrition experimentation.
272. Community Nutrition 1. II. 2-3 hr. PR: HN&F 71. Beginning planning for
community nutrition for individuals and families at various stages of the life cycle.
Roles of agencies and professional groups. Clinical experience in community
facilities for the third credit hour optional.
274. Nutrition in Disease. 4 hr. PR: HN&F 71; physiology or consent; biochemistry
required for dietetics majors. Nutritional care aspect of patients. Modification of
diet to meet human nutrition needs in various clinical conditions.
279. Dietetics As a Profession. 1. 1 hr. PR: Senior standing. Discussion of the profession
of dietetics and the professional organization, American Dietetic Association
(ADA). Completion of materials to meet ADA membership requirements.
310. Human Nutrition. I. 3 hr. Principles of nutrition. Emphasizes current research on
nutrient interactions and implications for diet across the life span. (Not for
graduate students in Nutrition.)
370. Human Nutrition Concepts and Application. II. 3 hr. PR: HN&F 260 or equiv., and
consent. Critical study of the nutrient evaluation methods and the nutrient
requirements of the human in health and disease, and scope of its application.
(Offered Spring Semester of even years.)
Interior Design and Housing (ID&H)
233. Decorative Arts 1. I. 3 hr. PR: 9 hr. ID&H. The decorative arts— antiquity to
American periods.
234. Decorative Arts 2. II. 3 hr. PR: ID&H 233. The decorative arts— American periods
to present.
138 FAMILY RESOURCES (HOME ECONOMICS)
235. Contemporary Interior Design. I. 3 hr. PR: ID&H 234. Study of the history of
interiors, 1900-present.
238. Portfolio Design. II. 3 hr. PR: Senior standing. Development and preparation of a
portfolio for interior design and National Council for Interior Design qualifi-
cations examination.
239. Interior Design Field Experience. II. 3-9 hr.; max. 9 hr. PR: Written consent; senior
standing. Opportunity to learn and work within a professional environment with
practicing designers.
Textiles and Clothing (Tx & CI)
221. Socio/Psychological, Cultural Aspects of Dress. II. 3 hr. PR: Tx & CI 121 and senior
standing or consent. A study of writings and research in the social, psychological,
and cultural factors affecting clothing choices— historically and contemporarily.
Original research will be conducted by each student.
222. Fashion Merchandising. I. 3 hr. PR: Tx & CI 121 and junior standing. Emphasis is
placed on merchandising activities performed on the retail level, including
planning sales and assortments, selecting merchandise for resale, controlling
inventories, and determining profit. Basic mathematical formulas involved in
merchandising are practiced.
224. Flat Pattern Design. I, II. 3 hr. PR: Tx & CI 27, 124, 126, or consent. Opportunity for
creative expression and for understanding of pattern design through flat pattern.
Costumes designed and constructed by the student.
225. Tailoring. I, II. 3 hr. PR: Tx & CI 27, 124, 224. Tailoring suits and coats. Emphasis on
professional techniques, advanced fitting, and construction of garments.
226. Apparel Design and Illustration. II. 3 hr. PR: Tx & CI 224 or consent. Art principles
and fashion terminology explored to increase the ability to analyze apparel
designs. Examination of different sources of design inspiration. Techniques of
drawing from a live fashion model and various media for apparel design
presentation.
227. Advanced Textiles. I, II. 3 hr. PR: Tx & CI 27, 127. Comparative characteristics of
all textile fibers are presented. Physical and chemical properties are explained
with reference to fiber morphology and/or manufacturing processes.
228. Clothing for Special Needs. I. 3 hr. PR: Tx & CI 224 or consent. Examines physical,
psychological, and sociological clothing needs of handicapped and/or aged
individuals. Historical developments, current research, and research needs are
explored. Students conduct a pertinent individual research project.
229. Fashion Merchandising Study Tour. I or II. 1 hr. PR: Senior standing in textiles and
clothing. An examination of the textiles and clothing industry is made through
on-site visits to: historic costume and textile collections, apparel manufacturing
plants, design showrooms, buying offices, pattern companies, and retail estab-
lishments. Readings included.
FOREIGN LANGUAGES
Robert J. Elkins, Chairperson of the Department
205-B Chitwood Hall
Degree Offered: M.A.
Graduate Faculty: Members Claesges, Dunbar, Goldberg, Gonzalez, Harss, Hinckley,
McNerney, Murphy, Reider, Renahan, Schlunk, Siemens, Spleth, Taylor, and
Whitley. Associate Members Bendena, Clark-Evans, Dixon, Elkins, Marechal, and
Prentiss.
The Department of Foreign Languages offers options for graduate study
in French, German, Spanish (peninsular literature as well as Spanish-
FOREIGN LANGUAGES 139
American literature}, the teaching of English to speakers of other languages
(TESOL), linguistics, and comparative literature. Graduate courses are also
offered in classics, foreign literature in English translation, language teaching
methods, and bibliography and research. Candidates for the master's degree
are accepted in any of the option areas as long as they fulfill all requirements
of the Master of Arts (M.A.) listed below.
The department chairperson is the official adviser for all departmental
graduate students. The chairperson, or associate chairperson, serves as
temporary adviser until the student requests, and has approved by the
associate chairperson, a committee of three or more faculty members during
his or her first semester of study. Students should inform themselves of
faculty members' areas of expertise early in their first semester in order to
facilitate committee selection. The student should request a meeting of his or
her committee prior to pre-registration for the second semester to get
acquainted and discuss his or her professional goals. The student should
develop a close working relationship with the committee and feel free to
request a committee meeting whenever necessary — for guidance or course
selection, advice on professional advancement, examinations, possible thesis
topics, etc. Students may also request a revision of the composition of their
committees when professional interests change.
A student is expected to have an undergraduate major in the areas of
interest or be required to make up any deficiencies. The student should
normally show an average of at least 3.0 (B) in undergraduate foreign
language courses.
Requirements
1. Minimum of 24 hours of course work in the department exclusive of
391 and 397 courses. (A total of 36 hours is required.)
2. Maximum of 3 hours of 397 credit unless a thesis is undertaken, in
which case 6 hours of 397 credit can be applied to the 36 required
hours.
3. No more than 3 hours of 391 credit can be applied to the 36 hours. (An
exception can be made only if used to allow a student to enroll in a 200
course and student has already reached the maximum number of 200
credits.)
4. Selection of options in specific areas.
Options:
a. French
Four French literature courses
Linguistics 247— Structure of Modern French
Linguistics 341 — History of the French Language
French 217— French Culture or
French 292 — French Civilization
French 344— Explication de Textes
b. German
Four German literature courses
Linguistics 257— Structure of German
Linguistics 351— History of the German Language
German 292 or 392— German Culture and Civilization
140 FOREIGN LANGUAGES
Spanish (Two options)
Option I:
Four peninsular literature courses
Spanish 223— Estudios de Estilo or
Spanish 324— Explicacion de Textos
Spanish 392— Spanish Culture
Linguistics 217— Structure of Spanish
Linguistics 311— History of the Spanish Language
Option II:
Four Spanish American literature courses
Spanish 223— Estudios de Estilo or
Spanish 324— Explicacion de Textos
Spanish 292— Spanish American Culture
Linguistics 217— Structure of Spanish
Linguistics 311— History of the Spanish Language
TESOL
Language 293— Methods ESL
Language 392— Theory ESL
Linguistics 392 — ESL Linguistics
Language 421— Teaching FL in College
Linguistics 202— Phonology
EFL 391— American Culture
Four courses from the following:
English 211 — History of the English Language
English 220— American Poetry
English 235 — American Drama
English 340— The American Novel to 1915
English 341— The American Novel 1915 to Present
English 369— American Literature to 1830
English 370— American Literature, 1830-1865
English 371— American Literature, 1865-1915
English 372— American Literature, 1915 to Present
Linguistics
Minimum of six linguistic courses including:
Linguistics 202— Phonology
Linguistics 283— Transformational Grammar
Linguistics 284— History of Linguistics
Linguistics 287— Psycholinguistics
Linguistics 288— Sociolinguistics
One culture course of a contrastive nature
In lieu of four literature courses, two of the following can
substitute for literature courses: (One may double count for the
linguistics requirement for those students writing a thesis.)
Language 341— History of French
Language 351— History of German
Language 311— History of Spanish
English 211— History of English
Linguistics 353— Middle High German
Linguistics 354— Middle High German
Linguistics 313— Old Spanish
Linguistics 343— Old French
English 310— Old English
English 311— Old English
FOREIGN LANGUAGES 141
f. Comparative Literature
Eight courses of literature (six of the eight must be in the
department of FL)
One culture course of a contrastive nature
One of the following 300-level linguistics courses:
English 211— History of the English Language
English 310 or 311— Old English
g. Other students may petition for another option which falls within
the general guidelines but is not listed in a-f. A detailed plan must
be submitted and approved by a committee appointed by the
department chairperson.
5. All international students whose native language is not English must
demonstrate proficiency in English. Proficiency may be demonstrated
in either of the following ways:
a. TOEFL of 550 and TSE of 230
b. ACTFL oral proficiency rating of 2 and successful passing of a
department English writing examination
6. Students choosing options a, b, or c must demonstrate proficiency in
that language by achieving a 2+ oral proficiency rating and success-
fully passing the departmental writing examination in that language.
7. Students who choose options d, e, and f and whose native language is
English must demonstrate proficiency in a second language using the
criteria in section 6 or present four semesters or the equivalent of two
foreign languages with at least a B average.
8. Students choosing option d whose native language is not English
must demonstrate a higher level of English than that required in point
five. English proficiency for those students may be demonstrated in
one of the following ways:
a. TOEFL of 600 and TSE of 250.
b. ACTFL oral proficiency rating of 2+ and successful passing of the
departmental advanced English writing examination.
9. If required courses are not offered during the time the student is
enrolled, he/she may request permission to make appropriate substi-
tutions. Students must declare the option they intend to follow at the
time of their initial registration. Change in option can be made at
student request prior to the semester in which the student takes
his/her written examinations.
10. A 3.00 GPA is required for graduation.
11. Demonstration of ability to undertake research and to write clearly
and succinctly. The five possible options for fulfilling this requirement
are listed in the departmental graduate student handbook.
12. Seven-hour written examination based upon the reading list. Student
will have a reading list composed of seven sections. One may be
drawn up by the student and the student's major adviser or selected
from the master reading list. Candidates who write a thesis will have
the number of sections (and hours of the examination) reduced to
four. Five of the seven exams must be in the area of the student's
option unless the student writes a thesis; in this case, three of the four
must be in the option.
13. A one- to two-hour oral examination based upon course work and/or
thesis.
All graduate assistants are required to complete Language Teaching
Methods 421 as part of the work in the major fields unless they have had a
142 FOREIGN LANGUAGES
similar course in their undergraduate study. The candidate's committee,
together with the student, will determine the distribution of courses and the
thesis requirement in the light of the student's aims and needs. The committee
also will administer written and oral comprehensive examinations near the
end of the candidate's course of study. Both oral and written examinations are
normally given only twice a year, in November and in April.
Graduate assistants are required to enroll each semester in Lang. 490 and
499, although these credits do not count toward the master's.
Because of staff scheduling difficulties, students should not expect to
have their committees available for the completion of work on their degrees
for summer graduation.
A thesis, if chosen, must be submitted to the student's committee
chairperson at least one month before the end of the enrollment period in
which the student expects to complete all requirements for graduation. If this
requirement is not met, thesis acceptance may be withheld for one semester.
An acceptable thesis proposal, including a problem statement, a thorough
review of the literature, and an appropriate research design, is to be submitted
to, and approved by, the student's committee before a thesis can be
undertaken. Normally this proposal is submitted at least one semester before
undertaking the writing of the thesis.
The thesis defense will be approximately one hour in length and is given
after successful completion of the written examinations on elective master's
reading list sections and the oral examination on course work.
One bound copy of the approved thesis is to be given to the Department of
Foreign Languages upon completion of work for the degree.
Normally, the master's program requires four full semesters of study.
Graduate assistants in particular should take this fact into account when
planning their programs.
Special Courses of Study Abroad
Courses in German have been offered in Germany and Austria during the
summer, in Spanish in Spain and Colombia during the summer, and in French
in Canada during the summer and in France during the fall, spring, and
summer. Students participating in a fall or spring semester abroad enroll for
15-18 semester hours of credit.
The Department of Foreign Languages offers a spring and a summer
session in France and a summer session in Austria and in Spain or Colombia-
contingent upon funding and faculty availability.
Bibliography and Research (Bibgy.)
301. Introduction to Research. I. 1-3 hr. (For seminar credit, counts as 1 hour; for a
specific project carried out during the course, counts as 3 hours.) PR: Graduate
standing. Pro-seminar in graduate-level research in foreign languages, literature,
and linguistics.
365. Methods of Research. I. 3 hr.
Classics (Class.)
201. Roman Novelists. I. (Alternate Years.) 3 hr. PR: Class. 109, 110, or consent.
202. Roman Comedy. II. (Alternate Years.) 3 hr. PR: Class. 109, 110, or consent.
235. Roman Epic. I. 3 hr. PR: Class. 109, 110, or equiv.
FOREIGN LANGUAGES 143
292. Pro-Seminar in Latin or Greek Literature. 1-6 hr.* PR: Consent. Special topics.
392. Seminar in Latin or Greek Literature. 1-6 hr.* PR: Consent. Special topics.
397. Master's Degree Research or Thesis. I, II. 1-15 hr. PR: Consent. Research activities
leading to a thesis, problem report, research paper, or equivalent scholarly project.
Foreign Literature in Translation (FLIT)
211. Chinese Literature in Translation. I. 3 hr. Survey of selected works of Chinese
literature from ancient times through the eighteenth century.
221. Japanese Literature in Translation. II. 3 hr. Survey of selected works of Japanese
literature from ancient period to the mid-nineteenth century and an introduction to
a few works of the modern period.
292. Pro-Seminar. I, II, S. 1-6 hr.* PR: 6 hr. of upper-division literature courses or
consent. Special topics.
392. Seminar. I, II, S. 1-6 hr.* PR: 6 hr. of upper-division literature courses or consent.
Special topics.
French (Frch.)
203. Conversational French. I. 3 hr. PR: Frch. 110 or consent. Intensive spoken French.
217. French Civilization. II. 3 hr. PR: 12 hr. of French.
221. The Romantic Movement. I. 3 hr. PR: 18 hr. of French or consent.
222. French Realism. II. 3 hr. PR: 18 hr. of French or consent.
229. Literature of the Sixteenth Century. I. 3 hr. PR: 18 hr. of French or consent.
231. Phonetics and Pronunciation. II. 3 hr. PR: 12 hr. of French or equiv.
292. Pro-Seminar. I, II, S. 1-6 hr.* PR: 18 hr. of French or consent. Special topics.
305. Fundamentals for Reading French. I. 3 hr. PR: Graduate or upper-division
standing. (Frch. 305 and 306 is intended for graduate students from other
departments to teach them to read general and technical French.)
306. Reading French. II. 3 hr. PR: 12 hr. of French or equiv. or Frch. 305. (Graduate
students may meet a doctoral foreign language requirement hy achieving a grade
of B or better in this course.)
326. Literary Criticism. II. 3 hr. PR: B.A. in French or consent.
337. Moliere. II. 3 hr. PR: B.A. in French or consent.
344. Explication de Textes. II. 3 hr. PR: 24 hr. of French or equiv.
371. The Modern Novel to 1930. I. 3 hr. PR: B.A. in French or consent.
372. The Novel After 1930. II. 3 hr. PR: B.A. in French or consent.
381. Medieval French Literature. II. 3 hr. PR: Lingu. 342 or consent.
391. Advanced Topics. I, II. 1-6 hr. PR: Consent. Investigation of advanced topics not
covered in regularly scheduled courses.
392. Seminar. 1-6 hr.* PR: Consent. Special topics.
397. Master's Degree Research or Thesis. I, II. 1-15 hr. PR: Consent. Research activities
leading to a thesis, problem report, research paper, or equivalent scholarly project.
*Variable credit courses normally carry 3 hr. credit. Exceptions are made only in emergencies
and must be approved by the department chairperson and the professor teaching the course.
144 FOREIGN LANGUAGES
German (Ger.)
243. Medieval German Literature. I. 3 hr. PR: 18 hr. of German or consent.
245. Classicism and Romanticism. I. 3 hr. PR: 18 hr. of German or consent. Critical
study of German literature from 1750 to 1830.
246. The Liberal Age. II. 3 hr. PR: 18 hr. of German or consent. Critical study of German
literature from 1830 to 1880.
247. The Age of Crisis. I. 3 hr. PR: 18 hr. of German or consent. A critical study of
German literature from 1880 to present.
292. Pro-Seminar. 1-6 hr.* PR: Consent. Special topics.
301. Independent Reading. PR: Consent. I. 3 hr. Supervised reading for students who
wish to do intensive work.
302. Independent Reading. II. 3 hr. PR: Ger. 301. Continuation of Ger. 301.
305. Fundamentals for Reading German. I. 3 hr. PR: Graduate or upper-division
standing. (Ger. 305-306 is intended for graduate students from other departments
to teach them to read general and technical German.)
306. Reading German. II. 3 hr. PR: 12 hr. of German or equiv. or Ger. 305. (Graduate
students may meet a doctoral foreign language requirement by achieving a grade
of B or better in this course.)
361. Lyric Poetry. I. 3 hr. PR: 24 hr. of German or consent.
376. The Modern Novel. I, II. 3 hr. PR: 24 hr. of German or consent. A study of
representative modern novels from 1900 to 1945.
391. Advanced Topics. I, II. 1-6 hr. PR: Consent. Investigation of advanced topics not
covered in regularly scheduled courses.
392. Seminar. 1-6 hr.* PR: Graduate standing or consent. Special topics.
397. Master's Degree Research or Thesis. I, II. 1-15 hr. PR: Consent. Research activities
leading to a thesis, problem report, research paper, or equivalent scholarly project.
Language Teaching Methods (Lang.)
221. The Teaching of Foreign Languages. I. 3 hr. PR: Consent. Required of all students
who are prospective foreign language teachers on the secondary level.
292. Pro-Seminar. I, II, S. 1-6 hr.* PR: Consent. Special topics.
391. Advanced Topics. I, II. 1-6 hr. PR: Consent. Investigation of advanced topics not
covered in regularly scheduled courses.
392. Seminar. I, II, S. 1-6 hr.* PR: Consent. Special topics.
397. Master's Degree Research or Thesis. I, II. 1-15 hr. PR: Consent. Research activities
leading to a thesis, problem report, research paper, or equivalent scholarly project.
421. Teaching Foreign Language in College. I, II. 1-6 hr.* Methods and techniques of
teaching a foreign language at the college level.
490. Teaching Practicum. I, II, S. 1-3 hr.
499. Graduate Colloquium. I, II, S. 1-6 hr.* Required each semester of all graduate
assistants in the Department of Foreign Languages.
*Variable credit courses normally carry 3 hr. credit. Exceptions are made only in emergencies
and must be approved by the department chairperson and the professor teaching the course.
FOREIGN LANGUAGES 145
Linguistics (Lingu.)
202. Phonology. I. 3 hr. PR: Lingu. 1, 111 or consent. Description of sounds and sound
systems in language. Articulatory phonetics. Structural and generative approaches
to phonetics.
217. Structure of Spanish. I. 3 hr. PR: 18 hr. of Spanish and Lingu. Ill or consent.
Description of the phonological or grammatical systems of Spanish, with emphasis
on contrastive analysis (Spanish/English) and applied linguistics.
247. Structure of Modern French. I. 3 hr. PR: 18 hr. of French and Lingu. Ill or consent.
Study of phonology, morphology, and syntax of modern French together with a
constrastive analysis of French and English.
257. Structure of German. II. 3 hr. PR: 18 hr. of German and Lingu. Ill or consent.
Phonological, morphological, and syntactical structure of contemporary German
language.
267. Structure of Russian. II. 3 hr. PR: 18 hr. of Russian and Lingu. Ill or consent.
Phonological, morphological, and syntactical structure of contemporary Russian.
283. Transformational Grammar. S. 3 hr. PR: Lingu. Ill and consent. Emphasis on
generative syntax in English, German, Romance, and Slavic languages.
284. History of Linguistics. I. 3 hr. PR: Lingu. Ill or consent. Development of linguistics
from Greeks and Romans to contemporary researchers with concentration on
major linguists and schools of the nineteenth and twentieth centuries.
287. Psychoiinguistics. I. 3 hr. PR: Lingu. Ill or consent. Provides an insight into the
many areas of psychoiinguistics study, including language acquisition, sentence
processing, animal communication, dichotic listening, aphasia, and semantics.
288. Sociolinguistics. I. (Alternate Years.) 3 hr. PR: Lingu. 1 or 111 or consent.
Linguistic study of geographical and social variation in languages; effects of
regional background, social class, ethnic group, sex, and setting; outcomes of
conflict between dialect and between languages.
292. Pro-Seminar. 1-6 hr.* PR: Consent. Special topics.
311. History of the Spanish Language. II. (Alternate Years.) 3 hr. PR: 18 hr. of Spanish
and Lingu. Ill or consent. Evolution of Castilian from Vulgar Latin to its modern
standard form through a study of historical phonology, morphology, and syntax,
together with the external factors which influenced the development of the
language.
313. Oid Spanish. II. 3 hr. PR: Consent.
341. History of the French Language. II. (Alternate Years.) 3 hr. PR: 18 hr. of French and
Lingu. Ill or consent. Evolution of French from Vulgar Latin into the Modern
French standard through a study of historical phonology, morphology, and syntax,
together with the external factors which influenced the development of the
language.
343. Old French. I. 3 hr. PR: Consent. Study of the oldest monuments of the French
language including the Chanson de Roland and Aucassin et Nicolette in an effort to
trace the evolution of Francien, Anglo-Norman, and Picard and Vulgar Latin.
351. History of the German Language. II. (Alternate Years.) 3 hr. PR: 18 hr. of German
and Lingu. Ill or consent. Historical development of standard German with
emphasis on its relationship to the other German languages and dialects.
*Variable credit courses normally carry 3 hr. credit. Exceptions are made only in emergencies
and must be approved by the department chairperson and the professor teaching the course.
146 FOREIGN LANGUAGES
353. Middle High German 1. I. 3 hr. PR: 18 hr. of German and Lingu. Ill or consent.
Study of the linguistic developments of Middle High German from the eleventh to
the fifteenth centuries with illustrative readings from the Niebelungenlied.
354. Middle High German 2. II. 3 hr. PR: Lingu. 353. Continuation of Lingu. 353 with
illustrative readings from the Middle High German lyric poets and the courtly
epics.
361. History of the Russian Language. II. (Alternate Years.) 3 hr. PR: 18 hr. of Russian
and Lingu. Ill or consent. Development of Russian from Indo-European to the
present.
391. Advanced Topics. I, II. 1-6 hr. PR: Consent. Investigation of advanced topics not
covered in regularly scheduled courses.
392. Seminar. 1-6 hr.* PR: Consent. Special topics.
397. Master's Degree Research or Thesis. I, II. 1-15 hr. PR: Consent. Research activities
leading to a thesis, problem report, research paper, or equivalent scholarly project.
Russian (Russ.)
292. Pro-Seminar. 1-6 hr.* PR: 18 hr. of Russian or equiv.
305. Reading Russian. I. 3 hr. PR: Graduate or upper-division standing. (Russ. 305-306
is intended for graduate students from other departments to teach them to read
general and technical Russian.]
306. Reading Russian. II. 3 hr. PR: 12 hr. of Russian or equiv. or Russ. 305. (Graduate
students may meet a doctoral foreign language requirement hy achieving a grade
of B or better in this course.)
Spanish (Span.)
221. Golden Age Literature. II. 3 hr. PR: 24 hr. of Spanish or consent. Consideration of
Spanish literature of the Renaissance and the Counter Reformation with readings
in the novel, the comedia, and lyric poetry.
223. Estudios De Estilo. I. 3 hr. PR: 18 hr. of Spanish or equiv.
224. Introduccion a la literatura. II. (Alternate Years.) 3 hr. A study of basic genres,
themes, and techniques. Intensive reading of selected texts from various periods.
Emphasis on Peninsular and/or Spanish American literature.
292. Pro-Seminar. 1-6 hr.* PR: Consent. Special topics.
315. Lyric Poetry. I. 3 hr. PR: 24 hr. of Spanish or equiv.
324. Explicacion De Textos. II. (Alternate Years.) 3 hr. PR: 24 hr. of Spanish or equiv.
325. The Picaresque Novel. I. 3 hr. PR: 24 hr. of Spanish or equiv.
391. Cervantes. II. 3 hr. PR: 24 hr. of Spanish or consent.
392. Seminar. 1-6 hr.* PR: Consent. Special topics.
395. Sixteenth Century Literature. I. 3 hr. PR: B.A. in Spanish or consent.
397. Master's Degree Research or Thesis. I, II. 1-15 hr. PR: Consent. Research activities
leading to a thesis, problem report, research paper, or equivalent scholarly project.
•Variable credit courses normally carry 3 hr. credit. Exceptions are made only in emergencies
and must be approved by the department chairperson and the professor teaching the course.
FOREIGN LANGUAGES 147
FORESTRY
Jack E. Coster, Chairperson of Division of Forestry
322-A Percival Hall
Harry V. Wiant, Jr., Coordinator of the Graduate Program
Degrees Offered: M.S.F., Ph.D.
Graduate Faculty: Members Armstrong, Brock, Carvell, Hassler, Hicks, Patterson,
Tajchman, White, Wiant, Yandle, and Zinn. Associate Members Coster, Jackson, and
Kidd.
Master of Science in Forestry (M.S.F.)
Admission requirements are listed on page 383 for the College of
Agriculture and Forestry. Additionally, students seeking admission for the
degree of Master of Science of Forestry (M.S.F.) should have completed an
undergraduate curriculum in forestry. A student whose undergraduate
degree is in a field other than forestry will ordinarily be required to take
supplemental undergraduate courses. Candidates for the degree may major in
forest biometry, forest ecology, forest economics, forest genetics, forest
meterology, forest management, silviculture, or wood industry. The candidate
must complete 30 hours of approved study, 6 hours of which shall constitute a
thesis. The program ordinarily requires two years of residence.
Doctor of Philosophy (Ph.D.)
A candidate for the Doctor of Philosophy degree in Forest Resources
Science in the College of Agriculture and Forestry may choose as the major
field of study forest science, wood science, or wildlife management. Within
these major fields of study, specialization is limited only by the range of
competencies in the graduate faculty.
Curriculum requirements of all candidates include a block of graduate
courses in the major field which will constitute a comprehensive review of the
significant knowledge in that field, and a block of graduate courses in a minor
area of study. A minimum of 60 semester hours beyond the bachelor's degree
and exclusive of the dissertation will be required.
The research work for the doctoral dissertation must show a high degree
of scholarship and must present an original contribution to the field of forest
resources science. In addition to course work and the dissertation, the
candidate is required to pass a qualifying examination and a final examination.
Admission requirements include a minimum grade-point average of 3.0
during the last years of undergraduate studies, a master's degree, a minimum
total score of 1,200 on the verbal and quantitative portions of the Graduate
Record Examination, three letters of recommendation, submission of copies of
previous publications, at least a 600-word composition indicating the student's
purpose and objective in undertaking graduate studies as related to major
issues in that area, and an acceptable TOEFL score if a foreign student.
Forestry (For.)
220. Forest Policy and Administration. I and II. 3 hr. PR: Upperclass forestry major or
consent. Forest policy in the United States; important federal and state laws;
administration of public and private forests; problems in multiple-use forestry.
226. Remote Sensing of Environment. II. 2 hr. PR: Math. 3, 4. Measurement and
interpretation of natural resources and environment from photography, radar,
infrared, and microwave imagery.
148 FORESTRY
233. Principles of Industrial Forestry. I. 3 hr. PR: Forestry senior or consent. Analysis
and case studies of problems pertinent to the integration of wood conversion
technology with principles of production, marketing, and management.
310. Biometeorology. II. 4 hr. PR: Consent. A description of the physical environment of
plants and its effect on growth, its modification for increasing yield and for plant
protection against extreme atmospheric conditions.
410. Biophysical Ecology. I. 3 hr. PR: For. 310 or consent. An analysis of interactions of
plants and animals with their environment based on principles of environmental
physics. Energy and mass exchange between plants and animals, and their
environment; environmental variables and organism parameters. [Offered in Fall
of even years.)
419. Microclimatology. II. 3 hr. PR: Consent. A description and quantitative treatment
of climate near the ground in terms of physiological processes of energy and mass
exchange.
470. Special Topics in Forestry, Wood Science, Wildlife, or Recreation. I, II, S. 1-6 hr.
474. Seminar in Forest Hydrology and Climatology. I, II. 1 hr. PR: Consent.
480. Principles of Research. I. 2 hr. The specific method as applied in the formal,
concrete, and normative sciences, with special emphasis on forestry-related
research plans and reports.
490. Teaching Practicum. I, II. 1-6 hr. PR: Consent. Supervised practices in college
teaching of forest resources management, wood science, wildlife management
resources, and recreation and parks.
491. Advanced Study. I, II, S. 1-6 hr. PR: Consent. Investigation in advanced subjects
which are not covered in regularly scheduled classes.
496. Graduate Seminar. I, II. 1 hr. PR: Consent.
497. Research. I, II, S. 1-15 hr.
498. Thesis. I, II, S. 1-6 hr. PR: Consent.
499. Graduate Colloquium. I, II, S. 1-6 hr. PR: Consent. For graduate students not
seeking course work credit but who wish to meet resident requirements, use the
University's facilities, and participate in its academic and cultural programs.
Forest Hydrology (F. Hyd.)
243. Forest Water Quality. I. 3 hr. PR: Forestry major or consent. (This course will not
substitute for F. Hyd. 244.) Influences of natural forest cover, forest land uses, and
harvesting practices on selected water quality parameters that can be detected in
simple field and laboratory tests.
244. Watershed Management. II. 3 hr. PR: F. Man. 12, 211. (Primarily for forest
management majors.) Influences of silvicultural practices and forest management
activities on the hydrology of forested catchments.
Forest Management (F. Man.)
200. Forest Measurement, Interpretation, Wildlife Management. S. 5 hr. PR: Biol. 51;
C.E. 5; F. Man. 122. (Course will be taught during four consecutive 6-day weeks.]
Application and study of forest resources practice with emphasis on field
problems.
201. Forest Resources Management Southern Trip. S. 1 hr. PR: F. Man. 200 or consent.
One-week trip to the Southern Pine Region to observe forest management
practices on private and public lands.
FORESTRY 149
211. Silvicultural Systems. I. 4 hr. PR: Forestry major or consent; F. Man. 12. Principles
of regeneration cuttings, intermediate cuttings, and cultural operations, with their
application to forest stands.
213. Regional Silviculture. I. 2 hr. PR: Forestry major or consent. F. Man. 12; PR or
Cone: F. Man. 211. Major forest types of the United States: their composition,
management, problems, and silvicultural treatment.
215. Principles of Artificial Forestation. II. 3 hr. PR: Forestry major or consent; F. Man.
12. Seeding and planting nursery practice; phases of artificial regeneration.
216. Forest Genetics and Tree Improvement. II. 3 hr. PR: Forestry major or consent;
Gen. 272 or equiv., or consent. Forest genetic principles and their application to
forest tree improvement, including crossing methods, selection systems, and other
techniques.
222. Advanced Forest Mensuration. II. 3 hr. PR: Forestry major or consent; F. Man. 122.
Measurement of growth and yield; statistical methods applied to forest measure-
ment problems.
230. Principles of Forestry Economics. II. 3 hr. PR: Forestry major or consent; Econ. 51
and 52 or equiv. Production, distribution, and use of forest goods and services.
Emphasis on analytical methods and techniques dealing with forest economic
problems.
232. Forest Finance. II. 2 hr. PR: Forestry junior standing or consent. Interest, discount,
and rate earned in forest production and exploitation. Particular reference to
determining value of standing timber, appraisal of forest damages, and forest
taxation.
233. Forest Management. I. 4 hr. PR: Summer Camp; PR or Cone: Forestry major or
consent; F. Man. 211. Principles of sustained yield forest management. Organization
of forest areas, selection of management objectives, application of silvicultural
systems, and regulation of cut. Forest management plan.
234. Forest Resources Management Planning. I, II. 3 hr. PR: Forestry major or consent;
senior standing. Analysis and planning for management of forest resources.
Development of a management plan for an actual forest tract.
330. Advanced Principles of Forestry Economics. II. 3 hr. PR: Econ. 51, 52 or equiv.; F.
Man. 230 or equiv. Intensive study of both micro- and macroeconomics of forestry.
411. Advanced Forest Ecology. I. 3 hr. PR: F. Man. 12 or equiv.; F. Man. 211. Ecological
relationships in forests with emphasis on biogeochemical cycles.
412. Silvicultural Practices for Hardwood Forest Types. II. 3 hr. PR: F. Man. 211.
Designing proper silvicultural systems for managing Appalachian hardwood
stands; reconstructing stand histories, recognizing problems, and prescribing
appropriate silvicultural treatment.
431. Advanced Forest Regulation. I, II. 2 hr. PR: F. Man. 233 or equiv. Intensive study of
area and volume regulation suitable for applied forestry in the United States.
472. Seminar in Silviculture. II. 1-6 hr. per sem.; max. credit, 4 hr. PR: Consent. Reports
and discussions of recent research in fundamental and applied phases of
silviculture with emphasis on hardwood forest types.
473. Seminar in Forest Management. 1 hr.
Wood Science (Wd. Sc.)
200. Forest Measurement Field Practice. S. 3 hr. PR: Wood Industry major, Biol. 51, C.E.
1, F. Man. 122. Application of surveying and mensurational practices with
emphasis on field problems.
150 FORESTRY
201. Wood Industries Field Trip. S. 1 hr. PR: Wd. Sc. 134. A one-week trip to observe
manufacturing methods and techniques of commercial wood industry plants.
Plants visited include furniture, plywood, veneer, hardboard, particle board, pulp
and paper, sawmilling, and preservation.
230. Wood Machining. I. 2 hr. PR: Consent. Introduction to basic concepts of wood
machining with emphasis on production equipment and furniture manufacturing.
231. Wood Finishing. I. 3 hr. PR: Wd. Sc. 121 or 123. Surface preparation, composition of
finishing materials, equipment, techniques, defects, troubleshooting, and quality
control.
232. Wood Adhesion: Theory and Practice. I. 2 hr. PR: Wd. Sc. 123 and 141. Detailed
theoretical introduction and examination of different types of adhesives and
gluing techniques used in the wood industry.
234. Statistical Quality Control. I. 3 hr. PR: Forestry major or consent; Wd. Sc. 134.
Methods used to control quality of manufactured wood products. Control charts of
variables and attributes. Acceptance sampling techniques.
235. Light-Frame Wood Construction. I. 2 hr. PR: Forestry major or consent. Use of
wood in light-frame construction. Basic design procedures and construction
methods.
240. Wood Moisture Relationships. II. 3 hr. PR: Wd. Sc. 123. Principles involved in the
relation between wood and moisture, and purposes, effects, and methods of
seasoning.
251. Forest Products Protection. II. 3 hr. PR: Wd. Sc. 123, 134. Biological organisms
responsible for deterioration of wood products, their control by preservative
methods, and study of fire retarding methods.
260. Plant Layout for Wood Industries. II. 3 hr. PR: Senior standing. Relates knowledge
of wood to industrial wood product processes to optimize production. Study of
proper arrangement of machines, and work and storage areas.
262. Forest Products Decision-Making. I. 3 hr. PR: Junior standing in Forestry.
Decision-making tools and techniques used by the forest products industry such
as simulation linear programming, network analysis, forecasting, game theory.
320. Wood Microstructure. I. 3 hr. PR: Wd. Sc. 123; senior standing. Detailed
examination of wood microstructure as it relates to processing, behavior, and
identification.
340. Advanced Physical Behavior of Wood. I. 3 hr. PR: Wd. Sc. 240 or equiv. or consent.
Physical relationships of water and wood; fluid flow through wood; thermal,
electrical, and acoustical behavior of wood. Theories of wood drying and their
application.
362. Forest Products Operations Research Models. II. 3 hr. PR: Wd. Sc. 262 and
demonstrated knowledge of Fortran and Basic, or consent. Analysis of operations
research models currently used by the forest products industry. Students will
develop new models. (Offered in Spring of even years.)
473. Seminar in Wood Utilization. II. 1 hr. per sem.; max. credit, 4 hr. PR: Consent.
Reports and discussions of recent research in fundamental and applied phases of
wood utilization.
FORESTRY 151
GENETICS AND DEVELOPMENTAL BIOLOGY
Joginder Nath, Chairperson of the Interdisciplinary Faculty
1120 Agricultural Sciences Building
Degrees Offered: M.S., Ph.D.
Graduate Faculty: Members Blaydes, R. L. Butcher, L. Butler, Caterson, Charon,
Gerencser, Kaczmarczyk, Katula, Keller, J. McGraw, Mengoli, Miller, Ong, Overman,
Pore, Quinlan, Reyer, Schein, Sorenson, Thayne, Tryfiates, Ulrich, Van Dyke, Vrana,
Wearden, Williams, and Yelton. Associate Members D. F. Butcher, Hall, Kirk, and
Montiegel.
The M.S. and Ph.D. degrees are offered in genetics and developmental
biology, an interdisciplinary program involving the faculty and facilities of a
number of departments in the various colleges and schools of the University.
A student may concentrate in genetics or developmental biology. The areas in
which specialization is offered are as follows:
Genetics— Biochemical and molecular genetics, cytogenetics, develop-
mental genetics, mutagenesis, toxicology, human genetics, plant genetics,
population and quantitative genetics, and animal breeding;
Developmental Biology— Molecular aspects of development, experimental
morphogenesis, teratology, regeneration, oncology, descriptive embryology,
and life cycles of animals and plants. The chairperson for the genetics and
developmental biology degrees is housed in the College of Agriculture and
Forestry.
The student may also minor in one or more other scientific fields.
The object of this program is to build upon a well-rounded scientific
foundation, a specialized knowledge of the concepts and methods in a
discipline, chosen by the student, which will enable the student to pursue a
productive career in teaching and/or research. Responsibility for a student's
program is vested in a graduate committee charged with arranging the
student's course work, conducting examinations, and supervising the research.
Admission requirements are listed on page 383 for the College of Agriculture
and Forestry.
Basic training in mathematics, physics, chemistry, and biology is required
for admission. Students lacking some prerequisites must fulfill them before
graduation. Applications for graduate study should be sent in as early in the
year as possible, but no later than April 1 for entry the following August.
However, applications are accepted year-round for admission to the program
in the following semester. Official transcripts of baccalaureate and/or
master's degrees must be sent directly to the WVU Office of Admissions and
Records. Three letters of recommendation from science teachers should
accompany the application. Application forms can be received from the WVU
Office of Admissions and Records, P.O. Box 6009, Morgantown, WV 26506-
6009. For further information, write to the Chairperson.
Genetics (Gen.)
290. Crop Breeding. II. 3 hr. PR: Gen. 171 or 321. Methods and basic scientific principles
involved in improvement of leading crops through hybridization, selection, and
other techniques. (Offered in Spring of even years.)
321. Basic Concepts of Modern Genetics. I. 3 hr. PR: 8 hr. biological science and 1 year
chemistry. Independent interitance, linkage. Chemical nature of genetic material.
Control of phenotype by genetic material. Gene action and coding of genetic
material.
152 GENETICS AND DEVELOPMENTAL BIOLOGY
325. Human Genetics. II. 3 hr. PR: Gen. 171 or 321 or consent. Study of genetic system
responsible for development of phenotype in man. [Offered in Spring of odd
years.)
335. Population Genetics. II. 3 hr. PR: Gen. 171 or 321 or consent. Relationship of gene
and genotype frequencies in populations of diploid organisms, and the effects of
mutation, migration, selection, assortive mating, and inbreeding in relation to
single gene pairs. Application of these concepts to multigenic inheritance of
quantitative traits. (Offered in Spring of even years.)
370. Medical Genetics. II. 2-4 hr. PR: Second-year medical student standing; graduate
student in Genetics and Developmental Biology; others by consent. Introduction to
clinical genetics including molecular, biochemical, and cytogenetic aspects of
human biology. Application of genetic principles to human health and disease.
(Also listed as CC MD 370, Med. 370, Pedia. 370.)
424. Cytogenetics. II. 4 hr. PR: Gen. 171 or 321, and Biol. 215 or consent. Emphasis on
macromolecules that carry information of the chromosomes, cell division, and the
cytological and molecular basis of genetics. Special attention given to visible
manisfestation of genes, human cytogenetics, cytogenetics of genomes and
chromosome morphology, and their evolution. (Offered in Spring of odd years.)
426. Advanced Biochemical Genetics. II. 3 hr. PR: Gen. 171 or 321 and organic
chemistry. Physiological and biophysical concepts of genetic material. Structure
and arrangement of genetic units. Nucleic acids as carriers of genetic information.
Gene action and amino acid coding. Biochemical evolution of genetic material.
Genetic control mechanisms. Biochemistry of mutation. (Offered in Spring of even
years.)
427. Genetic Mechanisms of Evolution. I. 3 hr. PR: Gen. 171 orequiv. Molecular genetic
mechanisms which result in evolutionary change. Origin of life, origin and
organization of genetic variability, differentiation of populations, isolation and
speciation, role of hybridization and polploidy , and origin of man. (Offered in Fall
of odd years.)
450. Seminar. I, II. 1 hr. per sem. Recent literature pertaining to biochemical, classical,
human, molecular, and cytological genetics.
497. Research. I, II. 1-15 hr.
GEOGRAPHY
Robert Hanham, Assistant Chairperson of Department of Geology and Geography
406 White Hall
Degree Offered: M.A.
Graduate Faculty: Members Calzonetti, Elmes, Hanham, Isserman, Kite, Martis,
Pickles, Pyle, and Walker.
The graduate program in geography at WVU provides students with the
opportunity to study for an M.A. degree in one of five areas of specialization:
(1) energy studies; (2) geographic information systems and spatial methods;
(3) regional development and planning; (4) regional science; and (5) water
resources and environmental management. Students who are interested in
pursuing research in an area other than these may do so provided the research
area matches the interests of a faculty member in the department who agrees
to supervise the student's program. Students who wish to focus their research
on a particular region are encouraged to do so. Faculty in the geography
program currently have research interests in Appalachia, North America,
Africa, Europe, the Middle East, and the Pacific.
GEOGRAPHY 153
The award of an M.A. in Geography requires: (1) 30 hours of graduate
credit with a minimum grade-point average of 3.0; (2) satisfactory completion
of Geography 301 (Geographic Theory and Practice, 3 credits), Geography
302 (Research Design, 3 credits), Geography 399 (Geostatistics and Quantita-
tive Methods, 3 credits), and 4 credit hours of Geography 496 (Graduate
Research Seminar); (3) satisfactory completion of at least 18 graduate credit
hours in geography, of which the 13 listed in (2) immediately above may be
included; (4) a successful oral examination of the student's knowledge of the
literature in the student's field of specialization and in the philosophy of
geography; and (5) completion and successful oral defense of a research
thesis.
Prospective students should have an overall undergraduate grade-point
average of 2.75, and 3.0 GPA for geography courses. Students with degrees in
other disciplines are encouraged to apply, but they may be asked to make up
deficiencies in geography during their first year in the program. Incoming
geography students may also be asked to make up deficiencies if such are
found to exist during the students' entry interview with faculty immediately
prior to the first semester of their program. Applicants for the program should
submit GRE scores, or equivalent qualification, and three letters of reference,
and official transcripts.
Each incoming student is interviewed prior to the first semester of his or
her program. The purpose of this meeting is threefold: to introduce the student
to the faculty; to ascertain the student's interests; and to assess whether the
student has deficiencies that should be rectified. Students with well-defined
interests are assigned an adviser at this time. Other students are supervised
by the Director of the Graduate Program until the student develops a more
clearly defined research interest, which should be no later than the end of the
student's first year in the program. At the end of this year, at least two further
faculty will be assigned to each student to form the student's program
committee. At least one of these must be a geography faculty member at WVU.
Students may change advisers or committee members after consultation with
the adviser, the Director of the Graduate Program, and the Director of the
Geography program.
Students are expected to choose an area of specialization within the first
semester of their program of study. This choice will determine which courses
the student shall take. In each area, the student is encouraged to take courses
both in geography as well as outside the discipline. In general it is expected
that a student's program will have the following format:
First Semester, First Year
•Geog. 301 — Geographic Theory and Practice (3 hr.)
•Geog. 496 — Graduate Seminar in Geography (2 1-hr. modules)
•3 credit hours of directed readings or graduate course.
Second Semester, First Year
•Geog. 302— Geographic Research Design (3 hr.)
•Geog. 399— Quantitative Methods in Geo-Sciences (3 hr.)
•Geog. 496 — Graduate Seminar in Geography (2 1-hr. modules)
•1-3 credit hours of directed readings or graduate course.
First Semester, Second Year
•9 credit hours of directed readings or graduate courses
Second Semester, Second Year
•3 or more credit hours of thesis research.
154 GEOGRAPHY
All students shall be examined no later than the end of their third
semester on their knowledge of the literature in their area of specialization
and in the philosophy of geography. The examination shall be oral and it will
be conducted by the student's committee. The student shall pass the
examination if at least two-thirds of the committee vote in favor of a pass.
Should the student fail the examination, either the student shall be required to
undertake some remedial study, such as a course or directed readings which
must be completed with at least a B grade, or the student will be required to
retake the examination. No student may retake the examination more than
once.
The thesis will represent the outcome of independent research undertaken
by the student. It must be regarded by the student's program committee as a
contribution to the discipline of geography. The thesis must also reflect the
student's knowledge of the literature pertaining to the subject matter of the
thesis. A student may substitute a thesis of a special nature with the approval
of the faculty; e.g. policy document, film, and so on. A full proposal regarding
the thesis research will be presented to the faculty in an oral presentation no
later than the end of the third semester of the student's program of study. The
student's committee will determine the proposal's acceptability. If it is
deemed unacceptable, a further presentation may be required. The proposal
must be typed and copied and submitted to the committee at least two weeks
prior to the presentation. The defense of the thesis will take place when the
student and his/her committee agree that a defensible copy of the thesis is
complete. For full-time students this shall be no more than three years after
entry into the program. The examination is graded on a pass/provisional-
pass/fail basis by a majority vote of the committee. A student who fails may
submit another thesis or a revised version of the existing one upon the
approval of the student's committee. No student shall be re-examined more
than once. A student who is given a provisional pass will generally be
required to make minor revisions or corrections to the thesis.
It is expected that full-time students shall not need more than two years
to satisfy all program requirements. In many cases these can be fulfilled in
less time than that.
Research and teaching assistantships are awarded on an annual basis
and for no more than two years. Awards for the second year are based on
performance in the first year with respect to both assistantship duties and
academic progress. Assistantships include a full tuition waiver.
The graduate program in geography at WVU has strong liaison with the
University's Geology Program, the Regional Research Institute, the Depart-
ment of Mineral Resource Economics, Water Research Institute, International
Studies Program, West Virginia Geological and Economic Survey, and with
several other units in the University. The department has access to excellent
computing facilities based on a VAX-750 which supports multiple remote
terminals, two disc packs, two tape drives, a megatek graphics terminal,
Benson plotter and digitizer. The VAX is linked to the WVNET mainframe for
access to all major software packages, including SASGRAPH and additional
hard- ware, e.g. Zeta and flatbed plotters. Departmental software includes MINITAB,
SURFACE II, and GIMMS for statistics and graphics. Departmental word-
processing is available for graduate students.
GEOGRAPHY 155
Geography (Geog.)
200. Spatial Analysis. I. 3 hr. Introduces quantitative techniques for the collection,
classification, and spatial analysis of geographical data. Emphasizes map analysis
and the application of spatial analysis to geographical problems occurring in
everyday contexts.
201. Geography of West Virginia. II. 3 hr. Study of past, present, and future patterns of
the physical environment of West Virginia as modified by human activities. To
learn the use of geographical information systems for planning in West Virginia.
202. Political Geography. II. 3 hr. Examines the interrelationship between politics and
the environment, human territoriality, the political organization of space, geopo-
litical aspects of the nation-state and international problems.
205. Environmentalism in the United States. II. 3 hr. Surveys natural resource
exploitation and environmental alteration in the United States from the beginning
of European settlement, with consideration of changing natural resources,
conservation, and environmental perceptions and policies.
209. Industrial Location. II. 3 hr. PR: Geog. 109 or consent. Applied theoretical aspects
of location decisions in primary, secondary, and tertiary activities. Emphasis will
be on the understanding of location patterns and the impact of industries on other
characteristics of communities.
210. Global Issues: Inequality and Interdependence. II. (Alternate Years.) 3 hr. PR:
Geog. 1 or 2 or 8. Themes of spatial equity and justice in an increasingly
interdependent world system. Contemporary issues concerning location, place,
movement, and region.
215. Population Geography. I. 3 hr. Study of the geographic distribution of population
and population characteristics including density, age, fertility, mortality and
settlement patterns. Problems of migration and population/resource issues also
will be covered, with an emphasis on developing countries. [Offered in Fall of odd
years.}
219. Problems in Geography. I, II. 1-9 hr. PR: Consent. Independent study or special
topics.
220. Seminar in Geography. I, II. 1-9 hr. per sem.; max. 15 hr. PR: Consent. Includes
separate seminars in urban, economic, physical, behavioral, social, Appalachian,
transportation, census, planning, resource, international studies, geographic
model building, rural problems, cartography, aging and environment, and energy.
221. Geomorphology. II. 3 hr. PR: Geol. 1 or 5. [Optional field trip at student's expense.J
An examination of the physical processes which shape the surface of the earth,
with emphasis on fluvial processes and environmental geomorphology. [Also
listed as Geol. 221.)
225. Urban Planning Concepts and Techniques. II. 3 hr. PR: Geog. 110 or Pol. S. 121 or
consent. Explores concepts, techniques, and processes of physical and socio-
economic planning and their application to urban problems including: land-use
allocation and control, location of economic activity, housing, transportation, and
the delivery of social services.
230. Rural Settlement. I. 3 hr. Analysis of the form and process of settlement in rural
and urban fringe areas. Topics include housing, employment, mobility patterns,
service opportunities, and cultural characteristics of rural populations with
emphasis on current patterns of change.
235. The Experience of Space. II. 3 hr. Explores the individual's changing experience of
geographical space over the life cycle as reflected in activity patterns, territoriality,
and environmental images. Traces environmental design implications for settings
including schools, nursing homes, parks, and shopping malls.
156 GEOGRAPHY
261. Cartography. I, II. 3 hr. An introduction to mapping, including historical
developments, coordinate systems, projections, generalization, symbolization,
map design, computer-assisted cartography, landform representation, and data
manipulation for dot, graduate symbol, chloropleth, and isarithmic mpas.
262. Cartographic Techniques. II. 3 hr. PR: Geog. 261 or consent. Advanced map
construction including positive and negative artwork, darkroom techniques, color
and color proofing, and map reproduction.
265. Aging and Environment. II. 3 hr. PR: MDS 50 or consent. Explores the older
person's changing experience of the environment. Physiological, psychological,
and social changes are related to adjustment within urban and rural community
environments, special housing for the elderly, and long-term care environments.
285. Methods of Geographic Research. II. (Alternate Years.) 3 hr. PR: Consent.
Geographic analysis as problem-solving activity. Practical experience in field
techniques, library research, hypothesis formation and testing, and report
preparation and presentation. Students will acquire skills in literary and numerical
approaches to geographic data analysis.
290. Geographical Perspectives on Energy. II. 3 hr. PR: Consent. A survey of the
distribution of finite, renewable, and continuous energy resources and an
investigation of the geographical patterns of energy consumption and energy
flows. The policy implications of an unequal distribution of energy are evaluated.
295. Internship. I, II, S. 1-12 hr. PR: Junior standing and consent. A working internship
with an agency or company designed to give the student experience in the practical
application of geographic training to specific problems.
299. Honors Thesis. I, II, S. 3-6 hr. PR: Departmental consent. Thesis proposal, writing,
and defense for students admitted to the Honors Program.
301. Geographic Theory and Practice. I. 3 hr. PR: Geog. 285 or consent. Analysis of the
development and significance of concepts and theories in geographical traditions.
Introduction to current research interests and specialties of the program.
302. Geographic Research-Design. II. 3 hr. PR: Geog. 200 and Geog. 301. Choosing,
preparing, and developing research problems of geographic interest. Emphasizes
proposal writing and research design alternatives.
329. Problems in Geomorphology. I, II. 1-4 hr. (Also listed as Geol. 329.)
399. Quantitative Methods in Geo-Sciences. II. 3 hr. PR: Stat. 212 or 311, Geog. 200 or
consent. Brief review and introduction to multivariate quantitative techniques as
applied to geology and geography. (Aiso listed as Geol. 399.)
491. Advanced Study in Geography. I, II, S. 1-6 hr. Investigation of topics not covered
in regularly scheduled courses. Study may be independent or through scheduled
meetings.
496. Graduate Seminar in Geography. I, II, S. 1-6 hr. Research seminars in energy
studies, regional science, regional development and planning, water resource and
environmental management, geomorphology, area studies, advanced geostatistics,
and computer analysis.
497. Research in Geography. I, II, S. 1-6 hr.
GEOGRAPHY 157
GEOLOGY
Alan C. Donaldson, Chairperson of Department of Geology and Geography
425 White Hall
Degrees Offered: M.S., Ph.D.
Graduate Faculty: Members Donaldson, Dunne, Gillespie, Heald, Kammer, Lang,
Rauch, Renton, Shumaker, Smosna, Ting, and Wilson. Associate Member Behling.
The Department of Geology and Geography offers work leading to the
degrees of Master of Science (M.S.) and Doctor of Philosophy (Ph.D.) in
Geology.
Applicants for graduate studies in geology must have as a minimum
requirement a bachelor's degree and an overall grade-point average of at least
2.75. Acceptance by the Department of Geology and Geography is necessary
before admission of any prospective student to the program. All candidates
for a graduate degree in geology must submit scores in the general aptitude
test of the Graduate Record Examination.
Before being admitted to programs leading to the M.S. or the Ph.D., a
student must pass an entrance examination covering physical, historical and
structural geology, sedimentation-stratigraphy and mineralogy. The exam-
ination is given from 7:00-9:30 p.m. on the second day of classes each
semester.
Students seeking admission to the master's program or the Ph.D. program
must complete the equivalents of all science and mathematics courses
required for the B.S. in geology at WVU before being admitted to these
programs.
In the descriptions that follow, "formal course" means a lecture or
seminar course and not a directed, but independent, exercise in the solution of
a specific problem and the presentation of results.
A minimum grade-point average of 3.0 must be maintained in required
formal courses in geology and cognate fields for the Masters degree and 3.3 for
the Ph.D. Credit will not be allowed for courses in which grades below "B" are
attained, but these courses will be included in the grade-point average. Loads
of 9-12 hours are required and no withdrawals are permitted after the first
two weeks of a semester. A student who fails to maintain the required average
at the completion of any semester during the graduate program will be
allowed one academic year (two semesters) to attain the required average.
Failure to attain this average by the end of the probationary period will
permanently eliminate the student as a candidate for a graduate degree in this
department.
Master of Science (M.S.)
No later than the beginning of the second semester in residence, the
prospective candidate must choose one of the options leading to the Master of
Science (M.S.) degree in geology.
Option One: Master of Science in Geology (M.S.)— Research
This has been the "traditional" option for the Master of Science in
geology. Students considering continued studies (Doctor of Philosophy)
should choose this option.
A minimum of 24 formal-course hours with grades of A or B and 6
research hours are required for graduation. A thesis based on original
research also is required. With consent of the candidate's advisory committee,
the field work need not be done while in residence at WVU.
158 GEOLOGY
Required to Graduate: 30 hours, including certain required courses
specified by the adviser.
Option Two: Master of Science in Geology (M.S.) — Professional Studies
This option is designed specifically for students seeking experience in
preparing and presenting professional problems. Students choosing this
option would be seeking employment in technical fields rather than continuing
studies for a higher degree.
A minimum of 34 formal-course hours with grades of A or B and 8
problems hours (Geol. 492) are required for graduation. The problems hours
are in lieu of a thesis and are designed to simulate the work of professional
geologists as they seek solutions to open-ended problems. Experience in
presentation of problems and solutions is an integral part of the program.
Problems credits may be earned in conjunction with off-campus experi-
ences by consent of the candidate's advisory committee.
Required to Graduate: 42 hours, including certain required courses
specified by the adviser.
Doctor of Philosophy (Ph.D.)
The candidate for the Doctor of Philosophy (Ph.D.) must complete a
program of courses outlined by the candidate's doctoral committee. Reading
competence in a foreign language is required. Written and oral comprehensive
examinations must be successfully completed. Work on original research is to
be presented in a dissertation and defended in an oral examination.
Research
Close cooperation between the West Virginia Geological and Economic
Survey, located on Cheat Lake near Morgantown, and the Department of
Geology and Geography makes a large amount of material available for
laboratory investigation. This includes the fossil collections of the department
and the survey. A large number of samples of drill cuttings from deep wells in
West Virginia and adjoining states are housed in the survey. Complete
analytical geochemical equipment is available through the survey with
atomic absorption spectrometer, X-ray diffractometers, and a scanning
electron microscope. The department also has a number of cooperative
projects with the Morgantown Energy Technology Center of the U.S.
Department of Energy. Morgantown is conveniently situated for detailed
studies of Mississippian, Pennsylvanian, and Permian formations. Mineral
products of the region near Morgantown include coal, petroleum, natural gas,
and limestone. The occurrence and utilization of these materials can be
studied by graduate students interested in economic geology. Department
geophysical equipment includes a Geometries magnetometer, a Worden
gravimeter, a refraction seismograph, and a three-component short period
seismograph. A permanent summer field camp (Camp Wood) is located in the
Folded Appalachians at Alvon, Greenbrier County. The coastal geology
program includes an annual trip to the Florida Keys, and three weeks on the
shore of Virginia. Other summer field courses are carbonate sedimentation in
the Florida Keys, glacial geology in Maine, and a biannual European geology
at different sites. Additional oceanography courses and research are available
at the Marine Science Consortium at Wallops Island, Virginia, with which
WVU is affiliated.
The Department has access to excellent computing facilities based on a
VAX-750 which supports multiple remote terminals, 2 tape drives, a megatek
GEOLOGY 159
graphics terminal, Benson plotter and digitizer. The VAX is linked to the
WVNET and additional hardware, e.g. Zeta and flatbed plotters. Departmental
software includes MINITAB, SURFACE II, and GIMMS for statistics and
graphics. Departmental word processing is available for graduate students.
Geology (Geol.)
201. Physical Geology for Teachers. I, II. 3 hr. (Credit cannot be obtained for both Geol.
201 and Geol. 1 or 5.) PR: High school teaching certificate and consent. Composition
and structure of earth and the geologic processes which shape its surface.
221. Geomorphology. II. 3 hr. PR: Geol. 1 or 5. (Optional field trip at student's expense.)
An examination of the physical processes which shape the surface of the earth,
with emphasis on fluvial processes and environmental geomorphology. (Also
listed as Geog. 221.)
222. Glacial Geology. I. 3 hr. PR: Geol. 1 or 5. (Optional field trip(s) at student's
expense.] Introduction to glaciology and glacial geology, with emphasis on
topographic form and the nature of glacial deposits. The Quaternary history of
North America is stressed.
228. Photogeology. II. 3 hr. PR: Geol. 127, 152, or consent. Instruction in basic and
advanced techniques of air-photo interpretation.
231. Invertebrate Paleontology. I. 4 hr. PR: Geol. 3, 4, 184, Stat. 101, or consent.
(Weekend field trip required at student's expense.) Invertebrate fossils: biologic
classification, evolutionary development, ecology, and use in correlation of strata.
235. Introductory Paleobotany. I. 4 hr. PR: Geol. 3. (Required Saturday field trips at
student's expense.) Resume of development of principal plant groups through the
ages, present distribution, mode of occurrence and index species, methods of
collection.
251. Advanced Topics in Structural Geology. II. 4 hr. PR: Geol. 152 and 261 or consent;
Math. 15; undergraduates need consent. (Two two-day field trips required. Basic
field equipment and field trip at student's expense.) Studies into the development
of structures emphasizing both theoretical and experimental approaches. [Offered
in Spring of odd years.)
261. Stratigraphy and Sedimentation. II. 3 hr. PR: Geol. 3, 4, 152, 185, or consent.
[Two-day field trip required. Basic field equipment and field trips at student's
expense.) Study of sediments and sedimentary rocks. Field techniques stressed as
data gathered and interpreted from rocks of Pennsylvanian age in the Morgantown
vicinity.
266. Appalachian Geology Field Camp. S. 6 hr. PR: Geol. 152, 185, 261, and consent.
(Living expense in addition to tuition must be paid at time of registration.)
Practical experience in detailed geological field procedures and mapping.
270. Mineral Resources. II. 3 hr. PR: Geol. 1, 184. Description, mode of occurrence, and
principles governing the formation of ore deposits.
272. Petroleum Geology. II. 3 hr. PR: Geol. 152. Origin, geologic distribution, methods
of exploration and exploitation, uses and future reserves of petroleum and natural
gas in the world.
273. Petroleum Geology Laboratory. II. 1 hr. PR or Cone: Geol. 152. Well sample
description, correlation, and interpretation. Construction and interpretation of
subsurface maps used in exploration for hydrocarbons.
274. Coal Geology. I. 3 hr. PR: Geol. 152 or consent. Introduction to the origin,
composition, geologic distribution, and exploration of coals.
160 GEOLOGY
287. Igneous and Metamorphic Petrology. 4 hr. PR: Geol. 185, and 385 or consent.
Review of current theories for generation and evolution of magmas, and techniques
of determining metamorphic conditions from mineral assemblage. Study of
igneous and metamorphic rocks in thin section. (Weekend field trip at student's
expense.) 3 hr. lee, 1 hr. lab.
290. Geologic Problems. I, II, S. 1-6 hr. (12 hr. max.). PR: Consent. (Aiso includes field
trips such as Florida Bay carbonate trip.) Special problems for senior and graduate
students.
294. Introduction to Geochemistry. II. 4 hr. PR: Chem. 16. Basic review of physical and
aqueous chemistry, discussion of the basic geochemical processes; calcium
carbonate chemistry, diagenetic processes, weathering, the silicate and iron
systems.
315. Environmental Geoscience. I. 3 hr. PR: Geol. 221 or concurrent registration or
consent for nongeology majors. (Field trips and independent field project required.}
Principles, practice, and case histories in application of earth science to environ-
mental problems. Includes: water quality; landslides; subsidence; waste disposal;
legal aspects; and geologic aspects of land-use planning.
329. Problems in Geomorphology. I, II. 1-4 hr. (Aiso listed as Geog. 329.)
332. Paleoecology. II. 3 hr. PR: Geol. 231 and 261 or consent. Methods of paleoecologic
analysis in sedimentary geology. Topics include trace fossil analysis, shell
biogeochemistry, community paleoecology, biofacies analysis of basins, and
Precambrian paleoecology.
341. Carbonate Sedimentology. II. 4 hr. PR: Geol. 231, 261. Origin and distribution of
modern marine carbonate sediments as models for interpretation of ancient
limestone and dolomite facies complexes. Laboratory experience in thin section
petrography of skeletal and nonskeletal carbonate grains, and rock compositions
and fabrics.
346. Advanced Sedimentation. I. 4 hr. PR: Geol. 261 or consent. (Required field trips at
student's expense.) Origin of sedimentary rocks; principles involved in interpre-
tation of ancient geography, climates, animals, and plants. Emphasis on detrital
sediments and rocks.
351. Tectonics. II. 3 hr. PR: Geol. 152 and 261 or consent; Math. 15; undergraduates need
consent. Theories of large-scale deformational processes operating within the
earth's crust and mantile emphasizing regional structural geology outside the
Appalachians. [Offered in Spring of even years.)
352. Exploration Geophysics 1. 1. 4 hr. PR: Math. 15, Geol. 152, 261, or equiv. Studies in
applied geophysics with particular emphasis on techniques in reflection and
refraction seismology, and gravity, and their application to energy resource
exploration. (3 hr. lee, 1 hr. lab.)
353. Expioration Geophysics 2. II. 4 hr. PR: Math. 15, Geol. 152, 261 or equiv. Geologic
interpretation of geophysical data with emphasis placed on structural and
stratigraphic interpretation of seismic records in explorations for hydrocarbon
deposits.
357. Basin Structures. I. 4 hr. PR: Geol. 152, 261, or equiv. The origin, development, and
distribution of basins and the structure found within basins throughout the world
are studied. The distribution of energy-related minerals related to basins and
structural accumulations are emphasized.
363. Groundwater Hydrology. I. 3 hr. PR: Geol. 1 or consent. Study of the principles of
groundwater hydrology; occurrence, development, uses, and conservation of
groundwater.
GEOLOGY 161
364. Advanced Groundwater Hydrology. II. 3 hr. PR: Geol. 1, 2, 363 or consent. Review
of groundwater exploration, flow, and quality in various geologic terrains.
Groundwater pollution and other environmental effects are covered, along with
well pumping tests and modeling of groundwater flow.
376. Coal Petrology. II. 3 hr. PR: Geol. 274 or consent. Microscopic examination and
determination of optical properties of coals, environment of deposition, diagenesis,
and metamorphism of coals; coal chemistry and petrography.
385. Optical Mineralogy and Sedimentary Petrology. I. 4 hr. PR: Geol. 185 and one year
of physics. Principles and practice in use of the petrographic microscope in
identification of minerals by the immersion method and thin section; emphasis on
sedimentary petrology.
394. Physical Geochemistry. I. 3 hr. PR: Geol. 1, 184, 185; Chem. 16. Phase diagrams,
metamorphic facies, origin of the elements, chemical properties of ions, crystal
chemistry of minerals, element distributions and geochemical cycles. (Offered in
Fall of even years.)
395. Aqueous Geochemistry. II. 3 hr. PR: Geol. l.Chem. 16, orconsent. Review of basic
chemical principles as they apply to aqueous geologic environments. Properties of
water and the types, sources, and controls of the common and environmentally
significant chemical species dissolved in water.
399. Quantitative Methods in Geo-Sciences. II. 3 hr. PR: Stat. 212 or 311, Geog. 200 or
consent. Brief review and introduction to multivariate quantitative techniques as
applied to geology and geography. (Also listed as Geog. 399.)
420. Advanced Topics. I, II. 1-12 hr. Includes separate courses in karst, advanced
hydrology, instrumentation, paleoecology, regional geology, paleobiogeography,
advanced coal petrology, and advanced paleontology.
432. Micropaleontoiogy. 1. 4 hr. PR: Geol. 231. Identification of Foraminifera, Ostracoda,
and conodonts; emphasis on classification, nomenclature, and use of paleonto-
logical literature. [Offered in Fall of even years.)
492. Non-Thesis Research. I, II, S. 1-12 hr. PR: Consent. Supervised non-thesis research
for M.S. Options 2, 3, and 4. Report required by arranged deadline.
496. Graduate Seminar. I, II. 1-6 hr.
497. Research. I, II. 1-15 hr.
HISTORY
Robert M. Maxon, Chairperson of the Department
202 Woodburn Hall
Degrees Offered: M.A., Ph.D.
Graduate Faculty: Members Bagby, Blobaum, Connell, Doherty, Hammersmith, Howe,
Lewis, Maxon, Maxwell, McCluskey, and Super. Associate Members Arnett, Hudson,
McLeod, O'Brien, Parkinson, and Zagarri.
The Department of History offers graduate courses in the history of the
United States, Europe, Africa, Asia, Latin America, and science and tech-
nology. Courses are designed to prepare students in historiography, research
methods, and interpretation. Students can select concentrations leading to
preparation for careers in teaching and scholarship and as specialists for
various branches of government, business, and service. Students in the
program are normally expected to pursue the degrees of Master of Arts, the
Master of Arts option in public history, or the Doctor of Philosophy.
162 HISTORY
Master of Arts (M.A.)
Admission. Students seeking admission to the M.A. program should have
the equivalent of a bachelor's degree in history. Application requirements
include transcripts (a minimum of a 3.0 average in history courses is
expected), three letters of recommendation, and scores on the Graduate
Record Examination General Aptitude Test.
Requirements. Completion of a minimum of 30 hours of course work with
at least a B grade, and achievement of a reading proficiency in one foreign
language. All 30 hours may be in history, or students may select up to 6 hours
outside of the department. The history course work shall include a well-
defined core area (selected from the fields listed for comprehensive exami-
nations or approved by the graduate studies committee) of at least 12 hours. In
addition, students are expected to enroll continuously in Hist. 499— Depart-
ment Colloquium. Credit for this course does not count towards the degree.
Students are also required to complete a master's thesis. A maximum of 6
hours of credit for Hist. 497, Research, can be taken for writing the thesis and
for fulfilling the 30-hour M.A. requirement. Candidates for the M.A. are
required to pass a final oral examination on their core area of study and thesis.
M.A. Option in Public History
The department offers an M.A. option in public history. This option is
intended to provide enhanced employment opportunities to graduate students
interested in using their education in history in a profession other than
teaching. Extensive resources of the state are used for interpretation and
preservation. This is the only full public history graduate curriculum in West
Virginia.
The public history option is open to selected students in the M.A.
program. Students apply for admission as they would for the regular M.A.
program, and should indicate on their application that they are interested in
public history. In addition, students should submit a two-page letter of
application, which should indicate the student's background in history or
public history and why the student wants to be admitted to the option; this
letter should be addressed to the Chairperson of the Department of History.
Students may be admitted to the option who do not have a major in history by
making up deficiencies in their course work for undergraduate credit; these
courses may be taken while the students are enrolled for graduate classes or
students may be able to test out of some courses.
The public history option consists of 15 hours of public history courses
(introduction to public history, two of three methods courses in historical
editing, archival management, historic site intepretation and preservation,
and a 6-hour supervised internship). Special topics courses are occasionally
offered in historic preservation and may be taken in lieu of courses outside the
Department of History. Students are required to take a 300-400 level
readings/research seminar sequence in one subject area in the Department of
History outside public history. Course descriptions, syllabi, policies and
procedures, and a list of internship possibilities are available at the Depart-
ment of History on request by contacting the coordinator of the public history
option.
Doctor of Philosophy (Ph.D.)
Admission. Students seeking admission to the Ph.D. program should
have the equivalent of a M.A. in history. Application requirements include a
HISTORY 163
transcript (a minimum of a 3.0 average in graduate history courses is
required), three letters of recommendation, and scores on the Graduate
Record Examination General Aptitude Test. Students should also include a
statement of purpose and an example of their written work as a part of the
application.
Requirements. Requirements for the Ph.D. degree in history include the
general WVU requirements; a reading knowledge of two foreign languages;
completion of two readings/seminar sequences beyond those offered for the
M.A.; completion of one graduate-level historiography course; continuous
enrollment in Hist. 499 — Department Colloquium; passing the Ph.D. compre-
hensive examination of two parts (oral and written) administered by a
committee of faculty members (normally at the end of a full-time student's
second year of study); preparation of an acceptable dissertation based on
original investigation, and successful defense of the dissertation in a final
examination.
A candidate must offer a program of study in four fields, at least three of
which must be in history; the other may be in a related field approved by the
department. The department does not accept courses toward a degree with a
grade lower than a B. Fields available in the department include ancient-
medieval, Europe: 1350-1815, Europe since 1789, United States to 1865,
United States since 1865, Africa, Asia, Latin America, history of science, and
Britain.
Dissertation work should normally be modern America, Appalachian/re-
gional, or modern Africa.
Students working in these areas, either at the M.A. or Ph.D. level, have
the opportunity to study with adjunct professors and faculty from other
departments and universities.
Program in the History of Science and Technology
Students interested in pursuing a field in this area should consult
Professor Emory L. Kemp at the history of science and technology office in
G-14 Woodburn Hall.
Faculty includes Emory L. Kemp, Ph.D. (U. 111.), Professor, and Gregory
A. Good, Ph.D. (U. Toronto), Assistant Professor.
History (Hist.)
200. Greece and Rome. 3 hr. Covers the Minoan and Mycenaean civilizations, Archaic
and Classical Greece, Alexander the Great and the Hellenistic Age, the Roman
Republic, and Etruscan and Carthaginian states, and the rise of the Roman Empire.
201. Social and Economic History of the Middle Ages, 300-1000. 3 hr. (Hist. 103 is
recommended as preparation.) Topics include the social-economic crisis of the late
Roman and German institutions, the Merovingian and Carolingian economics,
Pierenne Thesis, and transition to feudal society.
202. Social and Economic History of the Middle Ages, 1000-1500. 3 hr. (Hist. 103, 201
are recommended as preparation.) Feudal society, land and population expansion,
fairs, towns, leagues, Italian leadership, crusades, church influence, black death,
fourteenth-century revolts, and general decline of the late Middle Ages.
204. Ancient and Medieval Science. I. 3 hr. Examination of scientific achievements
from ancient myths to medieval philosophies of nature. Stresses the internal
coherence of the approaches to nature taken by various cultures. No scientific
background is assumed.
164 HISTORY
205. The Renaissance. 3 hr. The underlying political, economic, and social structure of
fourteenth and fifteenth century Italy with concentration on the significant
intellectual and cultural trends which characterized the age. Some consideration
given to the problem of the impact of the early Reformation movement upon
Renaissance culture.
206. The Reformation. 3 hr. Distinguishing theological characteristics of the major
Reformation movements with concentration on the effect of religious-intellectual
crisis on the political and social structure of the sixteenth century.
207. Early European Science and Culture. 3 hr. Examination of European intellectual
history from the Renaissance to the early eighteenth century with particular
attention being paid to contribution of Copernicus, Bacon, Descartes, Kepler,
Galileo, and Newton.
208. Science and Society, 1750-1914. 3 hr. Historical examination of the relationship
between science and technology with particular attention being paid to the
doctrines of Positivism, Darwinism, and Scientific Socialism.
209. Brazil: Colony to World Power. 3 hr. Examines the transition of Brazil from a
colony to a world power, with special emphasis on recent economic developments,
regional diversity, political patterns, foreign affairs, and race relations.
210. Modern Spain. 3 hr. Survey of the Moslem, Hapsburg, and Bourbon periods
followed by an examination of modern political and social forces, the Civil War,
and the rule of Franco.
211. Technology in the Industrial Revolution. I. 3 hr. Technological and social change in
Great Britain and United States. Case studies illustrating the nature of techno-
logical development and providing an understanding of the ways in which
technology has shaped human experience.
212. Introduction to Public History. 3 hr. Introduction to a wide range of career
possibilities for historians in areas such as archives, historical societies, editing
projects, museums, business, libraries, and historic preservation. Lectures, guest
speakers, field trips, individual projects.
213. Bourbon France. 3 hr. French history from the reign of Henry IV to the reign of
Louis XVI. Special attention given to the reigns of Louis XIII and Louis XIV.
Political, cultural, and intellectual history emphasized.
214. The Revolutionary-Napoleonic Era. 3 hr. French history from mid-eighteenth
century to 1815. Special attention given to the background of the French
Revolution of 1789, to the political and social history of the revolution, and to
Napoleon's nonmilitary achievements.
215. European Diplomatic History, 1815 to 1919. 3 hr. Develops an understanding of the
forces, men, and events which determined diplomatic relations between the major
powers.
216. European Diplomatic History, 1919 to Present. 3 hr. Scope similar to Hist. 215.
219. Revolutionary Russia, 1905-1939. 3 hr. Detailed study of the revolutionary era of
Russian/Soviet history with emphasis on the origins of Russian radicalism, the
upheavals of 1905 and 1917, and Stalin's "revolution from above."
220. The U.S.S.R., 1939 to Present. 3 hr. Detailed study of the recent social and political
history of the Soviet Union. The Soviet experience in World War II, Stalin's last
years, and the conflict between reformism and conservatism since Stalin's death.
222. Twentieth-Century Germany from Weimar to Bonn. 3 hr. The Weimar Republic,
the Third Reich, and the two German states created after World War II.
HISTORY 165
225. History of Modern China. 3 hr. Introduction to modern China (since 1839) with
attention to China's Confucian heritage; examines in detail the Chinese effort to
modernize in the face of Western diplomatic and economic pressure; specific
attention to China's Nationalist and Communist revolutionary traditions.
226. History of Modern Japan. 3 hr. Modern Japan (since 1868) with attention to the
development of Japanese institutions and ideas in earlier periods, especially the
Tokugawa Era (1600-1868); examines the rapid pace of economic change in the
nineteenth and twentieth centuries along with the important social, political, and
diplomatic implications of this change.
227. East Africa to 1895. 3 hr. East Africa from earliest times to beginning of European
control. Population movement and interaction, development of varying types of
polity, revolutionary changes, and the European scramble for East Africa form the
major focus.
228. East Africa Since 1895. 3 hr. History of colonial rule and movement to independence
in East Africa. Political, economic, and social changes will be examined with
particular emphasis on the rise and triumph of African nationalism.
229. History of Africa: Pre-Colonial. 3 hr. History of Africa from earliest times to the
middle of the nineteenth century. Particular emphasis on population movement
and interaction, state formation, and the development of trade in sub-Saharan
Africa as well as the impact of such external influences as Christianity and Islam.
230. History of Africa: European Dominance to Independence. 3 hr. History of Africa
from the middle of the nineteenth century to the 1960s. Political and economic
trends will form major focus.
231. Seventeenth Century Britain, 1603-1715. 3 hr. The more significant political,
social, economic, religious, and intellectual developments of Britain during a
century of revolution and of the men and women who interacted with those
movements.
232. Eighteenth Century Britain, 1715-1832. 3 hr. The Age of Aristocracy, the political,
social, religious, economic, and intellectual forces which produced it, and the
reasons for its decline under the combined impact of the Industrial, Agricultural,
American, and French revolutions.
241. English Social History, Fourteenth to Eighteenth Century. 3 hr. Topical examination
of English society from the time of Chaucer to Milton. Major topics: society in town
and country, economy, politics, religion, and thought.
242. English Social History, Eighteenth Century to the Present. 3 hr. Topical exami-
nation of English society from the time of Queen Anne to the present.
245. History of American Women. 3 hr. Examination of the history of American women
from 1607 to the present, with emphasis on working conditions, women's rights,
development of feminism, women's role in wartime, and women in the family.
246. History of European Women. 3 hr. A survey of the history of European women
from antiquity to the present, with emphasis on the philosophic, economic, and
societal sources of women's oppression and on women's role in work, the family,
and feminist movements.
251. History of Black People in America to 1900. 3 hr. Slave trade and evolution of
slavery in the New World, the attack upon slavery and its destruction, the South
and the blacks during Reconstruction, and the age of Reaction and Racism,
1875-1900.
252. Afro-American History Since 1865. 3 hr. Reconstruction, the age reaction and
racism, black migration, black nationalism, blacks in the world wars, and
desegregation.
166 HISTORY
253. Civil War and Reconstruction. 3 hr. Causes as well as the constitutional and
diplomatic aspects of the Civil War; the role of the American black in slavery, in
war, and in freedom; and the economic and political aspects of Congressional
Reconstruction.
257. The United States From McKinley to the New Deal, 1896 to 1933. 3 hr. American
national history from William McKinley to Franklin D. Roosevelt. Particular
attention is given to the great changes in American life after 1896; national,
political, economic, social, and cultural development; the Progressive Era in
American politics; and alterations in American foreign relations resulting from the
Spanish-American War and World War I.
259. Recent American History, 1933 to Present. 3 hr. Detailed study of American
national history from the inauguration of Franklin D. Roosevelt to the present.
Emphasis on the New Deal; on Roosevelt's foreign policies and their impact on
American social, technological, and cultural developments; and United States
domestic problems and foreign relations since 1945.
263. American Diplomacy to 1918. 3 hr. (Assumes some knowledge of the period such
as that obtained in Hist. 52 and 53.} American foreign policy and diplomacy from
the adoption of the Constitution to the end of World War I.
264. American Foreign Policy and Diplomacy, 1918 to the Present. 3 hr. (Assumes some
knowledge of the period such as that obtained in Hist. 2, 53, or 161.) America's
foreign policy and growing involvement in international relations including the
U.S. role in World War II, the Korean War, and Vietnam.
266. American Economic History to 1865. 3 hr. Origins and development of American
business, agricultural, and labor institutions; problems, and policies, from 1600 to
1865; influence of economic factors upon American history during this period.
267. American Economic History Since 1865. 3 hr. Scope similar to that stated for Hist.
266.
268. The Old South. 3 hr. (For advanced undergraduate and graduate students.]
History of the South — exploring peculiar differences that led to an attempt to
establish a separate nation. The geographical limitation permits a detailed study
of economic and social forces within the context of the larger national history.
269. The New South. 3 hr. Integration of the South into the nation after the Civil War.
Emphasis on southern attitudes toward industrialization, commercial agriculture,
organized labor, and the black. Special attention to the southern literary renais-
sance and conservative and progressive politics of the southern people.
273. Appalachian Regional History. 3 hr. Historical survey of Central Appalachia's
three phases of development: traditional society of the nineteenth century, the
transformation of a mountain society by industrialization at the turn of the
twentieth century, and contemporary Appalachia.
274. The City in American History. 3 hr. A survey of urban history in the United States,
including the Colonial period, with emphasis on the nineteenth and twentieth
centuries, focusing on physical development of cities (planning, transportation,
architecture, suburbanization) and social history.
290. Introduction to Historical Research. 3 hr. (Required for History majors; non-
majors by consent.) Introduction to research techniques useful for history.
Instruction in locating sources, taking notes, and writing research papers.
301. Readings in Medieval History. 3-6 hr. Crusades and intellectual history are the
focus. Readings in preparation for the medieval field may be selected by graduates.
Hist. 103 is urged strongly for undergraduates; also a reading knowledge of Latin,
French or German is recommended for all students.
HISTORY 167
305. Readings in English History. 3-6 hr. Directed readings of scholarly books and
articles, primarily in the history of England from about 1450 to about 1625 but
with some opportunity for the student to fill gaps in the student's knowledge of
other periods of English history.
309. Readings in Central European History. 3-6 hr. All students will read and discuss
selected works illustrating outstanding scholarship or interpretative problems
related to fifteenth, sixteenth, and early seveneteenth century history. In addition,
opportunity will be provided for each student to pursue an independent reading
project tailored to the student's special interests.
310. Historic Site Interpretation and Preservation. 3 hr. PR: Hist. 212. Introduction to
historic site interpretation and preservation, including establishing criteria, site
inventory, and recording techniques using the "case study" method. Lectures,
films, discussions, and field projects will introduce students to the rapidly
growing area, including environmental impact work.
311. Archival Management. 3 hr. PR: Hist. 212. Principles and practices of archival
work within a laboratory context. Includes lectures and selected readings
illustrated by holdings and policies of West Virginia and Regional History
Collection of the WVU Library.
312. Practicum in Historical Editing. 3 hr. PR: Hist. 212. Principles and practices of
historical editing in a laboratory context. Includes lectures and readings with
illustrations from ongoing editing projects. Student prepares materials from the
West Virginia Collection of the WVU Library for publication.
313. Readings in Eastern European History. 3-6 hr. Intensive readings on specific
topics in Russian, Soviet or East European history. Students should normally have
had History 117 and 118, or their equivalents. Primarily designed for graduate
students and selected undergraduates.
317. Readings in Western European History. 3-6 hr. This course, primarily for graduate
students and selected undergraduates, is designed for an intensive reading
program on special problems in western European history.
321. Readings in Asian History. 3-6 hr. Intensive readings in the history of East Asia
(especially China and Japan) since the nineteenth century; students should
normally have had Hist. 225 and 226, or their equivalents; reviews, as well as
bibliographical and historiographical essays, required.
325. Readings in African History. 3-6 hr. This course will normally focus on readings
and discussion on problems in the history of pre-colonial Africa, the major works
in African history, and recent interpretations in the field.
355. Readings in American History, 1763-1865. 3-6 hr. A course of supervised reading
and reports designed to prepare students for intensive study in a seminar or for
field examinations in the early national period. Students are expected to acquire
comprehensive and detailed bibliographical knowledge.
359. Readings in American History, 1850-1898. 3-6 hr. A survey of the narrative and
interpretative literature of the Civil War, Reconstruction, and the Gilded Age.
Students will be expected to make weekly or biweekly reports on assigned
readings and also to prepare a critical essay on some aspect of American
historiography for this period.
363. Readings in American History, 1898 to Present. 3-6 hr. Readings and class-led
discussion of one paperback book per week, and preparation of a paper based on
these books and the class discussion of them. Usually concentrates on post-World
War II foreign relations.
373. Readings in Local and Regional History. 3-6 hr. A course for graduate students and
seniors in the history of West Virginia and neighboring states, which form what is
known as the Trans-Allegheny or Upper Ohio region.
168 HISTORY
375. Readings in Science and Technology. 3-6 hr. Directed reading of scholarly books
and articles dealing with selected topics in the history of science and technology.
381. Intellectual and Social History of the United States to 1876. 3 hr. The objective of
the course is to establish for graduate students usable frames of reference for
intellectual and social history. The basic premises of various historians are
examined as they have been applied to the history of the United States before 1876.
382. Intellectual and Social History of the United States Since 1876. 3 hr. A continuation
of Hist. 381, with the same objective of establishing usable frames of reference for
intellectual and social history, with the focus on the history of the United States
since 1876. Special attention is devoted to the problems of very recent or
contemporary history.
391. The American Labor Movement. 3 hr. A readings course which emphasizes the
various labor unions and labor's political activities in the United States from the
eighteenth century to 1960. Careful attention is given to the economic and social
conditions that have shaped the history of labor in this country. The course treats
the story of American labor as an integral part of the history of the United States.
392. History of American Agriculture. 3 hr. A readings course to acquaint students
with the origins and evolution of American agriculture, with particular emphasis
upon scientific, technological, and economic development; to familiarize them
with some public and private agricultural organizations; and to give them an
historical understanding of contemporary agricultural problems and policies.
402. Seminar in Medieval History. 3 hr. PR: Hist. 301 and reading knowledge of Latin
plus French or German or Italian. Crusades and intellectual history of Europe in
the Middle Ages with emphasis on the period from 1000 to 1300.
406. Seminar in English History. 3 hr. Directed research in selected topics in the history
of England from about 1450 to about 1625. Training in bibliography, research
methods, and paleography.
410. Seminar in Central European History. 3 hr. An intensive survey of the biblio-
graphical aids and printed source materials available in the field of Reformation
history. A research paper and a bibliographical essay will be presented by each
student. Reading knowledge of German and French strongly recommended.
411. Internship in Public History. 3 hr. PR: Hist. 212 and two of following: Hist. 310,
311, 312. A professional internship at an agency involved in a relevant area of
public history. Supervision will be exercised by both the Department of History
and the host agency. Research report or finished professional project required.
414. Seminar in Eastern European History. 3-6 hr. PR: Hist. 117, 118orequiv. Research
seminar on selected topics in Russian, Soviet or East European history. One major
paper and extensive reading based on available source materials is required.
418. Seminar in Western European History. 3 hr. A research seminar in selected topics
in western European history. Requirements: examinations, problem papers,
research papers, and extensive reading. A reading knowledge of the appropriate
languages is required.
422. Seminar in Asian History. 3 hr. Advanced readings and research in East Asian
history; specific emphasis on research tools and techniques; research paper based
on English-language sources required; students should normally have had Hist.
225 and 226 or their equivalents.
426. Seminar in African History. 3 hr. The seminar will normally focus on Eastern
Africa in the colonial period. Location and use of source materials will be
emphasized as well as economic and political developments. Students will spend
considerable time in research and writing on selected aspects of Eastern African
history.
HISTORY 169
441. Seminar in Latin American History. 3 hr. PR: Consent. Survey of Latin American
historiography, location and use of primary source materials, discussion of
research techniques, and the writing of a research paper. Reading knowledge of
Spanish, Portuguese, or French will be helpful.
456. Seminar in American History, 1763-1865. 3 hr. Students work together and with
the instructor on historical materials of the era, confronting the problems and
learning the techniques for using different kinds of original materials. Periodic
progress reports are required at each meeting and one major paper, derived
primarily from the original materials being used.
460. Seminar in American History, 1850-1898. 3 hr. Directed research in recent
American history including guidance in method of research and manuscript
preparation.
464. Seminar in American History, 1898 to Present. 3 hr. Directed research in recent
American history including guidance in method of research and manuscript
preparation.
474. Seminar in Local and Regional History. 3 hr. A seminar for graduate students in
the history of West Virginia and neighboring states, which form what is known as
the Trans-Allegheny or Upper Ohio region.
475. Seminar in Science and Technology. 3 hr. PR: Hist. 375. Directed research in
selected topics in the history of science and technology.
477. American Historiography. 3 hr. A review of the major American historians and
biographers and their interpretative studies. The nationalism, imperial, frontier,
sectional, social and intellectual schools of history are studied as well as those
historians who have concerned themselves with the problems of writing history.
478. European Historiography. 3 hr. Readings of selected works representative of each
of the following historical periods: Ancient, Medieval, Renaissance-Reformation,
Early Modern, and Modern. Reports required with attention to style, purpose,
philosophy, and methodology of the historians selected. Attention to trends, major
breakthroughs, and classics in the writing of European history. Reading knowledge
of Greek, Latin, French, German, or Italian an asset.
481, 482. Special Problems. 1-3 hr. ea.
490. Teaching Practicum. 1-3 hr. PR: Consent. Supervised practices in college teaching
of history. (Note: This course is intended to insure that graduate assistants are
adequately prepared and supervised when they are given college teaching
responsibilities.)
493. Folger Institute Seminar. 3 hr. PR: Graduate standing. (Enrollment is by special
application only. Contact department chairperson for information.) Seminar
conducted by distinguished scholars and held at the Folger Institute of Renaissance
and Eighteenth Century Studies in Washington, D.C. Topics vary. (Also listed as
Engl 493.)
497. Research. 1-15 hr.
HORTICULTURE
Bradford C. Bearce, In Charge of Graduate Program in Horticulture
2086 Agricultural Sciences Building
Degree Offered: M.S.
Graduate Faculty: Members Baugher, Blizzard, Ingle, and Singha. Associate Members
Bearce, Hickman, and Young.
The College of Agriculture and Forestry offers a Master of Science degree
in horticulture based upon the biological and physiological sciences. Students
170 HORTICULTURE
entering the program must have an adequate background in agriculture,
biology, and chemistry. Deficiencies in these areas must be corrected early in
a student's program by enrollment in specified courses. Admission require-
ments are those listed on page 383 for the College of Agriculture and Forestry.
The following courses must be completed with a passing grade before
admittance to regular graduate student status: Hort. 107, one semester of
organic chemistry, Biol. 169, and Agron. 2.
The following courses must be completed with a passing grade before the
Master of Science in Horticulture can be conferred: Hort. 204, Ento. 204, and
PI. Path. 201. The credit hours from these may be counted toward the Master
of Science degree in horticulture if they are taken as part of the last 10 hours of
undergraduate course work with prior permission or if they are taken during
graduate work.
Faculty and facilities are available for thesis research in weed science,
plant propagation, greenhouse management, ornamental production, tree and
small fruit production, and fruit physiology and storage. A thesis is required.
Graduates are employed by private industry, governmental agencies, and
educational institutions, or become self employed. Horticulture students
interested in studying for the Ph.D. degree enroll in the crop science option of
Agronomy.
Horticulture (Hort.)
204. Plant Propagation. II. 3 hr. PR: PL Sc. 52 or consent. Study of practices of plant
propagation and factors involved in reproduction in plants.
242. Smail-Fruits. I. 3 hr. PR: PI. Sc. 52, Hort. 107, or consent. (One 2-day field trip
required.) Taxonomic, physiological, and ecological principles involved in pro-
duction and handling of small-fruits. 2 lee, 1 lab. (Offered in Fall of odd years.)
243. Vegetable Crops. I. 3 hr. PR: PI. Sc. 52 or consent. (One 3-day field trip required.)
Botanical and ecological characteristics influencing the production of vegetable
crops. 2 hr. lee, 1 hr. lab. [Offered in Fall of even years.)
244. Handling and Storage of Horticultural Crops. I. 3 hr. PR: PI. Sc. 52; Chem. 16.
Characteristics of perishable crops. Methods and materials used to maintain
quality. 2 lee, 1 lab. (Offered in Fall of odd years.)
245. Greenhouse Management. II. 3 hr. PR: Two semesters of Inorganic Chemistry and
Hort. 107 or consent. Greenhouse as a controlled plant environment. How to
regulate factors influencing plant growth and development within specialized
environments of greenhouses.
246. Tree Fruits. I. 3 hr. PR: PI. Sc. 52 or consent. Principles and practices involved in
production of tree fruits. 2 lee, 1 lab. (Offered in Fall of even years.)
301. Post-Harvest Physiology. II. 3 hr. Physiology and biochemistry of harvested
crops. 1 lee, 2 labs. (Offered in Spring of odd years.)
Plant Science (PI. Sc.)
420. Special Topics. I, II, S. 1-6 hr. Special study in agricultural microbiology, crop
science, horticulture, plant pathology, or soil science.
450. Seminar. I, II. 1 hr. Graduate seminar in agricultural microbiology, crop science,
horticulture, plant pathology, or soil science.
497. Research. I, II, S. 1-15 hr. Graduate research in agricultural microbiology, crop
science, horticulture, plant pathology, or soil science.
HORTICULTURE 171
INDUSTRIAL ENGINEERING
Ralph W. Plummer, Chairperson of the Department
727 Engineering Sciences Building
Degrees Offered: M.S.I.E., M.S.E., M.S., Ph.D.
Graduate Faculty: Members Ahluwalia, Byrd, Creese, Iskander, Jaraiedi, Moore,
Myers, Nunez, Plummer, Stobbe, and Tompkins. Associate Member Fowler.
Graduate programs in industrial engineering are designed to give
students experience in developing innovative solutions to real problems.
Innovation in this case implies the implementation of creative ideas, in
contrast to pure research, which is conducted without an intended potential
use. In this context, graduate students in the department are actively involved
with the people and organizations that need creative solutions to real
problems. Graduate students can expect to develop their creative abilities to
be effective in innovative environments while developing their abilities to
communicate and working with individuals to implement new ideas.
Master of Science in Industrial Engineering (M.S.I. E.)
Master of Science in Engineering (M.S.E.)
Master of Science (M.S.)
Three degrees are offered at the master's level: M.S. I.E., M.S.E., and an
M.S. with an emphasis in Occupational Health and Safety Engineering. The
M.S. I.E. degree program is appropriate for students with a B.S. in Industrial
Engineering, whereas the M.S.E. degree program is designed for students
having a baccalaureate degree in a technical field other than industrial
engineering who wish to pursue a broader, more interdisciplinary program of
graduate studies. In both the M.S. I.E. and the M.S.E. degree programs,
students will select courses in decision sciences and production systems,
manufacturing systems, or the ergonomics areas. A description and listing of
requirements for the M.S. in Occupational Health and Safety Engineering,
which is administered by the Department of Industrial Engineering, are
presented elsewhere in Part 2 of this catalog.
An undergraduate degree in either another engineering field or the basic
sciences is required for admission to both the M.S.E. and M.S. programs.
Students trained in the areas of mathematics, statistics, physics, and
computer science are generally well prepared for graduate study with an
emphasis in decision sciences/operations research techniques, or production
systems, while many chemistry and biology majors will find excellent career
opportunities in the field of occupational health and safety. The M.S. program
is designed specifically for this latter group of students.
Students must comply with the rules and regulations as outlined in Part 5
of this catalog for graduate work in the College of Engineering. Each master's
candidate must follow a planned program of study which contains a minimum
of 30 semester credit hours, including a thesis of not more than 6 hours of
research or 36 credit hours, including a problem report of not more than 3
hours of credit.
Required courses for the M.S. I.E. and the M.S.E. are determined by the
emphasis area of the student (i.e., decision sciences, manufacturing systems,
or applied ergonomics) and can be obtained by writing to the department.
M.S. in Occupational Health and Safety Engineering course requirements are
listed elsewhere in Part 2 of this catalog. Specific requirements may be
obtained by writing to the department.
172 INDUSTRIAL ENGINEERING
As a general rule, each student must satisfy the listed prerequisites for
each course included in his/her graduate plan of study. Prerequisite deficien-
cies are usually made up by taking the necessary prerequisite courses, which
will be included in the plan of study, but normally are not counted for credit
toward the master's degree. However, certain prerequisite courses can be
taken by examination.
While required credit in research (I.E. 497) is devoted to a problem report
or thesis preparation, neither is automatically approved after the required
number of semester hours of research work have been completed. The thesis
or problem report must conform with the general requirements of the
University and with the written requirements of the Department of Industrial
Engineering.
Final Examination. A candidate will be required to pass an oral exami-
nation on course work and the thesis or problem report.
Doctor of Philosophy (Ph.D.)
A candidate for the degree of Doctor of Philosophy (Ph.D.) must comply
with the rules and regulations of the College of Engineering and the
University. A program with a major in industrial engineering, designed to
meet the needs and objectives of each student, will be developed in consultation
with the student's adviser and the student's Advisory and Examining
Committee. Early in the doctoral program the student must pass an exami-
nation to demonstrate master's-level proficiency in industrial engineering
subject matter. Upon completion of the course work, the student must pass an
examination to be admitted to candidacy. An acceptable dissertation must be
written.
Industrial Engineering (I.E.)
200. Manufacturing Processes. 3 hr. PR: Ch.E. 105; Cone: M.A.E. 43. Lectures, demon-
strations, and laboratory work relating to methods, materials, properties, and
equipment, and characteristics of machining, casting, joining, and forming
operations. Engineering and economic analysis of the processes. 2 hr. lee, 3 hr. lab.
201. Principles of Solidification. 3 hr. PR: I.E. 200 or consent. Material and energy
balances, solidification of metals, riser and gating systems for castings, fluidity of
metal, casting design, and molding processes.
202. Manufacturing Processes. 2 hr. PR: Ch.E. 105, M.A.E. 43. Lectures and demonstra-
tions relating to materials, properties, parameters, design, equipment, economics
and computer control of processing systems emphasizing casting, machining,
joining and forming operations.
203. Manufacturing Processes Laboratory. 1 hr. Coreq.: I.E. 202. Laboratory experiments
and demonstrations of the basic manufacturing operations of casting, machining
and joining. Process parameter measurement, inspection techniques and CNC
programming are performed and laboratory report writing is emphasized.
214. Analysis of Engineering Data. 3 hr. PR: I.E. 113. Introduction to linear statistical
models. Design and analysis of simpler experimental configurations occurring
frequently in engineering studies. Similarities and differences between regression
and experimental design models emphasized in a vector-matrix setting.
215. Statistical Decision Making. 3 hr. PR or Cone: I.E. 113. Basic concepts of
probability theory. Discrete and continuous distributions, joint and derived
distributions, with application to industrial and research problems. Introduction
to generating functions and Markov chains.
INDUSTRIAL ENGINEERING 173
216. Industrial Quality Control. 3 hr. PR: I.E. 113. Principles and methods for
controlling the quality of manufactured products, with emphasis on both economic
and statistical aspects of product acceptance and process control.
222. ]ob Evaluation and Wage Incentives. 3 hr. Principles used in evaluating jobs, rates
of pay, characteristics and objectives of wage incentive plans; incentive formulae
and curves.
240. Labor and Productivity. 3 hr. PR: Consent. The work force as a critical element of
productivity. Topics include industrial engineering involvement in collective
bargaining, labor relations, and work practices.
242. Production Planning and Control. 3 hr. PR: I.E. 140; Cone: I.E. 214. Principles and
problems in forecasting, aggregate planning, material management, scheduling,
routing, and line balancing.
243. Facility Planning and Design. 3 hr. PR: I.E. 242, 250. Problems of facility and
equipment location. Long-range planning of industrial facilities. Block and
detailed layout of manufacturing plants and general offices. Space utilization and
allied topics in facility design.
249. Design of Dynamic Materials Systems. 3 hr. PR: I.E. 140 or consent. Application of
industrial engineering theory and practice to selection of material systems and
equipment including efficient handling of materials from first movement of raw
materials to final movement of finished product. Present quantitative design
techniques.
250. Introduction to Operations Research. 3 hr. PR: I.E. 113, 281. Basic tools and
philosophies of operations research. Tools include: linear programming, Markov
chains, queueing theory, and simulation. Other operations research techniques are
presented as they relate to the overall systems philosophy.
251. Analytical Techniques of Operations Research. 3 hr. PR: I.E. 113 or consent.
Nonlinear optimization techniques useful in operations research and industrial
engineering studies. Classical optimization techniques, quadratic, geometric, and
dynamic programming, branch and bound and gradient techniques.
259. Introduction to Systems Engineering. 3 hr. PR: I.E. 250, or consent. Quantitative
synthesis of OR models. Definition of terms. Development and testing of
assumptions, objectives, and restrictions. Measurement of parameters in the
model. Optimization techniques and error sensitivity of the optimal solution.
Implementing, utilizing, and upgrading the model.
260. Human Factors Engineering. 3 hr. PR: I.E. 113 and I.E. 140 or equiv. Includes the
study of ambient environment, human capabilities, and equipment design.
Systems design for the man-machine environment interfaces will be studied with
emphasis on health, safety, and productivity.
261. System Safety Engineering. 3 hr. PR: Consent. The concepts of hazard recognition,
evaluation analysis, and the application of engineering design principles to the
control of industrial hazards.
277. Engineering Economy. 3 hr. Basic concepts of financial analysis investment
planning and cost controls as they apply to management technology investment in
manufacturing; financial planning and budgeting as applied to an engineering
function.
280. Industrial Engineering Problems. 1-3 hr. PR: Consent. Special problems.
281. Computer Applications in Industrial Engineering. 3 hr. PR: Engr. 2, I.E. 140.
Introduction to computer applications in manufacturing. Emphasis on system
design and analysis and the role of computers in productivity improvement.
174 INDUSTRIAL ENGINEERING
282. Digital Computer Concepts. 3 hr. PR: I.E. 281 or consent. Principles of digital
computer functional components. Study of digital operating systems including
structure of the various subsystem components such as monitors, input control
systems, and loaders.
283. information Retrieval. 3 hr. PR: I.E. 281 or consent. Tools, elements, and theories of
information storage and retrieval. Documentation, information framework; in-
dexing; elements of usage, organization, and equipment; parameters and imple-
mentation; theories of file organizations and system design.
284. Simulation by Digital Methods. 3 hr. PR: I.E. 113, 281, or consent. Introduction to
Monte Carlo simulation methods and their application to decision problems.
Student identifies constraints on problems, collects data for modeling, and
develops computer programs to simulate and analyze practical situations. Inter-
pretation of results emphasized.
291. Design of Production Systems 1. 3 hr. PR: Senior standing in industrial engineering.
The integration of industrial engineering principles in the design of productive
systems. Emphasis will be on the analysis of different systems for productivity
improvement.
292. Design of Productive Systems 2. 3 hr. PR: Senior standing in industrial engineering.
Continuation of I.E. 291.
300. Special Topics in Manufacturing Processes and Automation. 3 hr. PR: I.E. 200 or
equiv. Special topics concerning manufacturing processes and automation with
special emphasis on manufacturing management.
302. Advanced Manufacturing Processes. 3 hr. PR: I.E. 200. Metal cutting economic
models, solidification processes, bulk deformation, sheet metal and drawing,
joining design and economics. Overall view of manufacturing systems. Introduction
to numerical control programming and projects on numerical control equipment.
304. Materials and Processing Systems Design. 3 hr. PR: I.E. 200. The engineering
design process, material design properties and selection systems, decision making
and problem analysis techniques for materials and processing. Economic and cost
systems, expert systems, failure analysis and quality systems for materials and
process selection.
308. Advanced Problems in Manufacturing Engineering. 1-3 hr. PR: I.E. 300 or 302;
graduate standing. Special problems relating to one of the areas of manufacturing
engineering, such as manufacturing processes, robotics, CAD/CAM, group tech-
nology, and manufacturing systems engineering.
314. Design of Industrial Experiments. 3 hr. PR: I.E. 214 or consent. Continuation of I.E.
214. More complex experimental design especially useful to engineering and
industrial researchers, including factorials and optimum-seeking design. Emphasis
on use of existing digital computer routines and interpretation of results.
325. Engineering Management. 3 hr. Unique problems of engineering organizations
including project planning, managing creativity, coordinating design and devel-
opment, and other topics relevant to engineering organizations.
338. Technology Forecasting. 3 hr. Various procedures used in forecasting technical
developments.
339. Technology Assessment. 3 hr. Various procedures used in technology assessment.
Implications of technology in various aspects of society will be stressed.
340. Work Analysis. 3 hr. PR: Consent. Analysis of industrial engineering's involvement
in analyzing work situations. Particular emphasis will be given to the use of
industrial engineering as a change agent in improving work practices.
INDUSTRIAL ENGINEERING 175
341. Methods Analysis and Work Simplification. 3 hr. Advanced study of the
techniques of methods analysis, including modern means of methods research.
Development of appropriate cost analysis to accompany improved operating
plans. A study of the design, installation, and administration of work simplification
programs, suggestion systems, and remuneration policies, and the means of intra-
plant communications concerning such programs. 2 hr. rec, 3 hr. lab.
342. Advanced Production Control. 3 hr. PR: I.E. 250. Different mathematical models
useful in the design of effective production control systems. The various models
include: static production control models under risk and uncertainty; dynamic
models under certainty, under uncertainty, and under risk.
353. Applied Linear Programming. 3 hr. PR: I.E. 250 or consent. Application of the
assignment, transportation, and simplex algorithms to typical industrial problems.
The methods and computational efficiencies of the revised simplex and other
algorithms are also studied.
354. Case Studies in Operations Research. 3 hr. PR: Consent. The applications of
operations research procedures. Examination of factors which lead to successful
model building through case studies.
355. Scheduling and Sequencing Methods. 3 hr. PR: I.E. 250. Theory and applications of
analytical models used in the scheduling of operations. Topics include: single
machine scheduling models; flow shop models; job shop models; and assembly line
balancing methods.
358. Special Topics in Systems Analysis and Operations Research. 3-6 hr. PR: Consent.
Special topics from recent developments in operations research and related fields.
Special emphasis will be placed on interests of current graduate students.
359. Operations Research for Public Administrators. 3 hr. Examination of role of
quantitative analysis in public administration and decision-making.
360. Human Factors System Design. 3 hr. PR: I.E. 260 or consent. Theoretical aspects
and practical applications of man/machine relationships as they influence future
system design. The student will examine human limitations with respect to
acceptance of information, decision making, and ability to transmit the result of
such decisions to controlled equipment systems to obtain design optimization. 2
hr. rec, 3 hr. lab.
361. Industrial Hygiene Engineering. 3 hr. Introductory course in industrial hygiene
legal standards, historical context, and development. Topics include respiratory
physiology, particle size and deposition, ionizing and nonionizing radiation,
physical stress, solvents, metals, pesticides, painting, welding, and degreasing.
362. Systems Safety Engineering. 3 hr. PR: I.E. 261 or consent. Analysis of manufac-
turing methods, processes, and properties of materials from a system safety
engineering viewpoint. Emphasis will be on hazard analysis techniques (fault tree,
MORT, failure modes and effects) and machine guarding methods.
364. Industrial Ergonomics. 3 hr. PR: I.E. 260 or consent. Practical experience in the
application of ergonomic principles to industrial problems. Safety and production
implications of work physiology, industrial biomechanics, and circardian rhythms,
as well as current interest topics.
368. Advanced Problems in Human Factors. 1-3 hr. PR: I.E. 260 or 360 and graduate
standing. Special problems relating to one of the areas of human factors, such as
simulation, controls, vigilance, safety, and occupational health.
377. Advanced Engineering Economy. 3 hr. PR: Consent. Special emphasis on depre-
ciation, engineering and economic aspects of selection and replacement of
equipment; relationship of technical economy to income taxation; effect of
borrowed capital and pricing model.
176 INDUSTRIAL ENGINEERING
381. integrated Data Processing. 3 hr. PR: I.E. 281 and consent. Advanced work in
electronic data-processing systems and procedures design. Case studies of
integrated data-processing systems. Course projects will include individual use of
a computer in management data-processing analysis problems.
385. Digital Computer Applications. 1 hr. PR: Senior standing in engineering, physical
science or mathematics. Special study of selected programming languages.
389. Special Topics in Industrial Data-Processing Systems. 3 hr. PR: I.E. 281 or consent.
Selected topics relating to industrial applications of computer and data-processing
systems. Emphasis on applications not in the FORTRAN language.
451. Nonlinear Programming. 3 hr. PR: I.E. 250 or consent. Advanced study of the
techniques of nonlinear programming and their applications. Topics include
steepest descent, Newton's method, Fletcher-Powell, conjugate gradients, Powell's
method, and penalty function methods.
452. Queueing Theory. 3 hr. PR: I.E. 113 and 250 or consent. Analytical modeling of
waiting line systems with emphasis on determining the best operating conditions
for those systems. Single-channel and multi-channel models. Computational
methods (including Monte Carlo techniques) are examined. Applications to
problems such as maintenance and inventory control.
453. Theory of Linear Programming. 3 hr. PR: I.E. 250 or consent. Study of procedures
available for solving large-scale problems using linear programming. Topics
include decomposition techniques, multiple pricing, cycling, inverse generation
and storage, ranging procedures, and upper bound algorithms.
454. Inventory Theory. 3 hr. PR: I.E. 113 and 250 or consent. Techniques used in
optimization of inventory systems. Elements of static, deterministic inventory
models, and static, stochastic inventory models. Dynamic inventory models.
Selected topics related to inventory analysis.
455. Probability Theory for Engineers. 3 hr. PR: I.E. 113 or consent. Probability theory
and its application to industrial systems with particular emphasis on inventory,
queueing, maintenance, reliability, and quality control systems. Markov processes
are covered.
456. Applied Stochastic Processes. 3 hr. PR: I.E. 455. Stochastic systems with emphasis
on application to inventory and queueing theory. Conditional probability, Poisson
processes, counting processes, renewal processes, Markov chains with discrete
and continuous parameters.
457. Dynamic Programming. 3 hr. PR: I.E. 250 or consent. Introduction to basic
structure and computational aspects of dynamic programming and applications
including sequential decision problems, deterministic and probabilistic models
over finite and infinite planning horizons, and Markovian decision processes.
458. Integer Programming and Applied Networks. 3 hr. PR: I.E. 250 or consent.
Introduction to application of integer programming and maximum flow networks
to engineering and operations research problems. Emphasis on problem formulation
and solution.
480. Seminar. 1-6 hr. PR: Consent. Discussion of research in industrial engineering and
special problems.
484. Advanced Digital Simulation. 3 hr. PR: I.E. 284 or consent. Analysis and
comparison of special purpose digital simulation languages such as GPSS, SLAM,
SIMAN, SIMSCRIPT, CSMP, DYANOMO, and JOB SHOP simulation.
497. Research. 1-15 hr.
INDUSTRIAL ENGINEERING 177
INDUSTRIAL AND LABOR RELATIONS
Jay H. Coats, Director of Graduate Programs
412 Armstrong Hall
Office of Graduate Programs, College of Business and Economics,
West Virginia University, P.O. Box 6025, Morgantown, WV 26506-6025
Telephone: (304) 293-5408
Degrees Offered: M.S., Ph.D. Option
Graduate Faculty: Members Elkin, Schaupp, and Zeller. Associate Members Bucklew,
Decker, Grasso, Humphreys, Miller, Smith, and Tapper.
The Department of Industrial and Labor Relations offers a Master of
Science in Industrial and Labor Relations (ILR). The AACSB accredited
program of study prepares students for professional positions in human
resources and labor relations. Course work can be structured to prepare
students for doctoral studies in industrial and labor relations, economics,
management, or law.
The department operates, in conjunction with the Department of Economics
Ph.D. program, an Industrial Relations Ph.D. option. M.S. students who plan
to pursue the industrial relations option in the Ph.D. in Economics program
should align their master's work with the degree requirements.
Entry-level professional opportunities for ILR graduates include such
positions as employee relations associate, assistant personnel manager,
human resources administrator, labor relations representative, professional
research analyst, compensation analyst and benefits administrator. Other
positions include staff representative with organized labor, apprentice
arbitrator, labor-management consultant, National Labor Relations Board
field examiner, government employee relations representative, and employ-
ment analyst. Most graduates are employed by Fortune 500 companies. Some
find positions with organized labor, all levels of government, and advocacy
organizations. The department, in conjunction with the WVU Career Services
Center, makes a concerted effort to place graduates in positions that fulfill
student job objectives.
The curriculum is a blend of theory, analysis, and pragmatism. Core
course work serves two purposes: to provide in-depth knowledge and skills
pertaining to the human resource and labor relations functions of organi-
zations, and to acquaint students with the operation of the other organizational
functions. A substantial number of elective courses allows the student to
tailor the curriculum to meet particular career goals and interests. More than
50 faculty members in a dozen departments offer course work and/or conduct
research in the human resources and ILR areas.
Students are encouraged to participate in academic-related extra-curric-
ular activities. Many are co-sponsored by the Industrial Relations Student
Association and the department, including a speakers and workshops
program, the ILR Newsletter, resume mailings, social events, and honors
banquets. Outstanding academic achievement is recognized by membership
in the Industrial Relations Honor Society. The faculty makes "Outstanding
ILR Student" awards yearly to two persons selected on the basis of
scholarship, informal leadership and extracurricular activities.
Financial aid. A limited number of graduate assistantships and tuition
scholarships are available on a competitive basis. Major selection criteria
include the applicant's grade-point average in prior academic work and
GMAT scores. Graduate assistants are paid a cash stipend during the regular
semesters that is competitive in amount with that offered by other universities;
178 INDUSTRIAL AND LABOR RELATIONS
they are assigned to faculty members to assist in research, teaching and other
academic endeavors. Additional scholarships are available on a competitive
basis to minority students. Additional information and application forms can
be obtained from the Director of Graduate Programs.
Academic Common Market. The Master of Science program in Industrial
and Labor Relations is an Academic Common Market program. Residents of
Alabama, Arkansas, Florida, Georgia, Kentucky, Louisiana, Maryland, Mis-
sissippi, South Carolina, Tennessee, Texas, or Virginia who are admitted to
the MS-ILR program can pay tuition at West Virginia University's in-state
(resident) rates.
Admission. The Master of Science in Industrial and Labor Relations
program is interdisciplinary in nature and no specific undergraduate major is
required. Course work in computer science, labor economics, statistics, and
business disciplines is helpful. Admission is competitive and on a space-
available basis.
To gain admission into the program, an applicant must have a bachelor's
degree (in any field) from an accredited college or university and a grade-
point average of at least 3.0 (either overall or on the last 60 credit-hours of
undergraduate and/or graduate work completed). In addition, the applicant
must have a Graduate Management Admission Test (GMAT) score of at least
500. Applicants with a GPA below 3.0 (or a GMAT below 500) must show a
correspondingly higher GMAT (or GPA) achievement. International students
must also submit a satisfactory TOEFL score.
Although not required, applicants may wish to send additional supportive
material, including letters in support of their application, reference letters, a
resume of work experience, and an example of written work.
Students may enter the graduate program in any semester/session.
Application deadlines are July 1 for the fall semester, December 1 for the
spring semester, and April 1 for the summer sessions. Later applications,
while acceptable, may diminish the changes for admission due to the graduate
class being filled. Since no admission decision can be made without the
applicant's GMAT score being submitted, applicants should keep in mind the
GMAT test schedule.
Institute of Industrial and Labor Relations
The mission of the Institute of Industrial and Labor Relations (IILR) is to
coordinate instruction, research, and public service activities, which embrace
a study of the elements of human resources development uniquely identified
with the economy of West Virginia. Membership is open to faculty who have
an interest in the mission of the IILR.
The IILR serves as a means of rational response to economic trends based
on an amalgamation of the three University functions: faculty/student
research on a continuing basis in search of human resource development
possibilities; use of research results in credit instruction to produce a growing
cadre of graduates aware of and trained to be able to contribute to the state's
economic goals; and, using both of the former, extension and public service
efforts designed to place the state's human resource development and use
activities on their most economically rational courses.
Master of Science in Industrial and Labor Relations
The Master of Science in Industrial and Labor Relations has a two-part
core. The total length of the program will not be greater than 47 semester
hours nor less than 42 hours. Program length depends upon the composition of
course work taken as an undergraduate.
INDUSTRIAL AND LABOR RELATIONS 179
ILR Core
The required ILR core classes are designed to provide a solid, multidisci-
plinary foundation of ILR theory and practice. ILR 314 presents an overview
of ILR theory, practice, and issues from a management perspective. Its
counterpart is ILR 316 which covers the same subjects from the perspective of
organized labor. In ILR 312 the concepts of industrial psychology are applied
to ILR. An eclectic view of collective bargaining and labor relations complete
the sequence (ILR 262).
The 12 hours of required ILR core are:
Hr.
ILR 262— Collective Bargaining and Labor Relations 3
ILR 312 — Organizational Theory,
Behavior and Communication 3
ILR 314— Industrial Relations Strategy and Policy 3
ILR 316— Labor Organization Industrial Relations 3
Common Body of Knowledge (CBK) Core
Industrial and labor relations functions are not separate from other
organizational activities. Firms, labor organizations, and government units
integrate ILR with their management, business law, economics, accounting,
finance, and marketing activities. The common body of knowledge (CBK) core
is designed to provide ILR students with the common body of knowledge
necessary to these functions. They also include skills classes in computer
hardware and software, management information systems, and integrative
policy formulation. Students who have acquired equivalent knowledge of
these areas as undergraduates may waive up to 5 hours of this functional core.
If equivalent undergraduate course work exceeds 5 hours, ILR elective course
work will be substituted for CBK core hours.
Program length may vary between 42 and 47 semester hours. Students
who have no CBK background will complete a 47 credit-hour program. Those
with equivalent course work may waive up to 5 hours to a 42 credit-hour
program. The CBK core is as follows:
Hr.
Acctg. 311 — Financial Accounting for Decision Making 3
B. Law 311 — Legal and Regulatory Environment 2
Econ. 317— Economic Decision Making 2
Fin. 311— Managerial Finance 2
Manag. 301 — Organization Behavior and Ethics 3
Manag. 311— Management Information Systems 3
Manag. 321 — Operations Management/
Applied Quantitative Analysis 3
Manag. 351— Policy and Strategy 3
Mrktg. 311— Marketing Management 2
The remaining hours will be chosen from the following courses after
consultation with the adviser. While the listed courses are preferred,
considerable latitude may be given the student by the adviser to choose other
courses which are particularly appropriate to the student's background and
interest. Approval must be obtained in advance. No more than 3 elective hours
may be taken at the 200 level. Electives may be chosen from the following:
Industrial and Labor Relations Hr.
301— Industrial Relations Analytical Techniques 1 3
302 — Industrial Relations Analytical Techniques 2 3
330 — Compensation Issues 3
180 INDUSTRIAL AND LABOR RELATIONS
Hr.
332— American Trade Unionism 3
333— Seminar: Quality of Work Life 3
334— Work Group Dynamics and Leadership 3
337— Practicum in Industrial Interviewing 3
340— Arbitration Theory and Practice 3
342— Advanced Collective Bargaining 3
344— Benefits 3
345— Equal Employment Opportunity Problems 3
491A— Advanced Study: Practicum in Research Methods 1-6
491B— Advanced Study: Research Theory 3
491C— Advanced Study: Women in the Labor Force 3
491D— Advanced Study: Practicum in ILR 3
Management
217— Personnel and Compensation 3
218— Focal Points in Management 1-3
225— Business Policy 3
325— Organizational Design 3
330— Organizational Development 3
335— Human Resource Management 3
336— Managerial Skills Building Seminar 3
Business Law
211— Personnel Relations and the Law 3
311 — Legal and Regulatory Environment 3
Sociology and Anthropology
204— Complex Organizations 3
233— Sociology of Work and Work Places 3
375— Fundamentals of Gerontology 3
Economics
211— Micro Economic Analysis 3
212— Macro Economic Analysis 3
310 — Advanced Micro Theory 1 3
312— Advanced Macro Theory 1 3
318— Economic Policy 3
340— Public Finance 3
360— Advanced Human Resource Economics 3
364— Seminar in Labor Economics 3
Public Administration
341— Administrative Organization and Management 3
343— Public Personnel Administration 3
348— Legal/Political Foundation of Public Administration 3
443— Public Sector Labor Relations 3
448— Legal Environment 3
Industrial Engineering
222— Job Evaluation and Wage Incentives 3
260— Human Factors Engineering 3
261— System Safety Engineering 3
361— Industrial Hygiene Engineering 3
362— Systems Safety Engineering 3
Law
360— Compensation Law 3
391— Arbitration 3
391— Public Sector Labor Law 3
391— OSHA 3
391— Civil Rights 3
391— Labor Law 1 4
349— Labor Law 2 2
INDUSTRIAL AND LABOR RELATIONS 181
Counseling Hr.
301 — Fundamentals of Counseling 3
320— Vocational Development and Occupational Choices 3
Rehabilitation Counseling
312— Psychological Aspects of Disability 3
320— Vocational Development and Occupational Choices 3
Computer Science
301 — Computers in Research 3
The industrial relations program requires that the student maintain a
grade-point average of at least 3.0 on all work taken as a graduate student
while enrolled in the College of Business and Economics. In addition, the
student must maintain a 3.0 average in all work counting toward the graduate
degree. A student whose cumulative grade-point average falls below 3.0 will
be placed on probation. If the student's average is not brought up to 3.0 by the
end of the following semester, the student will be suspended from the
program. A grade below C in any course taken while enrolled as a graduate
student will result in suspension from the program.
Industrial Relations Ph.D. Option
Graduate work in industrial relations typically is interdisciplinary in
nature. The Ph.D. option retains this orientation while providing students
with a Ph.D. level of understanding of economic theory and economic
analysis. Students in the industrial relations option take the eight core
courses in the Ph.D. in Economics program, take comprehensive examinations
in microeconomic theory and macroeconomic theory, and follow the rules and
requirements for obtaining the Economics Ph.D.
Students are required to complete three fields of concentration. One field
must be industrial relations. Since industrial relations is within the College of
Business and Economics at WVU, it is not necessary to have the two
remaining fields be in economics. However, it is necessary that there be a
12-hour (four courses) field in this discipline within the College of Business
and Economics at WVU. That 12-hour field of industrial relations is listed
below. The industrial relations field consists of four courses:
ILR 334 — Leadership and Work Group Dynamics
ILR 342— Advanced Collective Bargaining
ILR 491A — Practicum in Research Methods
ILR 491B— Research Theory
Of the two remaining fields, each typically 6 credit hours, one must be
from within the Department of Economics. Most commonly, this field is labor
economics. The second field may be selected from economics, industrial
psychology, public administration, statistics, human resources management,
industrial engineering, or law, and ideally should complement the student's
research interest.
Students must pass written comprehensive examinations in their three
fields of concentration.
Industrial and Labor Relations (ILR)
262. Collective Bargaining and Labor Relations. 3 hr. Examination of the theory and
practice of collective bargaining. Topics include economics and historical envi-
ronment, labor law, unionization, contract negotiation, patterns in contract
content, conflict resolution, grievance handling, and an introduction to arbitration.
182 INDUSTRIAL AND LABOR RELATIONS
301. Industrial Relations Analytical Techniques 1. 3 hr. PR: Admission to the ILR
graduate program and C.S. 5 or equiv. Introduction to the software and hardware
appropriate for use in human resource applications, emphasizing efficient and
effective use of previously developed software. Introduction to quantitative
analytical decision-making techniques.
302. Industrial Relations Analytical Techniques 2. 3 hr. PR: Admission to the ILR
graduate program. Further development of the quantitative analytical techniques
and of business information systems used in the human resources field. Emphasis
on quantitative decision-making and information systems in an industrial
relations setting.
310. Human Resources Economics. 3 hr. PR: Admission to the ILR graduate program.
Consideration of the conditions of employment and unemployment at both macro
and micro levels under varying degrees of competition, including the process of
labor force preparation, labor market data and policy.
312. Organizationai Theory, Behavior, and Communication. 3 hr. PR: Consent. Emphasis
on the communication processes involved in problem resolution including organi-
zational decision making. Problems include organizational evaluation methods,
training and leadership development, staffing, evaluation of proficiency of
individuals, systems, and procedures.
314. Industrial Relations Strategy and Policy. 3 hr. PR: Consent. Explores the
integrative dimensions of organizational policies and their relationship to the
personnel and industrial relations function. Business ethics in the industrial
relations function.
316. Labor Organization Industrial Relations. 3 hr. PR: Consent. Introduction to
dynamics (adversary/cooperative) of industrial relations from a union viewpoint.
Topics include conflict resolution, union government, alternatives to economic
conflict bargaining, interaction, the state of industrial relations and work society.
330. Compensation Issues. 3 hr. PR: Consent. Seminar in compensation designed to
develop further understanding of compensation theory and practice. Topic areas
will include labor supply, wage theory, legal constraints, motivation, equity
theory, organizational development as well as compensation structure and
administration.
332. American Trade Unionism. 3 hr. PR: ILR 262 or 316 or consent. Examines the rise of
American unionism and traces historical factors shaping its philosophy. Topics
include economic conditions and union history, comparisons of AFL and CIO
structures and the AFL-CIO as a government.
333. Seminar: Quality of Work Life. 3 hr. PR: Consent. Analysis of current trends and
approaches in "quality of work life improvement" with special attention to
developments in participative management, job enrichment and gain sharing.
Results of current research are featured.
334. Work Group Dynamics and Leadership. 3 hr. PR: Consent. Small group or
individual research on topics related to leadership and group dynamics in the
work environment including training and other human relations programs.
337. Practicum in Industrial Interviewing. 3 hr. PR: I.R. 312 and consent. Experiential
learning of industrial interviewing techniques covering legal and technical
aspects of employment interviewing and other types of interviewing.
340. Arbitration Theory and Practice. 3 hr. PR: ILR 262 and consent. Study of the
purpose of arbitration, trends, principles of contract construction, hearing
procedure evidence, remedies, training and education of arbitrators, training of
advocates, and decision writing. Students will arbitrate mock cases.
INDUSTRIAL AND LABOR RELATIONS 183
342. Advanced Collective Bargaining. 3 hr. PR: ILR 262 or consent. Development of the
economic theory, empirical analysis and policy implications of the impact of
collective bargaining on wages, employment, market structure, and prices.
344. Benefits. 3 hr. Considers employee benefits from the perspective of the industrial
relations specialist who is responsible for articulating and administering a
corporate program. Includes study of all benefits covered by major federal
legislation.
345. Equal Employment Opportunity Problems. 3 hr. PR: Consent. A series of lectures
by specialists in equal employment opportunity affairs. Lecturers will include
attorneys, directors of state and national EEO agencies, and representatives
of business and industry and the labor movement.
491. Advanced Study. 1-6 hr.
497. Research. 1-15 hr.
CBK Core Courses
Acctg.
311. Financial Accounting for Decision Making. 3 hr. PR: Consent. Basic accounting
assumptions and standards underlying financial statements, the significance of
financial statement measurements, and the relevance of such data for planning
and control. Emphasis on financial statement and cash-flow analysis.
B. Law
311. Legal and Regulatory Environment. 2 hr. PR: Consent. Examination of the legal
environment in which business decisions are made and the response of the legal
environment to change. Familiarization with the role of administrative agencies in
the regulatory process.
Econ.
317. Economic Decision Making. 2 hr. PR: Econ. 54 or consent. Analysis of the firm as an
optimizing unit operating in the market place. Examination of product demand,
production and costs, pricing theory and practices, risk, and capital budgeting.
Fin.
311. Fundamentals of Finance. 2 hr. PR or Coreq: Acctg. 311 or consent. Covers the
basics of standard financial activities of the firm including: financial planning, the
structure of financing, and asset selection.
Manag.
301. Organization Behavior and Ethics. 3 hr. PR: Consent. Interpersonal relationships
through which administration becomes effective. Emphasis on human factors, but
influences of economic and technological factors also are considered. Focus on
ethics and importance of harmony between individual needs and organization
goals.
302. Introduction to Management Science. 3 hr. PR: Consent. Study of management
science models and techniques with applications in business decision making
problems. Coverage includes mathematical programming models, decision theory,
simulation, network models, and other current management science topics.
321. Operations Management/Applied Quantitative Analysis. 3 hr. PR: Consent.
Review of concepts, techniques, and models encountered in manufacturing and
service operations. Modeling approach and computer applications in operations
management and management science are emphasized.
351. Policy and Strategy. 3 hr. PR: Consent. M.B.A. capstone course. Integrates
functional knowledge with strategy formulation and strategy implementation
concepts. Cases of organizations varying in size, national affiliation, and profit
orientation are analyzed with special emphasis on ethics and social responsibility.
184 INDUSTRIAL AND LABOR RELATIONS
Mrktg.
311. Marketing Management. 2 hr. Introduction to marketing management with
specific emphasis on consumer behavior and market segmentation, product
planning, promotion, distribution, and pricing.
JOURNALISM
John H. Boyer, Director of Graduate Studies in Journalism
306 Martin Hall
Degree Offered: M.S.J.
Graduate Faculty: Members Cremer, Elwood, McCartney, Ours, and Seymour. Associate
Members Ernst, Findley, Paty, Stewart, and Yagle.
The Master of Science in Journalism (M.S. J.) program in the Perley Isaac
Reed School of Journalism is designed to help persons involved in the various
aspects of mass communication better understand and cope not only with the
increased complexity of their own field, but also with fields outside mass
communication.
The program, designed to help each student reach full potential as a
worker, teacher, or scholar in mass communication, helps prepare a student
not only for a first job— although students who obtain the M.S.J, degree
should excel in the skills of the profession— but also for long-term and
productive career development through the study of mass communication and
related fields.
The M.S.J, program is intended to afford the liberal arts graduate an
opportunity to concentrate advanced study in mass communication; provide
intensive study for persons who have undergraduate journalism training, but
who wish to pool their journalistic skills with extensive knowledge in another
substantive area or areas (e.g., political science, economics, science); and give
persons who have had considerable professional experience an opportunity to
broaden their academic bases through carefully selected advanced studies.
Admissions and Advising
Admission to the M.S.J, program is limited to holders of baccalaureate or
equivalent degrees from institutions of higher learning. Applicants should
have combined verbal and quantitative scores on the Graduate Record Exam-
ination (GRE) Aptitude Test of at least 1000 and overall grade-point averages
(GPA) of at least 3.0 on a 4.0 scale. Each applicant also should submit to the
director of graduate studies in the School of Journalism a detailed essay
explaining why the student wants to undertake graduate study in journalism,
what the student hopes to get from the graduate journalism program, what the
long-term goals are, and how graduate education in journalism can help
achieve those goals.
An applicant who doesn't meet the minimum GRE and/or GPA require-
ments) may be accepted only if the low GPA or GRE scores are offset by other
factors. Excellent recommendations, unusual grading patterns (e.g., a steady
rise of grades), an outstanding statement of purpose, or examples of
professional accomplishment sometimes can offset low GRE scores or a low
GPA.
Students applying for admission to the M.S.J, program are encouraged to
send nonreturnable supporting material to the director of graduate studies in
the School of Journalism. Examples of published or unpublished writing,
research, or photography, a detailed listing of professional media experience
or other relevant job experience, and other supporting materials will be
JOURNALISM 185
considered by the admissions committee. All other materials (e.g., transcripts,
GRE scores, application forms) should be sent to the Office of Admissions and
Records.
A student who does not have a bachelor's degree in journalism or
extensive professional experience must meet these additional requirements:
1. Must have completed a core of journalism courses, with subjects and
grades acceptable to the School of Journalism, or
2. Must complete undergraduate journalism and other courses to be
prescribed by the School of Journalism, or
3. Must demonstrate knowledge and competence in a number of journal-
ism topics to be prescribed by the School of Journalism, or
4. Must meet a combination of the foregoing requirements.
All applications for admission are considered by the director of graduate
studies and one other member of the graduate studies committee (GSC). The
entire GSC considers special cases and appeals.
The director of graduate studies advises all students about general
problems and concerns, courses to take, projects to undertake, special
training to obtain, and appropriate outside areas for study.
Early in the student's program, usually by the completion of 6-9 credit
hours of graduate course work, the student and the adviser draw up a plan of
study to show the direction of the student's course work. The plan may also
indicate a general time frame anticipated for the completion of this work and
may contain the direction and outline of the research problem to be
undertaken. This plan of study becomes a part of the student's record, and
constitutes, with some degree of specificity, the terms and conditions that the
student must meet for completing the degree requirements. Subsequent
changes in the plan of study must be approved by the student and the adviser,
and no graduate student may take a course S/U or Pass-Fail without written
permission of the graduate director.
A writing proficiency examination, administered by the Journ. 300
instructor, is given during the course. Students who fail it on the first attempt
are required to enroll in Journ. 15 and must pass the test the second time they
take it in order to continue their journalism graduate studies.
Graduate Assistantships and Internships
Approximately seven assistantships and internships are available in and
through the School of Journalism each year. Graduate assistants teach
laboratories and assist professors with their courses. Interns work in mass
communication-related jobs on campus to obtain solid professional experience.
Students receive stipends for the academic year and may apply for tuition
remission for the entire year. Although sometimes renewed for a second year,
assistantships and internships are granted for one academic year. Graduate
assistants and interns work an average of 15 hours per week during the
academic year.
Persons who want to be considered for assistantships or internships
should have their applications on file with the director of graduate studies in
the School of Journalism before March 1.
Program Requirements
The School of Journalism offers two tracks — the teaching-research track
and the professional track — within the M.S.J, program.
The teaching-research track is generally a program for persons who want
to go on for a Ph.D. degree, teach in a community college, or conduct research
186 JOURNALISM
in some areas of mass communication. Persons in the track normally take
research and theory courses both inside and outside the School of Journalism,
statistics, and social science courses. The program culminates in a thesis,
which is a scholarly study of an important aspect of mass communication.
The professional track is designed primarily for persons who wish to
become excellent practitioners in some field of mass communication and who
have little desire to teach or become mass communication researchers.
Persons in the professional track normally take communication and outside
area courses that will help them become better practitioners. The program
culminates in a professional project, which helps a student extend his or her
knowledge about a given aspect of mass communication but which should be
the sort of nonroutine project on which the student might work as a
professional.
Students must complete all requirements for their degrees, including
either a thesis or professional project within four years of the start of the first
course work in their programs.
Course Work
For the master's degree in journalism, the student must meet the
following requirements:
Teaching-Research Program. A minimum of 30 semester hours of accept-
able graduate credit, including a thesis for 6 hours of credit.
(a) As part of the 30 hours, a minimum of 18 hours, including the thesis,
in School of Journalism courses.
(b) Included in the 30 hours, a minimum of 9 hours in a minor conducted
outside the School of Journalism.
Professional Program. A minimum of 30 semester hours of acceptable
graduate credit, including a professional project for 6 hours of credit.
(a) As part of the 30 hours, a minimum of 18 hours, including the
professional project, in School of Journalism courses.
(b) Included in the 30 hours, a minimum of 9 hours in a minor conducted
outside the School of Journalism.
In either program, the candidate is allowed to take more than the
minimum required number of hours.
The following courses are required for all Journalism graduate students:
Journ. 300— Introduction to Graduate Studies (no credit); Journ. 304— Mass
Media and Society (3 hr.); Journ. 320 — Advanced Journalistic Writing and
Research (3 hr.); and Journ. 401— Research Methods (3 hr.).
Upper-Level Courses Required. In both programs, 60 percent of the
graduate credits submitted for the degree must be in courses numbered 300 or
above.
Grades. Course work must be completed with a minimum grade-point
average of 3.0. The thesis and professional project are graded as S or U
(Satisfactory or Unsatisfactory).
Except for thesis, professional project, and internship courses, no student
will be permitted to take a course on a Pass-Fail or Satisfactory-Unsatisfactory
grade basis without prior approval of the Director of Graduate Studies.
Examination. The candidate for the master's degree will pass an oral
examination on the thesis or professional project. In addition, the thesis or
professional project will be evaluated as a test of the candidate's writing skill.
The kinds of courses taken in the M.S.J, program largely depend on each
student's background and interests. The program is intended to accommodate
students of differing academic and professional backgrounds and interests.
JOURNALISM 187
A student typically will take all outside courses in one area (e.g., biology,
political science, history), although the student may decide after consultation
with the adviser to take courses in two or more outside areas. Courses outside
the School of Journalism are selected by students in consultation with their
advisers; outside courses selected are subject to the availability of space and
prerequisite requirements in the offering departments.
Thesis/Professional Project
Each student must complete a thesis or professional project involving
original work in the student's area of interest. The student should have a
thesis or professional project proposal written by the end of the semester in
which the first 12 hours of course work are completed.
Each student is responsible for developing ideas for the thesis or project.
Through consultations with members of the journalism faculty, the student
determines faculty interests and areas of expertise, and ideas are refined to
the point where the student has a significant and feasible idea in mind.
The student, with the approval of the Graduate Studies Committee,
selects the journalism faculty member who would be best able to chair the
advisory committee, subject to the agreement of the faculty member. If
questions arise about a faculty member's interest or knowledge, the student
directly asks the faculty member or consults the academic adviser or other
members of the Graduate Studies Committee.
With the chairperson, the student further refines the idea to a "preliminary
proposal" stage, in which ideas and appropriate methodology are on paper,
but not necessarily in formal proposal form.
After the student has written a preliminary proposal and selected a
faculty chairperson, the student should select other members of the advisory
committee, subject to their willingness to serve. The advisory committee must
consist of not fewer than four members, one from outside the School of
Journalism; two persons must be members of the WVU graduate faculty.
At this point, students in the professional track must submit their
proposals to the Graduate Studies Committee, which must approve all
professional project topics (but not research methods, specific research
questions, or hypotheses, etc.). Students may attend the meetings at which
their proposals are discussed. After securing Graduate Studies Committee
approval, students in the professional track schedule hearings with their
guidance committees. Hearings with the guidance committees are required of
all students (including those in the teaching research track).
Working under the guidance of the advisory committee, the student
prepares a complete thesis or project proposal, extended from the preliminary
proposal. Guidance for preparing a proposal is available from the director of
graduate studies.
The student then has a consultative meeting, during which final revisions
of and refinements in the proposal are discussed with the members of the
advisory committee. Notices of the public meeting (to which students are
invited) must be placed in the boxes of all members of the School of
Journalism faculty and posted outside the dean's office at least two weeks
before the meeting. One copy of the thesis or project proposal must be placed
on reserve in the journalism reading room.
After the consultation, the committee votes to accept or reject the
proposal. The student whose proposal is approved works closely with the
committee in the completion of the thesis or project. All committee members
188 JOURNALISM
should be kept informed and consulted for advice (as needed and as desired by
them) as the thesis or project develops.
After each member of the advisory committee is satisfied with the work, a
public oral examination is scheduled. Two weeks' notice must be given to all
faculty of the School of Journalism (notices should be placed in all faculty
boxes and posted outside the dean's office). One copy of the final thesis or
project must be placed on reserve in the journalism reading room. Students
also should make certain their shuttle sheets are filed with the Director of
Graduate Studies in Journalism two weeks before the date of the oral defense.
Only committee members may vote on acceptance or rejection of a thesis
or project. A majority vote is sufficient to approve the thesis or project,
although a dissenting vote may be recorded. Furthermore, at least three
signatures (two of which must be signatures of graduate faculty members)
must be on the approval sheet. If one committee member is outvoted and feels
he/she cannot sign the approval sheet, he/she may resign from the committee.
Such action may force a reconstitution of the committee and repetition of
earlier mentioned steps leading to the oral examination.
The chairperson of the advisory committee will decide whether final
corrections (after the oral examination) have been made properly, and he/she
will check the style and form of the final typed version. The MLA Stylesheet
or other approved stylebook should be carefully followed during preparation
of a thesis or professional project.
Four copies of the final thesis or two copies of a project should be
delivered to the School of Journalism.
Maintenance of Scholarship
All students are expected to maintain satisfactory progress toward the
degree. A student's graduate record begins with the first course credited to the
degree and includes all subsequent courses. All students must maintain a
grade-point average of at least 3.0 and complete all requirements within four
years. Students who fail to meet this standard will be dropped from the
program permanently.
Each student working toward the M.S.J, degree must register for at least
one semester hour each regular (Fall and Spring) semester. This enrollment
may be in course work or in Journ. 497.
Foreign Students
Believing that mutual benefit is derived when students from other
countries study in the WVU School of Journalism, the school welcomes
foreign students. At the same time, the school recognizes that journalism,
more than many other fields, requires language skill. To profit by journalism
study, foreign students must have a ready understanding of English. They
will be called on to follow rapid speech in interviews, press conferences,
public addresses, and in the classroom, as well as to deal with abstract ideas
communicated in English. Award of the master's degree in journalism attests
to the student's facility in English. Foreign students must maintain the same
3.0 grade-point average required of other students.
Recognizing the language difficulty, the School of Journalism offers
foreign students a transition semester. Unless students obviously are fluent
in English and pass a test in which they demonstrate comprehensive
knowledge of English fundamentals (grammar, punctuation, syntax, spelling),
they will be offered a semester of undergraduate study (not for graduate
JOURNALISM 189
credit), which will enable them to sharpen language skills. Such a transitional
semester also will permit foreign students to study other selected courses in
preparation for graduate study. These courses will help them adapt to the
American system of journalism and to the new cultural environment.
Journalism (journ.)
231. Color Photography. II. 3 hr. PR: Journ. 120 and 130 or consent. The theory of color
slides and prints, including slide development, as applied to multi-media presen-
tations. (Supplies will cost $50.00-70.00]
241. Internship. I, II, S. 2-3 hr. PR: Foundation courses in one of the sequences. Student
must have a signed contract detailing terms of the learning experience. [Graded on
Pass/Fail basis.)
299. Contemporary Media Issues and Ethics. I, II. 2 hr. (Required of all senior
journalism majors.] In-depth study of contemporary media issues such as right of
access to media, morality in news and advertising, new FTC and FCC regulations,
media responsibility to society, and social responsibility of media professionals.
Individual research papers on issues with ethical considerations.
300. Introduction to Graduate Studies. I. (No Credit.) (Required of all graduate
journalism students.] Designed to orient students to graduate study. (Class meets
once a week.)
302. Seminar in Communications Theory. II. 3 hr. PR: Studies in human behavior.
Communications theory drawing heavily on social psychology and sociology and
anthropology. Philosophy of science. Theory as scientific knowledge. Character-
istics of theory. Begin learning how to draw on experts, to apply theory.
304. Mass Media and Society. II. 3 hr. (Required of all graduate journalism students.)
Study of mass media and their role in and influence on society; includes analysis of
the social, political, and economic determinants of media content and character.
312. Fund Raising and Foundation Management. I. 3-6 hr. (Open to graduate journalism
students and to seniors with a 3.0 grade-point average; consent.] Seminar. Studies
in fund raising, alumni relations, and foundation management.
320. Advanced Journalistic Writing and Research. I, S. 3 hr. (Required of all graduate
journalism students.] Study of advanced journalistic writing and research
techniques. Students will practice the writing and research techniques on topics of
their own choosing. Academic or popular topics may be selected.
337. Eighteenth-Century Journalism. II. 3 hr. Importance of British and American
periodicals in the political, cultural, and economic patterns of the century;
especially emphasizes the role of Colonial journals in reducing regionalism and
forging a nation.
340. Corporate Communications. I. 3 hr. Conferences to examine the synergistic effects
of advertising, journalism, and public relations for different kinds of corporations.
Team projects and presentations.
341. Special Topics. I, II, S. 1-6 hr. Student proposes idea for substantial reading,
research, writing in area of interest; requirements may include conventional term
paper, series of articles, slide presentation, oral presentations, etc. Student works
independently of classroom setting.
380. Thesis. I, II, S. 2-6 hr. PR: Approved thesis proposal.
390. Professional Project. I, II, S. 2-6 hr. PR: Approved professional project proposal.
Non-thesis professional project for students preparing for some field in mass
communication.
190 JOURNALISM
401. Research Methods. I. 3 hr. [Required of a 11 graduate journalism students.] Study of
quantitative methods common to research in communications. An introduction to
sampling, measurement, analytic procedures, and data.
402. Seminar in Research Problems. II. 3 hr. Advanced study of methodological
techniques. Research project chosen from area of student's major interest. A
written report of the study undertaken is required.
491. Advanced Study. I, II, S. 1-6 hr. PR: Consent. Investigation in advanced subjects
which are not covered in regularly scheduled courses. Study may be independent
or through specially scheduled lectures.
497. Research. I, II, S. 1-15 hr. For graduate students not seeking course work credit but
who wish to meet residence requirements, use the University's facilities, and
participate in its academic and cultural programs.
Advertising (Adv.)
203. Advertising Media Analysis. I. 3 hr. PR: Adv. 113 and senior standing or consent.
Buying, estimating, scheduling of print and broadcast media. Preparation of media
rationale for national campaigns based on research and statistical analysis and
computerized data. Determination of advertising allocations; sales representation;
promotion.
204. Media Management. II. 3 hr. PR: Adv. 113, 114, and 203 or consent. Planning of
advertising appropriations in national and international print and broadcast
media. Client, agency, media responsibilities. Evaluation of advertising. Presen-
tation.
210. Graphic Design. II. 3 hr. PR: Adv. 110 or consent. Design layouts for print media.
Includes buying, supervising, and scheduling of art, typography, and print
material. 2 hr. lee, 2 hr. lab.
214. Advertising Copywriting. I, II. 3 hr. PR: Journ. 50, Adv. 113 and 114 or consent.
Copy concepts, copy platforms, techniques and strategies for print and broadcast
media. Writing and production of broadcast commercials; preparation of a print
national campaign. 2 hr. lee, 2 hr. lab.
239. Seminar in Advertising Management Problems. I, II. 2 hr. PR: Senior standing and
major or minor in advertising. Application of the study of advertising research,
law, and theory in the preparation of a national advertising campaign. Aspects of
the campaign to cover marketing, research, creative, media, sales promotion, and
presentation.
251. Direct Marketing. II. 3 hr. PR: Adv. 113 and 114 or consent. Mailing, marketing,
and creation of direct-mail letters, brochures, involvement pieces, and reply cards.
Postal regulations, direct mail law, and printing procedures.
Broadcast News (BN)
285. Special Topics in Broadcast Journalism. I, II, S. 1-3 hr. PR: BN 186 and consent.
Directed investigation of selected topics in broadcast journalism.
287. Broadcast Journalism 2. I, II. 3 hr. PR: BN 186 and consent. Continuation of Journ.
185, with course content oriented to television news, including electronic news
gathering (ENG).
News-Editorial (N-E)
220. Writing for Magazines. I, II, S. 3 hr. PR: Upper-division or graduate standing;
Journ. 15 or equivalent preparation in grammar, punctuation, and spelling.
Professional approach: magazine analysis, query letters, writing, rewriting;
submitting manuscripts for publication.
JOURNALISM 191
225. High School Publications Advising. II. (Alternate Years.) 3 hr. PR: Journ. 18, 19,
Adv. 113. [For students seeking journalism certification.) Emphasizes writing
styles, newspaper/yearbook layout, rights and responsibilities of the teacher,
students, and school system. Enrollees will construct instructional portfolios
based on research and classroom discussion concepts.
227. History of Journalism. I. 3 hr. PR: Hist. 52 and 53 or consent. (Open to all
University students.) Impact of the American press on the nation; development of
today's- media from the beginnings in seventeenth-century England and in the
American colonies; great names in journalism; freedom of press and its current
implications.
228. Law of the News Media. II. 3 hr. (For seniors and graduate students.) The law as it
affects the mass media. Considered are such areas as libel, public records, criminal
pre-trial publicity, freedom of information, obscenity.
230. Editorial and Critical Writing. I. 3 hr. (Open to all University students.) The
student will analyze and write editorials and commentaries; study typical
editorial pages and the ethics governing editorial page content; become familiar
with libel, privacy, contempt, and other problems — operating and political — as
they arise.
Public Relations (PR)
222. Public Relations Case Studies. II. 3 hr. PR: PR 124. Seminar based on in-depth
studies of public relations programs developed and applied in support of our
institutions. Primary emphasis on successful campaigns, but unsuccessful efforts
also will be examined for causes of failures.
LIBERAL STUDIES
Henry L. Ruf, Director
252 Stansbury Hall
Degree Offered: M.A.
The Master of Arts in Liberal Studies interdisciplinary degree provides
the opportunity for highly motivated students to continue their studies
beyond the baccalaureate under a coherent program, but without the
exclusive concentration in one discipline.
Each student, in conjunction with a graduate adviser, will put together a
personalized curriculum centered around some topic or interdisciplinary area
of special interest to the student. Topics might include area studies (e.g.,
Appalachian Studies, Women's Studies, American Studies), period studies
(e.g., the history, literature, art, and philosophy of the eighteenth century), or
some other special interest that will tie together studies in several different
disciplines. The central theme is essential to the degree program, otherwise
the degree would reflect nothing more than an unrelated collection of courses.
The focus provided by a central topic will ensure that studies are pursued in
depth and justify the granting of a graduate degree.
Program Faculty
There are more than 750 graduate faculty members at WVU who can be
called upon to assist students in their individual plans of study. The program
is administered by the Master of Arts in Liberal Studies Committee, which is
appointed by the Dean of Arts and Sciences and is responsible for admitting
candidates to the program, approving study contracts, overseeing the final
evaluation, and determining whether degree requirements have been met.
192 LIBERAL STUDIES
This committee serves roughly the same administrative function for the
Master of Arts in Liberal Studies (M.A.L.S.) as an academic department
serves for more traditional degree programs.
Candidates for the M.A.L.S. Program
The M.A.L.S. is intended to be of interest to two majorgroups of students:
(1) Adults who have been out of school for some time but who seek advice and
guidance in pursuing advanced study in some area of special interest.
Consequently, much of the work can be done off-campus. (2) Younger, on-
campus students, who wish to do interdisciplinary work at the graduate level.
Admission Requirements
Requirements for admission to the M.A.L.S. program:
1. Baccalaureate degree from an accredited institution.
2. Minimum undergraduate grade-point average of 3.0. Probationary
status may be granted for those who do not meet this standard.
3. An essay of at least 1,000 words including: (a) a description of the
student's relevant professional experiences, current orientation, and future
goals, and an indication of how these goals will be served by the M.A.L.S.
program, and (b) an outline of the course of study to be pursued, including the
central focus of the study and a preliminary identification of course work to
be taken, as well as an indication of how the courses are related to this central
topic. The essay is an important admission criterion; it not only demonstrates
motivation and direction, but it also helps to determine which faculty member
would be the most appropriate adviser.
Study Contract
Upon admission to the program, the student is assigned an adviser. With
the assistance of the adviser, the student works out a study contract, outlining
the course of study and method of final evaluation. This contract must be
approved by the M.A.L.S. committee, and a master's committee, drawn from
appropriate graduate faculty, is appointed to assist the student and adviser in
planning and evaluating the study.
Degree Requirements
Besides the general requirements listed in the graduate catalog for all
graduate programs at WVU, the M.A.L.S. program has the following specific
requirements:
1. A minimum of 36 semester hours of approved course work, but subject
to the following restrictions: a. Ordinarily no more than 12 hours will be
approved for graduate course work taken before admission to the program; b.
Because the degree is intended to be interdisciplinary no more than 18 hours
can be taken in one departmental discipline; c. No more than 12 hours of
independent study will be approved; d. The final 12 hours must consist of
WVU course work; e. The program must include at least 3 hours of course
work in research methodology.
2. A minimum 3.25 grade-point average for all course work in the degree
program.
3. Fulfillment of all requirements of the study contract.
4. Successful completion of a final project (e.g., a comprehensive exam-
ination, project paper, performance or research project). When the student's
final project does not include a comprehensive examination, a written
LIBERAL STUDIES 193
document summarizing and synthesizing the student's graduate experiences
in relation to the chosen topic must be submitted to the student's master's
committee.
MATHEMATICS
Alphonse Baartmans, Chairperson of the Department
203 Eiesland Hall
Degree Offered: M.S.
Graduate Faculty: Members Baartmans, Chak, Christie, Diamond, Ganser, Gingold,
Goodykoontz, Gould, Hattori, Irwin, Johnson, Kim, Mays, Moseley, Nadler, Pierce,
and Zhang. Associate Members Dowdy, Easton, Lightbourne, Miller, Randolph,
Schreuder, and Simons.
The Department of Mathematics offers the Master of Science (M.S.)
degree. Programs are designed to provide education for students desiring to
study pure mathematics, for students who wish to do interdisciplinary work
(in preparation for work in industry and elsewhere), and for students who are
or intend to be teachers of mathematics.
Entering students should have the equivalent of the mathematics re-
quirements for an undergraduate major at WVU. Students who desire a
preparatory program for teaching at the secondary level should have
completed the courses required for a teaching field in mathematics. Deficien-
cies may be remedied by the completion of recommended undergraduate
courses or by examination. Such remedial work cannot be used to meet the
degree requirements.
Each student, upon beginning a graduate program, will be assigned an
Advisory Committee. The committee will assist the student in designing the
plan of study which takes into account the student's interest and objectives.
The program will usually include 30-33 hours of graduate courses. A thesis
may account for at most 6 hours of the total. A final examination (comprehen-
sive in nature) or project is required for the degree.
Students are expected to maintain at least a 3.0 (B) average in their
mathematics courses and to present at least a 3.0 average in all work offered in
fulfillment of the degree program.
For a more complete statement of requirements, the student is referred to
the department's handbook Graduate Students in Mathematics.
Mathematics (Math.)
213. Partial Differential Equations. II. 3 hr. PR: Math. 18 or consent. Introduces
students in mathematics, engineering, and the sciences to methods of applied
mathematics. First and second order equations, canonical forms, wave, heat and
Laplace's equations, representation of solutions.
215. Applied Modern Algebra. II. 3 hr. PR: Consent. Finite fields, algebraic coding
theory, Boolean algebras, monoids, finite state, and Turing machines.
217. Applied Mathematical Analysis. II. 3 hr. PR: Math. 18. The algebra and differential
calculus of vectors, solution of the partial differential equations of mathematical
physics, and application of functions of a complex variable.
219. Seminar in Applied Mathematics. I, II. 1-12 hr. PR: Consent. Selected topics in
applied mathematics. Topics previously offered include vector calculus and
stochastic processes.
194 MATHEMATICS
220. Numerical Analysis 1. I, II. 3 hr. PR: Math. 17 (or both Math. 16 and C.S. 120) and a
programming language. Computer arithmetic, roots of equations, interpolation,
Gaussian elimination, numerical integration and differentiation. Numerical solu-
tion of initial value problems for ordinary differential equations. Least square
approximations. (Equiv. to C.S. 220.)
221. Numerical Analysis 2. II. 3 hr. PR: C.S. 220 or Math. 241 or consent. Solutions of
linear systems by direct and iterative methods. Calculation of eigenvalues,
eigenvectors, and inverses of matrices. Applications to ordinary and partial
differential equations. (Equiv. to C.S. 221.)
224. Mathematics of Compound interest. II. 3 hr. PR: Math. 16 or 128. A problem-
solving course focusing on the measurement of interest, annuities, amortization
schedules, and sinking funds, and the valuation of bonds and other securities.
226. Mathematical Statistics. II. 3 hr. PR: Math. 16 or consent. (Designed for
mathematics teachers.) Frequency distributions, averages, probability, popu-
lations, samples, probability distributions, estimations, hypothesis testing. Al-
though no previous knowledge of computer language is assumed, the computer
will be used in this course.
228. Discrete Mathematics 2. II. 3 hr. PR: Math. 16 and 120 or equiv. Applications of
discrete mathematics to computer science. Methods of solving homogeneous and
non-homogeneous recurrence relations using generating functions and character-
istic equations; digraphs to analyze computer algorithms; graph theory and its
ramifications to computer algorithms. (Equiv. to C.S. 228.)
231, 232. Introduction to Mathematics for the Elementary Teacher. I, II. 3 hr. per sem.
PR: Math. 34 or consent. (Not open to students who have credit for Math. 131.) (For
in-service elementary mathematics teachers.) Systems of numeration; sets,
relations, binary operations, the algebraic structure of various number systems;
the notions of length, area, and volume; coordinate geometry.
239. Elementary Number Theory. II, S. 3 hr. PR: Math. 16 or 131 or consent. Divisibility,
congruences, linear and quadratic diophantine equations, number theoretic
functions, and applications of number theory to other areas of mathematics.
241. Applied Linear Algebra. I, II, S. 3 hr. PR: Math. 17; Math. 18 or consent. Matrix
algebra with emphasis on algorithmic techniques and applications of physical
models. Topics include solution of large systems of equations, orthogonal
projections and least squares, and eigenvalue problems.
251, 252. Introduction to Real Analysis. I, II. 3 hr. per sem. PR: Math. 163 or consent. A
study of sequences, convergence, limits, continuity, definite integral, the derivative,
differentials, functional dependence, multiple integrals, sequences and series of
functions.
255. Advanced Real Calculus. S. 3 hr. Math. 18 or consent. Limits, series, metric spaces,
uniformity, integrals.
256. Complex Variables. II. 3 hr. PR: Math. 18. Complex numbers, functions of a
complex variable; analytic functions; the logarithm and related functions; power
series; Laurent series and residues; conformal mapping and applications.
269. Advanced Topics in Mathematics. I, II, S. 3-9 hr. PR: Consent. An independent but
directed study program, the content of which is to be mutually agreed upon by the
individual student and instructor.
271. Projective Geometry. II. 3 hr. PR: Math. 141, 241, or consent. Projective and affine
spaces, transformation groups for planes. Introduction to axomatic plane geo-
metries.
MATHEMATICS 195
291, 292. Theory of Probability. I, II. 3 hr. per sem. PR: Math. 18. Fundamental
theorems. Development of density and distribution functions in the discrete and
continuous cases. Classical problems and solutions. Moments, characteristics
functions, limit theorems. Applications.
301, 302. Combinatorial Analysis. I, II. 3 hr. per sem. PR: One year of calculus.
Permutations, combinations, generating functions, principle of inclusion and
exclusion, distributions, partitions, compositions, trees and networks.
305, 306. Theory of Numbers. I, II. 3 hr. PR: One year of calculus. Introduction to
classical number theory covering such topics as divisibility, the Euclidean
algorithm, Diophantine equations, congruences, primitive roots, quadratic res-
idues, number-theoretic functions, distribution of primes, irrationals, and com-
binatorial methods. Special numbers such as those of Bernoulli, Euler, and
Stirling.
313. Intermediate Differential Equations. II. 3 hr. PR: Math. 17, 18. A rigorous study of
ordinary differential equations including linear and nonlinear systems, self-
adjoint eigenvalue problems, non-self-adjoint boundary-value problems, pertur-
bation theory of autonomous systems, Poincare-theorem.
317, 318. Advanced Calculus. I, II. 3 hr. per sem. PR: Math. 18. Primarily for engineers
and scientists. Functions of several variables, partial differentiation, implicit
functions, transformations; line surface and volume integrals; point set theory,
continuity, integration, infinite series and convergence, power series, and improper
integrals.
319. Seminar in Applied Mathematics. 1-12 hr. PR: Consent. Selected topics in applied
mathematics. Topics previously offered include applied linear algebra, compu-
tational fluid dynamics, numerical partial differential equations, ordinary differ-
ential equations, perturbation methods, and stochastic processes.
320. Solution of Nonlinear Systems. II. 3 hr. PR: C.S. 220 or Math. 241 or consent.
Solution of nonlinear systems of equations. Newton and Secant Methods.
Unconstrained optimization. Nonlinear overrelaxation techniques. Nonlinear
least squares problems. (Equiv. to C.S. 320.)
330. Introduction to Applied Mathematics. S. 1-6 hr. PR: Calculus or consent.
(Designed especially for secondary -school mathematics teachers; others admitted
with departmental approval obtained before registration.) Problem solving and
construction of mathematical models in the social, life, and physical sciences.
Examples illustrating the origins and use of secondary school mathematics in
solving real world problems.
333. Modern Algebra for Teachers. I, S. 3 hr. PR: Calculus or consent. [Designed
especially for secondary-school mathematics teachers. Others admitted with
departmental approval obtained prior to registration.) Introduction to algebraic
structures: groups, rings, integral domains and fields. Development and properties
of the rational and real number systems.
334. Modern Algebra for Teachers. II, S. 3 hr. PR: Math. 141 or 333 or consent. Further
investigation of algebraic structures begun in Math. 333. (Emphasis on topics
helpful to secondary-school mathematics teachers.) Topics include Sylow theory,
Jordan-Holder Theorem, rings and quotients, field extensions, Galois theory and
solution by radicals.
335. Foundations of Geometry. S. 3 hr. PR: Calculus or consent. (Designed especially
for secondary mathematics teachers; others admitted with departmental approval
obtained before registration.) Incidence geometries with models; order for lines
and planes; separation by angles and by triangles; congruence; introduction to
Euclidean geometry.
196 MATHEMATICS
336. Transformation Geometry. S. 3 hr. PR: Math. 141 or 333 or consent. (Designed
especially for secondary-school mathematics teachers; others admitted with
departmental approval obtained before registration.} A modern approach to
geometry based on transformations in a vector space setting. The course unifies
the development of geometry with the methods of modern algebra.
337. Foundations of Probability and Statistics. S. 3 hr. PR: Calculus or consent.
(Designed especially for secondary-school mathematics teachers; other admitted
with departmental approval obtained before registration.) Introduction to proba-
bility and statistics with emphasis on topics helpful to secondary-school math-
ematics teachers. Topics include: density and distribution functions, probability
distributions, sampling, confidence intervals, point estimation, hypothesis testing,
student's t-distribution. Chi-square distribution.
339. Special Topics. I, II, S. 1-12 hr.
341, 342. Modern Algebra. I, II. 3 hr. persem. PR: Math. 141 orconsent. Concepts from
set theory and the equivalence of the Axiom of Choice. Zorn's Lemma and the
Well-Ordering Theorem; a study of the strucutre of groups, rings, fields, and
vector spaces; elementary factorization theory; extensions of ring and fields;
modules and ideals; and lattices.
343. Linear Algebra. II, S. 3 hr. PR: Math. 241 or consent. Review of theory of groups
and fields; linear vector spaces including the theory of duality; full linear group;
bilinear and quadratic forms; and theory of isotropic and totally isotropic spaces.
351, 352. Theory of Functions of Real Variables. I, II. 3 hr. per sem. PR: Math. 181, 252.
A development of the Lebesgue integral, function spaces and Banach spaces,
differentiation, complex measures, the Lebesgue-Radon-Nikodym theorem.
355, 356. Theory of Functions of Complex Variables. I, II. 3 hr. per sem. PR: Math. 252.
Number systems, the complex plane and its geometry. Holomorphic functions,
powerseries, elementary functions, complex integration, representation theorems,
the calculus of residues, analytic continuation and analytic function, Elliptic
functions, Holomorphic functions of several complex variables.
357. Calcuius of Variations. II. 3 hr. PR: Math. 18, 252, (or 318). Necessary conditions
and sufficient conditions for weak and strong relative minimums of an integral,
Euler-Lagrange equation. Legendre condition, field construction, Weierstrass
excess function, and the Jacobi equation.
381, 382. Topology. I, II. 3 hr. per sem. PR: Math. 252 or consent. A detailed treatment
of topological spaces covering the topics of continuity, convergence, compactness,
and connectivity; product and identification space, function spaces, and the
topology in Euclidean spaces.
385, 386. Rings of Continuous Functions. I, II, S. 3 hr. per sem. PR: Math. 341 and 381,
or consent. A study of the algebraic structure of the ring of all continuous real-
valued functions on a topological space and its relation to the topological
properties of the space.
400. Seminar in Number Theory. I, II. 1-12 hr.
402. Special Functions. I, II. 3 hr. PR: Math. 18, 252. Operational techniques,
generalized hypergeometric functions, classical polynomials of Bell, Hermite,
Legendre, Noerlund, etc. Introduction to recent polynomial systems. Current
research topics.
405, 406. Analytic Number Theory. I, II. 3 hr. per sem. PR: Math. 306, 356. Selected
topics in analytic number theory such as the prime number theorem, primes in an
arithmetical progression, the Zeta function, the Goldbach conjecture.
MATHEMATICS 197
441, 442. Group Theory. I, II. 3 hr. per sem. PR: Math. 141 or consent. Elementary group
theory; Sylow theory, extended Sylow theory in solvable groups, Burnsides
theorem on normal complements, transfer homomorphism. Representation theory.
Emphasis throughout on finite groups.
443, 444. Algebraic Theory of Semigroups. I, II. 3 hr. per sem. PR: Math. 342 or equiv.
Ideal theory, matrix representation of semigroups, decompositions and extensions,
simple semigroups, inverse semigroups, congruence relations, recent research.
451, 452. Functional Analysis. I, II. 3 hr. per sem. PR: Math. 181, 241, 252. A study of
Banach and Hilbert spaces; the Hahn-Banach theorem, uniform boundedness
principle, and the open mapping theorem; dual spaces and the Riesz representation
theorem; Banach algebras; and special theory.
457, 458. Theory of Partial Differential Equations. I, II. 3 hr. per sem. PR: Math. 252.
Cauchy-Kowalewski theorem, Cauchy's problem, the Dirichlet and Neumann
problems, Dirichlet's principle, potential theory, integral equations, eigenvalue
problems, numerical methods.
460. Thesis. I, II. 1-6 hr.
471, 472. Algebraic Geometry. I, II. 3 hr. per sem. PR: Math. 141, 271. Foundations of
affine geometry, the geometry of quadratic forms. Structure of the general linear
group, symplectic groups, and orthogonal groups.
490. Teaching Practicum. I, II. 1-3 hr. PR: Consent. Supervised practices in college
teaching of mathematics.
491. Advanced Study. I, II, S. 1-6 hr. PR: Consent. Investigation in advanced subjects
which are not covered in regularly scheduled courses. Study may be independent
or through specially scheduled lectures.
496. Graduate Seminar. I, II. 1 hr. PR: Consent. Each graduate student will present at
least one seminar to the assembled faculty and graduate student body of the
student's program.
497. Research. 1-15 hr.
499. Graduate Colloquium. I, II, S. 1-6 hr. PR: Consent. For graduate students not
seeking course work credit but who wish to meet residence requirements, use the
University's facilities, and participate in its academic and cultural programs.
MECHANICAL AND AEROSPACE ENGINEERING
Donald W. Lyons, Chairperson of the Department
323 Engineering Sciences Building
Degrees Offered: M.S.A.E., M.S.M.E.
Options for M.S.E. and Ph.D. in Engineering
Graduate Faculty: Members Bajura, Banta, Celik, Chattree, Clark, Dean, Fanucci,
Flemmer, Johnson, Jurewicz, Kale, Kang, Kuhlman, Long, Loth, Lyell, Lyons, Means,
Morris, Mucino, Nagarajan, Palmer, Prucz, Sivaneri, Smith, Sneckenberger, Stanley,
Steinhardt, Venable, and Yang.
Faculty members in the department have extensive industrial and
teaching experience and have published widely in the technical literature, a
combination which assists students in selecting relevant courses and research
topics to meet their educational goals. The department has laboratory space
on two floors in the Engineering Sciences Building and provides support for
both instructional and research activities through the services of three shop
facilities, the wind tunnel laboratory, and the flight test hangar at the
Morgantown Municipal Airport (Hart Field). Funded research allows the
198 MECHANICAL AND AEROSPACE ENGINEERING
department to maintain up-to-date instrumentation, equipment, and facilities,
including computer-controlled data acquisition systems for laboratory use.
Graduate Programs
The objectives of the departmental graduate-level programs are: (1) To
provide master's level education for students in or entering the engineering
profession, and/or (2) To provide an advanced graduate educational experience
for students pursuing the doctoral degree. Two separate master's degrees are
offered in the department. They are the Master of Science in Aerospace
Engineering (M.S.A.E.) and the Master of Science in Mechanical Engineering
(M.S.M.E.). Master of Science in Engineering (M.S.E.) and the Doctor of
Philosophy (Ph.D.) degree, an undesignated degree, is offered by the College
of Engineering and is interdisciplinary in nature.
Graduate Degree Requirements
Course Work and Grade-Point Requirements
All of the degree programs require the student to attain an overall grade-
point average of 3.0 or higher in order to meet graduation requirements. The
grade-point average is calculated on the basis of courses and excludes credit
for research, which is graded on an S/U basis. Some of the course work can be
at the 200-level, dependent upon the program desired by the student and the
agreement of his/her advisory committee. Students are generally advised to
select a minimum number of 200-level courses for their programs of study and
concentrate upon developing proficiency in course material offered at the
300-and 400-levels, which are designated as graduate-level courses by WVU.
Only courses with grades of C or higher may be acceptable for graduate
credit, although all course work taken will be counted in establishing the
student's average. No more than 9 hours of 200-level credit can be counted
toward meeting the course work requirements for the M.S. degree. All
doctoral options must include a minimum of 18 semester hours of course work
taken at WVU. No more than 20 percent of the course work for a doctoral
degree can be at the 200 level. A minimum of 24 semester hours of research
credit is required for dissertation requirements. Two semesters of full-time
attendance at the WVU Morgantown campus are necessary to meet residency
requirements in the Ph.D. program.
The Department of Mechanical and Aerospace Engineering requires six
hours of advanced mathematics for M.S. programs of study and a minimum of
six additional hours of mathematics for the Ph.D. option. Although these
courses need not be taken explicitly from the Department of Mathematics, the
general thrust of the courses must be equivalent to the 300-400 level of effort
required for the major portion of a plan of study.
Maximum Time for Completion
Master's: All requirements for a master's degree must be completed
within eight years preceding the student's graduation. Students should
petition for admission to candidacy for the degree during the first semester of
residency by filing a plan of study approved by his/her advisory committee. A
minimum of 30 hours of course work (including research) is required for the
degree. Students must pass a final examination administered by their
advisory committee before being certified for the degree.
Doctorate: The doctorate is a research or performance degree and does not
depend on the accumulation of credit hours. The requirements for the degree
MECHANICAL AND AEROSPACE ENGINEERING 199
are admission to candidacy, residency, completion and defense of a research
dissertation, and satisfactory compliance with the Interdisciplinary Ph.D.
requirements of the College of Engineering. Two members of the Graduate
Faculty from outside the department are required to serve on the advisory and
examining committee.
The Ph.D. degree signifies that the holder has the competence to function
independently at the highest level of endeavor in the chosen field. Hence, the
number of years involved in attaining or retaining competency cannot be
readily specified nor can an exact program of study be defined. Students
seeking admission to the Ph.D. program must show the potential for
conducting independent research at the level required to make a contribution
to the advancement of knowledge in the field of study. The course work taken
should be sufficient to broaden the student's background in at least one other
area of the department in addition to the major area of study. A minimum of
two minor areas is recommended in addition to the required proficiency in
mathematics.
Ph.D. Qualifying/ Candidacy Examination— The Ph.D. qualifying/candi-
dacy examination is the method of assessing whether the student has attained
sufficient knowledge of the discipline and supporting fields in order to
undertake independent research or practice. Students are required to pass a
qualifying examination administered by the department which tests for a
minimum level of proficiency expected of all students in a given area. It is
expected that students will take the qualifying exam during their first
semester of enrollment in the Ph.D. program, however it is required that
full-time students complete the qualifying examination no later than the end
of their second semester past the master's degree. The advisory and examining
committee of the student is charged with evaluating the student's competency
in the specific area of study through the evaluation of a dissertation proposal
for the research to be completed and the evaluation of the student's plan of
study and associated course work. After these requirements are completed,
the student is formally admitted to candidacy for the Ph.D. degree. Only at
this point can a student be called a doctoral candidate; admission to the
graduate program for the purpose of pursuing the Ph.D. is not equivalent to
becoming a Ph.D. candidate. Doctoral candidates are allowed no more than
five years to complete the remaining degree requirements after admission to
candidacy. An extension of time can be obtained only by repeating the
qualifying examination and meeting any other requirements specified by the
student's committee.
Graduate Degree Programs
Master of Science in Aerospace Engineering (M.S.A.E.)
Students wishing to pursue a program leading to an M.S.A.E. degree are
required to have a B.S.A.E. or B.S.M.E. from an accredited ABET curriculum,
or their equivalent. Students with an engineering background other than
aerospace or mechanical engineering normally will be required to strengthen
their background. Programs of study must comply with the rules and
regulations as outlined in the general requirements for graduate work in the
College of Engineering. The student's program of study is formulated jointly
by the student and his/her advisory committee. Normally, a thesis is required
of all candidates for the degree of Master of Science in Aerospace Engineering.
Programs of study for the M.S.A.E. degree must include six semester
hours of advanced mathematics beyond a first course in differential equations
200 MECHANICAL AND AEROSPACE ENGINEERING
and at least 12 semester hours of aerospace engineering courses taken from
any two areas of the department. The remainder of the course work may
consist of other courses from Mechanical and Aerospace Engineering, other
departments in the College of Engineering, or advanced course work in
mathematics, chemistry, and physics. A maximum of six hours of credit is
counted toward degree requirements for thesis work. Students not completing
a thesis will be required to include three hours of methods courses in their
programs of study.
Master of Science in Mechanical Engineering (M.S.M.E.)
Students wishing to pursue a program leading to an M.S.M.E. degree are
required to have a B.S.M.E. or B.S.A.E. from an accredited ABET curriculum,
or its equivalent. Students with an engineering background other than
mechanical or aerospace engineering normally will be required to strengthen
their background.
The program of study must include at least six hours of advanced
mathematics beyond a first course in differential equations, and 12 total
hours of courses from at least two areas of study in mechanical engineering.
Students are normally required to write either a thesis or problem report
unless they can present compelling evidence of equivalent experience. A
maximum of six hours of research credit is counted toward meeting degree
requirements for the thesis option; a maximum of three hours of research
credit is counted for the problem report option. The student's plan of study is
formulated jointly with his/her advisory committee based upon the interests
and educational goals of the student. Students not completing a thesis or
problem report will be required to include three hours of methods courses in
their programs of study. Programs of study must comply with the rules and
regulations as outlined in the general requirements for graduate work in the
College of Engineering.
Master of Science in Engineering (M.S.E.)
The M.S.E. program administered by the College of Engineering is
generally intended for students who desire to do graduate work in areas other
than their baccalaureate major. Students desiring to pursue such a program in
the department must meet similar general requirements as for the M.S.A.E.
and M.S.M.E. degree programs, although their overall program may be more
flexible.
Each plan of study in the M.S.E. program must include six hours of
advanced mathematics and nine hours from any two academic areas in the
department. The plan of study may follow thesis or problem report programs
applicable to the designated master's programs. Students not completing a
thesis or problem report will be required to include three hours of methods
courses in their programs of study. Programs of study must comply with the
rules and regulations as outlined in the general requirements for graduate
work in the College of Engineering.
Doctor of Philosophy (Ph.D.)
Students intending to pursue a doctoral program in the College of
Engineering with an emphasis in mechanical or aerospace engineering should
have earned a B.S. or an M.S. degree in some discipline of engineering. While it
is possible for a student with a B.S. degree to enroll directly in the Ph.D.
program, it is advisable to earn a master's degree first.
MECHANICAL AND AEROSPACE ENGINEERING 201
As with the department's master's programs, the doctoral courses of
study are selected to fit the individual interests and objectives of the student,
with proper attention given to broadening related areas of study.
The research work for the doctoral dissertation may entail a fundamental
investigation into a specialized area or a broad and comprehensive program of
study. Programs of study must comply with the rules and regulations as
outlined in the general requirements for graduate work in the College of
Engineering.
Academic Areas in Mechanical and Aerospace Engineering
Courses in the department are organized under the four academic areas:
aerodynamics and fluids engineering; solid mechanics, materials and struc-
tures; system control and design; and thermal sciences and engineering. In
addition, students may pursue studies leading to a specialization in bioengi-
neering.
Aerodynamics and Fluids Engineering
Students may pursue an advanced degree with specialization in aero-
dynamics and fluids engineering in either the aerospace engineering or the
mechanical engineering program. A variety of courses and facilities support
graduate research in these areas. Laboratories are located in the Engineering
Sciences Building, with separate wind tunnel and wind turbine facilities in
adjoining buildings and remote sites. Flow facilities include instrumented
subsonic and supersonic wind tunnels, shock tubes, and several flow loops
mainly used for research in gas-solid and density stratified flows. Available
instrumentation includes eight channels of hot wire/film anemometry, two
single-component and one three-component laser doppler velocimeter (LDV)
systems. A hydraulic facility is also available for flow metering studies and
includes a calibration system and pressure transmitters. The department
owns well-instrumented V/STOL and Cessna U-206 flight test aircraft
housed in hangar facilities at Hart Field. A complete library of full-length
films and film loops developed by the National Committee for Fluid Mechanics
Films is available for student use. A significant portion of the current activity
involves numerical solutions to flow problems and is supported by a
computing facility dedicated to graduate research.
Although the faculty background and interests are broad, recent research
has been concentrated on problems in multiphase and density-stratified
flows, low-speed aerodynamics, shock phenomena in two-phase systems,
boundary layer control and high-speed aerodynamics. These research areas
include topics such as fluidized bed combustion, aerosol sampling, flow
metering, flow distribution systems, numerical solutions to gas-solid flows,
and fluid-particle turbulence interactions, including deposition on solid
surfaces. The low-speed aerodynamics work is related to the design of
vertical axis wind turbines and STOL airfoils. The research in high-speed
aerodynamics deals with viscous-inviscid interactions in transonic, super-
sonic, and hypersonic flow.
The faculty has a wide range of experience and expertise in aerodynamics
and fluids engineering. Their professional service activities include flight
instruction and ham radio operation, service on local A.I.A.A. and A.S.M.E.
section programs, and service at the national level in organizing and chairing
technical meetings and symposia.
202 MECHANICAL AND AEROSPACE ENGINEERING
Solid Mechanics, Materials and Structures
Students wishing to pursue graduate studies in the solid mechanics,
materials, and structures (SMMS) academic area may do so within the
department under the M.S.E. program, the traditional M.S.A.E. or M.S.M.E.
program, or the doctoral (Ph.D.) program. This area of study encompasses the
theoretical and experimental study of solid bodies, from concentration on
local behavior of deformable bodies to the global response of structural
elements or the motion of rigid bodies. Hence, SMMS students may explore
the mechanical behavior of materials near micro-scale defects such as cracks
or investigate the behavior of large-scale bodies such as aerospace structures.
The thrust of the SMMS faculty is toward the application of mechanics to
solve contemporary problems in engineering; hence, research is of an applied
nature. Some samples are: numerical simulation of interbody contact, a
numerical simulator for crack growth in layered geo-strata, thermal stress in
layered composite materials, experimental fracture mechanics, and the
aeroelastic response of helicopter blades. Furthermore, in cooperation with
the Department of Civil Engineering, SMMS students may pursue studies
related to civil engineering; one typical example is soil-structure interaction.
An array of laboratories (structures, vibrations, photomechanics and photog-
raphy, and fracture mechanics), computers (Amdahl V/7A, VAX 11/780, VAX
11/785, microcomputers), and shop facilities serve this end.
Regardless of one's chosen specialty, the SMMS student is required to
take nine hours of core courses which are fundamental and essential to a
strong program. The core courses are M.A.E. 305, 318, and 320. This
requirement may be waived for students who possess equivalent knowledge.
With completion of these courses, together with the entire plan of study, the
SMMS student is well prepared to apply mechanics to meet modern
engineering challenges.
System Control and Design
The system control and design academic area offers instructional and
research opportunities for qualified students who are personally challenged
to attain the expertise required to design or control the behavior of a system in
a dynamic environment. Instructional offerings furnish students with a
foundation for developing prototype systems and for improving the perfor-
mance of existing systems. These offerings provide such emphasis as
elastodynamic analysis, computerized design, and active control in automated
machines.
The research endeavors of its faculty reflect a close association with
current industrial-type situations. These endeavors have achieved improve-
ments for such applications as lung system modeling, acid control in streams
or rivers, railroad yard retarder design, noise control in industrial nozzles,
coal feeder system design, engine acoustic impedance modeling, and the
control of energy systems in buildings.
The system control and design faculty has active relations with other
engineering colleagues, having interests in process control, microprocessor
applications, and computer-aided manufacturing. The expertise of the faculty
includes the successful completion of programs for governmental agencies
(NASA, U.S. Forest Service, West Virginia Department of Natural Resources,
Department of Energy, Department of Health and Human Services), and
industrial firms. One of the faculty is a member of the Examining Board for
Professional Engineers in West Virginia.
MECHANICAL AND AEROSPACE ENGINEERING 203
Recent activity in the department has centered on programs in robotics
and artificial intelligence. A Rhino robot system has been acquired for
teaching and research. A computer aided design (CAD) laboratory has been
developed along with appropriate course work and research activity.
Thermal Sciences and Engineering
The thermal sciences and engineering academic area encompasses the
fields of thermodynamics, combustion, heat transfer, and power and energy
systems. The faculty has a substantial amount of service in industries
involving fossil and nuclear power generation, propulsion, and combustion
problems. Graduate course offerings cover a wide range of topics in this area
with applications both to aerospace and mechanical engineering problems.
Recent research efforts include topics such as the analysis of transients in
power plants, in-situ underground coal gasification, cross-flow coal gasifi-
cation, flashing flow-through valves, fluidized bed combustion, gas separation
membranes, solar energy rooftop heat exchangers, corrosion testing in high-
temperature gases, energy analysis of buildings, gas turbine, heat transfer,
spacecraft thermal design, and solar-assisted heat pumps.
Research facilities include a high-altitude simulation chamber for ablation
and wear studies; a fluidized bed combustion experimental system; a thermal
analyzer; an electrically-heated, natural convection water facility; schlieren
systems for flows with varying density; a 48-channel recording thermocouple
data-acquisition system; a water reservoir for thermal stratification studies;
and high-temperature thermocouple calibration equipment.
Bioengineering Program
The department also cooperates with other departments in the College of
Engineering and the School of Medicine at WVU to offer a program in
bioengineering culminating in the M.S.E. degree or a designated master's
degree, depending upon the student's background and area of specialization.
A typical program consists of 36-39 hours of course work in view of the depth
required in both the engineering and medical subjects comprising this area of
study. Students whose B.S. degrees are in disciplines other than engineering
may be required to complete prerequisite courses. Admission to the Bioengi-
neering program requires the acceptance of the student by the WVU
Bioengineering Committee and the Department of Mechanical and Aerospace
Engineering.
The plan of study for an M.S. program typically includes six hours of
advanced mathematics, 9 or 12 hours of course work in the department
(depending upon degree program), nine hours of bioengineering courses, nine
hours of medical course work, and research experience in the form of
internships, problem reports, or thesis work. Students can continue toward a
Ph.D. in bioengineering by following a plan of study tailored specifically to
their research interests.
Mechanical and Aerospace Engineering (M.A.E.)
200. Advanced Mechanics of Materials 1. 3 hr. PR: M.A.E. 43 or consent. Advanced
topics in applied stress analysis: stress concentrations, strain energy, beams,
thick-walled cylinders, torsional warping, fracture. 3 hr. lee.
204 MECHANICAL AND AEROSPACE ENGINEERING
210. Kinematics. 3 hr. PR: M.A.E. 130 and Math. 18 or consent. Geometry of constrained
motion, kinematics synthesis and design, special linkage. Coupler curves, inflection
circle, Euler-Savary equation, cubic of stationary curvature and finite displacement
techniques. 3 hr. lee.
215. Experimental Fiuid Dynamics 2.3 hr. PR: M.A.E. 115. Continuation of M.A.E. 115
with increased emphasis on dynamic measurements. Shock tube/tunnel and
subsonic and supersonic measurements. Experiments include optical techniques,
heat transfer to models, and viscous flow measurements. Error analysis of test
data. 2 hr. lee, 3 hr. lab.
216. Applied Aerodynamics. 3 hr. PR: M.A.E. 116. Chordwise and spanwise airload
distribution for plain wings, wings with aerodynamic and geometric twist, wings
with deflected flaps, and wings with ailerons deflected. Section induced drag
characteristics. 3 hr. lee.
220. Guided Missile Systems. 3 hr. PR: M.A.E. 117 and/or Cone: M.A.E. 150. Design
philosophy according to mission requirements. Preliminary configuration and
design concepts. Aerodynamic effects on missiles during launch and flight.
Ballistic missile trajectories. Stability determination by analog simulation.
Performance determination by digital and analog simulation. Control, guidance,
and propulsion systems. Operational and reliability considerations. 3 hr. lee.
226. Mechanics of Composite Materials. 3 hr. PR: Math. 17, M.A.E. 43. Fundamental
methods for structural analysis of fiber reinforced composites-lamination theory
and micromechanics. Particularities of composite applications in design and
manufacturing of structural components-performance tailoring, failure criteria,
environmental effects, joining and processing.
232. V/STOL Aerodynamics. 3 hr. PR: M.A.E. 117. Fundamental aerodynamics of
V/STOL aircraft. Topics include propeller and rotor theory, helicopter performance,
jet flaps, ducted fans and propeller-wing contributions. 3 hr. lee.
235. Fluid Dynamics 4. 3 hr. PR: M.A.E. 117. One-dimensional, non-steady gas
dynamics. Shock tube theory and applications. Fundamentals of supersonic and
hypersonic flow and the determination of minimum drag bodies. 3 hr. lee.
236. Systems Analysis of Space Satellites. 3 hr. PR: Senior standing. Introduction to
engineering principles associated with analysis and design of space satellites.
Emphasis on the interdisciplinary nature of satellite systems analysis. 3 hr. lee.
240. Problems in Thermodynamics. 3 hr. PR: M.A.E. 141 or consent. Thermodynamic
systems with special emphasis on actual processes. Problems presented are
designed to strengthen the background of the student in the application of the
fundamental thermodynamic concepts. 3 hr. lee.
241. Flight Mechanics 2. 3 hr. PR: M.A.E. 146. Fundamental concepts of feedback
control system analysis and design. Automatic flight controls, and human pilot
plus airframe considered as a closed loop system. Stability augmentation. 3 hr. lee.
242. Flight Testing. 3 hr. PR: M.A.E. 146. Applied flight test techniques and instrumen-
tation, calibration methods, determination of static performance characteristics,
and introduction to stability and control testing based on flight test of Cessna
Super Skywagon airplane. Flight test data analysis and report preparation. 1 hr.
lee, 6 hr. lab.
243. Bioengineering. 3 hr. PR M.A.E. 43, Phys. 201 or consent. Introduction to human
anatomy and physiology using an engineering systems approach. Gives the
engineering student a basic understanding of the human system so that the student
may include it as an integral part of the design. 3 hr. lee.
244. Introduction to Gas Dynamics. 3 hr. PR: M.A.E. 144 or consent. Fundamentals of
gas dynamics, one-dimensional gas dynamics and wave motion, measurement,
effect of viscosity and conductivity, and concepts from gas kinetics. 3 hr. lee.
MECHANICAL AND AEROSPACE ENGINEERING 205
249. Space Mechanics. 3 hr. PR: Math. 18, M.A.E. 42. Flight in and beyond the earth's
atmosphere by space vehicles. Laws of Kepler and Orbital theory. Energy
requirements for satellite and interplanetary travel. Exit from and entry into an
atmosphere. 3 hr. lee.
252. Advanced Topics in Propulsion. 3 hr. PR: M.A.E. 150 or consent. Special problems
of thermodynamics and dynamics of aircraft power plants. Chemical rocket
propellants and combustion. Rocket thrust chambers and nozzle heat transfer.
Nuclear rockets. Electrical rocket propulsion. 3 hr. lee.
254. Applications in Heat Transfer. 3 hr. PR: M.A.E. 158. Application of basic heat
transfer theory and digital computation techniques to problems involving heat
exchangers, power plants, electronic cooling, manufacturing processes, and
environmental problems. 3 hr. lee.
262. Internal Combustion Engines. 3 hr. PR: M.A.E. 101 or 141. Thermodynamics of the
internal combustion engine; Otto cycle; Diesel cycle, gas turbine cycle, two- and
four-cycle engines, fuels, carburetion and fuel injection; combustion; engine
performance, supercharging. 3 hr. lee.
264. Heating, Ventilating, and Air Conditioning. 3 hr. PR: M.A.E. 141 or consent.
Methods and systems of heating, ventilating, and air conditioning of various types
of buildings; types of controls and their application. 3 hr. lee.
265. Aeroelasticity. 3 hr. PR: M.A.E. 160. Vibrating systems of single degree and
multiple degrees of freedom, flutter theory and modes of vibration, torsional
divergence, and control reversal. 3 hr. lee.
270. Microprocessor Applications in Mechanical Engineering. 3 hr. PR: M.A.E. 181.
Fundamentals of programming and interfacing a microprocessor. Hands-on,
hardware oriented. Assembly language and BASIC programming. RAM, EPROM,
analog to digital and digital to analog converters, stepper motors, encoders, AC
devices. Interfacing project required. 3 hr. lee.
275. Computer-Aided Design: Applications. II. 3 hr. PR: M.A.E. 132 or 161; Co-req.:
M.A.E. 250. CAD fundamentals. User-computer interface and interactive pro-
gramming for rational design. Computational tools, finite elements and modeling
techniques. Interactive graphics, pre-post processor applications. Case studies:
conceptual-preliminary-detail iterative design and analysis.
280. Aerospace Problems. 1-6 hr. PR: Upper-division and graduate standing.
282. Engineering Acoustics. 3 hr. PR: Math. 18 or consent. Theory of sound propagation
and transmission. Important industrial noise sources and sound measurement
equipment. Noise criteria and control methods. Assessment of noise abatement
technology. Laboratory studies and case histories.
284. Applied Feedback Control. 3 hr. PR: M.A.E. 122 or consent. Application of
automatic control theory. Transfer functions and block diagrams for linear
physical systems. Proportional, integral, and derivative controllers. Transient
and frequency response using Laplace transformation. 3 hr. lee.
285. Thesis. 2-6 hr. PR: Senior standing and consent.
286. Design of Robotic Systems. 3 hr. PR: M.A.E. 113 or consent. Mechanical
automation design associated with robotic systems, including economic justifica-
tion and ethics. Geometric choices and controller specifications for programmable
manipulators. Workstation strategies such as CNC and CIM for computer-based
flexible manufacturing.
290. Seminar. 1-6 hr. PR: Junior, senior, or graduate standing, and consent.
206 MECHANICAL AND AEROSPACE ENGINEERING
291. Introduction to Research. 1-3 hr. PR: Senior standing and consent. Methods of
organizing theoretical and experimental research. Formulation of problems,
project planning, and research proposal preparation.
292. Research Problems. 2-6 hr. PR: M.A.E. 291 or consent. Performance of the research
project as proposed in M.A.E. 291. Project results are given in written technical
reports with conclusions and recommendations.
294. Special Topics. 1-6 hr. PR: Junior, senior, or graduate standing, and consent.
299. Special Problems. 1-6 hr. PR: Consent.
300. Seminar. Credit. Attendance required of all aerospace graduate students at
scheduled seminars.
301. Advanced Engineering Acoustics. 3 hr. PR: M.A.E. 282 or consent. Study of
complex sound generation and the propagation, transmission, reflection, and
absorption of airborne and structure-borne sound. Coupling of sound and
vibration in structures. Acoustical behavior and characteristics of materials,
aeroacoustics, and acoustics of combustion systems.
305. Analytical Methods in Engineering 1. 3 hr. PR: Consent. Index notation for
determinants, matrices, and quadratic forms; linear vector spaces, linear operators
including differential operators; calculus of variations, eigenvalue problems, and
boundary value problems.
306. Analytical Methods in Engineering 2. 3 hr. PR: M.A.E. 305 or at least two semesters
of advanced calculus. Intended for advanced graduate students interested in
modern analysis for engineering applications.
307. Nonlinear Analysis in Engineering. 3 hr. PR: Consent. Special topics in nonlinear
analysis of various types of engineering systems. Various numerical, approximate,
and analytical techniques chosen to suit the needs and interests of advanced
graduate students.
310. Advanced Mechanics of Materials 2. 3 hr. PR: M.A.E. 320 or consent. Mechanics of
composite materials: anisotropic stress-strain relations and property character-
ization, lamina behavior, general laminate analysis, environmental effects. 3 hr.
lee.
312. Inelastic Behavior of Engineering Materials. 3 hr. PR: M.A.E. 41, 42, 43, and
consent. Characterization and modeling of typical engineering materials, elastic,
viscoelastic, and plastic materials, design considerations.
315. Fluid Flow Measurements. 3 hr. PR: M.A.E. 117 or consent. Principles and
measurements of static and dynamic pressures and temperatures, velocity, and
Mach number and forces. Optical techniques and photography. Design of exper-
iments. Review of selected papers from the literature. 2 hr. lee, 3 hr. lab.
316. Energy Methods in Applied Mechanics. 3 hr. PR: Consent. Variational principles
of mechanics and applications to engineering problems; principles of virtual
displacements, minimum potential energy, and complementary energy. Castig-
liano's theorem. Hamilton's principle. Applications to theory of plates, shells, and
stability. 3 hr. lee.
318. Continuum Mechanics. 3 hr. PR: M.A.E. 41,42,43. Basic laws of physical behavior
of continuous media. Analysis of stress; equations of motion and boundary
conditions; kinematic analysis; rates of strain, dilation and rotation; bulk time,
rates of change; constitutive equations with special attention to elastic bodies and
ideal fluids; energy equations and the first law of thermodynamics. 3 hr. lee.
320. Theory of Elasticity 1. 3 hr. Cartesian tensors; equations of classical elasticity,
energy, minimum, and uniqueness theorems for the first and second boundary
value problems; St. Venant principle; extension, torsion, and bending problems. 3
hr. lee.
MECHANICAL AND AEROSPACE ENGINEERING 207
322. Advanced Vibrations 1. 3 hr. PR: M.A.E. 122 or consent. Dynamic analysis of
multiple degree of freedom discrete vibrating systems. Lagrangian formulation,
matrix and numerical methods, impact and mechanical transients. 3 hr. lab.
325. Experimental Stress Analysis. 3 hr. PR: M.A.E. 43. Classical photoelasticity,
brittle lacquers, birefrigent coatings, strain gage techniques and instrumentation,
as applied to problems involving static stress distributions. 2 hr. lee, 3 hr. lab.
330. Instrumentation in Engineering 1. 3 hr. PR: Consent. Theory of measuring systems,
emphasizing measurement of rapidly changing force, pressure, strain, temperature,
vibration, etc. Available instruments, methods of noise elimination, types of
recording studied. Of special value to students in experimental research. 2 hr. lee,
3 hr. lab.
333. Advanced Machine Design. 3 hr. PR: M.A.E. 135 or consent. Design for extreme
environments, material selection, lubrication and wear, dynamic loads on cams,
gears, and bearings, balancing of multiengines and rotors, electromechanical
components.
340. Advanced Thermodynamics 1. 3 hr. PR: M.A.E. 141 or consent. First and second
laws of thermodynamics with emphasis on the concept of entropy production.
Application to a variety of nonsteady open systems, thermodynamics of multi-
phase, multicomponent and reacting systems. Criteria for equilibrium and
stability.
342. Advanced Thermodynamics 2. 3 hr. PR: M.A.E. 340 or consent. Continuation of
topics related to reactive systems. Adiabatic flame temperatures, reaction kinetics,
conservation of species equations, flame propagation and detonation.
344. Statistical Thermodynamics. 3 hr. PR: M.A.E. 340 or consent. Microscopic thermo-
dynamics for Boltzmann, Bose-Einstein, and Fermi-Dirac statistics. Schrodinger
wave equation, partition functions for gases and solids.
348. Heat Transfer. 3 hr. PR: Undergraduate course in heat transfer or consent.
(Primarily for mechanical and aerospace engineering students.) Topics include
one-, two-, and three-dimensional thermal conduction involved in mechanical
processes both for constant and time varying temperature fields, free and forced
convection in heat exchangers, heat power equipment and aircraft and radiative
heat transfer between surfaces and absorbing media as found in furnaces,
industrial processes, and aerospace applications.
350. Conduction Heat Transfer. 3 hr. PR: M.A.E. 158 or consent. Analytical, numerical,
graphical, and analog solutions of steady and non-steady heat conduction
problems in isotropic solids. Thermal properties, extended surfaces, thermal
stress, interphase conduction with moving interface, socalized and distributed
sources.
352. Intermediate Dynamics. 3 hr. PR: M.A.E. 42. Newtonian and Lagrangian mechanics.
Dynamics of discrete systems and rigid bodies analyzed utilizing Newtonian and
Lagrangian formulations.
353. Advanced Dynamics 1. 3 hr. PR: M.A.E. 352 or consent. Analytical mechanics.
Stability of autonomous and nonautonomous systems considered and analytical
solutions by perturbation techniques introduced. Hamilton-Jacobi equations
developed. Problems involving spacecraft, gyroscopes, and celestial mechanics
studied.
354. Convection Heat Transfer. 3 hr. PR: M.A.E. 158 or consent. Laminar and turbulent
flows. Analytical, numerical, and analogical solution. Selected study of current
research.
208 MECHANICAL AND AEROSPACE ENGINEERING
355. Radiation Heat Transfer. 3 hr. PR: M.A.E. 158 or consent. Classical derivation of
black body radiation laws; gray body and non-gray analysis; radiant properties of
materials, radiant transport analysis, specular-diffuse networks, gas radiation,
thermal radiation measurements; analytical, numerical solutions, and study of
selected publications. 3 hr. lee.
360. Fluid Mechanics 1. 3 hr. PR: M.A.E. 144 or equiv. Advanced dynamics and
thermodynamics of fluids. Basic laws of conservation of mass and momentum in
differential, vector, and integral forms. Application to internal flows, fluid
machinery, and structures.
364. Turbomachinery. 3 hr. PR: M.A.E. 140 or consent. Flow problems encountered in
design of water, gas, and steam turbines, centrifugal and axial flow pumps and
compressors, design parameters.
380. Special Problems. 2-4 hr. Consent of department chairperson. For graduate
students in the non-research program. The student will select a specialized field
and follow a course of study in that field under the supervision of a counselor.
384. Feedback Control in Mechanical Engineering. 3 hr. PR: M.A.E. 284 or consent.
Control analysis of hydraulic and pneumatic closed-loop systems including spool
valves, flapper valves, pumps, servomotors, and electrohydraulic servomecha-
nisms. Investigation of nonlinearities by phase plane, Liapunov, and describing
function techniques. Programming for analog and digital computer simulation.
Introduction to fluidic elements and logic circuits.
394. Special Topics. 1-6 hr. PR: Senior or graduate standing.
399. Special Problems. 1-6 hr. PR: Senior or graduate standing.
411. Dynamics of Viscous Fluids. 3 hr. PR: Consent. Exact solutions of the Navier-
Stokes equations. Laminar incompressible and compressible boundary layer
theory, similarity solutions, and integral methods. 3 hr. lee.
412. Fundamentals of Turbulent Flow. 3 hr. PR: M.A.E. 411 or consent. Basic
experimental data. Application of semi-empirical theories to pipe, jet and
boundary layer flow. Turbulent heat and mass transfer. Statistical theory of
turbulence and recent applications. 3 hr. lee.
413. Dynamics of Real Gases. 3 hr. PR: M.A.E. 411 or consent. Fundamentals of
multicomponent, chemically reacting, gas flows; thermodynamic properties of
equilibrium mixtures from satistical mechanics; chemical kinetics; effects of the
chemical model on high-temperature, high-speed flow properties.
414. Theory of Elastic Stability. 3 hr. PR: Consent. Stability of discrete mechanical
systems, energy theorems, buckling of beams, beam columns, and frames,
torsional buckling, buckling of plates and shells, special topics.
419. Topics in Fluids and Solids. 3 hr. PR: Consent. Finite elasticity and viscoelasticity,
non-Newtonian fluids, nonlinear constitutive theories, special topics in solids and
fluids.
421. Theory of Elasticity 2. 3 hr. PR: M.A.E. 320 (or M.A.E. 310 and consent). Complex
variable methods, stress couples, nonlinear elasticity, numerical methods, potential
methods, boundary value problems, various special topics. 3 hr. lee.
422. Advanced Vibrations 2. 3 hr. PR: M.A.E. 222, M.A.E. 322 or consent. Dynamic
analysis of continuous media. Vibration and wave motion analysis of strings,
elastic bars, beams, plates and fluid columns. Earthquake wave propagation.
424. Theory of Plates and Shells. 3 hr. PR: M.A.E. 310. Cylindrical bending, theory of
rectangular and circular plates, membrane shells of revolution, shells with
bending stiffness, dynamic response of plates and shells, numerical applications.
MECHANICAL AND AEROSPACE ENGINEERING 209
425. Perfect Fluid Theory. 3 hr. PR: Consent. Conformal mapping including Schwarz-
Christoffel and Joukowski transformations. Inviscid flows over airfoils, spheres,
cones, wedges, and bodies of revolution. 3 hr. lee.
428. Photomechanics. 3 hr. PR: M. A.E. 200, 325. Theory of optics, birefringence, stress-
optic law, polariscope, compensation. Techniques of model making, photography,
polariscope use. Photoelastic coating methods and use of various reflective
polariscopes. Data interpretation by various methods including principal stress
separation by shear difference, oblique incidence and graphical integration. 2 hr.
rec, 3 hr. lab.
431. Instrumentation in Engineering 2. 3 hr. PR: M.A.E. 330. Continuation of M.A.E. 330
with emphasis on transducers for static and dynamic measurement and their use
in practical measuring systems. 3 hr. rec.
435. Gas Dynamics 1. 3 hr. PR: M.A.E. 112 or consent. Nonsteady gas dynamics and
shock tube theory. Shock tubes in aerospace research. Compressible flow theory in
subsonic, transonic, and supersonic regimes. 3 hr. lee.
436. Gas Dynamics 2. I. 3 hr. PR: M.A.E. 435 or consent. Transonic flow-hodograph
method, the Chaplygin-Karman-Tsin approximation. Hypersonic flow-bluntbody
field theory. Shock wave and viscous interaction with flow fields, blastwave
theory and similar solutions. 3 hr. lee.
440. Irreversible Thermodynamics 1. 3 hr. PR: M.A.E. 340 or consent. Phenomenological
treatment of the laws of dynamics and thermodynamics for irreversible processes
in continuous media. Linear laws for combined irreversible phenomena including
viscous dissipation, heat conduction, diffusion, chemical reactions and electric
and magnetic effects, are developed taking into account Curie's principle and the
Onsager relations. The principle of the minimum rate of creation of entropy is
extended to establish criteria for the stability of stationary states. Tensor and
variational methods are employed.
441. Irreversible Thermodynamics 2. 3 hr. PR: M.A.E. 440. Continuation of M.A.E. 440
with emphasis on selected topics from such applications as thermoelectricity,
anistropic heat conduction, stability of fluid motion, thermal diffusion and
separation, viscochemical drag, electrochemical cells, and other coupled phenom-
ena of physical or biological interests.
442. Advanced Flight Mechanics. 3 hr. PR: M.A.E. 112, 142. Dynamic stability.
Obtaining flight characteristics of the vehicle from dynamic flight test techniques
such as frequency response, and transient response methods. Problems of
automatic control. 3 hr. lee.
449. Space Mechanics. 3 hr. PR: Math. 245, M.A.E. 112, 150. Variational formulation of
mechanics. Theory of orbits and trajectories with applications to astronomical
problems. Introduction to the space environment. 3 hr. lee.
450. Fundamentals of Combustion. 3 hr. PR: M.A.E. 112 or consent. Kinetic theory,
transport phenomena, chemical equilibrium and reaction kinetics. Flames, their
gross properties, structure and gas dynamics. Solid and liquid propellant
combustion. 3 hr. lee.
454. Advanced Dynamics 2. 3 hr. PR: Consent. Advanced study in dynamics. Topics
covered are either nonlinear vibration, advanced control theory, or stability
theory depending on student demand.
458. Foundations of Magnetohydrodynamics 1. 3 hr. PR: Consent. Ionization in gas
flows; equations of state, charge, mass, momentum, and energy conservation;
effects of self-generated and external electric and magnetic fields on electrically
conducting fluids and transport coefficients. 3 hr. lee.
210 MECHANICAL AND AEROSPACE ENGINEERING
459. Applied Magnetohydrodynamics 2. 3 hr. PR: Consent. Incompressible and viscous
MHD channel flow; plane waves in fluids, discontinuities and MHD shock waves;
applications of MHD to electric power generation, etc. 3 hr. lee.
461. Fluid Mechanics 2. 3 hr. PR: M.A.E. 360 or equiv. Statistical nature of turbulence,
correlation functions, and Fourier representations. Kinematics of isotropic and
nonisotropic turbulent flows. Experimental methods. Application to dynamic
loading on structures, diffusion and dispersion of contaminants by turbulent
fields and heat and mass transfer.
465. Dynamics of Aerospace Structures 1. 3 hr. PR: M.A.E. 474 or consent. Free and
forced vibrations of systems with finite and infinite degrees of freedom. Effect of
rotary inertia and shear on lateral vibrations of beams. Hamilton principle and
Lagrange equations in vibration problems. 3 hr. lee.
466. Dynamics of Aerospace Structures 2. 3 hr. PR: M.A.E. 465. Two- and three-
dimensional wing theory in incompressible and compressible flow. Wings and
bodies in three-dimensional unsteady flow. 3 hr. lee.
474. Advanced Aerospace Structures 1. 3 hr. PR: M.A.E. 161 or consent. Stress
analysis; deflection of trusses and beams. Statically indeterminate problems.
Hardy cross moment distribution and slope deflection methods. Matrix methods
of structural analysis; force and displacement methods. 3 hr. lee.
475. Advanced Aerospace Structures 2. 3 hr. PR: M.A.E. 474 or consent. Principles in
structural analysis, beam-column, sandwich beams and plates. Methods of
obtaining exact and approximate solutions (Raleigh-Ritz, Galerkin, etc.). Buckling
loads in compression. Stiffened panels, wrinkling in sandwich construction.
Minimum weight design. Shells. 3 hr. lee.
491. Advanced Study. 1-6 hr. PR: Consent. Advanced study in areas not covered by
formal courses.
492. Seminar: Engineering Education. 1-6 hr. PR: Consent. Studies and group discussion
of selected problems in engineering education. Emphasis on application of
educational principles to specific areas in engineering education.
493. Seminar: Bioengineering. 1-6 hr. PR: Consent. An exposition of contemporary
topics in bioengineering. Topics include advancements in biomedical instrumen-
tation, prosthetics, cardiovascular research, biological controls, biomechanics,
neurophysiological research, human factors and anthropometrics.
494. Seminar. 1-6 hr. PR: Consent. Discussion, library readings, and individual study
reports in the mechanical and aerospace engineering fields.
497. Research. 1-15 hr. PR: Graduate standing. Ph.D. dissertation research.
499. Graduate Colloquium. 1-6 hr. PR: Consent. For graduate students not seeking
course work credit but who wish to meet residence requirements, use University
facilities, and participate in its academic and cultural programs.
MEDICAL TECHNOLOGY
Jean D. Holter, Interim Director of the Program
2138 Basic Sciences Building
Degree Offered: M.S.
Graduate Faculty: Members Holter, Iammarino, S. Jagannathan, Mengoli, Moore, and
Rodman.
The WVU Medical Technology graduate program prepares graduate
medical technologists for positions either as administrators and teachers in
medical technology educational programs or as supervisors in special areas of
the clinical laboratory. The primary objective is to assist in development of
MEDICAL TECHNOLOGY 211
knowledge in an area in administration, in education, or a special area of
interest selected by the student which may be a special medical laboratory
science as the specific area applies to laboratory medicine. Specializations
include clinical chemistry, clinical microbiology, hematology, and immunohema-
tology. The specific course work requirements for the master of science degree
rests with the graduate adviser in the student's specific area of interest.
Graduate Committee: J. Holter, R. Iammarino, S. Jagannathan, H. Mengoli,
D. Moore, Jr., and N. Rodman.
Admission
Applicants must have a baccalaureate degree in medical technology from
an accredited institution or a baccalaureate degree in an allied field and be a
certified medical technologist with an acceptable certifying agency.
Information concerning the Medical Technology undergraduate program
may be found in the WVU Health Sciences [Medical Center) Catalog.
The area of concentration in medical technology desired by the student is
considered in the evaluation of the undergraduate as follows:
1. Individuals who desire to do special study in clinical chemistry,
hematology, or immunohematology must have completed 8 hours of physics, 3
hours of mathematics, 4 hours of organic chemistry, and 4 hours of analytical
chemistry on the college level.
2. Individuals who desire to do special study in microbiology must have
completed 4 hours of organic chemistry and 16 hours of biological sciences.
3. A minimum of one year's experience in a clinical laboratory is required
for admission.
Students will be required to make up deficiencies in the above, as well as
other deficiencies deemed necessary by the adviser.
Applicants must have a minimum undergraduate grade-point average of
2.5 (based on A=4.0 grade points) for admission.
All applicants are required to take the general aptitude part of the
Graduate Record Examination. Results should be sent to the WVU Medicar
Technology Programs Office, Morgantown, WV 26506.
Two letters of reference must be on file in the Medical Technology Office.
One letter should be from the major adviser in the undergraduate college and
another from the immediate supervisor of the applicant's present position. An
interview will be requested for all applicants who meet the requirements for
admission.
Applicants are selected for admission on the basis of scholastic standing,
recommendations, and interest in the field of medical technology. The number
of applicants accepted is necessarily limited by the available facilities; and in
general, applicants with the most experience are considered first.
Application Procedure
A preliminary application is filed in the Medical Technology Programs
Office.
Letters of recommendation are sent to the Medical Technology Programs
Office.
After approval of the preliminary application, the admission procedure is
the same as for other WVU graduate programs.
A personal interview is required before final admission to the program.
This interview will give the graduate student an opportunity to evaluate the
program and to determine if the program will offer the educational opportu-
nities which the student desires.
212 MEDICAL TECHNOLOGY
Course of Study
It is expected that the students who enter the graduate program in
medical technology will have a goal in mind and a special field of interest in
medical technology. The program is tailored to the needs of the student as far
as possible. A minimum of 36 semester hours of credit, including a research
problem, is required. The student selects a major area of concentration from
either education, supervision, or administration, and a minor area from
clinical microbiology, clinical chemistry, clinical hematology, or immuno-
hematology.
A minimum of 15 semester hours of course work from the following
courses is required dependent upon major area of concentration.
(A). Ed. P. 320— Introduction to Research (required).
(B). If the major area is education, the following 3-hour courses are
available: HI. Ed. 320 (Roles and Functions of Health Education), Ed. A. 320
(Personnel Administration), Ed. A. 351 (Administrative Procedures in Adult
Education), Ed. A. 462 (Higher Education Law), Ed. A. 463 (Higher Education
Finance), Ed. F. 320 (Philosophic Systems and Education).
(C). If the major area is supervision and/or administration, the following
3-hour courses are available: Ed. A. 320 (Personnel Administration), Ed. A.
462 (Higher Education Law), Ed. A. 463 (Higher Education Finance), Pub. A.
341 (Administrative Organization and Management), Pub. A. 344 (Public
Personnel Administration), Pub. A. 345 (Public Administration and Policy
Development).
(D). Other 3-hour courses available for either major for additional credit
are: Ed. P. 231 (Sampling Methods), Ed. P. 321 (Design of Experiments), Ed. P.
343 (Statistical Analysis in Education), Ed. P. 260 (Medical and Micro-
computers in Instruction), Ed. P. 301 (Introductory Behavior Analysis:
Human Resources), Ed. P. 364 (Precision Teaching), Ed. P. 370 (Programmatic
Research), HI. Ed. 308 (Community Health: Death Education), HI. Ed. 309
(Community Health: Drug Education).
(E). Ed. P. 311 (Statistical Methods), Stat. 311 (Statistical Methods), or
C. Med. 311 (Biostatistics), is strongly recommended.
Other courses to complete 36 semester hours are selected by the student
(with the help of the adviser) in the area of concentration selected by the
student. Students may select courses in departments in schools other than the
School of Medicine.
All students must complete a minimum of 18 semester hours in a science
related to medical technology including Seminar (3 hr.) and Problem Study (6
hr.).
All students must rotate for orientation purposes through all sections of
the University Hospital Clinical Laboratories to include microbiology, hema-
tology, chemistry, immunohematology, and histopathology for a minimum of
two days in each laboratory or a total of ten days.
In addition, at the discretion of the student's adviser, other requirements
in teaching, supervision, and administration may be necessary.
The adviser formulates with the student a plan of study for the entire
graduate program. This plan is usually made at the end of the first semester of
the student's graduate study. A copy of this "plan of study" is signed by the
adviser and student and sent to the Medical Technology Office to be put in the
student's file.
MEDICAL TECHNOLOGY 213
Examinations
A final written comprehensive examination in the major and minor
interest areas is given approximately one month before the oral defense.
An oral defense of the problem is given about one month after submission
of the Problem Study in its final form to the student's Graduate Committee.
Requirements for Degree
All requirements for the master of science degree, as outlined in this
catalog, must be fulfilled. These requirements can be fulfilled in three
semesters of full-time work, but ordinarily at least four semesters are
required for completion of the degree requirements.
Degree candidates must have a 3.0 grade-point average and must have
removed all incomplete grades and deficiencies.
All students must complete a problem study (see M. Tec. 497).
Medical Technology (M. Tec.)
300. Seminar. I, II, S. 1 hr. Seminars include topics in laboratory management and
education in medical technology, and timely topics. Minimum of 3 semester hours
to include all three topics is required of all graduate students in the medical
technology program.
491. Advanced Study. I, II, S. 1-6 hr. PR: Consent. Investigation in advanced subjects
which are not covered in regularly scheduled courses. Study may be independent
or through specially scheduled lectures.
497. Research. I, II, S. 1-15 hr. Student is required to pursue study on a problem in the
student's area of concentration. This study is reported in a thesis-style manuscript.
For this study and report, the student registers in M. Tec. 497. Total number of
hours earned in M. Tec. 497 is determined by the student's adviser. As many as 9
semester hours may be taken during one semester or, by arrangement with the
adviser, credit hours may be taken over several semesters. In the final compilation
for degree requirements, only 6 semester hours in M. Tec. 497 will be counted
toward fulfillment of the 36 required semester hours for the degree even though the
student may have registered for as many as 15 hours in M. Tec. 497.
MICROBIOLOGY (Medical)
Irvin S. Snyder, Chairperson of the Department
2095-B Basic Sciences Building
Degrees Offered: M.S., Ph.D.
Graduate Faculty: Members Burrell, Charon, Landreth, Lewis, Mengoli, Olenchock,
Pore, Snyder, Sorenson, Stenberg, Thompson, and Yelton. Associate Members V. F.
Gerencser, Sheil, and Young.
The Department of Microbiology offers programs of study leading to the
degrees of Master of Science (M.S.) and Doctor of Philosophy (Ph.D.) in
Medical Microbiology. The basic philosophy of the department is that the
students should have a strong foundation in basic concepts of microbiology
and flexibility in choosing advanced course work in their specific areas of
interest. The students are given extensive training in microbiological research
methodology. The overall aim of the program is to produce students capable of
teaching microbiology and designing and doing independent research in
microbiology.
Admission Requirements
Applicants must have had at least four upper-level courses in the
biological sciences, two semesters of organic chemistry, two semesters of
214 MICROBIOLOGY (MEDICAL)
physics, and a strong background in mathematics — including calculus— in
order to be considered for admission. Applicants must submit to the
Department of Microbiology a departmental application form, three letters of
recommendation, and Graduate Record Examination (GRE) scores— both
aptitude and advanced. In addition, transcripts and an official application for
admission must be sent directly to the WVU Office of Admissions and
Records, P.O. Box 6009, Morgantown, WV 26506-6009. Applicants for
admission to a degree program should have a grade-point average of 3.0, or
better, and a score of 600 or above in each subject area of the GRE
examinations. Early application is encouraged. Applicants desiring financial
aid should complete their application before January 1. All applications must
be completed by June 1 for fall admission. Applications for admission in the
spring semester must be completed by November 1.
Program Requirements
Master of Science (M.S.)
Every student must take courses or demonstrate proficiency by exam-
ination in each of the following areas: M. Bio. 310 (Structure and Activities of
Microorganisms), M. Bio. 317 (Special Problems in Basic Immunology). At
least 3 hours of credit in one or more of the following M. Bio. 491 courses must
be completed: Genetics, Immunobiology, Microbial Physiology (including
laboratory). The student must also enroll in M. Bio. 391— Advanced Topics.
Two semesters of biochemistry are required. The remainder of the course
work is selected by the student and the advisory committee from the
following courses: M. Bio. 301, 327, 399, or from any of the microbiology
advanced study courses (M. Bio. 491). M. Bio. 496— Seminar is a required
course each semester the student is in residence. All full-time students in the
Department of Microbiology are required to participate in teaching at least
one semester a year.
The Master of Science program requires 30 hours course work of which at
least 20 hours must be in microbiology. Six hours must be in research (M. Bio.
397). A thesis representing original research and a final oral examination are
required. A grade-point average of at least 3.0 must be maintained. In general,
two years are needed to complete the M.S. program.
Doctor of Philosphy (Ph.D.)
The Doctor of Philosophy candidate must demonstrate knowledge in
microbiology and biochemistry equivalent to that of an M.S. student. In
addition, appropriate course work, as determined by the student's research
advisory committee, with a grade-point average of 3.0 is required. Where
appropriate, course work in related subjects such as computer science, cell
biology, biochemistry, physical chemistry, and statistics will be required.
M. Bio. 496 (Seminar) is a required course each semester that the student is in
residence. The Doctor of Philosophy program requires a dissertation repre-
senting the results of an original research investigation and passing of
qualifying and final oral examinations. All full-time students are required to
participate in teaching at least one semester a year. Three years are usually
needed to complete the Ph.D. program.
Other
The Department of Microbiology has informal noon-hour journal clubs in
immunology and in microbiology. All students are expected to participate in
one or more.
MICROBIOLOGY (MEDICAL) 215
For additional information write to the Chairperson, Department of
Microbiology, WVU Health Sciences Center, Morgantown, WV 26506.
Research and Instruction
Pathogenic Bacteriology: mode of action of microbial products in patho-
genicity; identification and classification of anaerobic microorganisms in-
cluding filamentous bacteria; oral microbiology; ecology of the oral cavity;
clinical microbiology.
Mycology: pathobiology of medical mycoses; environmental health im-
plications of fungal and algal toxicoses.
Physiology: nutrition and metabolism of a variety of pathogenic micro-
organisms, growth and protein synthesis in obligate intracellular bacteria.
Genetics: basic studies on the mechanisms of genetics including transfer
of genetic information; recombinant DNA studies.
Virology: Development of rapid viral diagnostic tests, cytomegalovirus
molecular genetics; glycoproteins in cytomegalovirus infection, papilloma
virus diseases; bacteriophage-host interactions.
Parasitology: host-parasite relationships between helminth parasites
and insects and vertebrate hosts; endosymbionts in protozoa.
Immunology: immunopathology of pulmonary disease; inflammatory
response to inhaled organisms; developmental aspects of immunity, mech-
anisms of T-cell function.
Other programs: detection of environmental pollutants; effect of environ-
mental agents on host resistance.
Microbiology (M. Bio.)
220. Microbiology. (For pharmacy students.) II. 4 hr. PR or Cone: Biochemistry.
Pathogenic microorganisms, including immunology and antimicrobial agents.
223. Microbiology. (For medical technology students; graduate students with consent.)
II. 5 hr. PR or Cone: Organic chemistry. Basic microbiology. Emphasis on
immunology, pathogenic microorganisms, and clinical laboratory techniques.
224. Parasitology. (For medical technology students.) II. 4 hr. Study of animal parasites
and disease vectors with emphasis on disease manifestations, parasite biology,
and laboratory diagnosis.
301. Microbiology. (For medical students only.) I. 5-7 hr. PR: Organic chemistry,
biochemistry. Detailed study of pathogenic microorganisms and immunology.
Emphasis on use of microbiology in solving clinical problems.
302. Microbiology. (For dental students only.) I. 5 hr. PR: Organic chemistry. Detailed
study of pathogenic microorganisms. Emphasis on oral flora.
310. Structure and Activities of Microorganisms. I. 2 hr. PR on Cone: Biochemistry;
consent. Structure and function of microbes.
317. Special Problems in Microbiology. I, II, S. 1-7 hr. per sem.
A. Special Problems in Basic Immunology. I. 2 hr. PR or Cone: M. Bio. 310;
biochemistry; consent.
B. Special Problems in Microbiology. I, II, S. VR. PR: Consent.
327. Parasitology. (For graduate students.) II. 4 hr. PR: Consent. Study of animal
parasites and disease vectors with emphasis on disease manifestations, parasite
biology, laboratory diagnosis, and current concepts in parasitological research.
391. Advanced Topics. I. 3 hr. PR: Consent. Assigned study to develop research
laboratory techniques. [Graded as S or U.j
216 MICROBIOLOGY (MEDICAL)
397. Master's Degree Research or Thesis. I, II, S. 1-15 hr. PR: M. Bio. 310, 317A, 391.
Students may enroll more than once. (Graded as S or U.)
490. Teaching Practicum. I and II. 1-3 hr. PR: Consent. Supervised practice in college
teaching of microbiology. (Graded as S or U.).
491. Advanced Study.
Pathogenic Virology. I. 3 hr. PR: M. Bio. 310 and 317A or equiv.; consent.
Pathogenesis of medically important viruses and mechanisms for their control.
Pathogenic Bacteriology. I. 3 hr. PR: M. Bio. 310, 317A or consent. Pathogenic
bacteriology, with an emphasis on the mechanisms of pathogenesis. Topics
include microbial adherence, toxin production and mechanisms, and normal flora
and disease.
Clinical Laboratory Bacteriology. I, II. VR. PR: M. Bio. 310, or 317A or equiv.;
consent. Lectures on the identification of pathogenic microorganisms with an
emphasis on bacteria. The laboratory includes a rotation through the hospital
clinical microbiology laboratory. Limited enrollment. (Graded as S or U.)
Microbial Genetics. II. 4 hr. PR: M. Bio. 310 or equiv.; consent. Molecular aspects of
mutation, gene transfer mechanisms, genetic mapping, and genetic control using
bacteria and bacteriophage systems as models.
Microbial Metabolism. II. 2 hr. PR: M. Bio. 310, biochemistry, consent. Physiology,
metabolism, and regulation of representative microbial groups.
Microbial Metabolism Laboratory. II. 1 hr. Open to departmental graduate
students only. Research techniques in metabolic regulation.
Immunobiology. II. 3 hr. PR: M. Bio. 317A or equiv.; consent. Discussion of the
biological and cellular aspects of immunology. Immunobiology, immunopathology,
and cellular immunology receive strong emphasis. This course is designed to
complement Bioch. 423.
Medical Mycology. I. 4 hr. PR: Consent. Advanced study of the fungi of medical
importance, including the pathobiology of mycoses and toxicoses.
Tumor Virology. II. 3 hr. PR: Biol. 315 or equiv.; consent. A consideration of the
molecular and biochemical aspects of viruses which cause tumors and the
mechanisms by which they cause cellular transformation.
Clinical Laboratory Virology. S. 3 hr. per 6-week session. PR: M. Bio. 491
(Pathogenic Virology) or equiv.; consent. Lectures and laboratories on isolation of
viruses from clinical specimens. Includes serological methods.
Molecular Virology. I. 3 hr. PR: M. Bio. 310 and 317A or equiv.; consent. Molecular
biology of viruses that are important both biologically and medically. Includes a
basic introduction to replication and genetics as well as current topics in
molecular virology.
496. Seminar. I, II. 1 hr. PR: M. Bio. 310 or equiv. (Graded as S or U.j
497. Ph.D. Research or Dissertation. I, II, S. 1-15 hr. Students may enroll more than
once. (Graded as S or U.)
MICROBIOLOGY (MEDICAL) 217
MINERAL AND ENERGY RESOURCES
Department of Mineral Processing
Richard B. Muter, Chairperson, Engineering
2 White Hall
Degree Offered: M.S.
Graduate Faculty: Members Cho and Muter.
Adam Z. Rose, Chairperson, Department of Mineral Resource Economics
214 White Hall
Degrees Offered: M.S., Ph.D.
Graduate Faculty: Members Labys, Miernyk, and Rose. Associate Member Torries.
Master of Science in Mineral and Energy Resources
Mineral Resource Economics Option
Mineral Processing Engineering Option
The Departments of Mineral Resource Economics and of Mineral Pro-
cessing Engineering in the College of Mineral and Energy Resources offer a
master's program leading to the Master of Science in Mineral and Energy
Resources and a Ph.D. program in Mineral and Energy Resources. Within
these programs, several options and areas of emphasis or specialization are
available. To apply for admission to any one of these programs, an applicant
must first apply to the Office of Admissions and Records for admission to the
University as a graduate student. If an applicant's credentials meet University
criteria for admission, the office forwards the application to the faculty of the
College of Mineral and Energy Resources for admission to the program.
A master's degree from the Department of Mineral Resource Economics or
from the Department of Mineral Processing Engineering requires a total of 24
credit hours, a thesis for an additional 6 credit hours, and the maintenance of
an overall 3.0 average. No course with an earned grade of less than 'C counts
toward the 24 credit hour total. At least 60 per cent of course work must be in
300 or 400 level courses; 40 per cent may be from 200 level courses.
When students are accepted for graduate study, they meet with the
program director so that individual graduate committees may be formed with
the students' consent and input. A graduate committee, made up of three
faculty members, meets with its student to plan a graduate program that will
include the student's particular interest and career plans. After completion of
a minimum of 12 credit hours of study with a minimum grade-point average of
3.0, the student may make formal application for candidacy for a degree.
Faculty approval of this application makes the student eligible for the degree.
Academic Requirements
Each student will, with the approval of the student's graduate commit-
tee—appointed with the consent of the student within the first semester of
registration — follow a planned program. The program contains a minimum of
24 hours of course work and 6 hours of independent and original study in the
minerals field leading to a master's thesis. At least 60 percent (18 hours) of the
course credits must be from 300-level or 400-level courses while the
remainder can be made up of 200-level courses.
Approval for candidacy for a graduate degree by faculty action is
required to establish eligibility for a degree. A graduate study may request
approval by formal application after completing a minimum of 12 semester
hours of graduate courses with a grade-point average of at least 3.0 (B), based
on all graduate courses in residence for which final grades have been
recorded.
218 MINERAL AND ENERGY RESOURCES
No credits are acceptable toward an advanced degree which are reported
with a grade lower than C. To qualify for an advanced degree, a graduate
student must have a grade-point average of least 3.0 based on all courses
completed in residence for graduate credit. Each candidate for a degree must
select a major subject and submit a thesis showing independent, original
study in the minerals field.
Doctor of Philosophy in Mineral and Energy Resources
The primary objective of the Ph.D. program offered by the Department of
Mineral Resource Economics is to educate men and women so that they are
fully capable of meeting the demands of the highest levels of their professions.
The mineral resource economics concentration leads to a Ph.D. in Mineral and
Energy Resources.
The Ph.D. program in Mineral and Energy Resources accepts applicants
with either baccalaureate or masters degrees in engineering, earth sciences, or
physical sciences. Students completing the program are qualified for careers
with research institutes, industry, governmental agencies concerned with
mineral and energy resource use, technical management of mining, petroleum,
and natural gas firms, and for leadership roles in the field of mineral
economics.
Mineral and Energy Resources (M.e.r.)
for the Mineral Resource Economics Option
245/345. Energy Economics. I, II. 3 hr. Analysis of the energy sector and its
relationship to the rest of the economy. Emphasis on current policy issues: OPEC,
energy security, deregulation, hard vs. soft paths, impediments to coal use. (May
not be taken for both undergraduate and graduate credit.) 3 hr. lee.
260 / 360. Resource Appraisal and Exploration Decisions. I. 3 hr. Appraisal techniques
for mineral resources including deposit, project, and regional evaluation. Explo-
ration decisions and Bayesian analysis. (May not be taken for both undergraduate
and graduate credit.) 3 hr. lee.
303. Economic Analysis of Mineral Markets. I. 3 hr. Microeconomic theory applied to
mineral demand, supply, prices, trade, and industrial organization. Forecasting
techniques incorporating risk and uncertainty developed to analyze mineral
markets. 3 hr. lee.
307. Mineral Policy Analysis. II. 3 hr. PR: M.E.R. 360 or 365. Economics of mineral
resources and public policy decisions; problems and effects of regulation and
taxation; forms of government taxation and participation; mineral rents. 3 hr. lee.
309. Quantitative Methods in Mineral Economics. I. 3 hr. PR: Stat. 101 or Econ. 125.
Probability and statistical techniques for mineral economics. The development
and application of computer programs; mineral market models, time-series
forecasting techniques, input-output analysis, geostatistical methods, project
analysis. 2 hr. lee, 1 hr. lab.
331. Minerals Technology Assessment. II. 3 hr. Methods of studying the effects of
modifications in technology on the production or utilization of minerals, and the
effects on mineral demand, supply, substitution, and markets. 3 hr. lee.
341. Economics of the Metal Industries. II. 3 hr. Supply, demand, structure, production,
technology, costs, prices, and problems of the metals industry. 3 hr. lee.
342. Economics of Industrial Mineral Industries. I. 3 hr. Supply, demand, structure,
technology, costs, prices, and problems of the industrial mineral industries. 3 hr.
lee.
MINERAL AND ENERGY RESOURCES 219
365. Mineral Finance. II. 3 hr. Methods, risks, and problems of financing mineral
projects. Large foreign-project financing, concerns of host governments, multi-
national mining concerns, and financial institutions.
394. Special Topics in Mineral Economics. I, II. 3 hr. PR: Consent. Selected economic
problems in petroleum and natural gas engineering and the mineral industries. 3
hr. lee.
397. Master's Degree Research or Thesis. I, II, S. 1-15 hr. PR: Consent. Research
activities leading to a thesis, problem report, research paper, or equivalent
scholarly project.
403. Theory of Resource Economics. II. 3 hr. Allocation and distribution of natural
resources in static and dynamic contexts. Welfare economics, cost-benefit analysis,
and optimal control approaches. Applications to resource valuation, exhaustion,
taxation, and regulation in theory and practice. 3 hr. seminar.
435. Resources and Development Planning. I, II. 3 hr. Role of natural resources in the
economic development of the U.S. and lesser developed countries. Input-output
and programming models and their linkage to econometric and computable general
equilibrium models. 3 hr. lee.
438. Models of Mineral Commodity Markets. II. 3 hr. PR: Econ. 325, 326. Applies
advanced econometric methods to specification, estimation and simulation of
dynamic models of domestic and international fuel and non-fuel mineral markets
and industries. Programming and forecasting techniques. 3 hr. seminar.
447. Oil and Gas Industry Economics. I. 3 hr. PR: Consent. Analysis of the various
stages of the oil and gas industries. Combines geology, engineering, and economic
theory to evaluate industry structure and performance.
448. Economics of the Coal Industry. I, II. 3 hr. Supply, demand, structure, production,
technology costs, prices and problems of the coal industry. Includes environmental,
productivity, and transportation issues. 3 hr. seminar.
453. Resources in Trade and Development. I. 3 hr. PR: Econ. 211, 212; Econ. 250
recommended. Causes and consequences of international mineral trade and
investment. Commodity market structures, trade expansion, stabilization, and
host government-foreign investor relations. Impact of resource production,
processing and exports on macroeconomic development. 3 hr. seminar.
457. Energy and Regional Development. I, II. 3 hr. Role of energy resources in regional
development. Role of energy in the West Virginia economy and various regions of
the U.S. 3 hr. seminar.
491. Advanced Study. I, II, S. 1-6 hr. PR: Consent. Investigation in advanced subjects
which are not covered in regularly scheduled courses. Study may be independent
or through specially scheduled lectures.
495. Graduate Seminar. I, II. 1-4 hr. PR: Consent.
497. Graduate Research. I, II. 1-4 hr. PR: Consent.
M.E.R. for Mineral Processing Engineering
310. Advanced Hydrometallurgy. I. 3 hr. PR: M.P.E. 221 or consent. Advanced concepts
of hydrometallurgy. Recent technology of leaching, concentration, recovery of
metal and mineral values, various mechanisms of leaching of minerals. Techniques
such as continuous ion exchange, thermal precipitation, and current electrolytic
technology.
317. Advanced Coal Preparation. II. 3 hr. PR: M.P.E. 217 or consent. The origin and
distribution of mineral matter in coal including specific gravity distributions. Fine
grinding and beneficiation by flotation technology. Coke blending, solid waste
disposal, and advanced plant design.
220 MINERAL AND ENERGY RESOURCES
318. Advanced Mineral Processing. II. 3 hr. PR: M.P.E. 219, 220, or consent. Advanced
surface phenomena techniques including rigorous treatment of electrokinetic
measurements and applications. Advanced concepts of collector adsorption on
minerals and flotation response.
320. Modeling of Mineral Extraction Processes. I. 3 hr. PR: Consent. Theory of particle
size distribution functions and population balance models, size reduction kinetics
and interphase transfer kinetics and application to the separation of dissimilar
solids by physical and chemical methods.
324. Advanced Special Topics. I and II. 1-6 hr. PR: Consent. Special advanced problems
in mineral process engineering including choices among topics related to coal
preparation, conversion, and process metallurgy.
Mineral Processing Engineering (M.p.e.)
217. Coal Preparation. I, II. 3 hr. PR: Math. 16, Chem. 16. Formation of coal, rank
classification of coal, coal petrography, principles of preparing and beneficiating
coal for market with laboratory devoted to sampling, screen analysis, float and
sink separation, and use of various types of coal cleaning equipment. 2hr. lee, 3hr.
lab.
218. Mineral Processing. II. 4 hr. PR: Math. 17 or consent. Application of particle
characterization, particle behavior in fluids, industrial sizing, size reduction and
fluid-solid separations are discussed. Introduction to froth flotation, and magnetic
and electrostatic separation for the concentration of minerals is described. 3 hr.
lee, 1 hr. lab.
219. Surface and Interfaces. I. 3 hr. PR: M.P.E. 218. Surface tension phenomena, surface
thermodynamics, electrical double layer, polarized and nonpolarized electrodes,
insoluble monolayers, adsorption phenomena, colloidal foams, and emulsion
consideration as applied to mineral surfaces.
220. Mineral Flotation. II. 4 hr. PR or Cone: M.P.E. 219. The application of surface
phenomena for the beneficiation of minerals, including naturally hydrophobic,
insoluble oxides, and semi-soluble and soluble minerals. Activation and depression
of sulfide minerals. Engineering and design of flotation circuits. 3 hr. lee, 1 hr. lab.
221. Hydrometallurgy. II. 4 hr. PR: Chem. 141, 142; Cone: M.A.E. 101. Electrochemical
aspects and rates of solid-liquid reactions as applied to leaching, concentration,
and recovery of minerals. Solvent extraction, ion exchange, electrowinning, and
other current industrial processes.
222. Rate Phenomena in Extractive Metallurgy. I. 3 hr. PR or Cone: M.A.E. 114; Chem.
141, 142. Momentum, heat and mass transfer phenomena theory; concepts of
boundary layers and techniques of process analysis as applied to metallurgical
reaction systems. 3 hr. lee
224. Mineral Problems. I, II. 1-6 hr. PR: Senior or graduate standing or consent. Special
problems considered in minerals beneficiation and processing, including choices
among design and research projects in coal preparation, coal conversion, hydro-
and extractive metallurgy or mineral economies.
250. Control Systems in Mineral Processing. II. 3 hr. PR: Junior standing in mineral
processing engineering. Instrumentation and automatic control systems used in
today's mineral processing technology are studied including data recording and
control and process optimization. 3 hr. lee
270. Design and Synthesis. I, II. 3 hr. PR: M.P.E. 217, 219; M. 281. The logic and
quantitative tools required for synthesizing mineral processing systems are used
on a realistic problem by students working independently. Specific attention is
given to economic and environmental implications. 3 hr. lee
MINERAL AND ENERGY RESOURCES 221
Minerals (M.)
281. Applied Mineral Computer Methods. I, II. 3 hr. PR: M. 2; Math. 16. Problem solving
in mineral processing, mineral resources, mining, and petroleum and natural gas
engineering. Emphasis on applications using various computing technologies.
MINING ENGINEERING
Syd S. Peng, Chairperson of the Department
118 White Hall
Degrees Offered: M.S.E.M., Ph.D.
Graduate Faculty: Members Adler, Grayson, Khair, Peng, Rollins, and Wang.
Master of Science in Engineering in Mines (M.S.E.M.)
A student desiring to take courses for graduate credit at the master's level
in the College of Mineral and Energy Resources must first apply for admission
and state the major field.
An applicant with a baccalaureate degree in mining engineering will be
admitted on the same basis as graduates of WVU. Lacking these qualifications,
the applicant must first fulfill the requirements of the Department of Mining
Engineering.
Academic Standards. Each student will, with the approval of the
student's graduate committee— appointed with the consent of the student
within the first semester of registration — follow a planned program. The
pogram contains a minimum of 24 hours of course work and 6 hours of
independent and original study in mining engineering leading to a master's
thesis. At least 60 percent of the course credits must be from 300-level or
400-level courses while the remainder can be made up of 200-level courses.
Approval for candidacy for a graduate degree by faculty action is
required to establish eligibility for a degree. A graduate student may request
approval by formal application after completing a minimum of 12 semester
hours of graduate courses with a grade-point average of at least 3.0 (B), based
on all graduate courses in residence for which final grades have been
recorded.
No credits are acceptable toward an advanced degree which are reported
with a grade lower than C. To qualify for an advanced degree, a graduate
student must have a grade-point average of at least 3.0, based on all courses
completed in residence for graduate credit. Each candidate for a degree must
select a major subject and submit a thesis showing independent, original
study in mining engineering.
Doctor of Philosophy in Mineral Engineering (Ph.D.)
The principal objective of the Ph.D. program in Mineral Engineering is the
education and training of men and women so that they are capable of attaining
the highest levels of the mineral engineering profession and performing the
professional roles of developing or improving the efficient extraction of solid
mineral resources. The two areas of specialization are mine systems, and rock
mechanics and ground control.
All applicants must have earned a M.S. degree in Mineral Engineering
with a grade-point average (GPA) of 3.5 or higher. The Graduate Record
Examination (GRE) is required, and the applicant must have scored in the
75th percentile or higher for quantitative and analytical analysis. For all
foreign applicants whose native language is not English, a TOEFL test score of
550 or better is required. In addition, each applicant is required to submit at
222 MINING ENGINEERING
least three letters of recommendation, one of which must be from the
applicant's previous thesis adviser or an academic equivalent. All letters of
recommendation should evaluate the student's potential for performing
independent doctoral-level research.
The Ph.D. program in mineral engineering consists of 54 hours of course
work and 36 hours of independent research beyond a bachelor's degree in
mining engineering. The successful completion of a qualifying examination
and an approved dissertation are also required.
Engineering of Mines (E.m.)
204. Mining Methods for Vein Deposits. I. 3 hr. PR: M. 2, Geol. 151, Math. 16. Methods
and systems of mining other than flat seams. Emphasis on selection of methods in
relation to cohesive strength of ore bodies and their enclosing wall rocks. Mining
of anthracite included.
205. Coal Mining. I. 3 hr. PR: Junior standing or consent. (Not open to mining
engineering students.) Introduction to elements of coal mining.
206. Mining Exploration. I. 3 hr. PR: E.M. 103, 104, Phys. 12, Math. 16. All phases of
mineral exploration. Geological and geophysical methods, exploration drilling,
data reduction and interpretation, preliminary feasibility studies and evaluation.
207. Longwali Mining. II. 3 hr. PR: E.M. 104. Elements of longwall mining including
panel layout and design considerations, strata mechanics, powered supports, coal
cutting by shearer or plow, conveyor transportation, and face move.
211. Ground Control. II. 3 hr. PR: E.M. 103, 104, M.A.E. 41, 43, Geol. 151. Rock
properties and behavior, in situ stress field, mine layout and geological effects;
designs of entry and pillar and roof bolting, convergence of openings and surface
subsidence engineering.
214. Rock Mechanics. I. 3 hr. PR: M.A.E. 43 or consent. Elastic and plastic properties of
rock, Mohr's criteria of failure, elastic theory, stress distributions around
underground openings, open pit and underground stability, rock testing techniques.
217. Geotechnics for Mining Engineers. I. 3 hr. PR: Geol. 1, Phys. 11, Math. 16.
Characteristics of earth material, geotechnics, and geology concerning mine
design, mine refuse disposal, slope stability, and other earth structures. Ground-
water hydrology for mining application.
224. Special Subjects for Mining Engineering. I, II. 1-6 hr. PR: Senior or graduate
standing or consent. Special problems in mining engineering, including choices
among operations research, mine systems analysis, coal and mineral preparation,
and coal science and technology.
225. Mine Equipment Design. II. 3 hr. PR: E.E. 101, E.M. 104, Chem. 16, M.A.E. 43; junior
standing. Analysis of equipment requirements for mining functions; design of
specific equipment components and operations; and optimization of equipment
and layout choices. Course will focus on equipment.
226. Mine Machinery. I. 3 hr. PR: E.E. 101, E.M. 103, 104, M.A.E. 43, junior standing.
Design and control of fixed and integrated excavating and bulk handling
machinery. Analysis includes components, operation, production, and possible
failure modes. Studied are conveyors, hoists, hydraulic transport, boring machines,
longwalls, bucket wheel excavators, and dredges.
227. Advanced Mining Equipment Applications. II. 3 hr. PR: E.M. 225, 226. Structural,
mechanical, hydraulic, and electrical characteristics of the more common items of
mining equipment. Controls, electrical and hydraulic circuits, and mechanical
transmissions with associated problems. Laboratory design of a control system
for a mining machine.
MINING ENGINEERING 223
231. Mine Ventilation. I. 3 hr. PR: E.M. 104, M.A.E. 114. Engineering principles,
purposes, methods, and equipment applied to the ventilation of mines.
242. Mine Health and Safety. II. 3 hr. PR: E.M. 103, 104. The nature of the federal and
state laws pertaining to coal mine health and safety; emphasis will be placed on
achieving compliance through effective mine planning, design, and mine health
and safety management.
243. Industrial Safety Engineering. I. 3 hr. PR: Junior standing or consent. Problems of
industrial safety and accident prevention, laws pertaining to industrial safety and
health, compensation plans and laws, and industrial property protection.
251. Explosive Engineering. I. 3 hr. PR: Chem. 16, Phys. 12, M.A.E. 42. Theory and
application of explosives, composition, properties and characteristics of explosives,
blasting design fundamentals, legal and safety considerations.
271. Mine Management. II. 3 hr. PR: E.M. 103, 104. Economic, governmental, social, and
cost and labor aspects of mining as related to the management of a mining
enterprise.
276. Mine and Mineral Reserve Valuation. I. 3 hr. PR: Senior standing. Methods used to
value mineral properties; factors affecting value of mineral properties.
286. Fire Control Engineering. II. 3-4 hr. PR: Senior standing. Aspects involved in the
control from fire, explosion, and other related hazards. Protective considerations
in building design and construction. Fire and explosive protection organization
including fire detection and control. Lectures (3) and/or 3 hr. lab.
287. Applied Geophysics for Mining Engineers. I. 3 hr. PR: E.M. 103, 104, Phys. 12,
Geol. 151 or consent. Origin of the universe and the planets, heat and age of the
earth. Application of the science of geophysics in the location and analysis of
earthquakes and in prospecting for oil and minerals.
291. Mine Plant Design. II. 3 hr. PR: E.M. 225, 226; senior standing. Layout, analysis,
and detailing of the major mine installations and support facilities. Locations
include: the surface plant, shaft and slope stations, section centers. Systems dealt
with are bulk handling, power, ventilation, supplies, water, and personnel.
295. Mine Systems Design. I. 3 hr. PR: E.M. 103, 104, consent. Each student selects and
designs a mine subsystem under specified conditions, including extraction,
transportation, ventilation, roof control, exploration, plant design, surface facil-
ities, etc. 2 hr. lee, 1 hr. lab.
296. Mine Design. II. 3 hr. PR: E.M. 206, 211, 225, 226, 231, 242, 271. Comprehensive
design problem involving underground mining developments or surface plant or
both, as elected by the student in consultation with instructor. Preparation of a
complete report on the problem required, including drawings, specifications, and
cost analysis.
311. Advanced Ground Control— Coal Mines. I, II. 3 hr. PR: E.M. 211 or consent.
Ground and strata control for underground and surface coal mining, including
slope stability and subsidence.
312. Surface Subsidence Engineering. II. 3 hr. PR: E.M. 211. Elements of surface
subsidence engineering due to underground mining: theories of surface subsidence,
characteristics and prediction of surface movements, and effects of surface
movements.
316. Advanced Rock Mechanics. I. 3 hr. PR: E.M. 214 or consent. Testing techniques and
interpretation, strength and fracture, classification, anisotropy, friction, jointed
rock, fluid pressure, fragmentation, and excavation.
224 MINING ENGINEERING
320. Mobile Excavating and Materials Handling. I. 3 hr. PR: Graduate standing and
consent. Mobile mining equipment will be systematically analyzed as to functional,
production, failure, and operational aspects. Included will be routine and innova-
tive methods, and surface and underground applications, such as the hydraulic
shovel and impactors.
321. Integrated Excavating and Materials Handling. II. 3 hr. PR: Graduate standing and
consent. Integrated mining equipment will be systematically analyzed as to
functional, production, failure, and operational aspects. Included will be routine
and innovative methods, and surface and underground applications, such as the
longwalls and monorails.
331. Mine Ventilation Network Analysis. II. 3 hr. PR: E.M. 231, M. 281, or consent.
Theory and computational techniques for mine ventilation network problems with
emphasis on computer-aided analysis of complex mine ventilation systems.
332. Advanced Mine Ventilation. II. 3 hr. PR: E.M. 231. Advanced topics in mine
atmospheric control including control of methane, dust, humidity, and heat. Also
covers leakage characteristics, fan selection, analysis of ventilation networks, and
planning of mine ventilation system.
342. Advanced Mine Health and Safety. I. 3 hr. PR: E.M. 242 or graduate standing.
Special emphasis will be placed on mine rescue, mine disaster prevention and
organization, and mine property and equipment loss prevention.
351. Explosive Engineering Design. II. 3 hr. PR: E.M. 251 or consent. Rock drilling, total
blast systems simulation, experimental studies in blast design, rock fracturing,
chemical thermodynamics, kinetics, and reaction rates.
365. Deterministic Methods for Mineral Engineers. I. 3 hr. PR: Graduate standing or
consent. Analysis and solution of mineral engineering problems which require use
of deterministic models. Application of deterministic methods to mineral trans-
portation, mineral resource allocation and extraction problems, and mine planning
and equipment utilization problems.
366. Stochastic Methods for Mineral Engineers. II. 3 hr. PR: Graduate standing or
consent. Application of stochastic methods to mineral engineering problems in
equipment selection, renewal processes, mine ventilation, mine production, and
mineral extraction.
391. Advanced Mine Design. I, II. 1-6 hr. PR: Graduate standing or consent. Advanced
detail design and layout of coal mine plant, particularly incorporating new ideas of
machines and mining methods.
394. Special Topics. I, II, S. 1-3 hr. PR: Graduate standing or consent. Selected field of
study in mining engineering.
397. Master's Degree Research or Thesis. I, II, S. 1-15 hr. PR: Consent. Research
activities leading to a thesis, problem report, research paper, or equivalent
scholarly project.
398. Advanced Mine Design 1. 1-6 hr. PR: E.M. 296. Detailed design of the components
of coal mine subsystems including ground control, excavation and handling, and
life support subsystems. 1-6 hr. lee.
399. Advanced Mine Design 2. 1-6 hr. PR: E.M. 296. Examination of the broad aspects of
mine design for non-coal deposits. Consideration of deposits of various shapes,
materials and qualities including country rock. Comparison of principles estab-
lished for coal mine design. 1-6 hr. lee.
411. Theories of Surface Subsidence. 3 hr. PR: E.M. 312. Theories of surface subsidence
due to underground coal mining including empirical, profile function, theoretical
and physical modeling methods, and time factors. 3 hr. lee.
MINING ENGINEERING 225
416. Theory of Rock Failure. I. 3 hr. PR: E.M. 214 or consent. Friction, elasticity,
strength of rock, mechanism of brittle failure, factors affecting failure process,
theories of failure, fracture propagation in rock, fracture toughness of rock and
coal, fluid pressure, size, stress gradient, and time-dependent effects.
417. Laboratory and Field Instrumentation. I. 3 hr. PR: E.M. 211, 214, or consent.
Principles and applications of strain gages and photoelasticity for stress analysis
in rock/coal; displacement/velocity gages and accelerometer for ground motion;
holography and acoustic emission for non-destructive tests.
418. Rock Mechanics in Mine Design. II. 3 hr. PR: E.M. 211, 214, or consent. Design
process in mining engineering; design approaches for excavations in rock; input
parameters for design; empirical, observational, and analytical methods of design;
integrated designs. 1 hr. lee, 2 hr. lab.
451. Theory of High Explosives. II. 3 hr. PR: E.M. 351 or consent. The application of
chemical thermodynamics and the hydrodynamic theory to determine properties
of high explosives, chemical equilibria and calculation of detonation and explo-
sion-state variables.
491. Advanced Topics. I, II, S. 1-6 hr. PR: Advanced graduate standing, consent.
Selected field of study in mining engineering.
492. Directed Study. I, II, S. 1-6 hr. PR: Advanced graduate standing or consent.
Directed study, reading, and/or research.
493. Special Topics. I, II, S. 1-6 hr. PR: Advanced graduate standing or consent.
Contemporary topics selected from recent developments in mining engineering.
494. Special Seminars. I, II, S. 1-6 hr. PR: Advanced graduate standing or consent.
Special seminars for advanced graduate students.
495. Independent Study. I, II, S. 1-6 hr. PR: Advanced graduate standing or consent.
Faculty supervised study of topics not available through regular course offerings.
496. Graduate Seminar. I, II. 1 hr. PR: Consent. It is anticipated that each graduate
student will present at least one seminar to the assembled faculty and graduate
student body of the student's program.
497. Research. I, II, S. 1-15 hr.
499. Graduate Colloquium. I, II, S. 1-6 hr. PR: Consent. For graduate students not
seeking course work credit but who wish to meet residence requirements, use the
University's facilities, and participate in its academic and cultural programs.
Minerals (M.)
281. Applied Mineral Computer Methods. I, II. 3 hr. PR: M. 2; Math. 16. Problem solving
in mineral processing, mineral resources, mining, and petroleum and natural gas
engineering. Emphasis on applications using various computing technologies.
MUSIC
Cecil B. Wilson, Chairperson of the Division of Music
Degrees Offered: M.M., D.M.A., Ph.D.
Graduate Faculty: Members Beall, Brown, J. Crain, Faini, Godes, Haller, Hudson,
Lefkoff, Miltenberger, Powell, Skidmore, Taylor, Trythall, Wilcox, Wilkinson, and
Yeend. Associate Members Catalfano, Crotty, J. Hunt, Kefferstan, Peri, Weigand,
Wilkes, Winkler, and Wilson.
The Division of Music is an accredited institutional member of the
National Association of Schools of Music, the only nationally recognized
accrediting agency for professional music instruction. All programs comply
with objectives and guidelines as required by this organization.
226 MUSIC
Prospective graduate students in music are required to have completed
the appropriate curriculum of undergraduate study in music at WVU, or its
equivalent at another institution of recognized standing. For acceptance into a
degree program the applicant must submit the following to the Director of
Graduate Studies, Division of Music, P.O. Box 6111, Morgantown, WV
26506-6111.
1. For the Master of Music degree, an undergraduate transcript showing
an average of at least 2.5 on all undergraduate study; for the Ph.D. and Doctor
of Musical Arts, a transcript showing an average of at least 3.0 on the master's
degree or equivalent;
2. Results of the Graduate Record Examination (not required of M.M.
applicants in applied music);
3. Three letters of recommendation from individuals qualified to judge
the applicant's potential success as a graduate student in music; the writers
should submit the letters directly to the Director of Graduate Studies.
Applicants in certain programs are also required to demonstrate, by
audition or tape recording, a level of attainment in the principal performance
area which is prerequisite to the curriculum sought. The evaluation of
performance proficiency is based on technical ability, repertoire, and musi-
cianship. A listing of representative material for each performance area,
graded by proficiency level, is available upon request.
The audition for acceptance as a degree student, when required, is
assessed for general admission purposes. The estimated proficiency level
must be confirmed by a jury examination at the end of the first semester of
applied study. Credit in Applied Music at the 400 level will count toward
degree requirements only when the proficiency level prerequisite has been
reached.
Evidence of previous teaching or professional experience is desirable in
the consideration of doctoral applicants.
Admission to the Ph.D. program with a specialization in Music Education
is contingent upon the receipt of evidence that the applicant has been a
successful music teacher for at least three years. Such evidence may be in the
form of a letter of recommendation from a school official.
Applicants accepted for degree study must take tests in theory and music
history, and audition on piano. The results of these might indicate the need for
remedial study, which must be completed before admission to candidacy.
Applicants for the areas of Theory and Composition will be tested more
specifically in counterpoint (both sixteenth and eighteenth century), form,
instrumentation, and orchestration. Applicants seeking acceptance as com-
position majors also must submit representative compositions for evaluation
and approval.
Applicants whose averages and test scores do not meet the qualifications
outlined above may be considered for acceptance as Provisional or Non-
Degree students. If, upon completion of up to 12 semester hours of graduate
study they have achieved a B (3.0) average, and after any previous under-
graduate deficiencies or other conditions have been removed, such students
may be accepted as degree students.
If a tape recording is submitted, it must be of a high quality and have
clearly indicated the student's name, titles and composers of works performed,
and date of recording. Even the best recordings leave much to be desired, and a
personal audition is encouraged. The auditions are normally administered on
specially scheduled weekends, although in exceptional cases individually
scheduled appointments may be made. These should occur at least six weeks
before registration.
MUSIC 227
Master of Music (M.M.)
Candidates must establish an overall grade-point average of 3.0 within a
maximum of 36 hours. Applicants will be considered for candidacy upon the
completion of 12 semester hours of graduate study. No student will be
admitted to candidacy before removal of all undergraduate deficiencies. A 3.0
average in all students work must be maintained.
Candidates for the Master of Music degree may major in one of five fields:
music education, applied music, theory, composition, or history of music. In
the latter four, a minimum of 30 hours is required.
Students majoring in music education will be allowed one of four options,
to be determined in consultation with the program consultant: (1) thesis
option; (2) recital option (if the candidate demonstrates proficiency level 8 in
the major performance area within the first 12 hours of enrollment); (3)
thirty-six course-work hour option; and (4) certification option (intended for
persons possessing a bachelor's degree with a major in music other than music
education), leading to eligibility for certification for teaching grades K-12 in
the public schools of West Virginia. For the first three options the following
requirements apply:
1. Thirty graduate hours for thesis and recital options, 36 graduate hours
otherwise, with an average of 3.0.
2. For the thesis or 36-hour options, 4 hours of applied music, either
Music 400 (principal performance area) or Music 310 (secondary performance
area.)
3. Demonstration of the ability to integrate music history, music theory,
and music education by passing comprehensive written and oral examinations.
4. Successful completion of a 4-credit thesis or 2-credit recital for the
thesis and recital options, respectively.
For the certification option, a combination of graduate and undergraduate
courses will be selected to satisfy certification requirements. The 36 graduate
hours will include 12 hours of graduate music education courses and electives
chosen to provide a good background for teaching. Undergraduate courses
may be necessary to make up deficiencies, especially in areas of performance
or conducting. A descriptive leaflet is available upon request.
Music Education Hr.
(PR: Level 2 in piano.)
Music Education courses at the 300 or 400 level* 12
One Theory course and one Music History course 5-6
For Thesis Option:
Music 400 or 310— Applied Music 4
Music 497 — Research (Thesis) 4
Electives 4-5
For Recital Option:
Music 398— Master's Recital 2
Music 400 — Applied Music (major performance area) 6
Electives 4-5
For 36-hour Option
Music 400 or 310— Applied Music 4
Electives 14-15
Totals 30 or 36
*Students in the Thesis option must include Music 446.
228 MUSIC
History of Music Hr.
(PR: Level 7 in the major performance area; Level 4 on piano; 4 semesters of a
foreign language; 7 hours upper-division theory; 15 undergraduate hours in
music history.)
Music 430— Introduction to Music Bibliography 3
Music History, chosen from Music 221-225 6
Music 491— Special Topics 6
Theory Elective 3
Music 497— Research (Thesis) 4
Electives* 8
Total 30
Applied Music Hr.
(PR: Level 10 in the major performance area, and Level 3 in piano; for
organists, Level 5 in piano; for pianists in the piano pedagogy option, Level 9
in piano and one year of piano pedagogy/group or equivalent teaching
experience; for voice majors, the same language requirements as those for the
B.M. degree.)
Music 400— Applied Music (major performance area) 8
Music 430— Introduction to Music Bibliography 3
For Performance Option:
Music 398— Master's Recital 4
One of the following 2
Music 398— Master's Recital
Music 431— Research Problems for Performers
One theory course and one music history course 5-6
Music electives (no more than 4 hr. in major performance area) 7-8
Total 30
For Piano Pedagogy Option:
Music 398— Master's Recital 2
Music 312— Studies in Keyboard Performance and Pedagogy 6
Music 392— Guided Studies (Teacher Internship) 4
One theory course or one music history course 2-3
Music electives 4-5
Total 30
Composition Hr.
(PR: Level 8 in the major performance area; Level 4 in piano; evaluation of
previous compositions at a graduate major level.)
Music 430— Introduction to Music Bibliography 3
Music 460— Composition 6
Music 468— Compositional Techniques in Contemporary Music 3
Music 475— Pedagogy of Theory 3
Music 483— Theory Topics 3
Music 497— Research (Thesis) 4
Music electives (must include one of the following:
Music 460— Electronic Music Composition
Music 467— Analytical Techniques
Music 470— Transcription and Arranging) 8
Total 30
MUSIC 229
Theory Hr.
(PR: Level 8 in the major performances area; Level 4 in piano.)
Music 430 — Introduction to Music Bibliography 3
Graduate music history 3
Music 467— Analytical Techniques 3
Music 468 — Compositional Techniques in Contemporary Music 3
Music 475— Pedagogy of Theory 3
Music 483 — Theory Topics 3
Music 497 — Research (Thesis) 4
Electives 8
Total 30
*To be eligible for graduation, the candidate must demonstrate attainment of Level 8 on the
major instrument.
A representative public recital is required of candidates majoring in
Applied Music. Composition majors must submit as a thesis a composition in
a large form.
All candidates for the Master of Music degree are required to participate
for credit for two semesters (or summer sessions) in a performing group
which meets at least two clock hours per week and which is selected with the
adviser's approval.
A general comprehensive oral examination must be passed by all
candidates for the Master of Music degree. Candidates may repeat this
examination after a three-month period. The results of the second oral
examination will normally be considered final. The examining committee will
decide immediately after an unsuccessful second attempt whether a petition
for a third attempt will be granted.
Time Limitation. Students must complete their programs in eight calendar
years. Failure to do so will result in the loss of credit for courses taken at the
outset of the program.
Doctor of Philosophy (Ph.D.)
Admission. Acceptance to the doctoral program is competitive; admis-
sions decisions are made each year in the spring for entrance the following
fall. Applicants to the program leading to the degree of Doctor of Philosophy
must present necessary credentials for evaluation of previous training and
experience to the Division of Music. These include a score on the Graduate
Record Examination, a transcript of all grades submitted through the WVU
Office of Admissions and Records, and evidence that the applicant has
completed a minimum of 28 hours in liberal arts studies. Before admission to
the program the Division may, at its discretion, require the applicant to take
entrance tests in various fields of music, or it may require the applicant to be
present for a personal interview. Under normal circumstances, the applicant
must have maintained a minimum average grade of B in courses taken for the
master's degree. However, if sufficient professional experience should war-
rant, the Division may waive the requirement of a B average or may grant an
applicant conditional admittance subject to the satisfactory completion of
certain specified courses or the attainment of a specified grade-point average
within a semester's work.
Curriculum. The exact amount and nature of course work undertaken will
be determined by the adviser with the approval of the student's doctoral
230 MUSIC
committee in light of previous preparation and field of specialization. The
student is expected to take Music 494— Doctoral Seminar— as required by the
field of specialization. Whatever preparatory courses (languages, statistics,
bibliography, etc.) are needed must necessarily be taken early in the course of
study. A paradigm of recommended courses and other requirements in each
field of specialization is available upon request.
Candidacy. Upon completion of the requirements of the Division of Music
and the general WVU graduate studies requirements, the student will be
recommended for admission to candidacy for the degree. These requirements
are (in order or occurrence):
1. Demonstrate the ability to read German and French. For applicants in
music education, either French or German 305-306, or Statistics 311-312 must
be completed satisfactorily. Upon recommendation of the adviser, a different
romance language may be substituted for French.
2. Pass written qualifying examinations satisfactorily to show:
a. Broad knowledge in theory and music history and literature.
b. Appropriate knowledge in the minor field.
c. Knowledge in depth in the field of specialization.
3. Pass satisfactorily a comprehensive oral qualifying examination.
4. Present and have accepted an outline and prospectus of the dissertation.
The requirement for doctoral seminars must be completed before the presen-
tation of the prospectus.
Graduate students who have met these requirements and who have
maintained an average of B in courses completed shall be admitted to
candidacy. The qualifying examinations administered after satisfaction of
the language requirement shall be considered as one integral examination or
alternative consisting of the written and oral parts. If a student does not pass
the examination, the student is allowed to attempt the entire examination a
second time. The second attempt is considered final. However, the applicant's
committee may elect to discourage a second attempt if the first does not
indicate probable success upon repetition.
Residence. Completion of the requirements for this degree normally
requires at least three years of full-time graduate work. A minimum of two
semesters must be spent in residence in full-time graduate study at WVU
beyond the master's degree or its equivalent.
Dissertation. The candidate must submit a dissertation produced at WVU
under the direction of a major professor which demonstrates a high order of
independent scholarship, originality, and competence in research, and which
makes an original contribution to the field of specialization.
Final Examination. When the dissertation is approved and all other
requirements have been fulfilled, the candidate's doctoral committee will
administer the final oral examination. However, a final examination will not
be given in the same semester as the qualifying examination. At the option of
the student's committee, a final written examination may also be required.
The final examination(s) shall be concerned with the dissertation, its
contribution to knowledge, its relation to other fields, and the candidate's
grasp of the field of specialization.
Time Limitation. Following admission to candidacy, doctoral students
are allowed five years to complete all remaining degree requirements. An
extension of time may be permitted only upon repetition of the qualifying
examination and completion of any other requirements specified by the
student's doctoral committee.
MUSIC 231
Doctor of Musical Arts
Program Objectives. The primary objective is professional competence at
the highest level. Historical and theoretical knowledge sufficient to support
individualized interpretations for performers and original creative work for
composers is also expected. Writing and speaking skills needed to communicate
clearly and effectively are required. In order to achieve these objectives, the
course of study includes requirements in performance or composition,
academic course work, and research.
Admission. Acceptance to doctoral programs is competitive; admissions
decisions are made each year in the spring for entrance the following fall.
Applicants to the program leading to the degree of Doctor of Musical Arts
(D.M.A.) must present necessary credentials for evaluation of previous
training and experience. These include a score on the Graduate Record
Examination, a transcript of all grades submitted through the WVU Office of
Admissions and Records, and evidence that the applicant has a minimum of
28 hours in liberal arts studies. Before admission to the program the Division
may, at its discretion, require the applicant to take entrance tests in various
fields of music, or it may require the applicant to be present for a personal
interview. Under normal circumstances the applicant must have maintained a
minimum average grade of B in courses taken for the master's degree.
However, if sufficient professional experience should warrant, the Division
may waive the requirement of a B average or may grant an applicant
conditional admittance subject to the satisfactory completion of certain
specified courses or the attainment of a specified grade-point average within a
semester's work.
Applicants in performance should submit copies of programs of recent
major recitals. The applicant must be approved for the program by an
audition committee by giving evidence of superior performance, artistic
maturity, and extensive repertoire as specified under Graduate Applied
Music Requirements. The audition committee will include the Chair of the
Division of Music, the Director of Graduate Studies, the graduate adviser in
applied music, and the major professors involved with the area of specializa-
tion.
Applicants in composition must be approved for the program after
evaluation of scores of the applicant's works, accompanied by recordings if
possible. These should show successful handling of various forms and media
and indicate the applicant's capacity to attain professional standing in the
field.
Fields of Specialization. The degree of Doctor of Musical Arts may be
taken in performance and literature (with specialization in piano, voice, or
organ), or in composition.
Curriculum. The exact amount and nature of course work undertaken will
be determined by the adviser with the approval of the student's doctoral
committee in light of previous preparation and field of specialization. A
paradigm of recommended courses and other requirements is available upon
request.
Candidacy. Upon completion of the requirements of the Division of Music
and the general WVU graduate studies requirements, the student will be
recommended for admission to candidacy for the degree. These requirements
are (in order of occurrence):
1. Demonstrate reading proficiency in a foreign language by successful
completion either of an examination administered by the Division of Music or
the equivalent of the fourth semester of recent language study with a
232 MUSIC
minimum grade of B. Ordinarily, the language would be French or German;
exceptions may be allowed depending upon the needs of the student.
2. Pass written qualifying examinations satisfactorily to show:
a. Broad knowledge in Theory and Music History and Literature.
b. Knowledge in depth of the literature of the field of specialization or
of the craft of composition.
3. Pass satisfactorily a comprehensive oral qualifying examination.
4. Present a public recital (performance specialization only).
Graduate students who have met these requirements and who have
maintained an average of B in courses completed shall be admitted to
candidacy. The qualifying examinations, administered after satisfaction of
the language requirement, shall be considered as one integral examination
consisting of written and oral parts. If a student does not pass the examination
the student is allowed to attempt the entire examination a second time. The
second attempt is considered final. However, the applicant's committee may
elect to discourage a second attempt if the first does not indicate probable
success upon repetition.
Residence. Completion of the requirements for this degree normally
requires at least three years of full-time graduate work. A minimum of two
semesters must be spent in residence in full-time graduate study at WVU
beyond the master's degree or its equivalent.
Performance requirements (for performance majors) include private
lessons, master classes in applied repertory, and public performance of at
least two solo recitals and other types of presentations appropriate for the
preparation of an artist-teacher, such as chamber music programs, concerto
performances, major roles in opera or oratorio, or major accompaniments.
Credit for each public performance is established in advance by the student's
committee.
Composition requirements (for composition majors) include private
lessons and the creation of a composition portfolio. Credit for each composition
is established by the student's committee prior to its completion; it will be
subsequently evaluated on a pass-fail basis. Ten credits of the composition
portfolio must be completed before admission to candidacy. Work on the
major project must commence only after admission to candidacy.
Academic course requirements include courses in music history and
theory, and, for performers, an appropriate course in the literature of the
major performance area.
Research requirements are intended to develop theoretical and historical
investigative techniques sufficient to enable the performer to develop valid
individualized interpretations and to assist the composer in developing an
original style. These requirements consist of the course "Introduction to
Music Bibliography" (Music 430), demonstration of reading proficiency in
either French or German, for composers a doctoral seminar, and for all
students a research project culminating in an extended written study related
to the student's area, although not necessarily constituting original research.
This project will be supervised by a Regular Graduate Faculty member who is
a member of the student's doctoral committee in consultation with the entire
doctoral committee.
Final Examination (performance specialization only). The final exami-
nation will consist of a major solo recital (which will be regarded as the
equivalent of the Ph.D. dissertation defense). Immediately following the
public performance the candidate's committee will meet to evaluate the
performance as evidence of mature musicianship and finished technique.
MUSIC 233
Such a final examination recital will not be given in the same semester as the
qualifying examination.
Final Examination [composition specialization only). When all compo-
sitions and the major project are approved and all other requirements have
been fulfilled, the candidate's doctoral committee will administer the final
oral examination. At the option of the committee, a written examination may
also be required. The final examination(s) shall be concerned with the
compositions, the major project, and the candidate's grasp of the field of
specialization and its relation to other fields. The final examination will not
be given in the same semester as the qualifying examination.
Time Limitation. Following admission to candidacy, doctoral students
are allowed five years to complete all remaining degree requirements. An
extension of time may be permitted only upon repetition of the qualifying
examination and completion of any other requirements specified by the
student's doctoral committee.
Music (Music)
200. Directed Music Studies. I, II, S. 1-4 hr. [May be repeated for credit.) PR: Consent.
Studies in applied music, music education, music theory, music history, compo-
sition; includes directed or independent study in special topics.
210. Piano Class Methods and Materials. I. 3 hr. Methods, materials, and pedagogical
techniques, including presentation of keyboard theory as used in functional piano.
Practical organization of piano classes. Laboratory: observation of experienced
class teacher and student teaching. [Not offered in 1988-89.)
212. History of Keyboard Pedagogy and Technic. II. 3 hr. Study of keyboard development
and technique, including pedagogical works of the eighteenth through twentieth
centuries and application to specific teaching problems. Laboratory: student
teaching and observation, emphasizing analysis and solution of technical problems.
[Not offered in 1988-89.)
213. Introduction to Jazz Improvisation. I. 2 hr. PR: Music 63, 64, and Proficiency Level
4. Development of improvisatory skills in the jazz idiom using melodic, harmonic,
and rhythmic motives and patterns, and the application of knowledge of tonal
centers, chord progressions, and functions.
214. Advanced Jazz Improvisation. II. 2 hr. PR: Music 213 or consent. Continuation of
Music 213. Analysis of chord progressions with emphasis on chord substitutions,
turnbacks, and scales. Development of jazz repertoire through performance.
218. Repertoire. I. 0-2 hr.
219. Repertoire. II. 0-2 hr.
221. Music Before 1500. 1, II, or S. 3 hr. PR: Music 33-34 or consent. A study of sacred
and secular monophony, Notre Dame organa, thirteenth-century motet and
conductus, and fourteenth- and fifteenth-century polyphony in France and Italy.
[Not offered in 1988-89.)
222. Music of the Sixteenth and Seventeenth Centuries. I, II, or S. 3 hr. PR: Music 33-34
or consent. A study of styles and forms from the High Renaissance to the Late
Baroque. [Offered Spring 1989.)
223. Music of the Eighteenth Century. I, II, or S. 3 hr. PR: Music 33-34 or consent. A
study of styles and forms of the Late Baroque through the Classic period. [Offered
Summer 1989.)
224. Music of the Nineteenth Century. I, II, or S. 3 hr. PR: Music 33-34 or consent. A
study of styles, forms, and theoretical concepts illustrative of nineteenth-century
music. [Offered Fall 1989.)
234 MUSIC
225. Music of the Twentieth Century. I, II, or S. 3 hr. PR: Music 33-34 or consent. A
study of stylistic trends during the twentieth century. [Offered Summer 1988 and
Spring 1990.)
226. History of Jazz. I. 3 hr. History and repertory of jazz from its Afro-American
origins to c.1975 with attention to its major exponents (including Joplin, Armstrong,
B. Smith, Morton, Ellington, Gillespie, Parker, Davis, Coltrane) and its evolving
style.
230. Music of Africa. S. 3 hr. Traditional music of selected areas of Africa south of the
Sahara with particular reference to East Africa. The diverse musical cultures with
emphasis on historical background, instruments, ensembles, forms, and styles,
and music in its social context.
239. Collegium Musicum. I, II. 1-2 hr. (May be repeated for credit.) PR: Consent. Study
of outstanding musical works not in the standard repertory. Performance of vocal
and instrumental music, investigation of performance practices, preparation of
editions, and direction of rehearsals under supervision.
240. Clinic Chorus, Band, and Orchestra. I, II. 1 hr. Experience in selection, preparation,
and class performance of music appropriate for high school choral and instrumental
groups. [Not offered in 1988-89.)
243. Music Workshops. I, II, S. 1-2 hr. (May be repeated for credit.)
245. Marching Band Techniques. I. 2 hr. PR: One semester college marching band
experience or consent. Study and practical application of techniques of planning
and preparation of school marching band performances. (Not offered in 1988-89.)
248. Music Arranging for Public School Groups. I, II. 2 hr. PR: Music 66. Practical
experience in techniques of making simple, workable arrangements of music for
public school choral and instrumental performance groups.
260. Upper-Division Composition. I, II. 2 hr. (May be repeated for credit.) PR: Two
semesters Music 160, or consent based on scores submitted. Creative writing with
emphasis on practical composition for performance.
263. Counterpoint. I. 2 hr. PR: Music 68 or consent. Sixteenth-century counterpoint.
264. Counterpoint. II. 2 hr. PR: Music 68 or consent. Eighteenth-century counterpoint.
265. Analysis of Musical Form. II. 3 hr. PR: Music 68 or consent. Detailed study of the
structure of music.
267. Electronic Music. I. 2 hr. PR: Music 68 and consent. Technology of producing
electronic music. Methods of producing electronic compositions, relationship
between sound signal and sound perceived, ear training, analysis of examples
from electronic music literature, and composition of electronic music.
268. Electronic Music. II. 2 hr. PR: Music 267. Continuation of Music 267.
273. Arranging for Small Jazz Ensemble. I. 2 hr. PR: Music 171, and Music 173 or
consent. Scoring, voicing, and arranging in various jazz styles, with emphasis on
small ensembles comprising three to nine players.
274. Arranging for Large Jazz Ensemble. II. 2 hr. PR: Music 273 or consent. Continuation
of Music 273, with emphasis on arranging for big band and studio jazz ensemble.
310. Secondary Applied Music. I, II, S. 1 hr. (May be repeated for credit.) Group or
individual instruction in performance on a minor instrument (or voice), with
emphasis on methods and materials for school music teachers.
312. Keyboard Performance and Pedagogy. I, II. 1-3 hr. (May be repeated for credit.)
(Offered in 1-credit modules of which students may take one or more each
semester.) Pedagogy, repertoire, interpretation, and other topics which will
enhance preparation of private piano teachers.
MUSIC 235
335. Survey of Vocal Music. I. 3 hr. PR: 6 hr. upper-division music history. Survey of
masses, oratorios, cantatas and operas from late Renaissance to the twentieth
century. Solo repertoire will not be included. fNot offered in 1988-89.)
336. Survey of Instrumental Music. II. 3 hr. PR: 6 hr. upper-division music history.
Survey of instrumental ensemble music, concertos, symphonies, and other
orchestral music from late Renaissance to the twentieth century. Solo repertoire
will not be included. {Not offered in 1988-89.)
341. Music in the Elementary School. II. 3 hr. PR: Music 30, 41, 42, or equiv. [Not open to
music majors.) Development of skills, procedures, techniques, and materials used
by the general classroom teacher of music in grades K-8. (Not offered in 1988-89.)
342. Teaching of Music Appreciation. I. 3 hr. PR: Music 30, 41, 42, or equiv. (Not open to
music majors, j Review of information, materials, sources, and techniques involved
in teaching appreciation of music in public schools. (Not offered in 1988-89.)
343. Contemporary Techniques in Classroom Music. 3 hr. PR: Music 152 or consent.
Principles and practice of contemporary techniques in elementary and junior high
school classroom music, including those of Orff and Kodaly. (Offered Summer
1989.)
344. Appalachian Music for the Classroom. I. 3 hr. Lecture, demonstration, and
practical experience in performance of Appalachian vocal and instrumental music
and in use of this music in public school classrooms. May involve field trips and
construction of inexpensive instruments. [Offered Spring 1989.)
346. Musicmaking in Middleschool/Junior High. II. 3 hr. PR: Music 151, 152, equiv., or
consent. Identification and sequencing of appropriate concepts and skills for
general music class students. Selection and use of materials including popular
music. Emphasis on student music-making activities. Evaluation procedures
included. [Offered Fall 1988-89 and Spring 1989-90.)
347. Music in Early Childhood. S. 3 hr. PR: Music 151, 152, or equiv., or concent.
Musical experiences for children three through ten years. Emphasis on intellectual,
physical and social/emotional needs and characteristics of children. Materials and
activities for developing music concepts, skills, and positive response. (Offered
Summer 1990.)
392. Guided Studies in Music. I, II, S. 1-3 hr. PR: Graduate standing and consent.
Intensive individualized reading reported in group discussions. Course may be
repeated as many times as necessary, in as many areas as needed; different
sections (i.e. areas) may be pursued simultaneously.
398. Master's Recital. I, II, S. 1-4 hr. PR: Music 299 (Senior Recital) or consent. Master's
Applied students shall be permitted to give a recital only after they pass a
qualifying audition before a designated faculty committee in a semester previous
to that in which the recital is to be given.
400. Applied Music. I, II. 1-4 hr. (Open to qualified students in any field in Applied
Music. May be repeated.) Normally offered for 2 credits (one 30-minute lesson per
week) or 4 credits (one 60-minute) lesson per week. A student must demonstrate
ability of grade-level 4 on an instrument to receive credit in Music 400 on that
instrument.
409. Master Class in Applied Repertoire. I, II. 2 hr. (May be repeated for credit.) PR:
Consent. Designed to give coverage through performance of the literature of a
specific D.M.A. Applied Music field.
410. Conducting. S. 3 hr. PR: Music 53 or equiv. Instrumental and choral conducting.
Major works are prepared and conducted through the use of recordings and music
organizations.
236 MUSIC
419. Opera Theatre. I, II. 0-4 hr. PR: Music 19 or consent. Continuation of Music 19.
Performance of major roles and advanced production techniques. Qualified
students will undertake production-direction projects under supervision.
423. Keyboard Literature. S. 3 hr.PR: Music 218, 219. Intensive study of the literature
for keyboard instruments and the history of the literature. (Not offered in
1988-89.)
424. Song Literature. S. 1-3 hr. PR: Music 218, 219. Intensive study of the Art Song and
the Lied and the history of their development. fNot offered in 1988-89.)
428. Aesthetics of Music. II. 2 hr. PR: Music 33, 34 or consent. Examination of the main
classical and contemporary aesthetic theories and their applications to music.
(Not offered in 1988-89.)
429. Survey of Sacred Music. S. 4 hr. PR: Music 33, 34 orequiv. Study of music suitable
to the liturgical year, including the historical background of the Jewish, Catholic,
and Protestant liturgies. (Not offered in 1988-89.)
430. Introduction to Musical Bibliography. I. 3 hr. PR: Music 33 and 34 or equiv. Survey
of musical bibliography with appropriate research assignments.
431. Research Problems for Performers. II. 2 hr. PR: Music 430. Discussion of problems
of music literature, performance practice, history, and instruments; preparation of
a research paper under individual supervision. (Not offered in 1988-89.)
438. History of Notation. II. 3 hr. PR: Graduate standing. Detailed study in transcribing
the musical manuscripts of the Middle Ages. (Not offered in 1988-89.)
439. History of Notation. II. 3 hr. PR: Graduate standing. Continuation of Music 438
covering the Renaissance period. (Not offered in 1988-89.)
440. Choral Techniques. II. 2 hr. PR: Music 151, 152 or equiv. Advanced techniques and
procedures involved in development of choral ensembles. (Offered Summer 1989.)
442. Instrumental Techniques. I. 2 hr. PR: Music 151, 152, or equiv. Advanced
techniques and procedures involved in individual performance and instruction
through lecture-demonstrations by applied music faculty. (Offered Fall 1989-90.)
444. Music Education. II. 3 hr. PR: Music 151, 152 or equiv. Survey and critical study of
the total music education program. (Offered Spring 1988-89.)
445. Supervision of Music. II. 2 hr. PR: Music 151 or 152, or equiv. Concepts,
responsibilities, duties and techniques that the supervisor needs to effectively
exercise leadership in developing, coordinating, and refining the complete Music
Education program in public schools from kindergarten through twelfth grade.
(Not offered in 1988-89.)
446. Introduction to Research in Music Education. I. 3 hr. PR: Music 151, 152, or equiv.
Methods and measures necessary for conduct and understanding of research in
music education. (Offered Fall 1988-89.)
448. Psychology of Music Learning. 3 hr. Application of learning theory to music
learning; nature of musical talent; music talent testing. (Offered Fall 1988-89.)
449. Psychology of Music. II. 3 hr. Introductory study of musical acoustics and
psychology of perception of music. (Offered Spring 1989-90.)
460. Composition. I, II. 3 hr. (May be repeated for credit.) PR: Consent. Primarily for
candidates for graduate degrees in theory or composition.
467. Analytical Techniques. I, II, or S. 3 hr. Analytical techniques and their application
to scholarship and performance, with emphasis on pre-twentieth century styles.
(Offered Spring 1989-90, Summer 1989.)
MUSIC 237
468. Compositional Techniques in Contemporary Music. I, II, or S. 3 hr. Analysis of
twentieth-century music with emphasis upon music composed since 1950.
[Offered in Fall 1989-90 and Summer 1990.)
470. Transcription and Arranging. I, II. 2 hr. (May be repeated once for credit.) PR:
Music 172 or equiv. Major projects in scoring for orchestra, band, or wind
ensemble.
475. Pedagogy of Theory. I, II, or S. 3 hr. PR: Music 68 or consent. Consideration of
various approaches to the teaching of theory. (Offered Spring 1988-89.)
483. Theory Topics. I, II, or S. 3 hr. (May be repeated for max. 8 hr. credit.) Various
types of analytical and theoretical problems and approaches to their solutions.
(Offered Fall 1989-90.)
491. Special Topics. I, II. 1-3 hr.
492. Advanced Studies in Music. I, II. 1-8 hr. PR: Consent, which in some cases may be
contingent upon doctoral foreign language examination or a course in statistics.
Intensive individualized reading reported in group discussions. Course may be
repeated as many times as necessary, in as many areas as needed; several different
sections (i.e., areas) may be pursued simultaneously.
494. Doctoral Seminar. I, II. 2 hr. (May be repeated for max. 8 hr. credit.) PR: Consent.
Intensive individual investigation and preparation of research papers. Presented
by the combined doctoral staff in music.
496. Lecture Recital I, II. 2 hr. PR: Music 430.
497. Research. I, II. 1-15 hr. PR: Music 430 or consent.
498. Doctoral Recital. I, II, S. 1-4 hr. PR: Music 398 (Master's Recital) or consent.
Master's Applied students shall be permitted to give a recital only after they pass a
qualifying audition before a committee of at least three specialists in the area in a
semester previous to that in which the recital is to be given. Acceptance of the
recital will be at the discretion of the student's doctoral committee.
NURSING
Lorita D. Jenab, Dean of School of Nursing
Luz S. Porter, Chairperson of the Graduate Program
1144 Basic Sciences Building
Degree Offered: M.S.N.
Graduate Faculty: Members M. Counts, L. S. Porter, and M. J. Smith. Associate
Members L. D. Jenab, L. Ostrow, K. L. Riffle, M. N. Smith, J. Stemple, and J. Wang.
Master of Science in Nursing
The School of Nursing offers a program of study leading to the Master of
Science in Nursing (M.S.N.) degree to prepare the professional nurse for the
role of nurse clinician in the advanced practice of nursing in primary health
care. The program, which is administered by the Graduate Academic Unit, is
offered at the University main campus in Morgantown and at selected
extension sites.
Designed in an integrative fashion, this non-traditional graduate program
offers a curriculum model which allows students to enroll on a part-time or
full-time basis. Throughout the curriculum, students are guided in the
processes of self-development aimed at pursuing excellence in scholarly and
professional endeavors. The program allows flexibility within the basic
curricular structure through the individualization of learning experiences,
electives, thesis, and the opportunity to investigate an area of interest in
advanced study.
238 NURSING
The pattern of duration for the individual student study plan is determined
in consultation with a faculty adviser and is based upon the student's
background and goals. The program can be completed in four semesters of
full-time study at the Morgantown campus, averaging a load of 9-12 credit
hours per semester.
The program is accredited by the National League for Nursing.
Admission Requirements
The applicant must:
1. Meet the admission requirements of graduate education at West
Virginia University.
2. Have completed a baccalaureate program in nursing which is accredited
by the National League for Nursing (NLN). Applicants with a baccalaureate
degree from nursing programs without NLN accreditation are required to take
the NLN Comprehensive Achievement Test for Baccalaureate Nursing Stu-
dents, Form 3113, and are considered on an individual basis.
3. Have completed a course in introductory statistics (3 credit hours).
4. Provide the following:
a. Statement of philosophy of nursing and professional goals.
b. Letter of recommendation from each of the following: head of
undergraduate nursing program, employer, and a colleague.
c. Evidence of a current professional nursing license in at least one
state.
5. Have an interview with a Graduate Academic Unit faculty member.
Five parameters are used for review of applicants: (1) academic achieve-
ment; (2) residency/employment; (3) professional experience; (4) careergoals;
and (5) recommendations. WVU School of Nursing is an equal opportunity/af-
firmative action institution.
Once admitted, the student is assigned to a faculty adviser who guides the
student in curricular and academic matters. Enrollment in nursing courses is
based upon readiness, availability of space and other essential resources.
The application process must be completed by January 1 for summer
(May) enrollment; March 1 and August 1 for fall and spring enrollment,
respectively. Class sizes are limited, based on available faculty resources and
space.
Application Process
Applicants need to complete the following steps in order to be considered
for admission:
1. Complete two application forms as indicated and return to the
appropriate offices to avoid unnecessary delay in the review process.
a. Application for Admission to Graduate Studies — To be returned
with a $20.00 nonrefundable service fee to: Office of Admissions
and Records, West Virginia University, P.O. Box 6009, Morgantown,
WV 26506-6009.
b. Application for Admission to the Master of Science in Nursing
Program— To be returned to: Chairperson, Graduate Academic
Unit, WVU School of Nursing, Morgantown, WV 26506.
2. Request an official transcript of records from each college or university
attended. Transcripts and records should be sent directly to the WVU Office
of Admissions and Records.
NURSING 239
3. Send three recommendation letters directly to the Chairperson of the
School of Nursing Graduate Academic Unit.
4. Participate in an interview with a faculty member teaching in the
graduate program. The interview is for the purpose of verifying application
materials, reviewing admission criteria, identifying deficiencies and trans-
ferable credits and, where possible, projecting a tentative plan of study. It is
expected that the applicant will take an active role in the interview process to
be informed about the basis for the admission criteria.
Degree Requirements
1. Completion of 42 semester credit hours, including 30 hours (master's
paper option) to 33 hours (thesis option) in nursing and 9 hours of non-nursing
electives. The required non-nursing electives are restricted to 3 hours in
computer utilization and 6 hours of humanities and/or social sciences.
Students opting for a master's paper must complete an additional 3 hours of
electives by advisement.
2. Completion of a thesis (6 hours) or a master's paper (3 hours).
3. Achievement of an overall academic average of at least B in all work
attempted in the master's program. The grade C in two nursing courses will
require a faculty review of the student's program progression.
4. Removal of all conditions, deficiencies, and incomplete grades. Credit
hours for courses in which the grade is lower than C will not count toward
satisfying graduate degree requirements.
Students are expected to register for courses with letter grades (A, B, C).
Electives may be opted for satisfactory (S) or unsatisfactory (U) grades —
subject to the approval of the adviser.
M.S.N. Curriculum
Nursing Theory, Practice, and Research (30-33 hours) Hr.
Nsg. 300— Advanced Nursing: Primary Health Care 1 3
Nsg. 301 — Advanced Nursing: Primary Health Care 2 3
Nsg. 302— Advanced Nursing: Primary Health Care 3 3
Nsg. 310 — Advanced Nursing Practice 1 3
Nsg. 311— Advanced Nursing Practice 2 3
Nsg. 312— Advanced Nursing Practice 3 3
Nsg. 370— Theories in Nursing 3
Nsg. 373— Research Process and Methods in Nursing 3
Nsg. 400 — Advanced Nursing Practice 4 3
Nsg. 497 — Research (master's paper/thesis)* 3-6
30-33
*Students electing the master's paper option are required only 3 hours of Nursing 497.
Electives [9-12 hours)
Master's paper option:
Cognates (Non-Nursing) 9
Electives by Advisement 3
Thesis option:
Cognates (Non-Nursing) 9
TOTAL 42-45
240 NURSING
Sample Progression Plan [Full-time Study)
Semester I
Hr.
Semester II
Hr.
Semester III
Hr.
Semester IV
Hr.
Nsg. 300
Nsg. 310
Nsg. 370
3
3
3
Nsg. 301
Nsg. 311
Nsg. 373
Elective
3
3
3
3
Nsg. 302
Nsg. 312
Nsg. 497
Elective
3
3
3
3
Nsg. 400
Nsg. 497
Elective
3
3
3
9 12 12 9
Nursing (Nsg.)
300. Advanced Nursing: Primary Health Care 1. I, II, S. 3 hr. PR or Cone: Nsg. 370.
Analysis and synthesis of concepts in nursing and related sciences relevant to the
development of a conceptual framework for nursing in primary health care.
(Emphasis on individual system.)
301. Advanced Nursing: Primary Health Care 2. I, II, S. 3 hr. PR: Nsg. 310; PR or Cone:
Nsg. 373. Development of a conceptual model for nursing with emphasis on
developing strategies to promote client health. (Emphasis on family system.]
302. Advanced Nursing: Primary Health Care 3. I, II, S. 3 hr. PR: Nsg. 311. Further
development and or refinement of a conceptual model for nursing with specific
emphasis on planned change strategies and how these strategies impact health.
(Emphasis on community system.)
310. Advanced Nursing Practice 1. 1. 3 hr. Cone: Nsg. 300. Advanced nursing practice
focusing on applicability of concepts in students' developing conceptual frame-
work. (Emphasis on individual system.)
311. Advanced Nursing Practice 2. II. 3 hr. Cone: Nsg. 301. Advanced nursing practice
focusing on development and application of nursing strategies within the context
of students' conceptual model. (Emphasis on family system.)
312. Advanced Nursing Practice 3. I, S. 3 hr. Cone: Nsg. 302. Advanced nursing
practice focusing on application and testing of students' conceptual model,
identification of a health problem area within the practice setting, and preparation
of a planned change strategy. (Emphasis on community system.)
370. Theories in Nursing. I, S. 3 hr. PR: Graduate standing; consent. Introduction to the
structure and function of extant theories in nursing as a basis for developing a
conceptual framework for nursing.
373. Research Process and Methods in Nursing. II. 3 hr. PR: Nsg. 310, 370. Study of the
research process and methods for incorporation into students' conceptual model,
practice and research in nursing.
400. Advanced Nursing Practice 4. I, II. 3 hr. PR: Nsg. 312. Collaborative practice
focusing on the evaluation and modification of students' conceptual model for
nursing and implementation of a planned change strategy. (Emphasis on role
synthesis.)
491. Advanced Study. I, II. 1-3 hr. PR: Graduate standing; consent. In-depth study of
topics related to current issues in primary health care. Study may be independent
or through specially scheduled seminars.
497. A. Research. 3 hr. PR: Nsg. 373; PR or Cone: Nsg. 312; consent. Refinement and
implementation of research proposal to meet requirements for the master's thesis,
or completion of the master's paper.
497. B. Research. 1-3 hr. PR: Nsg. 497. Completion of master's thesis.
NURSING 241
OCCUPATIONAL HEALTH
AND SAFETY ENGINEERING
Terrence J. Stobbe, Coordinator of the Program
529 Engineering Sciences Building
Degree Offered: M.S.
Graduate Faculty: Members Myers, Plummer and Stobbe.
Master of Science (M.S.)
This program provides master-level students the opportunity to study
industrial hygiene and systems safety. This degree is designed for students
who are interested in pursuing a career in occupational safety and health.
Students are admitted as regular graduate students for work leading to
the Master of Science (M.S.) degree, provided they hold a baccalaureate
degree from an approved institution of higher education in the areas of
biology, chemistry, engineering, mathematics, or physics, have a minimum
2.5 undergraduate grade-point average, and satisfy prerequisites in the
courses for which they register. In order to receive the degree, the student
must have a minimum 3.0 grade-point average in all course work leading to
the degree and satisfy all general WVU graduate requirements.
The following courses are prerequisite or corequisite, depending on the
applicant's academic and professional experience: statistics (Stat. 311, I.E.
113 or equivalent); chemistry (Chem. 15 and 16 or equivalent); computer
programming (C.S. 5 or equivalent); physics (Phys. 11 and 12 or equivalent);
mathematics (Math. 15 and 16 or equivalent). Pre- and co-requisite coursework
decisions are made on a case-by-case basis by the program admissions
committee; the student is informed about his/her requirements at the time of
acceptance into the program.
Admission to candidacy for the M.S. degree is required before obtaining
the degree. A graduate student may apply for admission to candidacy by
formal application after completing a minimum of 12 hours of graduate
courses within the program with a grade-point average of at least 3.0 based on
all graduate courses taken in residence, for which the student has received a
grade at the time of application. Admission must be gained before completion
of 18 hours.
A minimum of 36 hours is required for the Master of Science degree.
A writing requirement is an integral part of the master's program. This
requirement can be satisfied with either a 3 credit-hour problem report, which
is based on some research, or a 6 credit-hour thesis.
Course credit for all of the above is applicable against the 36-hour
requirement.
Program of Study
FALL
I.E. 260— Human Factors Engineering*
I.E. 261— Systems Safety Engineering*
I.E. 361 — Industrial Hygiene Engineering*
I.E. 480— Seminar— Fire Protection Engineering*
C.E. 245— Properties of Air Pollutants**
Seminar (required)
*Required courses for both industrial hygiene and systems safety students.
**Required course for industrial hygiene students only.
242 OCCUPATIONAL HEALTH AND SAFETY ENGINEERING
SPRING
OHSE 321— Epidemiology: Principles and Practices*
OHSE 325— Industrial Hygiene Sampling and Analysis*
I.E. 362— Systems Safety Engineering 2***
Pcol. 362— Occupational Toxicology*
I.E. 364— Industrial Ergonomics*
Seminar (required)
SUMMER
OHSE 328— Noise and Ventilation Control Technology*
OHSE 326— Safety and Health Measurement and Instrumentation*
*Required courses for both industrial hygiene and systems safety students.
**Required course for industrial hygiene students only.
***Required course for systems safety.
Eiectives
Industrial hygiene and systems safety have a minimum of 4 elective hours each.
Occupational Health and Safety Engineering
Ch.E. 290, 390, 391.
Chem. 210.
C.E. 251, 349, 350, 359, several additional 400-level courses qualify if students possess
prerequisites.
E.M. 201, 213, 216, 247.
I.E. 214, 249, 314, 325, 341, 360, 368.
Manag. 216.
M.A.E. 242, 282, 330.
Phys. 201.
Psych. 225, 232, 301.
Saf. S. 301, 334, 418.
Stat. 312.
Occupational Health and Safety Engineering (OHSE)
320. Foundations of Environmental Health Practice. I, II, S. 4 hr. PR: Consent. Designed
to enable the environmentalist to recognize and identify environmental stresses
and the effect of these stresses on man. Topics include occupational health,
physical stress, safety, and basic and broad principles of toxicology.
321. Epidemiology: Principles and Practices. I, II, S. 2 hr. PR: Stat. 311 or equiv.
Principles and methods of epidemiology with emphasis on descriptive and
analytical epidemiological methods.
325. Industrial Hygiene Sampling and Analysis. II. 3 hr. PR: I.E. 361 and consent.
Calibration and use of sampling and analytical equipment used by industrial
hygienists to evaluate the work environment. Advantages and disadvantages of
different equipment under various conditions. Biological monitoring as an
evaluation tool.
326. Safety and Health Measurement and Instrumentation. S. 3 hr. PR: Consent.
Practical experience in setting up industrial hygiene field studies, air sampling,
and analysis. Practical experience with safety equipment and instrumentation
used in the field and in research. Field trips and case studies exposing students to a
variety of industrial processes.
328. Noise and Ventilation Control Technology. S. 3 hr. PR: I.E. 361 or consent. The
course will demonstrate techniques for the recognition, evaluation, and control of
noise and ventilation problems. Students will use monitoring equipment to
evaluate situations and perform several design projects.
OCCUPATIONAL HEALTH AND SAFETY ENGINEERING 243
380. Internship. I, II, S. 3-6 hr. (May be repeated.) PR: Consent of committee
chairperson and department chairperson. Professional internship providing on-
the-job training under supervision of a previously approved environmentalist in
settings appropriate to professional objectives.
ORTHODONTICS
Dennis O. Bernard, Chairperson of the Department
1077 Basic Sciences Building
Degree Offered: M.S.
Graduate Faculty: Members Bernard, McCutcheon, and Overman.
Master of Science
The School of Dentistry and its Department of Orthodontics offer a
program of advanced study and clinical training leading to the degree of
Master of Science (M.S.). The program requires a minimum of 24 months (two
academic years and two summers) of full-time residency in the School of
Dentistry, and is designed to qualify dentists for careers in orthodontic
clinical practice, teaching, and research.
Inquiries concerning this program should be directed to the Office of the
Associate Dean for Postdoctoral Programs. Those applicants approved for
admission to the program will be notified soon after January 15.
Requirements for Admission to the Orthodontic Program
1. Graduation from an accredited dental school.
2. Evidence of scholastic and clinical achievement that would indicate
the applicant's ability to progress in a program of this nature. Generally, a
minimum grade-point average of 2.75 is required for admission.
3. Each applicant must file with the department all information requested
in the department application form.
Requirements for Master of Science Degree
1. Fulfillment of WVU general requirements for graduate study.
2. Twenty-four months (two academic years and two summers) of
consecutive residency at the School of Dentistry.
3. An approved master's thesis based on original research completed
during the period of residency in an area related to orthodontics.
4. Must satisfactorily pass a final oral examination.
5. Must complete a minimum of 50 credit hours. These include 35 hours of
orthodontic courses, a minimum of 9 hours of selected basic sciences subjects,
a minimum of 6 hours of elective allied subjects, and a thesis (6 hours).
6. Must have demonstrated satisfactory clinical competence in the
student's field.
7. Must have maintained a grade level commensurate with graduate
education.
Orthodontics (Dent.)
416. Biomechanics. I, II, S. 2 hr. PR: Consent. Design and function of the teeth and their
surrounding structures, and response of these tissues to orthodontic procedures.
417. Orthodontic Technique. I, II, S. 2 hr. PR: Consent. Laboratory course in techniques
related to fabrication and manipulation of orthodontic appliances.
418. Orthodontic Materials. I, II, S. 1 hr. PR: Consent. Physical properties of materials
used in orthodontic appliances.
244 ORTHODONTICS
419. Orthodontic Diagnosis. I, II, S. 1-3 hr. PR: Consent. Seminar-type class on
technique of patient examination, acquiring diagnostic records, and analyzing and
correlating this information to the treatment of clinical problems.
420. Cephalometrics. S. 1-3 hr. PR: Consent. Use of radiographic cephalometry in
studying growth of the human face, analysis of dentofacial malformations, and
evaluation of orthodontic treatment.
421. Orthodontic Mechanics. I, II, S. 1-4 hr. PR: Dent. 416, 417. Seminar and laboratory
course on basic orthodontic mechanical properties.
422. Advanced Orthodontic Mechanics. I, II, S. 1 hr. PR: Dent. 421. Continuation of
Dent. 421 involving more difficult type cases and introducing more sophisticated
appliance therapy.
423. Growth and Development. II. 1-5 hr. PR: Consent. Seminar-type course on normal
and abnormal growth of the human head and its application to orthodontics.
425. Orthodontic Seminar. I, II, S. 1-8 hr. PR: Consent. Discussions involving all
branches of dental science, with special emphasis on the orthodontic interest.
Assigned topics and articles in the literature discussed.
426. Orthodontic Clinic. I, II, S. 1-12 hr. PR: Dent. 416, 417. Clinical treatment of
selected patients.
497. Research. I, II, S. 1-15 hr.
Pathology (Path.)
397. Pediatric Oral Pathology. I. 2 hr. PR: Consent. Lecture and seminar course on
inherited diseases and other pathologic situations of oral cavity and face specific
for pediatric age group.
Statistics (Stat.)
311. Statistical Methods 1. I, II. 3 hr. PR: Math 3. Statistical models, distributions,
probability, random variables, tests of hypotheses, confidence intervals, regres-
sion, correlation, transformations, F and Chi-square distributions, analysis of
variance and multiple comparisons. (Equiv. to Ed. P. 311 and Psych. 311.)
PETROLEUM ENGINEERING
Samuel Ameri, Chairperson of the Department
111 White Hall
Degree Offered: M.S.Pet.E.
Graduate Faculty: Members Ameri, Aminian, Puon, Wasson, and Yu.
Master of Science in Petroleum Engineering (M.S.Pet.E.)
A student desiring to take courses for graduate credit at the master's level
in the College of Mineral and Energy Resources must first apply for admission
and state the major field.
An applicant with a baccalaureate degree, or its equivalent in petroleum
or natural gas engineering, will be admitted on the same basis as graduates of
WVU. Lacking these qualifications, the applicant must first fulfill the College
of Mineral and Energy Resources requirements of the Department of Petroleum
and Natural Gas Engineering.
Academic Standards. Each student will, with the approval of the
student's graduate committee— appointed with the consent of the student
within the first semester of registration— follow a planned program. The
PETROLEUM ENGINEERING 245
program contains a minimum of 24 hours of course work and 6 hours of
independent and original study in the petroleum and natural gas engineering
field leading to a master's thesis or 30 hours of course work and 3 hours of
independent study leading to a comprehensive problem report. At least 60
percent of the course credits must be from 300-level or 400-level courses while
the remainder can be made up of 200-level courses.
Approval for candidacy for a graduate degree by faculty action is
required to establish eligibility for a degree. A graduate student may request
approval by formal application after completing a minimum of 12 semester
hours of graduate courses with a grade-point average of at least 3.0 (B), based
on all graduate courses in residence for which final grades have been
recorded.
No credits are acceptable toward an advanced degree which are reported
with a grade lower than C. To qualify for an advanced degree, a graduate
student must have a grade-point average of at least 3.0 based on all courses
completed in residence for graduate credit. Each candidate for a degree must
select a major subject and submit a thesis showing independent, original
study in petroleum engineering.
Each degree candidate is required to take Pet.E. 496.
Petroleum Engineering (Pet.E.)
207. Natural Gas Engineering. 1. 4 hr. PR: Pet.E. 233, M.A.E. 101, 114, Math. 18. Natural
gas properties, compression, transmission, processing, and application of reservoir
engineering principles to predict the performance and design of gas, gas-
condensate, and storage reservoirs. Includes a laboratory devoted to gas mea-
surements. 3 hr. lee; 3 hr. lab.
208. Natural Gas Production and Storage. II. 3 hr. PR: Pet.E. 207, 234 or consent.
Development of gas and gas-condensate reservoirs; design and development of gas
storage fields in depleted gas, gas-condensate, oil reservoirs and aquifers; design
of natural gas production and processing equipment.
210. Drilling Engineering. II. 4 hr. PR or Cone: Geol. 1, M.A.E. 114. Rock properties,
functions and design considerations of rotating system, hoisting system, and
circulation system; drilling fluids calculations and selections; hydraulic programs;
drilling optimization; casing and casing string design; cementing programs; and
pressure control.
211. Production Engineering. I. 3 hr. PR: Pet.E. 210. Well completion, performance of
productive formation, drill stem tests, completion of wells, flowing wells, gas lift
methods and equipment, pumping installation design, well stimulation, emulsion,
treating, gathering and storage of oil and gas, field automation. 3 hr lee.
212. Drilling Fluids Laboratory. I, II. 1 hr. PR or Cone: Pet.E. 210, Chem. 141, M.A.E.
114. Topics include clay hydration, viscosity of water-based fluids, mud weight
control, filtration studies, thinning agents, chemical contaminants, lime muds,
polymer muds, rheological models, and liquid and solid determination.
215. Transport Phenomena in Petroleum Engineering. II. 3 hr. PR: M.A.E. 41. Intro-
duction to fluid flow in pipes, two-phase flow, rotary drilling hydraulics, primary
cementing jobs, flow calculations, flow measuring devices, fluid machinery,
dimensional analysis, and heat transfer.
216. Petroleum Engineering Design. I, II. 3 hr. PR: Pet.E. 234 or consent. Comprehensive
problems in design involving systems in oil and gas production, field processing,
transportation, and storage. Three 3-hr. labs.
246 PETROLEUM ENGINEERING
224. Petroleum Engineering Problems. I, II, S. 3 hr. PR: Senior standing. Investigation
and detailed report on a special problem in petroleum engineering. Supervised by a
member of the Petroleum Engineering faculty. A final oral examination is
required.
233. Elements of Petroleum Reservoir Engineering. II. 3 hr. PR: Pet.E. 236 or consent.
Basic properties of petroleum reservoir rocks. Fluid flow through porous materials.
Evaluation of oil and gas reserves. 3 hr. lee.
234. Applied Petroleum Reservoir Engineering. I. 3 hr. PR: Pet.E. 233 or consent.
Application of reservoir engineering data to calculation of recovery potentials and
to analysis, simulation, and prediction of reservoir performance under a variety of
production methods to effect maximum conservation. 3 hr. lee.
235. Formation Evaluation. I, II. 3 hr. PR: Pet.E. 210 or consent. Various well logging
methods and related calculations with exercises in interpretation of data from
actual well logs. 3 hr. lee.
236. Petroleum Properties and Phase Behavior. I, II. 3 hr. PR or Cone: Chem. 141.
Theoretical and applied phase behavior of hydrocarbon systems and hydrocarbon
fluid properties. Applications to petroleum reservoir and production engineering
design. 2 hr. lee, 3 hr. lab.
241. Oil and Gas Property Evaluation. I. 3 hr. PR: Pet.E. 235; Coreq. Pet.E. 211 and 234,
or consent. Reserve estimation, decline analysis, petroleum properties evaluation
including interest calculations, costs estimation, and taxes evaluation. Overview
investment decision analysis and computer applications in properties evaluation.
244. Petroleum Reservoir Engineering Laboratory. I, II. 1 hr. PR or Cone: Pet.E. 233.
Laboratory evaluation of basic and special petroleum reservoir rock properties. 3
hr. lab.
262. Introduction to Reservoir Simulation. I. 3 hr. PR: M. 281, Pet.E. 234 or consent.
Partial differential equations for fluid flow in porous media and the use of finite-
difference equations in solving reservoir flow problems for various boundary
conditions. Study of individual well pressures and fundamentals of history
matching.
299. Well Stimulation Design. II. 3 hr. PR: M.A.E. 43, Pet.E. 210, 233, 235. (Field trips
required.) Fundamentals of well stimulation, treatment design and their appli-
cations to low permeability formations.
302. Fluid Flow in Porous Media. I. 3 hr. PR: Pet.E. 234, Math. 18 or consent. Theoretical
and practical aspects of the physical principles of hydrodynamics in porous
media. 3 hr. lee.
340. Secondary Recovery of Oil by Water Flooding. I. 3 hr. PR: Pet.E. 233. Theory of
immiscible fluid displacement mechanism, evaluation and economics of water
flood projects, and oil field flooding techniques. 3 hr. lee.
343. Advanced Secondary Recovery. II. 3 hr. PR: Pet.E. 340. Secondary recovery of oil
by gas flooding, miscible fluid injection, in situ combustion, and heat injection. 3
hr. lee.
362. Reservoir Simulation and Modeling. II. 3 hr. PR: Pet.E. 262 or consent. Application
of finite-difference equations to multi-phase fluid flow in porous media in two or
three dimensions with gravity and capillary pressure effects. Simulation of water-
flood performance and enhanced recovery techniques.
384. Pressure Transient Analysis. II. 3 hr. PR: Pet.E. 234 or consent. Methods of
analysis of pressure transient data obtained from well testing for the purpose of
determining in-situ reservoir conditions including porosity, lateral extent, average
reservoir pressure, and formation permeability.
PETROLEUM ENGINEERING 247
394. Special Topics. I, II, S. 1-6 hr. PR: Consent. Selected fields of study in petroleum
and natural gas engineering.
397. Master's Degree Research or Thesis. I, II, S. 1-15 hr. PR: Consent. Research
activities leading to a thesis, problem report, research paper, or equivalent
scholarly project.
496. Graduate Seminar. I. 1 hr. PR: Consent. Individual study and oral presentation of
selected topics in petroleum engineering. Current petroleum literature and
research are discussed.
497. Research. I, II, S. 1-15 hr.
General Minerals Program (M.)
281. Applied Mineral Computer Methods. I, II. 3 hr. PR: M. 2; Math. 16. Problem solving
in mineral processing, mineral resources, mining, and petroleum and natural gas
engineering. Emphasis on applications using various computing technologies.
PHARMACEUTICAL SCIENCES
John W. Mauger, Coordinator of Graduate Pharmaceutical Sciences Studies
1121 Basic Sciences Building
Degrees Offered: M.S., Ph.D.
Graduate Faculty: Members Brushwood, Fifer, Gwilt, Howard, Jacknowitz, Kirsch,
Lim, Lively, Ma, Malanga, Mauger, Nematollahi, O'Donnell, Riley, Rosenbluth, Shah,
Stout, and Waters. Associate Members Abate, Brister, Khoury, O'Connell, and Ponte.
The School of Pharmacy offers graduate programs in the pharmaceutical
sciences aimed at educating competent researchers and teachers. Programs
for the degrees of Master of Science (M.S.) and Doctor of Philosophy (Ph.D.)
provide flexible, research-oriented curricula designed to develop the interests,
capabilities, and potential of the individual student.
Applicants for admission must satisfy the general requirements for
admission as graduate students. The applicant must possess a baccalaureate
degree with a background in a suitable area of study, an overall grade-point
average of at least 2.75, and the aptitude and interest for graduate work in the
pharmaceutical sciences in order to be admitted with regular student status.
Applicants not meeting criteria for admission with regular student status will
be considered for admission under alternate admission classifications, as
explained in Part 4 of this catalog. In addition, graduate record examination
scores in the verbal, quantitative, and analytical portions of the examinations
are required from all students, and TOEFL, or similar scores, are required of
foreign students. While the Graduate Record Examination (GRE) scores are
preferred for applicants in the area of behavioral and administrative pharmacy,
test scores on the Graduate Management Admissions Test (GMAT) are
acceptable.
Academic Standards
No credits are acceptable toward a graduate degree with a grade lower
than a C.
The graduate student must have a cumulative grade-point average of at
least 3.0 in all graduate courses to qualify for the degrees.
Master of Science (M.S.)
The School of Pharmacy offers programs of graduate study leading to the
degree of Master of Science (M.S.) in the pharmaceutical sciences. Students
248 PHARMACEUTICAL SCIENCES
may specialize in pharmacy administration, pharmacology and toxicology,
pharmacognosy, pharmaceutical chemistry, industrial pharmacy, medicinal
chemistry, pharmaceutics, biopharmaceutics, and pharmacokinetics.
Requirements for M.S. Degree
To be eligible for the M.S. degree, the student must complete a minimum
of 30 hours of graduate credit, of which no more than six hours may be for
research and thesis.
Upon completion of the course work and research requirements, and after
submission of the thesis, an oral examination will be administered by the
appointed examination committee.
Doctor of Philosophy (Ph.D.)
The School of Pharmacy offers programs of study leading to the Doctor of
Philosophy (Ph.D.) degree in the pharmaceutical sciences. Specialty areas of
study include medicinal chemistry, pharmaceutics/biopharmaceutics/phar-
macokinetics, and behavioral and administrative pharmacy.
Requirements for Ph.D. Degree
The student's first semester is usually occupied with course work while
he or she is under the guidance of an assigned interim committee. During this
time, each student will confer with several faculty members concerning the
research project, and a major professor should be chosen by the end of the first
semester of graduate study. The student's research committee should be
chosen by the end of the first year of study (18-20 hours of graduate course
work). The interest to pursue the M.S. en route to the Ph.D. degree should also
be stated at this time. It is necessary for all students to complete all
requirements for the M.S. degree in order to qualify for admission into the
Ph.D. program, although the student, with committee advice, may elect to
complete the requirements for this degree in progress toward the Ph.D.
Students bypassing the M.S. must meet all requirements for the M.S., except
for preparing and defending a thesis.
A formal plan of study and research plan must be submitted by the
student, the major professor, and the research committee.
Progress will continue with guidance from the research committee and by
the end of the second year the student should have completed the language/
research tool requirements.
To be admitted for candidacy for the Ph.D. degree the student must
satisfy the above requirements and pass oral and written qualifying exam-
inations.
After admission to candidacy a substantial part of the program is devoted
to an original research project which culminates in a dissertation. To be
recommended for the Ph.D., the dissertation must be satisfactorily completed
and defended at an oral examination.
Pharmaceutical Chemistry (Ph. Ch.)
375. Advanced Pharmaceutical Analysis. I or II. 3 hr. Spectroscopic methods of
analysis with emphasis on their applications in pharmaceutical problems and in
biological sciences.
376. Advanced Pharmaceutical Analysis. I or II. 3 hr. Continuation of Ph. Ch. 375, with
emphasis on electro-analytical methods and preparation of samples from pharma-
ceutical dosage forms and from biological materials.
PHARMACEUTICAL SCIENCES 249
377. Advanced Pharmaceutical Analysis. I or II. 3 hr. Physical-chemical principles
involved in methods development. A special problem is assigned as an integral
part of the course.
Pharmacognosy (Pcog.)
340. Organic Plant Constituents. I or II. 3 hr. Occurrence, properties, biogenesis, etc. of
a number of classes of organic compounds derived from plants. Emphasis on
secondary metabolites which contain products of pharmaceutical or medicinal
interest.
341. Isolation of Plant Constituents. I or II. 3-5 hr. Acquaints the student with
techniques used in extraction, separation, and isolation of plant constituents.
Pharmacy (Phar.)
300. Industrial Pharmacy. I. 4 hr. Major aspects and principles of dosage form
development and manufacture. Structure of industry and government influences.
Laboratory experiences in manufacturing and development techniques.
301. Advanced Biopharmaceutics. I or II. 3 hr. Concepts of biopharmaceutics and
pharmacokinetics in relation to the design and evaluation of dosage forms and
determination of rational dosage regimens in health and disease.
314. Cosmetic Formulation. II. 3 hr. PR: Phar. 203. Introduction to principles and basic
considerations of cosmetic formulations, including review of anatomy/physiology
of skin. Laboratory exposes students to practical aspects of processing the more
popular cosmetic products.
315. Physical Pharmacy. I or II. 3 hr. Designed to illustrate the special application of
physicochemical properties of materials to pharmaceutical and physiological
systems. Especially useful in delineating formulation considerations impinging
upon the stability of complex systems.
370. The Synthesis of Drugs. I, II, S. 3 hr. PR: Chem. 332 and consent. A survey of the
approaches employed in the synthesis of a variety of examples of pharmacologically
useful agents. Emphasis is placed on retrosynthetic analysis of target molecules
and the application of synthetic procedures to multi-step synthesis.
390. Special Topics. I, II, S. 1-4 hr.
391. Seminar in Pharmaceutical Sciences. I, II. 1 hr. PR: Consent. A multidisciplinary
weekly presentation and discussion of special topics and research in the pharma-
ceutical sciences. [Weekly attendance is required and grading is on an S/U basis
only.)
396. Special Problems in Pharmaceutical Sciences. I, II, S. 1-3 hr. Where special interest
is shown by the student in an area other than of the student's thesis research, a
faculty member will supervise individual study and research.
484. Special Seminar. I, II, S. 1-6 hr. For use by disciplines in the pharmaceutical
sciences wishing to have graduate students and faculty participate in seminars
and group discussion on specialized or technical topics at the advanced level.
490. Teaching Practicum. I, II. 1-3 hr. PR: Graduate standing and consent. Supervised
practices in college teaching of pharmacy.
491. Advanced Study. I, II, S. 1-6 hr. PR: Consent. Investigation in advanced subjects
which are not covered in regularly scheduled courses. Study may be independent
or through specially scheduled lectures.
250 PHARMACEUTICAL SCIENCES
496. Graduate Seminar. I, II. 1 hr. PR: Consent. Formal presentation by graduate
students to assembled graduate faculty and students of research or special topics
approved by adviser. Title to be presented at start of semester. Required at least
once annually. {Grading is S/U.)
497. Research. I, II, S. 1-15 hr.
498. Thesis. I, II, S. 2-4 hr. PR: Consent.
Pharmacy Administration (Phar. Ad.)
320. Drug Regulation and Control. I or II. 3 hr. Legislation affecting the development,
introduction, control, and utilization of drugs in the American economy.
321. Drug Distribution Systems. I or II. 3 hr. Detailed study and analysis of drug
distribution in institutional environments.
323. Economics of the Pharmaceutical Industry. I or II. 3 hr. History, background, and
formation of major drug industries, Oligopolistic practices, mergers, combines,
costs of research, and production.
Pharmaceutics (Pceut.)
302. Advanced Pharmaceutics. I or II. 3 hr. Physiochemical and biopharmaceutical
principles involved in disperse systems (liquid, semi-solid, and solid) which
function as dosage forms. Considerations of properties of solid dispersions,
micromeritics, diffusion of liquid dispersions, interfacial phenomena, emulsifi-
cation, suspensions, prolonged action medication, etc.
PHARMACOLOGY AND TOXICOLOGY
William W. Fleming, Chairperson of the Department
3151 Basic Sciences Building
Degrees Offered: M.S., Ph.D.
Graduate Faculty: Members Azzaro, Colasanti, Craig, Davis, Fedan, Fleming, Maw-
hinney, Reasor, Robinson, Smith, Stitzel, Strobl, Taylor, Van Dyke, Weber, Wierda,
and Worley.
Pharmacology and toxicology involve all aspects of the action of drugs on
living systems and their constituent parts. These range from the chemical
reactions taking place within cells to the evaluation of a drug in the treatment
of human disease. The Department of Pharmacology and Toxicology offers
graduate studies leading to the degrees of Master of Science and Doctor of
Philosophy, with research concentrations in such areas as autonomic phar-
macology, biochemical pharmacology, neuropharmacology, molecular phar-
macology, cardiovascular pharmacology, endocrine pharmacology, pharma-
cogenetics, malarial chemotherapy, immunotoxicology, and renal, hepatic,
and pulmonary toxicology.
Admission Requirements
Regular applicants for the graduate program in pharmacology and
toxicology should present, as a minimum, the following undergraduate
courses: one semester of biology; two semesters of physics; one semester of
calculus; five semesters of chemistry including two semesters of organic
chemistry and one semester of physical chemistry. Reading knowledge of at
least one foreign language is strongly recommended. Three letters of recom-
mendation from science professors, an official transcript, and the results of
the Graduate Record Examination— including the advanced test in either
PHARMACOLOGY AND TOXICOLOGY 251
chemistry or biology — are also required. The prospective student should have
a minimum 3.0 overall grade-point average at the undergraduate level.
In general, students requesting financial support should have all creden-
tials forwarded by February 1. For additional information write to the
Director of Graduate Studies, Department of Pharmacology and Toxicology,
WVU Health Sciences Center, Morgantown, WV 26506.
Master of Science
Ordinarily the department does not accept graduate students solely into a
master's program. However, the master's degree is offered and is available as
an intermediate degree en route to the Ph.D. Its primary function, as viewed
by the faculty, is as an aid to the student new to research for the formulation,
conduct, and writing of an abbreviated, but complete, independent research
project. The course work requirements for the M.S. in pharmacology and
toxicology usually consist of Physiology 344 and 345, Biochemistry 231,
Statistics 311, Pharmacology and Toxicology 361, 363, 364, 367, 461, 462, and
497. Most students, with the faculty's concurrence, choose to proceed directly
with their doctoral research without a master's degree. These students must
submit a comprehensive progress report on their research in lieu of a thesis.
Doctor of Philosophy
Before official admission to candidacy for the doctorate, the student must
satisfactorily complete a grant-writing exercise, an acceptable progress
report, and an oral comprehensive qualifying examination.
A doctoral examining committee will be formed at the time of submission
of the grant proposal (at the beginning of the third year in the program). The
committee will generally consist of at least three members from within the
Department of Pharmacology and Toxicology and two from outside the
department. Before any doctoral committee is appointed, its membership
must be approved by the department faculty. The committee will then meet
with the student to approve the grant-writing exercise and to discuss the
details of the proposed dissertation research. Regardless of whether the
student takes an M.S. or elects to do a progress report, he/she and the
committee must agree on the final plan for the dissertation research. The
committee is to be informed if major changes in the plan are contemplated and
will meet periodically with the student to discuss his/her progress. Three or
four months before the completion of the research project, the committee will
again meet with the student to decide specific details of the dissertation
preparation.
The oral preliminary examination will be held in early January of the
student's third year in the program. The scheduling of the preliminary
examination is contingent upon successful completion of all work to that date,
including a satisfactory grant application. The student's doctoral committee
will constitute the oral examining body.
If the student successfully passes the oral examination, a progress report
should be submitted to his/her dissertation committee on or about March 1 of
the third year.
If a student is not successful in the oral preliminary examination, the
committee may recommend a second attempt to take place not less than one
nor more than three months later. Alternatively, the committee may recom-
mend to the entire faculty that the student should write a master's thesis.
252 PHARMACOLOGY AND TOXICOLOGY
A progress report is expected to be written by each student in the
program, except those students who are receiving an M.S. degree. M.S.
students will write a master's thesis. The progress report should be written in
the style of a dissertation and should be presented in an acceptable form to the
dissertation committee on or about March 1 of the student's third year in the
program. The student will defend the progress report before the dissertation
committee.
Dissertation
Upon admission to candidacy for the degree of Doctor of Philosophy, the
candidate must select a topic for the dissertation under the direction of the
candidate's adviser, complete a dissertation which makes a contribution to
knowledge in the candidate's area of concentration, and pass an oral
examination based primarily upon the dissertation. After successful comple-
tion of the oral examination and submission of the final copy of the
dissertation, the candidate will be recommended for the degree.
Research and Instruction
Autonomic pharmacology: autonomic regulation of the cardiovascular
system and of smooth muscle; sensitivity to autonomic drugs; electrophysio-
logic studies of cardiac and smooth muscle; synthesis, storage release, and
metabolism of transmitters and adrenal medullary hormones.
Chemotherapy: antimalarial agents, anticancer agents, effects of pharma-
cological agents on single-cell organisms.
Biochemical pharmacology: drug metabolism, effects of drugs on lipid
and nucleic acid metabolism.
Endocrine pharmacology: mechanism of action of steroids, metabolism of
sex accessory tissues, relationship of hormones to tumor growth and
development.
Neuropharmacology: biochemical basis of epilepsy, mechanism of action
of anticonvulsant drugs, neuromediators in the central nervous system.
Toxicology: metabolism of toxic agents, pulmonary toxicology, renal
toxicology, immunotoxicology, environmental toxicology, and perinatal
pharmacology and toxicology.
Electron microscopy: effects of drugs on the ultrastructure of cells.
Pharmacology and Toxicology (Pcol.)
243. Pharmacology for Pharmacy Students. I. 4 hr. PR: Completion of first year in
Pharmacy; approval of course director. Principles, pharmacodynamic actions, and
therapeutic applications of clinically useful drugs.
360. Pharmacology and Therapeutics. (For dental and graduate students.) I. 4 hr. PR:
Dental student standing or consent. Lecture and demonstrations on pharmacolog-
ical actions and therapeutic uses of drugs.
361. Pharmacology. (For medical students and a limited number of regular, full-time
graduate students in basic medical science departments.) II. 6 hr. PR: Consent of
department chairperson. Lecture-conference-laboratory on principles, pharmaco-
dynamic actions, and therapeutic applications of clinically useful drugs.
362. OccupationaJ Toxicology. II. 3 hr. PR: Consent. General principles of toxicology
with special emphasis on occupational health. Classes of chemicals which pose
problems in the workplace will be emphasized.
PHARMACOLOGY AND TOXICOLOGY 253
363. Toxicology. I. 3-4 hr. (Variable credit; majors enroll for 4 hr., non-majors for 3 hr.)
PR: Consent. Theoretical concepts and general principles of toxicology with
special emphasis on molecular mechanisms of toxicity. 3-4 hr. lee. (Offered
alternate even years.)
364. Advanced Pharmacology. I. (Alternate Years.) 1-5 hr. PR: Pcol. 361 or consent.
Advanced lectures and discussion of general principles of pharmacology and
toxicology and advanced lectures in biochemical, endocrine, pulmonary, and
cardiovascular pharmacology. 1-5 hr. lee. (Offered every second year.)
367. Advanced Neuropharmacology. I. 1-5 hr. PR: Pcol. 361 or consent. Advanced
lectures and discussion on drug receptor theory, neurophysiological aspects of
pharmacology, supersensitivity, and the actions of drugs on the central and
peripheral nervous system. 1-5 hr. lee. (Offered every second year.)
461. Seminar in Pharmacology. I, II. 1 hr. per sem. PR: Pcol. 361 or graduate status in
basic medical sciences.
462. Literature Survey. I, II. 1 hr. per sem. PR: Graduate status in pharmacology and
toxicology. Current literature pertinent to pharmacology and toxicology including
journals of allied biological sciences.
490. Teaching Practicum. I, II. 1-3 hr. per sem. PR: Pcol. 361 and consent. (For advanced
graduate students.) Critical evaluation of preparation and delivery of lectures in
specified areas of pharmacology and toxicology.
491. Advanced Study. I, II. 1-6 hr. PR: Consent of chairperson.
497. Research. I, II, S. 1-15 hr. per sem.
PHYSICAL EDUCATION
J. William Douglas, Dean, School of Physical Education
258 Coliseum
Carl P. Bahneman, Chairperson, Department of Professional Physical Education
256 Coliseum
William L. Alsop, Chairperson, Department of Sport and Exercise Studies
265 Coliseum
Degrees Offered: M.S., Ed.D.
Graduate Faculty: Members Bahneman, Brooks, J. W. Douglas, Hawkins, Ostrow,
Ullrich, Wiegand, and Yeater. Associate Members Alsop, Boyd, Carson, K. K.
Douglas, Fehl, Kurucz, McPherson, Maxwell, Ott, Wiedebusch, and Ziatz.
Graduate students in the School of Physical Education pursue courses
and scholarly tasks which may lead to the Master of Science in Physical
Education or the Doctor of Education, with concentrations in professional
physical education or sport and exercise studies. Admission deadlines vary
across program areas. Students who seek a graduate assistantship should
apply by March 1.
Master of Science (M.S.)
Professional Physical Education Department Admission Standards
Students are admitted to the Department of Professional Physical
Education for work leading to the master of science degree if they hold a
baccalaureate degree from an approved institution of higher education, have a
2.75 undergraduate grade-point average, and satisfy prerequisites in the
courses for which they register.
Students who do not meet the 2.75 grade-point average requirement are
admitted as provisional graduate students and are required to attain a 3.0
254 PHYSICAL EDUCATION
grade-point average in the first 12 hours of prescribed course work in order to
be reclassified as a regular graduate student. Courses taken in off-campus
education are accepted for degree purposes if the student has had prior
approval from the student's adviser. In order to receive the degree, the student
must have a minimum average of 3.0 in all course work leading toward the
degree and satisfy all department and University requirements.
Professional Physical Education Department Programs
The Department of Professional Physical Education offers the master of
science degree with the following options. Specific course requirements are
available upon request.
A. Motor Deveiopment/Master Teacher Program— (1) Internship Option:
This option is designed to develop a master teacher for the public school
population. Mainstreaming and individualized instructional skills are em-
phasized together with a developmental focus; (2) Research Option: This
option is very similar to the master teacher option. However, more emphasis
is placed on the development of research skills, with a thesis being required.
B. Athletic Training— This option is designed to develop the skills
necessary to be an athletic trainer. West Virginia State certification in athletic
training is awarded when this option is completed. For those students who
cannot attend classes during the regular school year, this option can be
completed in three consecutive summers.
Sport and Exercise Studies Department Admission Standards
Students are admitted to the Department of Sport and Exercise Studies
for work leading to the master of science degree if they hold a baccalaureate
degree from an approved institution of higher education and satisfy other
admission criteria designated by the program specialization area (available
upon request). Admission to the sport and exercise studies program areas is
highly competitive and limited to 15 students per program emphasis;
applications should be submitted by April 15. In order to receive the degree,
the student must have a minimum 3.0 average in all course work leading
toward the degree and satisfy all department and University requirements.
Sport and Exercise Studies Department Programs
The Department of Sport and Exercise Studies offers the master of
science degree with the following areas of specialization. Specific course
requirements are available upon request.
A. Sport Studies— (1) Sport Behavior: This specialization concentrates
on the psycho/social dimensions of sport. A thesis is required. (2) Sport
Management: The emphasis is on management and administration of sport
related agencies and enterprises.
B. Exercise Studies — (1) Fitness Assessment, Evaluation and Prescrip-
tion: The emphasis concentrates on assessment and evaluation of fitness
parameters of all age groups involved in physical activity. Thesis or
Internship option.
Doctor of Education (Ed.D.)
Professional Physical Education and Sport and Exercise Studies Departments
Options leading to the Doctor of Education (Ed.D.) degree in the
Department of Professional Physical Education include motor development
(with emphasis in pedagogy and special populations) and administration of
physical education. Options leading to the Doctor of Education degree in the
PHYSICAL EDUCATION 255
Department of Sport and Exercise Studies include sport behavior and sport
physiology.
Admission to the Program
Regular Graduate Student Status— The following are minimum admission
criteria for students to be admitted with regular status to the options in motor
development, administration of physical education, and sport behavior.
Students interested in sport physiology should consult the latest department
guidelines:
•Undergraduate grade-point average of 3.0 from an approved institution;
•Master's degree grade-point average of 3.5 from an approved institution;
•Graduate Record Examination score of 1050 (verbal/quantitative) or
Miller Analogies Test score of 55;
•TOEFL score of 550 (international applicants); and
•Three letters of reference.
All materials and procedures must be completed by March 1 of the year in
which the applicant intends to begin a doctoral program. Upon completion of
the above procedures, the student's credentials are reviewed by an appropriate
screening committee. Acceptance as an advanced graduate student with
regular status is contingent upon the screening committee's decision regarding
the applicant's potential for scholarly productivity as judged by Graduate
Record Examination and/or Miller Analogies Test scores, past performance in
course work, letters of recommendation, a personal interview, and adviser/pro-
gram availability.
Provisional Graduate Student Status— Applicants who have incomplete
credentials, deficiencies to make up, or a less than minimum required test
score or grade-point average but who show scholarly promise may be
admitted as advanced graduate students with provisional status. During the
semester in which the advanced graduate student with provisional status
completes the twelfth hour of prescribed course work, the student shall
request, through the office of the chairperson of the appropriate doctoral
program, admission to the program with regular graduate status. Advanced
graduate students with provisional status cannot register for course work
beyond the twelfth hour without having been admitted to the program as a
student with regular graduate status.
Program Requirements— Once the student is admitted to the program, the
student — in concert with the adviser — selects a doctoral committee. It is this
committee's responsibility to aid the student in planning the total program.
During the process of completing a program, the student is expected to fulfill a
residency requirement specified by the committee.
Admission to Candidacy Requirements— As the student nears the ter-
mination of the course work, application may be made to complete the final
comprehensive examination. This examination shall consist of scholarly
tasks designed to function as a comprehensive learning experience. The
examination will be constructed by the student's doctoral committee. Students
who do not successfully complete this examination may be permitted to
attempt the examination one more time pending an appeal and subsequent
sanction of the student's doctoral committee. There must be a time period of at
least six months between the first and second examination periods.
Upon successful completion of the final comprehensive examination, the
student may present to the doctoral committee a prospectus of the dissertation.
If the opinion of the committee is such that the student may proceed with the
dissertation, the student is admitted to candidacy.
256 PHYSICAL EDUCATION
Final Requirements— Upon the completion of the dissertation, the candi-
date will appear before the doctoral committee for purposes of orally
defending the study. Successful defense of the dissertation results in the
awarding of the degree. All requirements must be completed within five years
after the comprehensive examination is completed successfully.
Professional Physical Education (P.p.e.)
219. Gross Anatomy. II. 3 hr. PR: Consent. Designed to provide an overview of body
systems and gross anatomy of the trunk and extremities.
220. Advanced Athletic Training 1. S. 3 hr. PR: P.P.E. 121, S.E.S. 164, 165, Saf. S. 70 or
consent. Designed to provide an in-depth analysis of life-threatening situations in
athletics, athletic conditioning, and general rehabilitation concepts.
221. Advanced Athletic Training 2. 1, S. 3 hr. PR: P.P.E. 121, 219, S.E.S. 164, 165, Saf. S.
70 or consent. Designed to investigate tissue repair, physiology of hot and cold
treatment, therapeutic modalities and pharmacology relevant to athletic injury
management.
222. Advanced Athletic Training 3. II, S. 3 hr. PR: P.P.E. 219, 220, 221 or consent.
Designed to provide in-depth analysis of athletic injury mechanisms, injury
evaluation techniques and rehabilitation; and muscle isolation techniques.
223. Athletic Training Practicum 1. II. 3 hr. PR: Consent. Practical application of
athletic training techniques related to general rehabilitation concepts.
224. Athletic Training Practicum 2. 3 hr. PR: Consent. Practical application of athletic
training techniques.
300. Workshop in Physical Education. I, II, S. 1-15 hr.
305. Professional Issues in Physical Education. S. 3 hr. PR: Completion of 24 graduate
hours or consent. Designed to examine current professional issues in physical
education and the impact of these issues on the professional's life.
315. Research Methodology in Physical Education. I, S. 3 hr. PR: Graduate standing or
consent. Designed for the application of historical, descriptive, and experimental
research strategies and designs to physical education.
323. Athletic Training Practicum. I, II, S. 1-6 hr. PR: Consent. Designed to provide
experience in various practical situations in athletic training and other related
areas.
324. Issues in Athletic Training. S. 3 hr. PR: Consent. Designed to analyze, in-depth,
various issues and policies in athletic training relevant to training room adminis-
tration, protective, equipment, liability in athletics, and other selected topics.
336. Instructional Methods for Physical Education. I, S. 3 hr. PR: P.P.E. 315 or consent.
Designed to provide physical educators with the methodological skill necessary to
comply with Public Law 94-142 (Education for All Handicapped Children Act).
The research justification for the methodological approaches examined will be
emphasized. (Offered every third Summer; next offering: 1985.]
338. Operant Principles for Physical Education. II, S. 3 hr. PR: P.P.E. 315 or consent.
Designed for the use and evaluation of operant principles in the development and
control of motor behavior in physical education. Applications will be made to
traditional group and individually prescribed instructional systems in physical
education. [Offered every third Summer; next offering: 1987.)
PHYSICAL EDUCATION 257
346. Curriculum in Physical Education. I, S. 3 hr. PR: P.P.E. 315 or consent. Designed to
examine the factors affecting curriculum development. Emphasis on research in
the changing curriculum, and the selection and sequencing of developmentally
appropriate activities for early, middle, and adolescent childhood. [Offered every
third Summer; next offering: 1986.)
366. Motor Development. I, S. 3 hr. PR: P.P.E. 315 or consent. Designed to examine
developmental motor skill acquisition across the entire life span. Hereditary and
environmental factors unique to the motor-skill development of the maturing
individual will be emphasized. [Offered every third Summer; next offering: 1987.)
368. Infant/Early Childhood Motor Development. II, S. 3 hr. PR: P.P.E. 315 and 366 or
consent. Examination of motor development during infancy and early childhood
focusing on physical education's interactive role with the developmental process.
Emphasizing current developmental research related to the area.
370. Middie Childhood/ Adolescent Motor Development. II, S. 3 hr. PR: P.P.E. 315 and
P.P.E. 366 or consent. Examination of motor development during middle childhood
and adolescence focusing on physical education's interactive role with the
developmental process. Emphasizes current developmental research related to the
area.
371. Motor Development in Special Populations. II, S. 3 hr. PR: P.P.E. 315, 366 or
consent. Designed to examine the motor developmental patterns of various special
population groups focusing on physical education's interactive role with the
developmental process. Current developmental research related to the area will be
emphasized. [Offered every third Summer; next offering: 1985.)
391. Advanced Topics. I, II, S. 1-6 hr.
397. Research/Thesis. I, II, S. 1-15 hr.
446. Advanced Measurement in Physical Education. II, S. 3 hr. PR: P.P.E. 315. Designed
to extend and apply the basic concepts of measurements and statistical evaluation
to physical education.
460. Management Processes in Physical Education. II. 3 hr. PR: Graduate standing or
consent. Designed to explore analytically the situational, relational processes
between the administrator of physical education school programs and the teacher
of physical education, the physical education facility, and the physical education
planned learning environment.
465. Professional Physical Education Resource Seminar. I. 3 hr. PR: Graduate standing.
(Required for all doctoral students.) Designed as an introductory seminar for
doctoral professional physical educators. Discussion, debate, and position state-
ments on critical issues facing the physical education profession.
480. Dissertation/Thesis Seminar. I, II, S. 3 hr. PR: Graduate standing and S.E.S. 315.
[Required for all doctoral students.) Designed to critically analyze the graduate
student's dissertation or research proposal.
490. Teaching Practicum. I, II, S. 3-15 hr.
491. Advanced Study. I, II, S. 1-6 hr.
492-495. Special Seminars. I, II, S. 1-6 hr. each.
496. Graduate Seminar. I, II, S. 1-6 hr.
497. Research. I, II, S. 1-15 hr.
498. Dissertation. I, II, S. 1-15 hr.
499. Colloquium. I, II, S. 1-6 hr.
258 PHYSICAL EDUCATION
Dance (Dance)
201. Rhythms and Dance. I. 3 hr. An exploration of dance technique in its relation to
composition and principles of choreography; developing an aesthetic and critical
awareness of these principles as they are displayed in dance works.
202. Modern Dance Techniques and Composition. II. 3 hr. PR: Dance 35 or 37 or consent.
Scientific principles of movement; basic principles of music as related to dance
movement; choreographic principles; practicum in dance movement. Principles for
teaching dance and problems involved in planning programs.
203. American Folk Dance. I. 3 hr. PR: Dance 39 or consent. American square, contra,
circle, and round dance, and their relationships in the arts and aspects of American
culture.
204. History and Philosophy of Dance. II. 3 hr. Cultural survey of dance as an
expression of the society it represents; philosophy of dance; relation of dance to
other art forms; dance as an educational experience.
210. Theatre Dance 1. I. 2 hr. PR: Dance 9. Develops a basic practical knowledge of
choreographed movement in the musical theatre dance idiom. Includes a study of
fundamentals of ballet for the actor, derivative musical/rhythmic forms, and
elementary Broadway dance vocabulary and styles. (Also listed as Theat. 210.)
211. Theatre Dance 2. II. 2 hr. PR: Theat. 210/Dance 210. Comprehensive study of
representative musical theatre dance styles, relative to period (1900 to present)
and ethnic derivation. Includes study of isolationary movement and principles of
classical dance applicable to the Broadway idiom. (Also listed as Theat. 211.)
212. Theatre Dance Repertory. I. 2 hr. PR: Dance 211/Theat. 211. Develops and expands
the technical and stylistic fundamentals established in the Dance 210-211/Theat.
210-211 courses, applying them to reconstruction and staging of a variety of
classic dance sequences from notable Broadway musicals. (Also listed as Theat.
212.)
213. Theatre Dance Performance Workshop. II. 2 hr. PR: Dance 212/Theat. 212.
Continues study of dance technique, isolationary movement and stylistic vocab-
ularies established in previous theatre dance courses. Emphasizes development of
original choreography in representative Broadway dance styles. Includes study of
elements of performance in musical theatre. (Also listed as Theat. 213.)
Sport and Exercise Studies (S.E.s.)
225. Program Planning of Recreational Sport. I, II, S. 3 hr. PR: Consent. An in-depth
study of recreational sport programs, including philosophy, objectives, program
development, management concepts, and evaluation.
315. Research Methodology in Physical Education. I, S. 3 hr. PR: Graduate standing or
consent. Application of historical, descriptive, and experimental research strategies
and designs to physical education. (Also listed as P.P.E. 315.)
320. Individual Interaction in Sport and Physical Activity. I, S. 3 hr. PR: S.E.S. 315.
Designed to acquaint the student with the reciprocal relationships between sport
and physical activity and the societies and cultures out of which sport emerges.
340. Psychology of Sport and Physical Activity. I, S. 3 hr. PR: S.E.S. 315. Psychological
effects and implications of man's participation in sport and physical activity.
Emphasis is on the personality and behavioral and motivational dynamics of sport
involvement.
345. Group Influences in Sports. I. 3 hr. PR: Research, Statistics, S.E.S. 320, 340. The
manner and degree to which individuals are affected by involvement in sport and
group interactions.
PHYSICAL EDUCATION 259
360. Biomechanical Analysis of Sport and Physical Activity. II, S. 3 hr. PR: S.E.S. 164
and 165 or equiv.; S.E.S. 315. Advanced principles of body mechanics and analysis
of muscle and joint actions in coordinated movement and neuromuscular physi-
ology.
367. Theories of Sport Physiology. I, S. 3 hr. PR: S.E.S. 315. Thorough and workable
knowledge of principles involved in the interactions of muscles and nerves,
reflexes, metabolism, cardiopulmonary function, environmental physiology, and
the practical application of work physiology.
391. Advanced Topics. I, II, S. 1-6 hr.
397. Research/Thesis. I, II, S. 1-15 hr.
425. Educational Sport. II. 3 hr. PR: Stat. 311, S.E.S. 465. The group dynamics of the
sport situation for purposes of gaining insight into techniques and methods of
modifying social behavior through physical education sport activities.
446. Advanced Measurement in Physical Education. II, S. 3 hr. PR: S.E.S. 315.
Extension and application of basic concepts of measurement and statistical
evaluation to physical education.
460. Management Processes in Physical Education. II. 3 hr. PR: Graduate standing or
consent. Analytical exploration of the situational, relational processes between
the administrator of physical education school programs and the teacher of
physical education, the physical education facility, and the physical education
planned learning environment.
465. Professional Physical Education Resource Seminar. S. 3 hr. PR: Graduate
standing. Introductory seminar for doctoral professional physical educators.
Discussion, debate, and position statements on critical issues facing the physical
education profession. [Required for all doctoral students.]
480. Dissertation/Thesis Seminar. I, II, S. 3 hr. PR: Graduate standing. Critical analysis
of the graduate student's dissertation or research proposal. [Required for all
doctoral students.)
491. Advanced Study. I, II, S. 1-6 hr.
492-495. Special Seminars. I, II, S. 1-6 hr. ea.
496. Graduate Seminar. I, II, S. 1-6 hr.
497. Research. I, II, S. 1-15 hr.
498. Dissertation. I, II, S. 1-15 hr.
499. Colloquium. I, II, S. 1-6 hr.
PHYSICS
Martin V. Ferer, Interim Chairperson of the Department
212 Hodges Hall
Degrees Offered: M.S., Ph.D.
Graduate Faculty: Members Cooper, Edwards, Ferer, F. Franz, Grier, Koepke, Littleton,
Parmentola, Pavlovic, Seehra, and Weldon. Associate Members Arya, Levine, Rotter,
and Treat.
The physics department offers the Master of Science and the Doctor of
Philosophy degrees with research specialties in: (1) condensed matter
(magnetic phenomena in highly correlated rare earth and actinide systems;
electronic structure and magnetic properties of artifically grown solid state
surfaces and super/lattices; high Tc superconductors; properties of magnetic
260 PHYSICS
ions and clusters; elementary excitations in antiferromagnets; phase transi-
tions and critical phenomena; metal-insulator transitions and electron locali-
zation; nonlinear fluid dynamics, chaos, and nonequilibrium pattern forma-
tion), (2) applied physics (fractals and percolation clusters; formation,
growth, and interaction of aerosols; biophysics of particle ingestion; atmos-
pheric physics and the propragation of electromagnetic waves), (3) plasma
physics (plasma waves and instabilities; nonlinear interactions in steady
state plasma columns; turbulence in plasmas), (4) astrophysics (stellar
evolution; detonation waves in supernovae; heavy element production), (5)
nuclear physics (quantum chromodynamic theory of nucleons; solitons and
nuclear models; proton-nucleus scattering), (6) elementary particle physics
(high temperature quantum field theory; quark-gluon plasmas; supersym-
metry; cosmology).
The physics department is a member of the Southeastern Universities
Research Association and Oak Ridge Associated Universities and an academic
affiliate of the Pittsburgh Supercomputer Center. There are active collabora-
tions with Brookhaven, Los Alamos, and Argonne National Laboratories and
the Continuous Electron Beam Accelerator Facility. There is a well-equipped
professional machine shop and a student shop. Computing facilities are
excellent: faculty and students use microcomputers, VAX and mainframe
IBM computers, and supercomputers through national communications
networks.
The Ph.D. Degree
A Ph.D. degree requires 36 hours of course work at the 300 or 400 level.
The following courses are required: 325, 331, 333, 351, 383, and 387. A
minimum of six hours at the 400 level is required. The minimum grade for
credit in graduate courses is C. A grade-point average of 3.0 (B) must be
maintained.
Admissions Exam: The first two years of courses prepare the student for
the admissions exam. The purpose of the exam is to determine whether a
student has the necessary general background to begin research. It is a
written exam covering electricity and magnetism, classical mechanics, and
quantum mechanics at the beginning graduate level. This exam is offered
twice a year and is normally taken after two years of graduate study.
Qualifying Exam: After completing the admissions exam the student
chooses a general area of research and an adviser, and starts work on a
research project. During this period the advisor and the student select a very
specific sub-field of current research (usually based on a few published
papers or a textbook) that the student can master rather quickly. The
qualifying exam consists of a seminar by the student on this sub-field
followed by questions from a faculty examining committee. This requirement
is usually completed before the fourth year of graduate study. Upon
completion, the student is formally advanced to candidacy for the Ph.D. and
focuses entirely on research.
Dissertation: The Ph.D. degree is primarily a research degree and
consequently the student must demonstrate the ability to do independent
research under the guidance of an advisor. The results of this research must be
written up as a formal dissertation and defended orally in front of a faculty
examining committee.
Language Requirement: The student must demonstrate proficiency in an
approved foreign language or in computer programming.
PHYSICS 261
The Master's Degree
The master's degree requires 24 hours of course work at the 300 or 400
level including the following required courses: 331, 333, 351, and 387. The
minimum grade for credit is C and a grade-point average of 3.0 (B) must be
maintained. A thesis is required and is considered a valuable part of the
master's program because it gives the student experience in working on a
research problem, writing up the results, and defending the work in an oral
exam. Although the master's projects are more limited in scope than Ph.D.
research, they are essential to master's degree training and often lead to a
journal publication. A master's candidate must take the Ph.D. Admissions
Exam described previously and demonstrate competence in two of the three
sections. Our master's program provides valuable training as a terminal
degree or as preparation for the Ph.D., although it is not required for the Ph.D.
In addition to the Ph.D. and M.S. programs, the department offers a series
of courses during the summer designed specifically for teachers. They cover
physics, physical science, and astronomy.
Application and Admission
Applications are due by March 1. All applicants will be considered for
financial support. Applicants are expected to have a bachelor's degree in
physics that includes upper-division courses in electricity and magnetism,
mechanics, quantum mechanics, thermodynamics, and mathematical methods.
Students lacking some of these courses may be admitted conditionally and
will be encouraged to remedy the deficiencies by taking appropriate under-
graduate courses during their first year.
To apply for admission applicants should send the following: (1) WVU
admission application (Foreign students may defer paying the $20 application
fee), (2) official transcript of grades, (3) Graduate Record Exam (GRE) scores
for analytical, verbal, and quantitative sections, (4) Graduate Record Exam
(GRE) score for physics (077) or the CUSPEA exam in China, (5) summary of
physics and math background (This form is included in the application
package.), (6) Test of English as a Foreign Language (TOEFL) scores if English
is not the applicant's native language (A minimum score of 550 is required.),
and (7) three letters of recommendation from faculty describing the applicant's
potential for completion of an advanced degree.
Physics (Phys.)
201. Special Topics. I, II. 1-6 hr. per sem. (May be repeated to max. of 24 hours.) Study
of topics of current interest in physics.
225. Atomic Physics. I, II. 3 hr. PR: Phys. 124 or equiv. Relativistic mechanics, atomic
structure, and spectra.
231, 232. Theoretical Mechanics. I, II. 3 hr. per sem. PR: Phys. 11, 12 or equiv.; Cone:
Math. 18. Scalar, vector, and tensor fields; curvilinear coordinate systems.
Kinematics and dynamics of particles, systems, of particles and rigid bodies.
Lagrangian and Hamiltonian formulation. Relativistic motion.
233, 234. Electricity, Magnetism, and Radiation Optics. I, II. 3 hr. per sem. PR: Phys.
11, 12 or equiv.; Cone: Math. 18. Electrostatics, magnetostatics, introduction to
electrodynamics, and applications to optics.
241. Advanced Physics Laboratory. I, II. 1-2 hr. per sem. PR: Phys. 11, 12, 124.
Experiments in physics designed to implement theory courses, give experience in
data taking and instrumentation, and learn methods of data evaluation and error
analysis.
262 PHYSICS
248. Physics Seminar. I, II. (No credit.) [Suggested for junior, senior, and graduate
Physics majors.) These lectures acquaint students with topics of current interest
in physics.
251. Introductory Quantum Mechanics. I. 3 hr. PR: Phys. 124, Math. 18. Fundamental
principles of quantum mechanics; state functions in position and momentum
space, operators, Schrodinger's equation, applications to one-dimensional prob-
lems, approximation methods, the hydrogen atom, angular momentum and spin.
263. Nuclear Physics. I, II. 3 hr. PR: Phys. 124; Math. 17. Study of characteristic
properties of nuclei and their structure as inferred from nuclear decays and
reactions, leading to a knowledge of nuclear forces and models.
271. Solid State Physics. I, II. 3 hr. PR: Phys. 124 or equiv.; Math. 17. Properties of
crystalline solids; includes crystal structure, binding, lattice vibrations and an
investigation of thermal, electrical, magnetic, and optical phenomena based on
energy band theory.
283. Thermodynamics. II. 3 hr. PR: Phys. 11, 12 or equiv.; Math. 17. Introduction to the
statistical foundations of thermodynamics. Application of the fundamental laws
of thermodynamics to physical and chemical systems.
301. Special Topics. I, II. 1-6 hr. per sem. (May be repeated to max. of 24 hours.) PR:
Consent. (Primarily for Graduate students.] Specialized topics of current interest
in physics.
313. Introductory Electronics. S. 3 hr. PR: 1 year college physics. (Primarily for
Education majors; not open to Physics majors.) Principles and applications of
electrical components and circuits, including solid-state electronics.
321. Optics. I, II. 3 hr. PR: Phys. 11, 12 or equiv.; Math. 17. A basic course in physical
optics covering radiation theory, diffraction, interference, polychromatic waves,
scattering, polarization, double refraction, and selected topics in quantum optics.
325. Intermediate Atomic Physics. I. 3 hr. PR: Phys. 351. A review of the theory of
one-electron atoms. The main emphasis is on the theory of two-electron and
many-electron atoms: para and ortho helium; central field approximation;
Thomas-Fermi theory; Hartree-Fock theory; L-S, J-J, and intermediate coupling;
interaction with electromagnetic fields.
331. Advanced Classical Mechanics. I. 3 hr. PR: Phys. 231, 232, and differential
equations. Lagrange and Hamilton form of equations of motion, rigid bodies, small
and nonlinear oscillations. Transformation theory, relativistic dynamics, and
systems with an infinite number of degrees of freedom.
333, 334. Advanced Electricity and Magnetism. I, II. 3 hr. per sem. PR: Phys. 233, 234,
and differential equations. Electrostatic and magnetostatic boundary value
problems. Maxwell's equations for time varying fields. Green's functions and
integral representations; applications to radiation; diffraction, wave guides,
plasma physics, and relativistic motion of charged particles.
351, 352. Quantum Mechanics. I, II. 3 hr. per sem. PR: Phys. 251. Breakdown of
classical physics, the Schroedinger equation and its interpretation, one dimensional
problems, operator methods and abstract Hilbert space, identical particles, three
dimensional problems, the hydrogen atom, angular momentum, spin, vector
coupling, time independent perturbation theory, variational principle, atomic and
molecular structure, semiclassical radiation theory, scattering theory.
354. Outline of Physics. S. 3 hr. PR: One year introductory college physics. (Primarily
for education majors; not open to physics majors.] Elementary study of atomic and
molecular structures and spectra, solid state and nuclear physics, relativity and
elementary particles.
PHYSICS 263
355, 356. Workshop for Physics Teachers. S. 3 hr. per sem. PR: One year college
physics; One year of college mathematics. (Primarily for Education majors; not
open to Physics majors. j Techniques of apparatus construction and demonstration.
357. Photography. SI. 3 hr. PR: One year of college physics or equiv. (Primarily for
education majors; not open to physics majors. j The physics and chemistry of
photography with practical experience.
358. Light. SII. 3 hr. PR: One year of college physics or equiv. (Primarily for education
majors; not open to physics majors.) A demonstration course designed to illustrate
the basic concepts covering light and optics.
383. Statistical Mechanics. II. 3 hr. PR: Phys. 283, 351. Ensemble theory, applications to
noninteracting systems, as well as perturbative and approximate treatment of
interactions. Typical applications include equilibrium constants, polymers, white
dwarves, metals, superfluids, magnetic transitions.
387. Mathematics for Physicists and Engineers. I. 3 hr. PR: Calculus, differential
equations, Phys. 11, 12 or equiv. Complex variables: series, contour integration
and conformal mapping; ordinary differential equations; Fourier series, Laplace
transforms; Fourier transforms, special functions; Bessel functions and Legendre,
Hermite, and Laguerre polynomials; introduction to partial differential equations;
Poisson's equation, Wave equation, and diffusion equation.
388. Mathematics for Physicists and Engineers. II. 3 hr. PR: Calculus, differential
equations, Phys. 11, 12 or equiv. Vector spaces, tensor calculus, group theory,
integral equations, calculus of variations, nonlinear systems and other topics as
time permits.
401. Advanced Research Topics. I, II. 1-6 hr. (May be repeated to max. of 24 hours.] PR:
Consent. Specialized topics in field of physics related to the research interests of
the department. Open only to students who have completed most of the basic
graduate courses.
410. High Energy Physics. I. 3 hr. PR: Phys. 351, 352. Fundamental particle interactions,
field theory, s-matrix expansions, space time symmetries, internal symmetries,
unsolved problems.
463. Advanced Nuclear Physics. I, II. 3 hr. PR: Phys. 225, 251, and 263. Detailed
presentation of nuclear presentation of nuclear models, nuclear reaction mech-
anism, nuclear forces and theories of nuclear disintegrations.
471. Advanced Solid State Physics. II. (Alternate Years.) 3 hr. PR: Phys. 271, 325, 351.
Advanced treatment of solid state theory; electronic, vibrational, transport,
thermodynamic, and magnetic properties of solids.
497. Research. I, II, S. 1-15 hr.
Astronomy (Astro.)
216. Astronomy for Teachers. S. 3 hr. PR: Consent. Basic concepts and methods in
astronomy and how to teach them using the celestial sphere and geometrical tools.
Observational work at night. The use of a telescope and camera.
255. Intermediate Astronomy. II. 3 hr. PR: Math. 16 or consent. Measurement of the
universe; trigonometric parallax, statistical parallax, moving clusters, cluster H-R
diagrams, masses of various binary systems, Kepler's Laws, and the three-body
problem.
267. Basic Astrophysics. I, II. 3 hr. PR: Phys. 124 or equiv. The several equations of
state, the Boltzmann-Saha equation, the H-R diagram and interpretation of
spectra, introduction to radiative transfer and stellar structure.
264 PHYSICS
PHYSIOLOGY
George A. Hedge, Chairperson of the Department
3051 Basic Sciences Building
Degrees Offered: M.S., Ph.D.
Graduate Faculty: Members Baylis, Brown, Castranova, Connors, Franz, Frazer,
Gladfelter, Goodman, Hedge, Huffman, Johnson, Lee, Miles, Millecchia, Stauber, and
Yokota.
The Ph.D. program is designed to produce physiologists of high quality,
capable of conducting independent research and being effective teachers.
Students in the department are exposed to all aspects of physiology and a
variety of related sciences. Our graduates, as a result of this rigorous training,
may pursue careers in any area of physiology, and can interact creatively with
scientists in related fields. The Master's program is designed as an introduction
to research in physiology for students interested in, but not yet committed to,
a research career. Students in this program receive training in the funda-
mentals of physiology and experience in a research laboratory.
Admission Requirements
Applicants should have a strong background in biology and/or chemistry.
In addition to a basic biology course, it is strongly recommended that
applicants have taken cellular or molecular biology and an introductory
physiology course; a course on comparative anatomy also provides particularly
useful background information. Inorganic and organic chemistry are basic
requirements, while physical chemistry is recommended, but not required.
Finally, as several areas of physiology require an understanding of the
fundamentals of calculus and physics, introductory courses on these subjects
are also essential.
The department requires the following materials for consideration for the
M.S. or Ph.D. program: Three letters of recommendation; transcripts of all
undergraduate and graduate grades; a completed departmental application
form; and Graduate Record Examination scores (aptitude and one advanced
test). A bachelor's degree, or equivalent, is required for admission; an M.S.
degree is not a prerequisite for the Ph.D. program.
A complete application kit and detailed descriptions of the degree
programs can be obtained by writing to the Graduate Adviser, Department of
Physiology, School of Medicine, West Virginia University, Morgantown, WV
26506. Although applications may be submitted as late as May of the year of
matriculation, applications must be received before February 1 to be consid-
ered for financial aid.
Master of Science (M.S.)
Prerequisites for admission to the master's program are the same as those
for the doctoral program. The first two semesters are devoted largely to
course work in physiology (12 hours of Graduate Physiology, 4 hours of
Neurophysiology, and 4 hours of Physiological Methods). Students are also
introduced to the research interests of the faculty through the graduate
colloquium and rotations in each faculty member's laboratory. At the end of
the second semester, students pick a thesis adviser and begin work in that
laboratory during the summer. The second year is spent primarily on research
for and writing of the master's thesis. Students are required to take 2 hours of
Advanced Physiology and present two research seminars during the year.
PHYSIOLOGY 265
Doctor of Philosophy (Ph.D.)
The first year curriculum familiarizes the student with the basic
information and principles that form a background for advanced work in
physiology. Much of this overlaps with the basic science material presented
to medical students so that all students attend several medical school courses,
including biochemistry and neurophysiology. Much of the first year is
devoted to graduate physiology (6 hours/semester). This course is based upon
lectures in medical physiology, supplemented with conference sessions that
introduce students to current literature. Finally, students lacking a statistical
background are expected to take a basic statistics course.
In addition to this course work, students are introduced to the research
interests of the physiology faculty through the graduate colloquium and
rotations in each faculty member's laboratory. The latter are designed to help
students choose a thesis adviser by exposing them to the experimental
approaches and techniques used in different laboratories within the depart-
ment.
During the first summer, students are expected to begin research projects
in a departmental research laboratory of their choice. This allows a student to
explore an area of research interest, and to develop a working relationship
with a faculty member, without a firm commitment to pursue a thesis project
in that laboratory.
During the second year the student combines course work with the
continuing development of research interests. A graduate adviser is selected
during this year. Courses include: Advanced Physiology (12 hours), Physio-
logical Methods (4 hours), Graduate Colloquium (2 hours), Graduate Seminar
(1 hour), and a Teaching Practicum.
The second-year curriculum takes the student beyond the medical
curriculum, emphasizing critical appraisal of the current research literature.
In addition, the student begins to develop his/her teaching skills. The
purposes of the graduate colloquium and seminar are two-fold. First, they
give students an opportunity to become informed of the latest scientific
advances. Secondly students have an opportunity to develop and practice
presentation of research seminars. In addition to presentations by faculty and
students from the Department of Physiology, faculty members from other
departments at WVU and from other institutions are invited to present
seminars in the program.
After successful completion of the second academic year, the student
takes a two-part qualifying examination. The qualifying examination consists
of a comprehensive written examination covering all of the major areas of
physiology, followed by a written and oral research design examination.
Upon successful completion of the qualifying examination, the student is
admitted to candidacy for the degree of Doctor of Philosophy.
During the third and fourth years the student may enroll in elective
courses. Yearly participation in the teaching practicum provides additional
experience in delivering lectures to undergraduate and professional students.
However, the student's major effort is directed toward dissertation research.
Results of this effort are presented annually in the graduate colloquium.
During these years the student will attend and present papers at national
meetings of scientific societies (e.g., American Physiological Society, Bio-
physical Society, Endocrine Society, Federation of American Societies for
Experimental Biology, Society for Neurosciences). The Ph.D. degree generally
can be completed in four years.
266 PHYSIOLOGY
Research and Instruction
Research Areas— Faculty laboratories offer opportunities for research in
cardiovascular, cell, gastrointestinal, endocrine, muscle, neural, renal, and
respiratory physiology.
Physiology (Physi.)
241. Mechanisms of Body Function. 1. 4 hr. PR: College chemistry, biology, physics, and
algebra or graduate status and consent. A systematic examination of the
homeostatic functions of the human body with emphasis on the physicochemical
mechanisms involved. Pathophysiology and clinical correlations are introduced in
relation to normal physiology.
248. Experimental Design. (For advanced undergraduate and selected graduate stu-
dents.) II. 3 hr. PR: Consent. Theory and practical experience in design of
experiments and processing of physiological data using small laboratory digital
computers. 1 lee, 2 lab.
341. Physiological Methods 1. II. 1-5 hr. PR: Consent. Research techniques and
strategies for physiology.
342. Physiological Methods 2. I. 1-4 hr. PR: Consent. Research techniques and
strategies for physiology.
343. Fundamentals of Physiology. (For dental students and a limited number of regular
full-time graduate students in health sciences basic sciences departments.) I. 5 hr.
PR: College physics, algebra, chemistry, and consent of department chairperson.
Analysis of basic facts and concepts relating to cellular processes, organ systems,
and their control. 3 lee, 1 conf., 1 lab.
344. Medical Physiology 1. (For medical and a limited number of regular full-time
graduate students in health sciences basic sciences departments.) I. 5 hr. PR:
College physics, algebra, chemistry, and consent of department chairperson.
Analysis of basic facts and concepts relating to cellular processes, organ systems,
and their control, with clinical correlations. 5 lee, 1 conf. -lab.
345. Medical Physiology 2. (For medical and a limited number of regular full-time
graduate students in health sciences basic sciences departments.) II. 5 hr. PR:
Physi. 344 and consent of department chairperson. Continuation of Physi. 344. 5
lee, 1 conf.-lab.
346. Neurophysiology. (Forgraduate students in health sciences basic sciences depart-
ments and a limited number of regular full-time graduate students.) II. 1-4 hr. PR:
Math. 3 or 141, Phys. 1 and 2 or consent of department chairperson. Properties of
excitable tissues (nerve and muscle), synaptic transmission, reflexes and central
nervous system function, and behavior. 1-3 lee, 1 conf.
350. Graduate Physiology 1. (For graduate students in health sciences basic sciences
departments and a limited number of other regular full-time graduate students.) I.
6 hr. PR: Calculus, college physics, organic chemistry, biology, and consent of
department chairperson. Analysis of basic facts and concepts relating to cellular
processes, organic systems, and their control.
351. Graduate Physiology 2. (For graduate students in the health sciences basic
sciences departments and a limited number of other regular full-time graduate
students.) II. 6 hr. PR: Physi. 344 or 350 and consent of department chairperson.
Continuation of Physi. 350.
399. Special Topics. I, II, S. 1-4 hr. PR: Consent. Assigned study designed to develop
research skills.
PHYSIOLOGY 267
444. Graduate Seminar. I, II. 2 hr. PR: Graduate standing and consent. (Graded as S or
U.J
490. Teaching Practicum. I, II. 1-3 hr. PR: Consent. Supervised practices in college
teaching of physiology. (Graded as S or U.)
491. Advanced Physiology. I, II, S. 1-15 hr. PR: Consent. Lecture-conference in: cellular
physiology, neurophysiology, circulation, respiration, acid-base and renal physi-
ology, digestion and energy metabolism, and endocrinology. 3 lee, 3 conf.
497. Research in Physiology. I, II, S. 1-15 hr.
498. Thesis. I, II, S. 2-4 hr. PR: Consent. (Graded as S or V.)
499. Graduate Colloquium. I, II. 1 hr. PR: Consent. (Graded as S or U.)
PLANT PATHOLOGY
William L. MacDonald, In Charge of the Graduate Program in Plant Pathology
528 Brooks Hall
Degrees Offered: M.S., Ph.D.
Graduate Faculty: Members Hindal, Kotcon, MacDonald, Morton, Stelzig, and Young.
Graduate studies in Plant Pathology leading to the M.S. and Ph.D.
degrees deal with the biology and control of plant diseases. The teaching and
research faculty is composed of six full-time members with special interests
in the areas of forage, ornamental, forest, vegetable and fruit-tree pathology,
as well as mycology and disease physiology.
Graduate training is designed to offer qualified students a broad
background in the agricultural sciences through cooperation with other
disciplines in the College of Agriculture and Forestry, College of Arts and
Sciences, and School of Medicine.
The primary objective of the research and training program is to provide
students with training for professional careers in plant pathology or other
biology-related areas.
A thesis (M.S.) or dissertation (Ph.D.) is required. Course work and
research problems are designed by the student, the graduate adviser, and the
advisory committee. Admission requirements are those listed on page 383 for
the College of Agriculture and Forestry.
Plant Pathology (P. Pth.)
201. General Plant Pathology. I. 4 hr. Nature and causes of plant diseases; methods of
control.
301. Diseases of Economic Plants. I, II, S. 1-3 hr. per sem.; 2 hr. in Summer. PR: P. Pth.
201 or 303 or consent. Recognition, cause, and control of diseases of economic
plants. [Sem. I— Diseases of vegetable crops and of tree and small fruits; Sem.
II — Diseases of ornamental plants and field and forage crops; S — Diseases of forest
trees. Students may register for 1-3 hr. in Sem. I and II, 2 hr. in Summer, until 8
hours of credit are accumulated.] (Offered in 1985-86 and in alternate years.)
302. Principles of Plant Pathology. II. 4 hr. PR: P. Pth. 153, 201, or 303, or consent.
(Primarily for graduate students and seniors majoring in biology or agricultural
science.) Nature of disease in plants with practice in laboratory methods. (Offered
in Spring of even years.)
303. Mycology. I. 4 hr. Lectures and field and laboratory studies of parasitic and
saprophytic fungi.
268 PLANT PATHOLOGY
309. Nematology. II. 3 hr. (Primarily for graduate students majoring in the agricultural
sciences or biology.) Nematode taxonomy, bionomics, and control, with particular
emphasis on plant parasitic forms. [Offered in Spring of odd years.)
402. Physiology of Plant Diseases. I. 3 hr. PR: Ag. Bi. 310 and P. Pth. 302, or consent.
Study of host-parasite interactions, with emphasis on physiological and bio-
chemical changes that occur in higher plant tissues in response to pathogenic
organisms.
430. Physiology of the Fungi. II. 4 hr. PR: Organic chemistry, mycology, and bacteri-
ology, or consent. Physiological aspects of growth, reproduction, and parasitism
of fungi, with emphasis on nutrition, environment, and other biotic factors.
(Offered in Spring of odd years.)
440. Taxonomy of the Fungi. S. 3 hr. PR: P. Pth. 303. Collection and identification of
fungi with emphasis upon those of economic importance. (Offered in Summer of
even years.)
Plant Science (PI. Sc.)
200. Recognition and Diagnosis of Plant Disorders. 1. 4 hr. PR: P. Pth. 201 and Ento. 204.
Creates an ability for the student to use systematic inspection to determine cause
or causes of a plant disorder.
201. Principles and Methods of Plant Pest Control. II. 4 hr. PR: P. Pth. 201 and Ento. 204.
Concepts of control and how they are implemented by exclusion, eradication,
protection, and immunization.
420. Special Topics. I, II, S. 1-6 hr. Special study in agricultural microbiology, crop
science, horticulture, plant pathology, or soil science.
450. Seminar. I, II. 1 hr. Graduate seminar in agricultural microbiology, crop science,
horticulture, plant pathology, or soil science.
497. Research. I, II, S. 1-15 hr. Graduate research in agricultural microbiology, crop
science, horticulture, plant pathology, or soil science.
POLITICAL SCIENCE
Allan S. Hammock, Chairperson of the Department
316-A Woodburn Hall
Degrees Offered: M.A., Ph.D.
Graduate Faculty: Members Brisbin, DiClerico, Duval, Hedge, Hunter, Kim, Stewart,
Waterman, and Yeager. Associate Members Bingham, Hammock, and Temple.
The Master of Arts and Doctor of Philosophy programs in political
science are designed to give advanced training to students who desire a career
in government or the private sector as policy analysts or who wish to enter
selected teaching or research fields with a specialization in public policy.
Master of Arts with the Public Policy Option
The Master of Arts with emphasis in public policy is offered jointly by the
Department of Political Science and the Department of Economics. It is
designed to provide students with a broad knowledge of the policy making
process and the many factors influencing public policies at the international,
national, state, and local levels of government. A problem-analytic approach,
drawn from both economics and political science, is used to develop the
ability to comprehend, assess, and evaluate issues, problems, and policies in
the public sector. Prospective graduates are expected to be skilled at
gathering and interpreting data, reporting and writing, analyzing policy
POLITICAL SCIENCE 269
options and alternatives, and evaluating the intended and unintended
consequences of public programs and policies. Most graduates will take jobs
in government or private firms.
Eligibility. Ideally, applicants for the master of arts degree should have a
B. A. in Political Science (with a minimum of 6 hours in economics) or a B. A. or
B.S. in Economics (with a minimum of 6 hours in political science). However,
students from other fields and disciplines are also encouraged to apply. In
addition, the applicant should have an overall grade-point average of 2.75,
and should submit two letters of recommendation from faculty familiar with
the student's work. Students must also submit Graduate Record Examination
(general aptitude) test scores.
Course Requirements. In order to remain in good standing, students must
maintain a 3.0 cumulative average and receive a 3.0 average in each semester
for which they are enrolled. Students who do not maintain a 3.0 cumulative
average will be placed on probation and will be suspended if they fail to regain
a 3.0 cumulative average in their next 9 hours of study. Students who do not
achieve a 3.0 semester average will be placed on probation and will be
suspended if they fail to achieve a 3.0 semester average in their next semester
of enrollment.
Admission to candidacy for the M.A. degree requires that the student
complete a minimum of 36 hours (exclusive of colloquium) in a specialized
curriculum offered by the Department of Political Science and the Department
of Economics. This curriculum includes courses in economics, policy evalua-
tion, the policy process, and public policy analysis. In addition, students must
complete work in political science methodology and statistical methods. All
students must enroll in Pol. S. 499 (Colloquium) each semester in residence.
The M.A. degree provides an optional research practicum or internship
during the fourth semester of work. The practicum enables the student to
conduct actual policy research in a public agency. The practicum will carry an
additional 6 hours of graduate credit. Students may also choose a 6-hour
thesis option.
Final Examinations. Students will be expected to pass final written/oral
examinations in policy analysis. Students who fail examinations may be
allowed to re-take them at the next regularly scheduled examination period. It
is contrary to departmental policy to give a third examination.
Doctor of Philosophy (Public Policy) (Ph.D.)
The Doctor of Philosophy (Ph.D.) program is designed for persons in or
planning to enter teaching or public sector management and policy analysis.
The principal change in the discipline of political science in recent years has
been increasing attention to and involvement with public policies. The
Department of Political Science believes that a Ph.D. recipient should possess
a comprehensive knowledge of political science as it relates to the formulation,
implementation, and evaluation of public policies. This requires a thorough
understanding of political dynamics and institutions, a knowledge of manage-
ment tools and data management, and competence in research methodology
and statistical techniques. Further, familiarity with a policy field and the
contributions of related disciplines, particularly economics, is a distinct
advantage to both the teacher-researcher and the policy analyst-manager.
Resources for Graduate Study. The Department of Political Science has
17 full-time faculty members. More than half of these faculty members are
teaching in the policy studies graduate programs. In addition, faculty in the
270 POLITICAL SCIENCE
Departments of Public Administration and Economics teach in the M.A. and
Ph.D. curriculums.
Graduate students have opportunities to perform research with the
policy analysis group, with individual faculty members, and on research
grants. Opportunities exist for field experience in various governmental
agencies.
Admission. Admission to the Ph.D. program is open to students with
either a bachelor's or a master's degree. Students with degrees in political
science, economics, public administration, sociology, psychology, engineering,
social work, business, law, medicine, or journalism are encouraged to apply.
An undergraduate applicant should have a grade-point average of 3.0; a
graduate applicant 3.5. In addition, all applicants must submit the results of
the Graduate Record Examination and at least three letters of recommen-
dations from faculty persons familiar with the applicant's work. Admission
will be based on an overall assessment of the individual's record.
The work of all individuals admitted to the doctoral program will be
formally evaluated at the end of the first two semesters (at least 18 credit
hours of study) at which time one of the following recommendations is made:
(1) admission to candidacy for the doctoral degree; (2) admission to the
master's degree program in public policy studies; or (3) termination.
Course Requirements. The program of each person admitted to the
doctoral program is designed in accordance with his or her career objectives
and previous training. A complete description of the Ph.D. program and
course requirements may be obtained by writing the Director of Graduate
Studies, Department of Political Science, West Virginia University, Morgan-
town, WV 26506. This should be done before application to the program. The
following constitute the formal minimum requirements of the program:
• Public Policy Core (24 hours).
• Policy Research Methods (12 hours).
• Economics (6 hours).
• Policy Field (12 hours).
• Elective Sub-field of Specialization (9-12 hours).
• A dissertation in accordance with individual career goals (24-27
hours).
• Passage of comprehensive written and oral examinations.
In order to remain in good standing, students must maintain a 3.0
cumulative average and receive a 3.0 average in each semester for which they
are enrolled. Students are required to spend at least one year (two semesters)
in residence enrolled in a full-time graduate program of no less than 9
semester hours each semester. All graduate students must enroll in Pol. S. 499
(Colloquium) each semester in residence.
Financial Assistance
The department has a number of assistantships and fellowships available
for students in the public policy specialization. Students interested in
financial assistance should apply directly to the Department of Political
Science. Graduate assistants may enroll for no more than 9 credit hours per
semester (excluding colloquium).
Political Science (Pol. s.)
200. Quantitative Political Analysis. I, II. 3 hr. PR: Upper-division standing. Course
stresses the understanding of methods, theories, and substantive interests
identified with behavioral approach to the study of politics. Descriptive statistics
and the use of SPSS and SAS are included.
POLITICAL SCIENCE 271
210. The American Presidency. I, II. 3 hr. Institutional, behavioral, and societal forces
which have given rise to the modern presidency; factors which enhance and
constrain the exercise of the presidential power over those constituencies with
which the president must interact; the nature and consequences of the presidential
decision-making process; desirability and/or feasibility of reforming the pres-
idency.
212. Judicial Politics. II. 3 hr. The role of courts and judges in the American political
process. Topics include the structure and process of courts, factors involved in
judicial decision-making, and the appropriate role of courts in matters of public
policy.
213. American Constitutional Law. I. 3 hr. The role of the Constitution in the American
political system. Topics covered include the political concept of constitutionalism;
the role of the Supreme Court in the political process; division of powers among the
three branches of government; and the constitutional relation between the
national government and the states.
214. Civii Liberties in the U.S. I, II. 3 hr. Issues in constitutional law concerning
personal liberties against government action. Topics include free speech, press
and association; religious freedoms; abortion; the right to privacy; due process of
law; and criminal procedure safeguards.
218. The Legislative Process. II. 3 hr. Structure and organization of legislative bodies,
powers of legislature, detailed study of law-making procedures, influences of
outside forces.
221. West Virginia Government and Administration. I, II. 3 hr. Organization and
operation of the state government of West Virginia.
225. Urban Politics. I. 3 hr. Legal basis, structure, processes, and politics of urban
governments and cooperative-conflict relations with other governmental units.
226. Problems of State and Local Government. I, II. 3 hr. PR: Pol. S. 120 or equiv. Change
processes in state and local systems in the context of federalism.
231. Criminal Law, Policy and Administration. I, II. 3 hr. Legal and administrative
approach to policy issues in crime and punishment. Focuses on the criminal law,
court decisions, and implementation of law and policy in the criminal justice field.
232. Public Opinion and Propaganda. I, II. 3 hr. The formation, measurement, and
impact of public opinion in the American and cross-national contexts.
235. Civil Rights Policy and Politics. II. 3 hr. Analysis of the law, politics, and policy
related to discrimination in public accommodations, voting, education, housing
and employment based on race, gender, national origin, handicapped status and
age.
236. Energy Policy and Politics. II. 3 hr. An examination of U.S. energy policies and
politics, with particular emphasis placed on the development and implementation
of energy policies since 1973.
238. Politics of Environmental Policy. I. 3 hr. Examines the formulation and evaluation
of United States environmental policy.
240. Public Administration and Social Change. I, II. 3 hr. PR: Pol. S. 140. The study of
government and administrative organization in their relationships to the sources
of change — social, cultural, economic, technological, and environmental — in Amer-
ican society.
242. American Administrative Systems. I. 3 hr. Analysis of the nature and processes of
American public administration (political, legal, economic, and social conditions),
including the role of the bureaucracy in a democracy. (Equiv. to Pub. A. 242.)
272 POLITICAL SCIENCE
244. Administrative Law and Regulation. II. 3 hr. PR: Pol. S. 140 or consent. The law of
public administration, primarily by case method, covering administrative powers
and limitations, procedure in administrative adjudication and rule-making,
discretion, ultra vires as check on administrators, notice and hearing, administra-
tive penalties, judicial control and administrative liability.
246. Comparative Public Administration. II. 3 hr. Theory and practice of public
administration in diverse cultures and national political systems.
250. Government of japan. II. 3 hr. Survey of political institutions and governmental
process of Japan with special emphasis on the analysis of political problems in the
post-war period.
251. Government of Soviet Union and Eastern Europe. II. 3 hr. Survey of the political
nondemocratic governments of the Soviet Union and its Eastern European
satellites, with special reference to the guiding role and development of Marx-
ism-Leninism.
252. Western Democratic Governments. I. 3 hr. Examination of the government and
politics of selected western democracies. Included are Canada, Great Britain,
France, and West Germany.
254. Government of China. I. 3 hr. Survey of political institutions and governmental
process of Communist China with a special emphasis on the analysis of political
problems since 1949.
255. Governments of Latin America. I. 3 hr. Comparative study of the major nations of
Latin America.
256. Governments of the Middle East. II. 3 hr. Governments and political forces of the
Middle East.
258. Politics of Africa. II. 3 hr. Historical legacies and current political processes of
tropical African countries.
261. International Organization. II. 3 hr. Agencies created since the close of World War
II. Some reference to development of international law and United Nations.
262. Nuclear War. 1,11.3 hr. PR: Pol. S. 160 or consent. A study of the current balance of
terror and the potential threat of a nuclear war. This course addresses the
sociopolitical and technological dimensions of this issue from 1945 to present.
263. Public International Law. I. 3 hr. Law governing relations among nations,
including development of rules, means of enforcement, and conflicts between
theory and practice.
264. Conduct of American Foreign Relations. I. 3 hr. Concepts about and factors
influencing the formulation and execution of United States foreign relations;
analysis of past policies and current issue areas in relations with major developed
and developing nations and international organizations.
265. Politics, Ethics and War. II. 3 hr. PR: Pol. S. 160 or consent. An examination of the
relationship between politics, ethics and war with special reference to nuclear
weapons and strategies. Emphasis on the causes of the nuclear dilemma.
266. Soviet Foreign Policy. II. 3 hr. Concepts about and factors influencing the
formulation and execution of Soviet foreign relations; analysis of past policies and
current issue areas in relations with major developed and developing nations and
international organizations.
267. Latin America in International Affairs. II. 3 hr. Relations of Latin American states
among themselves, with the United States, the United Nations, regional organi-
zations, and nonwestern states. Analysis in depth of the Monroe Doctrine and its
corollaries and the inter-American system.
POLITICAL SCIENCE 273
268. International Conflict. I, II. 3 hr. PR: Pol. S. 160 or consent. Conflict in international
relations, particularly armed conflict between nations. The role of force, impact of
modern technology and nuclear weaponry, theoretical and research approaches to
causes of conflict and modes of conflict resolution.
269. Far Eastern International Relations. II. 3 hr. International relations of Far Eastern
countries with emphasis on historic roots of recent conflicts, the competitive role
of the United States and the Soviet Union, confrontation between the communist
and anticommunist countries in the region, and the regional cooperation and
security problems in the post-war period.
272. Recent and Contemporary Political Thought. I. 3 hr. Examination of integral
liberalism and the forces leading to the decline of liberalism and a critical analysis
of the facist and communist ideologies with their threat to the traditions of
western civilization embodied in Christianity and conservatism.
273. American Political Theory. I, II. 3 hr. Major political ideas and their influence upon
American society and government from the seventeenth century to present.
279. Analysis of Political Behavior. II. 3 hr. Examines political behavior in terms of
recent behavior theories emanating from a variety of disciplines.
299. Special Topics. I, II. 1-3 hr.
300. Introduction to Policy Research. I. 3 hr. Introduction to the research methods and
techniques used in policy analysis. Topics include logic of inquiry, research
designs, measurement, and survey and unobtrusive research (3 hr. seminar.)
310. Intergovernmental Relations. I. 3 hr. Examination of the politics and policy
consequences of intergovernmental relations in the United States. Topics include
the development of intergovernmental relations, regulatory federalism, and
intergovernmental fiscal relations. (3 hr. seminar.)
330. Policy Analysis. I. 3 hr. Overview of the field of public policy studies. The issues
and problems involved in studying policymaking, and assessment of policy
analysis as a mode of thinking and inquiry. (3 hr. seminar.)
331. Economic Analysis of Public Policies. 3 hr. Application of economic analysis to
questions of public policy. Consideration of problems of public goods and
usefulness of cost benefit analysis to policymaking. (Equiv. to Econ. 343.]
336. Politics of Agenda Setting. I, II. 3 hr. Examines the confluence of social, economic,
and political influences on the development of public problems and their
placement on the policy agenda. (3 hr. seminar.)
345. Public Administration and Policy Development. II. 3 hr. PR: Pol. S. 140 or consent.
Decision-making and policy development in the administrative process by the
case method. (3 hr. seminar.)
351. Politics of Planned Development. I. 3 hr. Political aspects of social, economic, and
technological change, with special reference to the politics of development
planning and administration. (3 hr. seminar.)
355. Comparative Public Policy. I, II. 3 hr. Comparison of public policy outputs in
several western European countries and Japan with emphasis on the analysis of
variables that account for variations in distributive, regulative, and extractive
policies. (3 hr. seminar.)
360. International Public Policy Analysis. II. 3 hr. Provides a bridge between the
conventional study of international relations and the analysis of externally
directed public policy. Introduces the graduate student to specific policy areas
such as international trade, aid, resources, and security policy. (3 hr. seminar.)
274 POLITICAL SCIENCE
400. Quantitative Methods for Policy Analysis. II. 3 hr. PR: Pol. S. 300 and Stat. 311, or
equivalents. Application of range of statistical techniques in public policy
research. Includes use of selected computer software commonly used in policy
analysis.
401. Advanced Quantitative Methods. I. 3 hr. PR: Pol. S. 400 or equivalent. Advanced
topics in quantitative methods for policy research. Methods surveyed include
multiple linear regression, time-series analysis, causal modeling and linear
programming.
403. Internship. I, II. 6-9 hr. per sem.; students may enroll more than once. PR: Consent.
429. Seminar in State and Local Government. I, II. 3 hr. PR: Consent.
430. Seminar: American Policy Process. I. 3 hr. A survey of the literature which deals
with how various institutions and linkage mechanisms in U.S. politics affect the
public policy process. (3 hr. seminar).
435. Public Policy Evaluation Research. II. 3 hr. Methods and techniques in evaluating
public policies. Topics include the relation of policy analysis to policymaking;
types of evaluation; planning evaluations; alternative evaluation designs; mea-
suring program consequences; problems of utilization; and the setting of evaluation
research. (3 hr. seminar.)
438. Seminar in Public Policy Implementation. II. 3 hr. Research seminar focusing on
factors influencing the capacity of government to deliver services. Includes an
examination of how socio-economic conditions, technology, public opinion,
interest groups, institutional actors, and decision-making variables influence
policy outcomes. (3 hr. seminar.)
439. Seminar in Policy Analysis. I, II. 3 hr. PR: Pol. S. 335 or consent. This course
requires students to conduct an original piece of quantitative policy research.
Designed for advanced students, the course is taken following the completion of
the department's research methods sequence. (3 hr. seminar.)
441. Directed Reading and Research in Public Administration. I, II. 2-4 hr. per sem.;
students may enroll more than once. PR: Pol. S. 140 or consent.
480. Thesis. I, II. 2-6 hr.
491. Advanced Study. I, II. 1-6 hr. PR: Consent.
497. Research. 1-15 hr.
499. Colloquium. I, II. 1-6 hr.
PSYCHOLOGY
William J. Fremouw, Chairperson of the Department
101-A Oglebay Hall
Degrees Offered: M.A., Ph.D.
Graduate Faculty: Members Alavosius, Bradlyn, Caldwell, Chase, Cohen, Cone,
Cummings, Edelstein, Foster, Franzen, Fremouw, Goetsch, Goodman, Greene, Hansen,
Harris, Hawkins, Karraker, Larkin, Lattal, Odom, Parker, Perone, Puckett, Reese,
and Seime. Associate Members Carruth, Comer, and Linton.
Admission. Students are admitted only at the beginning of the fall
semester. Application must be completed by the preceding February 1.
Acceptance is based on: (1) adequate academic aptitude at the graduate level
as measured by the Graduate Record Examination; (2) a minimum grade-
point average of 3.0; (3) personal qualities in the applicant which are
predictive of success in graduate study and satisfactory professional place-
ment after graduation; and (4) adequate preparation in the biological and
PSYCHOLOGY 275
social sciences, experimental psychology, and statistics. By permission,
deficiencies in preparation may be made up after admission to the department.
Students are expected to maintain a 3.0 average in their psychology courses
during the first graduate year and to present a final 3.0 average in all
psychology courses attempted.
Special Graduate Students. Graduate courses in psychology are open
only to regular graduate students except by special departmental permission.
Master of Arts. Two years of full-time study with a minimum of 48 hours
of credit are required for the M.A. degree. Six hours of credit may be counted
for the M.A. thesis if such thesis is required by the option chosen by the
student. The following options are available for the M.A. degree:
1. Intermediate Degree for Ph.D. Candidates. Students who are candidates
for the Ph.D. are expected to complete an M.A. thesis and will receive the M.A.
degree upon completing the thesis and credit-hour requirements.
2. Professional M.A. Degree in Clinical Psychology. This program
prepares the student for work in mental hospitals, mental health clinics,
school mental health programs, and the like. No thesis is required.
Doctor of Philosophy. The doctoral programs aim to prepare a small
number of well-qualified psychologists for three types of careers: (1) teaching
and research in behavior analysis; (2) teaching and research in lifespan
developmental psychology; and (3) teaching, research, and practice in clinical
psychology. A calendar year in an approved internship setting is required of
all clinical students.
Students are accepted for study toward the Ph.D. degree upon entry into
the department. They are formally admitted to doctoral study only after
completion of the master's degree or its equivalent and may be subject to a
screening examination to determine their readiness for doctoral work. Prior to
admission to doctoral candidacy, the student will be admitted to a compre-
hensive preliminary examination in which competence must be demonstrated
in the major area of specialization and a knowledge of such other areas of
psychology as may be required of all graduate psychology students.
Upon passing the preliminary examination, the student is formally
promoted to candidacy for the doctorate. For those students required to
complete an internship as a part of their training, the internship setting must
be approved by the appropriate program committee. In the clinical psychology
programs, the internship must be approved by the program and by the
Director of Clinical Training.
After completion of a satisfactory dissertation and all other requirements,
the candidate takes a final examination, written or oral, concerning the major
emphasis and the dissertation.
Psychology (Psych.)
213. Directed Studies. I, II, S. 1-3 hr. PR: Consent. [No more than 12 hours may be
applied to the 42 hours of psychology to which majors are limited.] Individually
supervised reading, research and/or classroom management projects.
218. History and Systems of Psychology. II. 3 hr. PR: 15 hr. of psychology or consent. A
survey of psychology from its origins in philosophy, biology, and physics through
the several major schools of psychological thought to modern perspectives of
behavior.
223. Cognition and Memory. I. 3 hr. PR: 9 hr. of psychology. Theoretical and empirical
issues in human learning and memory with emphasis on mechanisms of memory,
language, verbal behavior, and conceptual processes.
276 PSYCHOLOGY
224. Conditioning and Learning. 1,11. 3 hr. PR: Psych. 171. Survey of research in operant
conditioning and its implications for behavior theory and applications.
225. Perception. I, II. 3 hr. PR: Psych. 131, 141. A survey of the structure and function of
human sensory systems (primarily visual and auditory) and perceptual issues and
theories.
232. Physiological Psychology. I. 3 hr. PR: Psych. 131. Introduction to the physiological
mechanisms of behavior.
242. Prenatal and Infant Behavior. I. 3 hr. PR: Psych. 131. Early influences upon
behavior and development are investigated; topics include behavioral genetics,
hazards of prenatal development, sensorimotor development, language development,
and socioemotional development.
243. Child and Adolescent Behavior. II. 3 hr. PR: Psych. 141. Theory and research on
major psychological processes in childhood and adolescence are explored including
maturation, personality, socialization, sensory, and cognitive development.
245. Adulthood and Aging. I. 3 hr. PR: Psych. 141. Cognitive and personality changes
from maturity to old age. Psychological reactions to physiological change and to
the establishment and dissolution of family units. Problems of intergenerational
differences in adult behavior.
251. Social Psychology. II. 3 hr. PR: Psych. 151. Social factors which determine human
behavior. Survey of the results of laboratory research in social psychology and its
implications for social phenomena.
262. Psychological Assessment. II. 3 hr. PR: 9 hr. of psychology. Theory and practice in
development and use of psychological assessment procedures. Includes intelligence
testing, behavioral assessment, and interviewing.
263. Comparative Personality Theory. I, II. 3 hr. PR: 9 hr. of psychology or graduate
standing. Theoretical and empirical readings in a survey of major perspectives in
personality theory, including dynamic, cognitive, humanistic, and behavioral
theories of personality.
264. Psychology of Adjustment. II. 3 hr. PR: 9 hr. of psychology or graduate standing.
Dynamic principles of human personality adjustment.
274. Survey of Behavior Modification. I, II. 3 hr. PR: Psych. 171. Behavior therapy and
modification including desensitization, covert sensitization, interpersonal skill
training, aversion techniques, and applied behavior analysis employing operant
principles.
279. Community Psychology. I. 3 hr. PR: Psych. 151. Psychological principles applied
to treatment and intervention strategies at the community level. Manpower
development, organizational change, and systems analysis.
281. Abnormal Psychology. I, II. 3 hr. PR: 9 hr. of psychology or graduate standing.
Major categories of behavioral disorders, e.g., neuroses, psychoses, and character
disorders are considered in terms of etiology, treatment, outcome, and prevention.
282. Exceptional Children. I, II. 3 hr. PR: Psych. 141. Study of children who present
psychological problems: (1) mental retardation, learning disabilities, "giftedness";
(2) organic disabilities having behavioral consequences, such as cerebral palsy or
deafness; and (3) behavior disorders.
297. Honors Investigation and Thesis. I, II. 3 hr. (May be repeated for credit; max. credit
6 hr.) PR: Admission to Honors Program in Psychology. Supervised readings and
investigation culminating in the honors thesis.
301. Personnel Psychology. I or II. 3 hr. PR: Stat. 101, or equiv. Application of
psychological principles and techniques of the problems of measurement and
prediction of proficiency in industry and society.
PSYCHOLOGY 277
304. Leadership and Human Relations in Work Groups. I or II. 1-3 hr. PR: Consent.
Individual work related to either research or practice in the field of human
relations training programs.
307. Practicum in Industrial Interviewing. I or II. 3 hr. PR: Psych. 201 or consent.
Intensive review of principles of selection and validation. Practice interviews
applying nondirective techniques in employment and other types of interview.
311. Research Design and Data Analysis 1. 1. 3 hr. Principles of experimental design in
psychology including group and single subject methodologies. Topics include: (1)
internal and external validity: (2) simple and complex analysis of variance; and (3)
reversal and multiple baseline designs.
312. Research Design and Data Analysis 2. II. 3 hr. PR: Psych. 311 or consent.
Inferential statistics, simple correlation and regression, multiple correlation and
regression, partial correlation, analysis of covariance, analysis of variance of
designs with unequal cell sizes.
313. Directed Study. I. II. S. 1-3 hr. per sem. PR: Consent. Directed reading and research
in special areas. [Undergraduates register for such projects under Psych. 213.)
315. Multivariate Analysis. I or II. 3 hr. PR: Psych. 311. or equiv., and consent.
Correlational methods in psychology with application to typical research problems.
Includes simple matrix algebra, multiple correlation, discriminant analysis, and
an introduction to factor analysis. (Equiv. to Stat. 341.)
316. Correlational and Quasi-Experimental Designs. I. (Alternate Years.) 3 hr. PR:
Psych. 311 and 312 or equiv. Consideration of the methods, measurement, and
analysis of nonexperimental research. Includes survey, correlational, and quasi-
experimental designs; questionnaire and attitude scale construction; nonreactive
measurement techniques; and data analysis.
318. Ethical and Legal Issues. II. 2 hr. The ethical standards for psychologists are
applied to research and clinical problems. The legal regulations and contemporary
issues in mental health are studied.
319. Current Issues in Behavior Analysis. 1. 1 hr. PR: Graduate standing in psychology.
Survey of professional and research issues in general psychology as they relate to
a behavior analysis approach to psychological problems.
320. Experimental Analysis of Behavior. I. 3 hr. PR: Graduate standing in psychology
or consent. Research and theory in the psychology of learning. Assessment of
traditional and behavior analytic approaches to the study of positive reinforcement,
aversive control, and stimulus control. Laboratory work with animals.
321. Human Behavior. I. 3 hr. PR: Psych. 320. Review of the role of basic human operant
research in testing the generality of animal-based behavior principles, analyzing
phenomena that are specific to humans, extending behavior analysis to traditional
psychological problems.
323. Applied Behavioral Research. II. 3 hr. PR: Psych. 320. An examination of
conceptual and empirical issues in applied behavior analysis as illustrated by
recent research. The continuum from laboratory to applied research is emphasized.
324. Organizational Behavior Management. I. 3 hr. PR: Psych. 320 and 323 or consent.
Introduction and comparison of behavioral and systems concepts, methods and
models as they apply to organizations, administration, and human service
management.
333. Seminar: Quality of Work Life. II. 3 hr. PR: Consent. Analysis of current trends and
approaches in "quality of work life improvement," with special attention to
developments in participative management, job enrichment and gain sharing.
Results of current research are featured. (Equiv. to ILR 333.)
278 PSYCHOLOGY
MO. Advanced Developmental Issues and Methodology. II. (Alternate Years.) 3 hr.
Developmental issues Including historical perspectives, validity, theoretical
tems, and growth models are presented along with research methods and
designs employed in life span developmental psychology.
344. Infant Behavior and Development. I. [Alternate Years.) 'A hr. Examination of
theories of infancy and evaluation of current research literature in the area-, of
Cognitive, perceptual, language, and social development. Prenatal and neonatal
development are emphasized. Related social issues will be dis<
:i4r). Child Behavior and Development. II. (Alternate Years.) 3 hr. Examination of the
psychological literature on developmental changes in such areas as learning,
Cognition, language, social relations, and personality during early, mid and late
childhood. Experimental research and theoi y are emphasized and implication! for
life-span development are discussed.
MO. Adulthood and Aging. I. (Alternate Years.) 3 hr. Comparative theories of life-span
development; current issues in research on adulthood and aging, including
personality and socialization, age norms, biological change in adulthood and
aging.
352. Community Psychology. I. (Alternate Years.) 3 hr. Psychological principles and
research findings at the community level are applied to various types of
intervention strategies Manpower utilization, needs assessment, the community
mental health movement, complex organization theory and behavioral systems
analysis are included.
360. Behavior Pathology of Childhood. I. 3 hr. Survey of types of adjustment problems
of children; incidence and research and theory about etiology.
364. Child Behavior Modification. II. 3 hr. Assessment, intervention, and evaluation
strategies appropriate for childhood disorders and based on behavior modification
principles derived from learning theory.
375. Fundamentals of Gerontology. II. 3 hr. PR: MDS 50 or consent. An advanced
multidisciplinary examination of current research in biological, psychological,
and sociological issues of human aging and the ways in which these impinge on the
individual to create both problems and new opportunities. (Also listed at Biol
'MT>.\
379. Introduction to Clinical Psychology. I. 2 hr. PR: Graduate student in psychology or
consent. Basic interviewing skills and current problems in the practice of clinical
psychology.
380. Adolescence and Young Adulthood. I. (Alternate Years.) 3 hr. Examination of
psychological, psychiatric, and sociological research and theory as they pertain to
these phases of the life span Addresses socioemotional and affective development,
cognition, puberty, peer group and familial relationships, labor force entry, and
parenthood.
381. Behavior Pathology. II. 3 hr. PR: Psych. 281 or equiv. Advanced study of diagnostic
classification, functional analysis, and experimental research in psychopathology
of child, adult, and geriatric adjustment problems.
397. Master's Thesis. I and II. 1-6 hr. PR: Consent.
411. Advanced Topics in Single-Subject Research. II. (Alternate Years.) 3 hr. PR:
Psych. 311 and 320. Critical evaluation of single-subject designs in basic and
applied research. Major topics include historical and conceptual bases of single-
lubjed methodology's historical and conceptual bases, its relationship to group-
statistical methods, and its role in behavioristic psychology.
419. Seminar Methodology. I or II. 2 hr. per sem. PR: Consent. Current problems in
statistics and research or instructional methods.
PSYCHOLOGY 279
420. Reinforcement and Punishment. II. (Alternate Years.) 3 hr. PR: Psych. 325, 326.
Theories of response acquisition, maintenance, and suppression are examined in
the context of recent experimental work with animal subjects.
421. Behavior Theory and Philosophy. I. (Alternate Years.) 3 hr. PR: Psych. 325, 326 or
equiv. A critical review of theories, concepts, and methods of psychology.
Cognitive and methodological behavior perspectives are contrasted with the
radical behavioral perspective.
423. Practicum Seminar in Behavior Analysis. II. 3 hr. PR: Psych. 323 and Psych. 324 or
consent. Supervised applied behavior analysis experience integrated with a
seminar which will emphasize group solutions to problems that individuals
encounter in students' applied projects. Progress and final project reports will be
presented and evaluated. (1 hr. seminar; 2 hr. practicum.)
424. Social Behavior. I. (Alternate Years.) 3 hr. A learning approach to social
psychology that will include both basic and applied problem areas. The area of
social exchange such as cooperation, competition, and negotiation will be
emphasized.
425. History and Systems. I. (Alternate Years.) 3 hr. The history of psychology is traced
from European philosophy to the emergence of psychology in the United States.
Emphasis is placed on the development of psychology in the United States leading
to current theory and research.
426. Stimulus Control and Memory. II. (Alternate Years.) 3 hr. PR: Psych. 325 or
consent. Contemporary review of basic research in stimulus control and memory
emphasizing behavior theory.
427. Behavior Analysis Practicum. I, II, S. 1-6 hr. PR: Psych. 318 or consent. Supervised
applied behavior analysis experience in an approved setting.
428. Seminar in Behavior Analysis. II. 3 hr. [May be repeated for credit with consent.)
PR: Consent. Current research and problem areas in the learning approach to
behavior analysis. The topic of a given seminar may be either a basic research or an
applied research problem area.
436. Seminar in Learning and Cognition. II. (Alternate Years.) 3 hr. (May be repeated
for credit with consent.) PR: Consent. Topical seminar on developmental aspects
of learning and cognition. Specific topic examples include the role of imagery in
learning and memory; theoretical analyses of age changes in discriminative
learning and transfer; rules and rule-governed behavior.
437. Practicum in Developmental Psychology. I, II, S. 1-6 hr. PR: Consent. Provides
experience in a wide range of applied settings. Sites are chosen to accommodate
exposure to the entire life-span from infancy through old age. Supervising
reponsibilities are determined by the instructor-in-charge in the agency.
438. Seminar: Early Development. II. 3 hr. (May be repeated for credit with consent.)
PR: Consent. Developmental processes during early childhood are explored with
emphasis on theoretical models, methodological and research issues, and experi-
mental design. The specific topic depends on the instructor.
439. Seminar in Physiological Psychology. I. 2 hr. Current research and problems in
physiological psychology.
442. Topical Seminar: Life-Span Development. I, II. 1-3 hr. (May be repeated for credit
with consent.) PR: Consent. Topical seminar exploring a particular period of the
life span, e.g., adolescence, or perspectives on the life span, e.g., cross-cultural
perspectives on the life cycle.
443. Topical Seminar: Personality and Socialization. II. 3 hr. (May be repeated for
credit with consent.) PR: Consent. Topical seminar on current issues in personality
and socialization over the life-span or during selected periods of the life span.
280 PSYCHOLOGY
451. Clinical Service Management. I. (Alternate Years.) 3 hr. PR: Psych. 350 or consent.
(Specifically designed for doctoral students in psychology.) An overview of
research and intervention strategies in administration and management of
complex human service organizations from a behavioral psychology perspective.
453. Systems Intervention and Consultation. II. (Alternate Years.) 3 hr. PR: Psych. 350
or consent. (Specifically designed for doctoral students in psychology.] Consulting
in complex organizations such as industry, community mental health centers,
mental hospitals, facilities for the retarded, etc. Systems entry and maintenance
are stressed as well as complex organizational theory and behavioral systems
analysis.
456. Program Evaluation in Clinical Services. II. (Alternate Years.) 3 hr. (Specifically
designed for doctoral students in psychology.) Examines the nature, method, and
process of evaluative research, especially as it applies to social and behavioral
treatment and service delivery programs.
457. Systems Practicum in Clinical Services. I, II, S. 1-6 hr. PR: Consent. (Specifically
designed for doctoral students in psychology.) Supervised experience in the
application of behavioral systems analysis and intervention in complex organi-
zational settings.
464. Family and Marital Therapy. II. (Alternate Years.) 3 hr. PR: Clinical experience
and/or relevant course practical graduate standing; at least one upper-division
course in behavior therapy or equivalent. Examines both theoretical and practical
aspects of the assessment and treatment of family and marital difficulties.
467. Child Clinical Practicum. I, II, S. 1-6 hr. PR: Consent. Supervised field experience
in various aspects of delivering psychological services directly or indirectly to
children. Experience in assessment, treatment, program design, administration,
and evaluation.
468. Seminar in Child Clinical Psychology. II. (Alternate Years.) 3 hr. Current issues
and research related to a particular area of clinical psychology involving children.
470. Behavioral Assessment 1. I. 3 hr. Conceptual and methodological bases for
behavioral assessment; comparison of trait-oriented versus behavioral assessment;
design and evaluation of measurement systems, particularly self-report, ratings
by others, and direct observation, within the basic framework of generalizability
theory.
471. Behavioral Assessment 2. II. 3 hr. PR: Psych. 470, consent. Evaluation of clinically
relevant behavior and environments by means of testing and other methods.
Includes test selection, administration, and report writing.
477. Clinical Psychology Practicum. I and II. 1-6 hr. per sem. PR: Consent. Supervised
practice of psychological techniques in clinics or institutional settings. Experience
in psychological testing, interviewing, report writing, case presentation, interpre-
tation of tests and supportive counseling.
479. Seminar: Clinical. I or II. 2 hr. PR: Consent. Research and problems in clinical
psychology.
480. Clinical Neuropsychology. II. 1-4 hr. Neuroanatomical foundations, neurobe-
havioral disorders, neuropsychological assessments, and psychopharmacological
principles and practices relevant to clinical psychology.
481. Psychophysiology. II. (Alternative Years.) 3 hr. PR: 3 hr. of physiological
psychology or consent. The current state of theory, methods, and findings
concerning the association of physiological response systems and psychological
states and processes, including biofeedback intervention.
PSYCHOLOGY 281
482. Adult Behavior Therapy. II. 3 hr. Reviews the roots and development of behavioral
intervention with adult populations. Applied clinical intervention is stressed in
concert with evaluation and research application.
490. Teaching Practicum. I and II. 1-3 hr. per sem. PR: Consent. Supervised practice in
college teaching of psychology.
497. Research. (Dissertation). I and II. 1-15 hr. per sem. PR: Consent.
PUBLIC ADMINISTRATION
David G. Williams, Chairperson of the Department
302-B Woodburn Hall
Degree Offered: M.P.A.
Graduate Faculty: Members Hart-Nibbrig, Pops, Stephenson, Williams, and Wolf.
The Department of Public Administration offers a public administration
curriculum for graduate students seeking the degree of Master of Public
Administration (M.P.A.) or a specialization in the field of another graduate
degree program. This program provides a professional orientation to the
primary facets of public management.
Master of Public Administration (M.P.A.)
The Master of Public Administration curriculum serves the needs of
students from a variety of backgrounds who wish to pursue careers in public
service. It directs particular attention to developing an understanding of the
management function in the public context as well as preparation in utilizing
advanced management techniques. The study program furnishes the student
with opportunities to attain comprehensive understanding of governmental
policymaking and policy execution. The processes of administration are
reviewed in terms of their relationship with, and applicability to, the
functioning of government at all levels.
The program is designed to supply an academic foundation for compre-
hension of the range of processes and management approaches employed in
public administration. These include program planning, personnel adminis-
tration, budgetary policy-making and policy execution, systems approaches,
organizational dynamics, practically oriented research, and leadership.
Particular stress is placed on those functions and issues that require the
greatest degree of adaptation, innovation, and responsiveness on the part of
the professional administrator.
The curriculum reflects the diversity of skills required by all levels of
government. The range of needs is broad in scope; students apply from diverse
backgrounds, including political science, other social sciences, physical
sciences, humanities, and from positions in public service.
Curriculum. The M.P.A. degree requires the completion of 47 credit
hours. This includes:
1. Public administration courses in core areas such as administrative
organization and management, public personnel management, legal and
political foundations, public budget formulation and execution, public finan-
cial management, quantitative analysis (Pol. S. 200), applied research, and
operations research (I.E. 359).
2. Two semesters of colloquium (guest speakers and special presenta-
tions).
3. Intern experience.
4. Selections from a wide range of specialized public administration
courses and elective courses offered in other fields.
282 PUBLIC ADMINISTRATION
Most students take 26 hours of required courses and colloquium, 9 hours
internship, and 12 hours from the specialized public administration and
elective courses. These general requirements can be tailored to individual
student needs with revisions agreed upon by both the student and adviser.
It will usually take the equivalent of one calendar year for full-time
students to complete on-campus requirements. In addition, the off-campus
internship will generally be one semester in length and may be taken after
part of the course work is completed. For those individuals who have been in
full-time public service positions, projects relating directly to that work
experience can be designed for internship credit.
Tool Requirement. While tool skills are included in the required courses,
it is strongly recommended that students take courses in accounting,
statistics, and computer science as part of their undergraduate program.
Course work may also be taken at the graduate level in these subjects (200 and
above) and counted as elective hours.
Admission Requirements. Candidates must meet the WVU general
admission requirements for graduation from an accredited college and grade-
point average. Admission into the M.P.A. program is competitive with
decisions based on:
1. Application for admission and transcripts (submitted to the Dean of
Admissions and Records).
2. Three letters of evaluation (forms are available from Chairperson of
the Department of Public Administration), Graduate Record Examination
scores for the aptitude test, a vita, any other information that would be
supportive, and interviews, where possible. (These materials should be
submitted to the Chairperson of the Department of Public Administration.)
In the case of practicing administrators, a record of accomplishment in
administrative performance will be weighed heavily in combination with the
criteria outlined above.
Students applying for First Semester or Summer admission should have
all application materials submitted no later than March 15. Notification on
admission status will take place around April 1. Students applying for the
Second Semester should have all application materials completed by October
15; notification is given around November 1. Late applications for admission
will be considered when all the above requirements are met, assuming that
openings in the program are available.
Application forms and information may be obtained by contacting the
Chairperson of the Department of Public Administration.
Public Administration (Pub. A.)
242. American Administrative Systems. S. 3 hr. Analysis of the nature and processes of
American public administration (political, legal, economic, and social conditions),
including the role of the bureaucracy in a democracy.) (Equiv. to Pol. S. 242.)
341. Administrative Organization and Management. I, II, S. 3 hr. Introduction to public
administrative organization and such management functions as leadership,
planning, coordination, communication, and decision-making.
343. Public Personnel Administration. I, II. 3 hr. Merit system concept, career staffing,
classification and salary administration, selection, evaluation, manpower utili-
zation, training, the rights and duties of employees, equal employment, and labor
relations in the public sector.
345. Public Administration and Policy Development. I. 3 hr. Policy development
examined in terms of values, process, specific policy cases, alternative "futures"
analyses and policy science.
PUBLIC ADMINISTRATION 283
348. Legal and Political Foundations. I, II. 3 hr. Explores the constitutional basis of
public administration, the legal profession and legal reasoning, U.S. political
processes and structure, and administrative legal process; provides training in
legal research and advocacy; examines administrative legal responsibility.
403. Internship. I, II, S. 3-9 hr. (Students may not enroll more than twice for a total of 9
hr.) PR: Consent; completion of at least one term of graduate study in public
administration. A working internship in a government or public service related
agency, designed to provide students with an opportunity to gain field experience,
and to relate knowledge gained through course work situation. [Graded S or U.)
404. Public Service Internship Analysis. I, II, S. 3 hr. PR: Completion of at least one
term of graduate study in public administration and registration in Pub. A. 403.
Designed for students enrolled in Pub. A. 403. Students undertake in-depth
analysis of elements of their internship (policy matters, organizational questions,
adminstrative dilemmas, etc.), and prepare a written report.
439. Administrative Justice. S. 3 hr. Analysis of concepts of justice in public
administration. The focus is upon conflict between systems of individual and
social justice, personal ethics in government, and the control of administrative
discretion.
440. Readings and Research— Public Administration. I, II, S. 1-3 hr. (Students may
enroll more than once.j PR: Consent. Designed to give specialized coverage to
particular areas of public administration for advanced students.
443. Public Employee Labor Relations. I, S. 3 hr. PR: Consent. Provides overview of
theory, structures, and issues of public-sector labor relations; specific knowledge
and training in processes and behaviors of contract negotiation and contract
maintenance; and introduction to conflict management in nonunionized settings.
444. Public Program Planning. II. 3 hr. Focuses on planning as a determinant of system
direction, operation, and performance. The course is designed both to survey and
make various applications of program planning and systems concepts in public
administration.
445. Public Budget Formulation and Execution. I, II, S. 3 hr. Emphasizes concepts of
budgeting and budgetary applications at the federal, state, and local levels of
government. The case method is utilized to cover objectives, performance criteria,
output measures, and technical procedures.
446. Public Financial Management. I, II. 3 hr. PR: Graduate standing. Examines
financial administration in the public sector with particular attention to revenue
systems, treasury and debt management, financial controls and intergovernmental
fiscal relations. Public policy implications are developed.
447. Applied Research in Public Administration. I, II. 3 hr. PR: Pol. S. 200 and consent.
The student will complete a major field research project. Each project includes
research design, data collection and analysis, and comprehensive final report.
450. Administrative Behavior in Public Organizations. II, S. 3 hr. PR: Consent.
Introduces and familiarizes the student with the nature of individual and group
behavior in public organizations and bureaucratic settings.
491. Advanced Study. I, II, S. 1-6 hr. PR: Consent. Focuses on those subjects of most
topical concern in public administration.
499. Colloquium. I, II. 1 hr. PR: Limited to M.P.A. students. A series of selected speakers
and presentations on a wide range of topics related to public administration and
public affairs. (Graded S or U.)
284 PUBLIC ADMINISTRATION
READING
607 Allen Hall
Degree Offered: M.A.
Graduate Faculty: Members Fairbanks, Helfeldt, Saltz, and P. Smith. Associate
Member Hobbs.
The Division of Education provides opportunities forgraduate study and
research leading to the Master of Arts for educators and other professionals
with educational responsibilities. The primary purpose of the master's
program in reading is to provide increased knowledge, skill, and competence
for teachers or those who work in the field. The program contains a number of
related options for emphasis within its framework, making it flexible enough
to meet a wide variety of needs.
Options are planned by the student, the student's adviser, and the
student's graduate committee to fit the student's career plans. In addition to
the general requirements of the University and the College of Human
Resources and Education, the department requires a core of courses or course
areas and supporting competencies.
All applicants must comply with the general WVU requirements, and
requirements of the College of Human Resources and Education and the
Reading Program.
Graduate students with successful teaching experience at the elementary,
secondary, or college levels, or those who desire to enter these fields, may
wish to increase their competence as teachers of reading, to keep informed of
latest trends and developments in reading education, or to prepare for
positions of greater responsibility.
Course offerings provide opportunities to become familiar with the
organization, implementation, and administration of developmental and
remedial reading programs at the elementary, secondary, and college levels.
Advanced students of superior academic and professional background have
opportunities to participate in clinical work and to become involved in
research.
Option tracks for the Doctor of Education degree and the Certificate of
Advanced Study are worked out individually with each student. Course
requirements depend upon previous academic background and experience
and the position for which the student wishes to prepare. Practical training
for teachers and specialists-in-training is provided by the Reading Clinic.
For further information on admission and program requirements, write,
Chairperson of Graduate Programs, Division of Education, College of Human
Resources and Education, 604 Allen Hall, P.O. Box 6122, Morgantown, WV
26506-6122.
Master of Arts in Reading
Special Program Requirements
1. Students must complete 6 or more hours in reading within two years
after admission (probationary or regular) or admission will be invalidated
and the student will be required to reapply.
2. Program A— Completion of a minimum of 36 hours including the
completion of a problem or thesis.
3. Program B— Completion of a minimum of 36 hours of course work.
4. Successful completion of a written final examination.
READING 285
Course Requirements
The course requirements in Program A and B lead to reading specialist
certification. Electives should be decided in conference with adviser.
A. Required Courses Hours
Program A B
Rdng. 321 3 3
Rdng. 322 3 3
Rdng. 324 3 3
Rdng. 326 3 3
Rdng. 327 3 3
Rdng. 340 3 3
Rdng. 341 3 3
Rdng. 495 6 0
C&I 301 or 304 or 307 0 3
Ed. P. 330 or Rdng. 380/Measurement/Evaluation in Lang. Arts ... 3 3
Ed. P. 300 or 450 or 451 or Psych. 263 or 264 or 281 3 3
Sp. Ed. 250 or Psych. 282 3 3
36 33
B. Electives 0 3
Total 36 36
The College of Human Resources and Education and the West Virginia
Department of Education are in the process of reviewing and revising all certification
programs. Students are warned that programs printed in the Catalog may not be in
effect at the time of their registration and are advised to see their adviser upon
arrival on campus.
Reading (Rdng.)
221. Developmental Reading. I, II. 3 hr. PR: Consent. Fundamentals of reading
instruction. Emphasizes classroom organization and teaching techniques.
222. Reading in the Content Areas. I, II. 2 hr. Skills and strategies needed by content
area teachers to reinforce the reading skills necessary for the effective learning of
secondary students in the content areas.
240. Corrective Language Arts Techniques. I, II. 3 hr. PR: Rdng. 221, consent.
Fundamentals of informal language arts diagnosis and corrective classroom
language arts instruction. A practicum for the utilization of informal diagnosis
and correction techniques is provided.
283. Special Workshop in Reading. I, II, S. 1-6 hr. For elementary and secondary
students in preservice education programs, as well as for elementary and
secondary teachers in inservice education.
321. Reading Instruction in Elementary Schools. I, II, S. 3 hr. Gives students who have
little or no background in reading an opportunity to study the reading process and
to learn how to apply effective techniques and methods at the elementary school
level. Grades K-6.
322. Reading Instruction in Secondary Schools. I, II, S. 3 hr. The reading skills essential
at the secondary level and how they may be developed in the various subject-
matter areas.
323. Reading and Early Childhood Education. I, II, S. 3 hr. Development of a reading-
language program for young children that includes consideration of: (1) the nature
of the beginning reading process; and (2) the nature of children's cognitive,
perceptual, linguistic, psychological, physical, and social growth.
286 READING
324. Foundations of Reading Instruction. I, II, S. 3 hr. The physiological, psychological,
sociological, and historical foundations underlying the development of reading
proficiency. For majors in education, reading, counseling and guidance, special
education, speech communication, and other areas requiring an understanding of
the reading process.
325. Survey of Major Problems in Reading. II, S. 3 hr. PR: Rdng. 321 or 322 and 324. A
research course in which each student will complete an individual problem in an
area of special interest.
326. Reading Leadership Skills. I, II, S. 3 hr. PR: 18 hr. of M.A. requirements. Roles,
responsibilities, and practices of reading specialists and administrators in
organizing reading programs from early childhood through college.
327. Developing Reading Interests. I, II, S. 3 hr. Emphasis on methods and techniques
for developing reading habits, interests, and tastes and on motivating individuals
to read. Special attention is given to integrating the use of children's literature
with creative oral and written langauge.
330. Teaching the Language Arts. II, S. 3 hr. The interrelationship of the different
phases of the language arts. Special attention to organizing the language arts
program, selecting materials and equipment, and understanding effective tech-
niques and methods for teaching listening, oral language, written language,
handwriting, and spelling.
331. Selection and Evaluation of Reading Materials. I, S. 3 hr. PR: Rdng. 321. Survey of
critical reading skills, techniques, and procedures with emphasis on the selection
of supplementary materials needed for effective development and remedial
reading programs.
332. Survey of Major Problems in the Language Arts. II, S. 3 hr. PR: Rdng. 330 or
consent. An advanced course covering major problems of the teacher or supervisor
of language arts instruction. A research course in which the student completes an
individual problem.
340. Diagnostic and Prescriptive Reading Instruction. I, II, S. 3 hr. PR: 6 hr. of Rdng.
321, 324 or 332. Course designed to develop and implement theoretical concepts in
the diagnosis and prescription of language problems. Emphasis on techniques
utilized by classroom and special teachers of reading and language arts.
341. Problems in Clinical Reading. I, II, S. 3 hr. PR: Rdng. 340. Laboratory course in
remedial reading. Major emphasis on tutoring remedial cases in the Reading
Center.
342. Reading Diagnosis and Prescription in Learning Disabilities. I, II, S. 3 hr. PR:
Consent. Basic course in diagnostic and prescriptive reading techniques and
procedures for learning disability majors. Special emphasis on practicum experi-
ences in administering and interpreting reading tests, as well as prescribing and
administering remediation suggestions.
380. Seminar. I, II, S. 1-6 hr. PR: Consent. Seminar for master's degree students
stressing special topics concerned with the education and sociological and
psychological aspects of language arts instruction.
381. Special Topics. I, II, S. 1-6 hr. PR: Consent. Special topics or research in reading
and language arts for master's degree students in reading.
385. Practicum. I, II, S. 1-12 hr. PR: Consent. Practicum type course for master's degree
student teaching, and reading administration and supervision practicum experience
can be pursued.
442. Diagnosis of Reading Difficulties. I, S. 3 hr. PR: Rdng. 340. Advanced instruction in
diagnosis. Emphasis on use of standardization tests, informal tests, machines, and
observation in determining reading difficulties.
READING 287
443. Correction of Reading Difficulties. II, S. 3 hr. PR: Rdng. 442 or consent. Advanced
instruction correcting reading difficulties. Emphasis on methods of teaching, use
of machines and commercial materials, constructing and using teacher-made
exercises, and evaluating progress.
444. Advanced Clinical Reading. I, II, S. 3 hr. PR: Rdng. 341. Laboratory course in
remedial reading. Emphasis on diagnosis and treatment of reading difficulties.
480. Seminar, I, II, S. 1-6 hr. PR: Consent. The interrelationships among the language
arts: mental, physical, and psychological deterrents to language arts; and similar
topics.
481. Special Topics. I, II, S. 1-6 hr. PR: Admission to doctoral program in reading and
consent. Advanced seminar. Weaknesses and strengths in current reading pro-
grams, needed research in reading, and suggestions for improving reading
instruction at elementary, secondary, and college levels.
485. Practicum. I, II, S. 1-12 hr. PR: Consent. Practical application of reading theory to
organizing and conducting developmental and remedial reading programs.
495. Problem in Reading. I, II, S. 3 hr. Research for master's degree in reading.
RECREATION AND PARKS MANAGEMENT
Jack E. Coster, Chairperson of Division of Forestry
322-A Percival Hall
Harry V. Wiant, Jr., Coordinator of the Graduate Program
Degree Offered: M.S.
Graduate Faculty: Members E. C. Bammel and L. L. Bammel. Associate Members
Hummel-Azzaro and Hutchison.
Master of Science (M.S.)
The Division of Forestry of the College of Agriculture and Forestry offers
programs leading to the degree of Master of Science (M.S.) for students who
wish to major in recreation and parks management fields.
Graduate program options include, but are not limited to: recreation
administration and policy, environmental education and interpretation, and
recreation planning and resource management. Admission requirements are
listed on page 383 for the College of Agriculture and Forestry. Degree
requirements are either 30 semester hours of approved study, including a
6-hour thesis, or 36 hours without a thesis but with a 3-hour problem paper.
These programs ordinarily require two years of residence.
Recreation and Parks (Re. & Pk.)
202. Recreation Internship. I. 3 hr. PR: Re. & Pk. 43, 44, 251/263, 233/235/271.
Supervised, full-time leadership responsibility with a recreation agency for a
minimum of eight weeks. Program must relate to the student's curriculum option
and must be approved in advance by the internship program coordinator.
203. Professional Synthesis. I, II. 3 hr. PR or Cone: Re. & Pk. 202. A capstone course for
seniors that involves the synthesizing of professional training and field work
experiences.
216. Philosophy of Recreation. II. 3 hr. PR: Consent. Interpretation of recreation as a
basic part of the living process; importance to individual community and national
welfare; social and economic significance.
288 RECREATION AND PARKS MANAGEMENT
233. Wildland Recreation Management. I. 3 hr. PR: F. Man. 12 or consent. Topics
include an analysis of administrative agencies concerned with wildland manage-
ment; methods of ameliorating human impact on outdoor recreation resources;
discussion of philosophies underlying wilderness recreation; and a review of
contemporary controversies concerning wildlands. 2 hr. lee, 1 hr. lab.
234. Wilderness in American Society. II. 3 hr. PR: Re. & Pk. 233 or consent. A seminar
examining political, sociological, and environmental aspects of American wilder-
ness. A discussion on articles concerning wilderness preservation, management,
and aesthetics.
235. Parks and Recreation Administration. I. 3 hr. PR: 12 hr. recreation and parks
courses, junior standing, or consent. Principles of administration as applied to the
operation of recreation and park agencies, including legal foundations, policy,
organization, personnel, finance, and programs of service.
241. Recreational Services for Special Populations. I. 3 hr. PR: Consent. Introductory
analysis of current therapeutic recreation services; attentiveness to the need for
broadening recreation and park services to include members of special populations;
familiarization with the planning consideration for the conduct of such services.
242. Historical and Cultural Interpretation. II. 3 hr. PR: Recreation and parks major or
consent. Methods of locating source materials for reconstructing the historical,
cultural, and physical aspects of an area for an interpretive center; preparing
brochures, displays, and nature trails to facilitate interpretive activities.
248. Environmental Concerns in Outdoor Recreation. I. 3 hr. PR: Consent. Understanding
and interpreting environmental concerns within the context of outdoor recreation.
251. Recreation Leadership. I. 3 hr. PR: Recreation and parks major or consent.
Leadership functions and techniques, group dynamics, supervision, and use of
volunteers. Theory and practice are related through a field placement with a local
recreation agency.
263. Program Planning. II. 3 hr. PR: Recreation and parks major or consent. Funda-
mentals for general program planning; considers needs, facilities, age groups, local
customs, climatic factors, etc. Planning involved in playgrounds, indoor centers,
playfields, parks, hospitals, voluntary agencies, industries, and camps.
265. Planning and Design of Recreation Places. II. 3 hr. PR: Recreation and parks major
or consent. Study of planning and design concepts, standards and guidelines, use
continuum, grants-in-aid, and planning of selected areas of facilities: parks, pools,
centers, and recreation resource areas development.
271. Administration of Camping Services. II. 3 hr. PR: Recreation and parks major or
consent; Re. & Pk. 40 or equiv. Principles involved in modern camping programs,
and organization and administration of camps.
280. Therapeutic Recreation Principles and Procedures. I. 3 hr. PR: Re. & Pk. 241 or
consent. Basic intervention techniques in providing therapeutic recreation services,
including individual and small group techniques, adaptive equipment, assistive
techniques, standards, regulations, and ethics.
282. Therapeutic Recreation Program Planning. II. 3 hr. PR: Re. & Pk. 241 or consent.
Design and development of therapeutic recreation programs utilizing a systems
approach based on leisure related needs of clients. Includes assessment, program
development, implementation, monitoring, and evaluation.
408. Practicum in Recreation. I, II. 4 hr. PR: Re. & Pk. 472, PESE 396, 397. Program
planning, curriculum development, and job functions in recreation.
415. Leisure and Recreation. I. 3 hr. PR: Consent. Study of leisure as a social
phenomenon and its implications for recreation.
RECREATION AND PARKS MANAGEMENT 289
421. Recreation Planning in Human Interest Areas. I. 3 hr. Exploration of human
interest areas as sources of recreation program content; their nature, factors, and
extent of participation; and their structuring and administration through work
program planning. (Offered in Fall of even years.]
462. Community Recreation. I. 3 hr. PR: Re. & Pk. 316 or consent. Study of problems
related to providing adequate recreation services for a community. Standards and
quality of recreation service; methods of measuring existing services and their
coordination; community organization procedures. For leaders in voluntary
agencies, schools, churches, and municipal recreation organizations. (Offered in
Fall of odd years.)
472. Seminar in Recreation. I, II. 1-3 hr. (Repeatable up to 6 hr. credit.) Overview and
critical analysis of literature in recreation interpretation, environmental concerns,
or leisure studies.
REHABILITATION COUNSELING
Robert P. Marinelli, Program Coordinator
504 Allen Hall
Degree Offered: M.S.
Graduate Faculty: Members L. S. Cormier, W. H. Cormier, Jacobs, Majumder, Marinelli,
Masson, Messing, Srebalus, Tunick, and Yura. Associate Members DeLo, Greever,
Judy, and Moriarty.
The rehabilitation counseling program in the College of Human Resources
and Education offers a curriculum at the master's degree level. All students
enroll for a general counseling core during their first semester and then select
an area of emphasis for the balance of their graduate studies.
General Requirements for Admission
All applicants must comply with the requirements of the the College of
Human Resources and Education, and the Department of Counseling and
Rehabilitation Counseling. The program in rehabilitation counseling requires
a program application, letters of recommendation, and a program interview.
Students are encouraged to pursue as much of their programs as possible
on a full-time basis.
Core Requirements for Rehabilitation Counseling
All students will be expected to take the following core courses:
Coun. 301— Counseling Techniques
Coun. 305 — Theory and Practice of Human Appraisal
Coun. 306— Counseling Theories
Coun. 309— Group Counseling Theory and Techniques
Rehab. 300 — Introduction to Rehabilitation Services
Rehab. 310— Medical Aspects of Disability
Rehab. 312— Psychological Aspects of Disability
Rehab. 320— Career Development and Job Placement
Rehab. 472— Counseling Practicum
Rehab. 475— Clinical Practice
Rehab. 480 — Research Seminar
Please contact the program for a listing of the additional required courses
in this area.
Rehabilitation Counseling (M.S.)
This professional counseling specialty provides vocational evaluation
and counseling services to physically handicapped clients, persons with
290 REHABILITATION COUNSELING
learning difficulties, and those who are seeking readjustment from emotional
problems. Counselors work for both public and private rehabilitation agencies,
centers, workshops, and industry. The program, which offers training options
in rehabilitation counseling and vocational evaluation, as well as an option
combining both areas, is accredited by the Council on Rehabilitation Education.
The degree requirements include completion of the core courses, required
rehabilitation counseling courses, and a 10-12 hour supervised clinical
practice placement (internship) under faculty direction in a rehabilitation
setting. The rehabilitation counseling and vocational evaluation programs
require a minimum of 45 semester hours with a 3.0 grade-point average. The
combined program requires 51 semester hours. In addition to completing all
course work and the internship satisfactorily, a candidate must demonstrate
the ability to assume the responsibility required of a professional counselor
and the personal characteristics essential to effective working relationships
with others.
Students may take the professional certification examinations to obtain
national certification as a rehabilitation counselor or vocational evaluator.
The College of Human Resources and Education is currently undergoing
curriculum review. Deviations may occur in the following published pattern of
anticipated course availability by semester.
Counseling (Coun.)
301. Counseling Techniques. I, II, S. 3 hr. PR: Consent. Development and application of
basic counseling skills including interviewing, clinical observation, and a general
orientation to counseling settings. Evaluation will be based on strengths and
deficits in intra and interpersonal skills and on demonstration of counseling skills
in checkout situations. In setting laboratory experience required.
305. Theory and Practice of Human Appraisal. I, II, S. 3 hr. An overview of
standardized evaluation methods commonly utilized in educational and rehabil-
itation settings. Experience is provided in selection, administration, and interpre-
tation of selected instruments.
306. Counseling Theories. II, S. 3 hr. PR: Coun. 303 and consent. A study of counseling
approaches commonly used in public schools, colleges, and rehabilitation agencies.
Application of theory emphasized.
Rehabilitation Counseling (Rehab.)
300. Introduction to Rehabilitation Services. I. 3 hr. PR: Consent. Introduction to
comprehensive rehabilitation, its history and development as a philosophy
process, and professional area. Professional and ethical issues in rehabilitation
counseling. Other services involved in various rehabilitation settings.
310. Medical Aspects of Rehabilitation. II. 3 hr. PR: Consent. An overview of medical
aspects and implications of disability for the handicapped person in the rehabili-
tation process. Studies of the more common severe disabilities and their remedi-
ation also will be included.
312. Psychological Aspects of Disability. II, S. 1-3 hr. PR: Rehab. 310; graduate
standing and consent. The impact of disability considering cultural, interpersonal,
and intrapersonal factors. Methods of assisting persons to adjust to problems of
disability.
314. Special Problems in Rehabilitation. I, II. 3 hr. PR: Graduate standing and consent.
Rehabilitation theory and techniques in problems such as blindness, epilepsy, and
mental retardation. Concentrated study in special institutes.
REHABILITATION COUNSELING 291
320. Career Development and Job Placement. II. 3 hr. PR: Consent and graduate
standing in social sciences or education. Principles and methods involved in the
vocational counseling and placement of disabled persons. The use of occupational
and educational information. Theories of career development, occupational
analysis, and job placement in rehabilitation.
321. Vocational Evaluation Systems and Techniques. II. 3 hr. PR: Rehab. 300. An
introduction to vocational evaluation. Formal and informal vocational evaluation
systems and procedures will be explored with the goal of preliminary development
of individualized evaluation plans.
322. Advanced Vocational Evaluation Techniques. S. 3 hr. PR: Rehab. 321. Advanced
vocational evaluation systems including empirically based and informal systems
will be studied. Emphasis will be on administration, scoring and interpretation,
particularly as it relates to handicapped populations with specific evaluation
problems.
323. Seminar in Vocational Evaluation Services. S. 3 hr. PR: Rehab. 321 and consent.
Supervisory and professional issues in vocational evaluation services with an
emphasis on standards, methods, procedures and resources for developing and
maintaining vocational evaluation services.
374. Field Work in Rehabilitation. I, II, S. 1-6 hr. PR: Consent. Supervised field work
experience in rehabilitation settings to provide rehabilitation counseling students
with a more adequate orientation to their profession.
391. Advanced Topics. I, II, S. 1-6 hr.
462. Clinical Conference in Vocational Rehabilitation. II. 3 hr. PR: Rehab. 300, graduate
standing, and consent. Exploration and evaluation of current methods of service
delivery to vocational rehabilitation clients. Analysis and integration of service
systems and the needs of the disabled client.
472. Counseling Practicum. I, II, S. 1-4 hr. PR: Graduate standing, liability insurance,
and consent. Supervised experience in the application of counseling techniques in
the rehabilitation process. Demonstration of high professional standards, coun-
seling skills, and personal characteristics appropriate to the counseling relationship
are essential.
475. Clinical Practice. I, II, S. 1-2 hr. PR: Liability insurance, consent, following at least
one academic semester in the classroom. Clinical practice (internship) in selected
agencies, rehabilitation centers, clinics, or hospitals conducting an organized
program of services for the physically, mentally, emotionally, or socially handi-
capped. Practice will be under direct supervision of faculty and agency personnel.
480. Seminar. I, II, S. 1-12 hr. PR: Consent. Administration of programmatic research;
legal and ethical issues in research and service programs, etc.
481. Special Topics. I, II, S. 1-6 hr. PR: Consent. Contemporary issues in the behavioral
sciences and rehabilitation.
482. Workshop in Rehabilitation. I, II, S. 1-12 hr. PR: Consent. Supervision in the
counseling process; vocational evaluation in rehabilitation; utilization of rehabili-
tation research; contemporary issues in rehabilitation.
491. Directed Study and Research. I, II. 1-6 hr. PR: Consent. Readings and/or
independent research in related topic.
292 REHABILITATION COUNSELING
REPRODUCTIVE PHYSIOLOGY
E. Keith Inskeep, Chairperson of the Interdisciplinary Faculty
G-044 Agricultural Sciences Building
Degrees Offered: M.S., Ph.D.
Graduate Faculty: Members Butcher, Dailey, Goodman, Inskeep, Lewis, Mawhinney,
and Nath. Associate Members Collins and Horvath.
The graduate program in Reproductive Physiology, leading to the M.S.
and Ph.D. degrees, is interdisciplinary, with faculty located in the Departments
of Animal and Veterinary Sciences, Obstetrics and Gynecology, Pharmacology
and Toxicology, Physiology, and Plant and Soil Sciences. Requirements for
admission include at least a 2.75 grade-point average (4.0 system) and
completion of the following prerequisites with a grade of C or better in each:
calculus, genetics, organic chemistry, physics, and vertebrate embryology. It
is recommended but not required that applicants complete both the aptitude
and the advanced tests of the Graduate Record Examination. Foreign
languages are not required for a degree in reproductive physiology. Only a
limited number of students are accepted each year.
Research Areas: Function and regression of the corpus luteum, aging of
the oocyte in abnormalities of development, control of postpartum repro-
ductive performance, metabolism and steroid receptors of male sex accessory
tissue, environmental factors in reproduction, control of steroidogenesis,
control of estrus and ovulation, new methods of artificial insemination,
behavioral aspects of reproduction, endocrine functions of polypeptides, and
roles of prostaglandins in reproduction.
Research can involve farm animals and laboratory species. The program
draws on courses offered in various departments and includes courses in
endocrinology, advanced reproductive physiology, biochemistry, physiology,
statistics, and developmental embryology.
SAFETY STUDIES
Daniel E. Della-Giustina, Chairperson, Department of Safety Studies
281 Coliseum
Degree Offered: M.S.
Graduate Faculty: Members Della-Giustina, McPherson, Marcum, Shaffron, and
Sorine. Associate Member Friend.
Master of Science in Safety Studies
Concentration in safety studies at the master's and post-master's degree
level provides opportunity for individuals to elect courses and related
experiences aimed at developing competencies needed by driver safety
educators, occupational safety managers, or school safety coordinators.
Baccalaureate degree programs from which students are usually admitted
include business management, engineering, technology education, physical
education, physical science, psychology, sociology and anthropology, or
safety, provided that a 2.75 grade-point average has been achieved. Otherwise,
admission must be of provisional status, which requires the student to earn a
3.0 average during the first 12 semester hours of residence work and also to
pass qualifying examinations in order to continue.
University regulations for graduate study govern the general requirements
of the master of science degree. Additionally, however, the candidate must
complete a minimum of 36 semester credit hours, including approved research
SAFETY STUDIES 293
in safety to qualify as a degree recipient. A grade-point average of 3.0 is
required for graduation.
Course work is planned in consultation with the adviser and approval
must be obtained from the adviser before enrollment in courses. Six semester
hours of course work may be devoted to directed electives from one of the
student's undergraduate major or minor fields or from a field allied to safety.
Students are encouraged to complete the aptitude test of the Graduate Record
Examination within the first 18 semester hours after matriculation.
A student is accepted as an advanced candidate for the degree if course
work and requirements are satisfactory, as judged by the graduate committee
of the department. During the final session or semester of study, each student
is required to pass an examination dealing with the core subject matter and
specialization emphasis.
Off-Campus Graduate Program
Courses are scheduled at the four WVU off-campus graduate centers in a
sequence that should enable interested students to complete programs within
a three-year period.
Certificate of Advanced Study (C.A.S.)
This area of specialization is aimed at preparing individuals with
emphasis in safety management training beyond the master's degree. The
completion of a master's degree in safety or the equivalent is comparable to
the WVU Master of Science in Safety Studies with approved practicum
experience. In order to graduate, the student must complete 36 semester hours
of approved graduate work. A minimum grade-point average of 3.2 on all
course work attempted is required. The student must defend a research
problem in areas of specialization for the Certificate of Advanced Study,
which is awarded by the Division of Education of the College of Human
Resources and Education.
Doctor of Education (Ed.D.)
Option tracks are offered leading to the Doctor of Education (Ed.D.)
degree in safety studies, safety management, loss countermeasures, and
emergency preparedness. The degree is awarded by the Division of Education.
Admission to the Program
Special-Provisional Status— Applicants for admission must submit the
following:
• Scores on the aptitude test of the Graduate Record Examination or
Miller Analogies Test;
• Three letters of recommendation (one of which must be submitted by
the applicant's immediate employment supervisor or master's degree academic
adviser);
• A complete transcript of undergraduate and graduate education.
All materials and procedures must be completed by April 1 of the year in
which the applicant intends to begin a doctoral program. Upon completion of
the above procedures, the student is admitted as an advanced graduate
student with special-provisional status. During the semester in which the
advanced graduate student with special-provisional status completes the
twelfth hour of resident course work, the student shall request, through the
office of the chairperson of the appropriate doctoral program, admission to
294 SAFETY STUDIES
the program with regular graduate status. Advanced graduate students with
special-provisional status cannot register for course work beyond the twelfth
hour without having been admitted to the program as a student with regular
graduate status.
Reguiar Graduate Student Status— Acceptance as an advanced graduate
student with regular status is contingent upon the graduate committee's
decision regarding the applicant's potential for scholarly productivity as
judged by Graduate Record Examination or Miller Analogies scores, past
performance in course work, and letters of recommendation, as well as a
personal interview, if deemed necessary. Applicants who satisfy standards
for admission are assigned an adviser based upon the student's program
interest.
Program Requirements— Once the student is admitted to the program, the
student, in concert with the adviser, selects a doctoral committee. It is this
committee's responsibility to aid the student in planning the total program.
During the process of completing a program, the student is expected to fulfill a
residency requirement specified by the committee.
Admission to Candidacy Requirements— As the student nears the ter-
mination of the course work, application may be made to complete the final
comprehensive examination. This examination consists of scholarly tasks
designed to function as a comprehensive learning experience. The examination
is constructed by the student's doctoral committee. Students who do not
successfully complete this examination may be permitted to attempt the
examination one more time pending an appeal and subsequent sanction of the
student's doctoral committee. There must be a time period of at least six
months between the first and second examination periods.
Upon successful completion of the final comprehensive examination, the
student may present to the doctoral committee a prospectus of the dissertation.
If the opinion of the committee is such that the student may proceed with the
dissertation, the student is admitted to candidacy.
Final Requirements— Upon the completion of the dissertation, the can-
didate will appear before the doctoral committee for an oral defense of the
study. Successful defense of the dissertation results in the awarding of the
degree. All requirements must be completed within seven years.
Safety Studies (Saf. S.)
231. Safety in Motor Transportation Services. II. 3 hr. PR: Saf. S. 131 or consent. Safety
elements of automotive transportation equipment. Design, operation, planning
and control plus effects of legislation. The school motor fleet is highlighted.
232. Safety Education Principles and Content. I. 3 hr. PR: Saf. S. 131 or consent. Study
and analysis of content areas usually recommended for instructional programs
within the field of safety, with emphasis on structured learning experiences.
233/333. Disaster Preparedness and Emergency Systems. 3 hr. Major elements
involved in disasters and emergencies, preparedness planning, systems utilization,
and attention to essential human services, with emphasis on community action.
234/334. Establishing and Managing Fire Services. 3 hr. Analysis of fire services
usually provided under safety manager jurisdiction, with special attention to legal
bases, organizational structure, services rendered, training needs and management
techniques.
239 / 339. Security Management Practices and Problems. 3 hr. Safety manager respon-
sibilities for security of persons and property including organizational patterns,
personnel competencies expected, surveillance and monitoring methods, and
occupational problems among security personnel.
SAFETY STUDIES 295
254. Teaching Driver and Highway Safety. S. 3 hr. PR: Saf. S. 151 or equiv. and valid
driver license. Teaching and coordinating driver and highway safety education in
schools. Arranged ice in providing behind-the-wheel instruction to beginning
drivers.
256. Driver and Safety Instructional Innovations. II, S. 3 hr. PR or Cone: Saf. S. 151 and
254. Multimedia, multivehicle, simulation, and other innovations for classroom
and laboratory instruction applied to driver and safety education as revealed by
research and current literature.
291. Special Topics. I, II, S. 2-6 hr. PR: Consent. Consideration of persistent issues and
changing problems in the safety field. Seminar emphasis extends considerable
attention to safety interests of participating class members.
301. Safety Function Management Integration. I, II, S. 3 hr. PR: Consent. Consideration
of integrated arrangements, common constraints, developmental level, essential
guidelines, staff liaison, project improvement, effectiveness audits, and collabo-
ration needed to assure success of the safety function.
303. Risk Counteractant Resource Preparedness. I, II, S. 3 hr. PR: Consent. Counteraction
of risk involving deficient resource preparedness by emphasizing problems
delineation, ergonomic adjustments, work-task analyses, performance standards,
quality supervision, essential training and pertinent management techniques.
310. Controlling Environmental and Personnel Hazards. I or II, S. 3 hr. PR: Saf. S. 300 or
consent. Investigation of hazard control principles relating to environmental
facilities and equipment including control procedures recommended by authorities
from the fields of engineering, medicine, and public health as well as from the field
of safety.
333. Disaster Preparedness and Emergency Systems. I or II, S. 3 hr. PR: Saf. S. 300 or
consent. Major elements involved in disasters and emergencies, preparedness
planning, systems utilization, and attention to essential human services, with
emphasis on community action.
334. Establishing and Managing Fire Services. I or II, S. 3 hr. PR: Saf. S. 300 or consent.
Analysis of fire services usually provided under safety manager jurisdiction, with
special attention to legal bases, organizational structure, services rendered,
training needs, and management techniques.
335. Safety Legislation and Compliance Operations. I, S. 3 hr. PR: Saf. S. 300 or consent.
Comprehensive study and analysis of federal and state legislation which mandates
compliance with certain safety conditions and practices related to work performed
in occupational and comparable settings.
339. Security Management Practices and Problems. I or II, S. 3 hr. PR: Saf. S. 300 or
consent. Safety manager responsibilities for security of persons and property
including organizational patterns, personnel competencies expected, surveillance
and monitoring methods, and occupational problems among security personnel.
361. Loss Initiating Adversities Remediation. I, II, S. 3 hr. Perception of adversities
tolerated as an extension of uncontrolled hazardous exposure with remediation
concentrated upon identification, confirmation, and correction services including
utilization of specialist personnel.
363. Disabled Enterprise Resources Restoration. I, II, S. 3 hr. PR: Consent. Examination
of management guidelines, reporting procedures, insurance variations, rehabili-
tation and restoration efforts, and recovery procedures needed to successfully
restrain losses attributed to disabled enterprise resources.
418. Safety, Measurement, Evaluation, and Research. II, S. 3 hr. PR: Saf. S. 300.
Analysis of evaluative data and statistical procedures applicable to the safety
field plus investigation of the nature and purposes of research dealing with safety
and accident prevention with emphasis on human and environmental factors.
296 SAFETY STUDIES
452. Manpower Development for Safety Responsibilities. II. 3 hr. PR: Graduate
standing in safety studies and consent. Safety manpower positions, needs and
problems in relation to efforts by business, industrial, governmental and educa-
tional agencies to provide sufficiently effective professional and sub-professional
preparation of safety practitioners.
459. Directed Study. I, II, S. 1-6 hr. PR: Doctoral level standing and consent. (Required
of all candidates for doctoral degrees in safety studies.] Analysis of research
designs and procedures for compilation, organization, treatment, and interpretation
of data for safety research projects.
468. Essential Safety Management Information. I, II, S. 3 hr. PR: Consent. Examination
of information needed for safety management success, harm investigation proce-
dures, evaluation techniques, nonrealized profit calculations, and decision-
making which should enhance improvement of all safety function affairs.
472. Practicum. I, II, S. 1-6 hr. PR: Graduate standing in safety studies and consent.
Individual and/or group experiences in development, implementation, and par-
ticipation in special projects involving safety education, safety services, and
environmental safety in schools, colleges, or communities.
490. Teaching Practicum. I, II. 3-15 hr.
491. Advanced Study. I, II, S. 1-16 hr.
497. Research. I, II, S. 1-15 hr.
SECONDARY EDUCATION
Cynthia Sunal, Chairperson of Graduate Programs
604 Allen Hall
Degree Offered: M.A. in Secondary Education
Graduate Faculty: Members Bontempo, Bower, Deay, Haas, Helfeldt, Holtan, Iannone,
Moxley, Obenauf, Phillips, Reed, Saltz, P. Smith, D. W. Sunal, and Thomas. Associate
Members Carline and Hobbs.
The Division of Education offers graduate programs and opportunities
for research leading to the degrees of Master of Arts, and options for the
Certificate of Advanced Study, and Doctor of Education for professional
educators and other professionals for whom advanced study in curriculum
and instruction and educational responsibilities is important. Areas of
emphasis include secondary education, higher education, and librarian-
media education. The major emphases in all programs are curriculum and
instruction. Optional tracks in specific subject and program areas are
available. Programs are planned jointly by the student, the student's adviser,
and the student's committee to meet the career needs of the student. In
addition to the general requirements of the University and the College of
Human Resources and Education, a core of courses or course areas and
supporting competencies is required of all graduate students in the department.
The College of Human Resources and Education offers a Master of Arts in
Secondary Education program for persons who teach or work in teaching-
related situations with adolescents and adults. The purpose of the program is
to provide academic experiences to increase skills in teaching and curriculum
development and knowledge of a teaching specialization. The program
provides the opportunity to specialize in working with students in junior,
middle, and high schools and with adults in post-secondary settings.
Electives are used to provide a solid basis in the subject area that the student
teaches. With adviser approval, electives may also be used to enhance
students' personal goals. While teacher certification is not a part of the
SECONDARY EDUCATION 297
master's program, students may be able to complete some courses required for
certification while working on a graduate degree.
For further information on admission and program requirements, write
Program Coordinator, Secondary Education, WVU College of Human Re-
sources and Education, 602 Allen Hall, P.O. Box 6122, Morgantown, WV
26506-6122. All applicants must comply with the requirements of the College
of Human Resources and Education and the Division of Education.
The College of Human Resources and Education and the West Virginia
Department of Education are in the process of reviewing and revising all certification
programs. Students are warned that programs printed in the catalog may not be in
effect at the time of their registration and are advised to see their adviser upon
arrival on campus.
Master of Arts Program Tracks
Secondary Education*
Hours
I. Graduate Courses in Education Program A1 B2 C3
C&I304 3 3 3
Ed. F. 320 or 340 3 3 3
Approved course in Curriculum/Instruction
in student's content field4 3 3 3
Approved course in General Teaching Strategies
or General Curriculum Development4 3 3 3
Ed. P. 320 3 3 0
C&I391 0 3 0
C&I497 6 0 0
Approved Education Electives4 0 3 6-12
II. Approved Graduate Courses Outside of Education5 9 9 12-18
30 30 36
thesis required.
2Problem required.
336 semester hour course work program.
"Adviser will provide lists of courses which may be selected.
5Usually courses in the student's content speciality.
*Students who plan to teach at the college level, who wish to study the impact of technology on
people, society, and the environment, or who wish to prepare for a career as librarian-media
specialist, may pursue a concentration of course work emphasizing those areas.
Higher Education Curriculum and Teaching
Hours
I. Graduate Courses in Education 18-24
Required Courses in Education 15
Ed. F. 320 or Ed. F. 340 3
C&I 307 3
C&I 387 3
C&I 489 3
Ed. P. 300 3
II. Approved Education Electives 3-9
18-24
III. Graduate Courses in an Academic Area 12-18
Total 36
298 SECONDARY EDUCATION
Librarian-Media Specialist
A combination of undergraduate courses and courses in the graduate
program is necessary to meet certification requirements.
Master of Arts in Education
Hours
I. Required Courses in Education Program A1 B2
C&I 301 3 3
C&I 304 3 3
C&I 387 3 3
Ed. Found. 320 or Ed. Found. 340 3 3
12 12
II. Courses in Library Science 24 123
III. Approved Electives 0 12
36 36
'For those desiring certification as school media specialist K-12. Specific courses in library
science are required. For further information, see section on library science.
2For those who already have certification.
'Graduate courses other than those required for certification.
Curriculum and Instruction (C&I)
205. The Junior High School I, II, S. 2 hr. PR: Consent. Developing philosophy,
program, and practices of the junior high school.
224. Approaches to Teaching Language. II. 2 hr. PR: Lingu. 1 and Engl. 111. Designed for
prospective teachers of English and language arts. Focus is upon planning and
implementing methods of teaching English as a language. Materials and resources
appropriate to public school instruction are analyzed and utilized.
225. Approaches to Teaching Literature. II. 2 hr. PR: Junior standing. Designed for
prospective teachers of English and language arts. Course focuses upon method-
ologies for teaching literature in public schools. Workshop format will provide
opportunities for peer teaching activities as students apply methods of teaching
literature.
280. Special Problems and Workshops. I, II, S. 1-4 hr. (Maximum of 8 semester hours
may be applied toward the master's degree.] PR: 14 hr. in education. Credits for
special workshops and short intensive unit courses on methods, supervision, and
other special topics.
287. Advanced Clinical Experience. I, II, S. 1-6 hr. PR: Consent. Clinical experience in
teaching-learning situations at any level.
304. The Secondary-School Curriculum. I, II, S. 3 hr. PR: High-school teaching
experience or consent. Emphasizes socioeconomic and cultural influences on the
curriculum; principles of curriculum development; curriculum building in the
various teaching fields; techniques of experimentation and evaluation; and
practice in curriculum building with special emphasis on unit construction.
306. Curriculum for Middle Childhood. I, S. 3 hr. Survey course which includes:
historical, social, and cultural influences on the curriculum; the learner character-
istics; curriculum and instructional organization and their relationship to facilities
available; evaluation and implementation of middle childhood curriculum.
307. Curriculum Development. I, II, S. 3 hr. PR: C&I 301 or 304 or 312 and Ed. F. 320 or
consent. Basic foundation in the concepts underlying the school curriculum in
American society.
SECONDARY EDUCATION 299
308. Introduction to Alternative Learning Environments. I. (Alternate Years.) 3 hr.
This course will provide opportunities for educators to explore and analyze the
trends and issues in alternative learning environments in public education.
309. Experiences in Alternative Learning Environments. S. (Alternate Years.) 6 hr. PR:
C&I 308, Ed. F. 320, consent. This course helps teachers to learn and practice the
skills that are needed to be an effective teacher in an alternative teaching
environment.
323. Contemporary Issues in English Education. I. 3 hr. PR: Graduate standing.
Provides the student with a knowledge of several contemporary issues in English
teaching which have immediate and long-range ramifications for secondary-
school English instruction. 1-hr. lee, 2-hr. seminar.
324. Advanced Methods in English Education. II. 3 hr. PR: Graduate standing. (For
classroom teachers of English.] Will involve an analysis of recent trends and
innovations in methodology. Readings and discussions will lead to the development
of instructional strategies and units for secondary English classrooms. 1-hr. lee,
1-hr. lab., 1-hr. seminar.
333. Corrective Techniques in Mathematics Education. I, S. 3 hr. PR: Consent.
Materials and methods used in diagnosis and remediation of learning difficulties
in mathematics.
334. Mathematics in the Secondary School. I, S. 3 hr. PR: Consent. Patterns of
mathematics curriculum in the secondary school; practices in teaching mathe-
matics; preparation, selection and use of instructional materials.
337. Mathematics in the Junior High School and Middle School II. 3 hr. PR: 6 hr. college
mathematics or consent. Study of teaching of mathematics in the junior high
school and/or middle school; application of mathematics content to teaching;
instructional techniques and materials.
354. Social Studies in the Secondary School. S. 3 hr. PR: Consent. Nature and function
of social studies in the secondary school; utilization of community, state, national,
and world resources in teaching; selection of content for teaching purposes;
curriculum construction with emphasis on resource and teaching units.
357. Principles of Economic Education. S. 3 hr. Workshop for principals, teachers, and
supervisors with emphasis on the economic structure of our society and methods
of integrating economics into the school program. (Sponsored jointly by College of
Human Resources and Education and College of Business and Economics.]
359. Classroom Simulation Techniques. II, S. (Alternate Years.) 3 hr. To provide
experience in the use of learning games and simulations as an instructional
technique and the opportunity to develop— under supervision— simulated activities
and games to be used in a variety of learning environments.
363. Teaching Young and Adult Farmer Classes. I, S. 2 hr. PR: Ed. P. 106. Participation
in conducting young and adult farmer classes and school-community food
preservation centers; organization, course of study, and methods of teaching and
supervision, and young farmers' association.
364. Organizing and Directing Supervised Farming Programs. II, S. 2 hr. PR: Consent.
Planning programs of supervised farming, supervising and evaluating such
programs for all-day students, young farmers, and adult farmers.
373. Professional Development. I, II, S. 1-6 hr. (May be repeated.] PR: Department
approval. Specially designed experiences for those interested in advancing
professional skills in a particular specialty. Not for degree credit in programs in
the College of Human Resources and Education. {Graded as S or U.)
300 SECONDARY EDUCATION
377. Children's Television: Problems and Potentials. S. 4 hr. PR: Consent. Provides
parents and teachers with strategies for monitoring, evaluating, and directing
television viewing habits of youth; pertinent research studies, school and
community action programs, and home and school education programs are
discussed and practiced.
380. Special Topics. I, II, S. 1-6 hr. PR: Consent.
383. Seminar. I, II, S. 1-6 hr. PR: Consent.
385. Supervision of Student Teachers. I, II, S. 3 hr. PR: Consent. For persons working or
intending to work with education students in field experiences. Course focuses on
the development and application of supervisory skills involved in effective
guidance of student teachers and education students.
386. Teaching Strategies for Middle Childhood. II, S. 3 hr. Surveys instructional
strategies appropriate for facilitating preadolescent learning. Including the role of
the teacher, how the teacher uses resources within and outside the classroom as
they relate to instruction of the learner ages 10-14 years.
387. Advanced Teaching Strategies. I, II, S. 3 hr. PR: Graduate standing. Deals with
methods as one critical variable in teaching. Examines the ways and means to
describe, plan the use of, implement and evaluate teaching methods. Analysis and
implementation of teaching methods and component skills of teaching.
388. Classroom Organization and Management. I, S. 3 hr. Discusses research identifying
components of classroom organization and environment which influence learning;
reviews teacher behaviors and learning activities which research indicates lead to
more effective teaching. Stresses implementation strategies relevant to classroom
settings.
389. Education That Is Multicultural. I, S. 3 hr. PR: Graduate standing or consent.
Provides opportunities for educators to increase awareness of their own ethnic
backgrounds, foster understanding of racial/ethnic diversity, and develop appro-
priate teaching materials and methods for elementary and secondary curricula.
391. Advanced Topics. I, II, S. 1-6 hr.
395. Practicum. I, II, S. 1-12 hr. per sem. or session— aggregating not more than 12 hr.
PR: 9 graduate hours in education. Enrollment with permission of adviser or
instructor in consultation. Special individual and group projects. To provide
appropriate residence credits for special workshops, prolonged systematic con-
ferences or problems and projects in education.
407. Instructional Models of Teaching. II. 3 hr. PR: Ed. F. 320 or consent. Concepts and
processes involved in teaching and their relationship to the development of
teacher education programs.
408. Contemporary Determinants of Curriculum. II, S. 3 hr. PR: C&I 307 and Ed. F. 340
or consent. Contemporary determinants of curriculum development.
409. Curriculum Theories. I, II, S. 3 hr. PR: C&I 408 or consent. Theories underlying
curriculum from the past to the present and projected to the future.
438. Survey of Major Issues in Mathematics Education. II, S. 3 hr. PR: Consent.
Individual and group research on selected topics in mathematics education.
457. Social Studies Curriculum Development, K-12. I. 3 hr. PR: C&I 301 or 304 and C&I
350 or 354. Stresses the application of principles and procedures pertinent to the
development of social studies programs in elementary and secondary schools.
Strong emphasis will be placed on the analysis of current social studies
curriculum materials.
SECONDARY EDUCATION 301
460. Planning Programs and Courses for Vocational Agriculture Department. I, S. 2 hr.
PR: C&I 188. Gathering data, studying the farming problems of all-day students,
young farmers, and adult farmers, and planning the total program for the
department.
488. Higher Education Curriculum. II. 3 hr. An analysis of evaluation of post-secondary
curriculum with emphasis on organizing, translating, and applying findings.
Topics include curriculum-shaping forces; institutional patterns; policy, compo-
nents and change; and principles and techniques of development, experimentation,
and evaluation.
489. Teaching in Higher Education. I. 3 hr. PR: Graduate standing. A general methods
course involving instructional concepts and strategies for present/prospective
faculty in higher education. Comprehensive consideration of objectives, planning
criteria and methods, teaching strategies, and evaluation in meeting the needs of
adult learners.
490. Teaching Practicum. I, II, S. 1-3 hr. PR: Consent. Intended for graduate students
with college teaching responsibility. Provides a supervised experience in a
teaching situation. [Graded as S or U.)
491. Advanced Study Project in Education. I, II, S. 3-6 hr. Research for the program
leading to the Certificate of Advanced Study in Education.
496. Advanced Seminar. I, II. 1 hr. PR: Consent. Opportunity for the advanced graduate
student to present the student's research to faculty and/or student groups.
497. Research. I, II, S. 1-15 hr.
499. Colloquium in Curriculum and Instruction. I, II, S. 1-6 hr. PR: Consent. For
graduate students not seeking course work credit, but who wish to participate in
academic programs,
SOCIAL WORK
Sung Lai Boo, Interim Dean of School of Social Work
Allen Hall
Degree Offered: M.S.W.
Graduate Faculty: Members Boo, Gibbs, N. Lohmann, R. Lohmann, and Porter.
Associate Members Barbeau, Griffin, Isaacson, Peters, Schultz, White, and Williams.
The School of Social Work had its beginnings in the early 1930s. In 1971,
Social Work became an independent school; its programs are accredited by
the Council on Social Work Education through 1990. Graduates of the M.S.W.
program are eligible for licensure as social workers in West Virginia and most
other states. The graduate program is part of the comprehensive program of
professional education in social work offered by the School of Social Work,
including degree programs at baccalaureate and master's levels and a range of
part-time and continuing education opportunities on the campus and in other
areas of West Virginia.
The early decades of the graduate program paralleled the period when the
scope of the mental health movement was being enlarged and emphasis was
placed upon individual and group intervention and treatment. The 1960s were
characterized by more political and social change throughout the school's
programs. At present the graduate program still includes some of these
aspects but to lesser degree, with three concentrations including aging,
community health/mental health, and family.
Social work is primarily concerned with enhancing the problem-solving,
coping, and developmental capacities of people, promoting effective and
302 SOCIAL WORK
humane operation of resources and service delivery systems, linking people
with appropriate resource and service opportunities, and improving social
policy.
The graduate program concentrates upon offering advanced specialized
training for the development of programs and community leadership in rural
areas and small towns. The School of Social Work is nationally recognized in
the area of rural social work practice, and the faculty members regularly
contribute to this field through presentations, papers, conferences, and other
means.
A program of advanced standing for qualified students is offered in
addition to the regular M.S.W. program.
Field instruction opportunities are available throughout northern and
central Appalachia, as well as in a select number of settings outside the
region. Classes focus upon a blend of local, region, and national perspectives.
The graduate program in social work offers enhanced educational opportu-
nities in a number of specialized problem areas: Aging, Families, Health and
Mental Health.
Graduates are employed throughout the United States and Canada. They
work as individual, family, and group treatment specialists, planners,
community organizers, social researchers, social work educators and admin-
istrators in a variety of programs, such as mental health clinics, hospitals,
correctional institutions, courts, delinquency programs, aging programs,
family counseling agencies, child protective agencies, public welfare depart-
ments, child development programs, manpower agencies, public schools,
community action agencies, settlement houses, city governments, state
government planning agencies, federal administrative agencies, and private
research and development organizations concerned with human problems.
There has been a constant growth in the need for professional social
workers. It is anticipated by the Bureau of Labor Statistics and other research
bodies that the demand for social workers will continue to increase in
numbers and in varieties of programs in which social workers are employed.
The WVU social work curriculum is designed to help students prepare for
these careers. Students are required to work closely with their academic
advisers in selecting appropriate components in class and field learning to
meet their individual needs.
Curriculum
Increasingly aware of the maturation of baccalaureate social work
education (in which the School of Social Work has been a national leader), the
graduate program provides the opportunity to simultaneously broaden and
deepen the knowledge and skill levels of those with baccalaureate education
in social work through a program of advanced standing.
For those who do not have a baccalaureate degree in social work or who
do not qualify for the advanced standing program, the regular M.S.W. degree
is offered. Through both the regular M.S.W. program and the program of
advanced standing, students are exposed to the areas of social work practice,
social welfare policy, theories of human behavior and social environments,
social work research, and field instruction.
In addition, incoming students designate a specialized problem area or
concentration on which they will focus. Available concentrations are: Aging,
Community Health and Mental Health, Family, and Alternative Concentration.
1. Aging Concentration— The Aging Concentration is designed to provide
an educational program in gerontological social work. The program presents
SOCIAL WORK 303
knowledge, values, ethics and skills that enable the student to understand and
critically assess the aging process; the needs, problems and resources of the
aged; and the social policies, institutions, programs and services intended to
address the aged. The concentration courses emphasize long term care and
rural practice. Both class and field instruction emphasize the role of the
M.S.W. -level practitioner as the administrator, supervisor, manager or
planner of services for the aged.
2. Community Health and Mental Health Concentration — The Community
Health and Mental Health Concentration provides students with a generic
model of practice as adapted to the evolving field of health and mental health.
Particular emphasis is placed on community approaches to primary prevention
and on the use of community support systems for the deinstitutionalized
patient. Field placements emphasize the health and mental health field as a
network of interrelated agencies and functions with attention to the tasks of
planning, administration, community organization, direct practice, and re-
search.
3. Family Concentration — The Family Concentration provides education
towards the development of the knowledge, skills, and values that enable the
student to perform competently in human service systems whose programs
and policies directly affect family well-being. Students learn the tasks of the
social worker in social service agencies, other community systems, and
advocacy roles inside and outside the agency and community system. These
social work roles encompass preventing and treating neglect, abuse and
exploitation, developing and supervising alternative family care systems,
deinstitutionalization, policy and program development, and adolescent
emancipation programs. Particular emphasis is placed on direct practice roles
in delivering family services.
4. Alternative Concentration — The Alternative Concentration is for
students who have an explicit career goal in mind that does not fit into any of
the other three concentrations. Students opting for the Alternative Concen-
tration would develop an individual contract with a school committee. Each
student's request will be reviewed by a school committee and the student will
only be admitted to the School of Social Work under the designated
alternative concentration, if the school feels it can meet his/her stated career
Joint Degree Option
A joint degree option resulting in the Master of Social Work (M.S.W.) and
Master of Public Administration (M.P.A.) is available through the School of
Social Work and Department of Public Administration of the College of Arts
and Sciences. For a student admitted to the regular M.S.W. program, a total of
82 credit hours are required to meet the joint degree requirements. For a
student admitted to the advanced standing M.S.W. program, a total of 70
credit hours are required to meet joint degree requirements. Many students
complete such requirements through one additional semester of study beyond
the semesters required for the M.S.W. degree.
Applicants for the joint degree program apply to each program separately,
specifying on each application that they are a joint degree applicant.
Applicants must meet the admission requirements of each program and
acceptance by one program does not guarantee acceptance by the other.
Additional information and descriptive materials about the joint degree
program are available from either the Assistant to the Dean, School of Social
Work, 707 Allen Hall, West Virginia University, Morgantown, WV 26506, or
304 SOCIAL WORK
the Department of Public Administration, 302 Woodburn Hall, West Virginia
University, Morgantown, WV 26506.
Admissions
General Admission Requirements
Students admitted to the graduate program may be admitted to the
regular M.S.W. program (56 credit hours) or to the advanced standing M.S.W.
program (44 credit hours).
Students requesting admission must demonstrate the following:
1. Proof of academic achievement. Graduate regulations require an
undergraduate grade-point average of at least 2.5 for approval of candidates
as a regular graduate student. An accepted applicant whose grade-point
average is less than 2.5 is classified as Provisional. See the graduate catalog,
"Classification of Graduate Students" for a description of admission categories.
2. Evidence of potential to practice social work, such as commitment to
human service, and a concern and ability to work effectively with people.
Preference will be given in admissions to students who have a total of at
least one year of paid and/or volunteer human service work experience.
Admission to Regular M.S.W. Program
Applicants falling within the following categories are eligible for admis-
sion to the regular M.S.W. program (56 credit hours):
1. Students with a baccalaureate degree in social work or social welfare
whose cumulative grade-point average in their social work courses is below
3.0 (on a 4.0 scale).
2. Students with a baccalaureate degree in social work or social welfare
whose cumulative grade-point average in all courses is less than 2.5. Such
students are admitted as Provisional Students in the regular M.S.W. program.
3. Students with a baccalaureate degree in a field other than social work
or social welfare.
Students admitted to the regular M.S.W. program complete a minimum of
56 credit hours. They are required to complete two professional orientation
courses: Introduction to Social Work Practice (So. Wk. 340) and Social
Welfare Policy and Services (So. Wk. 331). They also complete 20 credit hours
of field instruction. If enrolled as full-time students, they will ordinarily
complete two semesters and one six-week summer session of course work and
one six-week summer session and one semester of concentration-focused field
instruction.
Admission to Advanced Standing M.S.W. Program
Applicants meeting the following criteria are eligible for admission to the
advanced standing M.S.W. program (44 credit hours):
Students with a baccalaureate degree in social work or social welfare
from a Council on Social Work Education accredited program whose cumu-
lative grade-point average in all courses is 2.5 (on a 4.0 scale) and whose
cumulative grade-point average in their social work courses is 3.0 or higher.
If enrolled as full-time students, advanced standing students ordinarily
complete one semester and two six-week summer sessions of course work and
one semester of concentration-focused field instruction.
Part-Time Students
Applicants may be admitted as part-time students to either the regular
M.S.W. program or advanced standing M.S.W. program. Part-time students
SOCIAL WORK 305
must work with their advisers to develop a degree plan that provides for the
appropriate sequencing of courses. Students are required to complete at least
6 credit hours each semester while enrolled as part-time students. Only
one-half of the degree requirements may be completed in part-time status. The
remaining half of the degree requirements, in accordance with the accrediting
standards of the Council on Social Work Education, must be completed as a
full-time student.
More information about part-time study can be found in the discussion of
admission dates, plan of study, and program requirements.
Application Deadline
Applications for fall semester must be completed by May 1. Applications
for spring semester must be completed by October 15. Applicants whose
admission files are completed after the deadline date may be classified as
Provisional Students, and not allowed to complete more than 12 hours of
course work until the application is completely accepted.
Admission Dates
Full- and part-time students are admitted to either the regular or
advanced standing M.S.W. programs in Morgantown during the fall semester.
Full-time students in the regular or advanced standing program are admitted
only during fall semester. Part-time students in the regular program are also
only admitted during fall semester.
Part-time students may be admitted to the advanced standing program
during the fall or spring semesters.
Master of Social Work (M.S.W.)
The degree of Master of Social Work (M.S.W.) is conferred upon those
students who satisfactorily complete the requirements as established for
graduate education. These requirements are:
1. Satisfactory completion of no less than 56 semester hours for those
admitted to the regular M.S.W. program and 41-44 semester hours for those
admitted to the advanced standing M.S.W. program. These hours may be
earned through the Morgantown program on the main campus. Exceptions in
this category would pertain to candidates whose earned credit entitled them
to be exempt from certain courses.
2. Students may request credit for up to 12 hours earned in graduate
study in approved courses. Requests for such transfer credit must be made at
the time of application to the program.
3. Satisfactory completion of all components of the graduate program.
Those components include course work in social work practice, social welfare
policy, human behavior and social environments, social work research, a
concentration area, and field instruction. All M.S.W. candidates must
complete the requirements summarized below for the degree program to
which they were accepted (i.e., regular or advanced standing).
Plan of Study
Full-time students typically complete 12-15 credit hours per semester
when they are enrolled in classroom courses. Fourteen hours of credit are
typically awarded for one semester of field instruction; 6 hours of credit are
typically awarded for one summer session of field instruction, should the
student's degree plan require one summer session of field. Full-time students
306 SOCIAL WORK
in the Morgantown program are required to complete 12 credit hours in the
summer sessions.
Part-time students are required to enroll for 6 credit hours each semester.
Accrediting requirements require that no more than one-half of the degree
program can be completed in part-time status. The remaining half of the
program must be completed in full-time status, with the student enrolling in
12-15 credit hours per semester. Part-time students must work closely with
their advisers to assure that their degree plan is consistent with accreditation
requirements.
A copy of the typical plan of study for degree candidates is available on
request from the School of Social Work.
Field Instruction
Field instruction is an integral part of graduate social work education. It
provides the student with an opportunity to test classroom knowledge as well
as to develop and refine advanced practice skills.
Field placement settings are located in West Virginia, Pennsylvania,
Ohio, Maryland, Virginia, and Washington, D.C. Decisions regarding the field
placement assignment are jointly reached by the student, faculty adviser, and
concentration committee. Only sites on the School of Social Work's approved
list may be used for field instruction. The field placement setting that can best
meet the student's educational needs may be located outside the Morgantown
area. Therefore, students may find their educational interests best served by
leaving the home campus for field placement.
Regular M.S.W. students must have completed, at a minimum, S.W. 313,
S.W. 321, S.W. 322, S.W. 331, S.W. 340, S.W. 441, the first concentration
course, and any practice elective specified by their concentration before being
eligible to enter field placement. All courses must be completed with a grade
of C or better and students must have an overall minimum grade-point
average of 2.75. Students are also required to attend a pre-placement
integrative seminar. Additional requirements may be imposed by the student's
degree plan.
Advanced standing students must have completed, at a minimum, S.W.
313, S.W. 321, the first concentration course, and any practice elective
specified by their concentration before being eligible to enter field placement.
All courses must be completed with a grade of C or better and students must
have an overall minimum grade-point average of 2.75. Students are also
required to attend a pre-placement integrative seminar. Additional require-
ments may be imposed by the student's degree plan.
Full-time regular M.S.W. students typically enter field placement during
the second summer session (in July) and complete their placement and the
degree program during their fourth semester (August-December) in the
program. Their field placement is typically preceded by two semesters and
one summer-session of classroom work.
Full-time advanced standing M.S.W. students typically enter field
placement during their second semester (January-May) in the program. Their
field placement is typically preceded by one semester of classroom work and
followed by two summer sessions of classroom work.
Part-time students typically enter field placement after having completed
24 credit hours of classroom work for those in the regular M.S.W. program or
18 credit hours of classroom work for those in the advanced standing M.S.W.
program. Their field placement is typically followed by one semester of
full-time classroom study.
SOCIAL WORK 307
Field placement is typically completed on a full-time "block" plan. Part-
time placement is possible so long as the accreditation requirements with
regard to full-time study are met. Part-time field instruction requires the
completion of a minimum of three full days per week in field placement.
Part-time field instruction may be combined with concurrent classroom
instruction.
Regular M.S.W. students must complete a minimum of 900 clock hours in
field instruction. Advanced standing M.S.W. students must complete a
minimum of 560 clock hours in field instruction. Students are required to
attend integrative seminars scheduled concurrently with field placement and
to complete a paper dealing with the integration of field and classroom study.
Summary of Degree Requirements for Advanced Standing M.S.W. Program*
Hours
Advanced Practice Courses
Practice with Individuals, Families, and Small Groups (So. Wk. 441) ... 3
Other Practice Courses (Selected in consultation with adviser) 6
Human Behavior and the Social Environment
Human Behavior and the Social Environment I (So. Wk. 321)** 4
Human Behavior and the Social Environment II (So. Wk. 322)*** 2
Advanced Social Welfare Policy Analysis (So. Wk. 333) 3
Research Courses
Social Research Methods (So. Wk. 313) 3
Research Elective 3
Concentration Courses 6
(Selected in consultation with adviser)
Field Instruction 14
Total 44
Summary of Degree Requirements for Regular M.S.W. Program*
Hours
Professional Orientation Courses
Introduction to Social Work Practice (So. Wk. 340) 3
Social Welfare Policy and Services (So. Wk. 331) 3
Human Behavior and the Social Environment
Human Behavior and the Social Environment I (So. Wk. 321)** 4
Human Behavior and the Social Enrivonment II (So. Wk. 322)*** 2
Advanced Practice Courses
Practice with Individuals, Families, and Small Groups 3
Other Practice Courses (Selected in consultation with adviser) 6
Advanced Social Welfare Policy Analysis (So. Wk. 333) 3
Research Courses
Social Research Methods (So. Wk. 313) 3
Research Elective 3
Concentration Courses (Selected in consultation with adviser) 6
Field Instruction _20
Total 56
*Students may elect to take additional courses beyond these requirements.
**4 hours will be changed to 3 hours.
***2 hours will be changed to 3 hours.
308 SOCIAL WORK
Social Work (So. wk.)
247. Social Work and Human Diversity. I, II. 3 hr. (Human Behavior and Social
Environment Course.) PR: So. Wk. 51 or consent. Social work practice with ethnic
and religious minorities, the poor, women, Appalachians, the physically and
mentally impaired, etc. Themes include stigmatization, stratification, institutional
racism, sexism, and strategies for empowerment and equalization of opportunities
and outcomes.
250. Social Functioning and Social Work. II. 3 hr. PR: So. Wk. 200 and 220, Psych. 141,
Soc. & A. 121. Draws on social and behavioral sciences knowledge to provide a
framework for analyzing human behavior from a social work practice perspective,
emphasizing human differences as they affect life opportunities and the meeting of
human needs.
280. Oral/Written Skills for Professionals. II. 3 hr. PR: Engl. 1, 2. Designed for
improvement of student's professional skills, specifically oral and written.
Emphasis is placed on report writing, letter writing, resume writing, listening,
interviewing, group problem solving, leadership, persuasion, and public speaking.
290. Social Work Practice Seminar. I, II. 3 hr. PR: So. Wk. 210, 222, 250. Designed to
provide educational support for the field placement practicum. Taken simultane-
ously with the practicum to assist the student in the integration and mastery of
practice theory as applied to placement learning activities.
291. Field Practicum. I, II. 6 or 12 hr. PR: So. Wk. 210, 222, and 250. Coreq.: So. Wk. 290.
Educationally directed field placement in approved setting. Focuses on the
professional application of knowledge, values, and skills in demonstating compe-
tence as a generalist social worker. (Offered on Pass/Fail basis only.)
313. Social Work Research Methods. I, II. 3 hr. (Research Course. J Basic concepts in
social research methods. Emphasis on conceptualization of social work problems
for research, role of social science theories in research, measurement options in
research design, and analysis of data.
322. Human Behavior and the Social Environment 2. 2 hr. In this course the objective is
to increase understanding of organizations, communities, and small groups as
they develop, change, and affect behavior of those affiliated with them.
323. Social Support Systems. I, II. 3 hr. (Human Behavior and Social Environment
Course.) Social science theories pertinent to social support system concepts.
Formally organized systems and natural helping networks are considered.
Program models related to particular target populations, such as mentally ill, the
aged, etc., are examined.
324. Human Service Organizations. II. 3 hr. [Human Behavior and Social Environment
Course.) Forces that characterize the establishment, maintenance, and transfor-
mation of human service agencies.
325. Social Welfare in American Communities. I. 3 hr. (Human Behavior and Social
Environment Course.) Current theory and research on social welfare institutions
in American communities. The course provides a conceptual framework for
community practice, with particular attention to social movements, inter-organi-
zational relationships and strategies for social change.
331. Social Welfare Policy and Services. I. 3 hr. (Policy Course.) Introduction to the
history, development, and implementation of social policy in the United States.
Special emphasis is given to those policies which have the greatest impact on
non-metropolitan areas and the Appalachian region.
333. Social Policy Analysis. II, S. 3 hr. (Policy Course.) PR: So. Wk. 331. Skill
development in techniques of social policy analysis. Selection of analytical
methods and issues offered in different sections.
SOCIAL WORK 309
340. Introduction to Social Work Practice. I. 3 hr. [Practice Course.) Focuses on
developing the basic framework of social work practice theory and professional
values to working with individuals, groups, families, and communities.
341. Social Treatment Groups. II. 3 hr. (Practice Course.) PR: So. Wk. 340. The use of
social relationships in small groups in treating personal problems.
342. Task Group Processes. I. 3 hr. (Practice Course.) PR: So. Wk. 340. The use of social
relationships in small groups for problem-solving tasks.
345. Supervision in Social Work. II, S. 3 hr. (Practice Course.) PR: So. Wk. 340.
Functions, conflicts, and dynamics of supervision of professionals, and the
relationship of ethical and value principles.
346. Experiential Groups. S. 3 hr. (Practice Course.) PR: So. Wk. 340. Practice issues in
skill development and role playing; related concerns in psychodramatic inter-
vention.
351. Social Management/Rural Communities. I, II. 3 hr. (Practice Course.) PR: So. Wk.
340. Practice issues in skill development and community organization and
development with special emphasis on rural communities.
352. Social Planning. II. 3 hr. (Practice Course.) PR: So. Wk. 340. Practice issues in skill
development related to social components of comprehensive planning and func-
tional planning systems in health, aging, manpower, social service, and other
areas.
354. Social Agency and Program Administation. I, II. 3 hr. (Practice Course.) PR: So.
Wk. 340. Practice issues in skill development in programming, budgeting,
organization, staffing, and control of social agencies and programs.
361. Evaluation Research in Social Work. 3 hr. (Research Course.) PR: So. Wk. 313.
Methods of collecting, analyzing and interpreting data on the need for, implemen-
tation and effects of social interventions. Examination of the effects of political,
ethical and resource variables on the research process.
366. Strategies of Community Research. S. 3 hr. (Research Course.) PR: So. Wk. 313.
Social systems approach to the study of community social phenomena in
ecological context. Emphasis on the use of qualitative methods. Students engage in
participant observation in natural field settings. (Graded as S or U.)
371. Social Work With the Aged. I. 3 hr. (Concentration Course.) Human aging as a
problem in social theory, research, and practice.
372. Concepts and Theories in Social Gerontology. S. 3 hr. (Concentration Course.) PR:
So. Wk. 371 or consent. Major conceptual and theoretical perspectives in social
gerontology are applied to social work practice for the aged.
374. Community Mental Health. I. 3 hr. (Concentration Course.) An overview of the
field of mental health which addresses major policy, program, practice, theory,
and research issues as reflected in recent reports of the President's Commission on
Mental Health. Current federal and state regulations and state plan documents are
examined.
375. Individual Consultation. I, II, S. 1-3 hr. Individual directed study to develop
extensive knowledge in social work areas of student's interest.
376. Explorations in Primary Prevention. S. 3 hr. (Concentration Course.) PR: So. Wk.
374 or consent. This course explores varying conceptual approaches to primary
prevention, the social science theories and research on which they are based, and
their adaption to major modes of social work practice. Specific substantive
knowledge problems are addressed.
310 SOCIAL WORK
377. introduction to Family Social Work. I. 3 hr. (Concentration Course.] Describes the
demography of the population at risk, identifies family theory, major programs,
and services and policies. Examines gaps in services and major styles of family
intervention in social work roles.
378. Family Victimology. S. 3 hr. PR: So. Wk. 377 or consent. The interface of social
work practice in family victimology, with emphasis on victim welfare policy and
service, victim compensation programs, and victim prevention. Social concern for
physical and sexual abuse, battery, and related topics.
379. Social Work with Couples/Families. 3 hr. (Concentration Course) PR: So. Wk. 377
or consent. This course explores social work practice focused on couples or
families as a unit. Emphasis on intervention models oriented to couple and family
relationship counseling and on clinical social work techniques.
380. Special Topics. I, II, S. 3 hr. Topics include: (A) Statistics for Social Work Practice;
(B) Methods of Data Collection; (C) Computer Applications; (D) Family Sexuality;
(E) Service Strategies of Aging; (F) Health Planning and Policy; (G) Program and
Practice Models; (H) Social Work in Health Care.
381. Social Work in Health Settings. I. 3 hr. PR: So. Wk. 374. Comprehensive strategies
for serving clients with physical and/or emotional problems and their families
with an emphasis on direct practice approaches. Practice in traditional and non-
traditional settings is examined.
441. Advanced Practice Affecting individuals, Families, and Small Groups. I, II. 3 hr.
(Practice Course.) PR: So. Wk. 340 or consent. This course includes: (a) foundation
course work in social work methods; (b) an emphasis in direct social work
practice; and (c) practice experiences in social service delivery for employment
and/or field placement opportunities.
481. Advanced Field Instruction 1. I, II, S. 5-14 hr. PR: Consent. Graduate field
instruction in selected settings under the general direction of the faculty.
482. Advanced Field Instruction 2. I, II, S. 5-14 hr. PR: Consent. Graduate field
instruction in selected settings under the general direction of the faculty.
497. Research. I, II, S. 1-15 hr.
SOCIOLOGY AND ANTHROPOLOGY
Ann L. Paterson, Chairperson of the Department
Robert Foss, Chairperson of the Graduate Committee
423 Hodges Hall
Degree Offered: M.A.
Graduate Faculty: Members Althouse, Ball, Foss, Hall, Kolaja, Nichols, Paterson,
Photiadis, Starr, Stebbins, and Trent. Associate Member Levine.
The Department of Sociology and Anthropology offers a program of
study in applied social research leading to the degree of Masterof Arts (M.A.).
The program is designed for students who seek sound training in research
methods, either as preparation for more advanced training in a Ph.D. program,
or as a basis for a career in applied social research. The M.A. curriculum
emphasizes the interplay between substantive knowledge in some area of
expertise, social science models, and research methods in solving problems.
Students are thus prepared equally to enter an academic social science career
or a career as a research social scientist in the public or private sector.
Admission. Applicants for admission to graduate study must have a
bachelor's degree from an accredited institution. Students who do not have
adequate background in sociological theory, methods, and statistics may be
SOCIOLOGY AND ANTHROPOLOGY 311
required to take remedial work. Applicants are required to submit transcripts
from their undergraduate institutions, three letters of recommendation, and
recent Graduate Record Examination aptitude scores (the appropriate ad-
vanced GRE test score is recommended). Foreign students for whom English
is not the native language are required by the University to submit "Test of
English As a Foreign Lanaguage" (TOEFL) scores and may be required to
participate in the University's language orientation sessions.
Applications should be completed by May 1 for admission to the first
semester (April 1 if an assistantship is sought), and by November 15 for
admission to the second semester. Full-time students who are admitted as
special provisional students are required to complete 12 hours of approved
course work with a B average or better within a year. Students who fail to do
so are suspended. Each spring the department graduate committee assesses
all students and determine who will continue in the program, with or without
assistance.
Degree Requirements. All students in the 39-hour, two-year program are
required to take courses in survey methods (3 hr.), library and computer
resources (3 hr.), qualitative methods (3 hr.), comparative methods (3 hr.),
and data analysis (6 hr.). Students also participate in two seminars, one in
social systems (3 hr.) and another in social policy (3 hr.).
All students select three additional courses (9 hr.) which vary depending
on the student's area of concentration, and they write either a thesis or applied
problem report (6 hr.).
The thesis and applied problem options are identical, except that in the
thesis option one of the electives is replaced by an advanced theory Tutorial
relevant to the student's thesis problem, and the completed applied problem
report becomes an internal document of the Department of Sociology and
Anthropology, whereas the thesis becomes a document housed in the WVU
Library. The applied problem report normally pertains to an issue of interest
to public or private sector decision makers, whereas the Thesis may pertain to
a sociological problem more pertinent to academic social science than to the
needs of decision makers. In both options, the student, in consultation with
his or her program committee, chooses electives either in the department or
elsewhere in the University as a basis for gaining expertise in some specific
area of concentration.
Among the possible areas of concentration are aging and gerontology,
community development, complex organization, criminal justice systems,
education, health care delivery, energy impact assessment, and occupational
safety.
Five-Year B.A./M.A. Program. This special option is available to WVU
undergraduate sociology and anthropology majors with a grade-point average
of 3.0. By taking 9 hours of specified graduate work as elective credit during
the senior year, students can complete a 30-credit MA. in only one year of
full-time study. (However, students cannot hold an assistantship and still
complete the degree in one year.) Contact the department chairperson for
more details.
Sociology and Anthropology (Soc. & A.)
201. Sociological Theory. II. 3 hr. PR: 6 hr. Soc. & A. and senior standing or consent.
Systematic analysis of major sociological theories viewed from the historical
perspective and in terms of current research.
312 SOCIOLOGY AND ANTHROPOLOGY
202. Deviant Behavior. II. 3 hr. PR: 6 hr. Soc. & A. or consent. Examination of the
processes by which "deviance" is defined in society, and the methods of social
control attempted. Provides a critical understanding of society from the perspective
of those defined as "outsiders"— criminals, addicts, etc.
204. Complex Organizations. II. 3 hr. PR: 6 hr. Soc. & A. or consent. The structure and
functioning of large-scale, bureaucratic organizations, including studies of indus-
trial organizations, prisons, hospitals, government bureaus, and the military in
contemporary society.
205. Class, Status, and Power. I or II. 3 hr. PR: 6 hr. Soc. & A. or consent. Analysis of
various systems of social inequality. Emphasis on empirical studies describing
social class system, distribution of status and power, and patterns of social
mobility in America.
211. Social Research Methods. I, II. 3 hr. PR: Soc. & A. 1 or 5 or consent. Logic of social
research, elements of research design, and problems of measurement, with
emphasis on survey research methodology and data analysis.
222. Community Development. II. 3 hr. PR: Soc. & A. 122, 131, or 140, or consent.
Application of sociological knowledge of structure of communities for planning
programs and services. Emphasis on techniques of organizing efforts for commu-
nity change in developing nations.
223. Sociology of Rurai Life. I or II. 3 hr. PR: Soc. & A. 1 or consent. Social aspects of
rural living. Characteristics of rural population, social structure, and institutional
arrangements: family, community, education, religion, recreation, health, welfare,
and local government.
230. The Criminal Justice System. II. 3 hr. PR: Soc. & A. 132 or consent. A sociological
introduction to the criminal justice system. Analysis of police work, court
activities, and corrections within the context of American social organization and
societal definitions of crime and justice.
232. Sociology of Education. I. 3 hr. PR: Soc. & A. 1 or consent. Education as a social
institution, cultural and class influences on education, social roles and career
patterns in the school system, the school and problems of the community. (Also
listed as Ed. F. 300.}
233. Sociology of Work and Work Places. I. 3 hr. PR: Soc. & A. 1 or consent. Explores the
significance of work and work relations in contemporary society. Emphasis is
given to the analysis of employment settings including industrial organizations.
240. Social Change. I or II. 3 hr. PR: 6 hr. Soc. & A. or consent. Sociological analysis of
current major changes in our society, of the forces underlying them, and of
tensions to which they give rise. Alternative future directions and rational
manipulation and planning for social change.
253. Religion, Magic, and Healing. I. (Alternate Years.) 3 hr. PR: 6 hr. Soc. & A. or
consent. Symbolism, magic, ritual, shamanism, sorcery, and concepts of sin and
salvation related to peasant and tribal cosmologies will be examined as causes of
and remedies for suffering in traditional and modern contexts.
255. Anthropological Theory. II. 3 hr. PR: 6 hr. Soc. & A. or consent. Theoretical
landmarks in early and modern anthropology. Includes British functionalism,
psychological anthropology, French structuralism, and twentieth-century evolu-
tionism in the United States.
256. Field Methods. II. 3 hr. PR: Soc. & A. 211 and Stat. 101 or consent. The distinctive
craft of data gathering in cultural anthropology. Development of skills in field
methods and participant observation.
SOCIOLOGY AND ANTHROPOLOGY 313
261. Issues in Crime and Justice. I or II. 3 hr. PR: Consent. Senior seminar on crime and
the social organization of justice. Special focus on problems of professionals in
prevention, enforcement, corrections, and institutional reform. Emphasis on
recent research, emerging trends, and key policy choices.
262. Youth and Social Change. I or II. 3 hr. PR: 6 hr. Soc. & A. or consent. A structural-
historical approach to the study of youth as both product and agent of social
change.. Emphasizes concepts of human development, life course transition, age
stratification, birth cohort, lineage, historical period, and sociocultural generation.
290. Special Topics. I, II, S. 1-3 hr. PR: 6 hr. Soc. & A. or consent. Topics change so
students may enroll more than once.
291. Honors Seminar. I or II. 1-3 hr.
293. Independent Study. I, II, S. 1-6 hr. per sem. PR: 3.0 grade-point average and written
departmental permission. Directed reading or research for students desiring work
not available in regular course offerings.
311. Survey Research Methods. I. 3 hr. PR: Soc. & A. 211 and Stat. 101 or consent.
Provides students with an overview of survey research including problem
definition, research design, sampling, measurement, instrument construction,
project management, ethical considerations, and report writing.
313. Qualitative Methods. I. 3 hr. Provides students with supervised field experiences
in interviewing, participant observation, and other methods of qualitative data
gathering, analysis, and presentation.
315. Comparative Research Methods. II. 3 hr. Examines the relationship between
theory and research through critical comparison of the principal designs and
methods used in the social sciences. Special attention to alternative strategies for
studying social service institutions.
317. Data Analysis. II. 3 hr. PR: Stat. 101 or equiv. Using social science survey data, this
course integrates statistics, computer usage, and social science theory to examine
alternative methods of analyzing social science data. Makes extensive use of SPSS
software package.
318. Data Analysis. I. 3 hr. PR: Soc. & A. 317. Continuation of Soc. & A. 317.
319. Microcomputer Applications. I. 1 hr. A directed tutorial in selected social science
applications of microcomputer use with emphasis on production of research
reports. fS/U grading only.] (Soc. &■ A. majors only.)
322. Contemporary Sociological Theory. I or II. 3 hr. Review of recent trends and
orientations in sociology. Theory construction, typologies, mathematical models,
and the relationship between theory and research. Review of current literature.
323. Death and Dying. 3 hr. PR: Graduate status. Sociological and anthropological
perspectives on death and dying. Examines sociopsychological and structural
factors supporting the beliefs and practices associated with the institution of
death, both historically and in contemporary society. [Not open to students with
credit for Soc. &■ A. 123.)
372. Sociology of Health. II. 3 hr. PR: Soc. & A. 125 or consent. A seminar focusing upon
current issues in medical sociology.
390. Special Topics. I, II. 1-3 hr. A graduate course offered as the need arises. Topics
change so students may enroll more than once.
391. Seminar. I, II. 3-9 hr.
393. Independent Study. I, II, S. 1-9 hr. PR: Written departmental consent. Directed
reading and/or research in a specialized area of interest.
314 SOCIOLOGY AND ANTHROPOLOGY
394. Thesis or Applied Problem Research. I, II, S. 1-6 hr.
395. Field Work. I, II, S. 1-6 hr. PR: Departmental consent. Supervised field work.
490. Teaching Practicum. I, II. 1-6 hr.
497. Research. I, II, S. 1-15 hr.
SPECIAL EDUCATION
Wilfred D. Wienke, Program Coordinator
504 Allen Hall
Degree Offered: M.A.
Graduate Faculty: Members Clements, Kaczmarek, Lombardi, G. Nardi, Piatt, Shuck,
Wienke, and Woodrum. Associate Members H. Hursh, Joyce, Ludlow, Savage, Vaugh,
and Wolf.
The program leading to the M.A. in Special Education is designed to
prepare master-clinical teachers of special education children and adults and
to provide initial training for the preparation of future supervisors and
administrators of public-school special education programs. The Division of
Education awards the Certificate of Advanced Study and the Doctor of
Education; both may include an emphasis on special education. The post-
master's special education track leading to the Certificate of Advanced Study
is individually prescribed, designed to prepare persons for positions as
program specialists, consultants, supervisors, and administrators of programs
or agencies providing special education or associated special services. The
Ed.D. with emphasis in special education is an individually prescribed
program designed to prepare persons for roles in special education personnel
preparation, supervision, administration, and applied research. The programs
also prepare professionals for emerging roles associated with interdisci-
plinary services to persons requiring special education, resources, or support
for enhanced development. A particular focus of the program is the delivery of
services in rural areas.
All applicants must comply with WVU general requirements and re-
quirements of the College of Human Resources and Education and the special
education program. The requirements are based on the 1985 policy 5100
Standards for Certification.
M.A. Program Options
Behavioral disorders K-12
Early intervention (pre-school) special education
Girted education
Mentally impaired (mild and moderate)
Severe/profound handicaps
Specific learning disabilities K-12
Admission Requirements
Students are admitted as regular, provisional, or non-degree students as
follows:
• Regular status: The individual who meets the admission requirements
is granted regular status as a certification and degree seeking student;
• Provisional status: The individual who has an earned baccalaureate
degree from a regionally accredited college or university but who does not
meet admission requirements may be granted provisional status in the
program. This status allows the student an opportunity to remediate
SPECIAL EDUCATION 315
deficiencies in grade-point average in order to achieve regular status. This
status is most commonly afforded students with either no or insufficient
training in education;
• Non-degree status: The individual who has an earned baccalaureate
degree and teaching certificate from a regionally accredited college or
university but who does not seek the master's degree may be admitted as a
non-degree student, which allows the student to take courses for professional
development and for additional professional endorsement.
Full status admission to the programs occurs when the following
admission criteria have been met:
1. An earned baccalaureate degree from a regionally accredited college or
university.
2. A minimum grade-point average of 2.5.
3. Teaching certification in early or elementary education.
Certification
For certification in K-12 programs, holders of a valid professional
teaching certificate for elementary education or early childhood education
must fulfill the core area requirements and the teaching certification require-
ments for their program area. Holders of professional teaching certificates in
other areas, such as secondary education, must achieve an acceptable level of
performance, as designated by the West Virginia Department of Education, on
the multi-subjects content specialization test and fulfill the core area
requirements and the teaching certification requirements for their program
area.
Students who do not have a valid professional teaching certificate but
who want certification in the various special education areas of specialization
must meet the following criteria:
1. Students must achieve an acceptable level of performance, as deter-
mined by the State Department of Education and/or the College of Human
Resources and Education, on the pre-professional skills test and the multi-
subjects content specialization test.
2. Students must satisfy the teaching certification requirements for their
program area, including the core courses.
Students who do not achieve an acceptable level of performance on the
multi-subjects content specialization test may take this test a second time. If
they do not achieve the requisite score on the second try, they will no longer be
considered candidates for the program.
Students who do not meet skill/proficiency score requirements for
admission may choose to avail themselves of the numerous remediation
options available on campus. These include the Reading Clinic, the Micro-
Computer Laboratory, and the Learning Center.
Performance is assessed during course work and practicum. A student
who fails to achieve an acceptable level of performance in practicum will have
his or her individual performance deficits reviewed and will be given the
opportunity to repeat practicum once; such repetition may occur following
completion of an indicated remediation and/or additional instruction. A
student who does not meet acceptable levels of performance in the second
practicum assignment is asked to withdraw from the program.
Retention in a program requires an overall 3.0 GPA.
316 SPECIAL EDUCATION
Written Comprehensive Examination
Satisfactory completion of a written comprehensive examination is
required for a master's degree in the program areas of mentally impaired (mild
and moderate), specific learning disabilities, behavioral disorders, and gifted
education and early intervention special education. Those students who
entered a special education master's degree program prior to 1985 should refer
to the program requirements outlined in the graduate catalog for the year
when they entered the program.
Applicants interested in one of the special education program areas
should contact the special education chairperson for specific information on
schedule and location of courses.
Curricula for Special Education
Master of Arts (36 Semester Hours Minimum)
A. Core Area Requirements (BD, LD, Ml) Hours
(12 Semester Hours in All Master Degree Programs)
Sp. Ed. 250— Survey of Exceptional Children and Adults 3
Sp. Ed. 260 — Curriculum and Methods for Special Education 3
Coun. 305— Theory and Practice of Human Appraisal 3
Psych. 281— Abnormal Psychology or
Psych. 263— Introduction to Personality or
Psych. 264— Psychology of Adjustment 3
SPA 250 or 350— Speech & Lang. Disorders Assessment-Remediation 3
Total 15
B. Teacher Certification Mentally Impaired: Mild/Moderate Area Requirements
Sp. Ed. 255— Introduction to Mental Retardation 3
Sp. Ed. 305— Mathematics for the Mentally Retarded 3
Sp. Ed. 306— Reading for Mentally Retarded Children 3
Sp. Ed. 487— Practicum: Mentally Impaired 3-6
Total 12-15
Planned Electives— (minimum for degree) 6-9
C. Teacher Certification Learning Disabilities Area Requirements
Sp. Ed. 330— Introduction to Specific Learning Disabilities 3
Sp. Ed. 331— Evaluative Techniques in Specific Learning Disabilities 3
Sp. Ed. 332— Teaching Strategies of Specific Learning Disabilities 3
Rdng. 342— Reading Diagnosis and Prescription in Learning Disabilities 3
Sp. Ed. 487— Practicum: Learning Disabilities 3-6
Total 15-18
Planned Electives— (minimum for degree) 3-6
D. Teacher Certification Behavioral Disorders Area Requirements
Sp. Ed. 340 — Introduction to Behavioral Disorders 3
Sp. Ed. 341— Behavioral Dynamics in the School and Community 3
Sp. Ed. 342— Curriculum and Methods for the BD Child 3
Sp. Ed. 487 — Practicum: Behavioral Disorders 3-6
Total 12-15
Planned Electives— (minimum for degree) 6-9
SPECIAL EDUCATION 317
E. Teacher Certification Gifted Education Area Requirements Hours
Sp. Ed. 250 — Survey of Exceptional Children and Adults 3
Coun. 305 — Theory and Practice of Human Appraisal 3
Sp. Ed. 370— Introduction to the Gifted 3
Sp. Ed. 371— Educational Development of the Gifted 3
Sp. Ed. 372— Strategies for Instruction of the Gifted 3
Sp. Ed. 481— Seminar: Interdisciplinary Problem Solving 1
Sp. Ed. 487— Practicum: Gifted Education 3-6
Total 19-22
Planned Electives— (minimum for degree) 14-17
F. Teacher Certification Severe/Profound Handicaps Area Requirements
Ed. P. 350 — Principles of Behavior Modification 3
Sp. Ed. 250— Survey of Exceptional Children and Adults 3
Sp. Ed. 319— Assessment: Severe Handicaps 3
Sp. Ed. 320 — Curriculum: Severe Handicaps 3
Sp. Ed. 321 — Instructional Programming: Severe Handicaps 3
Sp. Ed. 322 — Characteristics and Methods: Physical Handicaps 3
Sp. Ed. 323 — Teacher/Parent Consultation: Handicapped Populations 3
Sp. Ed. 324— Classroom-based Language Intervention:
Handicapped Populations 3
Sp. Ed. 325 — Secondary/Adult Programming: Severe Handicaps 3
Sp. Ed. 487 — Practicum: Severe and Profound Handicaps 9
Total 36
G. Teacher Certification Preschool Handicaps Early Intervention Area Requirements
C&I 380 — Early Education Curriculum: Preschool Handicaps 3
Ed. P. 391— The Growing Years 3
Sp. Ed. 350 — Assessment of Young Handicapped Children 3
Sp. Ed. 351— Educational Programming: Young Handicapped Children 3
Sp. Ed. 352— Program Management: Young Handicapped Children 3
Sp. Ed. 322 — Characteristics and Methods: Physical Handicaps 3
Sp. Ed. 323 — Teacher/Parent Consultation: Handicapped Populations 3
Sp. Ed. 324 — Classroom-based Language Intervention:
Handicapped Populations 3
Sp. Ed. 487— Practicum: Preschool Handicaps 6
Total 30
Planned Electives (minimun for degree) 6
H. Problem or Thesis Area Requirements
Stat. 311— Statistical Methods or
Ed. P. 320— Introduction to Research 3
Sp. Ed. 395 — Problem in Special Education or
Sp. Ed. 497— Research 3-6
Sp. Ed. 480— Seminar 3
Total 9-12
Elective Requirements 12-15
318 SPECIAL EDUCATION
I. Approved Electives
Coun. 305,464
C&I 330, 333, 340
Ed. F. 320, 340
Ed. P. 300, 320, 330, 333, 341, 342, 343, 350, 420, 440, 450, 451
Psych. 263, 264, 271, 281, 282, 322, 423
Rdng. 283, 321, 324, 325, 330, 331, 340, 342
Sp. Ed. 255, 281, 305, 306, 322, 323, 324, 330, 331, 340, 341, 342, 365, 381, 395,
480, 481, 487, 496
Stat. 311, 312
Others by approval of adviser.
Certificate of Advanced Study (C.A.S.)
All applicants must comply with the requirements of WVU, the College of
Human Resources and Education, and the special education program.
Additional admissions requirements are as follows:
1. Completion of a master's degree related to special education.
2. Submission of scores of the Millers Analogies or the Graduate Record
Examination aptitude test.
3. Evidence of successful appropriately selected work experience.
4. Three positive letters of recommendation.
5. Statement of goal of program study.
6. Plan of study approved by adviser.
Areas of Specialization
Advanced study may be in any one or combination of areas represented in
the program including: (1) behavioral disorders; (2) gifted education; (3)
mental impairment; (4) severe and profound handicaps; (5) specific learning
disabilities; and (6) early intervention special education.
Program of Studies
Courses/Course Areas Hours
Sp. Ed. 480— Seminar in Special Education 3
Sp. Ed. 365— Administration and Supervision
of Programs for Exceptional Children 3
Individually prescribed course work in
special education including goal related areas 18
Research including Sp. Ed. 491— Advanced Study
Project in special education 6
Minimum 30
Doctor of Education (Ed.D.)
All applicants must comply with the requirements of WVU, the College of
Human Resources and Education, and the Special Education Program.
Additional entrance requirements are as follows:
1. Completion of a master's degree, preferably in special education.
2. Graduate grade-point average of 3.5.
3. Three letters of reference addressing the candidate's past performance
and qualities which would make the person suitable for doctoral-level study.
4. Work experience in special education or with exceptional persons.
5. Submission of Graduate Record Examination or Miller Analogies
scores in support of potential for success in doctoral-level study.
6. Well defined goal statement.
SPECIAL EDUCATION 319
Admissions are open year round and inquiries should be addressed to:
Chairperson, Doctoral Admissions Committee
Special Education Program
College of Human Resources and Education
West Virginia University
P.O. Box 6122
Morgantown, WV 26506-6122
Program of Study
Programs of study comply with all applicable institutional requirements,
but typically they include course work in excess of minimum requirements
because of the clinical nature of special education. Programs are designed by
the doctoral student, the student's adviser, and the doctoral committee to best
meet the student's career goals.
The leadership training provided through this program of studies draws
on the many available strengths and resources of a major university.
Development of research skills is a major focus of the program, along with
advanced training related to the education, development, and habilitation of
persons with exceptional needs. Normally, students take course work in a
number of programs and colleges in order to take advantage of available
interdisciplinary resources. The program encourages study and involvement
with faculty from a broad range of disciplines in order to best prepare doctoral
students to meet their individual career aspirations as leaders in special
education.
The College of Human Resources and Education and the West Virginia
Department of Education are in the process of reviewing and revising all certification
programs. Students are warned that programs printed in the catalog may not he in
effect at the time of their registration and are advised to see their adviser upon
arrival on campus.
Special Education (Sp. Ed.)
250. Survey of Exceptional Children and Adults. 3 hr. PR: Consent. Introduction to all
areas of exceptionality. Definition, psychological and educational characteristics,
and social and vocational adjustment.
255. Introduction to Mental Retardation. 3 hr. PR: Consent. Historical, etiological,
social, educational, and vocational aspects of mental retardation.
260. Curriculum and Methods for Special Education. 3 hr. PR: Sp. Ed. 250, 255 and/or
consent. Organization of instruction and adaptation of teaching methods in the
several curricula areas and the construction of materials.
262. Curriculum and Methods for the Trainable Mentally Retarded. 3 hr. PR: Sp. Ed.
250, 255 and/or consent. Special problems of curriculum development for the
trainable child and adult and development of original construction of curricula
materials.
265. Industrial Arts in Special Education. 3 hr. Experimentation with industrial arts
and crafts suitable for instruction in special education classes. Discussion of
factors involved in selection and manipulation of such media as leather, plastics,
ceramics, wood, and metal.
280. Student Teaching Clinical Experience in Special Education. 1-6 hr. PR: Consent.
Student teaching with the mentally retarded. (Graded as S/L/.j
320 SPECIAL EDUCATION
281. Special Problems and Workshop in Special Education. 2-4 hr. PR: Consent. To take
care of credits for special workshops and short intensive unit course on methods,
supervision, and other special topics.
305. Mathematics for the Mentally Retarded. 3 hr. PR: Consent. Materials and methods
for teaching mathematics to the mentally retarded child.
306. Reading for Mentally Retarded Children. 3 hr. Designed especially for majors in
special education. Emphasizes the techniques, methods, and materials most
effective for teaching reading to mentally retarded.
319. Assessment: Severe Handicaps. 3 hr. PR: Consent. Evaluation and assessment of
severely handicapped students. Selection, utilization, and interpretation of tests
and discussion of ethical considerations inherent in assessment of individuals
with severe handicaps. [Consult program for course offering.}
320. Curriculum: Severe Handicaps. 3 hr. PR: Consent. Focuses on evaluation of
curricula and programs for severely and profoundly handicapped students. Task
analysis and programming of longitudinal skill sequences are discussed for the
following skill areas: pre-academics, academics, motor, self-help, and social.
(Consult program for course offering.}
321. Instructional Programming: Severe Handicaps. 3 hr. PR: Consent. Design and
implementation of instruction for severely handicapped students. Techniques for
training students and methods of arrangement of the environment. (Consult
program for course offering.}
322. Characteristics and Methods: Physical Handicaps. 3 hr. PR: Consent. Presents
information via lectures, readings, demonstrations, and practicum on problems
commonly found in severely handicapped students, particularly cerebral palsy,
and focuses on educational implications in both public school and residential
settings. (Consult program for course offering.)
323. Teacher/Parent Consultation: Handicapped Populations. 3 hr. PR: Consent.
Focuses on services to handicapped populations beyond direct instruction
including inservice training, educational planning conferences, special services,
program planning, and parent involvement in education. (Consult program for
course offering.}
324. Classroom-Based Language Intervention: Handicapped Populations. 3 hr. PR:
Consent. Designed to prepare teachers and professionals from related fields to
design and implement language/communication intervention programs with
handicapped persons who manifest moderate to profound impairments. (Consult
program for course offering.}
325. Secondary /Adult Programming: Severe Handicaps. 3 hr. PR: Consent. Focuses on
the education of secondary-level and adult severely handicapped persons. Methods
and materials in areas of vocational training, home living, community living,
recreational and leisure skills, and sex education. (Consult program for course
offering.]
330. Introduction to Specific Learning Disabilities. 3 hr. PR: Consent. Historical,
etiological, educational, and legislative aspects of, and multidisciplinary ap-
proaches to, the learning disabled child.
331. Evaluation Techniques in Specific Learning Disabilities. 3 hr. PR: C&G 305, Sp. Ed.
330, and consent. Administration, interpretation, report writing, and educational
implications of selected testing procedures appropriate to the diagnosis of
learning disabilities.
332. Teaching Strategies in Specific Learning Disabilities. 3 hr. PR: Sp. Ed. 330, 331,
consent. Curriculum planning, informal diagnosis, techniques, teaching strategies
in specific areas, opportunities to use strategies in student designed programs.
SPECIAL EDUCATION 321
340. Introduction to Behavioral Disorders. 3 hr. PR: Consent. Historical trends in the
education of the behaviorally disordered child. Educational and behavioral
management techniques and trends for the future.
341. Behavioral Dynamics in the School and Community. 3 hr. PR: Sp. Ed. 340 and/or
consent. Theories of behavioral dynamics, including several distinct approaches,
which relate to specific problems in the school, home, and community. Agencies
available to the behaviorally disordered child and the child's family.
342. Curriculum and Methods for the Behaviorally Disordered Child. 3 hr. PR: Sp. Ed.
340 and/or consent. Development of appropriate curriculum based upon individual
needs of the child. Practical application of a variety of methods used in the
instruction of the behaviorally disordered child in the classroom. Research and
data collection case studies.
350. Assessment of Young Handicapped Children. 3 hr. PR: Consent. Identification of
handicapped and at-risk infants and preschoolers, including screening, assessment
and the development of individualized educational programs.
351. Educational Programming: Young Handicapped Children. 3 hr. Curriculum and
instructional design and delivery for at-risk and handicapped infants and
preschoolers.
352. Managing Programs: Young Handicapped Children. 3 hr. PR: Consent. Management
skills required to serve young handicapped and at-risk children, including home-
based, center-based, self-contained and mainstreamed models.
365. Administration and Supervision of Programs for Exceptional Children. 3 hr. PR:
Consent. Administration and supervision with attention to: selection and place-
ment procedures; facilities and equipment; local, state, federal legislation; and
philosophy and recent research. (Consult program for course offering.)
370. Introduction to the Gifted. 3 hr. PR: Sp. Ed. 250 or consent. An introductory course
concerning characteristics of gifted and talented children and implications these
factors have for education. Included will be definition, characteristics, history and
philosophy of special programs, identification procedures, and development of
program prototypes.
371. Educational Development of the Gifted. 3 hr. PR: C&G 305, Sp. Ed. 370 or consent.
Analysis of the educational and psychological development of gifted individuals
as evidenced through research studies; the application and interpretation of the
Structures of Intellect model of multifactor intellect; and the interrelatedness
between creativity and giftedness.
372. Strategies for Instruction of the Gifted. 3 hr. PR: Sp. Ed. 371 or consent.
Application of creativity and curriculum theories and evaluation methodology to
the development of qualitatively different educational experiences for the gifted.
Will include the writing of Individual Education Programs (IEP).
381. Special Topics. 1-6 hr. PR: Consent. Special topics or research in mental
retardation and in exceptional children and adults.
391. Advanced Topics. 1-6 hr.
395. Problem in Special Education. 3 hr. Research for master's degree in special
education.
397. Master's Degree Research or Theory. 1-15 hr.
480. Seminar. I, II, S. 1-6 hr. PR: Consent. Special topics concerned with the
educational, sociological, and psychological aspects of special education.
322 SPECIAL EDUCATION
481. Problem-Solving for Gifted Students. 1 hr. PR: Consent. Themes and issues are
addressed across sets of disciplines, enabling students to comprehend the
character and elements of problem-solving, the similarities and differences
between each discipline's application, and use of various problem-solving ap-
proaches.
487. Practicum. 1-12 hr. PR: Consent. Internship, advanced student teaching in each
certification area, and administration and supervision practicum. [Graded as
S/U.J
490. Teaching Practicum. 1-3 hr. PR: Consent. Intended for graduate students with
college teaching responsibility. Provides a supervised experience in a teaching
situation. (Graded as S/Uj.
491. Advanced Study Project in Special Education. 3-6 hr. Research for the program
leading to the Certificate of Advanced Study in Special Education. (Consult
program for course offering.)
496. Advanced Seminar. 1-6 hr. PR: Consent. Designed to permit graduate students an
opportunity to present research to the assembled faculty and graduate study body.
(Graded as S/L/.j (Consult program for course offering.]
497. Research. 1-15 hr.
498. Thesis. 2-4 hr. PR: Consent. (Graded as S/U.j
499. Colloquium in Special Education. 1-6 hr. PR: Consent. For graduate students not
seeking course work credit, but who wish to participate in academic programs.
SPEECH PATHOLOGY AND AUDIOLOGY
Mary Ellen Tekieli Koay, Department Chairperson
805 Allen Hall
Degree Offered: M.S.
Graduate Faculty: Members Koay, Lass, Lundeen, Ruscello, Shuster, St. Louis, and
Woodford. Associate Member Atkins.
Master of Science (M.S.)
Students applying for programs leading to degrees in speech pathology
and audiology must comply with general WVU requirements and the
requirements of the College of Human Resources and Education and of the
Department of Speech Pathology and Audiology.
The Speech Pathology and Audiology Graduate Affairs Committee
accepts those applicants they believe will be successful in the graduate
program. The number of applicants accepted depends upon the number of
qualified applicants, the size of the speech pathology and audiology graduate
faculty, and the facilities available for acceptable academic, clinical, and
research training.
The Master of Science in Speech Pathology and Audiology is a compe-
tency-based program. Students are expected to achieve a minimum competency
level of B or S in each required course. If a student receives a grade of C or U (or
lower) in a required course, he/she must meet with his/her academic adviser
and/or academic graduate committee before beginning additional course
work. The adviser or committee will recommend the appropriate steps to meet
the minimum standards of professional competency.
In addition to the requirements listed under the Human Resources and
Education section, the M.S. in Speech Pathology and Audiology requires:
• A minimum of 42 semester hours of approved graduate courses
(including 6 hours for clinical practicum) in speech and hearing sciences,
SPEECH PATHOLOGY AND AUDIOLOGY 323
speech pathology, audiology, and other related areas to attain professional
competence;
• Three additional semester hours of clinical practicum during each
regular semester and two additional semester hours of practicum during the
summer; six of these hours count toward the 42 semester hour requirement.
• A 3.0 grade-point average for all courses taken for credit toward the
graduate degree.
• Successful performance on final examinations according to depart-
mental standards.
• Demonstration of professional competence in speech and/or hearing as
measured by fulfillment of the academic and clinical practicum requirements
established by the faculty.
• A minimum of five consecutive semesters (including summer sessions)
is required for master's candidates with a background in speech and hearing.
For candidates without a background in speech and hearing, a minimum of
seven semesters is required for completion of the master's degree.
Doctor of Education with emphasis in
Speech Pathology and Audiology (Ed.D.)
Curricula for the Doctor of Education (Ed.D.) with emphasis in speech
pathology and audiology are tailored to meet the particular needs of students
and their professions. Interested students should contact the chairperson of
speech pathology and audiology.
Accreditation
The Department of Speech Pathology and Audiology is accredited by the
Educational Standards Board (ESB) of the American Speech-Language-
Hearing Association for both the speech pathology and audiology training
programs, the only accredited programs in West Virginia for these subjects.
The College of Human Resources and Education and the West Virginia
Department of Education are in the process of reviewing and revising all certification
programs. Students are warned that programs printed in the catalog may not be in
effect at the time of their registration and are advised to see their adviser upon
arrival on campus.
Speech Pathology and Audiology (SPA)
210. Manual Communication. I, II. 3 hr. PR: Consent. Development of skills needed
to communicate in sign language. Includes the manual alphabet, basic number
concepts, and the basic vocabulary of traditional American signs.
212. Intermediate Manual Communication. II. 3 hr. PR: SPA 210 or consent. Improve
skills needed to communicate in sign language. Includes increasing sign
language vocabulary, practicing fingerspelling, and communicating with
signs.
218. Introduction to Identification Audiometry. I. 3 hr. PR: SPA 50 or 250; 152; 153;
154; or consent. Disorders of hearing and identification audiometry for infants,
pre-school and school age children. Basic introduction to industrial hearing conserva-
tion.
324 SPEECH PATHOLOGY AND AUDIOLOGY
223. Aural Rehabilitation. II. 3 hr. PR: SPA 220 or consent. Rehabilitative approaches
to management in the auditorially handicapped individual. Medical, audiological,
and social aspects of rehabilitation. Procedures of speech reading and auditory
training will be examined and evaluated.
232. Advanced Clinical Methods: Speech. II. 3 hr. PR: SPA 132 or consent. Specific
clinical procedures in speech pathology. Assessment and treatment strategies
appropriate for various communicatively handicapped populations, report writing
skills, referrals to professionals, and client-clinician-supervisor relationships.
233. Advanced Clinical Methods: Audiology. II. 3 hr. PR: SPA 133 or consent. Basic
audiometric techniques. Pure tone testing, speech audiometry, masking, audiogram
interpretation, and report writing.
243. Audiological Assessment Procedures. I. 4 hr. PR: Consent. Advanced application
of audiometric evaluation procedures. Assessing hearing handicap and planning
appropriate rehabilitation.
250. Speech-Language-Hearing: Development-Disorders. I, II, S. 3 hr. (Non-majors).
PR: Consent. Discussion of normal processes and disorders of speech, language,
and hearing in children and adults. Orientation course for students and teachers in
early childhood, elementary, and secondary education, language arts specialists,
psychologists, and rehabilitation specialists.
251. Cleft Palate and Voice Disorders. II. 3 hr. PR: SPA 50 or consent. Normal vocal
production and embryological development of the face and palate considered.
Nature and etiology of disorders of cleft palate and voice, diagnosis, and general
goals of therapy.
252. Stuttering. I. 3 hr. PR: SPA 50. Development of normal fluency versus nonfluency
examined in addition to the nature, etiology, theories, classification, and prognostic
indicators of stuttering. General formal and informal assessment, treatment, and
counseling procedures.
253. Cerebral Palsy and Aphasia. I. 3 hr. PR: SPA 50 or consent. Speech and language
disorders related to cerebral injury, with emphasis on nature and etiology of
cerebral palsy and aphasia. Diagnosis and general goals of therapy.
254. Language Acquisition and Behavior. I. 3 hr. Normal processes involved in the
acquisition of language, including the development of phonological, semantic, and
syntactical systems. Application of these processes to the diagnosis and treatment
of language disorders.
257. Public School Clinical Programs. I. 3 hr. PR: SPA 50 or consent. Organization and
structure of clinical programs in public school settings. Discussion of state and
federal regulations, case selection, scheduling, program planning, and other
administrative matters.
260. Language Disorders In Children. II. 3 hr. PR: SPA 254 or consent. Assessment and
remediation procedures are examined. Utilization of current tests and analysis
procedures in diagnosis are presented. Treatment approaches include commercially
available programs and student-developed treatment strategies.
263. Preschool Deaf Child. I. 3 hr. PR: Consent. Importance of early detection and
education, language development of congenitally deaf child, and parents' role in
early childhood education.
265. Parent Programs: Communicatively Disordered Children. II. 2 hr. Students will
learn to organize and implement parent involvement programs in a variety of
settings, interview parents, conduct conferences, utilize appropriate materials,
and interact effectively with parents of communicatively handicapped children
through lectures and practica.
SPEECH PATHOLOGY AND AUDIOLOGY 325
280. Oral/Written Skills for Professionals. II. 3 hr. Designed for improvement of the
student's professional skills— specifically oral and written. Emphasis is on report
writing, letter writing, resume writing, listening, interviewing, group problem
solving, leadership, persuasion, and public speaking.
281. Special Topics. I, II, S. 1-6 hr. per sem.; Max. credit 6 hr. PR: Consent. Independent
study in speech pathology, audiology, and speech and hearing sciences.
282. Clinical Practice in Speech. I, II, S. 1-6 hr. PR: Consent. Supervised diagnosis and
therapy of speech disorders.
283. Clinical Practice in Audiology. I, II, S. 1-6 hr. PR: Consent. Supervised diagnosis
and therapy of hearing disorders.
321. Structure and Function of the Auditory System. I. 3 hr. PR: Consent. Detailed
study of the gross and microscopic anatomy of the auditory system, and detailed
investigation of physiological aspects of auditory sensitivity and acuity.
322. Advanced Audiological Assessment. I. 3 hr. Various audiological techniques
utilized in differential diagnosis of auditory dysfunctioning. Administration and
interpretation of diagnostic techniques.
325. Hearing Aids. I. 3 hr. PR: SPA 322. Electronic design of amplification systems and
acoustics analysis of amplification systems. Hearing aid evaluation procedures.
326. Pediatric Audiology. S. 3 hr. A study of the development of the auditory response
and hearing problems of early childhood. Student will learn the construction and
application of specialized assessment techniques suitable for the pediatric patient.
327. Pathologies of the Auditory System. S. 3 hr. PR: Consent. Investigation of the
nature and etiology of auditory system pathologies from the external ear to the
auditory cortex and their audiological manifestation.
330. Industrial and Environmental Audiology. II. 3 hr. A study of various noise
parameters, instrumentation for noise measurement, and measurement techniques.
Effects of noise on man and industrial hearing conservation procedures discussed.
340. Experimental Phonetics. II. 3 hr. PR: SPA 152 or consent. Discussion of contempo-
rary topics in the speech and hearing sciences, including acoustic and physiological
phonetics.
343. Neurophysiologicai Basis of Speech and Language. I. 3 hr. PR: SPA 154, 253, or
consent. General and typographic anatomy of CNS, with special attention to motor
and sensory systems as they apply to speech, hearing, and language.
344. Neuropathologies of Speech and Language. S. 3 hr. PR: SPA 343. Explores methods
of identifying and treating speech and language problems associated with
nonprogressive and progressive neurological disorders, including cerebral palsy,
Parkinson's disease, multiple sclerosis, muscular dystrophy, amyotrophic lateral
sclerosis, Bell's palsy, and myasthenia gravis.
350. Speech and Language Disorders: Assessment-Remediation. I, II. 3 hr. PR: SPA 250
or consent. Familiarizes the student with the following aspects of speech and
language disorders: causes, characteristics, assessment, remediation techniques,
and their incorporation into indivualized educational programs.
351. Advanced Voice Disorders. I. 3 hr. PR: SPA 251 or consent. Management of vocal
behavior involved in functional and organic voice disorders. Etiology and
pathogenesis, clinical features, history taking, and development of critical
listening skills emphasized.
326 SPEECH PATHOLOGY AND AUDIOLOGY
352. Advanced Stuttering Disorders. II. 3 hr. PR: SPA 252 or consent. Course content
examines factual information and classifications of stuttering. Formal and
informal diagnostic techniques and treatment procedures are detailed forindivid-
uals who display primary, transitional, and secondary stuttering behaviors.
Patient and family counseling are reviewed.
353. Advanced Study: Aphasia. II. 3 hr. PR: SPA 343 or consent. Advanced investigation
of the etiology, diagnosis, nature, and therapeutic approaches of aphasia, agnosia,
apraxia, and dysarthria.
354. Language Disorders in Children. S. 3 hr. PR: SPA 254. Explores assessment and
remediation procedures for language disorders in children. Emphasizes "formal"
and "informal" language tests, and various treatment approaches, including
traditional methods, psycholinguistic teaching procedures, and behavior modifi-
cation techniques.
355. Advanced Study: Cleft Palate. II. 3 hr. PR: SPA 251 or consent. Investigation of the
etiology, diagnosis, nature, and therapy approaches of communicative disorders
in persons with cleft palate.
356. Advanced Articulation Disorders. I. 3 hr. PR: SPA 156 or consent. Explores the
merits of various methods of assessing and treating articulation disorders.
Prognostic indicators, behavior modification technqiues, and distinctive feature
analysis are emphasized.
373. Professional Development. I, II, S. 1-6 hr. (May be repeated for credit.) PR:
Departmental approval. {Not for degree credit in programs in the College of
Human Resources and Education.) Specially designed experiences for those
interested in advancing professional skills in a particular specialty. [Graded as
S/U.J
382. Advanced Clinical Practice in Speech. I, II, S. 1-6 hr. PR: Consent. Emphasis on
diagnosis of speech disorders and appropriate therapeutic follow-up. Patient
staffing experience in a multi-disciplined environment.
383. Advanced Clinical Practice in Audiology. I, II, S. 1-6 hr. PR: Consent. (May be
taken in conjunction with SPA 322.} Supervised experience in administration and
interpretation of audiological evaluative procedures. Application of therapeutic
techniques in aural rehabilitation.
387. Special Topics. I, II, S. 1-6 hr. (May be repeated for credit.) PR: Consent. Open to
graduate students in speech pathology and audiology who are pursuing indepen-
dent problems in that field.
480. Seminar. I, II, S. 1-6 hr. PR: Consent. Topics vary from semester to semester to
meet student needs. Organic speech impairment, speech pathology research, aural
rehabilitation research, medical audiology research, etc.
497. Research. I, II, S. 1-15 hr.
STATISTICS
Donald F. Butcher, Chairperson of Department of Statistics and Computer Science
311 Knapp Hall
Degree Offered: M.S.
Graduate Faculty: Members Attfield, Butcher, Dowdy, Gunel, Harner, Hobbs, Petersen,
Thayne, and Wearden. Associate Member Chilko.
The Department of Statistics and Computer Science offers a Master of
Science with a major in statistics. The master of science degree is intended to
qualify the student to assume a professional role in an educational, industrial,
or governmental research project, to teach in a junior or senior college, or to
STATISTICS 327
undertake advanced training toward a doctorate in statistics or one of the
quantitative fields of science.
Because many students receive baccalaureate degrees from colleges
which do not offer undergraduate programs in statistics and because
historically statistics has been primarily a field of graduate education, a
student does not need a degree in statistics to enter the M.S. degree program in
statistics. In fact, a good background in engineering, mathematics, or science
is a reasonable preparation for graduate work in statistics.
Two options are available for students seeking a Master of Science in
Statistics. The two options are:
1. Problem Report Option: At least 36 hours of course work including 3
hours of credit for a problem report.
2. Thesis Option: At least 30 hours of course work including 6 hours of
credit for a thesis.
Students are expected to know the material contained in the following
courses upon admission to the program. Otherwise, these deficiencies must be
removed as early as possible in the student's degree program.
1. Single and multivariate calculus (Math. 15. 16. 17 or equiv.)
2. Linear or matrix algebra (Math. 241 or equiv.)
3. Probability and statistics (Stat. 201 or equiv.)
Minimum required courses for either option are:
1. Stat. 361. 362. 396.
2. Fifteen hours from Stat. 312, 313, 341. 351. 371. 381.
3. One course from Stat. 441. 451.
4. One course from Stat. 390, 392.
Credit towards the degree requirements is not given for Stat. 311.
All students must pass a final oral examination on the problem report or
thesis and on course work. Students are encouraged to request a written
examination on foundation material during the first three weeks of the
semester in which they hope to graduate. All written examinations are given
during the last month of the semester in which they are requested. The final
oral examination, for those students passing a written examination on
foundation material, has less emphasis on course work. Foundation material
for the oral and or written examination(s) is contained in Stat. 312, 313, 341,
351. 361. 362. 371. and 381.
More information concerning graduate studies may be found in "Graduate
Programs in Statistics" available from the Department of Statistics and
Computer Science.
Statistics (Stat.)
201. Introduction to Probability and Statistics. I. II. 3 hr. PR: Math. 16. Probability.
random variables, discrete and continuous probability distributions, joint prob-
ability distributions, expected value. The central limit theorem. Point and interval
estimation and tests of hypotheses. Chi-square tests, linear regression, and
correlation.
212. Intermediate Statistical Methods. I. II. 3 hr. PR: Stat. 101 or 201 or equiv.
Extension of basic concepts of statistical inference: estimation and hypothesis
testing for more than two populations, multiple regression and correlation,
curvilinear regression, analysis of variance and covariance.
213. Introductory Design and Analysis. II. 3 hr. PR: Stat. 212. Introduction to the linear
model, the complete and fractional factorial experiment, and the completely
random, randomized complete block, Latin square, and split-plot experimental
designs.
328 STATISTICS
221. Statistical Analysis System (SASj. I, II. 3 hr. PR: Stat. 101 or 201 or equiv., and
C.S. 1 or equiv. Introduction to the use of the Statistical Analysis System (SAS), a
statistical computer program. Students will perform statistical data analysis, data
file modifications, and statistical report writing.
231. Sampling Methods. I. 3 hr. PR: Stat. 101 or 201 or equiv. Methods of sampling from
finite populations, choice of sampling unit, and sample survey design. Estimation
of confidence limits, and optimum sample size. Single and multistage sampling
procedures.
251. Data Analysis. II. (Alternate Years.) 3 hr. PR: Stat. 213. Computer analyses of
simulated or real unbalanced data using a matrix approach to linear models. The
techniques will include least squares analysis of variance and covariance,
multiple and polynomial regression, and multiple discrimination.
261. Theory of Probability. I. 3 hr. PR or Cone: Math. 17. Theoretical coverage of
probability, random variables, discrete and continuous probability distributions.
Expected value, moment generating functions, special probability distributions.
Random sampling and distributions of certain functions of random variables. The
Central Limit Theorem.
262. Theory of Statistics. II. 3 hr. PR: Stat. 261. Theoretical introduction to statistical
inference. Properties of estimators and techniques of estimation. Hypotheses
testing including the Neyman-Pearson Lemma and likelihood ratio tests. Regression
and correlation. Selected topics.
291. Topics in Statistics. I, II, S. 3 hr. PR: Stat. 201 or equiv. Advanced study of special
topics in statistics.
300. Statistical Package: Social Sciences. I. 2hr. PR: Stat. 311 or equiv. Introduction to
the use of the Statistical Package for the Social Sciences (SPSS), a statistical
computer program.
311. Statistical Methods 1. I, II. 3 hr. PR: Math. 3. Statistical models, distributions,
probability, random variables, tests of hypotheses, confidence intervals, regres-
sion, correlation, transformations, F and Chi-square distributions, analysis of
variance and multiple comparisons. (Equiv. to Ed. P. 311 and Psych. 311.)
312. Statistical Methods 2. I, II. 3 hr. PR: Stat. 212 or 311 or equiv. Completely random,
randomized complete block, Latin square and split-plot experimental designs.
Unplanned and planned multiple and orthogonal comparisons for qualitative and
quantitative treatments and factorial arrangements. Multiple linear regression
and covariance analysis. (Equiv. to Ed. P. 312 and Psych. 312.)
313. Design of Experiments. II. 3 hr. PR: Stat. 312 or equiv. Expected mean squares,
power of tests and relative efficiency for various experimental designs. Fixed,
random, and mixed models. Use of sub-sampling, covariance and confounding to
increase power and efficiency.
341. Applied Multivariate Analysis. I. 3 hr. PR: Stat. 311 or equiv. Introduction to
Euclidean geometry and matrix algebra; multiple and multivariate regression
including multiple and canonical correlation; the k-sample problem including
discriminant and canonical analysis; and structuring data by factor analysis,
cluster analysis, and multidimensional scaling.
351. Applied Regression Analysis. I. 3 hr. PR: Stat. 312. Matrix approach to linear and
multiple regression, selecting the "best" regression equation, model building, and
the linear models approach to analysis of variance and analysis of covariance.
361. Theory of Statistics 1. I. 3 hr. PR: Math. 17. Probability and random variables,
univariate and multivariate distributions, expectations, generating functions,
marginal and conditional distributions, independence, correlation, functions of
random variables including order statistics, limiting distributions, and stochastic
convergence.
STATISTICS 329
362. Theory of Statistics 2. II. 3 hr. PR: Stat. 361. Techniques of point and interval
estimation, properties of estimates including bias, consistency, efficiency, and
sufficiency; hypothesis testing including likelihood ratio tests and Neyman-
Pearson Lemma; Bayesian procedures, analysis of variance and nonparametrics.
371. Introduction to Exploratory Data Analysis. I. (Alternate Years.) 3 hr. PR: An
introductory statistics course. Basic ways in which observations given in counted
and measured form are approached. Pictorial and arithmetic techniques of display
and discovery. Methods employed are robust, graphical, and informal. Applications
to social and natural sciences.
381. Nonparametric Statistics. II. 3 hr. PR: Stat. 311 or equiv. Distribution-free
procedures of statistical inference. Location and scale tests for homogeneity with
two or more samples (related or independent); tests against general alternatives.
390. Teaching Practicum. I, II. 1-3 hr. PR: Consent. Supervised practice in college
teaching of statistics.
391. Advanced Studies in Statistics. I, II, S. 1-6 hr. PR: Consent. Investigation in
advanced statistics subjects which are not covered in regularly scheduled courses.
Study may be independent or through specially scheduled lectures.
392. Analysis of Experiments. II. 1 hr. PR: Consent. Statistical consulting and data
analysis.
396. Graduate Seminar. I, II. 1 hr. PR: Consent. It is anticipated that each graduate
student will present at least one seminar to the assembled faculty and student
body in statistics
397. Research in Statistics. I, II, S. 1-15 hr. PR: Consent.
441. Multivariate Statistical Theory. II. (Alternate Years.) 3 hr. PR: Stat. 341, 361 or
consent. Euclidean vector space theory and matrix algebra, multivariate normal
sampling theory, the theory of the multivariate general linear hypothesis including
multivariate regression, MANOVA, and MANCOVA, and the theory of factor
analysis.
451. Linear Models. II. (Alternate Years.) 3 hr. PR: Stat. 351, 362. Multivariate normal
distribution, distribution of quadratic forms, linear models, general linear hypo-
theses, experimental design models, components of variance for random effects
models.
TECHNOLOGY EDUCATION
David L. McCrory, Chairperson
609 Allen Hall
Degree Offered: M.A.
Graduate Faculty: Members DeVore, Maughan, McCrory, and Pytlik.
The program includes the study of technology, the relationship of
technical systems to the civilization process, and the implications of changes
in these systems on the quality of life and the education of citizens. Faculty
and students in the program are committed to a continuing investigation of
the impact of technology on people and society — including education and the
environment. The goal of the program is an increased level of understanding
about technical means so as to provide the basis for developing, controlling,
directing, and redirecting technical systems for the benefit of humankind.
Because the interdisciplinary nature of technology dictates a wide exposure
to other disciplines, students are encouraged to take advantage of educational
opportunities in other departments of the University community.
Students from all regions of the United States and several other countries
are engaged in graduate study at the master's or doctoral level. Their
330 TECHNOLOGY EDUCATION
undergraduate preparation varies, ranging from technical fields such as
engineering, industrial technology, industrial arts, and journalism, to fields
such as speech communication, art, and theology.
The program is involved in the Academic Common Market of the SREB
(Southern Regional Education Board). Students from the southern region
(thirteen southern states) should inquire about in-state tuition. Graduate
assistantships are frequently available at both the master's and doctoral
levels. Information is available upon request.
Admission Requirements. All applicants must comply with the general
WVU requirements and the requirements of technology education. Admission
to the program is contingent upon assessment of official transcripts of all
higher education work attempted, letters of recommendation, and the Miller
Analogies Test and Graduate Record Examination. All of these are required
for admission to graduate study as a regular student without deficiencies in
both the master's and doctoral programs. For doctoral students, a diagnostic
interview is required during the student's first semester of course work.
Areas of Concentration. In addition to the study of the interaction
between technology and culture, the department has three major technical
areas of concentration. Students are expected to focus their course of study on
one of these areas:
1. Communication and Information Systems— Study of visual, acoustical,
telecommunication, and computer systems including the analysis of informa-
tion transfer and its social/cultural impact.
2. Transportation Systems— The study of air, space, terrestrial, and
marine systems, including components and social/cultural impacts.
3. Production Systems— The study of manufacturing, construction, and
processing systems, including the social/cultural impact of the industrial
revolution, automation, and cybernation.
Students may also include in their plans of study special problems,
topics, or central themes related to technology, including appropriate tech-
nology, curriculum and instructional design in the technologies, energy,
environment, international development, public policy, technology assess-
ment, technology and culture, and technology transfer.
Master of Arts. There are two routes leading to the degree:
Thesis— Students planning to continue graduate study at the doctoral
level are encouraged to choose this route. A minimum of 36 semester hours is
required, including the development and successful defense of a thesis.
Project— Students interested in applying theory directly may choose this
route. A minimum of 36 semester hours is required, including the development
and presentation of a research project that illustrates the application of
theory to the solution of a contemporary problem related to the study of
technology.
Doctor of Education Area of Specialization
A personal plan of study leading to the Doctor of Education is designed by
the student in conjunction with an adviser and faculty committee. (See Part 5
of this catalog for additional information on doctoral degrees.) The course of
study is based on stated philosophy and objectives. Once the plan of study is
approved, it becomes a contract between the student and the graduate faculty.
Each personal program must include at least two continuous semesters of
full-time, in-residence study. A minimum of 70 semester hours beyond the
bachelor's degree and a research dissertation are required.
TECHNOLOGY EDUCATION 331
Master of Arts (M.A.)
I. Core Courses Hours
Ed. P. 320 — Introduction to Research 3
Ed. P. 330 — Foundations of Educational Measurement 3
and and
T.E. 384 — Interdisciplinary Seminar 3
T.E. 340— Technology in History 3
T.E. 344— Technology and Society 3
T.E. 351 — Contemporary Problems in Technology 3
T.E. 360— Technical Concepts: How Things Work 3
T.E. 497— Master's Degree Research 6
Total 27
II. Electives 9
Total 36
Electives are selected from University offerings and must contribute to student
program objectives. Prior approval of the adviser for electives differing from the
approved course of study is required.
The curriculum is oriented toward the development of professional
competencies rather than specific course requirements. Generally, the compe-
tencies include the ability to interpret and to initiate scholarly research in the
discipline of technology, a knowledge of significant technical developments
in at least one area of concentration, an understanding of the historical
development, cultural impact, and future implications of technology, the
ability to develop effective instructional programs in the technologies, and
the ability to integrate information from various sources in solving socio-
technical problems.
Competencies may be acquired through course work, independent study,
supervised experience outside the University, or other arrangements approved
by the student's adviser and faculty committee. Because the interdisciplinary
nature of technology dictates a wide exposure to other disciplines, students
are encouraged to take advantage of educational opportunities in other
departments of the University community.
Technology Education (T.E.)
245. Women in Internationa] Development. To examine the cultural diversities in the
definition of women's roles and status, to investigate women's access to education,
health, income, credit and technology, and to study women's contributions in third
world development.
280. Special Problems and Workshops. I, II, S. 1-6 hr. To provide credits for special
workshops and short intensive unit courses on special topics.
281. Introduction to Technology.* 3 hr. An introduction to selected technical concepts
and the evolution of the technical systems of transportation, communication, and
production, with a focus on the relationship of these systems to technological
change and the civilization process.
300. Contemporary Problems in Transportation.* 3 hr. Technical and social/cultural
problems refated to efforts in the development and utilization of new and
improved modes of transportation.
*Courses marked with an asterisk (*} are offered on a planned sequence, i.e., fall, summer,
spring. Other courses are offered as required by the student's plan of study.
332 TECHNOLOGY EDUCATION
301. Technical Developments in Transportation.* 3 hr. Selected developments in
transportation technology. Principles, concepts, and processes fundamental to the
design and development of transportation systems.
310. Contemporary Problems in Communication.* 3 hr. Technical and social cultural
problems related to efforts in the development and utilization of new and
improved modes of communication.
311. Technical Developments in Communication.* 3 hr. Selected developments in
communication technology: identification of principles, concepts, and processes
fundamental to design and development of communication systems.
320. Contemporary Problems in Production.* 3 hr. Technical and social/cultural
problems resulting from efforts in the development and utilization of new and
improved methods of producing goods and services.
321. Technical Developments in Production. * 3 hr. Selected developments in production
technology; identification of principles, concepts, and processes fundamental to
the design and development of production systems.
330. Contemporary Problems in Research and Development. 3 hr. Research and
investigation about transportation, communication, and production systems;
technical and social cultural problems related to research and development
efforts.
340. Technology in History.* 3 hr. A study of selected inventions and innovations that
have altered the course of humankind, including a technical analysis of each and
their contribution to the process of civilization.
344. Technology and Society* 3 hr. An analysis of the relationship of technical means,
change, and society. Emphasis is on the influence of technical change on social
institutions and culture in various societies.
351. Contemporary Problems in Technology.* 3 hr. PR: T.E. 340 or 344 or consent. An
analysis of current technical and social problems associated with the design,
selection, and collective use of technical devices and systems.
355. Technology and Environment.* 3 hr. PR: T.E. 340, 344, 351, or consent. A study of
communication, production, and transportation systems, their impact on the
environment and the analysis of resource management, machines and processes,
energy use, health, and resource recovery related to these systems.
356. Energy and Society.* 3 hr. PR: T.E. 340 or 344 or consent. An analysis of world
energy resources and the problems associated with retrieval and conversion.
Includes an analysis of the related social problems of citizen awareness, citizen
responsibility, and public policy.
357. Alternative Futures.* 3 hr. PR: T.E. 340 or 344 or consent. An overview of
forecasting methods with group and individual activities using selected techniques
to gain information about the future. Emphasis is on the design and redesign of
technical systems for social purpose.
360. Technical Concepts: How Things Work.* 3 hr. A study of the principles and
components of technical devices. An analysis of mechanical, electrical, optical,
acoustical, chemical, and pressure elements of technical systems.
371. Curriculum Development and Physical Facility Design.* 3 hr. PR: T.E. 340 or 344 or
consent. Development of curriculum components for the study of technology and
the selection of facility design related to curricula requirements.
372. Development of Instructional Materials.* 3 hr. PR: Consent. Design and develop-
ment of media and instructional units for education in the technologies.
*Courses marked with an asterisk (*) are offered on a planned sequence, i.e., fall, summer,
spring. Other courses are offered as required by the student's plan of study.
TECHNOLOGY EDUCATION 333
373. Professional Development. I, II, S. 1-6 hr. (May be repeated. Graded S or U. Not for
degree credit.) PR: Consent. Specially designed experiences for those interested in
advancing professional skills in the study of technology.
374. Technology Education: Elementary School* 3 hr. PR: T.E. 340, 344 or consent. An
overview of technology, its role in society and its place in elementary curricula.
Approaches to teaching technology as content and the integration of projects and
activities into the elementary-school curriculum.
376. Technology Education: Middle School* 3 hr. PR: T.E. 340, 344, or consent. An
overview of technology-related content appropriate for learners, age 10-14.
Emphasis is on designing units and courses of study and the selection of
instructional methods and materials.
378. Technology Education: Secondary School* 3 hr. PR: T.E. 340, 344, or consent. An
overview of the content appropriate in technology courses for learners, age 14-18.
Emphasis on designing units and courses of study and the selection of instructional
methods and materials.
383. Seminar. I, II, S. 1-6 hr.
384. Interdisciplinary Seminar— Technology and Culture.* 3 hr. PR: T.E. 340, 344, or
consent. An analysis of the relationship between individuals, society, and
technical systems. Guest presenters assist students in an examination of tech-
nology from the perspective of various disciplines.
385. Practicum.* I, II, S. 1-12 hr. PR: Consent.
390. Special Topics. I, II, S. 1-6 hr. PR: Consent.
391. Advanced Topics. I, II, S. 1-6 hr.
397. Master's Degree Research or Theory. I, II, S. 1-15 hr.
400. Technology; Its History and Development.* 3 hr. Major technical periods in the
civilization process and the interrelationships of technological developments to
the social/cultural milieu.
403. Design in Technology. S. 3 hr. Study of the design of technical products and
systems.
404. Readings in Technology and Culture.* 3 hr. Fundamental, historical, and contem-
porary ideas of the nature of technology as an area of created knowledge.
405. Innovation and Invention.* 3 hr. A study of the innovation and invention process.
480. Projects in Technology. I, II, S. 1-6 hr. PR: Consent.
481. Problems in Technology. I, II, S. 1-6 hr. PR: Consent.
490. Teaching Practicum. I, II, S. 2-4 hr. PR: Consent.
492. Directed Study. I, II, S. 1-6 hr. PR: Consent.
493. Special Topics. I, II, S. 1-6 hr. PR: Consent.
494. Special Seminars. I, II, S. 1-6 hr. PR: Consent.
495. Independent Study. I, II, S. 1-6 hr. PR: Consent.
496. Graduate Seminar. I, II, S. 1-4 hr. PR: Consent.
497. Research. I, II, S. 1-15 hr. PR: Consent.
498. Thesis. I, II, S. 1-4 hr. PR: Consent.
499. Colloquium. I, II, S. 2-9 hr. PR: Consent.
*Courses marked with an asterisk (*) are offered on a planned sequence, i.e., fall, summer,
spring. Other courses are offered as required by the student's plan of study.
334 TECHNOLOGY EDUCATION
THEATRE
Judith W. B. Williams, Chair
307-A Creative Arts Center
Degrees Offered: M.F.A.
Graduate Faculty: Members Brown, Gagliano, Guillot, Herendeen, Neel, Siegrist,
Whitty, and Williams. Associate Members Milian, Quirke, Tulchin, and Vagedes.
Master of Fine Arts
Admission. Prospective candidates for the degree of Master of Fine Arts
in Theatre (M.F.A.) must have a B.A. or B.F.A. degree or equivalent from an
accredited institution. Ordinarily, a minimum of 30 semester hours in theatre
at the undergraduate level is expected to have been completed with a grade-
point average of no less than 2.5, although students with an undergraduate
grade-point average of 2.25-2.5 may be admitted with probationary status.
Applicants must audition/interview. Applicants intending to specialize
in acting must submit a complete resume of their acting experience, at least
two letters of recommendation from acting coaches or directors, and must
present an audition before at least one member of the acting faculty. Those
intending to specialize in design must submit a complete portfolio of their
work, a resume of their design experience, and at least two letters of
recommendation from design instructors or directors. An interview with at
least one member of the design faculty is also required.
For further details regarding these requirements, address inquiries to:
Chairperson, Division of Theatre, College of Creative Arts, West Virginia
University, P.O. Box 6111, Morgantown, WV 26506-6111.
Students may be eligible for 18 hours of graduate transfer credit for
advanced standing if they meet the regular requirements of graduate
admission. Students admitted with advanced standing are required to be in
residence at WVU for a minimum of two semesters and a summer session. The
request for advanced standing should be made to the Division Chairperson at
the time of application.
Requirements. Successful completion of the minimum number of required
graduate hours in one of the two following programs:
Studio Acting Option — (1) Two academic years and one summer of
graduate course and production work totaling 54-55 credit hours; (2) A
performance thesis project; (3) Oral defense of the thesis project; (4) A
successful evaluation following the completion of the first year; and (5)
Overall 3.0 grade-point average.
The studio option is a highly disciplined period of training that focuses on
performance. Students will explore basic exercises leading to intensive scene
fully supplemented by technique courses in voice, speech, and movement. The
actor takes courses in various areas that are essential to his/her craft (theatre
history, text analysis, criticism, etc.) in order to strengthen his/her background.
However, the greatest part of time is centered in the studio work every
afternoon from 1:00 to 5:00 p.m. Each week, 10 hours are spent on acting, 4-6
hours on voice and speech, and 4-6 hours on movement.
Design Option— (1) Two academic years and one summer of graduate
course and production work totaling 54 credit hours; (2) A production thesis
and research design project; (3) A written comprehensive examination in two
of three specialized areas of theatre design (scenery, costumes, lighting) taken
in the final semester of residence; (4) A successful evaluation following the
completion of the first year; and (5) Overall 3.0 grade-point average.
THEATRE 335
Suggested Programs of Study
STUDIO ACTING OPTION
Semester J Hours
Theat. 375— Acting 3
That. 351— Voice and Speech 2
Theat. 371— Movement 2
Theat. 491— Make-up 1
Theat. 331— Research 3
Theat. 200— Text Analysis 3
14
Semester II
Theat. 376— Acting 3
Theat. 352— Voice and Speech 2
Theat. 372— Movement 2
Theat. 200— Text Analysis 3
Theat. 460— Theatre History 3
13
Semester III [Summer)
Theat. 278— Repertory Theatre 6
Semester IV
Theat. 353 — Voice and Speech 2
Theat. 373— Movement 2
Theat. 377— Acting 3
Theat. 386— Criticism 3
Theat. 400— Performance Thesis or
Theatre elective 3
13
Semester V
Theat. 374— Movement 2
Theat. 354— Voice and Speech 2
Theat. 378— Acting 3
Theat. 400— Performance Thesis, or
Theatre elective 3
10
TOTAL 56
DESIGN OPTION
Semester I
Theat. 367— Theatre Design 3
Theat. 331— Research Methods and Survey 3
Theat. 395— Period Style 1 3
Theat. 379 — Rehearsal and Performance 3
12
Semester II
Theat. 333 — Seminar in Production Research 2 3
Theat. 307— Light and Sound Seminar 3
Theat. 396— Period Style 2 3
Theat. 201 — Advanced Costume Construction, or
Theat. 205— Advanced Technical Theatre _3
12
336 THEATRE
Semester III (Summer)
Theat. 278— Repertory Theatre 6
Semester IV
Theat. 367— Theatre Design 3
Theat. 386— Dramatic Criticism and Aesthetics 3
Theat. 262— Scene Painting 3
Theat. 379— Rehearsal and Performance, or
Theat. 400— Performance Thesis 3
12
Semester V
Theat. 367— Theatre Design 3
Theat. 334— Theatre Design— Portfolio Preparation 3
Theat. 201— Advanced Costume Construction, or
Theat. 205— Advanced Technical Theatre 3
Theat. 379— Rehearsal and Performance, or
Theat. 400— Performance Thesis 3
12
TOTAL 54
Theatre (Theat.)
200. Directed Theatre Studies. I, II. 3-12 hr. (May be repeated for max. 12 hr. credit.} PR:
Consent. Studies in theatre history, performance, stage design and technology,
and theatre crafts. Subject matter and number of sections varies from semester to
semester.
201. Advanced Costume Construction. I, II. 3 hr. (May be repeated for max. 12 hr.
credit.) PR: Theat. 105. Study and practical application of costume construction
through flat pattern, draping, and period projects. Production assignments on
theatre productions.
203. Advanced Theatre Lighting Design. I. 3 hr. PR: Theat. 103 or consent. Advanced
theories of lighting and design for the stage. Practical experience with advanced
lighting equipment.
205. Advanced Technical Theatre. I, II. 3 hr. (May be repeated for max. 6hr. credit.) PR:
Theat. 106, 107. Detailed study of scenery construction. Research projects,
technical drawings, welding, properties construction, and study of new materials.
Practical experience through work on productions.
206. Stage Management. I, II. 3 hr. PR: Theat. 106, 107, or consent. Detailed study of the
role of the stage manager. Some stage management of Division of Theatre
productions may be required.
210. Theatre Dance 1. I. 2 hr. PR: Dance 9. Develops a basic practical knowledge of
choreographed movement in the musical theatre dance idiom. Includes a study of
fundamentals of ballet for the actor, derivative musical/rhythmic forms, and
elementary Broadway dance vocabulary and styles. [Also listed as Dance 210.)
211. Theatre Dance 2. II. 2 hr. PR: Theat. 210/Dance 210. Comprehensive study of
representative musical theatre dance styles, relative to period (1900 to present)
and ethnic derivation. Includes study of isolationary movement and principles of
classical dance applicable to the Broadway idiom. (Also listed as Dance 211.)
212. Theatre Dance Repertory. I. 2 hr. PR: Dance 211/Theat. 211. Develops and expands
the technical and stylistic fundamentals established in the Dance 210-211/Theat.
210-211 courses, applying them to reconstruction and staging of a variety of
classic dance sequences from notable Broadway musicals. (Aiso listed as Dance
212.)
THEATRE 337
213. Theatre Dance Performance Workshop. II. 2 hr. PR: Dance 212/Theat. 212.
Continues study of dance technique, isolationary movement and stylistic vocabu-
laries established in previous theatre dance courses. Emphasizes development of
original choreography in representative Broadway dance styles. Includes study of
elements of performance in musical theatre. (Also listed as Dance 213.)
220. Costume History 1. I. 3 hr. Detailed study of modes and manners in dress from
ancient Egypt through the Renaissance.
221. Costume History 2. II. 3 hr. Detailed study of modes and manners in dress from the
late Renaissance to the present.
223. Costume Crafts. II. 3 hr. PR: Theat. 105, 201. Workshops conducted by faculty
members, graduate students, visiting artists, and class members, using skills
previously learned and providing "hands-on" experiences with a variety of
materials and techniques.
225. Theatrical Rigging and Electricity. II. 3 hr. PR: Theat. 100, 107. A detailed study of
the rigging systems used on the stage and of electricity as it relates to stage
lighting.
240. Musicai Theatre Repertory. I. (Alternate Years.) 2 hr. PR: Theatre/Dance 221,
Music 41, or Consent. (Open to applied music majors in voice.) Integration of
acting, music, and dance through their joint application to representative sequences
from standard musical theatre literature.
241. Musical Theatre Performance. II. (Alternate Years.) 2 hr. PR: Theat. 240 or
consent. (Open to applied music majors in voice.) Continuation of Theatre 240,
focusing upon student staging and development in performance of contemporary
and stylized works.
242. Musical Theatre Literature. I. (Alternate Years.) 3 hr. PR: Consent. (Open to
applied music majors in voice.) Study of standard representative musical works
focusing on style.
243. Musicai Theatre Practicum. II. (Alternate Years.) 3 hr. PR: Theatre 242 or consent.
(Open to applied music majors in voice.] Independent study in musical theatre.
251. Advanced Vocal Techniques. I. 2 hr. PR: Consent. Concentration on vocal
character demands for the stage. Dialect work. Individual tutorials.
252. Advanced Vocal Techniques. II. 2 hr. PR: Consent. Continuation of Theat. 251.
260. Theatre Performance and Rehearsal Laboratory. I, II. 1-3 hr. (May be repeated for
max. 9 hr. credit.) PR: Theatre major and consent. Participation in assigned theatre
projects. Appreciation of creativity and performance techniques in theatre.
262. Scene Painting. I. 3 hr. PR: Theat. 168 or consent. A study in the basic techniques
used in preparing and painting scenery. Practical experience in painting scenery
for theatre productions.
267. Advanced Problems in Theatre Design. I, II. 3 hr. (May be repeated for max. 12 hr.
credit.) PR: Theat. 167, 168. A detailed study of costume and set design through
in-depth design projects.
271. Advanced Stage Movement. I. 2 hr. PR: Theat. 172. Advanced study of movement
techniques for character work. Period styles of movement.
272. Advanced Stage Movement. II. 2 hr. PR: Theat. 271. Continuation of the work in
Theat. 271.
275. Advanced Acting Studio. I. 3 hr. PR: Consent. Continuation of advanced exercise
work and styles. Coordinated with rehearsal/performance.
276. Advanced Acting Studio. II. 3 hr. PR: Consent. Continuation of the work in Theat.
275. Audition techniques.
338 THEATRE
278. Repertory Theatre. S. 1-6 hr. [May be repeated for max. 12 hr. credit.) PR: Consent.
Rehearsal and performance techniques for producing plays in rotating repertory.
Emphasis is on the creation of a synthesized company of performers, designers,
and technicians.
280. Advanced Play Directing. II. 3 hr. PR: Theat. 180 or consent. Emphasis on the work
of the director as an integrating artist. High level of proficiency in the direction of a
one-act play is required of all students enrolled.
282. Creative Dramatics. I, II, S. 3 hr. PR: Theat. 75 or consent. Study and practice of
creative dramatic activity as a method of learning and self development for
children.
284. Puppetry. I, II. 3 hr. PR: Theat. 75 or consent. Comprehensive survey of
construction and manipulation techniques of puppets. Evaluation of role of
puppetry in child behavior and therapy techniques.
290. Playwriting. I, II. 3 hr. PR: Consent. Development of basic playwrighting
techniques. Specific assignments explore characterization, dramatic event, dia-
logue, tension, compression. Emphasis on the student finding his own voice, style,
and courage to dramatize his view of the world.
291. Advanced PJaywriting. II. 3 hr. PR: Theat. 290. Further exploration of dramatic
technique, with emphasis on orchestrating the longer play. Also touches on script
analysis of known dramatic texts and on practical problems of a playwriting
career.
295. Classic Theatre to 1700. 1. (Alternate Years.) 3 hr. A survey of theatre history, with
emphasis on the development of performance conditions, from classical antiquity
through the middle of the seventeenth century.
296. European and American Theatre, 1700-1850. II. 3 hr. A survey of theatre history,
with emphasis on the development of performance conditions, from the middle of
the seventeenth century to the rise of Realism in the 1840s.
297. Modern Theatre, 1850-1940. 1. (Alternate Years.) 3 hr. A survey of theatre history,
with emphasis on the development of performance conditions, from the middle of
the nineteenth century to the outbreak of World War II.
298. Contemporary Theatre Since 1940. II. (Alternate Years.) 3 hr. A survey of theatre
history, with emphasis on the development of performance conditions, from World
War II to the present.
307. Light and Sound Seminar. II. 3 hr. PR: Theat. 203 or equiv. An in-depth exploration
of advanced lighting and sound for the theatre with particular emphasis on
repertory lighting, dance, and opera.
331. Research Methods and Survey. I. 3 hr. PR: Consent. Research methods and
techniques for theatre artists, scholars, and designers.
333. Seminar in Production Research. II. 3 hr. PR: Theat. 331, 367. Seminar approach to
individual design projects with oral and written presentation of research materials.
Intensive critique within class by faculty and peers.
334. Theatre Design— Portfolio Preparation. I. 3 hr. PR: Theat. 307, 333. An in-depth
work in packaging and presentation of portfolio work, job opportunities, and
preparation for professional union examinations.
351. Graduate Vocal Techniques. I. 2 hr. PR: Consent. Reinforcement of basic vocal
techniques with special focus on the actor's individual qualities.
352. Graduate Vocal Techniques. II. 2 hr. PR: Consent. Continuation of Theat. 351.
353. Advanced Graduate Vocal Techniques. I. 2 hr. Concentration on vocal character
demands for the stage. Dialect work. Individual tutorials.
THEATRE 339
354. Advanced Graduate Vocal Techniques. II. 2 hr. PR: Consent. Continuation of
Theat. 353.
362. Styles of Production Design. I. 3 hr. PR: Theat. 295, 296, or consent. Extensive and
intensive study of production styles in costume, lighting, and scene design.
367. Theatre Design. I. 3 hr. (May be repeated for max. 9 hr. credit.) PR: Theat. 267 or
equiv. A lecture/studio course in scenery and costumes. Intensive practical
experience in drawing, painting, and model building for portfolio presentation.
371. Graduate Stage Movement. I. 2 hr. PR: Consent. Study of movement techniques
focusing on use of dynamics on the stage. Development of spatial awareness.
372. Graduate Stage Movement. II. 2 hr. PR: Consent. Continuation of the work in
Theat. 371.
373. Advanced Graduate Stage Movement. I. 2 hr. PR: Consent. Advanced study of
movement techniques for character work. Period styles of movement.
374. Advanced Graduate Stage Movement. II. 2 hr. PR: Consent. Continuation of the
work in Theat. 373. Tutorials.
375. Graduate Acting Studio. I. 3 hr. PR: Consent. Advanced exercise work, role
analysis and process. Scene study concentration on problem solving in beginning
style work. Coordinated with rehearsal/performance.
376. Graduate Acting Studio. II. 3 hr. PR: Consent. Continuation of Theat. 375.
Coordinated with rehearsal/performance.
377. Advanced Graduate Acting Studio. I. 3 hr. PR: Consent. Continuation of advanced
exercise work and styles work. Coordinated with rehearsal/performance.
378. Advanced Graduate Acting Studio. II. 3 hr. PR: Consent. Continuation of Theat.
377. Audition techniques.
379. Rehearsal and Performance. I. 3 hr. (May be repeated for max. 12 hr. credit.) PR:
Consent. Participation in assigned performance projects.
395. Period Style 1. I. 3 hr. PR: Theat. 167 or equiv. An in-depth exploration of
architecture, costumes, customs, and ornamentation in period style for the theatre
from Egyptian through Renaissance.
396. Period Style 2. 3 hr. PR: Theat. 395 or equiv. An in-depth exploration of
architecture, costumes, customs, and ornamentation in period style for the theatre
from the Baroque to the present.
400. Performance Thesis. I, II. 3 hr. PR: Consent. Creative performance project.
Requires the production of a written record which traces the acting or design
process as it develops during planning, rehearsal, and performance.
460. Specialized Seminars. 3-9 hr. (May be repeated for max. 9 hr. credit.) PR: Consent.
Selected fields of study in theatre.
491. Advanced Study. I, II, S. 1-6 hr. PR: Consent. Investigation in advanced subjects
which are not covered in regularly scheduled courses. Study may be independent
or through specially scheduled lectures.
497. Research. I, II. 1-15 hr.
499. Graduate Colloquium. I, II, S. 1-6 hr. PR: Consent. For graduate students not
seeking course work credit but who wish to meet residence requirements, use
University facilities, and participate in its academic and cultural programs.
340 THEATRE
WILDLIFE MANAGEMENT
Jack E. Coster, Chairperson of Division of Forestry
322-A Percival Hall
Harry V. Wiant, Jr., Coordinator of the Graduate Program
Degrees Offered: M.S., Ph.D.
Graduate Faculty: Members Brown, Margraf, Michael, Perry, Samuel, Smith, and
Whitmore.
Master of Science (M.S.)
The Division of Forestry of the College of Agriculture and Forestry offers
programs leading to the degree of Master of Science (M.S.) for students who
wish to major in management. Admission requirements are listed on page 383
for the College of Agriculture and Forestry. Degree requirements are either 30
semester hours of approved study, including a 6-hour thesis, or 33 hours
without a thesis — but with a 3-hour problem paper. Those programs ordinarily
require two years of residence.
Wildlife Management (W. Man.)
213. Wildlife Ecosystem Ecology. I. 3 hr. PR: Biol. 1, 2, and 51 or consent. Basic
principles of ecosystem ecology, emphasizing structure and function, succession,
adaptation of organisms to the environment (physiological ecology), and survey of
major ecosystems with emphasis on their role as wildlife habitats.
214. Wildlife Population Ecology. II. 3 hr. PR: W. Man. 213 or consent. Emphasis on
theoretical and applied population ecology including population growth, inter-
actions, regulation, and effects of harvesting and exploitation on natural popu-
lations. 2 hr. lee, 1 hr. lab.
224. Vertebrate Natural History. I. 3 hr. PR: Biol. 2 or consent. Relationships of fish,
amphibians, and reptiles to the forest, with emphasis on the ecology, taxonomy,
evolution, natural history, and field identification of these groups. Laboratory
emphasizes natural history and anatomy of fish, amphibians, and reptiles.
225. Mammalogy. II. 3 hr. PR: Biol. 2 or consent. Relationships of mammals to the
forest, with emphasis on ecology, taxonomy, evolution, natural history, and
anatomy of mammals. Laboratory emphasizes natural history and anatomy of
mammals.
226. Ornithology. II. 3 hr. PR: Biol. 1, 2, or consent. Identification, distribution, and
ecology of birds (particularly of forest lands). (2 hr. lee, 1 hr. lab.)
228. Wildlife Policy and Administration. II. 3 hr. Study of the organization, authority,
policies, programs, and administration of public agencies and private organizations
concerned with fish and wildlife. Emphasis is on the legal and political role in
making wildlife management decisions.
231. Wildlife Techniques, I. 3 hr. PR: Wildlife major or consent; W. Man. 213, Biol. 151.
Field and laboratory techniques necessary in management and study of wildlife;
collection of field data, mapping, censusing, habitat evaluation, literature and
scientific writing.
234. Principles of Wildlife Management. II. 3 hr. PR: Wildlife major or consent; W. Man.
213, 231. Major game animals and problems and principles involved in their
management.
312. Advanced Wildlife Population Ecology. II. 3 hr. PR: W. Man. 214 or equiv., or
consent. Case history approach to wildlife population ecology with emphasis on
ungulates, gallinaceous birds, large predators; forest invertebrates and their
vertebrate predators; endangered species; genetics and conservation of wildlife
populations. Emphasis on current and historical literature. (3 hr. lee.)
WILDLIFE MANAGEMENT 341
333. Quantitative Ecology. I. 3 hr. PR: Stat. 311 or equiv., and W. Man. 213 or equiv. A
survey of techniques and strategies for the quantitative analysis of complex
ecological data sets. (Offered in Fall of odd years.)
370. Wildlife Seminar. II. 1 hr. persem.; (4 hr. max.). PR: Consent. Discussion of current
developments in wildlife management.
380. Rural and Urban Wildlife Management. II. 3 hr. PR: Consent. Management of
nongame wildlife in the rural and urban environment, emphasizing habitat
improvement and development and control of pest species. 2 hr. lee, 1 hr. lab.
(Offered in Spring of odd years.)
434. Ecology and Management of Upland Wildlife. I. 4 hr. PR: Consent. Ecology and
management of upland game birds and mammals with emphasis on recent
literature. (Offered in Fall of even years.)
436. Ecology and Management of Wetland Wildlife. II. 4 hr. PR: Consent. Ecology and
management of waterfowl and wetland furbearers with emphasis on recent
research and management literature. (Offered in Spring of even years.)
342 WILDLIFE MANAGEMENT
Part 3
OTHER GRADUATE COURSES
AND FACILITIES
Agricultural Mechanics
Agricultural Mechanics (Ag. M.)
230. Farm Structures. II. 3 hr. Study of structures required for agriculture, family
housing, storage, and recreation. Includes function, planning, layout, materials,
construction techniques, prefabrication, repair, remodeling, and costs. 2 hr. rec, 3
hr. lab.
240. Agricultural Engines. I, II. 3 hr. Study of power sources (gasoline, diesel, turbine,
wankel, etc.) for agriculture and forestry. Operation, selection, maintenance
techniques, and emissions impact on power and fuel efficiency. 2 hr. rec, 3 hr. lab.
260. Advanced Farm Machinery. I. 3 hr. Systems approach to selection, use, and
operation of machinery as related to agriculture, forestry, and other rural
activities. Emphasis on safety and environmental impact. Use of records for
management decisions, purchase, replacement, sale, or overhaul. 2 hr. rec, 3 hr.
lab.
270. Electricity in Agriculture. II. 3 hr. Study of production and safe use of electricity
for home and agriculture. Emphasis on approved wiring practices, motors, and
electrical controls and their applications in lighting, heating, refrigeration, air
conditioning, water supply, and processing. 2 hr. rec, 3 hr. lab.
321. Advanced Farm Mechanics. S. 3 hr. PR: Ag. M. 120. Development of advanced
skills with hand and power tools. Areas of emphasis dependent upon needs of
individual students. Care and maintenance of power tools and shop organization
and planning are essential parts of this course. 1 hr. rec, 6 hr. lab. (Offered
Summer of every third year— next offering 1990.)
Education Foundations
Mary Yeazell, Program Coordinator
608 Allen Hall
Graduate Faculty: Member Yeazell.
Education Foundations (Ed.F.)
300. Sociology of Education. I or II. 3 hr. Education as a social institution; cultural and
class influences on education; social roles and career patterns in the school system;
the school and problems of the community. (Also listed as Soc. & A. 232.)
320. Philosophic Systems and Education. I, II, S. 3 hr. Examines different systems of
educational philosophies focusing on aims, values, and criteria of education.
Stresses the application of philosophic thinking to educational language, issues,
methods, and subject matter.
340. History of American Education. II, S. 3 hr. Major forces affecting U.S. educational
developments at all school levels are examined in political, social, economic, and
cultural context. Major historical periods include colonial, early national, pre/post
civil war, and late nineteenth to mid-twentieth century.
350. Comparative Education. II. 3 hr. PR: Graduate standing. Compares educational
systems in selected foreign countries with the United States. Examines formal and
informal educational influences in historical and contemporary contexts and in
socioeconomic, political, and philosophical perspectives.
343
380. Special Problems. II. 1-6 hr. PR: Consent.
383. Seminar. I, II, S. 1-6 hr. Selected topics in historical, sociological, and philosophical
foundations of education. (Titles to be announced each semster.)
385. Practicum. I, II. 1-12 hr. PR: Consent.
390. Special Topics. I. 1-6 hr. PR: Consent.
391. Advanced Topics. I, II, S. 1-6 hr.
491. Advanced Study. I. 1-6 hr. PR: Consent.
497. Research. I, II. 1-15 hr. PR: Consent.
Gerontology Center
The WVU Gerontology Center reflects the University's commitment to
increase understanding of the aging process, and support efforts to improve
the quality of life for elderly persons, particularly the rural elderly of
Appalachia. The Gerontology Center promotes and coordinates interdisci-
plinary teaching, research, and service in aging at WVU.
A graduate certificate program in multidisciplinary gerontology is
available through the Center for graduate students pursuing advanced
degrees in other fields and special graduate students who are non-degree
candidates.
The certificate program requires a minimum of 15 graduate hours
including fundamentals of gerontology, which is cross-listed as Biology 375
and Psychology 375, and 9 elective hours selected on the basis of appropri-
ateness to the individual student's goals from an approved pool of aging-
related courses offered in a number of departments throughout the University.
Finally, all students will enroll for 3 hours in research or special topics. A
research project and paper which demonstrates linkage between gerontology
and the student's primary discipline is required. This capstone paper will be
presented at a gerontology research seminar conducted by the Gerontology
Center.
University units involved in teaching and research in human aging
include the College of Arts and Sciences, the College of Human Resources and
Education, the College of Agriculture and Forestry, the School of Physical
Education, the School of Social Work, the School of Medicine, the School of
Nursing, the School of Pharmacy, and the Center for Extension and Continuing
Education.
The Center's library collection augments the gerontology holdings of
other campus libraries, and is open to the entire community, Monday through
Friday, 8:30 a.m.-5:00 p.m.
Candidates for the graduate certificate must meet regular general WVU
graduate admission requirements and must be able to demonstrate elementary
knowledge of gerontology, i.e. material covered in MDS 50 — Introduction to
Gerontology. Program participants must maintain a minimum grade-point
average of 3.0 in Certificate course work.
The Gerontology Center also offers an undergraduate certificate program
which is available by consent to returning students already holding bachelor's
degrees who elect to study gerontology at a less advanced level. A practitioner
certificate based on continuing education credits is offered to persons
employed in the aging field who wish to increase their knowledge of applied
gerontology as they work.
344 GERONTOLOGY CENTER
Further information, assistance in academic program planning in multi-
disciplinary gerontology, and registration forms may be obtained from Betty
Maxwell, Administrative Assistant, WVU Gerontology Center, Chestnut
Ridge Professional Building, Morgantown, WV 26506. (Telephone 304/293-
2081).
Gerontology (Geron.)
291 / 391. Special Topics. I, II. 1-3 hr. PR: Consent. Special problems for undergraduate
and graduate students working on certificate programs. Topics change from
semester to semester. Students can enroll more than once.
Other graduate courses on aging can be found in departments throughout
the University. Required courses for the Graduate Certificate in Gerontology
is: Psych. 375 — Fundamentals of Gerontology (see Psychology section), or
Bio. 375— Fundamentals of Gerontology (see Biology section).
For a complete listing of aging-related courses including Graduate
Certificate electives, contact the Gerontology Center, Chestnut Ridge Profes-
sional Building, 912 Chestnut Ridge Road, Morgantown, WV 26506. Tele-
phone: (304) 293-2081.
Landscape Architecture
Landscape Architecture (L Arc.)
229. Landscape Architecture. I. 3 hr. (For non-Landscape Architecture majors only.) An
appreciation of basic principles of design and information pertaining to use and
care of ornamental plants around the house.
248. Design Analysis. II. 2 hr. PR: Consent. Analysis of planning and design projects
with respect to offering solutions to a given problem. [Offered in Spring of odd
years.)
265. Regional Design. II. 3 hr. PR: Consent. Consideration of regional landscapes in
order to effectively relate design to the ecology and development of a region.
[Offered in Spring of even years.)
284. Professional Practice. I. 3 hr. PR: Consent. Procedures in preparation of contract
documents, fees, estimates, operation of an office, and relationship to clients and
contractors.
Library Science
Library Science courses can be a part of many graduate programs as
electives in some and as a field of study in others.
The courses are designed for the following students:
1. Elementary or secondary school teachers who wish to meet the
certification requirements for school library media specialists in West
Virginia and other states.
2. Certified teachers and school librarians desiring further development
in the field of library science.
3. Administrators who wish to broaden their knowledge and training in
the field of school library media.
4. Graduate students in other fields in humanities and social sciences
desiring electives in library science.
In addition, the department offers courses designed to give students a
working knowledge of the major information sources in specific areas and to
help them in using the library effectively.
LANDSCAPE ARCHITECTURE I LIBRARY SCIENCE 345
Students pursuing a Master of Arts degree in Education with an option in
library science must take 12 hours in education, 12 hours in library science,
and 12 additional hours in library science, education, or a related field for a
total of 36 hours. Consult the Department of Library Science for specific
course requirements. Comprehensive examinations are required in both
education and library science.
Library Science (L Sci.)
201.* Reference and Bibliography. I, II. 3 hr. Basic reference materials in print and
non-print formats (dictionaries, encyclopedias, indexes, yearbooks, computerized
data bases, etc.) are studied and evaluated. Emphasizes theory of information
seeking and practical experience with materials.
203.* Literature for Children. I, II. 3 hr. A survey of children's literature including its
historical development as well as current trends. Emphasizes selection, critical
evaluation, and utilization of literary materials for developmental, recreational,
and curriculum needs. Appropriate media included.
205.* Young Adult Literature. I, II. 3 hr. Survey of adolescent literature and other
library materials (print and non-print) for junior and seniorhigh school students.
222.* Field Practice. I, II. 3 hr. PR: L. Sci. 201, 203, 205, 223, 250. Practical experience in
a variety of public, school, and special libraries, and instructional materials
centers, under the supervision of experienced librarians and media specialists.
Students must complete 100 clock hours.
223.* Cataloging and Classification. I. 3 hr. Basic principles and problems of cataloging
and classification combined with practical experience in processing the various
types of books and materials. Problems peculiar to the teacher-librarian con-
sidered.
250.* Managing School Library Media Centers. II. 3 hr. PR: L. Sci. 201, 203, 205, 223; Ed.
P. 260, or consent. Covers planning, organizing, and operating a school library
media center. Includes staffing, budgeting, scheduling, public relations, and
program design. Stresses the role of the media center in the total educational
process.
291. Advanced Study. I, II. 1-3 hr. (May be repeated for credit only when the content of
the course is different.) Study of current topics related to informational resources
or the school media center. A final project will be required.
326. Bibliography of the Social Sciences. II. 1-2 hr. Covers bibliographic structure and
information sources in psychology, sociology, political science, economics,
history, education, and related disciplines. Provides a good working knowledge
of information retrieval tools and the ability to use libraries effectively.
391. Advanced Study— Data Base Searching. I, II. 1 hr. Course is designed to enable
students to conduct effective searches of computerized data bases. Both basic
principles and hands on experience are included.
410. Special Topics. I, II, S. 3 hr. A thorough study of some phase of library science
based on the needs and interest of the individual.
*Presently required for School Library Media Certification in West Virginia.
Multidisciplinary Studies
Multidisciplinary Studies (MDS) courses are those which: (a) analyze
significant issues, problems, or themes by applying two or more disciplines to
them; or (b) explore the theoretical and methodological relationship of two or
346 LIBRARY SCIENCE I MULTIDISCIPLINARY STUDIES
more disciplines to each other; and (c) involve a combination of disciplines so
as to preclude their being classified realistically as one of humanities, social
science, or physical science.
Responsibility for approving MDS courses rests with the LSP Committee
and the Faculty Senate. Each course has its own staff, drawn from the
faculties of the schools and colleges of the University.
Multidisciplinary Studies (MDS)
250. Issues in Gerontology. II. 3 hr. PR: Consent. Analysis of societal aspects of aging
and exploration of current issues in gerontology. Relating of gerontological
concepts to previous course work and field experience.
Pathology
Research Areas— Atherosclerosis; thrombosis; platelet aggregation and
functions with correlative ultrastructural study, lipid and lipoprotein metab-
olism in cultured human endothelial cells; morphometric (including electron
microscopic) and biochemical studies on the progression of atherosclerotic
lesions in humans; regression of experimental atherosclerotic lesions; ultra-
structural aspects of renal disease; ultrastructural reflections of dedifferen-
tiation in neoplasia; histogenesis of neoplasia; biomedical application of
laboratory medicine; applied laboratory studies in microbiology.
Pathology (Path.)
328. Basic Pathology. (For dental students and graduate students, with consent.) II. 5
hr. PR: Anat. 309. General changes in basic pathologic processes and changes
evoked in specific organ systems as a basis for understanding clinical disease.
338. Oral Pathology 1. II, S. 3 hr. PR: Path. 328, or consent. Clinical, radiographic, and
microscopic discussion of local and systemic diseases affecting oral and paraoral
structures.
350. Hematology. 3 hr. (For certain graduate students, with consent of chairperson.)
Includes morphologic description of formed elements of blood including classi-
fication of red blood cell, white blood cell, and platelet disorders. Case material
and slide reviews are integral parts of the course work.
351. Pathology and Laboratory Medicine 1. (For medical students and limited number
of regular full-time graduate students in medical basic sciences and consent of the
chairperson.) I. 8 hr. PR: Medicine I Curriculum. Presents pathology as a body of
knowledge and a discipline, including laboratory aspects of disease. General
pathology, including cell injury, inflammation, neoplasia, thrombosis and circula-
tory disturbances, is followed by a systemic approach to disease states.
352. Pathology and Laboratory Medicine 2. (For medical students and limited number
of regular full-time graduate students in medical basic sciences and consent of the
chairperson.) II. 7 hr. PR: Path. 351. Continuation of Path. 351.
353. Oral Pathology 2. I. 2 hr. PR: Path. 338; consent. Continuation of Path. 338.
355. Oral Disease Diagnosis and Management. (Fordental students, third year.) II. 1 hr.
PR: Path. 338, 353; consent. Oral and systemic diseases are presented clinically,
radiographically, and histologically. Diagnosis is established and treatment
arrived at through group discussion.
356. Advanced Pathology. I, II. 3 hr. PR: Path. 328 or 351; consent. Microscopic and
gross specimens from selected autopsies.
PATHOLOGY 347
382. .Advanced Oral Histopathology. I. II. 1-2 hr. PR: Path. 338. 353: consent.
Microscopic study of head and neck lesions.
401. Special Studies in Oral Pathology. I. II. 1-3 hr. PR: Consent. Advanced seminar or
independent study of local and or systemic disease processes affecting oral and
facial structures.
491. Advanced Study. 1-3 hr. PR: Consent. Specialized study in subspecialty, such as
blood banking, clinical chemistry, immunopathology. [Special lectures and or
seminar.)
497. Research. I. II. 1-15 hr. PR: Consent.
Philosophy
Philosophy (Phil.)
253. Philosophy of Mathematics. I or II. (Alternate Years.) 3 hr. PR: Phil. 106 or consent.
Contemporary viewpoints in the foundations of mathematics.
283. Philosophy of History. I or II. (Alternate Years.) 3 hr. PR: 6 hr. in philosophy or
history major or consent. Theoretical problems such as the nature of historical
explanation, relativism, and the status of speculative principles of history.
285. Philosophy of Language. I or II. 3 hr. PR: 6 hr. in philosophy or linguistic or
language major or consent. Philosophical problems concerning the nature of
meaning and language.
290. Directed Studies. I, II. S. 1-6 hr. (May be repeated for credit.) PR: Instructor's
written consent. Individually supervised research and projects.
r.vanced Topics in Philosophy. I or II. 3 hr. PR: 6 hr. in philosophy or consent.
Advanced philosophical investigation of selected problems and issues. Topics will
vary.
302. Philosophy of Science. I or II. 3 hr. Philosophical problems associated with the
concepts and methodology of science.
303. Theory of Knowledge. I or II. 3 hr. Definitions of knowledge, truth, and belief.
Problems associated with skepticism of induction, perception, introspection.
memory, and a priori knowledge.
304. Symbolic Logic. I or II. 3 hr. The logic of statements, relations, and identity:
introduction to the notions of consistency, completeness, and decidability.
305. History of Philosophy. I or II. 3-9 hr. Selected topics in the history of Western
philosophy, usually with concentration on one of the following periods: ancient.
medieval, modern, or recent.
306. Metaphysics. I or II. 3 hr. Traditional problems associated with universals and
particulars, reality and experiences, causality, space and time, matter and mind,
the nature of the self. etc.
308. Ethics of the Marketplace. I. II. 3 hr. An examination of moral questions regarding
the evaluation of economic systems, labor management relationships, product
liability, advertising, codes of conduct, and conflicts of interest.
3 10. Ethics. I or II. 3 hr. An examination of selected theoretical and applied problems in
the field of professional ethics.
313. Advanced Philosophy of the Social Sciences. I or II. 3 hr. PR: Consent. Philosophical
problems associated with the concepts and methodology of the social sciences.
321. Seminar: Selected Topics. 3-9 hr.
391. Advanced Topics. I. II. S. 1-9 hr.
397. Master's Degree Research or Theory. I, II. S. 1-9 hr. PR: Consent.
348 PHILOSOPHY
Physical Science
Physical Science (P. Sci.)
490. Teaching Practicum in Physical Science. I, II. 1-3 hr. PR: Consent. Opportunity to
develop instructional materials for and help teach innovative physical science
courses under the supervision of a faculty member.
491. Advanced Study. I, II. 1-3 hr. PR: Consent.
Religious Studies
Religious Studies (Relig.)
290. Seminar: Selected Topic. I or II. 3 hr. PR: A previous religious studies course or
consent.
491. Advanced Study in Religious Studies. I, II, S. 3 hr. PR: Consent. Investigation of
advanced topics related to undergraduate courses in religious studies. (Indepen-
dently arranged.}
Center for Women's Studies
Judith G. Stitzel, Ph.D. (U. Minn.), Director of Center for Women's Studies; Professor of
English.
The Center for Women's Studies grows out of West Virginia University's
commitment to addressing the complex and varied needs of the women and
men of the future. New career opportunities, new flexibility in male and
female roles, new economic realities and new scholarship on women are
challenging us all to rethink old assumptions and explore new possibilities for
our lives. Established in 1984 within the office of the Vice President and
Provost for Academic Affairs and Research, the center is a response to this
intellectual challenge. The center acts to facilitate and stimulate teaching and
research throughout the University and the community on women and
gender-related issues and to coordinate the interdisciplinary Women's Studies
Program.
The basic premise of the women's studies program is that knowledge of
women's experiences and achievements is fundamental to our knowledge of
humankind and that the new scholarship on women offers important
perspectives on the methods and content of the traditional disciplines.
Academic Opportunities in Women's Studies
Information on graduate-level courses and independent study opportu-
nities in women's studies is available from the director of the center. Students
may choose to be examined on women's studies as a field of concentration in a
number of graduate programs as well as to do research on women and/or
gender-related issues. An interdisciplinary degree is available through the
Master of Arts in Liberal Studies (M.A.L.S.). For further information about
this degree program, contact Henry L. Ruf, Department of Philosophy, or
Judith G. Stitzel, Director, Center for Women's Studies.
Although no graduate certificate in women's studies is presently available,
students may choose to add an Undergraduate Certificate in Women's Studies
to their bachelor's degree. The certificate recognizes a specific concentration
of women's studies courses and would constitute a valuable professional
credential forgraduates in a variety of careers necessitating an understanding
of women's issues. Details about the certificate are available from the center.
WOMEN'S STUDIES 349
In addition to the women's studies courses listed below, other courses
focusing on women and gender and independent study opportunities are
available in several University departments. The Center for Women's Studies
also sponsors workshops, seminars, and special lectures to bring women's
studies scholarship and concerns before the University and community.
Women's Studies News is published to announce program activities, events of
interest and new resources for research and instruction. To receive a detailed
schedule of courses and further information about the activities, contact the
Center for Women's Studies, 200 Clark Hall, 293-2339.
Women's Studies (Wm. St.)
240. Methods and Perspectives in Women's Studies. I, II. 4 hr. PR: Junior standing or
consent. Exploration of theories, perspectives, and methods appropriate to the
interdisciplinary study of women and gender.
290. Independent Study. I, II, S. 1-6 hr. Individual study of an interdisciplinary issue in
women's studies and/or gender studies.
391. Advanced Topics. I, II. 1-6 hr. PR: Consent. Investigation in advanced women's
studies topics not covered in regularly scheduled courses. Study may be indepen-
dent or through specially scheduled meetings.
491. Advanced Study. I, II. 1-6 hr. PR: Consent. Investigation in advanced women's
studies topics not covered in regularly scheduled courses. Study may be indepen-
dent or through specially scheduled meetings.
Curriculum and Instruction
Cynthia S. Sunal, Chairperson of Graduate Programs
604 Allen Hall
Graduate Faculty: Members Bontempo, Bower, Deay, DeCosta, Haas, Helfeldt, Holtan,
Iannone, Moxley, Obenauf, Phillips, Reed, Saltz, P. Smith, C. S. Sunal, D. W. Sunal,
and Thomas. Associate Members Carline and Hobbs.
The Department of Curriculum and Instruction offers programs (listed
separately) in elementary, secondary, and reading education. Applicants
must comply with the WVU requirements, the requirements of the College of
Human Resources and Education, and the requirements of the curriculum and
instruction department. Admission is contingent on assessment of complete
official transcripts of all higher-education work attempted and other evidence
that the faculty deem necessary to judge probable success in a graduate
program. Upon admission to any program, all students are assigned an
academic adviser. All students should contact their adviser for specific
programs and degree requirements.
Energy and Water Research Center
Energy Research Division
The Energy Research Division (ERD) stimulates and coordinates energy
research conducted by University faculty and graduate students. Independent
of any single academic unit, the division administers some of the University's
energy research programs and maintains an information data base on all
energy activities.
The primary thrust of the research sponsored through the ERD is the
development of safer, more economical and environmentally sound ways to
mine, transport, and combust coal or convert it to liquid fuels and chemicals,
350 ENERGY AND WATER RESEARCH CENTER
along with improved marketing methods. The ERD also supports research in
petroleum and natural gas extraction and use as well as in alternative energy
resource development. The division favors an interdisciplinary approach for
the programs it sponsors.
The ERD indirectly supports a number of graduate research assistantships.
Since projects are managed by the faculty members who receive ERD awards,
students interested in becoming part of an ERD program should contact the
department chairperson to learn about the availability of assistantships in
their department.
For more information about the ERD, contact Professor Richard A.
Bajura, Director, or Caulton L. Irwin, Associate Director, WVU Energy
Research Division, 258 Stewart Street, Morgantown, WV 26506
Mining and Mineral Resources Research Institute
West Virginia University has been designated by the federal government
as one of 32 institutes dedicated to research and advanced training of students
in the mining and mineral resources area. The WVU program focuses on
researching problems associated with mining in West Virginia and the
Appalachian region. Managed by the Energy Research Division, this program
provides opportunities for WVU faculty to receive support for research
projects involving students.
Generic Technology Center for Respirable Dust (GTCRD)
West Virginia University, through the Energy and Water Research
Center, is a member of the Generic Technology Center for Respirable Dust
(GTCRD), a program funded by the U.S. Bureau of Mines. Begun in 1983, one
of the focuses of the GTCRD is in the area of coal workers' pnuemoconiosis, or
black lung disease. Several of the University's projects deal with developing
methods to prevent coal workers' pnuemoconiosis and involve researchers
from the College of Mineral and Energy Resources, College of Engineering,
School of Medicine, and College of Arts and Sciences.
The GTCRD supports graduate students as well as post-doctoral fellows.
To learn whether assistantships are available in a department through this
program, students should contact their department chairpersons.
Consortium for Fossil Fuel Liquefaction Science (CFFLS)
Through the Energy and Water Research Center, WVU is one of six
research organizations that form the Consortium for Fossil Fuel Liquefaction
Science (CFFLS), a group dedicated to the continued development of coal
liquefaction as an energy resource alternative. WVU faculty members and
graduate students are participating in this program. Research awards are
made through the Energy and Water Research Center to the faculty members
who then manage the projects at the department level.
Students who are interested in assistantships in the area of liquefaction
should contact their department chairpersons to learn whether CFFLS
research assistanships are available.
Oak Ridge Associated Universities (ORAU)
West Virginia University is a member of Oak Ridge Associated Univer-
sities (ORAU), a nonprofit, education and research management corporation
of 49 colleges and universities. ORAU, established in 1946, conducts programs
in research, education, information, and human resource development for a
ENERGY AND WATER RESEARCH CENTER 351
variety of government and private organizations. It is particularly interested
in three areas: energy, health, and environment.
Among ORAU's activities are competitive programs to bring undergrad-
uate and graduate students and faculty members to work on research
problems at the research facilities of the Department of Energy (DOE) and
other federal agencies. Participants are selected by ORAU and the staffs of
the facilities participating in the ORAU programs, which are: Oak Ridge
National Laboratory; the Oak Ridge Y-12 Plant; the Oak Ridge Gaseous
Diffusion Plant; the Atmospheric Turbulence and Diffusion Division in Oak
Ridge; the Savannah River Laboratory and Savannah River Ecology Labora-
tory in Aiken, S.C.; the Pittsburgh Research Center of the U.S. Bureau of
Mines; the National Center for Toxicological Research in Jefferson, AR; the
Puerto Rico Nuclear Research Center; and the U.S. DOE Energy Research
Technology Centers in Pittsburgh, PA, and Morgantown. The ORAU Institute
for Energy Analysis, the Professional Training Program, the Medical and
Health Sciences Division, and its other programs are also open to qualified
students and faculty members.
Professionai Internship Program. Program appointment periods that
alternate with terms of full-time academic study at the student's home
institutions afford students opportunities to apply the theories and methods
learned in the classroom in a research environment under the guidance of a
research adviser.
Graduate Internship Program. Internships at federal laboratories related
to the student's major and career goals provide opportunities to apply theories
and methods learned in the classroom and introduce the student to research
areas for consideration as possible thesis or dissertation topics.
Post-Graduate Research Program. Research appointments are available
for recent masters and doctoral degree recipients. Up to two years of support
for collaborative research at federal laboratories is provided.
Faculty. Faculty members of WVU, under the ORAU Faculty Research
Participation Program, can go to a Department of Energy facility for varying
periods up to three months, for advanced study and research. It is also
possible to combine a sabbatical with a longer appointment. Part-time
appointments during the academic year are also available at certain labora-
tories.
Stipends. Student stipends are at fixed rates that change from time to
time. Faculty stipends are individually negotiated, based upon the current
University salary.
For more information about the ORAU program, contact Trina B.
Karolchik or Professor Richard A. Bajura, WVU Energy and Water Research
Center, 258 Stewart Street, Morgantown, WV 26506, or write to the University
Programs Division, Oak Ridge Associated Universities, Inc., P.O. Box 117,
Oak Ridge, TN 37830-0117.
Water Research Division
The Water Research Division (WRD) facilitates, coordinates, sponsors,
and administers water research at WVU. Current major programs include the
Geological Survey's Water Research Institute and the EPA National Small
Flows Clearinghouse.
Water Research Institute
Research projects dealing with problems related to quality and quantity
of water in West Virginia and the Mid- Atlantic Region are supported by this
352 WATER RESEARCH INSTITUTE
program. Research may focus on either the physical or social aspects of water
related questions. Faculty and students from all colleges and universities in
West Virginia are eligible to participate. Students should contact their
department chairpersons to learn whether Wester Research Institute-
funded assistantships in their intended field of study are available.
National Small Flows Clearinghouse
Funded by the U.S. Environmental Protection Agency (EPA), this
national center for technology transfer helps government agencies and small
communities to meet their wastewater treatment needs by gathering and
releasing information on wastewater treatment systems designed to meet
small communities' special needs. The Clearinghouse supports graduate
students to conduct research on alternative wastewater treatment systems.
The Clearinghouse also supports graduate students who are interested in
computer data base systems used to disseminate information.
History of Science and Technology
The College of Arts and Sciences and the Department of History at WVU
have established a program in the History of Science and Technology to
stimulate the development of a more comprehensive and integrated approach
to liberal education and to encourage wider use of the intellectual and
technical resources available within the University. Students who matriculate
at the graduate level are expected to take introductory colloquia in the history
of science and technology and are then encouraged to draw up individual
plans of course work and research designed to give them a deeper under-
standing of subjects that particularly interest them. History of Science and
Technology is a Ph.D. examination field in the Department of History.
Requirements for admission to graduate study and for the awarding of
degrees are those established by the Department of History for those desiring
an M.A. degree. Students with an undergraduate degree in engineering can be
admitted to the program and qualify for the M.S.E. degree by special
arrangements with the College of Engineering. Students with unusual
backgrounds or interests can qualify for the M.A. in Liberal Studies.
Housing Information and Research Center
The West Virginia University Housing Information and Research Center
was established in 1981. The center's primary mission is to serve the general
public and professionals in the field of housing and energy by providing
consultant services, education programs, and demonstrations on alternative
housing and energy. The center is administered by the technology education
program in the College of Human Resources and Education. For further
information call (304) 293-3803.
Technology Field Service Center
The Technology Field Service Center was established in 1970. The
primary mission of the center is to provide consultant personnel, development
and program design services for schools, businesses, and industries that have
education and training needs in the technologies. The Center is administered
by the Technology Education program in the College of Human Resources and
Education. For further information call (304) 293-3803.
TECHNOLOGY FIELD SERVICE CENTER 353
Harley O. Staggers National Transportation Center
In 1979, the U.S. Secretary of Transportation designated the first
National Transportation Center at West Virginia University and recommended
naming it for former Congressman Harley O. Staggers of West Virginia in
recognition of his promotion of new and improved transportation systems.
The goal of the center is to develop and undertake research and
educational activities which will help maintain and enhance the transportation
infrastructure of West Virginia and the Appalachian region. The center is
multidisciplinary and concerned with all modes of transportation in both the
public and private sectors. Emphases are rural transportation, including
highway, air, rail, and water modes, and public transportation. Research on
Automated Guideway Transit is also undertaken due to the availability of
WVU's Personal Rapid Transit (PRT) as a laboratory. Faculty members from
different colleges and schools participate in research projects as associates of
the center.
University Affiliated Center for
Developmental Disabilities (UACDD)
Ashok S. Dey, Director.
The mission of the West Virginia University Affiliated Center for
Developmental Disabilities (UACDD), established in 1975 at the College of
Human Resources and Education, is to serve as a State DD Resource Center
and assist in the provision of personnel training, to conduct service demon-
stration programs including research, technical assistance and outreach and
to disseminate information to increase and support the independence,
productivity, and integration into the community of developmentally disabled
individuals of all ages.
The Center has qualified program coordinators in medicine, neurology,
nursing, dentistry, nutrition, pharmacy, law, otolaryngology, psychology,
opthalmology, optometry, special education, social work, and speech path-
ology and audiology. The Center is funded by the U.S. Department of Health
and Human Services/Administration on Developmental Disabilities.
West Virginia Rehabilitation
Research and Training Center
The West Virginia Rehabilitation Research and Training Center was
established in 1965 to carry out programmatic research in the area of
disability and to apply information technology to enhance rehabilitation.
This program is funded by the National Institute for Disability and Rehabili-
tation Research (NIDRR) of the U.S. Department of Education.
The Center conducts research on questions of relevance to rehabilitation
and uses state-of-the-art information technology to facilitate operation and
management of rehabilitation programs throughout the nation, serving
approximately one million disabled individuals. Specifically, research is
conducted to improve the decision-making process, develop a decision
support system, study the dynamics of organizational structure and function
and study strategic and tactical planning using forward and backward
simulation techniques. The Center has a national data bank of longitudinal
354 WV REHABILITATION RESEARCH AND TRAINING CENTER
data on 10 million individuals served by the state-federal vocational rehabili-
tation program. A series of software packages geared toward the "rehabilita-
tion office of tomorrow" has been developed as well as other computer
programs such as simulation modeling, health-risk analysis, and wellness
planning. The Center has developed many training programs utilizing
teleconferencing, satellite broadcasts, and live on-site training/consultation.
Requests for services and products developed by the Center have come from
all fifty states and many foreign countries.
In addition to conducting rehabilitation research, the Center offers
training/workshops, technical assistance, and consultations to rehabilitation
practitioners throughout the nation. Research faculties have a multidisci-
plinary background including rehabilitation, psychology, medicine, computer
science, economics, engineering, etc. The Center employs 40 persons, including
graduate assistants from many disciplines in the University, and serves as an
important part of graduate education at West Virginia University. The
faculties of the Center serve on doctoral committees, and graduate assistants
conduct rehabilitation research as part of their doctoral dissertations.
WV REHABILITATION RESEARCH AND TRAINING CENTER 355
Part 4
GENERAL POLICIES AND PROCEDURES
Graduate Education at WVU
Graduate education has a long and honored history. It can be traced to the
medieval universities of Europe, and the goal for graduate study has remained
unchanged over the intervening centuries. A student undertakes such study
in order to gain a deeper knowledge in a particular academic discipline, and to
become able to demonstrate to the faculty and practitioners in the field the
attained mastery of knowledge. Consequently, graduate study cannot be
defined primarily in terms of semester hours of course work beyond the
baccalaureate, even though minimum course work requirements are commonly
specified for graduate degrees. Minimum requirements set the lower limit for
an integrated plan of study which will provide a student with opportunity for
the desired knowledge.
The word university comes from a Latin expression meaning "a corporate
community of scholars," and graduate students are expected to become
participating members of that community. Even when not in class, graduate
students traditionally have access to the informal academic activities of their
discipline. They are encouraged to attend the talks presented by visiting
scholars, to listen to academic discussions of their faculty, to serve on
departmental committees, and to study with their fellow graduate students.
The purpose of residency requirements is to promote such participation in the
academic affairs of the university.
Each graduate student enrolled in a graduate program within West
Virginia University is expected to participate in a seminar course throughout
his or her graduate career. Depending on the objectives set by a particular
graduate program, seminars may: (1) provide an opportunity for the student
to be exposed to a variety of topics; (2) give the student insight into the
methods by which to communicate the significance of his or her research; (3)
allow the student to hear outside speakers; or (4) engender discussion with
faculty concerning research and the development of research methodology.
At WVU the minimum standards for admission to graduate study are set
by the University Graduate Council. Beyond this point, however, faculty
members in a given graduate program have complete control over who is to be
admitted to undertake graduate study under their supervision; and ultimately
it is they who certify which students have demonstrated sufficient mastery of
the discipline to qualify for a graduate degree. While a student may be
admitted for the purpose of enrolling in advanced course work, only the
program faculty may grant permission for the pursuit of a degree. Likewise, a
student will not be recommended for a degree until the graduate faculty of a
program has indicated in writing that the student has gained the desired
knowledge.
Graduate education is an integral part of WVU. The purpose of the
graduate catalog is to reflect the University's commitment and to set forth the
policies and rules for graduate education as they have been determined by the
appropriate bodies. It is essential that all students beginning study at the
graduate level become familiar with regulations for graduate study in general,
as well as with the requirements of their own programs— both of which are
detailed in this catalog. Each student should request a graduate catalog when
beginning graduate study, and become conversant with its contents.
356
West Virginia University, which is both the comprehensive and land-
grant university in the West Virginia system of higher education, offers
graduate work leading to 78 master's degrees, 30 doctoral degrees, and 1
certificate of advanced study. The graduate programs are administered by 14
schools and colleges of the University and by some interunit committees
drawn from two or more of the schools and colleges.
Government and Organization of WVU
The West Virginia Board of Regents is vested by law with the authority
for the control and management of the University and all other state
institutions of higher education. Serving on the Board are nine members
appointed by the Governor, with advice and consent of the Senate, and four
ex-officio members including a faculty member chosen by the Regents'
Advisory Council of Faculty, a staff member representing the Regents'
Advisory Council of Classified Staff, and a student named by the Regents'
Advisory Council of Students and the State Superintendent of Schools.
The president, appointed by the Board of Regents, is the chief executive
officer of the University.
The University's 11-member Board of Advisors reviews all WVU pro-
posals involving its mission, academic programs, budget, capital facilities,
institution-wide personnel policies, and other matters requested by the
president. The Board of Advisors also serves as the search and screening
committee for new university presidents under guidelines established by the
Board of Regents (in this role, the Board of Advisors appoints three additional
WVU faculty and the Board of Regents appoints three additional members to
comprise a 17-member committee).
The Faculty Senate is the vehicle for faculty participation in the
governance of the University. It has original jurisdiction over all matters of
academic interest and educational policy that concern the entire University or
affect more than one college or school. The senate's decisions are subject to
review and approval by the president and the Board of Regents. Senators are
elected by members of the University faculty to represent their colleges and
other constituencies. Each constituency is entitled to one senator for twenty
members of the University faculty. The senate normally meets the second
Monday of each month.
The senate elects a faculty chair each year to preside overthe meetings of
the senate and the executive committee. Three faculty members also serve on
the Vice Presidents' Advisory Committee for Promotion and Tenure.
The president meets regularly with the cabinet, which is listed on page 7.
He meets monthly with the Faculty Senate Executive Committee, the staff
council, and student administration.
The University Faculty Assembly includes the president as presiding
officer, vice presidents, academic deans, associate deans, professors, associate
professors, assistant professors, and instructors holding appointments on a
full-time basis. The assembly meets once a year in April.
West Virginia University also has a tradition of strong student adminis-
tration that touches all aspects of student life and represents student opinion
to the administration and faculty. Student administration has three main
units: the executive branch, the 11-member board of governors, and the
judicial board. Students also serve on University-wide committees and on the
Mountainlair Advisory Council.
GOVERNMENT AND ORGANIZATION OF WVU 357
Non-teaching employees belong to the staff council, which consists of
twelve members elected by their fellow employees in six occupational groups,
and Laborers' International Union Local 814, AFL-CIO, which represents
many employees.
Organization of Graduate Education
Assistant Vice President for Curriculum and Instruction
The assistant vice president oversees the policies governing graduate
education and monitors the quality of graduate programs. The assistant vice
president for curriculum and instruction reports to the provost and vice
president for academic affairs and research and works closely with the vice
president for health sciences.
University Graduate Council
The University Graduate Council consists of 12 elected representatives
from the schools and colleges offering graduate programs and four ex-officio
non-voting members representing the provost, the vice president for health
sciences, the senate executive committee, and the graduate and professional
student association. The council derives its authority from the faculty and
from the provost and vice president for academic affairs and research. This
body formulates, reviews, and recommends University-wide graduate educa-
tion policies. The council reviews proposals for new graduate programs,
makes major revisions in graduate curricula, coordinates periodic program
reviews, establishes the University criteria for graduate faculty membership,
and considers such other matters affecting graduate education as are brought
to the council by an administrative officer of the University, a graduate
faculty member, or a graduate student. The duties of the graduate council
include responsibility for programs both on- and off-campus.
Schools and Colleges
Schools and colleges manage most of the day-to-day operation of
graduate education. They determine the level of participation by individual
faculty members, they specify requirements for programs under their juris-
diction, and they certify students for graduation.
Faculty Role in Graduate Education
Faculty continue to play the most important role in graduate education.
They are responsible for program content, they serve on graduate student
committees, and they assure the quality of preparation of the University's
graduates.
Application for Graduate Study
Initial Application
Prospective graduate students are urged to apply for admission as early
as possible. The first step for a person interested in a degree program is to ask
for information from the department, division, school, or college offering the
program desired. The reply to such an inquiry will include instructions for
applying to the particular program.
358 APPLICATION FOR GRADUATE STUDY
In all cases, application for admission to graduate study must be made on
standard forms provided by the Office of Admissions and Records. The
completed form is returned to the Office of Admissions and Records and must
be accompanied by payment of a nonrefundable special service fee of $20.00.
Applicants must at the same time request the registrar or records office of the
college of their baccalaureate degree to send an official transcript directly to
the Office of Admissions and Records. If other institutions have been
attended in the course of undergraduate or graduate study, transcripts should
be requested from them as well. No one is admitted to graduate study who
does not hold a baccalaureate degree.
If the applicant meets the minimum admission requirements of WVU, a
copy of the application is forwarded to the faculty of the program of interest.
Any graduate degree program is permitted to set admission requirements
beyond the minimum admission standards of the University. No one can
pursue an advanced degree at WVU unless admitted to the appropriate degree
program.
Students not wishing to pursue an advanced degree may apply for
admission as non-degree graduate students. Applicants must complete the
standard application form, pay the nonrefundable special service fee of
$20.00, state the area of intended study, and present evidence of a baccalau-
reate degree. Finally, any applicant who is refused admission, or who fails to
enroll after acceptance, must reapply in the regular manner if consideration
for a subsequent year is desired.
Application for Concurrent or Additional Master's Degree
University policy permits students to obtain more than one master's
degree. In these cases, a separate application is required for each program.
Each application must be accompanied by payment of a nonrefundable
special service fee of $20.00.
If a student seeks more than two master's degrees, the student must
petition the Office of the Assistant Vice President for Curriculum and
Instruction for permission to apply. The petition must state the student's
objectives for obtaining another master's degree and must be in writing. The
purpose of the petition is to assure that the student receives appropriate
academic counseling.
Reapplication
When a student graduates or completes the program for which he/she
applied, the student must reapply and be readmitted before taking further
course work at WVU. This policy assures that the University is informed of
the student's objectives and that he/she is assigned an appropriate adviser.
Students will be assessed the application fee for each new application.
Degree students, whether master's or doctoral, are permitted to continue
in a program for a maximum of 8 years under their original applications.
Students who have not been active students for this period of time must
reapply and be readmitted. The application fee will be assessed.
Admission to Graduate Study
Classification of Graduate Students
Regular. A regular graduate student is a degree-seeking student who
meets all the criteria for regular admission to a program of his/her choice. The
ADMISSION TO GRADUATE STUDY 359
student must possess a baccalaureate degree from a college or university,
must have at least a grade-point average of 2.5 (on a 4.0 scale), have met all the
criteria established by the degree program, and be under no requirements to
make up deficiencies.
Provisional. A student may be admitted as provisional by any unit when
the student possesses a baccalaureate degree but clearly does not meet the
criteria for regular admission. The student may have incomplete credentials,
deficiencies to make up, or may have an undergraduate scholastic record
which shows promise, but less than the 2.5 grade-point average required for
regular admission.
Non-Degree. A non-degree student is a student not admitted to a program.
Admission as a non-degree student does not guarantee admission to any
course or program. The reasons for non-admission may be late application,
incomplete credentials, scholarship deficiencies, or lack of a degree objective.
Even though a non-degree student has not been admitted to a graduate
program, a unit may allow a non-degree student to enroll in its courses. To be
admitted as a non-degree student, a student must only present evidence of a
baccalaureate degree, but the student must obtain a 2.25 grade-point average
on the first 12 credit hours of course work and maintain this average as long as
enrolled. To be eligible to enter a degree program, the student must maintain a
minimum of a 2.75 grade-point average on all course work taken since
admission as a graduate student.
The standards cited are the minimum standards established by the
University. Individual academic units or graduate programs may establish
higher standards.
Classification Based on Prior Graduate Study
The same three admission classifications apply to those who have
undertaken previous graduate study. In general, the cumulative grade-point
average regulations apply to any transfer student who has not completed a
graduate degree. However, an applicant having received a master's degree
from an accredited college or university may be admitted to whatever
category is deemed most appropriate by the faculty of the program of interest.
Reclassification
Provisional to Regular: The provisions of a student's provisional status
must be specified in the letter of admission. To be reclassified as a regular
student, a student must meet the provisions stated in the letter of admission
and achieve a minimum grade-point average of 2.75 on all course work taken
during the provisional period. Individual degree programs may set higher
grade-point average requirements.
No later than the completion of the 18th credit hour, a unit must review
the student's record and make a final decision on the student's admission. A
student who has met the provisions of admission and achieved the required
grade-point average will be reclassified as a regular student. A student who
fails to meet the provisions of admission or who fails to achieve the required
grade-point average will be suspended, but may be reinstated in order to
transfer to another program or to non-degree status. The academic unit must
notify the student and the Office of Admissions and Records of its decision.
Upon notification by the appropriate academic unit, the Office of
Admissions and Records will prohibit the registration of all provisional
graduate students who have reached the maximum of 18 credit hours.
360 ADMISSION
Registration will not be permitted until the student is reclassified as a regular
student, an exception is granted by an academic dean, or the student is
transferred.
A student may be admitted as a provisional graduate student more than
one time, but not by the same graduate program.
All credit hours taken since admission as a provisional graduate student
or to be applied to a degree count in the 18 credit-hour limit, i.e., undergraduate
or graduate credit, P/F, S/U, graded courses, credit by senior petition, and
transfer credit.
Regular or Provisional to Non-Degree:
Regular and provisional students may become non-degree students by
choice. This includes students who fail to meet admission or academic
standards or who withdraw voluntarily. To change a student to non-degree
status, the adviser must process a Graduate Studies Transfer/Status form
through the school or college dean's office.
Non-degree to Regular or Provisional:
Non-degree students who later wish to become degree students must
transfer and present all the credentials required by the degree program. This
requires the processing of a Graduate Studies Transfer/Status form by the
student's adviser through the Office of Admissions and Records.
For admission to a degree program, a non-degree student must have
achieved a minimum grade-point average of 2.75 on all course work taken
since admission as a graduate student.
Special Admission Requirements of Some Programs
Programs may establish admission requirements in addition to those set
by the University Graduate Council, such as a higher grade-point average, the
submission of scores on standardized tests, and the receipt of letters of
recommendation.
Graduate Record and Other Examinations
Many programs at WVU require graduate record examination (GRE)
scores from all applicants, but in no program are they the sole criterion for
admission. Some programs require both the general aptitude and the appro-
priate advanced test before considering an applicant for admission. Other
programs require different tests, such as the Miller's Analogy. The admission
requirements for each program are found in Part 2 of this catalog.
Students should arrange to take the tests required for their prospective
graduate majors before enrollment in graduate studies. If GRE tests are
required, the applicant should request the Educational Testing Service to
forward scores to the WVU Office of Admissions and Records.
Those planning to take the GRE must mail completed applications so they
reach the Educational Testing Service, Princeton, NJ 08540, at least one month
before the date of the examination. The fee for each of the examinations
(aptitude and advanced) is $29.00 for 1987-88.
Information about the Miller's Analogy Test may be obtained from the
psychology department or the counseling service of the applicant's under-
graduate institution. At WVU, contact the Student Counseling Service,
telephone 293-4431.
ADMISSION 361
Faculty Pursuing Advanced Degrees
No faculty member holding instructor or professorial rank in a program
unit (department, division, interdisciplinary committee, etc.) may be admitted
to a graduate degree program offered through that unit. Only those people
with a rank of teaching fellow, lecturer, etc. can simultaneously pursue a
degree in their own unit. A faculty member holding instructor or professorial
rank may be admitted to a graduate degree program in another program unit.
Admission of International Students
West Virginia University is authorized under federal law to enroll
nonimmigrant alien students. International students wishing to enroll for
graduate work at WVU must comply with the stated academic requirements
for admission and with certain additional academic and nonacademic
requirements.
International applicants should forward a letter of inquiry one year
before they intend to begin study in the United States. The University
receives a large number of applications from international students. For this
reason and because of the time required for the student to make visa and
financial arrangements, April 1 has been established as a deadline after which
applications cannot be processed.
International students should make all arrangements for their financial
obligations to WVU for their entire stay in the United States before leaving
their country.
English Proficiency
All international applicants whose native language is not English must
submit Test of English As a Foreign Language (TOEFL) scores. A minimum of
550 is required for admission. TOEFL information and registration forms are
available from the Educational Testing Service, Princeton, NJ 08540 USA.
Tests are normally given six times each year. It requires one month to score
and report individual test results. Registration for the TOEFL examination
closes five weeks before the testing date.
NOTE: In certain programs, provisional admission is possible for
students with scores lower than 550 on the TOEFL. In such cases, students are
admitted provisionally on the basis of their academic record, contingent upon
submission of satisfactory TOEFL scores or satisfactory completion of the
WVU Intensive English Program. For information about the Intensive English
Program, contact the WVU Department of Foreign Languages, Chitwood Hall,
Morgantown, WV 26506.
Credentials
Complete and original official records of all studies undertaken by an
applicant at any institution attended (secondary school, college, university,
technical school, professional school, etc.), must be provided at the time of
application for admission to WVU. Copies of original records are acceptable if
they are officially stamped.
Such records must include: (1) complete dates of attendance; (2) identifi-
cation of individual subjects; (3) total number of hours in each class per week;
(4) total number of weeks each class meets in session; (5) final grade in each
subject, for each year; (6) actual credits earned for each subject; (7) class,
division, or rank achieved; (8) identification of the individual; (9) explanation
362 ADMISSION
of each institution's grading system; and (10) certification and date of degree
or awards achieved. If any of this information cannot be supplied, an official
explanatory statement from the school should be submitted. All documents
must be accompanied by certified English translations.
All documents must be forwarded directly from the registrar or other
authorized official of the school to the WVU Office of Admissions and
Records, P.O. Box 6009, Morgantown, WV 26506-6009 USA.
If an applicant is currently enrolled in a school, tentative admission may
be granted on the basis of an incomplete record which indicates the applicant
will unquestionably meet the admission standards of WVU. Final admission,
however, cannot be approved until the complete record has been received and
evaluated.
International Students Transferring Within the U.S.
International students applying to transfer from schools within the
United States are not permitted to register at WVU until they have complied
with all transfer procedures as required by the United States Immigration and
Naturalization Service (INS).
Upon arrival on the campus, the student must be prepared to present the
1-20 ID to the international student adviser for signatures.
No student should move to Morgantown without having received an
assurance of admission from WVU.
Transfer Procedures
Intra-University Transfers
A student may initiate a transfer by contacting the dean's office of the
school or college where enrolled. Following the student's request, the dean's
office will send the student's record to the school or college that the student
wishes to enter.
The school or college receiving the record is required to acknowledge
receipt of the record and notify the Office of Admissions and Records of the
status of the student's application within 30 days. If a student is accepted by
the new school or college, the school or college retains the student's record and
notifies the student of acceptance. If a student is rejected, he or she is notified
of such action, and the student's record is returned to the original school or
college.
The Office of Admissions and Records is responsible for updating
students' records to reflect new majors and new advisers.
Transfer From Another Institution to WVU
A student wishing to transfer to WVU from another institution should
follow the same application procedures as those outlined for other new
students.
A student wishing to apply credit earned at another institution of higher
education to a master's degree at WVU must obtain a transfer of graduate
credit form from the Office of Admissions and Records. This form requires the
signature of the student's unit chairperson or designee. The student must also
have an official transcript from the other institution sent to the Office of
Admissions and Records. Only credit earned at institutions accredited at the
graduate level may be transferred. Non-degree graduate students are not
permitted to transfer credit to WVU from another institution.
TRANSFER PROCEDURES 363
For information on the amount of credit which may be transferred from
another accredited institution to WVU, see the section titled Credit from
Another Institution.
Credit Limitations
Graduate-Level Courses and Grades
Credit toward a graduate degree may be obtained only for courses listed
in the graduate catalog, and numbered 200-499. No more than 40 percent of
course credits counted toward meeting requirements of any graduate degree
may be at the 200 level. No residence credit will be allowed for special field
assignments or other work taken off the WVU campus without prior
approval.
Graduate credit is obtained only for courses in which the grade earned is
A, B, C, or S. No course in which the grade earned is D, P, F, or U can be counted
toward a graduate degree.
Employed Graduate Students
Graduate students are required by their advisers to limit their credit
loads in proportion to the outside service rendered and the time available for
graduate study. In general, persons in full-time service to the University or
other employer are advised to enroll for no more than 6 hours of work in any
one semester; those in half-time service are advised to enroll for no more than
12 hours. Recommended credit loads may be less for employed graduate
students in some academic colleges, schools, and departments.
Non-Degree Graduate Students
A non-degree graduate student may accumulate unlimited graduate
credit hours, but if the student is later admitted to a degree program, the
faculty of that program will decide whether or not any credit earned as a
non-degree student may be applied to the degree. Under no circumstances
may a non-degree student apply more than 12 hours of credit toward a degree.
Transfer Credit
I ntra-Uni versify Transfer Credit
When a student transfers from one unit or program to another unit or
program within the University, the faculty of the new unit determines if any
credit earned under the guidance of the prior unit may be applied to a degree,
certificate, or other educational offering of the new unit.
Credit From Another Institution
A maximum of 12 semester hours from other institutions may be
transferred for credit at WVU in master's degree programs requiring 30 to 41
semester hours. Eighteen semester hours can be accepted for master's degree
programs requiring 42 or more semester hours. Individual graduate programs
may accept fewer credit hours.
Permission forms to apply for transfer credit must be obtained from and
returned to the Office of Admissions and Records. Only credit earned at
institutions accredited at the graduate level may be transferred. It is strongly
recommended that students have transfer credit approved prior to enrolling
in course work.
364 CREDIT LIMITATIONS
Multiple Master's Degrees
A student desiring to obtain more than one master's degree must
successfully complete sufficient additional credit hours to constitute 75
percent of the credit hours required by the additional master's degree
program. An individual graduate unit may require a higher percentage of
credit to be earned under its direction.
Credit Overloads
It is recommended that a student enroll for no more than 15 hours of
graduate courses in any one semester and no more than 12 hours in the total of
the two summer enrollment periods. Credit overloads may be approved for
students by their advisers. Some school or college dean's offices may also
choose to monitor overloads in their academic units.
Time Limits
Master's Degree
All requirements for a master's degree must be completed within 8 years
preceding the student's graduation.
Doctorate
The doctorate is a research or performance degree and does not depend on
the accumulation of credit hours. The three requirements of the degree are
admission to candidacy, residency, and completion and defense of the
dissertation. The degree signifies that the holder has the competence to
function independently at the highest level of endeavor in the chosen
profession. Hence, the number of years involved in attaining or retaining
competency cannot be readily specified. Rather, it is important that the
doctoral student's competency be assessed and verified in a reasonable period
of time prior to conferral of the degree.
The qualifying examination is the method of assessing whether the
student has attained sufficient knowledge of the discipline and supporting
fields in order to undertake independent research or practice. It is expected
that the examination will occur after all course work has been completed and
language or other requirements satisfied, and it consists of a series of
examinations covering all areas specified in the plan of study. After the
component parts of the qualifying examination have been successfully
passed, the student is admitted to candidacy for the degree. It is sometimes
called the candidacy examination because no one can be called a doctoral
candidate until this first requirement for the degree has been met.
Because the qualifying examination attests to the academic competence
of the student who is about to become an independent researcher or
practitioner, the examination should not precede the degree by too long a
period of time. Consequently, doctoral candidates are allowed no more than 5
years in which to complete remaining degree requirements. In the event a
student fails to complete the doctorate within 5 years after admission to
candidacy, an extension of time can be obtained only by repeating the
qualifying examination, and meeting any other requirements specified by the
student's committee.
TIME LIMITS 365
Undergraduates in Graduate-Level Courses
Undergraduate Credit
Undergraduate students must petition to take courses numbered 300-399;
they may not take courses numbered 400-499. The undergraduate must be a
junior or senior with at least a 3.0 grade-point average out of a possible 4.0.
Permission should be requested prior to or at the time of enrollment. The
standardized form signed by the student's adviser and the course instructor is
retained in the student's file. This form can be obtained from the Office of
Admissions and Records.
Undergraduate programs monitor their majors' enrollment in graduate-
level courses. No more than 20 percent of the total enrollment of any graduate
class should be made up of undergraduates.
Any exceptions to the regulations must be approved by the dean of the
school or college in which the student is enrolled.
Graduate Credit Via Senior Petition
Undergraduate students wishing to obtain graduate credit by senior
petition must obtain the standardized permission form from the Office of
Admissions and Records. This form requires the signature of the student's
undergraduate adviser and the head of the unit offering the graduate course.
The policies regulating an undergraduate's enrollment in the graduate-
level course for graduate credit are:
1. Enrollment is only permitted in courses numbered 300-399.
2. The undergraduate must be within 12 credit hours of his/her bacca-
laureate degree and have a grade-point average of 3.0 on a 4.0 scale.
3. The maximum amount of graduate credit permitted by senior petition
is 12 credit hours.
4. The senior petition must be approved prior to or at the time of
enrollment.
Approved senior petitions are returned to the Office of Admissions and
Records so that a notation of graduate credit may be placed on the student's
transcript.
Any exceptions to the regulations must be approved by the dean of the
school or college in which the student seeks graduate credit.
Note: Students receiving graduate credit for a course do not receive credit
toward their undergraduate degree with the same course.
Enrollment and Registration Requirements
Students Using University Facilities
If a graduate student is using University libraries, research facilities, or
consulting with graduate committee members, it is necessary for the student
to enroll for at least 1 hour of graduate credit. In no other way can the
University receive credit for its contribution to graduate study, attest to
student status, and guarantee the protection to which the student is entitled.
Students who take courses intermittently may be excused from such continu-
ous enrollment if they are not using University facilities or consulting with
faculty while they are not enrolled. However, students formally admitted to
candidacy for graduate degrees are required to register for at least one credit
hour each semester as a condition of their continued candidacy. By pursuing a
366 ENROLLMENT AND REGISTRATION REQUIREMENTS
degree at this institution, such persons by definition are utilizing University
services, facilities, and other resources, including faculty expertise; this
situation continues in cases where students have completed all required
coursework and are working on a thesis or dissertation. Candidates for
graduate degrees who fail to maintain continuity of enrollment should be
dropped from candidacy.
Non-Enrolled Graduate Student Evaluation Fee
All students must enroll for the semester in which they graduate.
Students who are not enrolled in regular course work and who are not using
University facilities may meet this requirement by registering and paying the
non-enrolled graduate student evaluation fee of $50.00. Instructions for
registering for this fee may be obtained from the Office of Admissions and
Records. This special registration can be used only once.
Non-Degree Graduate Students
Non-degree students may enroll in any course in the University for which
they have the prerequisites and permission from the academic unit. Some
departments that cannot accommodate non-degree students may restrict
enrollments to majors only or require permits.
Full-Time and Part-Time Students
A student is classified as full-time or part-time for any given enrollment
period. A graduate student is classified as full-time if enrolled for nine hours
in a semester or six hours altogether in the summer.
Active/Inactive Student Status
The University must have current information (name, address, telephone
number, major, and adviser) on the students enrolling for classes in order to
communicate with students and maintain permanent records. In addition,
when individuals do not enroll in classes for substantial periods of time, it is
costly and time consuming to continue to maintain their records on active
status. For these reasons, the Office of Admissions and Records periodically
deletes student records from active status. Students who return after this
deletion must reactivate their records and pay the program reactivation fee.
Degree Students
Students seeking master's or doctoral degrees (as determined by the
student's application and letter of admission) have time limitations for
completion of their degrees, and they are expected to enroll regularly and
make steady progress toward their degree objectives. Steady progress is
defined as the completion of at least one course each 7 terms. Degree students
who do not meet this requirement are considered inactive. Once inactive,
students may not register for classes until they reactivate their permanent
records and pay the program reactivation fee.
Non-Degree Students
A number of students enroll at the University as non-degree graduate
students. These students are normally adults taking classes for enrichment
purposes, public school teachers taking classes for certification renewal, or
ENROLLMENT AND REGISTRATION REQUIREMENTS 367
students taking classes as prerequisites for admission to degree programs.
Since these students have not made a commitment to a degree program, are
not subject to time limits, and may enroll on an irregular basis, the University
policies concerning active/inactive status are more liberal than those for
degree students. Nevertheless, because of the need for current information, it
is necessary for the University to periodically delete students' records from
the active files. Therefore, a non-degree student is considered active for 5
years or 20 terms. Once inactive, students may not register for classes until
they reactivate their records and pay the required fee.
Reactivation Procedures
Inactive students who wish to become active should report to the Office
of Admissions and Records and complete the required forms to update their
University records and pay the program reactivation fee. Degree students
who have been inactive for 8 or more years are not eligible to reactivate, but
must reapply for admission.
Auditors
Students may enroll in courses without working for a grade or for credit
by registering as auditors. Change in status from audit to credit or from credit
to audit may be made during the registration period. Attendance requirements
for auditors are determined by the instructor of the course being audited. It is
the prerogative of the instructor to strike the name of any auditor from grade
report forms and to instruct the Office of Admissions and Records to
withdraw the auditor from the class, if attendance requirements are not met.
Withdrawals
There are two types of withdrawals: withdrawal from some part of the
work for which a student has registered, and a complete withdrawal from the
University. Unless the formal withdrawal procedures are completed, failing
grades are recorded. Withdrawals from some part of the work must have the
initial approval of the student's adviser. It is the student's responsibility to
see that all forms are properly executed and delivered to the appropriate
authorities for recording.
Withdrawal From Classes
Deadlines: Until the Friday of the tenth week of class (or Friday of the
fourth week in a six-week summer session, or Friday of the second week of a
three-week summer session), students may withdraw from individual courses.
Deadlines are published in the WVU Schedule of Courses each semester.
Procedures:
1. Students must obtain their adviser's signature on the University
course adjustment form and submit the completed form to the Office of
Admissions and Records.
2. Before withdrawing from classes, students, with the help of their
academic advisers, are responsible for determining:
(a) if their course load would be reduced below the minimum requirement
set by their program; or
(b) if their course load would be reduced below the minimum number of
hours required to qualify for financial aid or international full-time student
status; or
368 ENROLLMENT AND REGISTRATION REQUIREMENTS
(c) if the course to be dropped is a corerequisite to another course the
student is taking or a prerequisite to a course required the following semester.
If so, the student may be required to drop the corequisite course or asked to
take a substitute course the following semester.
3. Students who withdraw from courses before the published deadline
and who follow all of the established University procedures shall receive a W
on the transcript for the appropriate course(s). The grade-point average is not
affected in any way by this mark.
Withdrawal From the University
Students who decide to leave WVU should withdraw from all classes and
must do so in accordance with established University policy in order that the
official transcript may reflect this action.
Students are responsible for all financial obligations and for following
established procedures, including the completion of forms and delivery of the
completed forms to appropriate officials. Students not fulfilling these
requirements may have difficulty withdrawing from the University. The
withdrawal becomes official only after the forms have been recorded by
Admissions and Records. Students receive copies and are urged to keep them.
Deadlines: Any student (full- or part-time) may withdraw from all
classes for which he/she is registered in the University any time before the
last day on which regular classes are scheduled to meet as established by the
University calendar and published in the Schedule of Courses.
Procedures:
1. Students who desire to withdraw from all remaining classes should
report in person to the Office of Student Life at the main lobby information
desk of Moore Hall. Withdrawal procedures will be explained at that time.
Identification (ID) and PRT cards must be presented.
2. Students who are unable to withdraw in person because of illness,
accident, or other valid reasons still must notify the Office of Student Life of
their intention to withdraw. The notice should be verified in writing and the
student ID and PRT cards enclosed.
3. Students are responsible with the help of their academic advisers for
determining how withdrawal from the University may affect their future
status at the University including such aspects as suspension for failure to
make progress toward a degree or a violation of established academic
probation and eligibility for scholarship, fellowship, or financial aid.
Absences
Students and faculty have together formulated the University's policy on
absences from classes, which spells out the responsibilities of student and
instructor as follows:
The student who is absent from class for any reason is responsible for
work missed. Students should understand that absences may jeopardize their
grades or continuance in the course. Instructors who use absence records in
the determination of grades must announce this fact to students (in writing)
within the first five class meetings. It is the responsibility of the instructor to
keep an accurate record of all students enrolled. Instructors may report
excessive absences to the student's dean or adviser. Students who have been
absent because of illness, authorized University activities, or for other valid
reasons are to have the opportunity to make up regularly scheduled examina-
tions.
ENROLLMENT AND REGISTRATION REQUIRMENTS 369
As a matter of good manners, a student should inform an instructor in
advance if obliged to be absent from a class meeting.
Schedule of Courses
Before the opening of each semester and summer sessions, a printed
Schedule of Courses announces the course offerings by the colleges and
schools of WVU. Copies are available from the Office of Admissions and
Records.
Advising
Graduate Adviser
Each academic unit through which graduate degree programs are
administered has one or more graduate advisers, and each entering graduate
student is assigned an adviser at the time of admission or shortly thereafter.
The adviser and student should meet before the first enrollment to begin
formulation of a plan of study.
Advising of Non-Degree Students
Each dean establishes a mechanism to advise non-degree graduate
students who intend to take the majority of their course work in the dean's
school or college. The mechanism may be the designation of a faculty member
to advise non-degree students or the assignment of non-degree students to an
advising office or center.
Non-degree students who express an interest in programs in two colleges
may be assigned to either by the Office of Admissions and Records. It is
expected that the assigned adviser will consult the other unit for information
when it is needed to assist the student.
Students who are truly undecided on a major or who plan to take courses
in several schools or colleges for enrichment may be assigned to the Office of
the Assistant Vice President for Curriculum and Instruction. The number of
students assigned in this manner will be quite small, and a program adviser
will be assigned when a student designates a specific interest.
Contractual Nature of Graduate Study
Graduate study at WVU can be compared to a series of contractual
arrangements between the student and the graduate faculty of the University.
The student's rights, privileges, obligations, and responsibilities are contained
in the graduate catalog, the plan of study, and, if research is one of the degree
program requirements, the prospectus. Although not contracts in the formal
legal sense, they are agreements between the University and a student for the
accomplishment of planned educational goals.
The WVU Graduate Catalog in effect when a student begins work toward
an advanced degree is the one which constitutes the agreement between the
student and West Virginia University. If there are major changes in the
catalog during the course of a student's studies, a student, with the approval
of the adviser, may agree to meet the conditions of the graduate catalog of a
later year. An agreement to change to a later catalog is an agreement to meet
all the conditions of the later edition.
Students must abide by catalog changes if the changes were promulgated
by the Board of Regents or local, state, or federal law.
370 ADVISING
Plan of Study
Shortly after entrance into a degree program and usually before 9 to 12
hours of graduate course work have been completed, a meeting is held among
student, adviser, and committee (if appointed) to draw up a plan of study.
Depending on degree sought and field of study, the plan may also contain the
outline of the research problem to be undertaken. Some graduate programs
have the student and committee meet at a later date to delineate the research
project more formally as a prospectus for the report, thesis, or dissertation.
The plan of study is subject to approval and is made a part of the student's
record. It then becomes a formal agreement between student and program
faculty as to the conditions which must be met for completion of the degree
requirements. Any subsequent changes in plan of study (or prospectus) can
be made only through mutual agreement.
When the binding nature of these documents is fully understood, there is
less likelihood that later misunderstanding will arise. Thus anyone who
contemplates application for graduate work at WVU is urged to read the
graduate catalog carefully and request clarification where needed. A student
must be very aware of the right to express personal views in the drafting of the
plan of study and/or research prospectus. Should disagreement arise at any
time, the responsibility for arbitration rests with the dean of the school or
college.
Records in Deans' Offices
Deans' offices maintain all records for monitoring student progress and
for certifying students for graduation. Among these records are: (1) plans of
study (subject to the school or college dean's approval); (2) graduate
committees (subject to the school or college dean's approval); (3) grades; (4)
grade modifications, etc.
Scholarship
Grading
Because of their familiarity to most students, letter grades are assigned in
many graduate courses. However, better than "average" performance is
expected of graduate students. They are enrolled for fewer credit hours than
they were as undergraduates, 9 to 12 hours being the norm for a full-time
graduate student, and are expected to spend more time on each course and
achieve better than average mastery of the material. A few grades of C can be
tolerated in graduate programs provided there are higher grades in other
courses to compensate for them. However, a grade of C is considered average
performance for an undergraduate student and not for one who is studying for
an advanced degree.
A — excellent (given only to students of superior ability and
attainment)
B — good (given only to students who are well above average,
but not in the highest group)
C — fair (average for undergraduate students)
D — poor but passing (cannot be counted for graduate degree
credit)
F — failure
I — incomplete
SCHOLARSHIP 371
W — withdrawal from a course before the date specified in the
University Calendar. Students may not withdraw from a course
after the specified date unless they withdraw from the University
WU — withdrawal from the University doing unsatisfactory work
P — pass (cannot be counted for graduate degree credit — see
below)
X — auditor (no grade and no credit)
S — satisfactory
U — unsatisfactory (equivalent to D or F)
Pass/Fail grading is not applicable to the course work for a graduate
degree. A graduate student may register for any course (1-499) on a Pass/Fail
basis only if the course involved is not included in the student's plan of study
and does not count toward a graduate degree. The selection of a course for
Pass/Fail grading must be made at registration and may not be changed after
the close of the registration period. A student who, having taken a course on a
Pass/Fail basis, later decides to include the course as part of a degree program
must re-register for the course on a graded (A, B, C, D, or F) basis.
Courses graded S/U are approved by the Assistant Vice President for
Curriculum and Instruction. Approved requests are forwarded to the Office of
Admissions and Records for entry into the WVU Master Course Directory.
Grade-Point Average
The grade-point average is computed on all work for which the student
has registered while a graduate student except for courses with grades of I, S,
W, WU, P, and X, and is based on the following grade-point values:
A B C D F U
4 3 2 10 0
When a student receives a grade of I and later removes the incomplete
grade, the grade-point average is recalculated on the basis of the new grade.
The grade of I is given when the instructor believes that the course work is
unavoidably incomplete or that a supplementary examination is justifiable.
Before any graduate degree can be awarded, the grade of I must be removed
either by removal of the incomplete sometime before program completion or
by having it recorded as a permanent incomplete. Only the instructor who
recorded the I, or, if the instructor is no longer at WVU, the chairperson of the
unit in which the course was given, may initiate either of these actions.
In the case of withdrawal from the University, a student with a grade of I
should discuss that grade with the appropriate instructor. If other provisions
are note made, an I grade eventually convertes to F.
Grade changes other than I to a letter grade must be accompanied by an
explanatory memo.
Transcripts of Academic Record
Every student is entitled to one free official transcript of his or her record.
Each additional copy costs $3 in cash or money order. Two or three weeks may
be required to process an application for a transcript at the close of a semester
or summer term. At other times the service is approximately 48 hours from
receipt of the request.
Students who default in the payment of any University financial
obligation forfeit their right to claim a transcript until such time that the
obligation has been satisfied.
372 SCHOLARSHIP
An application for a transcript of credit earned must furnish the date of
last attendance at WVU and student identification number. A married woman
should give both her maiden and married name.
All requests for transcripts must be sent, in writing, directly to the Office
of Admissions and Records; no phone requests are accepted.
Suspension, Probation, Reinstatement
for Grade-Point Deficits
Deans of the schools and colleges are responsible for suspensions,
probations, and reinstatements. The minimum academic standards for the
different classifications are:
Regular — To be in good standing, a regular student must obtain a 2.75
grade-point average in his/her first 12 hours of graduate study and maintain
this average throughout the time he/she is enrolled in graduate work. A
student failing to achieve this standard will be placed on probation and must
achieve a cumulative grade-point average of 2.75 by the end of the next
enrollment at West Virginia University. In the case of a part-time graduate
student, a 2.75 cumulative grade-point average must be obtained in the next 9
hours of graduate study. A student who cannot attain the required average
will be suspended.
Provisional — A provisional student has been admitted to the University
with one or more deficiencies. Consequently, by completion of the 18th credit
hour, the student must meet the provisions stated in the letter of admission
and attain a minimum grade-point average of 2.75. A student who fails to meet
the provisions of admission or who fails to achieve the required grade-point
average will be suspended. Students who meet the provisions of admission
and the required grade-point average will be reclassified as regular students,
and the regulations governing good standing for regular students will apply.
Non-Degree — To be in good standing, a non-degree student must obtain a
2.25 grade-point average in his/her first 12 hours of graduate study and
maintain this average throughout the time he/she is enrolled in graduate
work. A student failing to achieve this standard will be placed on probation
and must achieve a cumulative grade-point average of 2.25 by the end of the
next enrollment (or 9 credit hours for part-time students) at West Virginia
University. Students who cannot attain the required average will be sus-
pended. A non-degree student who later wishes to apply for admission to a
degree program must have achieved a minimum grade-point average of 2.75
on all course work taken since admission as a graduate student in order to be
considered.
All Students — Only grades in graduate courses (courses numbered 200
and above) will be computed in a student's grade-point average; however, if
any student receives grades lower than C for one-half or more of any course
work attempted during one enrollment period, the student will be suspended.
Credit hours for courses in which the grade is lower than C will not be counted
toward satisfying graduate degree requirements.
These standards are the minimum standards for the University. A
graduate program may set higher standards which the student must meet, but
these must be presented in writing to all students upon admission or
published in the catalog.
SCHOLARSHIP 373
Academic Rights and Responsibilities of Students
Students' academic rights and responsibilities are governed by Board of
Regents' policies and corresponding policies, rules, and regulations developed
by each of the institutions in the West Virginia system of higher education.
The rights and responsibilities of students at West Virginia University are
published each year in the WVU Student Handbook. Copies of the WVU
Student Handbook may be obtained from the Office of Student Life in Moore
Hall.
Off-Campus Graduate Study
West Virginia University operates five graduate centers located at
Jackson's Mill, Parkersburg, Keyser, Shepherdstown, and West Liberty.
Approximately 200 graduate-level off-campus courses are offered each
semester.
Selected master's degree programs are offered at all five of the centers
including Education Administration, Elementary Education, Secondary Ed-
ucation, Special Education, and Communication Studies. Other master's
degrees are offered at one or more graduate centers, including Business
Administration and Counseling. Courses in these and other fields that will
meet public education certification requirements, as well as personal and
professional development goals, are available at all five centers. A master's
degree in Nursing is available in Charleston and Wheeling. A doctorate in
Education Administration is available in the Kanawha Valley in cooperation
with Marshall University and the West Virginia College of Graduate Studies.
A Ph.D. in Biomedical Sciences is offered in cooperation with the School of
Medicine at Marshall University. Special courses may be offered at other
locations in the state to meet specific needs.
Information on off-campus courses is available from the program unit
offering the courses, the graduate centers, and the office of the director for
off-campus credit in 652 North High Street.
Graduate courses offered are approved by the appropriate department
chairpersons, academic dean, director for off-campus credit, and by the
Assistant Vice President for Curriculum and Instruction.
Students wishing to take off-campus courses for graduate credit must
first be admitted as graduate students through the same procedure as for
on-campus study. It is the responsibility of students to ascertain from the
appropriate college, school, and department the specific requirements for
degree candidacy.
Advising and scholarship standards are the same for on-campus and
off-campus study.
374 OFF-CAMPUS GRADUATE STUDY
Part 5
GRADUATE DEGREES
General Information
Candidacy
Admission to candidacy for any graduate degree is an additional
requirement over and above admission as a graduate student and admission
to a graduate program in a particular department, school, or college. A
candidate for a graduate degree is a student who has satisfactorily completed
a suitable period of graduate work in residence as a regular graduate student
and who has demonstrated the ability to do work of graduate caliber to the
satisfaction of his/her adviser and graduate committee.
Use of Human Subjects in Research
Any graduate student who conducts research involving the use of human
subjects must have the approval of the Institutional Review Board for the
Protection of Human Subjects before starting the research. Information about
procedures and approval forms may be obtained from the Office of Sponsored
Programs.
Theses and Dissertations
Procedural Rules
Theses and dissertations should be presented to the student's graduate
adviser or committee chairperson at least one month before the end of the
enrollment period in which completion of all requirements is expected. The
form prescribed in the "Regulations Governing the Preparation of Dissertations
and Theses" must be followed with the guidance of the student's graduate
adviser or the chairperson of the student's committee. For the manuscript to
be approved, there must be no more than one unfavorable vote among
members of the student's committee. Two copies with original signatures in
approved typewritten form (master's theses in bound form and doctoral
dissertations unbound) must be delivered to the Charles C. Wise, Jr. Library at
least one week before the close of the period in which the degree is expected to
be completed (one week before the end of the second summer session, by the
last day of the final examination period at the end of the first semester, or one
week before Commencement Day at the end of the second semester).
Problem reports are deposited with the major department in the form and
by the dates the department requires.
Duplicating Procedures
WVU Printing Services can assist graduate students in the preparation of
multiple copies of master's theses and doctoral dissertations. Following are
some of the guidelines concerning the services offered:
1. Students must furnish a neatly typewritten manuscript of the text
with all pages numbered and collated. The use of carbon ribbons on
typewriters will produce neater copies.
2. Printing Services usually cannot reproduce oversize scores, maps,
charts, or other illustrations larger than page size, but it will give advice to
375
students concerning the presentation of these materials and furnish names of
businesses that can handle the work.
3. The typed manuscript pages are to be delivered to one of the
University operated copy centers.
4. Charges will be at the published rates and may be obtained at the copy
centers.
5. Normal lead time for completion of the work is three weeks. Students
who desire faster service are referred to duplicating shops that may be able to
provide it.
6. Delivery cannot be made except upon payment in full in cash.
Use of Word Processors
Students may use word processors (computers) to produce theses and
dissertations; however, because of duplicating and microfilming needs, the
print must be letter quality with dark black characters that are consistently
clear and dense. Paper must be 16 to 20 pound paper, and type size should be
10 point or larger. Blue characters are not acceptable. Dot matrix printers are
not acceptable. Computer printouts with small and indistinct print along with
narrow margins become illegible in microform.
Students' Committees
Committee Composition
Doctoral dissertation committees will consist of no fewer than five
members, the majority of which will be regular graduate faculty including the
chairperson. No more than one person may be a non-member of the graduate
faculty.
Master's committees of programs requiring a thesis will consist of no
fewer than three members, the majority of which will be regular graduate
faculty including the chairperson. No more than one person may be a
non-member.
Master's committees of programs not requiring a thesis will consist of no
fewer than three members, one of which must be a regular graduate faculty
member. No more than one person may be a non-member, and the non-member
cannot chair or advise.
Changes in Graduate Faculty Status
Students are not to be affected by the re-evaluation of faculty members.
Once a graduate committee has been established for a student, it will not be
necessary to alter it because of a change in graduate faculty status for one of
the faculty members on the committee.
Other Requirements
No family member can serve on the graduate committee of his/her
relative.
At least one member of every doctoral committee must be from a
department other than the one in which the student is seeking a degree. It is
recommended, but not required, that this standard also be applied to master's
degree committees.
A majority of the members of all graduate committees must be graduate
faculty members. Doctoral committees and master's degree committees of
programs requiring a thesis must have a majority of regular graduate faculty
members.
376 STUDENTS' COMMITTEES
Committee Approval
All graduate committees are subject to the approval of the school or
college dean or the dean's designee.
Request for Degree
At the time of registration for the enrollment period in which all degree
requirements are expected to be met, or at the latest within two weeks after
such registration, each candidate is to submit a formal request for the
conferring of the degree. This is done on an "Application for Graduation and
Diploma" form (obtainable from the school or college dean's office). The
candidate must complete all requirements at least one week before the end of
that enrollment period. If the degree is not actually earned during that term,
the student must submit a new "Application for Graduation and Diploma"
when registering for the term in which completion is again anticipated.
Commencement, Diplomas
Colleges and schools are responsible for seeing that master's and doctoral
students meet the minimum requirements of the University as well as any
additional college or school requirements. Deans' offices are responsible for
maintaining all student records necessary to certify students for graduation.
Attendance at the spring Commencement is voluntary. Anyone not
planning to attend should leave a complete mailing address with the Office of
Admissions and Records so that the diploma can be mailed.
Master's Degrees
General Requirements and Information
General Regulations governing admission, registration, scholarship,
etc., described in the preceding sections must be followed.
Program. At least 30 hours of graduate work planned with the student's
graduate adviser must be satisfactorily completed within the period of eight
years immediately preceding the conferring of the degree. Each student,
through consultation with a graduate adviser, must meet the special require-
ments of the faculty of the field of major study. The program must be
formulated in writing at the earliest possible date and a copy filed with the
appropriate office so as to result in a cohesive, unified, and continuous plan of
study. Most plans of study consist of certain amounts of work in major and
minor fields. These are described in the departmental programs in Part 2 of
this catalog. In degree programs requiring a thesis or problem report,
appropriate course credits may be taken to cover the research and writing, but
no more than 6 hours of credit earned for research or thesis may be counted in
meeting course requirements for the degree.
Final Examination
The final examination is not to be given until the semester or summer
session in which all other requirements for the degree are to be met. The
student's committee chairperson must indicate in advance the time, place, and
recommended examining committee members and receive clearance from the
office of the school or college dean before the examination can be given.
The student cannot be considered as having satisfactorily passed the
final examination if there is more than one unfavorable vote among members
MASTER'S DEGREES 377
of the examining committee. Results of each examination must be reported to
the school or college dean within 24 hours. Re-examination may not be
scheduled without approval of the request by the school or college dean. All
committee members are to be present for the final examination. If an
examination cannot be scheduled at a time convenient to all committee
members, the dean or his/her designee may permit another faculty member to
substitute for the original committee member, provided that the original
committee member was not the chair. There can be no substitute for the chair.
Only one substitute is allowed, and the request for a substitute must be made
in writing prior to the examination. The request for a substitute should be
signed by the committee chair, the student, and both the original faculty
member and the substitute faculty member. A substitute faculty member
must have the same or higher graduate faculty status as the original faculty
member and represent the same academic discipline or specialization.
If the requirements for the master's degree include a thesis, the thesis
must bear the original signatures of at least all but one of the committee
members. If more than one member of the committee, whatever the size of the
committee, dissents from approving the thesis, the degree cannot be recom-
mended. If a substitute faculty member attends the final examination, the
substitute signs the shuttle sheet; however the original committee member is
to sign the thesis.
Theses must be presented to the University at least one week before the
degree is expected to be granted.
Summary of Procedures for Master's Degrees
1. Letter of inquiry from prospective student to department chairperson
(program inquiries) or to Office of Admissions and Records (general informa-
tion inquiries).
2. Mailing of graduate application form to student from the Office of
Admissions and Records.
3. Receipt of application materials and required fee by the Office of
Admissions and Records.
4. Referral of application materials to appropriate program by the
Office of Admissions and Records.
5. The department in question notifies the Office of Admissions and
Records of the admission action.
6. The student arrives, reports to the program department, is assigned
an adviser, and registers for course work.
7. Shortly after admission to the program (usually within the first 9-12
semester hours of course work), an advisory committee is formed and
produces the student's plan of study.
8. Student completes requisite course work and other program require-
ments.
9. Student confers with adviser and, if applicable, chairperson of thesis
committee to see if all requirements can be met by the end of the semester in
which he/she plans to graduate. This should be done no later than the
beginning of the final semester.
10. Student registers for either a course or for the Non-Enrolled Graduate
Student Evaluation Fee ($50.00). No one may graduate who is not registered
as a student during the semester of graduation.
11. Student checks with the University to insure that there is correspon-
dence between departmental and University records and that there are no
remaining deficiencies.
378 MASTER'S DEGREES
12. Student completes an "Application for Graduation and Diploma."
This should be done no later than two weeks after registration.
13. After getting a fee slip from the Office of Admissions and Records, the
student pays the $20.00 Graduation Fee at the Cashier's window in the
Mountainlair.
14. (If applicable) The student presents a typed draft of the thesis to each
committee member.
15. The student should remind the committee chairperson to request
clearance from the school or college dean's office at least two weeks before the
date of the final examination (or thesis defense).
16. Results of the final examination (or thesis defense) must be reported
to the dean's office by the graduate adviser or the committee chairperson not
later than one week before the end of the semester or summer session in which
the degree is expected to be granted.
17. Two bound and originally signed copies of the thesis (the original and
first copy or two electrostatically-reproduced copies) must be submitted to
the Charles C. Wise, Jr. Library no later than one week before the degree is
expected to be granted.
Doctoral Degrees
General Requirements
Regulations governing admission, registration, scholarship, etc., described
in the preceding sections must be followed. In addition, the student must
satisfy the requirements specified by the faculty responsible for the major
field. Students applying for admission to a doctoral program, after having
received a master's degree at WVU, must file a new application for graduate
work with the Office of Admissions and Records.
All of the requirements for any graduate degree must be completed within
the time limits described in Part 4.
Program
The program of doctoral study is planned with the student's graduate
adviser and committee to combine any or all of the following: graduate
courses of instruction, special seminars, independent study, supervised
research, and supervised training designed to promote a broad and systematic
knowledge of the major field and to prepare the student for the comprehensive
qualifying and final examinations and writing of the dissertation.
Residence
Graduate education, especially at the doctoral level, involves many
learning experiences which take place outside the formal classroom setting.
These involve observing and participating in activities conducted by the
graduate faculty, using departmental and University libraries, attending
lectures presented by visiting scholars, informal debates with fellow students,
and similar activities.
To insure that graduate students experience these kinds of informal
learning, doctoral programs at WVU as elsewhere generally require three
years in residence in full-time graduate study. However, because of the
contractual nature of graduate study, an individual student or graduate
committee may propose an alternative plan by which the student can gain
equivalent educational experience. For example, the plan of study may
DOCTORAL DEGREES 379
require the student to spend time in residence at a national or foreign
laboratory, institute, archive, or research center as partial fulfillment of the
residency requirement.
Candidacy Requirements
Admission to graduate study and enrollment in graduate courses does not
of itself imply acceptance of the student as a candidate for a doctoral degree.
This is only accomplished by (1) satisfactorily passing a comprehensive or
qualifying examination (either oral, or written, or both) and (2) by meeting
specified language and/or other requirements.
Qualifying Examination
A student will be given a comprehensive examination to demonstrate
knowledge of the important phases and problems of the field of major study,
their relation to other fields, and the ability to employ the instruments of
research. The examination is intended to determine whether the student has
the academic competence to undertake independent research in the discipline,
and to insure that the student possesses a thorough grasp of the fields outlined
on the plan of study.
The examination, which consists of a series of tests covering all areas
specified in the plan of study, is to be administered after most formal studies
have been completed. Scheduling and results of the examination must be
reported to the school or college dean.
It must be the consensus of the doctoral committee that the student has
passed the examination, although the committee may permit one dissenting
vote. A single portion of the examination may be repeated at the discretion of
the committee, but if two or more members are dissatisfied, the entire
qualifying examination must be repeated. The student must petition through
the doctoral committee in order to be permitted to repeat a qualifying
examination, and it is anticipated that a waiting period will be specified by
the committee during which the student will have opportunity to correct
deficiencies. Academic tradition does not allow for a qualifying examination
to be administered more than three times.
Foreign Language Examinations
Competence in one or more foreign languages is a common requirement in
graduate degree programs. The faculty in the graduate degree program
specify the language or languages and the level of competence to be
demonstrated.
Language examinations are arranged by the foreign language examiner,
who can be contacted through the Department of Foreign Languages, and
under whose direction language examinations are administered.
When only reading competence is required, the foreign language examiner
may waive examination in cases where the student's transcript shows, at a
date that proves to fall no earlier than seven years before promotion to
candidacy for the doctorate, either
(a) completion of 12 semester hours or equivalent of course work in an
approved foreign language, at WVU or at any other institution of
recognized standing, with a grade of B or better in the last three
hours, or
(b) completion of French 306, German 306, or Russian 306 at WVU with
a grade of B or better.
380 DOCTORAL DEGREES
Candidacy for the doctoral degree is granted when a student is certified as
having successfully completed the qualifying examination, satisfied the
language requirements, and met any additional requirements specified by the
academic unit.
Dissertation
The candidate must submit a dissertation pursued under the direction of
the faculty of the University on some topic in the field of the major subject.
The dissertation must present the results of the candidate's individual
investigation and must embody a definite contribution to knowledge. While
conducting research or writing a dissertation, the student must register at the
beginning of each semester or summer during which credit is being earned. No
residence credit will be allowed for special field assignments or other work
taken off the University campus without prior approval by the Assistant Vice
President for Curriculum and Instruction.
Final Examination
The final examination is not to be given until the semester or summer
session in which all other requirements for the degree are to be met. After the
candidate's dissertation has been tentatively approved, the final oral exami-
nation on the dissertation can be scheduled. At the option of the faculty
responsible for the degree program, a comprehensive final written examination
also may be required. The student's committee chairperson must indicate in
advance the time, place, and recommended examining committee members
and receive clearance from the office of the school or college dean before the
examination can be given. Such notifications of doctoral examinations must
be received at least three weeks before the examination date. All doctoral final
oral examinations are open examinations and the lead time is required for
public notice to the University community.
The student cannot be considered as having satisfactorily passed the
final examination if there is more than one unfavorable vote among members
of the examining committee. Results of each examination must be reported to
the school or college dean within 24 hours. Re-examination may not be
scheduled without approval of the request by the school or college dean. All
committee members are to be present for the final examination. If an
examination cannot be scheduled at a time convenient to all committee
members, the dean or his/her designee may permit another faculty member to
substitute for the original committee member, provided that the original
committee member was not the chair. There can be no substitute for the chair.
Only one substitute is allowed, and the request for a substitute must be made
in writing prior to the examination. The request for a substitute should be
signed by the committee chair, the student, and both the original faculty
member and the substitute faculty member. A substitute faculty member
must have the same or higher graduate faculty status as the original faculty
member and represent the same academic discipline or specialization.
The requirements for a doctorate include acceptance of the dissertation.
The dissertation must bear the original signatures of at least all but one of the
committee members. If more than one member of the committee, whatever the
size of the committee, dissents from approving the dissertation, the degree
cannot be recommended. If a substitute faculty member attends the final
examination, the substitute signs the shuttle sheet; however the original
committee member is to sign the dissertation. The dissertation must be
DOCTORAL DEGREES 381
presented to the University not later than one week before the end of the
semester or summer session in which the degree is expected to be granted (one
week before the end of the summer, by the last day of the final examination
period at the end of the first semester, or one week before Commencement Day
at the end of the second semester).
Publication of Dissertations
All doctoral dissertations and their abstracts will be microfilmed through
University Microfilms, Ann Arbor, Michigan. This requirement will not be
satisfied by any other publication but does not preclude publication elsewhere,
which is both permitted and encouraged.
Candidates are to follow "Regulations Governing the Preparation of
Dissertations and Theses" regarding format and organization of the disserta-
tion, which is on file at the department offices, offices of all graduate advisers,
and the University libraries. The candidate is required to maintain close
contact with the supervisor or chairperson of the graduate committee on these
matters in developing a dissertation so as to incorporate the special require-
ments of the subject discipline.
One week before the close of the semester or summer in which the degree
is expected to be conferred the candidate must meet the following require-
ments:
1. Submit in a form satisfactory for microfilming, the typewritten,
unbound original and first carbon copy of the dissertation. Two excellent
machine-reproduced copies may be acceptable. Both copies must have
original signatures of the candidate's committee.
2. Submit one extra abstract using no more than 350 words. This
separate abstract must have at the top of the first page the centered exact title
of the dissertation, followed on the next line by the full name of the candidate,
and on the next line by the word ABSTRACT. The extra abstract is on
unnumbered pages.
3. Submit a microfilm contract completed and signed by the candidate.
4. Pay a fee of $45.00 to cover the cost of microfilming the dissertation
and publication of the abstract in Dissertation Abstracts, a bi-monthly
journal which receives wide distribution. This fee is payable by certified
check or money order made out to "West Virginia University." If desired,
copyright service can be provided through WVU upon receipt, along with the
dissertation, of a certified check or money order for $20.00 made payable to
"University Microfilms."
5. Complete the questionnaire entitled "Survey of Earned Doctorates."
Summary of Procedures for the Doctoral Degree
1. Letter of inquiry from prospective student to department chairperson
(program inquiries) or to the Office of Admissions and Records (general
information inquiries).
2. Mailing of graduate study application form to student from the Office
of Admissions and Records
3. Receipt of application materials and required fee by the Office of
Admissions and Records.
4. Referral of application materials to the appropriate program by the
Office of Admissions and Records.
5. The program in question notifies the Office of Admissions and
Records of the admission action.
382 DOCTORAL DEGREES
6. The student arrives, reports to the program department, is assigned
an adviser, and registers for course work.
7. Shortly after admission to the program (usually within the first 9-12
semester hours of course work), an advisory committee is formed and
produces the student's plan of study.
8. Student completes requisite course work and other program re-
quirements, satisfying also the stipulated residency requirement.
9. Student takes the language examination (if applicable).
10. Student takes written and/or oral comprehensive (qualifying) exam-
ination for admission to candidacy. The results are communicated to the
appropriate office by the student's graduate program adviser.
11. Student undertakes a doctoral dissertation under the guidance of a
dissertation committee. The dissertation phase begins with approval of a
dissertation prospectus by the dissertation committee, the department
chairperson, and the school or college dean.
12. A copy of the preliminary draft of the dissertation is given to each
committee member at least one month prior to the final oral examination.
13. The dissertation adviser (committee chairperson) requests a clearance
for the final examination from the school or college dean's office no later than
3 weeks before the scheduled date.
14. The time and place of the examination is announced.
15. The student defends the dissertation in an oral defense.
16. The student delivers two copies of the approved dissertation,
appropriate questionnaires, and fees to the Charles C. Wise, Jr. Library.
Special Additional Requirements and Information
College of Agriculture and Forestry
Graduate Admission Classification (Minimum Requirements)
Regular: A regular graduate student is a degree-seeking student who
meets all the criteria for regular admission to a program of his/her choice. The
student must possess a baccalaureate degree from a college or university,
must have at least a grade-point average of 2.75 on a 4.0 scale (or an average of
3.0 or higher for the last 60 credit hours), have met all the criteria established
by the degree program, and be under no requirements to make up deficiencies.
The student must:
1. Have an adequate academic aptitude at the graduate level as measured
by the Graduate Record Examination (GRE), or the New Medical College
Admissions Test (New MCAT).
2. Provide three letters of reference from persons acquainted with the
applicant's professional work, experience, or academic background.
3. Submit a written statement of 500 words or more indicating the
applicant's goals and objectives relative to receiving a graduate degree.
4. International students have the additional requirement to submit a
minimum score of 550 on the TOEFL examination if their native language is
not English.
See specific graduate programs in the College of Agriculture and Forestry
for additional requirements.
Provisional: A student may be admitted as provisional when the student
possesses a baccalaureate degree but clearly does not meet the criteria for
regular admission. The student may have incomplete credentials, deficiencies
to make up, or may have a promising undergraduate scholastic record that is
AGRICULTURE AND FORESTRY 383
less than the 2.75 grade-point average or an average of 3.0 or higher in the last
60 credit hours required for regular admission requirements.
Non-Degree: A non-degree student is a student not admitted to a program.
Admission as a non-degree student does not guarantee admission to any
course or program. The reasons for non-admission may be late application,
incomplete credentials, scholarship deficiencies, or lack of a degree objective.
Even though a non-degree student has not been admitted to a graduate
program, an academic unit may allow a non-degree student admission. A
student must present evidence of a baccalaureate degree and obtain a 2.5
grade-point average on the first 12 credit hours of course work and maintain
this average as long as enrolled. A maximum of 12 credit hours of work as a
non-degree student may be applied to a graduate degree if the student is later
accepted into a graduate program. To be eligible to enter a degree program, the
student must maintain a minimum of a 3.0 grade-point average on all course
work taken since admission as a graduate student.
College of Creative Arts
The College of Creative Arts offers graduate education leading to
terminal degrees in art, music, and theatre. All students apply for admission
to graduate study through the Office of Admissions and Records. All
candidates for graduate degrees must conform to the general University
regulations for graduate studies. Requirements for admission to specific
graduate programs are given in Part 2. Additional information may be
obtained by writing to the division chairperson or the dean of the College of
Creative Arts. (P.O. Box 6111, Morgantown, WV 26506-6111.)
It is the responsibility of the student to be properly informed of the
curriculum and degree requirements of the program in which the student is
enrolled. The student's adviser or other appropriate members of the faculty
will offer counseling regarding requirements upon request.
The College of Creative Arts reserves the right not to offer courses in the
listed semester on the basis of low enrollment, change in curriculum,
availability of faculty, or other reasons at the convenience of the College of
Creative Arts.
Graduate Assistantships
Approximately 10 graduate assistantships in art, 10 in theatre, and 22 in
music are available each year. Full graduate assistants receive a stipend and
are eligible to apply for remission of fees.
Applications for graduate assistantships should be made to the appropri-
ate division by March 1 in music, April 1 in art, and April 1 in theatre.
School of Dentistry
The School of Dentistry offers several advanced education programs. The
Department of Endodontics and the Department of Orthodontics offer
programs of advanced study leading to the degrees of Master of Science.
Detailed information concerning the M.S. programs in Endodontics and
Orthodontics will be found in Part 2.
The Department of Oral and Maxillofacial Surgery offers one four-year
residency. Seven one-year general practice residencies also are offered by the
School of Dentistry. Continuing education courses are offered throughout the
year. Information concerning admission requirements and courses of study in
the M.S. programs may be obtained from the Office of the Associate Dean for
Postdoctoral Programs, WVU School of Dentistry, Morgantown, WV 26506.
384 CREATIVE ARTS I DENTISTRY
College of Engineering
A student desiring to take courses for graduate credit in the College of
Engineering must comply with the appropriate University regulations for
graduate study. To become enrolled in a College of Engineering graduate
program, a student must apply for admission through the Office of Admissions
and Records to the major department of the student's choice. Acceptance by
the major department will depend upon review of the student's academic
background and available facilities in the department.
An applicant with a baccalaureate degree, or its equivalent, from an
institution accredited by the Accreditation Board for Engineering and
Technology (ABET) or from an internationally recognized program in
engineering will be admitted on the same basis as engineering graduates of
WVU. Lacking these qualifications, an applicant must first fulfill any special
requirements of the department in which the student is seeking an advanced
degree.
No credits which are reported with a grade lower than C are acceptable
toward an advanced degree.
To qualify for an advanced degree, the graduate student must have a
grade-point average of at least 3.0 based on all courses acceptable for
graduate credit for which the student has received a grade from WVU.
A graduate student in the College of Engineering must comply with the
regulations of the major department.
Master of Science (M.S.)
Each department in the College of Engineering offers designated M.S.
degrees and the College of Engineering has an undesignated degree, Master of
Science in Engineering (M.S.E.), as well as a Master of Science (M.S.) in
Occupational and Safety Engineering administered by the Department of
Industrial Engineering. For all M.S. degree students, an advisory and
examining committee consisting of at least three faculty members will be
appointed. Each candidate will, with the approval of the candidate's advisory
and examining committee, follow a planned program which must contain a
minimum of 30 semester credit hours, not more than 9 of which can be at the
200 level. If a thesis or a problem report is part of the candidate's program, not
more than 6 semester credit hours of research leading to an acceptable thesis
nor more than 3 semester credit hours of work for an acceptable problem
report may be applied toward the semester credit hour requirement.
Individual departments may establish minimum requirements greater
than those adopted for the College of Engineering as a whole. These
departmental requirements are contained in Part 2 of the graduate catalog.
A student wishing to apply graduate credit earned at another institution
to a master's degree at WVU must complete an "Application for Transfer of
Graduate Credit to WVU" form and have an official transcript submitted to
the WVU Office of Admissions and Records from the external institution. A
maximum of 12 semester hours from other institutions will be acceptable for
credit at WVU in master's degree programs requiring 30 to 41 semester hours.
Eighteen semester hours will be accepted for master's degree programs
requiring 42 or more semester hours. Departmental programs may choose to
accept fewer transfer credit hours.
The Master of Science in Engineering program is designed for students
with a baccalaureate degree in a technical area who desire to pursue work in
areas other than that of their baccalaureate degree in engineering or science.
ENGINEERING 385
Graduate students who wish to become candidates for the degree should
register with the department in which the major portion of the work is to be
done.
A plan of study must be jointly prepared and approved by the student and
all members of the student's Advisory and Examining Committee, the
department chair, and the dean or dean's designate, either at the end of the
second semester of the student's attendance or at the completion of the twelfth
course hour, whichever is later.
Doctor of Philosophy (Ph.D.)
The academic units within the College of Engineering that are approved
for participation in the Doctor of Philosophy (Ph.D.) program are: Chemical
Engineering, Civil Engineering, Electrical and Computer Engineering, Indus-
trial Engineering, and Mechanical and Aerospace Engineering.
Admission. Admission as a graduate student is required of all applicants
for admission to a program of study and research leading to the Ph.D. degree.
Applicants for admission must hold or expect to receive a bachelor's degree in
engineering from an accredited or an internationally recognized program in
engineering. An applicant who holds a B.S. or M.S. in one of the physical
sciences or mathematics may be considered for admission. Although a
bachelor's degree is the minimum requirement, a master's degree in engineering
is recommended for applicants. Admission to graduate study does not
necessarily assure entrance into the College of Engineering doctoral program.
Transfer Credits. A student wishing to apply credit earned at another
institution to a doctoral degree program at WVU must submit the Application
for Transfer of Graduate Credit to WVU form and have an official transcript
from the institution forwarded to the WVU Office of Admissions and Records.
The approval of transfer credit is at the discretion of the student's advisory
and examining committee.
Advisory and Examining Committee. The student, research adviser,
academic adviser, and department chairperson appoint the students an
advisory and examining committee. For the Ph.D. program, each committee
contains at least five members. Three members must be from the student's
major department and two from other disciplines related to the student's area
of interest.
Plan of Study. At the end of the second semester of a student's attendance
or at the completion of the twelfth hour or when master's degree requirements
are completed, whichever is later, the student, with the advice and consent of
the student's academic adviser, research director, and members of the
student's advisory and examining committee, will submit a plan of study,
initiated in the student's department, to the dean or dean's designee. Some
departments may require that a preliminary dissertation research proposal be
submitted at this time.
Candidacy. After admission to the program and after a period of
residence, the applicant takes a candidacy examination in which the student
must demonstrate: (a) a grasp of the important phases and problems of the
field of study and an appreciation of their relation to other fields of human
knowledge and accomplishments; and (b) the ability to employ rationally the
instruments of research developed in the student's area of interest. When an
applicant has passed the comprehensive examination, the student will be
formally admitted to candidacy for the doctoral degree. One opportunity for
reexamination is available.
386 ENGINEERING
Curriculum. The Doctor of Philosophy degree is not awarded by the mere
accumulation of course credits nor for the completion of a definite residence
requirement. The amount and nature of the course work undertaken will be
established for each individual student with the objective of insuring a
rational and coherent progression of academic development beyond the
baccalaureate degree.
Residency. Two semesters of full-time attendance at the WVU Morgan-
town campus are required, consisting of a minimum of 9 credit hours each. A
full summer schedule, consisting of registration in both sessions and
completion of a minimum of 9 total hours, is considered equivalent to a
one-semester residence.
Dissertation. The candidate must submit a dissertation on a topic within
the area of his/her major interest. The doctoral dissertation must represent
the results of independent research, show a high degree of originality and
creativity on the part of the student, and must constitute an original
contribution to the field of engineering science and/or design. The dissertation
must have good literary form and style and must present a thorough review
and survey of prior study and work in the area of research, with acceptable
standards of documentation. It is anticipated that the work leading to the
completion of the dissertation will require a minimum of 24 hours of research
credits, or satisfactory evidence of equivalent time devoted to research and
preparation of the dissertation.
Completion Time. Requirements for this degree must be completed within
a period of seven years from enrollment in the first class. Courses exceeding
this limit must be revalidated according to the procedure established by the
University.
Final Examination. Upon completion and approval of the dissertation and
fulfillment of all other requirements, the candidate must pass a final oral
examination conducted by the Advisory and Examining Committee. The
examination will be primarily a defense of the dissertation, although other
questions necessary to determine the candidate's logic, critical ability, and
reasoning power in the general field of study related to the research may be
asked in order to establish the qualifications of the candidate for the degree.
College of Human Resources and Education
The College of Human Resources and Education is organized into three
divisions. The Division of Clinical and Counseling Studies includes the
program areas of counseling, special education, and speech pathology and
audiology. The Division of Education includes the program areas of education
administration, elementary education, reading, and secondary education. The
Division of Foundations includes the program areas of education foundations,
educational psychology, and technology education. The college brings together
several disciplines devoted to the study and maximum development of human
talent and resources, whether in the context of the school, the family, or the
community. Programs of instruction, research, and extended service are
carried out in close cooperation with other related departments and divisions
of WVU.
ENGINEERING I HUMAN RESOURCES AND EDUCATION 387
Admission and Curricula
The College of Human Resources and Education and the West Virginia
Department of Education are in the process of reviewing and revising aiJ certification
programs. Students are warned that programs printed in the catalog may not be in
effect at the time of their registration and are advised to see their adviser upon
arrival on campus.
All students apply for admission to graduate study through the Office of
Admissions and Records. All candidates for graduate degrees must conform
to the general University graduate study regulations and specific requirements
of the College of Human Resources and Education and of the program area
involved. Certain details in regard to admission to specific graduate programs
of the College of Human Resources and Education are provided under the
program section. Additional information may be obtained by writing the
program coordinator responsible for the graduate program or by writing the
Dean, College of Human Resources and Education, West Virginia University,
P.O. Box 6122, Morgantown, WV 26506-6122.
The curriculum and degree requirements of the various degree programs
of the College of Human Resources and Education are provided in each
program section in this catalog. It is the responsibility of the student to take
steps to insure being properly informed of the requirements of the degree
toward which the student aspires and/or the certification standards to which
the student may wish to obtain. Since certification requirements are changed
from time to time by the state, the contents of this catalog do not guarantee
compliance with those requirements. Members of the faculty, the student's
adviser, and the college certification officer will offer counsel on these
matters upon request.
Doctor of Education (Ed.D.)
The degree of Doctor of Education (Ed.D.) is a competency-based
program. The student's adviser, the student's committee, and the student in
consultation determine the competencies the student must attain and how
they are to be evaluated in accordance with program, college, and University
requirements. The degree requires that the candidate demonstrate an ability
to conduct research. Faculty expertise and College of Human Resources and
Education support services are available for students desiring to elect an area
of emphasis in any of the following: counseling psychology and rehabilitation,
curriculum and instruction, education administration, educational psychology,
reading, special education, and technology education. Further information
about the specific design of a doctoral program in the above major areas is
listed in the program area of the catalog.
Admission. Individuals who wish to pursue a program leading to the
Doctor of Education degree must be admitted as WVU graduate students. All
applicants for admission to the doctoral program in the College of Human
Resources and Education must submit their scores on the aptitude test of the
Graduate Record Examination and/or the Miller Analogies Test, three letters
of recommendation, a current vita, a statement of long-range and short-range
goals, and their reasons for selecting WVU as the institution for matriculation.
Applicants to HRE must comply with the general University graduate study
regulations. Personal interviews are required by several programs. Additional
information may be required by the faculty of a division and/or a specific area
of emphasis prior to program admission.
388 HUMAN RESOURCES AND EDUCATION
Doctoral Committee. After admission to a specific program, the student—
in consultation with the adviser — recommends a chairperson and four
committee members as the student's doctoral committee. This committee
must be approved by the program coordinator, the division director, and the
dean of the college. Doctoral committees will consist of no fewer than five
members, the majority of whom shall be regular graduate faculty including
the chairperson. At least one member of every doctoral committee must be
from outside the College of Human Resources and Education. No more than
one person may be a non-member. A non-member may serve as an outside
member at the discretion of designee. Three regular graduate faculty members
shall constitute a majority on a doctoral committee of five or six members. The
committee chairperson must be from the College of Human Resources and
Education and be one of these regular members. Changes in doctoral
committee membership or chair require the written approval of the doctoral
student, the member(s) added, and the member(s) removed.
Curriculum. The final determination of the program of course work and
research is the responsibility of the student's doctoral committee. The Doctor
of Education degree is not awarded on the basis of the completion of any set
number of credits but is awarded on the basis of demonstrated academic
achievement and scholarly competence. The minimum course work shall be
70 semester hours of relevant graduate work, excluding dissertation credit,
but including credits of relevant graduate work completed at the master's
degree level. The doctoral program shall include course work in three areas:
major, minor, and foundations. The division and program requirements in
each area shall be met.
Admission to Candidacy Examination. The purposes of the admission to
candidacy examination are to assess the quality of the student's academic
achievement, to review the student's program of course work, to approve a
proposed outline of dissertation research, and to admit the student to formal
candidacy for the doctoral degree.
The student and the committee at the time of program planning will
include competencies to be developed and how they will be assessed. These
will be written into the student's program. The doctoral student and the
permanent committee will determine when the student is ready for assessment
of competencies.
The examination will be prepared and assessed by the student's doctoral
committee and will cover all work in the written doctoral program of the
student. The chairperson will notify the student and the student records
office, who will notify all appropriate offices of the outcome. Upon successful
completion of the admission to candidacy examination, and the acceptance by
the committee of the dissertation prospectus, the student will be admitted to
formal candidacy for the doctoral degree.
Dissertation. The candidate must submit and justify a propectus for a
doctoral dissertation as a portion of the admission to candidacy examination.
The doctoral committee must review and approve, approve with change, or
reject the outline or prospectus. The student shall consult with all members of
the doctoral committee and with other appropriate members of the University
faculty during the dissertation phase of the program.
Final Oral Examination. The student will be admitted to final oral
examination upon completion of the dissertation and after fulfilling all other
requirements set by the committee. The examination will be conducted by the
student's doctoral committee and the publicized meeting will be open to all
members of the University faculty. The candidate will not be recommended
HUMAN RESOURCES AND EDUCATION 389
for the doctoral degree if the student receives more than one unfavorable vote
from the doctoral committee.
Time Limitation. Failure to complete the dissertation within five years
requires the student to repeat the admission to candidacy examination and
any other requirements specified by the student's doctoral committee.
Residency. A student must satisfactorily complete a minimum of 9
semester hours of approved graduate credit in each of 2 consecutive semesters
(summer sessions are not classified as semesters).
Certificate of Advanced Study (C.A.S.)
This program is designed for school and related personnel who wish
professional training beyond the master's degree. Candidates for the Certificate
of Advanced Study in Education may choose from among the following areas
of study for their area(s) of concentration: (a) Counseling Pyschology and
Rehabilitation; (b) Education Administration; (c) Elementary Education; (d)
Reading; (e) Secondary Education; (f) Special Education; (g) Technology
Education. Persons interested in the certificate should consult with the
coordinator of the appropriate program or the Dean of the College of Human
Resources and Education.
Admission. Individuals who wish to pursue a program leading to the
certificate must be admitted as WVU graduate students. All applicants for
admission to the program in the College of Human Resources and Education
must submit scores on the aptitude test of the Graduate Record Examination
and/or the Miller Analogies Test and three letters of recommendation. In
addition, they must comply with the general University graduate study
regulations. Acceptance for study toward the certificate in a specific area of
concentration will be made by the faculty of the specific program and
division.
Requirements for Admission to Candidacy. Evidence through examination
and personal interview of general proficiency and acceptable standards of
oral and written communication.
Program. An approved program consisting of a minimum of 30 semester
hours earned above the master's degree including 24 hours of course work in
the College of Human Resources and Education, or in closely related fields,
and 6 hours of research.
At least 24 semester hours of the work credited for this certificate must be
done in residence at WVU. This includes the 6 hours of research which may be
conducted apart from the physical limits of the University but must be done
under the direction and supervision of the chairperson of the student's
graduate committee. A maximum of 6 semester hours earned in residence at
another approved graduate institution may, if approved by the student's
adviser, be allowed toward credit for the certificate. The minimum period of
full-time graduate study in residence at WVU is one semester or one full
summer session.
Final Examination (s). Upon completion of all requirements, including the
research report, the candidate will be admitted to a final oral examination by
the student's graduate committee.
Time Limitation. All requirements must be completed within eight years
immediately preceding the awarding of the certificate.
Master of Arts (M.A.); Master of Science (M.S.)
The Master of Arts degree is offered in those areas which lend themselves
to a broader based education; generally a wider choice of electives is offered.
390 HUMAN RESOURCES AND EDUCATION
Programs offered are counseling, education administration, educational
psychology, elementary education, reading, secondary education, special
education, and technology education.
The Master of Science degree is offered in those areas which are more
specialized and in which specific areas of electives are defined. Programs
offered are rehabilitation counseling, and speech pathology and audiology.
Various areas of emphasis are available under several of the degree
programs listed above. Contact the specific program for information.
Admission Requirements
Graduate students apply to the WVU Office of Admissions and Records
for admission. (P.O. Box 6009, Morgantown, WV 26506-6009.) All applicants
must comply with the general admission requirements for University graduate
study, the requirements of the College of Human Resources and Education,
and the requirements of the specific program of interest.
All graduate students are admitted in one of the three following
classifications:
Regular A regular graduate student is a degree-student who meets all the
criteria for regular admission to a program of his/her choice. The student must
possess a baccalaureate degree from a college or university, must have at least
a grade-point average of 2.5 (on a 4.0 scale), have met all the criteria
established by the degree program, and be under no requirements to make up
deficiencies.
Provisional A student may be admitted as provisional by any unit when
the student possesses a baccalaureate degree but clearly does not meet the
criteria for regular admission. The student may have incomplete credentials,
deficiencies to make up, or may have an undergraduate scholastic record
which shows promise, but less than the 2.5 grade-point average required for
regular admission. The student is responsible to request a change of status
when the requirements are met.
Non-Degree A non-degree student is a student not admitted to a program.
Admission as a non-degree student does not guarantee admission to any
course or program. The reasons for non-admission may be any of those
described in earlier catalogs for special students, such as late application,
incomplete credentials, scholarship deficiencies, or lack of a degree objective.
Even though a non-degree student has not been admitted to a graduate
program, a unit may allow a non-degree student to enroll in its courses. The
student is responsible to request a change of degree status through the
adviser.
Optional Routes
Three options are generally available; refer to the specific program to
determine which option applies.
A. At least 30 semester hours of course work, including six semester
hours of research.
B. At least 30 semester hours of course work, including three semester
hours of research, selected in conference with the candidate's committee,
directed by the adviser, with final approval by the committee, and 27 semester
hours of course work.
C. At least 36 semester hours of approved course work.
Program Requirements
1. Guidelines— Specific graduate requirements of the University, the
College of Human Resources and Education, and the program being followed
will be complied with.
HUMAN RESOURCES AND EDUCATION 391
2. Advising— All students will be assigned an adviser. Two additional
faculty members will be assigned to serve as the remainder of the three-
member master's committee.
3. Grade-Point Average— No student may be awarded a master's degree
unless the student has a minimum grade-point average of 3.0 on all work
taken for the graduate degree. (A grade of less than C does not carry credit
toward a graduate degree, but counts in determining the grade-point average.)
4. Course Repeats— No student will be permitted to repeat a required
graduate course more than once.
5. Transfer Credit— A maximum of 12 hours may be used from transfer
credit for a program with 30-41 hours. Credit for transfer must be of graduate
level from an accredited college or university offering a graduate degree. Only
credit of B or higher will be transferred.
6. Comprehensive Examination— Many programs require the compre-
hensive examination in options A, B, and C above. The candidate's committee
will determine whether the examination will be oral, written, or both.
Students must submit an application to take the final master's degree
examination within the first week of the semester or two weeks of the
semester in which they intend to take it. A student must have completed a
minimum of 27 semester hours of approved course work before taking the
comprehensive examination. In addition a student must have a 3.0 grade-
point average of all work taken for graduate credit before applying to take the
comprehensive examination.
A candidate who fails the final master's degree examination may, upon
written consent of the student's advisory committee, be given a second
examination not earlier than the following session or semester. A candidate
who fails the second examination and desires a third opportunity to complete
program requirements may meet at the committee's discretion to determine
remediation recommendation before the third and final trial at the examination.
The third examination may be given no earlier than one calendar year from the
second examination. If the student fails the third comprehensive examination,
that student will be removed from the degree program.
7. Time Limitation— All requirements must be completed within eight
years immediately preceding the awarding of the degree.
8. Program Termination— Students who fail to meet the specifics of the
sections dealing with admission, grade-point average, course repeats, transfer
credits, comprehensive examinations, or special requirements — spelled out in
writing by a specific program — will not be admitted to or will be terminated
from the degree program. Students not admitted to or terminated from a
degree program may apply in writing for classification as a non-degree
graduate student to the program coordinator or the Office of Student
Advising and Records of the College of Human Resources and Education,
(P.O. Box 6122, Morgantown, WV 26506-6122.) This would allow the student
to take course work for certificate renewal, certification, or personal interest,
but which is not applicable for a degree in the program.
392 HUMAN RESOURCES AND EDUCATION
Part 6
OTHER INFORMATION
Fee Regulations
All West Virginia University fees are subject to change without notice.
A nonrefundable special service fee of $20.00 must accompany the
application for admission to graduate studies.
All fees are due and payable to the controller on the days of registration.
Completion of arrangements with the controller's office for payment from
officially accepted scholarships, loan funds, grants, or contracts shall be
considered sufficient for acceptance of registration. Fees paid after regular
registration must be paid to the University cashier in Mountainlair.
Any student failing to complete registration on regular registration days
is subject to the late registration fee of $20.00.
Students registering pay the fees shown in the fees charts, plus special
fees and deposits as required.
No degree will be conferred upon any candidate and no transcripts will be
issued to any student before payment is made of all tuition, fees, and other
indebtedness to any unit of the University.
It is the policy of West Virginia University to place on restriction students
who have outstanding debts to a unit or units of the University. The
restriction may include, but is not limited to, the withholding of a student's
registration, a student's diploma, or a student's transcript.
Persons not registered as University students and who are not members
of its administrative or teaching staffs shall not be admitted to regular
attendance in University classes.
Fees for Off-Campus Courses
Fees for credit hours for off-campus students are the same as those
charged students enrolled in on-campus courses. Off-campus students do not
pay the Daily Athenaeum fee, the radio station fee, or the Mountainlair
construction fee. However, all students must pay a $40.00 course fee for each
off-campus course taken and the faculty improvement fee.
Laboratory Fees
Consult specific departmental sections of this catalog concerning nonrefund-
able deposits and microscope rental fee.
Music Practice and Rental Fees
Practice Room Fee: All music majors must pay a fee of $10.00 per
semester, which entitles them to assigned practice space one hour per day.
Additional space may be available at the rate of $4.00 per hour.
Band and Orchestra Instruments: Rental, $10.00 per semester.
Auditors
Students may enroll in courses without working for grade or for credit by
registering as auditors and by paying full fees.
393
Special Fees
Application for undergraduate admission
(Freshman, transfer and foreign students) $10.00
Application for admission (Dentistry and Medicine) 30.00
Application for admission (College of Law or Graduate Studies) 20.00
Certificate of Advanced Study in Education 2.00
Diploma replacement 20.00
Examination for advanced standing 35.00
Examination for entrance credit, per unit 1.00
General Educational Development tests (high school level) 15.00
(If the applicant applies for admission to and registers in WVU within
twelve months of the date of qualifying for the test, a $10.00 credit shall
be established for the applicant.)
Graduation 20.00
(Payable by all students at the beginning of the semester or session in
which they expect to receive their degrees.)
Late registration (nonrefundable) 20.00
(Not charged to students who complete registration during the regular
registration days set forth in the University Calendar.)
Non-enrolled graduate student evaluation fee 50.00
(For graduate students not otherwise enrolled at time of final exam.)
Professional engineering degree (includes $20.00 graduation fee) 35.00
Program reactivation fee (graduate students) 20.00
Reinstatement of student dropped from the rolls 10.00
Student identification card replacement 10.00
Student's record fee 3.00
(One transcript of a student's record is furnished by the Office of
Admissions and Records without charge. This fee is charged for
furnishing an additional transcript.)
Summer Tuition and Fees
Tuition, per semester hour Resident Nonresident
Undergraduate Students $ 37.00 $120.00
Graduate Students 53.00 172.00
Dentistry Students 101.00 252.00
Medicine Students 93.00 244.00
Daily Athenaeum Fee* 1.00 1.00
Radio Station Fee* 1.00 1.00
Health, Counseling, and
Program Services Fee 24.00 24.00
Mountainlair Construction Fee,
per 6-week summer session
or any portion thereof* 15.00 15.00
Student Affairs Fee 8.00 8.00
Transportation Fee 17.00 17.00
*Fee required of all students. (Nonrefundable unless student withdraws officially before the
close of general registration.)
394 FINANCIAL INFORMATION
Semester Fees in Colleges and Schools
(Subject to Change Without Notice.)
FULL-TIME1
Undergraduate3'
Fee
Tuition
Registration
Higher Education
Resources
Institutional
Activity
Mountainlair
Construction
Faculty
Improvement
TOTAL
Resident
Nonresident
$165.00
535.00
$ 50.00
250.00
$ 215.00
600.00
$173.00'
173.00'
$40.00
40.00
$15.00*
50.00*
$ 658.00
1,648.00
Graduate '
Resident
Nonresident
$195.00
635.00
$ 50.00
250.00
$ 215.00'
600.00c
$173.00'
173.00'
$40.00
40.00
$15.00*
50.00*
$ 688.00
1,748.00
Dentistry'
Resident
Nonresident
$335.00
835.00
$ 50.00
250.00
$ 510.00d
1.125.00d
$173.00'
173.00'
$40.00
40.00
$15.00*
50.00*
$1,123.00
2,473.00
Medicine"1
Resident
Nonresident
$300.00
800.00
$ 50.00
250.00
$ 475. 00d
1,090.00"
$173.00'
173.00'
$40.00
40.00
$15.00*
50.00*
$1,703.00
3,253.00
Lawb '
Resident
Nonresident
$195.00
635.00
$ 50.00
250.00
$ 215.00'
600.00'
$173.00'
173.00'
$40.00
40.00
$15.00*
50.00'
$ 838.00
1,898.00
'Undergraduate students enrolled for 12 or more credit hours pay maximum charges as indicated. Students
enrolled for less than 12 credit hours pay a prorated charge calculated in direct proportion to the number of credit
hours taken.
"Graduate students enrolled for 9 or more credit hours pay maximum charges as indicated. Students enrolled
for less than 9 credit hours pay a prorated charge calculated in direct proportion to the number of credit hours
taken.
"Graduate," for fee purposes, includes all graduate studies programs.
'Paid by Law and Graduate students only.
"Dental and Medical students pay appropriate laboratory and microscope fees.
'Includes Athletics Fee, $40.00; Student Affairs Fee. $20.00; Daily Athenaeum Fee, $2.50; Health, Counseling,
and Program Services Fee, $63.00; Transportation Fee. $45.00; Radio Station Fee. $2.50.
'All part-time students enrolled for 7 or more credit hours must pay the Institutional Activity Fee and the
Mountainlair Construction Fee.
'Faculty Improvement Fee will be charged to all students and will be prorated for part-time students.
"Includes $650.00 Resident Medical Education Fee; $850.00 Nonresident Medical Education Fee. (Prorated for
part-time students.)
'Includes $150.00 Law School Fee.
PART-TIME' & SUMMER
Tuition per semester hour
Resident
$ 37.00
53.00
101.00
93.00
Prorated'
Prorated"
Nonresident
$120.00
172.00
252.00
244.00
The minimum rate for noncredit courses is that charged for 1 semester hour of credit.
"A full-time graduate student is one who is registered for 9 or more semester hours of work each semester of the
regular academic year, or 6 or more semester hours of work altogether during the summer.
A full-time undergraduate student is one who is registered for 12 or more semester hours work each semester of
the regular academic year, or 6 or more semester hours of work during a 6-week summer session.
2For fee assessment purposes, a part-time graduate student is one who is registered for fewer than 9 semester
hours per semester during the regular academic year, or for fewer than 6 semester hours during a 6-week summer
session.
A part-time undergraduate student is one who is registered for fewer than 12 semester hours per semester
during the regular academic year, or for fewer than 6 semester hours during a 6-week summer session.
FINANCIAL INFORMATION 395
Tuition and Fee Waivers
According to legislation passed by the West Virginia Legislature in 1983,
WVU is limited in the number of graduate and professional waivers that can
be awarded each school year.
According to Board of Regents Policy Bulletin No. 49, WVU must give
priority consideration in awarding these waivers to students who are West
Virginia residents and also to faculty and staff of West Virginia public and
private colleges and universities.
Academic deans, directors, and vice presidents of other West Virginia
Board of Regents institutions are charged with responsiblity of awarding
tuition waivers. Students should contact the appropriate person in their
department, school, or college for information regarding applications and
priorities.
Refund of Fees
A student who officially withdraws from University courses may
arrange for a refund of fees by submitting to the University controller
evidence of eligibility for a refund during the semester.
To withdraw officially, a student must apply to the Division of Student
Affairs for permission. Semester fees will be returned in accordance with the
following schedule:
Academic Year (Semester) Refund
During the first and second weeks 90%
During the third and fourth weeks 70%
During the fifth and sixth weeks 50%
Beginning with the seventh week No Refund
To receive a refund, a student must apply for the refund at the Office of
Admissions and Records. Students may apply for a refund any time during
the semester the refund is due. However, students cannot expect a refund if
they drop a course or withdraw from the University after the last day for a
tuition refund.
Summer Sessions and Non-Traditional Periods
Refunds for summer sessions and non-traditional periods are established
based upon the refund rate for the academic year. (For specific information
concerning summer session refunds, see the appropriate Summer Schedule of
Courses.) Should the percentage calculation identify a partial day, the entire
day will be included in the higher refund period.
No part of the activity fee is refundable unless the student withdraws
from the University.
University policy provides that students called to the armed services of
the United States may be granted full refund of refundable fees, but no credit,
if the call comes before the end of the first three-fourths of the semester, and
that full credit of courses be granted to persons called to the armed services of
the United States if the call comes thereafter; provided, however that credit as
described above will be granted only in those courses in which the student is
maintaining a passing mark at the time of departure for military service. In
the recording of final grades, for three-fourths of a semester or more, both
passing and failing grades are to be shown on the student's permanent record.
396 FINANCIAL INFORMATION
Service Charge on Returned Checks
A service charge of $10.00 will be collected on each check returned unpaid
by the bank upon which it is drawn.
If the check returned by the bank was in payment of University and
registration fees, the controller's office shall declare the fees unpaid and
registration cancelled if the check has not been redeemed within three days
from date of written notice. In such a case the student may be reinstated upon
redemption of the check, payment of the $10.00 service charge, the reinstate-
ment fee of $10.00, and the late payment fee of $20.00.
Non-Sufficient Funds Check Policy
Payments of tuition, fees, and other charges by check are subject to
WVU's non-sufficient funds check policy. A copy of the policy is available in
the bursar's office.
Cost of an Academic Year's Work
The Student Financial Aid Office estimates that the total cost of
attending WVU for a nine-month academic year is $6,000 for single West
Virginia residents living on or off-campus and $3,500 for those living at home;
$8,000 for single nonresidents living on or off-campus and $5,000 for those
living at home.
These typical estimated student budgets include tuition and fees, books
and supplies, room, board, transportation, and personal expenses that
provide for a modest but adequate life-style.
Policy Regarding Residency Classification
Of Students for Admission and Fee Purposes
Section 1. Classification for Admission and Fee Purposes
1.1 Students enrolling in a West Virginia public institution of higher
education shall be assigned a residency status for admission, tuition, and fee
purposes by the institutional officer designated by the President. In deter-
mining residency classification, the issue is essentially one of domicile. In
general, the domicile of a person is that person's true, fixed, permanent home
and place of habitation. The decision shall be based upon information
furnished by the student and all other relevant information. The designated
officer is authorized to require such written documents, affidavits, verifica-
tions, or other evidence as is deemed necessary to establish the domicile of a
student. The burden of establishing domicile for admission, tuition, and fee
purposes is upon the student.
1.2 If there is a question as to domicile, the matter must be brought to the
attention of the designated officer at least two weeks prior to the deadline for
the payment of tuition and fees. Any student found to have made a false or
misleading statement concerning domicile shall be subject to institutional
disciplinary action and will be charged the nonresident fees for each academic
term theretofore attended.
1.3 The previous determination of a student's domiciliary status by one
institution is not conclusive or binding when subsequently considered by
another institution; however, assuming no change of facts, the prior judgment
should be given strong consideration in the interest of consistency. Out-of-
state students being assessed resident tuition and fees as a result of a
FINANCIAL INFORMATION 397
reciprocity agreement may not transfer said reciprocity status to another
public institution in West Virginia.
Section 2. Residence Determined by Domicile
2.1 Domicile within the State means adoption of the State as the fixed
permanent home and involves personal presence within the State with no
intent on the part of the applicant or, in the case of a dependent student, the
applicant's parent(s) to return to another state or country. Residing with
relatives (other than parent(s)/guardian) does not, in and of itself, cause the
student to attain domicile in this State for admission or fee payment purposes.
West Virginia domicile may be established upon the completion of at least
twelve months of continued presence within the State prior to the date of
registration, provided that such twelve months' presence is not primarily for
the purpose of attendance at any institution of higher education in West
Virginia. Establishment of West Virginia domicile with less than twelve
months' presence prior to the date of registration must be supported by
evidence of positive and unequivocal action. In determining domicile, institu-
tional officials should give consideration to such factors as the ownership or
lease of a permanently occupied home in West Virginia, full-time employment
within the State, paying West Virginia property tax, filing West Virginia
income tax returns, registering of motor vehicles in West Virginia, possessing
a valid West Virginia driver's license, and marriage to a person already
domiciled in West Virginia. Proof of a number of these actions shall be
considered only as evidence which may be used in determining whether or not
a domicile has been established. Factors militating against the establishment
of West Virginia domicile might include such considerations as the student
not being self-supporting, being claimed as a dependent on federal or state
income tax returns or the parents' health insurance policy if the parents reside
out of state, receiving financial assistance from state student aid programs in
other states, and leaving the State when school is not in session.
Section 3. Dependency Status
3.1 A dependent student is one who is listed as a dependent on the federal
or state income tax return of his/her parent(s) or legal guardian or who
receives major financial support from that person. Such a student maintains
the same domicile as that of the parent(s) or legal guardian. In the event the
parents are divorced or legally separated, the dependent student takes the
domicile of the parent with whom he/she lives or to whom he/she has been
assigned by court order. However, a dependent student who enrolls and is
properly classified as an in-state student maintains that classification as long
as the enrollment is continuous and that student does not attain independence
and establish domicile in another state.
3.2 A nonresident student who becomes independent while a student at
an institution of higher education in West Virginia does not, by reason of such
independence alone, attain domicile in this State for admission or fee payment
purposes.
Section 4. Change of Residence
4.1 A person who has been classified as an out-of-state student and who
seeks resident status in West Virginia must assume the burden of providing
conclusive evidence that he/she has established domicile in West Virginia
with the intention of making the permanent home in this State. The intent to
398 FINANCIAL INFORMATION
remain indefinitely in West Virginia is evidence not only by a person's
statements, but also by that person's actions. In making a determination
regarding a request for change in residency status, the designated institutional
officer shall consider those actions referenced in Section 2 above. The change
in classification, if deemed to be warranted, shall be effective for the academic
term or semester next following the date of the application for reclassification.
Section 5. Military
5.1 An individual who is on full-time active military service in another
state or foreign country or an employee of the federal government shall be
classified as an in-state student for the purpose of payment of tuition and fees,
provided that the person established a domicile in West Virginia prior to
entrance into federal service, entered the federal service from West Virginia,
and has at no time while in federal service claimed or established a domicile in
another state. Sworn statements attesting to these conditions may be
required. The spouse and dependent children of such individuals shall also be
classified as in-state students for tuition and fee purposes.
5.2 Persons assigned to full-time active military service in West Virginia
and residing in the State shall be classified as in-state students for tuition and
fee purposes. The spouse and dependent children of such individuals shall
also be classified as in-state students for tuition and fee purposes.
Section 6. Aliens
6.1 An alien who is in the United States on a resident visa or who has
filed a petition for naturalization in the naturalization court, and who has
established a bona fide domicile in West Virginia as defined in Section 2 may
be eligible for in-state residency classification, provided that person is in the
State for purposes other than to attempt to qualify for residency status as a
student. Political refugees admitted into the United States for an indefinite
period of time and without restriction on the maintenance of a foreign
domicile may be eligible for an in-state classification as defined in Section 2.
Any person holding a student or other temporary visa cannot be classified as
an in-state student.
Section 7. Former Domicile
7.1 A person who was formerly domiciled in the state of West Virginia
and who would have been eligible for an in-state residency classification at
the time of his/her departure from the state may be immediately eligible for
classification as a West Virginia resident provided such person returns to
West Virginia within a one year period of time and satisfies the conditions of
Section 2 regarding proof of domicile and intent to remain permanently in
West Virginia.
Section 8. Appeal Process
8.1 The decisions of the designated institutional officer charged with the
determination of residency classification may be appealed to the President of
the institution. The President may establish such committees and procedures
as are determined to be appropriate for the processing of appeals. The
decision of the President of the institution may be appealed in writing with
supporting documentation to the West Virginia Board of Regents in accord
with such procedures as may be prescribed from time to time by the Board.
FINANCIAL INFORMATION 399
Veterans Educational Assistance
The Veterans Administration (VA) administers two basic educational
programs for veterans. For eligible persons with service between February 1,
1955, and December 31, 1976, such assistance is available under the G.I. Bill.
Eligible persons who initially entered the military on or after January 1, 1977,
may receive educational assistance under a contributory plan.
Information regarding these educational opportunities at WVU may be
obtained by contacting the Financial Aid Office, in the Mountainlair, P.O. Box
6004, Morgantown, WV 26506-6004.
WVU Assistantships, Fellowships, and Traineeships
West Virginia University annually awards over 800 graduate assistant-
ships supported from state appropriations, federal funds, private grants, and
contracts; and about 200 fellowships and traineeships derived from federal
agencies and from industries and private foundations.
Fellowships are awarded on the basis of academic merit and require no
service in return. Graduate fellows are expected to spend full time in pursuit
of their studies, but may teach to the extent that the particular degree program
requires. Most traineeships, provided through institutional grants, are also
for full-time study without scheduled duties. Stipends for graduate assistant-
ships are generally stated in terms of 9- and 12-month appointments and
require service to the institution. There are five kinds of graduate assistant-
ships:
1. Graduate Teaching Assistant— A person who holds a graduate assis-
tantship is obligated to the extent of teaching two 3-hour courses per
semester, or for the equivalent in laboratory classes, or for other forms of
departmental assistance, except research assistance, amounting to a minimum
of 12 clock hours per week.
2. Graduate Research Assistant — A research assistant is one whose
duties consist of assisting in the research of a faculty member with an
obligation of not less than 15 or more than 20 clock hours per week in any
semester.
3. Graduate Administrative Assistant — A student employed as a graduate
administrative assistant works part time in one of the administrative offices
of WVU. The individual is primarily a student and secondarily an employee
and is required to be a full-time graduate student. Assistantships obligate the
student to no less than 12 or more than 20 hours of work per week in any
semester.
4. Teaching Fellow — A teaching fellow is an advanced graduate student,
usually in a doctoral program, who would qualify for a junior faculty position,
except for that person being a graduate student at WVU. A teaching fellow
may be given major responsibility for the design and/or operation of a course,
whereas such responsibility is not to be placed on a graduate teaching
assistant.
5. Graduate Residence Hall Assistant— Residence hall graduate assis-
tants' duties and responsibilities obligate them to not less than 20 clock hours
per week of work. Their job responsibilities entail the planning and imple-
mentation of developmental educational programming in the residence halls.
All graduate assistants, fellows, and trainees are required to be full-time
graduate students. Tuition and registration fees generally are remitted.
400 ASSISTANTSHIPS, FELLOWSHIPS, TRAINEESHIPS
Awards are made by degree programs or by the non-academic unit where
service is to be rendered. Applications should be made to the dean or director
concerned or to the chairperson of the program in which the graduate work
will be pursued. Early application is strongly recommended.
Students may hold only one appointment as a graduate assistant per
term.
Remission of Fees
Students appointed as graduate assistants are eligible to apply for
remission of tuition and certain fees. Tuition and some fees are generally
remitted or paid for fellows and trainees. All students must pay the
Mountainlair construction, radio station, and Daily Athenaeum fees, but
graduate assistants, fellows, and trainees are granted the same option as
part-time students with regard to the remainder of the institution activity fee.
Arlen G. and Louise Stone Swiger
Doctoral Fellowship Program
Arlen G. and Louise Stone Swiger have been special benefactors to WVU
in their establishment of this fellowship program through the West Virginia
University Foundation, Inc. Both were WVU graduates. Arlen G. Swiger, a
successful New York attorney, bequeathed to the University half of his estate
which became available to the WVU Foundation upon the death of his widow,
Louise Stone Swiger.
These fellowships are open to doctoral students. Selection is competitive
on the basis of academic merit. Application should be made early in the year
preceding the year of anticipated enrollment in a doctoral program. Inquiries
should be directed to the office of the assistant vice president for curriculum
and instruction.
W. E. B. DuBois Fellowships
For Black Graduate and Professional Students
Dr. William Edward Burghardt DuBois was born in 1868. He was
educated at Fisk University and received his Ph.D. from Harvard University
in 1896. Dr. DuBois was one of the founders of the National Association for the
Advancement of Colored People and the Pan-African Congress Movement.
Author of many historical and analytical studies of American and African
society, his example provides a standard of excellence for scholarship in any
discipline and an especially inspiring model for black scholars. Because of the
achievements of Dr. DuBois, West Virginia University has named this
fellowship program in his honor.
The fellowships are open to black graduate and professional students
who are native or naturalized U.S. citizens. Selection is competitive on the
basis of academic merit and potential for success in graduate or professional
study. Inquiries should be directed to the graduate or professional program of
choice or to the assistant vice president for curriculum and instruction.
University Advising Center
Assistantships are available through the University Advising Center for
students who have been admitted to a graduate program. Those who are
accepted will provide academic advising services to freshman and sophomore
ASSISTANTSHIPS, FELLOWSHIPS, TRAINEESHIPS 401
students. A stipend is paid and tuition and registration fees are also waived.
Contact the Office of the Director in the Student Services Center for
information and applications.
Resident Assistantships
Approximately 100 positions are available for single graduate and under-
graduate students to serve as resident assistants in the University residence
halls. Selection is based on the applicant's academic record, previous
background and experience, and interpersonal relationship skills.
Resident assistants serve as members of the staff of Student Affairs
advising approximately 50 freshman students on floors in University residence
halls. Staff without prior residence hall experience receive room and half-
board. Experienced staff receive room and full board. Graduate staff members
receive a waiver of tuition and optional fees.
Applications are available in December and nine-month appointments
are made in April for the following academic year.
For further information and application write to the Assistant Director of
Residence Life, G-106 Towers, West Virginia University, Morgantown, WV
26506.
Financial Aid: Loans, Employment
Information and guidance on loans for graduate students are available in
the Student Financial Aid Office, Mountainlair.
On-campus employment opportunities can be investigated at the Student
Financial Aid Office in Mountainlair and the Human Resources Office in
Knapp Hall.
A summer and part-time job service is operated by the WVU Career
Services Center in Mountainlair. Its purpose is to place students in part-time
or temporary jobs in Morgantown and the surrounding area.
Fellowship Opportunities for Study
In the United States or Abroad
Students are encouraged to submit applications to outside agencies that
support graduate-level study and research. Among the opportunities available
are programs sponsored by the Fulbright-Hays Training Grants, the National
Science Foundation, the Marshall Scholarship Program, the National Institutes
of Health, the Oak Ridge Associated Universities, and the Rhodes Scholar-
ships.
Students should contact the Office of Sponsored Programs for assistance
in applying for these programs. In most cases, this office will refer the student
to a faculty adviser who can provide detailed assistance.
Several national agencies publish information on fellowships and financial
aid opportunities for graduate students. Individuals interested in reviewing
this information should consult the personnel at the reference desk of the
Charles C. Wise, Jr. Library.
Morgantown Area
Located on the east bank of the Monongahela River, which flows north to
nearby Pittsburgh, Morgantown is situated on rugged terrain in the Appala-
chian highlands. The altitude of the city varies from 800 to 1,150 feet above
402 ASSISTANTSHIPS, FELLOWSHIPS, TRAINEESHIPS
sea level, and the surrounding hills rise eastward to Chestnut Ridge and reach
an altitude of 2,600 feet just ten miles from the city.
A north-south interstate highway, 1-79, is one mile west of Morgantown.
U.S. 19 and U.S. 119 pass through Morgantown in the north-south direction.
U.S. 48, a four-lane east-west highway, links 1-79 at Morgantown to 1-81 in
the Cumberland-Hagerstown, Maryland, region.
Morgantown epitomizes small-town America, with two important dif-
ferences: it is home to a major modern university, and some of the panoramic
views of the West Virginia mountains are awe-inspiring. A few of the city
streets are incredibly steep and crooked as they wind over and around the
hills, but it's also incredibly difficult to find a traffic jam. The city's central
shopping area offers the diversity usually found only in a metropolitan
shopping mall; Morgantown's mall contains the standard national chains and
franchises.
Morgantown's heritage draws on both the industrial north and the more
leisurely south. The push of the work ethic is modified and gentled by the
knowledge that there is ample time to be friendly and polite. Since the city sits
in the middle of some of the world's finest coal deposits, that too is a part of the
heritage. Today, the University is the area's largest employer, and its
intellectual and cultural atmosphere has generally permeated that of the
town.
Geographically, Morgantown is a secluded crossroads. Washington,
D.C., is a four hour drive to the east; Pittsburgh, PA is an hour and a half to the
north. To the west lie the cities along the Ohio River. And to the south is all of
wild, wonderful West Virginia, from the Greenbrier at White Sulphur Springs
and the National Radio Astronomy Laboratory at Greenbank to the ski resorts
and national and state forests. The interstate highway system, a commuter
airline connecting with national carriers, and the ubiquitous computer
terminal combine to let individuals choose how much or how little of the rest
of the world will intrude on theirs.
Because of WVU's intellectual resources, the Morgantown area is a major
research center in the Appalachian region. Four federal agencies have
research facilities in the area— Department of Health and Human Services
(Appalachian Laboratory for Occupational Safety and Health), Forest Service
(Forestry Sciences Laboratory), Morgantown Energy Technology Center of
the U.S. Department of Energy, and Soil Conservation Service (West Virginia
headquarters).
West Virginia University has two campuses, primarily because it has
outgrown the space available in the city. The in-town campus has a Victorian
look, with ived walls and shady walks. The Evansdale campus, where the
Health Sciences Center, the College of Agriculture and Foresty, the Law
School, the College of Engineering, and the College of Human Resources and
Education are located, has no buildings over 25 years old. The gap between the
campuses is bridged by the rapid transit system, referred to always as the
PRT. University residence halls and apartments are adjacent to the PRT, and
privately owned apartment complexes allow students to live in quarters that
stylistically range from generic modern to Victorian rococo.
Housing and Residence Life
Of the 17,000 students enrolled on the Morgantown campuses, 3,415
undergraduates are housed in the five University-owned residence halls, and
500 married students and single graduate students live in University
MORGANTOWN AREA I HOUSING AND RESIDENCE LIFE 403
apartments. Approximately 3,000 students live in privately owned residence
halls and fraternity and sorority houses; 2,000 commute from their parents'
homes; and 8,400 live in apartments, mobile homes, and private rooms.
The University Housing and Residence Life Office, G-18 Towers (phone
304-293-2811), provides information concerning University-owned housing.
The student life office in Moore Hall provides information concerning
privately owned, off-campus housing (phone 304-293-5611).
Listings for privately owned rentals change daily so students should visit
the Office of Student Life to see what is available and make their own
arrangements with landlords. Good housing is plentiful, both in residence
halls and private apartments. Because of the hilly terrain, parking is limited
on the WVU campuses and in the city.
Library Services
The West Virginia University Libraries contain over a million volumes
and 900,000 microforms. Some 30,000 volumes are added each year, and 9,000
periodical titles are received.
The collections are especially strong in the biological sciences, chemistry,
engineering, economics, Africana, the Southern Appalachians, and West
Virginia history. Facilties for research in West Virginia and regional history
are centered in the West Virginia Collection, on the second floor of Colson
Hall. In addition to an extensive collection of books, periodicals, and maps,
the West Virginia Collection contains over three million manuscripts. These,
together with court records from many counties, are invaluable sources for
the study of all aspects of West Virginia history.
The rare book room contains an unusually fine collection of first and
limited editions, including four Shakespeare folios, and first editions of many
of the works of Dickens, Scott, and Clemens.
The Evansdale Library houses the collections needed to support the
schools and colleges on the Evansdale Campus: Agriculture, Engineering,
Human Resources and Education, Social Work, Physical Education, and
Creative Arts.
The physical sciences library of 37,000 volumes in the fields of chemistry,
geology, physics, and astronomy is in the Chemistry Research Laboratory.
The Health Sciences Center library on the second floor of the Basic
Sciences Building contains over 150,000 volumes with a complete public
catalog. Author cards for titles in the health sciences center library appear in
the main library catalog.
The law library, with a collection of over 130,000 volumes, is in the Law
Center on the Evansdale Campus.
The mathematics library in Eiesland Hall contains approximately 16,000
volumes.
The music library in room 424-A, Creative Arts Center, contains some
23,000 items, including microcards, microfilms, recordings, books, and
scores.
Audiovisual departments are in Colson Hall and the Health Sciences
Center library. A catalog of all audiovisual holdings is available at both
locations and at the various libraries.
404 HOUSING AND RESIDENCE LIFE I LIBRARY SERVICES
Computing Services
The University community is served by two computer organizations:
West Virginia University Computing Services and West Virginia Network for
Educational Telecomputing (WVNET). WVNET provides hardware and
software for all colleges and schools in the state. WVU Computing Services
coordinates these resources and provides additional services on the WVU
campuses.
WVNET hardware includes an IBM 3081KX with 48 megabytes of real
memory, an IBM 3081D with 16 megabytes of real memory, and a Digital
Equipment VAX 8650 (48 megabytes), a VAX 8550 (48 megabytes), and an
11/780 (16 megabytes) in a VAX cluster for a total of five gigabytes of on-line
disk space. Direct access for the IBM systems are from a dual density 3380E
disk drive and from twelve STC 8380s. The disk drives for the Digital
Equipment units are RA81s. Tape drives are STC 3420 model 6; WVNET
supports 6250 and 1600BPI recording densities. Printers include three STC
IMPACT 1500s, an IBM 3820 laser, a Zeta 3600X plotter, and an assortment of
microfilm/fiche processors and duplicators.
A wide range of software is available for both the IBM and DEC
hardware. Programming languages include COBOL, FORTRAN, PL/1, Ada,
BASIC, C, and Pascal. Software for specific academic disciplines include the
International Mathematical and Statistics Library, the North Carolina State
Statistical Analysis System, the UCLA Biomedical Package, the University of
Chicago's Statistical Package for the Social Sciences, the Standford Public
Information Retrieval System, and forms of special purpose engineering
software.
The University maintains access sites for WVNET at a number of places
on campus. Batch processing/remote job entry and time sharing sites are open
everyday except Sunday from 8:15/9 a.m. until 12 n/l:00 a.m. Exact hours and
documentation libraries are available at each site. User consultants are at the
Evansdale Library and Colson Hall sites to answer questions and help with
problems.
WVU Computering Services publishes Output, a newsletter, and Com-
puting at WVU, a user's guide.
COMPUTING SERVICES 405
Part 7
GRADUATE FACULTY
Graduate faculty status is subject to periodic review and modification.
Consequently, students should verify membership status with the appropriate
faculty member prior to establishing graduate committees.
College of Agriculture and Forestry
Animal and Veterinary Sciences
Professors
Robert A. Dailey, Ph.D. (U. Wise). Reproductive physiology.
Leslie Dozsa,* D.V.M. (C. Vet. Med., Budapest). Veterinary medicine.
Thomas J. Galvin, D.V.M. (Tex. A&M U.), Ph.D. (Tulane U.). Veterinary parasitology.
William H. Hoover, Ph.D. (Penn St. U.). Animal nutrition.
Donald J. Horvath, Ph.D. (Cornell U.). Nutrition. Physiology.
E. Keith Inskeep, Ph.D. (U. Wise). Reproductive physiology.
Harold E. Kidder,* Ph.D. (U. Wise). Reproductive physiology.
Paul E. Lewis, Ph.D. (WVU)— Chairperson. Reproductive physiology.
William G. Martin, Ph.D. (WVU). Nutritional biochemistry.
Edward C. Prigge, Ph.D. (U. Maine). Animal nutrition.
Robert L. Reid, Ph.D. (Aberdeen U.). Ruminant nutrition.
Associate Professors
Ellen R. Jordan, Ph.D. (Ore. St. U.)— Extension Specialist. Reproductive physiology.
Richard R. Koes, Ph.D. (U. Mo.)— Extension Specialist. Nutrition.
Phillip I. Osborne,* Ph.D. (Clemson U.)— Extension Specialist. Livestock marketing and
production.
Ronald A. Peterson,* Ph.D. (Mich. St. U.). Nutrition. Physiology-poultry.
Wayne R. Wagner,* Ph.D. (Colo. St. U.)— Extension Specialist. Animal breeding and genetics.
Assistant Professors
Ruth Blauwiekel, D.V.M. (Mich. St.), Ph.D. (Wash. St.)— Veterinarian.
Robert McCurley, Ph.D. (U. Tenn.). Animal genetics.
Paul M. Smith,* M.S. (WVU). Food sciences.
Adjunct Professor
Robert L. Cochrane, Ph.D. (U. Wise). Reproductive physiology.
Family Resources
Professors
Margaret Albrink, M.D. (Yale U.)— Adjunct.
Mary K. Head, R.D., Ph.D. (Purdue U.)— Interim Chairperson. Program coordinator.
Experimental foods, Applied human nutrition, Food and dietary evaluation.
M. Zafar Alam Nomani, Ph.D. (Rutgers U.). Nutrition. Dietary fiber; Cholesterol and protein
metabolism, Nutritional assessment.
Associate Professors
Wanda K. Franz, Ph.D. (WVU). Human development, Cognitive development, Theory.
Joann L. Guthrie,* Ed.D. (WVU). Rehabilitation, Architectural barriers, Independent living.
Nora M. MacDonald,* M.S. (Iowa St. U.). Apparel design, Clothing for special needs, Fashio
merchandising.
Janice I. Yeager, M.S. (U. 111.). Textiles science, Textiles for interiors, Fashio merchandising.
Assistant Professors
Kyung J. Lee, Ph.D. (U. Minn.). History of interiors and housing, Behavioral aspects of interior
design, Advanced drafting.
Marian Beth Liddell, Ed.D. (WVU). Curriculum, Instruction, Supervision.
Nancy R. Rodriguez, Ph.D. (WVU). Nutritional biochemistry, Intermediary metabolism, Clinical
and applied nutrition.
Linda Snyder, Ph.D. (UNC— G). Social-psychological aspects of clothing; historic costume.
*Associate Member
406
Forestry
Professors
Eugene C. Bammel, Ph.D. (Syracuse U.)— Recreation and Parks. Leisure theory, Historical
interpretation. Tourism.
Lei Lane Bammel, Ph.D. (U. Utah) — Recreation and Parks. Leisure studies, Research designs.
Samuel M. Brock, Ph.D. (U. Minn.) — Forest Management. Forest resource economics and
management, Economics of conservation.
Kenneth L. Carvell, D.For. (Duke U.) — Forest Management. Silviculture, Forest ecology.
Jack E. Coster,* Ph.D. (Tex. A&M U.) — Chairperson, Forestry. Forestry, Entomology.
Ray R. Hicks, Jr., Ph.D. (SUNY)— Forest Management. Forest ecology, Forest pest management.
Joseph M. Hutchinson, Jr.,* M.S. (WVU)— Recreation and Parks. Recreation/parks management,
Administration planning, Policy.
Norman D. Jackson,* M.W.T. (N.C. St. U.) — Wood Science. Harvesting and primary
manufacturing.
William E. Kidd, Jr.,* M.S.F. (VPI&SU)— Extension Specialist— Forest Management. Forestry.
Edwin D. Michael,* Ph.D. (Tex. A&M U.)— Wildlife Management. Wildlife management, Wetland
wildlife.
David E. Samuel, Ph.D. (WVU)— Wildlife Management. Policy and administration, Wildlife
attitudes, Hunter education.
Robert L. Smith, Ph.D. (Cornell U.)— Wildlife Management. Habitat assessment, Ecology of
disturbed ecosystems, Population ecology.
Stanislaw Jan Tajchman, Ph.D. (U. Munich)— Forest Management. Forest meterology.
David E. White, Ph.D. (SUNY)— Forest Management. Forestry economics, Policy analysis.
Robert C. Whitmore, Ph.D. (B. Young U.)— Wildlife Management. Avian ecology, Quantitative
ecology.
Harry V. Wiant, Jr., Ph.D. (Yale U.) — Forest Management. Mensuration, Silviculture.
David O. Yandle, Ph.D. (N.C. St. U.)— Forest Management. Forest biometrics, Statistics.
Gary W. Zinn,* Ph.D. (SUNY), Forest Management. Forest economics, Management planning,
Forest policy.
Associate Professor
James P. Armstrong, Ph.D. (SUNY) — Wood Science. Physical properties and hardwood drying.
Assistant Professors
Kurt C. Hassler, Ph.D. (VPI&SU)— Extension Specialist — Wood Science. Harvesting,
Quantitative methods.
Beverly Hummel-Azzaro,* Ph.D. (WVU) — Recreation and Parks. Therapeutic recreation.
David E. Patterson, Ph.D. (Tex. A&M U.) — Wood Science. Plant layout, Decision-making,
Processing.
Adjunct Associate
Patrick W. Brown, Ph.D. (U. Mo.) — Cooperative Fish and Wildlife Unit. Wildlife management,
Ecology.
F. Joseph Margraf, Ph.D. (Tex. A&M U.)— Cooperative Fish and Wildlife Unit. Fisheries science,
Ecology.
Sue A. Perry, Ph.D. (N. Tex. St. U.)— Cooperative Fish and Wildlife Unit. Aquatic ecology.
Plant and Soil Sciences
Professors
Robert E. Anderson, Ph.D. (U. Wise.) — Extension. Agricultural microbiology. Environmental
education.
Barton S. Baker, Ph.D. (WVU)— Chairperson. Agronomy. Forage crops.
John A. Balasko, Ph.D. (U. Wise.)— Agronomy. Forage crops.
John F. Baniecki,* Ph.D. (U. Ariz.)— Extension. Plant Pathology. Plant disease identification and
control.
Joseph G. Barratt,* Ph.D. (U. N.H.J— Plant Pathology. Tree fruit diseases.
Bradford C. Bearce,* Ph.D. (U. Calif.)— Horticulture. Florist and nursery crops.
Gary K. Bissonnette, Ph.D. (Mont. St. U.)— Agricultural Microbiology. Aquatic microbiology,
Environmental microbiology.
Steven H. Blizzard,* Ph.D. (WVU)— Horticulture. Tree fruits.
Linda Butler, Ph.D. (U. Ga.j— Entomology. Forest entomology, Pest management, Lepidoptera.
Dale F. Hindal, Ph.D. (Iowa St. U.)— Mycology. Fungal physiology, Mycorrhizae, Biocontrol,
Diseases of forest and shade trees.
L. Morris Ingle, Ph.D. (Purdue U.)— Horticulture. Post-harvest physiology of tree fruits.
*Associate Member
407 GRADUATE FACULTY
Walter J. Kaczmarczyk, Ph.D. (Hahnemann Med. C.)— Genetics. Biochemical genetics.
Robert E. Keefer, Ph.D. (Ohio St. U.)— Agronomy. Soil fertility. Organic matter and soil
conservation.
William L. MacDonald, Ph.D. (Iowa St. U.) — Plant Pathology. Forest and shade tree diseases.
Joginder Nath, Ph.D. (U. Wise.)— Genetics. Cytogenetics, Evolution, Mutagenesis.
Rabindar N. Singh, Ph.D. (VPI&SU) — Agronomy. Soil chemistry and mineralogy.
Suman Singah, Ph.D. (Cornell U.) — Horticulutre. Tree fruits, Micropropagation.
Charles B. Sperow, Jr.,* M.S. (WVU)— Extension. Agronomy. Crops agronomy.
David A. Stelzig, Ph.D. (N.D. St. U.)— Agricultural Biochemistry. Biochemical plant pathology.
Valentin Ulrich, Ph.D. (Rutgers U.)— Genetics. Biochemical genetics and plant breeding.
Willem A. Van Eck,* Ph.D. (Mich. St. U.)— Extension Specialist, Soil Science. Soil and water
resources.
Robert }. Young,* Ph.D. (Ore. St. U.) — Plant Pathology. Vegetable diseases.
Richard K. Zimmerman,* Ph.D. (WVU)— Extension, Plant Sciences. Plant sciences and
conservation.
Associate Professors
James W. Amrine, Jr., Ph.D. (Iowa St. U.)— Entomology. Medical entomology, Apiculture,
Biological control.
Tara Baugher, Ph.D. (WVU) — Extension. Horticulture. Tree fruits.
James L. Brooks, Ph.D. (U. Calif.)— Agricultural Biochemistry. Enzymes and plant biochemistry.
William B. Bryan, Ph.D. (Iowa St. U.)— Agronomy. Pastures.
Henry W. Hogmire, Ph.D. (Mich. St. U.)— Entomology. Tree fruit entomology, Integrated pest
management.
Everett M. Jencks, Ph.D. (Rutgers U.) — Agronomy. Soil chemistry.
Joseph B. Morton, Ph.D. (Mont. St. U.)— Plant Pathology. Mycorrhizal interactions, Field crop
diseases.
John C. Sencindiver, Ph.D. (WVU)— Agronomy. Soil Science, Soil genesis and classification, Acid
mine drainage.
Roger S. Young,* Ph.D. (Mich. St. U.)— Horticulture. Tree fruits, Weed science.
Assistant Professors
Clinton E. Hickman, M.S. (WVU)— Horticulture. Vegetables, Small fruits.
James B. Kotcon, Ph.D. (U. Wise.)— Plant Pathology. Nematology, Soil-bourne diseases.
Alan J. Sexstone, Ph.D. (Mich. St. U.) — Agricultural Microbiology. Nutrient cycling and
biodegradation of pollutants.
Jeffrey Skousen, Ph.D. (Tex. A&M U.)— Adjunct. Agronomy. Soil science, Land reclamation.
Resource Management
Professors
Clifford W. Collier, Jr.,* M.L.A. (U. Ga.)— Extension Landscape Architect. Architecture.
Dale K. Colyer, Ph.D. (U. Wise). Production economics, Finance.
Robert G. Diener, Ph.D. (Mich. St. U.)— Agricultural Mechanics. Electricity.
Anthony Ferrise, M.S. (WVU). Community development.
Robert L. Jack, Ph.D. (Penn St. U.). Marketing, Agribusiness.
Marion L. Kimmons,* Ph.D. (U. Mo.). Agricultural mechanics.
Alon Kvashny, Ed.D. (WVU). Site design, Landscape construction.
Layle D. Lawrence, Ph.D. (LSU), Social science research, Curriculum development, Teaching
methods.
George W. Longenecker,* M.F.A. (U. 111.). Plant identification, Planting design.
Paul E. Nesselroad, Ph.D. (Penn St. U.). Farm management, Agribusiness.
Virgil J. Norton, Ph.D. (Ore. St. U.)— Chairperson. Agricultural and resource economics.
Dennis K. Smith, Ph.D. (Penn St. U.). Rural development.
Mary E. Templeton, * M.S. (WVU). Marketing, Agribusiness.
Associate Professors
Donald R. Armstrong,* M.L.A. (Iowa St. U.). Site design, Design implementation.
Thomas L. Bean,* Ed.D. (WVU)— State Safety Extension Specialist.
Gerald V. Eagan,* Ph.D. (U. Tenn.)— State Extension Specialist.
Kendall C. Elliott, M.S.Ag.E. (WVU)— Agricultural Mechanics. Power and machinery.
Kenneth J. Hock, Ph.D. (U. Ariz.). Land economics, Rural development.
Alexander G. Karther,* M.F.A. (U. Okla.). Design communication, Design methodology.
Steven B. McBride,* M.L.A. (U. Mass.). Landscape construction, Site design.
Delmar R. Yoder,* Ph.D. (U. Wise). Resource development.
*Associate Member
408 GRADUATE FACULTY
Assistant Professors
Gerald E. D'Souza,* Ph.D. (Miss. St. U.). Farm management/production economics, Finance.
Stacy A. Gartin, Ph.D. (Ohio St. U.). Communications, Program planning, Leadership
development.
Wesley Lynch, M.S. (Mich. St. U.)— Extension Housing Specialist.
Kerry S. Odell, Ph.D. (Ohio St. U.). Research methodology, Microcomputer applications,
Teaching methods.
Charles B. Yuill,* M.L.A. (U. Mass.). Computer applications, Site analysis.
College of Arts and Sciences
Biology
Professors
David F. Blaydes, Ph.D. (Ind. U.). Plant physiology, Cytokinins.
Roy B. Clarkson. Ph.D. (WVU). Plant systematics, Floristics.
John J. DeCosta, Ph.D. (Ind. U.). Limnology, Ecology, Invertebrate biology.
Edward C. Keller, Jr., Ph.D. (Penn St. U.), Ecology, Genetics.
Gerald E. Lang, Ph.D. (Rutgers U.)— Assistant Dean. Plant ecology, Biogeochemistry, Wetland
ecology.
Dennis C. Quinlan, Ph.D. (U. Rochester). Cellular/molecular biology, Cell membranes, Cancer
biology.
Martin W. Schein, Sc.D. (}. Hopkins U.)— Centennial. Animal behavior, Circadian rhythms.
Richard P. Sutter, Ph.D. (Tufts U.). Cellular/molecular biology, Developmental biology,
Molecular genetics.
Associate Professors
Joseph A. Marshall, Ph.D. (U. Md.). Animal behavior, Ichthyology, Aquaculture.
Leah A. Williams, Ph.D. (WVU)— Chairperson. Cellular/molecular biology, Developmental
biology, Vertebrate anatomy.
Assistant Professors
Patricia E. Gallagher, Ph.D. (U. Tenn.). Cellular/molecular biology.
Keith Garbutt, Ph.D. (U. Wales). Population genetics.
Karen S. Katula, Ph.D. (Northwestern U.). Cellular/molecular biology, Molecular genetics,
Recombinant DNA.
Michael A. Kotarski, Ph.D. (Cornell U.). Cellular/molecular biology.
James B. McGraw, Ph.D. (Duke U.). Plant ecology, Plant physiology.
Chemistry
Professors
Naresh S. Dalai, Ph.D. (U. Brit. Columbia). Physical chemistry, Magnetic resonance, Fossil fuels.
Gabor B. Fodor, Ph.D. (U. Szeged, Hungary) — Centennial Professor Emeritus. Organic chemistry,
Natural products, Synthesis.
Denis W. H. MacDowell, Ph.D. (MIT). Organic chemistry, Synthesis, Thiophenes.
William R. Moore,* Ph.D. (U. Minn.). Organic chemistry, Strained molecules, Reaction
mechanisms.
Chester W. Muth,* Ph.D. (Ohio St. U.)— Emeritus.
Robert S. Nakon, Ph.D. (Tex. A&M U.). Bioinorganic chemistry, Chelates, Catalysis.
Jeffrey L. Petersen, Ph.D. (U. Wise). Physical inorganic chemistry, Transition metal complexes,
X-ray diffraction.
Kenneth Showalter, Ph.D. (U. Colo.). Physical chemistry, Chemical kinetics, Multistability and
oscillating systems.
Anthony Winston, Ph.D. (Duke U.)— Chairperson. Organic chemistry, High polymers, Metal
chelating polymers.
Associate Professors
Ronald B. Smart, Ph.D. (U. Mich.). Environmental analytical chemistry, Electrochemistry, Trace
metals.
John H. Strohl,* Ph.D. (U. Wise). Analytical chemistry, Thin-layer electrochemistry, Continuous
electrolysis.
Kung K. Wang, Ph.D. (Purdue U.). Organic chemistry, Stereoselective synthesis, Natural
products.
Assistant Professors
Harry O. Finklea, Ph.D. (Calif. Inst. Tech.). Analytical/physical chemistry, Properties of
organized monolayers deposited on electrodes.
Charles Gibson, Ph.D. (U. Wise). Inorganic chemistry, Metal clusters.
*Associate Member
GRADUATE FACULTY 409
Paul ]. Jagodzinski, Ph.D. (Tex. A&M U.). Biophysical chemistry, Raman spectroscopy, Enzyme
structures.
Raymond J. Lovett, Ph.D. (Ariz. St. U.). Analytical chemistry, Computer simulating in analysis,
trace metal determinations, and interaction of chemicals with solids.
Plato A. Magriotis, Ph.D. (SUNY). Organic chemistry, Organic synthesis and bio-organic
chemistry.
Eric A. Mintz, Ph.D. (u. Mass.). Inorganic and organometallic chemistry, Synthesis, Catalysis.
John H. Penn, Ph.D. (U. Wise). Organic chemistry, Photochemistry, Electron transfer.
Communication Studies
Professors
Leonard M. Davis, Ph.D. (Northwestern U.). Organizational communication, Communication
problems of children, Rhetoric and communication theory.
Donald W. Klopf, Ph.D. (U. Wash.). Intercultural communication, Small-group communication,
Persuasion.
James C. McCroskey, Ed.D. (Penn St. U.)— Chairperson. Communication avoidance,
Communication in instruction, Interpersonal and organizational communication.
Virginia P. Richmond, Ph.D. (U. Nebr.). Interpersonal and organizational communication,
Nonverbal communication, Communication in instruction.
Lawrence R. Wheeless, Ph.D. (Wayne St. U.)— Associate Chairperson. Interpersonal and
organizational communication, Empirical methodology, Communication in instruction.
Associate Professor
Virginia E. Wheeless, Ph.D. (U. Nebr.). Interpersonal and organizational communication, Gender
and communication.
Assistant Professors
Melanie Booth-Butterfield, Ph.D. (U. Mo.). Interpersonal communication, Nonverbal
communication, Communication in instruction.
Joan S. Gorham, Ed.D. (North. 111. U.). Communication in instruction, Nonverbal communication.
Walter R. Zakahi, Ph.D. (Bowl Green St. U.). Interpersonal communication, Nonverbal
communication, Communication theory.
Computer Science and Statistics
Professors
Donald F. Butcher, Ph.D. (Iowa St. U.)— Chairperson Statistics. Design and analysis of
experiments, Monte Carlo simulation, Regression analysis.
Erdogan Gunel, Ph.D. (SUNY— Buffalo)— Statistics. Bayesian inference, Categorial data analysis,
Biometry.
E. James Harner, Jr., Ph.D. (Cornell U.)— Statistics. Robust estimation, Statistical computation,
Modeling observational studies.
Franz X. Hiergeist, Ph.D. (U. Pitt)— Mathematics of computation, Computer design.
Malcolm G. Lane, Ph.D. (Duke U.)— Computer Science. Data communications, Operating
systems, Software engineering.
Wayne A. Muth, Ph.D. (Iowa St. U.)— Associate Chairperson. Computer Science. Simulation.
Mathematical modeling, Computer performance.
Y. V. Reddy, Ph.D. (WVU)— Computer Science. Artifical intelligence, Knowledge based
simulation, Computer graphics.
William V. Thayne, Ph.D. (U. 111.)— Statistics. Statistical genetics, Regression analysis.
George E. Trapp, Ph.D. (Carnegie-Mellon U.)— Computer Science. Numerical analysis,
Mathematical programming, Network models.
Stanley Wearden, Ph.D. (Cornell U.)— Statistics. Biometrics, Statistical genetics, Population
biology.
Associate Professors
John M. Atkins, Ph.D. (U. Pitt)— Computer Science. Design of database management systems,
Analysis of algorithms, Mathematics of computation.
Daniel M. Chilko,* M.S. (Rutgers U.)— Statistics. Statistical computing, Computer graphics.
William H. Dodrill, M.S. (Columbia U.)— Computer Science. Microcomputer applications,
Computers in medicine.
Shirley M. Dowdy, Ph.D. (U. Notre Dame)— Statistics. Sampling, Statistical methods, Software
for statistical education.
D. Michael Henry, Ph.D. (TCU)— Computer Science. Databases, Cryptography, Microcomputer
interfacing.
Gerald R. Hobbs, Jr., Ph.D. (Kans. St. U.)— Statistics. Nonparametric statistics, Regression
analysis.
'Associate Member
410 GRADUATE FACULTY
James D. Mooney, Ph.D. (Ohio St. U.)— Computer Science. Operating systems, Text processing,
Computer architecture.
Frances L. Van Scoy, Ph.D. (U. Va.)— Computer Science. Programming languages and compilers,
Software development environments, Parallel processing.
Adjunct Professors
William N. Anderson,* Ph.D. (Carnegie-Mellon U.)— Computer Science. Numerical analysis,
Mathematical programming, Electrical networks.
Thomas J. O'Brien,* Ph.D. (U. Wise.)— Computer Science. Numerical analysis, Mathematical
modelling, Numerical simulation.
Tuncer J. Oren,* Ph.D. (U. Ariz.)— Computer Science. Artificial intelligence, Software
engineering, Simulation.
Bernard P. Zeigler,* Ph.D. (U. Ariz.)— Computer Science. Artificial intelligence, Systems
modelling and simulation, Distributed simulation architectures.
Adjunct Associate Professors
Laurance D. Eisenhart,* Ph.D. (Carnegie-Mellon U.)— Computer Science. Numerical analysis,
Scientific systems development.
Mark S. Fox, Ph.D. (Carnegie-Mellon U.)— Computer Science. Knowledge based simulation,
Artifical intelligence, Knowledge representation.
Thomas D. Morley,* Ph.D. (Carnegie-Mellon U.)— Computer Science. Electrical networks,
Functional analysis, Combinatorics.
Adjunct Assistant Professors
Michael E. Attfield,* Ph.D. (WVU)— Statistics. Design and analysis.
Rodolphe Nassif,* Ph.D. (Inst. Natl. Poly., France)— Computer Science. Information systems,
Distributed database management systems.
Martin R. Petersen,* Ph.D. (N.C. St.)— Statistics. Design and analysis.
English
Professors
Sophia B. Blaydes, Ph.D. (Ind. U.). 17th and 18th century literature, Poetry, Biography.
Philip Bordinat, Ph.D. (U. Birmingham). 16th and 17th century British drama, Modern drama.
Lloyd M. Davis, M.A. (Vanderbilt U.). American literature, Creative writing, Humor in literature.
Ruel E. Foster, Ph.D. (Vanderbilt U.)— Claude Worthington Benedum Professor of American
Literature. Southern literature.
William W. French, Ph.D. (U. Pitt). Shakespeare, Renaissance literature, Drama/theatre history.
Elaine K. Ginsberg, Ph.D. (U. Okla.)— Assistant Vice President for Undergraduate Education.
Early American literature, American fiction, Women's studies.
John H. Johnston, Ph.D. (U. Wise). Modern poetry, War literature, Poetry of the city.
Virgil L. Peterson,* Ph.D. (UCLA). Writing, Biography, Peace studies.
John Racin, Jr.,* Ph.D. (Ohio St. U.). Renaissance poetry and prose, Classical/modern drama,
Shakespeare.
Frank Scafella, Jr., Ph.D. (U. Chicago). American literature, Literature and religion, Ernest
Hemingway.
John F. Stasny, M.A. (U. Minn.). Victorian studies, Journal editing, Humanities.
Judith G. Stitzel, Ph.D. (U. Minn.)— Director, Center for Women's Studies. Women's studies,
Feminist pedagogy.
Associate Professors
Timothy D. Adams, Ph.D. (Emory U.). American literature, American studies, Autobiography.
Dennis Allen, Ph.D. (U. Minn.). Critical theory, Prose fiction.
Rudolph P. Almasy,* Ph.D. (U. Minn.)— Chairperson. Renaissance and Reformation studies,
Composition.
Arthur C. Buck,* Ph.D. (U. Ark.). Comparative and world literature, Comparative romanticism
and comparative modern drama, Chinese/Japanese literature in translation.
Patrick Conner, Ph.D. (U. Md.). Old English language and literature, Linguistics.
Richard B. Eaton, Jr.,* Ph.D. (U. N.C). American drama, 19th century American fiction.
Anna Shannon Elfenbein, Ph.D. (U. Nebr.). Southern literature, Black fiction, Women's studies.
Anita Gandolfo, Ph.D. (CUNY). Modern literature, Literature and religion, Composition.
Avery F. Gaskins, Ph.D. (Ind. U.). British romanticism, Appalachian literature.
Ellesa C. High,* Ph.D. (Ohio U.). Appalachian literature, Creative writing.
Russell C. MacDonald,* Ph.D. (U. Penn). Restoration and 18th century literature, Prose fiction,
Creative writing.
Thomas J. Miles,* Ph.D. (SUNY). Medieval literature, Professional Writing.
Byron C. Nelson, Ph.D. (U. Wise). Radicals in the English Revolution, Music and literature,
Shakespeare, Elizabethan and modern drama.
'Associate Member
GRADUATE FACULTY 411
Barry Ward, Ph.D. (Ohio St. U.). Folklore, Medieval literature, American studies.
Hayden Ward, Ph.D. (Columbia U.). Victorian studies, Journal editing, 19th century American
literature.
Assistant Professors
Beth Daniell,* Ph.D. (U. Tex.). Rhetoric, Composition.
Winston Fuller,* M.A. (U. Colo.). Poetics.
Elizabeth Madison,* Ph.D. (Ind. U.). Comparative literature, Modern fiction.
Cheryl B. Torsney, Ph.D. (U. Fla.). American literature, Women's studies, Critical theory.
Foreign Languages
Professors
Robert J. Elkins,* Ph.D. (U. Kans.) — Chairperson. German. Language methodology, German radio
plays, English as a second language.
Joseph A. Murphy, Ph.D. (Ohio St. U.)— French. English as a second language, Foreign language
education.
Joseph J. Prentiss,* Ph.D. (U. Pitt)— Classics. Greek and Latin literature, Classical mythology.
William L. Siemens, Ph.D. (U. Kans.)— Spanish. Spanish-American literature, Picaresque novel.
Janice Spleth, Ph.D. (Rice U.)— French. Franchophone literature and culture, 19th century French
drama.
Harley U. Taylor, Jr., Ph.D. (Ind. U.)— Associate Chair. German. Scientific German, Modern
German literature.
M. Stanley Whitley, Ph.D. (Cornell U.)— Linguistics, Spanish. Sociolinguistics, Phonology,
History of linguistics.
Associate Professors
Marilyn Bendena,* Ph.D. (Wayne St. U.)— French, Russian. Russian literature/culture,
Contemporary French novel.
Axel W. Claesges, Ph.D. (Vanderbilt U.)— German. German cultural and intellectual history. 19th
century German literature, Commercial German.
Ronald W. Dunbar, Ph.D. (U. Wise.)— German. German linguistics and philology, Middle High
German.
Pablo Gonzalez, Ph.D. (U. Madrid)— Spanish. Spanish-American literature, Commercial Spanish.
Luis Harss, M.A. (Stanford U.)— Spanish. Spanish-American literature.
Lois V. Hinckley, Ph.D. (U. N.C.)— Classics. Roman/Greek literature and civilization.
Kathleen McNerney, Ph.D. (U. N.M.)— Spanish. Catalan language and literature, Spanish
literature and culture.
Michael E. Reider, Ph.D. (U. Iowa)— Spanish, Linguistics. Syntax and phonology,
Psycholinguistics.
Joseph F. Renahan, M.S. (Yeshiva U.)— Spanish. French and Spanish philology, Spanish Golden
Age drama.
Jurgen Schlunk, Ph.D. (U. Marburg)— German. 18th century German literature, 19th and 20th
century German drama.
Assistant Professors
Christine Clark-Evans, Ph.D. (Bryn Mawr C). 18th centry French literature.
Sandra Dixon, Ph.D. (Brown U.). Latin American, Spanish, and Portuguese literature.
John R. Goldberg, Ph.D. (U. Kans.)— Linguistics, French. English as a second language, Friulian,
Romance linguistics.
Chantal Marechal, Ph.D. (U. Mich.). Medieval French literature.
Geology and Geography
Professors
Robert E. Behling,* Ph.D. (Ohio St. U.). Geomorphology.
Alan C. Donaldson, Ph.D. (Penn St. U.)— Chairperson. Sedimentation-stratigraphy.
Milton T. Heald, Ph.D. (Harvard U.)— Emeritus. Mineralogy and petrology.
Kenneth C. Martis, Ph.D. (U. Mich.). Political resource and environmental policy.
Henry W. Rauch, Ph.D. (Penn St. U.). Hydrogeology and geochemistry.
John J. Renton, Ph.D. (WVU). Geochemistry.
Robert C. Shumaker, Ph.D. (Cornell U.). Geophysics.
Richard A. Smosna, Ph.D. (111. U.). Carbonate sedimentation.
Francis T. C. Ting, Ph.D. (Penn St. U.). Coal geology.
Associate Professors
Frank J. Calzonetti, Ph.D. (U. Okla.). Energy and regional development, Industrial location.
William M. Dunne, Ph.D. (U. Bristol). Structural geology.
Gregory A. Elmes, Ph.D. (Penn St. U.). Spatial modeling, Transportation.
'Associate Member
412 GRADUATE FACULTY
Robert Q. Hanham, Ph.D. (Ohio St. U.). Urban and regional systems, Geostatistics.
Thomas W. Kammer, Ph.D. (Ind. U.). Paleontology.
Assistant Professors
William M. Dunne, Ph.D. (U. Bristol). Structural geology.
J. Steven Kite, Ph.D. (U. Wise). Geomorphology.
Helen Lang, Ph.D. (U. Ore.). Petrology and mineralogy.
John Pickles, Ph.D. (Penn St. U.). Geographic theory, Africa.
Lizbeth A. Pyle, Ph.D. (U. Minn.)— Visiting. Resource management, Land use policy, Agriculture,
United States and Canada.
Robert T. Walker,* Ph.D. (U. Penn). Regional science.
Thomas H. Wilson, Ph.D. (WVU). Geophysics.
History
Professors
Wesley M. Bagby, Ph.D. (Columbia U.)— Recent United States. U.S. diplomatic.
William T. Doherty, Ph.D. (U. Mo.). Modern United States. American south, Social and
intellectual, Historiography.
Ronald L. Lewis, Ph.D. (U. Akron)— Modern United States. West Virginia/Appalachia, Labor,
Ethnic relations.
Robert M. Maxon, Ph.D. (Syracuse U.)— Chairperson. Africa. East Africa, Economic and
imperial.
John C. Super, Ph.D. (UCLA)— Associate Chairperson. Latin America, Spain, Biography, Food
and agriculture.
Associate Professors
William S. Arnett,* Ph.D. (Ohio St. U.)— Ancient. Egyptology, Aging and elderly in the ancient
Middle East.
Robert E. Blobaum, Ph.D. (U. Nebr.)— Russia, East Europe. Poland, 20th century political and
social history.
Jack L. Hammersmith, Ph.D. (U. Va.)— Modern United States. East Asia, U.S. diplomatic,
U.S. -Japanese relations.
Barbara J. Howe, Ph.D. (Temple U.) — Modern United States. Public history, U.S. urban and
women's history.
Elizabeth K. Hudson,* Ph.D. (Ind. U.)— Renaissance and Reformation. Education and religion.
John A. Maxwell, Ph.D. (WVU)— Modern Europe. East and West Germany, Military history.
Stephen C. McCluskey, Ph.D. (U. Wise.)— Medieval science and technology. Astronomies of non-
literate cultures.
W. Reynolds McLeod,* Ph.D. (U. Md.)— Great Britain. Celtic Europe (Scotland), Popular history,
Newspaper history.
Dennis H. O'Brien,* Ph.D. (U. 111.) — Early modern Europe. France, Diplomatic history.
George P. Parkinson, Jr.,* Ph.D. (U. Wise.)— Early United States. Colonial and Antebellum,
Appalachian history and archives.
Assistant Professor
Rosemarie Zagarri,* Ph.D. (Yale U.)— Early United States. American social and political history,
Constitutional history.
Adjunct
Robert Maxwell, Ph.D. (Cornell U.)— Agriculture, East African agriculture and development.
John Pickles, Ph.D. (Penn State U.)— Geography, South African population and economic issues.
Mary Beth Pudup, Ph.D. (U. Calif.)— Geography, Appalachian development and U.S. economic
geography.
Rodger D. Yeager, Ph.D. (Syracuse U.)— Political Science, African agriculture and resource
conservation.
History of Science and Technology
Professor
Emory L. Kemp, Ph.D. (U. 111.)— Coordinator. History of technology, Industrial archeology, 19th-
century engineering.
Assistant Professor
Gregory A. Good, Ph.D. (U. Toronto). History of science, 18th-20th century in England and
America.
'Associate Member
GRADUATE FACULTY 413
Library Science
Associate Professors
Elizabeth F. Howard,* Ph.D. (U. Pitt). Children's and young adults' literature, School
librarianship.
Harold B. Shill, Ph.D. (U. N.C.)
Assistant Professor
Barbara Mertins,* M.S.L.S. (Syracuse U.). Bibliographic instruction, Children's literature, School
librarianship.
Mathematics
Professors
Alphonse Baartmans, Ph.D. (Mich. St. U.)— Chairperson. Algebra, Combinatorics, Block designs,
Coding theory.
Anand M. Chak, Ph.D. (Lucknow U., India). Analysis, Special functions, Integral transforms.
Harry Gingold, D.Sc. (Israel Inst. Tech.). Differential equations, Perturbation methods,
Numerical computational methods.
Jack T. Goodykoontz, Jr., Ph.D. (U. Ky.). General topology.
Henry W. Gould, M.A. (U. Va.). Combinatorics, Number theory, Special functions.
Caulton L. Irwin, Ph.D. (Emory U.) — Associate Director, Energy Research Center. Variational
methods, Optimization, Applied mathematics.
Alonzo F. Johnson, Ed.D. (Okla. St. U.). Mathematics for teachers.
Jin Bai Kim, Ph.D. (VPI&SU). Algebra, Semigroups.
Sam B. Nadler, Jr., Ph.D. (U. Ga.). Topology, Functional analysis.
William H. Simons,* Ph.D. (Carnegie-Mellon U.). Analysis, Differential equations, Applied
mathematics.
Associate Professors
Ian Christie, Ph.D. (Dundee U.). Numerical partial differential equations.
Harvey R. Diamond, Ph.D. (MIT). Applied probability.
James E. Dowdy,* Ph.D. (Okla. St. U.j. Homological algebra.
James H. Lightbourne,* Ph.D. (N.C. St. U.)— Associate Chairperson. Differential equations.
Michael E. Mays, Ph.D. (Penn St. U.). Number theory.
James E. Miller,* Ph.D. (U. Ky.). Complex analysis.
James L. Moseley, Ph.D. (Purdue U.). Partial differential equations.
John Randolph,* Ph.D. (U. Va.). Algebra, Finite groups.
Assistant Professors
Joy B. Easton,* J.D. (WVU). History of mathematics.
Gary Ganser, Ph.D. (Rensselaer Polytechnic Inst.). Applied mathematics, Fluid mechanics.
Harumi Hattori, Ph.D. (RPI). Differential equations, Continuum mechanics, Numerical analysis.
John F. Pierce, Ph.D. (U. Calif.). Global analysis, Mathematical physics.
Philosophy
Professors
Ralph W. Clark, Ph.D. (U. Colo.). Business ethics, Metaphysics.
Virginia H. Klenk, Ph.D. (U. Pitt)— Chairperson. Logic, Philosophy of mathematics.
Henry L. Ruf, Ph.D. (Emory U.). Philosophy of language, Comparative philosophy.
Associate Professor
Mark R. Wicclair, Ph.D. (Columbia U.). Philosophy of law, Medical ethics.
Assistant Professor
Stephen C. Hetherington, Ph.D. (U. Pitt). Epistemology, Metaphysics, Philosophy of language.
Physics
Professors
Atam P. Arya,* Ph.D. (Penn St. U.). Nuclear spectroscopy.
Bernard R. Cooper, Ph.D. (U. Calif.)— Claude Worthington Benedum Professor of Physics.
Surface electronic structure, Rare earth magnetism, Theory.
Martin V. Ferer, Ph.D. (U. 111.)— Phase transitions and critical phenomena, Theory.
Frank A. Franz, Ph.D. (U. 111.)— Provost. Atomic physics, Optical pumping, Experiment.
Judy R. Franz, Ph.D. (U. 111.). Phase transitions, Solid state theory.
Arnold D. Levine,* Ph.D. (Columbia U.). Field theory.
Pedro A. Montano, D.Sc. (Technion)— Adjunct. Surface physics, Mossbauer effect, Experiment.
Arthur S. Pavlovic, Ph.D. (Penn St. U.)— Chairperson. Magnetic properties of solids, Experiment.
Carl A. Rotter,* Ph.D. (Case W. Res. U.)— Associate Chairperson. Neutron scattering,
Ultrasonics, Experiment.
*Associate Member
414 GRADUATE FACULTY
Mohindar S. Seehra. Ph.D. (U. Rochester). Magnetic, electronic, optical properties of solids,
Experiment.
Richard P. Treat,* Ph.D. (U. Calif.). Aerosol physics, Experiment, Theory.
Associate Professor
John E. Littleton, Ph.D. (U. Rochester). Astrophysics, Nucleosynthesis, Theory and experiment.
Assistant Professors
Boyd F. Edwards, Ph.D. (Stanford U.). Fluid dynamics, Combustion processes, Percolation,
Theory.
Boyce H. Grier, Ph.D. (U. Rochester). Neutron scattering, Magnetic properties, Experiment.
Mark E. Koepke, Ph.D. (U. Maryland). Plasma physics, Experiment.
John A. Parmentola, Ph.D. (MIT). Nuclear chromodynamics, Theory.
H. Arthur Weldon, Ph.D. (MIT). Particle physics, Quantum fields, Theory.
Political Science
Professors
David A. Bingham,* Ph.D. (U. Iowa). State and local government, Intergovernmental relations.
Hong N. Kim, Ph.D. (Georgetown U.). Comparative politics (Asia), Comparative public policy.
David G. Temple,* Ph.D. (U. Va.). State and local government, Urban politics.
Rodger D. Yeager, Ph.D. (Syracuse U.). Comparative politics (Africa, political development),
Public policy (natural resources and environment).
Associate Professors
Robert E. DiClerico, Ph.D. (Ind. U.). American government, Presidency, Parties and electoral
processes, Public policy (agenda setting).
Allan H. Hammock,* Ph.D. (U. Va.)— Chairperson. American government, Public policy (civil
rights, health care).
David M. Hedge, Ph.D. (U. Wise). Legislative politics, Regulation, Intergovernmental relations,
Public policy (general).
Joseph Stewart, Jr., Ph.D. (U. Houston). Public policy (implementation, civil rights, American
policy process), Administrative law and regulation, American politics.
Assistant Professor
Richard A. Brisbin, Jr., Ph.D. (Johns Hopkins U.J. Public law and judicial politics, Public policy
(criminal justice and regulation).
Robert D. Duval, Ph.D. (Fla. St. U.). Methodology, International politics and policy, Public policy
(energy).
Susan Hunter, Ph.D. (Ohio St. U.). Public policy (environment, policy design, ethics),
Contemporary political theory.
Richard W. Waterman, Ph.D. (U. Houston). American government, Legislative politics, Electoral
processes, Public policy (regulation, political economy, policy analysis).
Psychology
Professors
James F. Carruth,* Ph.D. (U. 111.)— Director, WVU Counseling Service. Developmental patterns of
students.
Stanley H. Cohen, Ph.D. (Mich. St. U.) — Associate Chairperson. Quantitative methods,
Applications of computers in behavioral sciences, Multivariate analysis.
Philip E. Comer,* Ph.D. (WVU)— Associate Director, WVU Counseling Service. Adjustment and
developmental aspects of college life, Counseling and psychotherapy, Psychopathology,
Diagnostic methods.
John D. Cone, Ph.D. (U. Wash.). Behavioral assessment, Behavior modification with children,
Prevention of handicapping conditions, Educational systems analysis, Developmental
disabilities.
Barry A. Edelstein, Ph.D. (Memphis St. U.). Social competence, Behavioral assessment, Behavior
therapy.
William J. Fremouw, Ph.D. (U. Mass.)— Chairperson. Cognitive-behavioral therapy, Eating
disorders.
Robert P. Hawkins, Ph.D. (U. Pitt). Behavior analysis of child behavior, Behavioral assessment,
Child treatment programs.
Kennon A. Lattal, Ph.D. (U. Ala.). Reinforcement theory — response-reinforcer relations,
Laboratory research with animals for human behavior.
Hayne W. Reese, Ph.D. (U. Iowa)— Centennial. Cognitive development across the life-span, Life-
span research methodology, Philosophical analysis.
'Associate Member
GRADUATE FACULTY 415
Associate Professors
Edward C. Caldwell, Ph.D. (Syracuse U.). Evaluation of educational practices, Basic research in
reading.
Philip N. Chase, Ph.D. (U. Mass.). Verbal behavior, Concept learning, Individualized instruction,
Organizational behavior management.
E. Mark Cummings, Ph.D. (UCLA). Early socioemotional development, Development of
behavioral disorders, Daycare, Development of aggression.
Sharon L. Foster, Ph.D. (SUNY— Stony Brook). Social skills assessment and training with
children, Family communication, Behavioral observation.
Irving J. Goodman, Ph.D. (U. Rochester). Neural mechanisms of behavior, Psychopharmacology,
Behavioral neuroscience.
B. Kent Parker, Ph.D. (U. Utah). Conditioning and learning, Animal cognition, stimulus control
and memory, Research design and statistics.
Richard J. Seime, Ph.D. (U. Minn.)— Chief, Psychology Section, WVU Health Sciences Center.
Behavioral medicine, Conditional nausea and vomiting in cancer patients, Eating disorders,
Psychology, Psychotherapy, Psychological testing.
Assistant Professors
Mark Alavosius, Ph.D. (U. Mass.). Organizational behavior management, applied behavior
analysis, training and supervision of human service employees.
Andrew S. Bradlyn, Ph.D. (U. Miss.). Pediatric behavioral medicine, Child behavior therapy and
assessment.
Michael Franzen, Ph.D. (S. 111. U.). Neuropsychological assessment and rehabilitation,
Psychometric theory, Statistics.
Virginia L. Goetsch, Ph.D. (U. Ga.). Behavioral medicine, Psychophysiology of stress, Anxiety
disorders.
Anita L. Greene, Ph.D. (Boston U.). Cognitive development in adolescence, Stress in childhood
and adolescence.
David J. Hansen, Ph.D. (U. Miss.). Child abuse and neglect, Social skills assessment and training
with children and adolescents, Social validation and generalization of skills training.
Carol V. Harris, Ph.D. (U. Fla.). Child and adolescent behavior therapy, adolescent substance
abuse, pediatric behavioral medicine.
Tamara S. Hoier, Ph.D. (WVU). Treatment of sexually abused children and adolescents;
treatment of substance abusers.
Katherine Karraker, Ph.D. (Mich. St. U.). Infant social development, Physical appearance effects
on development, Parent-infant relations.
Kevin Larkin, Ph.D. (U. Pitt). Behavioral assessment and treatment of anxiety-related disorders,
Relationship between cardiovascular reactivity and cardiovascular disease.
Vernon Odom, Ph.D. (U. N.C.). Abnormal and normal visual development.
Michael Perone, Ph.D. (U. Wise— Milwaukee). Basic processes in the operant behavior of
humans and animals, Research methodology, Laboratory application of microcomputers,
Radical behaviorism.
Miranda Pratt, Ph.D. (U. Iowa). Psychophysiology of emotions, development and treatment of
sexual dysfunction.
James M. Puckett, Ph.D. (U. Mo.). Aging, Cognition, Psychophysiology.
Public Administration
Professors
Gerald M. Pops, J.D. (U. Calif.). Personnel, Public law.
David G. Williams, Ph.D. (SUNY— Albany)— Chairperson. Public organization, Management.
Associate Professors
Nand Engie Hart-Nibbrig, Ph.D. (U. Calif.). Public administration, Higher education and
administrative policy, Sociology of college sports.
Harvey J. Wolf, D.P.A. (USC). Research, Organizational behavior.
Assistant Professor
Max O. Stephenson, Jr., Ph.D. (U. Va.). Public budgeting, Policy development.
Religious Studies
Professor
Manfred O. Meitzen, Ph.D. (Harvard U.)— Chairperson. Contemporary theology, New Testament
studies, Ethics.
Associate Professor
Alan W. Jenks, Th.D. (Harvard U.). Old Testament language and literature, Middle Eastern
studies.
'Associate Member
416 GRADUATE FACULTY
Sociology and Anthropology
Professors
Richard A. Ball, Ph.D. (Ohio St. U.)— Sociology. Deviant behavior, Criminology, Social
psychology.
Jiri T. Kolaja, Ph.D. (Cornell U.)— Sociology. Complex organization, Social planning, Russia.
Arnold J. Levine,* Ph.D. (Columbia U.)— Sociology. Health and illness, Urban, ESOP.
John D. Photiadis, Ph.D. (Cornell U.)— Sociology. Social change, Research methods, Appalachia.
Jerold M. Starr, Ph.D. (Brandeis U.)— Sociology. Life course, Social movements, Sociology of
knowledge.
Roger B. Trent, Ph.D. (U. Wash.)— Sociology. Social demography, Research methods, Applied.
Associate Professors
Ronald C. Althouse, Ph.D. (U. Minn.)— Sociology. Theory, Work, Occupational safety and health.
Robert D. Foss, Ph.D. (U. Nev.)— Sociology. Social psychology, Data analysis, American family.
David S. Hall, Ph.D. (U. Ky.)— Sociology. Medical, health care delivery.
Ann L. Paterson, Ph.D. (Mich. St. U.)— Sociology. Chairperson. Education, Sex roles,
Socialization.
Joseph J. Simoni,* Ph.D. (U. Notre Dame) — Sociology. Community, Ethnic relations, Health
communication.
Assistant Professor
Lawrence T. Nichols, Ph.D. (Boston C.)— Sociology. Criminology, Social change, Theory.
Kenyon R. Stebbins, Ph.D. (Mich. St. U.)— Anthropology. Medical anthropology, Latin America,
Political economy of history.
College of Business and Economics
Accounting
Professors
Jay H. Coats, Ph.D. (U. Pitt). Cost/managerial accounting, Microcomputers in accounting,
Accounting education.
Robert S. Maust,* M.S. (WVU)— Chairperson. Financial accounting, Accounting theory,
Managerial and cost accounting.
Adolph Neidermeyer,* Ph.D. (U. Iowa). Federal and state income taxation, Estate planning,
Financial accounting.
Gail A. Shaw,* Ph.D. (U. Mo.). Financial accounting theory, Auditing, Federal and state estate
taxation.
G. Stevenson Smith, Ph.D. (U. Ark.). Not-for-profit and governmental accounting, Managerial
accounting, Federal and state estate taxation.
Pierre L. Titard,* Ph.D. (LSU). Financial accounting, Managerial accounting, Accounting
education.
Associate Professors
Ann B. Pushkin,* Ph.D. (VPI&SU). Auditing, Accounting information systems, Microcomputer
applications.
Neil A. Wilner,* Ph.D. (Ohio St. U.). Managerial accounting, Controllership quantitative
application.
Economics
Professors
Donald R. Adams, Jr., Ph.D. (U. Penn). American economic history, European economic history,
Economic development.
Vance Q. Alvis, Ph.D. (U. Va.). Money and banking, International economics, Public finance.
Lewis C. Bell,* Ph.D. (U. Ky.). Public finance, Economics education.
Jagdeep Bhandari, Ph.D. (SMU). International finance, International trade, Economic
development.
Robert D. Britt,* Ph.D. (U. Colo.). Managerial economics, History of economic thought, Economic
history.
Ming-jeng Hwang, Ph.D. (Tex. A&M U.). General theory, Urban and regional economics,
Mathematical economics.
Andrew W. Isserman, Ph.D. (U. Penn). Regional economics.
Arthur Kraft, Ph.D. (SUNY). Financial institutions, Human resources economics, Money and
banking.
Kern O. Kymn, Ph.D. (U. Chicago). General theory, Mathematical economics, Econometrics.
Patrick C. Mann, Ph.D. (Ind. U.)— Chairperson. Utility economics, Industrial organization.
James H. Thompson, Ph.D. (U. Pitt)— Emeritus.
Tom S. Witt,* Ph.D. (Wash. U.— St. Louis). Econometrics, Energy economics, Regional economics.
*Associate Member
GRADUATE FACULTY 417
Associate Professors
Brian J. Cushing, Ph.D. (U. Md.). Urban and regional economics, Econometrics, Public finance.
Stuart Dorsey, Ph.D. (Wash. U.— St. Louis). Labor economics, Monetary theory, Fiscal policy.
Clifford B. Hawley, Ph.D. (Duke U.). Labor economics, Microeconomics theory, Econometrics.
Douglas Mitchell, Ph.D. (Princeton U.). Monetary theory, Macroeconomics theory.
Assistant Professors
Christopher Cornwell,* Ph.D. (Mich. St. U.). Econometrics, Labor economics, Public finance.
Morteza Rahmatian,* Ph.D. (U. Wyo.). Resource economics, Environmental economics,
Microeconomic theory.
Peter Rupert,* Ph.D. (U. Rochester). Labor economics, Microeconomic theory, International
economics.
William Trumbull,* Ph.D. (U. N.C.). Public finance, Law and economics, Applied
microeconomics.
Finance
Professors
Arthur Kraft, Ph.D. (SUNY). Financial institutions, Human resource economics, Money and
banking.
Associate Professors
Howard Brewer, Ph.D. (U. Iowa). Capital markets and institutions, Investments.
William B. Riley, Ph.D. (U. Ark.)— Chairperson. Investments, Capital markets and institutions.
Terry L. Rose, Ph.D. (U. 111.). Insurance, Real estate.
Frederick C. Scherr, Ph.D. (U. Pitt)— Chairperson. Corporate finance, Capital markets and
institutions.
Paul J. Speaker, Ph.D. (Purdue U.). Financial institutions, Micro-foundations of microeconomics.
Assistant Professor
Ashok Abbott, Ph.D. (Va. Tech.). Financial management, Corporate restructuring.
Industrial and Labor Relations
Professors
Neil S. Bucklew, Ph.D. (U. Wise.)— President. Industrial relations, Collective bargaining, Labor
management relations.
Robert L. Decker,* Ph.D. (Carnegie-Mellon U.). Industrial psychology, EEO-affirmative action
testing and validation interviewing.
Randyl D. Elkin, Ph.D. (Iowa St. U.)— Chairperson. Collective bargaining, Arbitration,
Healthcare bargaining.
Richard W. Humphreys,* Ph.D. (U. Wise). Labor-management cooperation, Benefits, Work
measurement.
Robert Miller,* Ph.D. (Ohio St. U.)— Adjunct. Labor management cooperation, Quality of work
life, Evaluation of planned social change.
Dietrich L. Schaupp, D.B.A. (U. Ky.). Organizational performance, Organizational development,
Labor-management cooperation.
Fred A. Zeller, Jr., Ph.D. (Ohio St. U.). Labor-management relations, Economic development,
Human resources.
Associate Professors
John Grasso, Ph.D. (Ohio St. U.). Vocational education programs, Mine training and certification,
Management information systems.
Wilbur J. Smith,* M.S. (U. Wise). Human resource economics, Employment and training
programs, Labor force.
Owen A. Tapper,* M.S. (U. Wise). Trade unionism, Safety and health, Labor management
cooperation.
Management
Professors
Jack Fuller, Ph.D. (U. Ark.). Heuristic decision making, Production planning and control,
Systems analysis and design.
Dietrich L. Schaupp, D.B.A. (U. Ky.). Organizational performance, Organizational development,
Labor-management cooperation.
Daniel F. Twomey,* D.B.A. (Kent St. U.). Small business/industrial, Conflict management,
Performance appraisal, Organizational change.
* Associate Member
418 GRADUATE FACULTY
Associate Professors
Thomas L. Blaskovics,* Ph.D. (U. Wise). Management information systems, Psychological
testing.
John Harpell,* D.B.A. (Ga. St. U.). Operations research, Mentorship, Production management.
Ali Mansour, Ph.D. (U. Ga.]. Management information systems, Operations management,
Management science.
Assistant Professors
Joyce Beggs,* Ph.D. (U. Tenn.). Strategic management, Not-for-profit management, Labor
relations.
Sevket Gunter,* M.A. (Syracuse U.). Production scheduling, Bidding, Management science.
Michael Lane,* D.B.A. (Memphis St. U.). Business policy strategic planning, Small business
planning.
Shi-Chu Lin,* Ph.D. (U. Rochester). Production planning, Scheduling, Inventory control.
Linda Sypolt,* J.D. (WVU). Copyright patents, Labor law.
Marketing
Professors
Cyril M. Logar,* D.B.A. (Kent St. U.)— Associate Dean. Health care marketing, Strategic
marketing planning, Marketing research.
Associate Professors
Robert Cook, D.B.A. (Kent St. U.). Sales management.
Terry Wilson, Ph.D. (Mich. St. U.). Services marketing, Marketing planning.
Assistant Professors
Paula F. Bone,* Ph.D. (U. S.C.). Consumer behavior, Promotion, Marketing research.
Gordon McClung,* M.B.A. (WVU). Consumer behavior and advertising, Marketing strategy and
policy.
Thomas Ponzurick,* D.B.A. (Memphis St. U.). Services marketing, Transportation, Health care
and entertainment-related services.
College of Creative Arts
Art
Professors
Robert P. Anderson, M.F.A. (Alfred U.). Ceramics.
Urban Couch, M.F.A. (Cranbrook Acad. Art)— Chairperson. Director of Art Collections. Painting.
Ben F. Freedman, M.A. (U. Ariz.). Painting, Drawing.
Clifford A. Harvey, B.F.A. (Mpls. C. Art & Des.). Graphic design.
Margaret O. Lucas,* D.Ed. (Penn St. U.) — Dean. Art education.
Margaret T. Rajam, Ph.D. (U. Mich.). Art history.
Associate Professors
Eve Faulkes,* M.F.A. (R.I. Sc. Design). Graphic design.
John B. Schultz,* Ph.D. (U. Pitt). Art history.
William J. Thomas, Ph.D. (Penn St. U.). Art education.
Assistant Professor
Carmon Colangelo,* M.F.A. (LSU). Printmaking.
Music
Professors
John Beall, Ph.D. (Eastman Sch. of Mus.). Composition, Theory.
Thomas S. Brown, Ph.D. (Northwestern U.)— Coordinator, Music Education. Music education,
Vocal music, Appalachian music.
Jon Crain. Voice.
Philip J. Faini, M.M. (WVU). Percussion, African music.
Herman Godes, M.M. (Latvian St. Mus. Acad.). Piano.
William P. Haller, D.M.A. (N. Tex. St. U.). F.A.G.O. Organ, Theory.
Barton Hudson, Ph.D. (Ind. U.)— Director of Graduate Studies. Musicology, Renaissance music,
Harpsichord.
Gerald Lefkoff, Ph.D. (Cath. U. Am.)— Coordinator, Theory-Composition. Theory, Electronic
music, Viola.
James E. Miltenberger, D.M.A. (Eastman Sch. of Mus.)— Coordinator, Keyboard Instruments.
Piano, Piano repertoire, Jazz.
Richard E. Powell, M.Ed. (S.W. Tex. St. C.)— Coordinator, Brass-Percussion Instruments. Low
brass instruments, Pedagogy.
'Associate Member
GRADUATE FACULTY 419
William Skidmore, M.M. (U. 111.) — Coordinator, Stringed Instruments.
William Taylor, M.M. (Ind. U.) — Coordinator, Voice-Opera. Voice.
Gilbert Trythall, D.M.A. (Cornell U.). Composition, Electronic music, Theory.
Don G. Wilcox, M.A. (Cal. St. C— L. Bch.)— Director of Bands. Conducting.
Cecil B. Wilson, Ph.D. (Case West. Res. U.)— Chairperson. Musicology, 19th century music,
Orchestration.
Associate Professors
Joyce Catalfano,* M.M. (Ithaca C.) — Coordinator, Woodwind Instruments. Flute.
John C. Hunt,* M.M. (Cath. U. Am.). Bassoon, Theory.
Janis-Rozena Peri,* M.M. (Miami U.). Voice. Vocal diction.
Christopher Wilkinson, Ph.D. (Rutgers U .)— Coordinator, Music History-Literature. Musicology,
Baroque music, 20th century music.
Assistant Professors
John E. Crotty,* Ph.D. (Eastman Sch. of Mus.). Theory, Analysis, Composition.
Christine B. Kefferstan,* D.M.A. (U. Cincinnati). Piano, Group piano.
John F. Weigand,* M.M. (Northwestern U .)— Coordinator, Undergraduate Admissions. Clarinet,
Chamber music.
Eve Anne Wilkes,* D.M.A. (WVU). Voice, Vocal pedagogy.
John R. Winkler,* M.M. (Northwestern U.). Trumpet, Theory, Chamber music.
Theatre
Professors
Angela D'Ambrosia, B.F.A. (Carnegie-Mellon U.). Acting.
Frank Gagliano, M.F.A. (Columbia U.)— Claude Worthington Benedum Professor. Playwriting.
Charles D. Neel, Ph.D. (Cornell U.). Musical theatre.
John C. Whitty, Ph.D. (U. Iowa). Theatre history.
Judith W. B. Williams, Ph.D. (U. Mich.)— Chairperson. Directing-Acting.
Associate Professors
W. James Brown, M.F.A. (U. Wash.). Theatre design.
Michelle Guillot, M.F.A. (Yale Sch. Drama). Theatre design.
Edward T. Herendeen,* M.F.A. (Ohio U.). Acting.
Joann Spencer Siegrist, M.F.A. (U. Ga.). Puppetry, Creative drama.
Assistant Professors
Linda D. Milian,* M.F.A. (Rutgers U.). Costuming.
Anne Quirke,* B.F.A. (U. Wise— Milwaukee). Voice-Speech.
Deborah Tulchin,* M.F.A. (NYU). Theatre design.
Susan Vagedes,* M.F.A. (U. N.C.— Greensboro). Acting-Movement-Combat.
School of Dentistry
Professors
Henry J. Bianco, D.D.S. (U. Md.)— Chairperson. Prosthodontics. Patient management and
treatment.
W. Robert Biddington, D.D.S. (U. Md.)— Dean. Endodontics, Educational administration.
Jerry E. Bouquot, D.D.S. (U. Minn.)— Chairperson. Oral pathology, Tumor epidemiology.
William L. Graham,* D.D.S. (U. Md.)— Chairperson. Oral diagnosis and radiology, Information
systems.
Robert W. Graves,* D.D.S. (WVU)— Chairperson. Oral and maxillofacial surgery, Pharmacy,
Drug therapy and pharmacology.
James A. Griffin, D.D.S. (Baylor U.). Endodontics, Pulpal trauma.
Barbara K. Komives,* M.S. (Ohio St. U.)— Chairperson. Dental hygiene, Educational
administration.
Harry L. Legan, D.D.S. (U. Minn.)— Chairperson. Orthodontics, Dental facial orthopedics.
William R. McCutcheon,* D.D.S. (WVU)— Chairperson. Dental public health, Behavioral
dentistry.
James E. Overberger, D.D.S. (U. Pitt). Materials science, Prosthodontics.
Arthur E. Skidmore, D.D.S. (WVU)— Chairperson. Endodontics, Pulpal anatomy.
John T. Welch,* D.D.S. (U. Md.)— Chairperson. Hospital dentistry, Hospital protocol and
evaluation.
Associate Professors
Christina B. DeBiase, Ed.D. (WVU). Dental hygiene, Educational administration.
Sanford J. Fenton, D.D.S. (NYU). Pedodontics, Management of disabled patient.
Catherine E. Graves,* M.A. (WVU). Dental hygiene, Computer application.
*Associate Member
420 GRADUATE FACULTY
Marcia A. Krouse, M.S. (U. Ky.). Dental hygiene, Dental materials.
Carol A. Sherrill, M.S. (U. Mich.). Dental hygiene, Educational administration.
College of Engineering
Chemical Engineering
Professors
Richard C. Bailie, Ph.D. (U. Iowa). Biomass pyrolysis, Fluidization, Thermal processes.
Dady B. Dadyburjor, Ph.D. (U. Del.). Catalysis, Reaction engineering, Micellization.
Harold V. Fairbanks, M.S. (Mich. St. U.)— Emeritus.
Alfred F. Galli, M.S. (WVU)-Ementus.
Joseph D. Henry, Jr., Ph.D. (U. Mich.)— Chairperson. Separation processing: Solid/liquid
separations, Biochemical separations, Surface and colloid phenomena.
Hisashi O. Kono, Dr.Engr. (Kyushu U.). Fluidization, Powder technology, Reaction engineering.
Associate Professors
Eugene V. Cilento, Ph.D. (U. Cincinnati). Physiological transport phenomena, Biomedical
engineering, Image analysis and mathematical modeling.
Joseph A. Shaeiwitz, Ph.D. (Carnegie-Mellon U.). Biochemical separations, Interfacial
phenomena, Mass transfer.
Alfred H. Stiller, Ph.D. (U. Cincinnati). Chemistry (physical/inorganic chemistry), Solution
chemistry, Coal liquefaction.
Ray Y. K. Yang, Ph.D. (Princeton U.). Chemical reaction engineering, Biochemical engineering,
Coal gasification, Plant cell culture, Modeling and simulation.
John W. Zondlo, Ph.D. (Carnegie-Mellon U.). Heat transfer, Coal enhancement and utilization.
Assistant Professors
Richard Turton, Ph.D. (Ore. St. U.). Fluidization, Heat transfer, Reaction kinetics, Chemical
process design.
Wallace B. Whiting, Ph.D. (U. Calif.— Berkeley). Thermodynamics. Fluid-phase equilibria,
Chemical process design.
Civil Engineering
Professors
Ronald W. Eck, Ph.D. (Clemson U.). Transportation engineering, Traffic, Highways.
W. Joseph Head, Ph.D. (Purdue U.). Waste utilization, Highway and airfield pavements, Concrete.
GangaRao V. S. Hota, Ph.D. (N.C. St. U.). Mathematical modeling of engineering systems, Bridge
engineering, Prefabricated housing.
Charles R. Jenkins, Ph.D. (Okla. St. U.). Water quality, Water treatment, Wastewater treatment.
Larry D. Luttrell, Ph.D. (Cornell U.). Analysis and design of structures/steel, composite slabs,
Metal buildings, Case studies of failures.
Lyle K. Moulton, Ph.D. (WVU)— Chairperson. Soil properties and behavior, Groundwater and
seepage, Foundation engineering.
Edward S. Neumann, Ph.D. (Northwestern U.). Transportation engineering and planning,
Automated people movers.
William A. Sack, Ph.D. (Mich. St. U.). Physical, chemical, biological waste treatment, Industrial
waste processing, recovery.
Mumtaz A. Usmen, Ph.D. (WVU). Soils and foundations, Highway materials, Waste disposal and
utilization.
Associate Professors
Darrell R. Dean, Jr., Ph.D. (Purdue U.). Land surveying, Mapping, Photogrammetry.
Robert N. Eli, Ph.D. (U. Iowa). Hydrology, Hydraulics, Computer graphics.
James S. Gidley, Ph.D. (Harvard U.). Water resources planning, Solid and hazardous wastes,
Water and sewer systems.
Donald D. Gray, Ph.D. (Purdue U.). Fluid flow, Computational fluid mechanics.
Grant T. Halvorsen, Ph.D. (U. 111.). Structural engineering, Behavior and design of reinforced
concrete structures, Performance of structures.
H. Jayalath Siriwardane, Ph.D. (VPI&SU). Geotechnical engineering/geomechanics, Finite
element method, Computer applications.
Constantine C. Spyrakos, Ph.D. (U. Minn.). Dynamics of structures, Soil-structure interaction,
Numerical methods of analysis (BEM, FEM).
Assistant Professor
John J. Bowders, Jr., Ph.D. (U. Tex.). Geotechnical engineering, Environmental geotechnology.
Electrical and Computer Engineering
Professors
Wils L. Cooley, Ph.D. (Carnegie-Mellon U.). Biomedical engineering, Electronics,
Instrumentation, Coal mine power systems, Electrical safety, Ground beds.
'Associate Member
GRADUATE FACULTY 421
Ronald L. Klein, Ph.D. (U. Iowa)— Chairperson. Automatic control, Stochastic control, Estimation
theory and applications, Linear system theory, System identification.
Wasfy B. Mikhael, Ph.D. (Concordia U., Can.). Active filtering, Signal processing,
Communication circuits/systems, Computer-aided analysis and design.
Roy S. Nutter, Jr., Ph.D. (WVU). Expert systems and artificial intelligence, Microprocessor-based
environmental monitoring systems, Microprocessor control of energy management, Computer
architecture, Digital systems communications.
Craig S. Sims, Ph.D. (SMU). Signal processing, Estimation theory, Control systems, System
identification, Stochastic control, Seismic applications of signal processing and estimation
theory.
Nelson S. Smith, Jr.,* D.Sc. (U. Pitt). Physical electronics, Solid-state devices, Analog electronics
systems, Semiconductor sensors, Dielectric absorption currents, Electrets.
Robert E. Swartwout, Ph.D. (U. 111.). Digital electronic and computer systems, Computer
arithmetic circuits, Multivalued (non-binary) logic systems, Minicomputer and microprocessor
applications.
Associate Professors
Mohammad A. Choudhry, Ph.D. (Purdue U.). Power system control and analog simulation, DC
transmission, Dynamic and transient stability studies, Estimation and parameter identification.
Mark A. Jerabek, Ph.D. (Purdue U.). Acoustics waves in solids, Signal processing of acoustic
waves, Ultrasonic imaging (tomography), Electromagnetics, Digital signal processing.
Joseph Joseph, Ph.D. (Indian Inst, of Sci.). Artificial intelligence and its application to medical
diagnosis, Computer architecture, Data flow systems, Petri nets.
Robert L. McConnell, Ph.D. (U. Ky.). Linear and digital electronic circuits and systems,
Electronic instrumentation and applications, Power measurement and control for transportation
systems.
Assistant Professors
Charles J. Alajajian, Ph.D. (U. 111.). Computational methods for the analysis and design of
electronic circuits, Passive/active filter design, Digital signal processing.
Ali Feliachi, Ph.D. (Ga. Tech.). Control systems theory, Time-delay systems, Large-scale
systems, Adaptive control, Power systems dynamics and digital simulation.
Alok Kumar, Ph.D. (U. Leeds). Computer-aided control system analysis and design, Large-scale
systems, Stochastic control, Estimation theory and applications, Two-dimensional digital signal
processing.
Nigel T. Middleton, Ph.D. (U. Witwatersrand, S. Africa). Dynamic system simulation, Automatic
and stochastic control theory and applications, Industrial process control, Energy management
systems.
Afzel Noore, Ph.D. (WVU). Fault tolerant memory design, Faulty diagnosis of computers,
Reduced order logic testing, Faculty location, VLSI design.
Manos Roumeliotis, Ph.D. (VPI&SU). Computer architecture, Logic simulation, Parallel
processing, Computer systems, Fault tolerant computing, Fault simulation.
Industrial Engineering
Professors
Jack Byrd, Jr., Ph.D. (WVU). Operations research, Production systems, Entrepreneurial studies.
Robert C. Creese, Ph.D. (Penn St. U.). Manufacturing processes systems, Foundry engineering,
Cost engineering.
Robert D. Fowler,* M.S. I.E. (Ga. Tech). Work measurement, Materials handling, Human factors.
L. Ted Moore, Ph.D. (Rice U.). Operations research, Linear programming, Production/operations
management.
Ralph W. Plummer, Ph.D. (WVU)— Chairperson. Human factors, System safety, Industrial
hygiene.
Terrence J. Stobbe, Ph.D. (U. Mich.). Ergonomics, System safety, Industrial hygiene.
Curtis J. Tompkins, Ph.D. (Ga. Tech)— Dean. Operations management, Statistical models,
Strategic planning.
Associate Professors
Rashpal S. Ahluwalia, Ph.D. (U. W. Ontario). Automation, CAD/CAM, Robotics.
Wafik H. Iskander, Ph.D. (Tex. Tech U.). Operations research, Simulation, Applied statistics.
Assistant Professors
Majid Jaraiedi, Ph.D. (U. Mich.). Quality control and applied statistics, Information system.
German Nunez, Ph.D. (Tex. A&M U.). Engineering management, Innovation management, Work
analysis.
Warren R. Myers, Ph.D. (WVU). Ergonomics, Industrial hygiene and Safety engineering.
*Associate Member
422 GRADUATE FACULTY
Mechanical and Aerospace Engineering
Professors
Richard A. Bajura, P.E., Ph.D. (U. N. Dame). Fluids engineering.
Jerome B. Fanucci, Ph.D. (Penn St. U.). Fluid dynamics, Aerodynamics, Flight testing,
Magnetohydrodynamics, Multiphase flow.
Rory Flemmer, Ph.D. (U. Natal, S. Africa). Fluidized bed combustion, Particle dynamics.
Eric K. Johnson, P.E., Ph.D. (U. Wise). Heat transfer, Combustion, Thermodynamics.
John T. Jurewicz, Ph.D. (Wash. St. U.)— Associate Dean. Experimental fluid mechanics, Gas-solid
flows.
John Kuhlman, Ph.D. (Case West. Res. U.). Fluid mechanics.
Thomas R. Long, Ed.D. (WVU)— Associate Dean. Engineering design.
John L. Loth, P.E., Ph.D. (U. Toronto). Aerospace systems, Combustion.
Donald W. Lyons, Ph.D. (Ga. Tech.) — Chairperson. Manufacturing systems engineering,
instrumentation.
John E. Sneckenberger, P.E., Ph.D. (WVU). Mechanical design and automation.
Emil J. Steinhardt, P.E., Ph.D. (U. Pitt). Engineering systems design, Energy management.
Associate Professors
Ismail Celik, Ph.D. (U. Iowa). Fluids engineering.
Nigel Clark, Ph.D. (U. Natal, S. Africa). Fluidized bed combustion, Particle dynamics.
Russell K. Dean, Ph.D. (WVU) — Director, Graduate Programs. Engineering mechanics.
Kenneth H. Means, P.E., Ph.D. (WVU). Kinematics, Dynamics and stability, Friction and wear.
G. Michael Palmer, Ph.D. (WVU). Instrumentation, Microprocessor applications.
Nithi Ti Sivaneri, Ph.D. (Stanford U.). Numerical methods (FEM, BEM), Aeroelasticity, Fracture
mechanics, Structural dynamics.
Charles Stanley, P.E., Ph.D. (WVU). Bioengineering, Microprocessor applications.
Wallace Venable, P.E., Ed.D. (WVU). Engineering mechanics.
Assistant Professors
Larry Banta, Ph.D. (Ga. Tech.). Robotics, Automation.
Mayank Chattree, Ph.D. (U. Miami — Fla.). Fluids engineering, Numerical computation.
Sunil Kale, Ph.D. (Stanford U.)— Research. Fluid mechanics, Energy conversion, Thermal
sciences.
Bruce Kang, Ph.D. (U. Wash.). Solid mechanics.
Margaret J. Lyell, Ph.D. (U. Sou. Calif.). Fluid mechanics.
Gary J. Morris, Ph.D. (WVU). Experimental fluid mechanics. Aerodynamics.
Victor Mucino, D.E. (U. Wise— Mil.). Engineering design.
Ramamurthy Nagarajan, Ph.D. (Yale). Combustion and heat transfer.
Jacky Prucz, Ph.D. (Ga. Tech.). Structural dynamics, Composite materials, Experimental
mechanics.
James E. Smith, Ph.D. (WVU). Mechanical design.
King H. Yang, Ph.D. (Wayne St.). Bioengineering and solid mechanics.
Genetics and Developmental Biology
Professors
David F. Blaydes, Ph.D. (Ind. U.). Plant genetics, Plant physiology, Cytokinins.
Donald F. Butcher,* Ph.D. (Iowa St. U.). Population genetics.
Roy L. Butcher, Ph.D. (Iowa St. U.). Reproductive physiology.
Linda Butler, Ph.D. (U. Ga.). Entomology, Forest entomology, Pest management.
Bruce Caterson, Ph.D. (Monash U., Australia). Proteoglycan structure and regulation.
Nyles Charon, Ph.D. (U. Minn.). Medical bacteriology, Genetics and physiology of spirochetes.
John E. Hall,* Ph.D. (Purdue U.). Parasitology, Bacterial endosymbionts.
Walter J. Kaczymarczyk, Ph.D. (Hahnemann Med. C). Biochemical genetics, Biochemistry.
Edward C. Keller, Ph.D. (Penn St. U.). Ecological genetics, Population genetics.
Michael R. Miller, Ph.D. (Penn St. U.). DNA metabolism.
Joginder Nath, Ph.D. (U. Wise.)— Chairperson. Cytogenetics, Evolution, Mutagenetics.
Tong-man Ong, Ph.D. (111. St. U.)— Adjunct. Mutagenesis toxicology.
Robert S. Pore, Ph.D. (U. Calif.). Mycology, Pathobiology, Mycoses.
Dennis C. Quinlan, Ph.D. (U. Rochester). Cellular/molecular biology, Cell membranes, Cancer
biology.
Randall W. Reyer, Ph.D. (Yale U.). Cellular metaplasia in regeneration of lens and neural retina.
Martin W. Schein, Sc.D. (J. Hopkins U.). Animal behavior, Circadian rhythms.
William V. Thayne, Ph.D. (U. 111.). Statistics, Statistical genetics.
George V. Tryfiates, Ph.D. (Rutgers U.). Nutritional oncology.
'Associate Member
GRADUATE FACULTY 423
Valentin Ulrich, Ph.D. (Rutgers U.). Biochemical genetics, Plant breeding.
Knox Van Dyke, Ph.D. (St. Louis U.). Chemiluminescence in human cells, Effects of
antiinflammatory drugs on chemiluminescence.
Stanley Wearden, Ph.D. (Cornell U.). Biometrics, Statistical genetics, Population biology.
Associate Professors
Vincent F. Gerencser, Ph.D. (U. Ky.). Dental microbiology, Haemugglutinin of Bacteroides
species.
Henry F. Mengoli, Ph.D. (Cath. U. Am.). Medical bacteriology, Bacterial Fc receptors, Intestinal
colonization.
Ethel C. Montiegel,* M.S. (WVU). Developmental biology.
Dennis O. Overman, Ph.D. (U. Mich.). Teratology, Organ culture.
William G. Sorenson, Ph.D. (U. Tex.)— Adjunct. Immunology, Immunotoxic reactions to grain
dust.
Leah A. Williams, Ph.D. (WVU). Developmental biology, Vertebrate anatomy, Lens regeneration.
David B. Yelton, Ph.D. (U. Mass.). Microbial genetics, Bacteriophage, Molecular genetics.
Assistant Professors
Karen S. Katula, Ph.D. (Northwestern U.). Cellular/molecular biology, Molecular genetics.
James B. McGraw, Ph.D. (Duke U.). Plant ecology/genetics, Plant physiology.
Eugene K. Vrana, Ph.D. (LSU). Nueromolecular biology.
College of Human Resources and Education
Clinical and Counseling Division
Counseling Psychology and Rehabilitation
Professors
L. Sherilyn Cormier, Ph.D. (Purdue U.)— Counseling Psychology. Coordinator— Practicum and
Internship Training, Counseling psychology training and clinical supervision models. Advanced
psychotherapeutic techniques.
William H. Cormier, Ed.D. (U. Tenn)— Counseling Psychology. Director— Counseling Psychology
Training Program. Counseling psychology research. Assessment of dysfunctional couples and
families. Cognitive-behavioral therapy.
James DeLo,* Ph.D. (U. Pitt)— Counseling. Multi-cultural transaction, Biofeedback.
Ranjit K. Majumder, Ph.D. (U. Okla.)— Rehabilitation. Psychology, Rehabilitation.
Robert P. Marinelli, Ed.D. (Penn St. U.)— Coordinator, Master's Degree Program. Rehabilitation
counseling and psychology, vocational counseling and psychology, mental health counseling.
Robert L. Masson, Ed.D. (SUNY)— Rehabilitation. Group counseling.
Jeffrey K. Messing, Ed.D. (Syracuse U.)— Division Director, Counseling Psychology Chairperson.
Vocational psychology, Consulting models, Program design.
Joseph B. Moriarty,* Ph.D. (Fordham U.)— Rehabilitation. Psychology, Rehabilitation.
David J. Srebalus, Ed.D. (Ind. U.)— Counseling Psychology. Vocational psychology, career
counseling, counseling and psychotherapy theories.
Roy H. Tunick, Ed.D. (W. N. Colo. U.)— Rehabilitation. Personality and vocational assessment,
mental health and rehab counseling, work tolerance screening, vocational psychology.
Michael T. Yura, Ph.D. (Ohio St. U.)— Counseling. Child play therapy, Handicapped children,
Vocational development.
Associate Professors
Kathryn B. Greever,* Ed.D. (WVU)— Rehabilitation. Grant development.
Edward E. Jacobs, Ph.D. (Fla. St. U.)— Counseling. Group counseling, Marriage and family.
Lecturer
Barbara T. Judy,* M.A. (WVU)— Rehabilitation. Medical and psychological aspects of disability,
Job accomodations.
Speech Pathology and Audiology
Professors
Mary Ellen Tekieli Koay, Ph.D. (U. Okla.)— Chairperson. Speech Pathology. Cleft palate,
Neurophysiology, Neuropathologies.
Norman J. Lass, Ph.D. (Purdue U.)— Speech Pathology. Speech perception, Speech acoustics.
Dennis M. Ruscello, Ph.D. (U. Ariz.)— Speech Pathology. Language, Articulation, Clinical
supervision.
Kenneth O. St. Louis, (U. Minn.)— Speech Pathology. Fluency, Voice, Clinical supervision.
Charles M. Woodford, Ph.D. (Syracuse U.)— Audiology. Audiological evaluation, Industrial and
environmental audiology, Clinical supervision.
*Associate Member
424 GRADUATE FACULTY
Associate Professor
Carolyn P. Atkins,* Ed.D. (WVU)— Speech Pathology. Speech improvement, Clinical supervision.
Assistant Professors
Conrad Lundeen, Ph.D. (U. Iowa)— Audiology. Aural rehabilitation, Central auditory disorders,
Clinical supervision.
Linda I. Shuster, Ph.D. (Ohio St. U.)— Speech Pathology. Aphasia, Language, Clinical
supervision.
Special Education
Professors
J. E. Clements, Ed.D. (U. Kans.). Behavioral disorders, Learning disabilities.
Thomas P. Lombardi, Ed.D. (U. Ariz.). Learning disabilities, Mental retardation.
Gabriel A. Nardi,* Ph.D. (U. Wise). Behavioral disorders, Mental retardation, Geriatrics.
John S. Piatt, Ed.D. (U. Kans.). Learning disabilities, Behavior disorders.
Wilfred D. Wienke, Ed.D. (U. No. Colo.)— Chairperson. Professional development, Mental
retardation.
Associate Professors
Louise A. Kaczmarek, Ph.D. (U. Rochester). Early Intervention— Special Education. Language
development and disorders, Severe/profound handicaps, Behavior analysis.
Annette U. Shuck, Ed.D. (WVU). Mental retardation, Learning disabilities, Behavioral disorders.
Diane T. Woodrum, Ed.D. (WVU). Mental retardation, Behavioral disorders, Learning
disabilities.
Assistant Professors
Bonnie Joyce,* Ph.D. (U. Fla.)— Research. Applied behavior analysis. Prevention of disabilities.
Barbara L. Ludlow,* Ed.D. (WVU)— Research. Severe/profound handicaps, Clinical supervision.
Luise B. Savage,* Ed.D. (WW)— Clinical. Gifted, Clinical supervision.
Edna R. Vaughn,* Ed.D. (WVU)— Clinical. Learning disabilities, Education administration.
Ronald K. Wolf,* Ph.D. (U. Kans.)— Research. Learning disabilities, Administration.
Instructors
Sara Sherburne,* M.A. (U. Kans.)— Visiting. Clinical supervision.
Cheryl Wienke,* M.S. (U. N. Colo.)— Clinical. Clinical supervision.
Lecturers
Lisa Bloom,* M.A. (WVU). Clinical supervision.
Judy Donaldson,* M.A. (John Hopkins U.) — Visiting. Clinical supervision.
Jean Faieta,* M.A. (U. Calif.— Pa.). Clinical supervision.
Division of Education
Curriculum and Instruction
Professors
John L. Carline,* Ph.D. (Syracuse U.). Curriculum, Teacher behavior, Interpersonal relations.
John P. Helfeldt, Ph.D. (Syracuse U.j— Chairperson, Undergraduate Education. Reading
education, Reading/Learning disabilities, Organizing reading programs.
Boyd D. Holtan, Ed.D. (U. 111.). Mathematics education, Instructional strategies, Microcomputer
education.
Ronald V. Iannone, Ed.D. (Syracuse U.). Creative drama, Aesthetic education, Alternative
education.
Roy A. Moxley, Ph.D. (U. Mich.). Early childhood education, Early literacy, Educational
technology.
Patricia A. Obenauf, Ed.D. (U. Va.). Curriculum development, Science education, Conceptual
models.
Patricia K. Smith, Ed.D. (WVU). Recreational/clinical reading. Language arts.
Cynthia S. Sunal, Ph.D. (U. Md.)— Chairperson, Graduate Education. Social studies education,
Early childhood education, Cognitive development.
Dennis W. Sunal, Ph.D. (U. Mich.). Science education, Teacher education, Higher education.
Associate Professors
Barbara T. Bontempo, Ed.D. (Ind. U.). Teacher preparation, English education, Alternative
learning environments.
W. Scott Bower, Ph.D. (Ohio St. U.). Teaching strategies, Curriculum development, Teacher
effectiveness.
Ardeth M. Deay, Ph.D. (Cornell U.)— Program Coordinator, Elementary Education. Classroom
organization/management, Rural women in education, Peace education.
* Associate Member
GRADUATE FACULTY 425
Sandra Bradford DeCosta, Ed.D. (WVU). Early childhood education, General methods of
education, Multicultural/global education.
Perry D. Phillips, Ed.D. (WVU)— Division Director. Social studies education, Teacher education.
Martin Saltz, Ph.D. (U. Conn.). Developmental/Corrective reading, Computer applications in
language arts.
Assistant Professors
Mary E. Haas, Ed.D. (Ind. U.). Social studies education, Geographic education, Global education.
Betsy M. Hobbs,* Ed.D. (WVU). Content area reading, Reading motivation-children's literature,
Experimental programs for adults.
W. Michael Reed, Ed.D. (VPI&SU)— Coordinator, Microcomputer Lab. Microcomputer education,
English education, Cognition and writing.
Karen F. Thomas, Ph.D. (U. Pitt). Language/literacy education, Reading, Language arts.
Education Administration
Professors
John O. Andes, Ed.D. (U. Fla.)— Coordinator. Higher education law, Administration and
leadership.
Ronald Childress, Ed.D. (U. Tenn.)— Dean, WV COGS. Instructional management.
Meredith Freeman,* Ed.D. (U. Mo.)— WV COGS. Higher education administration.
Neil L. Gibbins, Ph.D. (Ohio St. U.)— Marshall U. Staff personnel, School plant, Public school
law.
Harold I. Goodwin, Ph.D. (U. Calif.). Personnel, Collective bargaining, Complex organizations.
Robert B. Hayes,* Ed.D. (U. Kans.)— Marshall U. Higher education administration, finance and
issues, Leadership.
Paul A. Leary, Ph.D. (U. Mass.)— WV COGS. Public school administration.
James A. Martin, Ed.D. (U. Tenn.). Superintendency, Business management, School law.
Richard F. Meckley, Ph.D. (Ohio St. U.). Education and finance, School business administration.
William G. Monahan, Ed.D. (Mich. St. U.). Administrative theory, Higher education issues.
Caroline Neal, Ed.D. (WVU)— Social foundations, Public school administration.
Bernard Queen,* Ph.D. (Ohio St. U.)— Marshal] U. Superintendency, School principalship, School
finance.
Powell E. Toth,* Ph.D. (Ohio St. U.)— WV COGS. Public school administration.
Ken M. Young,* Ed.D. (VPI&SU)— WV COGS. School principalship, Public school
administration.
Associate Professors
Ernest R. Goeres, Ph.D. (U. Iowa)— Associate Dean. Higher education finance, College business
management, Economics of higher education.
Billy K. Gordon,* Ed.D. (U. Ky.)— Marshall U. Supervision, General school administration.
JoAnn Hall,* Ed.D. (VPI&SU)— WV COGS. Supervision, Public school administration.
Richard A. Hartnett, Ed.D. (WVU)— Chairperson. Comparative higher education, Administrative
theory, Academic governance, Collective bargaining.
Helen M. Hazi, Ph.D. (U. Pitt). Legal issues impacting instructional supervision.
H. Edward Lilley, Ph.D. (Texas A&M U.). Educational facilities, School-community relations,
Principalship.
Edwin R. Smith, Ed.D. (WVU). Planning, Institutional research.
Ermel Stepp, Ed.D. (WVU)— Marshall U. Administrative theory, Leadership, Computers.
Rachel B. Tompkins, Ed.D. (Harvard U.)— Associate Vice President— Extension and Public
Service. Politics/economics of education, Policy analysis.
Jack E. Yeager,* Ed.D. (VPI&SU)— WV COGS. Higher education law, Politics of education, Public
school administration.
Assistant Professors
Nell C. Bailey,* Ed.D. (Ind. U.)— Dean of Student Affairs, Marshall U. Personnel administration,
Higher education.
Richard Hunt,* Ph.D. (Ohio St. U.). Public school administration.
Thomas S. Sloane,* Ph.D. (Ohio St. U.)— Adjunct. Assistant Dean, Student Life. College student,
Student development.
Foundations Division
Educational Foundations
Professor
Mary I. Yeazell, Ed.D. (U. 111.)— Program Coordinator. Philosophy of education, Moral
development, Foundations of education.
* Associate Member
426 GRADUATE FACULTY
Assistant Professor
Christine M. Shea, Ph.D. (U. 111.). History of education and American education, Political
economy and social foundations of education.
Educational Psychology
Professors
Benjamin H. Bailey, Ed.D. (U. Fla.). Educational psychology, research, measurement, and
evaluation.
Sheldon R. Baker, Ed.D. (Case West. Res. U.). Educational psychology, Psychological testing,
Research and statistical methodology.
Lawrence Fraley, Jr., Ed.D. (USC). Conceptual foundations of behaviorology, The science of
human behavior applied to instructional development and teaching.
John T. Grasso, Ph.D. (Ohio St. U.). Educational development, Research, Evaluation, Computers,
Information systems.
Rogers McAvoy, Ph.D. (Ind. U.). Education, Learning, Instruction.
James C. McCroskey, Ed.D. (Penn St. U.)— Adjunct. Communication theory, Instruction,
Avoidance, Organizational communication.
Anne H. Nardi, Ph.D. (WVU)— Division Director and Chairperson. Developmental psychology,
Problem solving, Adult learning.
John J. Paterson,* Ed.D. (Mich. St. U.)— Program Coordinator. Administrative and educational
services, Educational statistics and measurement.
Diane L. Reinhard, Ph.D. (Ohio St. U.)— Dean. Educational evaluation, Elementary education,
Educational research, statistics, and measurement.
Virginia P. Richmond, Ph.D. (U. Nebr.)— Adjunct. Instructional communication, Organizational
and interpersonal communication, Communication apprehension.
Meng Shu Tseng, Ed.D. (Ind. U.). Vocational education, Multivariate statistics, Research
methodology.
Ernest A. Vargas, Ph.D. (U. Pitt). Behaviorology, Instructional design, Verbal behavior.
Julie S. Vargas, Ph.D. (Penn St. U.). Instructional design, Behavioral analysis, Microcomputers,
Verbal behavior.
Richard T. Walls, Ph.D. (Penn St. U.). Educational psychology, Human learning, Problem solving,
Vocational rehabilitation.
Associate Professors
Daniel E. Hursh, Ph.D. (U. Kans.). Developmental and child psychology, Instructional and
environmental design, Language development.
Floyd L. Stead,* Ed.D. (WVU). Education, Educational measurement, evaluation, research.
Assistant Professors
W. Michael Reed, Ed.D. (VPI&SU)— Adjunct. Microcomputer research, Writing research,
Cognition and writing.
Susan M. Rodman,* Ed.D. (WVU)— Adjunct. Computer and information systems, Statistical
methods.
Technology Education
Professors
Paul W. DeVore, Ph.D. (Penn St. U.). Technology education, Technology and community
development, Transportation systems.
David McCrory, Ph.D. (Case West. Res. U.)— Chairperson. Curriculum studies, Technology
transfer, Professional development.
Edward Pytlik, Ph.D. (Iowa St. U.). Technology education, Production systems, International
development.
Associate Professor
George Maughan, Ed.D. (WVU). Technology education, Communication and information
systems.
School of Journalism
Professors
John H. Boyer, Ph.D. (U. Mo.). Newspaper management, Media law, Women and media.
Charles F. Cremer, Ph.D. (U. Iowa). Broadcast journalism principles, Technologies and practices.
Hunter P. McCartney, Ph.D. (U. Penn). Public relations, Mass communications and society,
Journalism history.
Robert M. Ours, Ph.D. (C. Wm. & Mary). Journalism history, Magazine and news and feature
writing.
'Associate Member
GRADUATE FACULTY 427
William O. Seymour, M.A. (E. Tex. St. U.). Photojournalism.
Guy H. Stewart,* Ph.D. (U. 111.)— Dean. Journalism history, Mass communications and society,
Public relations.
Associate Professors
Harry W. Elwood, M.S. (Northwestern U.). News and feature writing.
Assistant Professors
Harry W. Ernst,* M.S.J. (Northwestern U.). Mass media, Writing, Institutional relations,
Publications.
Patricia C. Findley,* M.A. (Calif. St. U.J. Reporting, Editing, Production.
James C. Paty,* M.A. (U. Ala. J. News and feature writing, Production.
Pamela D. Yagle,* M.S.J. (WVU). Reporting, Language skills, High school publications.
Health Sciences Center Basic Sciences
Anatomy
Professors
William A. Beresford, D.Phil. (U. Oxford). Labeled lectins, Glycoproteins, Induced bone
formation.
Patrick I. Brown,* Ph.D. (S. 111. U.)— Marshall 17. Mammalian male reproductive and urinary
morphology and histochemistry.
David B. Burr, Ph.D. (U. Colo.). Studies on structure-function relationships in bone and age-
related bone and cartilage pathology, Primate locomotion and physical anthropology.
James L. Culberson, Ph.D. (Tulane U.J. Comparative vertebrate neuroanatomy of mammalian
somatosensory systems.
James D. Fix,* Ph.D. (Tubingen)— Marshall U. Neuropathology, Cytoarchitecture of CNS, Aging
in CNS.
Carlin A. Pinkstaff, Ph.D. (Emory U.). Histochemistry, especially comparative histology and
histochemistry of salivary glands.
Eric L. Radin, M.D. (Harvard U.). Joint and bone biomechanics, osteoarthrosis, fracture healing
and chondromalacid.
Frank D. Reilly, Ph.D. (U. Cincinnati). Neurohistochemical, biochemical, in vivo, and electron
microscopic studies of mechanisms regulating hepatic or splenic blood flow and metabolism in
conditions of health and disease.
Associate Professors
Mitchell L. Berk, Ph.D. (Geo. Wash. U.)— Marshall U. Hypothalamic pathways.
Eugene V. Cilento, Ph.D. (U. Cincinnati). Research. Quantitative in vivo microscopic studies of
hepatic microcirculatory transport phenomena.
Richard D. Dey, Ph.D. (Mich. St. U.). Distribution and function of neural mediators in the
airways and their role in asthma bronchitis and occupational related lung diseases.
Morton H. Friedman,* Ph.D. (U. Tenn.). Preprofessional advising, Educational administration,
Student affairs.
Rumy A. Hilloowala, Ph.D. (U. Ala.). History of medicine, Physical anthropology, Primatology
(craniofacial structure).
Dennis O. Overman, Ph.D. (U. Mich.). Experimental teratology, especially abnormal craniofacial
development, Organ culture.
Robert S. Pope,* Ph.D. (U. N. Dak.). Electron microscopic structural and cytochemical aspects of
intra- and intercellular development of mammalian female gamete under in vivo and in vitro
conditions.
Elizabeth R. Walker, Ph.D. (WVU). Electron microscopy and immunocytochemistry of
extracellular matrix components in connective tissue disease.
Ruu Tong Wang, Ph.D. (S. 111. U.)— Marshall U. Comparative neuroanatomy of centrifugal
pathway to retina, Postnatal neurogenesis in vomeronasal epithelium, TEM/SEM.
Assistant Professor
Gary E. Pickard, Ph.D. (U. Wise). Structural and functional organization of vertebrate circadian
systems.
Biochemistry
Professors
Diana S. Beattie, Ph.D. (U. Pitt)— Chairperson. Mitochondrial biogenesis, Mitochondrial
metabolism, Heme biosynthesis, Interrelationship of heme and protein synthesis.
James B. Blair, Ph.D. (U. Va.). Intermediary metabolism, Hormonal regulation of hepatic
carbohydrate metabolism.
* Associate Member
428 GRADUATE FACULTY
Fred R. Butcher, Ph.D. (Ohio St. U.). Hormone action, Regulation of exocytosis, Calcium.
William J. Canady, Ph.D. (Geo. Wash. U.). Enzyme kinetics.
Bruce Caterson, Ph.D. (Monash IL, Victoria, Australia). Proteoglycan structure and regulation.
John P. Durham, Ph.D. (Ohio St. U.). Control of cell proliferation.
Charles L. Harris, Ph.D. (U. 111.). Structure and function of transfer RNA, RNA synthesis in
mammalian cells.
Rolf F. Kletzien, Ph.D. (U. Wise). Eukaryotic molecular biology, Regulation of cell growth.
Frederick }. Lotspeich, Ph.D. (Purdue U.)— Marshall U. Effect of beta-carotene and vitamin A on
tumors and carcinogenesis.
Michael R. Miller, Ph.D. (Penn St. U.). Regulation of DNA metabolism, DNA replication, Repair
in mammalian and fish cells.
Gale W. Rafter, Ph.D. (U. Wash.). Chemistry of host-parasite relationship.
George P. Tryfiates, Ph.D. (Rutgers U.). Nutritional oncology.
George H. Wirtz, Ph.D. (Geo. Wash. U.). Immunochemistry.
Associate Professors
Kenneth E. Guyer,* Ph.D. (Ohio St. U.)— Marshall U. Lipid metabolism, Glyceryl ethers,
Cholesterol metabolism.
Peter J. Kasvinsky, Ph.D. (U. Vt.)— Marshall U. Mechanisms of enzyme regulation, Covalent
modification of enzymes, Protein phosphatase.
Michael R. Moore, Ph.D. (U. Ga.)— Marshall U. Estrogen receptors in human breast cancer,
Estrogen-responsive proteins in breast cancer, Relationship of estrogen action and histone
acetylation.
Vernon E. Reichenbecher,* Ph.D. (Duke U.)— Marshall U. Molecular biology, Monoclonal
antibody production, Somatic cell genetics, Structure and function of mamallian ribogomes.
Mary J. Wimmer, Ph.D. (U. N.C.). Mechanisms and regulation of enzyme-catalyzed reactions.
Assistant Professor
Kent E. Vrana, Ph.D. (LSU). Molecular biology of nervous system.
Research Assistant Professors
Sharon Byers, Ph.D. (Monash U., Australia). Biosynthesis of connective tissue macromolecules.
Terence Spearman, Ph.D. (U. Manitoba, Canada). Regulation of intracellular effects by external
stimulation (i.e., second messengers, protein phosphorylation).
Sallie G. Sprague, Ph.D. (U. Mass.— Amherst). Structure-function relationships in
photosynthetic membranes. Reconstitution of artificial membranes.
Microbiology
Professors
Robert Belshe, M.D. (U. 111.)— Marshall U. Infectious disease virology, Viral vaccines.
Robert G. Burrell, Ph.D. (Ohio St. U.). Immunology, Mechanisms of immune injury in non-
infectious pulmonary diseases.
Nyles Charon, Ph.D. (U. Minn.). Medical bacteriology, Genetics and physiology of spirochetes.
John Hall,* Ph.D. (Purdue U.). Parasitology, Bacterial endosymbionts of free-living amebae.
Albert G. Moat,* Ph.D. (U. Minn.). Biosynthesis and metabolism of amino acids, B vitamins, and
purines.
Maurice Mufson, M.D. (NYU)— Marshall U. Infectious disease microbiology, Respiratory
pathogens.
Stephen A. Olenchock, Ph.D. (WVU) — Adjunct. Immunology, Study of immunological reactions
in occupational lung disease.
Robert S. Pore, Ph.D. (U. Calif.). Mycology, Pathobiology of Prototheca sp. and the mycoses,
Biotechnology projects include microbial bioconcentration and biopolymer production.
Irvin S. Snyder, Ph.D. (U. Kans.)— Chairperson. Medical bacteriology, Mechanisms of
pathogenicity. Clinical microbiology.
Associate Professors
Terry W. Fenger, Ph.D. (S. 111. U.)— Marshall U. Measles virus proteins, Viral etiology of multiple
sclerosis, Membrane proteins of virus-infected cells.
Vincent F. Gerencser,* Ph.D. (U. Ky.). Dental microbiology, Haemugglutinin of Bacteroides
species, Anaerobic bacteriology of infected dental pulps in children.
Kenneth S. Landreth, Ph.D. (U. Wash.). Immunology, Developmental immunobiology,
Lymphopoiesis.
Bryan Larsen, Ph.D. (U. Iowa)— Marshall U. Medical microbiology, Antimicrobial agents and
chemotherapy, Obstetrical microbiology.
Daniel M. Lewis, Ph.D. (WVU)— Adjunct. Immunology, Mechanism of immunological reactions in
the lung.
'Associate Member
GRADUATE FACULTY 429
Henry F. Mengoli, Ph.D. (Cath. U.). Medical bacteriology, Bacterial Fc receptors, Intestinal
colonization and ankylosing spondylitis.
William G. Sorenson, Ph.D. (U. Tex.) — Adjunct. Immunology, Immunotoxic reactions to grain
dust comporfents.
Herbert A. Thompson, Ph.D. (U. Kans.). Medical bacteriology, Growth and protein synthesis in
obligate intracellular bacteria, Mechanisms of intracellular parasitism.
David B. Yelton, Ph.D. (U. Mass.). Microbial genetics, Molecular genetics, Bacteriophage.
Assistant Professors
James M. Sheil,* Ph.D. (U. Ky.). Immunology, Mechanism of cytotoxic T lymphocyte-mediated
antigen recognition and effector function.
Richard M. Stenberg, Ph.D. (U. Penn). Virology, Regulation of gene expression in human
cytomegalovirus infected cells.
Stephen A. Young, Ph.D. (U. N.M.). Role of Glycoproteins in CMV Infection, Papilloma virus
diseases.
Pharmacology and Toxicology
Professors
A. }. Azzaro, Ph.D. (WVU). Uptake, release, and metabolism of CNS neurotransmitter
substances.
Brenda K. Colasanti, Ph.D. (WVU). Cholinergic and adrenergic interactions in the eye, Effects of
psychoactive drugs on brain neurochemistry and electrophysiology during sleep-wakefulness
cycle.
Charles R. Craig, Ph.D. (U. Wise). Mechanism of action of anticonvulsant drugs, Experimental
epilepsy, Neuropharmacology.
Jeffrey S. Fedan, Ph.D. (U. Ala.)— Adjunct. Photo affinity labeling of receptors, Mechanisms of
airway hyperactivity.
William W. Fleming, Ph.D. (Princeton U.)— Chairperson. Factors regulating the sensitivity of
cells to drugs, Electrophysiology of cell membranes.
Michael G. Mawhinney, Ph.D. (WVU). Connective-tissue metabolism in male sex accessory
tissues, Endocrine pharmacology of prostatic cancer.
Gary O. Rankin, Ph.D. (U. Miss.)— Marshall U. Biotransformation of nephrotoxins, Chemical-
induced nephrotoxicity, Calcium in hypertension.
Mark J. Reasor, Ph.D. (J. Hopkins U.). Pulmonary toxicology, Drug-induced lipidosis,
Reproductive toxicology.
Robert L. Robinson, Ph.D. (U. Kans.). Adrenal catecholamines, Role of adrenal medulla in
hypertension.
David J. Smith, Ph.D. (WVU). Alterations induced by analgesics and anesthetics in
monaminergic and opiate neuronal transmission, Pain reactions.
Robert E. Stitzel, Ph.D. (U. Minn.)— Co-Chairperson. Mechanism of action of antihypertensive
agents, Biochemical factors influencing vascular reactivity.
Knox Van Dyke, Ph.D. (St. Louis U.). Chemiluminescence in human cells, Effects of anti-
inflammatory drugs on chemiluminescence.
Kenneth Weber, Ph.D. (U. Minn.)— Adjunct. Respiratory mechanics, Mechanisms of occupational
respiratory disease.
Associate Professors
Mary E. Davis, Ph.D. (Mich. St. U.). Mechanisms of hepatic and renal toxicity.
Carl A. Gruetter, Ph.D. (Tulane U.) — Marshall U. Pharmacology and physiology of vascular
smooth muscle, Cyclic nucelotides and calcium in vascular mechanisms.
Jeannine S. Strobl, Ph.D. (Geo. Wash. U.). Estrogen receptor mechanisms.
David A. Taylor, Ph.D. (WVU). Microiontophoresis and electrophysiology.
Daniel Wierda, Ph.D. (U. Kans.). Effects of drugs on bone marrow hemopoiesis.
Assistant Professors
John L. Szarek, Ph.D. U. Ky.)— Marshall U. Pulmonary pharmacology.
Monica Valentovic, Ph.D. (U. Ky.)— Marshall U. Prostaglandins, diabetes and glucose.
Jennings F. Worley, III, Ph.D. (U. Md.). Single channel recordings, Patch clamp techniques.
Physiology
Professors
Paul B. Brown, Ph.D. (U. Chicago). Neurophysiology, Neuroanatomy.
Roy L. Butcher,* Ph.D. (Iowa St. U.). Effects of aging on ovarian function.
Vincent Castranova, Ph.D. (WVU). Regulation of membrane transport.
Ludwig Gutmann,* Ph.D. (Columbia U.). Human neuromuscular disorders.
* Associate Member
430 GRADUATE FACULTY
George A. Hedge, Ph.D. (Stanford U.)— Chairperson. Thyroid and adrenocortical
neuroendocrinology.
Theodore A. Kotchen, M.D. (Case West. Res. U.)— Adjunct. Renin and regulation of hypertension.
Ping Lee. Ph.D. (Duke U.). Membrane transport.
Philip R. Miles, Ph.D. (WVU). Cellular physiology of the lung.
William T. Stauber, Ph.D. (Rutgers U.j. Muscle adaptation/injury, Proteases, Lysosomes.
Gary L. Wright, Ph.D. (Ohio St. U.)— Marshall V. Hypertension and Ca+*.
Associate Professors
Christine Baylis, Ph.D. (Leeds U.). Renal and systemic hemodynamics.
Susan DeMesquita, Ph.D. (Jeff. Med. C.) — Marshall U. Respiratory mechanics and sleep.
Gunter N. Franz, Ph.D. (U. Wash.). Voltage clamping of cell membranes and lung mechanics.
David G. Frazer, Ph.D. (Penn St. U.). Examination of mechanical properties of excised lungs.
Wil E. Gladfelter, Ph.D. (U. Penn). Hypothalamic control of the excitability of the motor system.
Robert L. Goodman, Ph.D. (U. Pitt). Neuroendocrine control of ovarian function.
John Hankinson, Ph.D. (WVU) — Adjunct. Occupational respiratory diseases.
Michael D. Johnson, Ph.D. (U. Mich.). Renal and cardiovascular physiology.
William D. McCumbee, Ph.D. (U. Houston)— Marshall U. Cartilage metabolism.
Ronald Millecchia, Ph.D. (Rockefeller U.). Neurophysiology.
Assistant Professors
John M. Connors, Ph.D. (U. 111.) — Research. Feedback control of the hypothalamic-pituitary-
thyroid axis.
Linda J. Huffman,* Ph.D. (U. Nebr.)— Research. Neuroendocrinology, Thyroid axis.
Stanley Yokota, Ph.D. (U. Calif.— Riverside). Renal physiology, Microcirculation,
Osmoregulation.
School of Medicine
Medical Technology
Professors
Jean D. Holter,* Ed.D. (WVU)— Interim Program Director. Medical technology, Chemistry,
Instrumentation.
Richard M. Iammarino. M.D. (Loyola U.)— Director, Clinical Laboratories. Pathology,
Biochemistry.
Dane W. Moore, Jr.,* M.S. (WVU), Medical technology, Microbiology.
Nathaniel F. Rodman, M.D. (U. Penn). Pathology, Coagulation.
Associate Professor
Singanallur N. Jagannathan, Ph.D. (U. Bombay). Pathology, Biochemistry.
College of Mineral and Energy Resources
Mining Engineering
Professors
Lawrence Adler, Ph.D. (U. 111.). Mine machinery. Mine design.
A. Wahab Khair, Ph.D. (Penn St. U.). Rock mechanics, Ground control.
Syd S. Peng, Ph.D. (Stanford U.)— Chairperson. Ground control, Longwall mining, Respirable
dust.
Ronald R. Rollins, Ph.D. (U. Utah). Explosives applications, Explosives theory.
Y. J. Wang, Ph.D. (Penn St. U.). Mine ventilation, Computer application, Mine design.
Assistant Professor
Robert L. Grayson, Ph.D. (WVU)— Research. Mine management/ventilation, Health and safety.
Petroleum Engineering
Professor
James A. Wasson, M.S.P.N.G. (Penn St. U.). Reservoir engineering, Enhanced oil recovery.
Associate Professor
Samuel Ameri, M.S.Pet.E. (WVU)— Chairperson. Geophysical well-log interpretations, Reservoir
engineering, Design and application.
Khashayar Aminian, Ph.D. (U. Mich.). Natural gas engineering, Reservoir simulation.
*Associate Member
GRADUATE FACULTY 431
Assistant Professors
Peter S. Puon, Ph.D. (U. Alberta). Drilling engineering, Enhanced oil recovery.
John P. Yu, Ph.D. (U. Okla.). Oil and gas property evaluation, Fracturing, Reservoir/production
system design.
Mineral Processing Engineering
Professor
Eung Ha Cho, Ph.D. (U. Utah). Hydrometallurgy, Environmental science.
Associate Professor
Richard B. Muter, M.S. (WVU)— Acting Chairperson. Coal-cleaning and preparation, Coal-waste
utilization, Coal and mineral analysis.
Mineral Resource Economics
Professors
Walter C. Labys, Ph.D. (Nottingham U.). Commodity modeling and forecasting, Mineral trade,
Mineral resource development.
Adam Z. Rose, Ph.D. (Cornell U.)— Chairperson. Energy resources and regional development,
Natural gas economics, Input-output analysis.
Associate Professor
Thomas F. Torries, Ph.D. (Penn St. U.). Mineral resource evaluation, Mineral policy, Coal
economics.
Particle Analysis Center
Professor
Thomas P. Meloy, Ph.D. (M.I. T.)— Claude Worthington Benedum Professor. Power science,
Mineral liberation, Plant circuit analysis.
School of Nursing
Professors
Mona M. Counts, Ph.D. (U. Tex.). Medical-surgical nursing, Curriculum and instruction.
Lorita D. Jenab,* Ed.D. (Columbia U.)— Dean. Medical-surgical nursing, Nursing education,
Curriculum and instruction.
Luz S. Porter, Ph.D. (NYU)— Chairperson. Pediatric nursing, Parent-child nursing.
Kathryn L. Riffle,* Ph.D. (NYU). Medical-surgical nursing, Rehabilitative nursing.
Martha N. Smith,* Ph.D. (U. Mich.). Community health nursing, Higher education.
Mary Jane Smith, Ph.D. (NYU). Medical-surgical nursing, Nursing science.
Associate Professors
C. Lynne Ostrow,* Ed.D. (WVU). Medical-surgical nursing, Curriculum and instruction.
Jacqueline Stemple,* Ed.D. (WVU). Advanced nursing in primary health care, Educational
psychology.
Assistant Professor
Janet Wang,* Ph.D. (U. Pitt). Maternity nursing, Educational anthropology.
School of Pharmacy
harmaceutical Sciences
Professors
Calvin C. Brister,* Ph.D. (U. Miss.). Biopharmacy.
Stephen A. Howard, Ph.D. (U. Mich.)— Adjunct. Pharmaceutics.
Arthur I. Jacknowitz, Pharm.D. (Phila. C. Pharm.). Formulation of solid dosage forms from liquid
biologies, Gastrointestinal diseases and their treatment.
James K. Lim, Ph.D. (U. N.C.). Pharmaceutical product formulation studies, Fluorides and dental
antiplaque agents, Semisolid rheology.
Carl J. Malanga, Ph.D. (Fordham U.). Biopharmacy, Pharmacology and physiology of mucociliary
transport, Mucus synthesis and secretion.
John W. Mauger, Ph.D. (U. R.I.), Pharmaceutics, Mass transport from dosage forms.
Jay Nematollahi, Ph.D. (U. Calif.)— Adjunct. Medicinal chemistry.
Frank D. O'Connell,* Ph.D. (Purdue U.j. Isolation of natural products, Biochemical
transformations in plant tissue cultures.
John P. O'Donnell, Ph.D. (U. Iowa)— Adjunct. Medicinal chemistry.
*Associate Member
432 GRADUATE FACULTY
David A. Riley, Ed.D. (U. Ga.)- Continuing education, Behavioral and administrative pharmacy.
Sidney A. Rosenbluth, Ph.D. (U. Tex.)— Dean. Development and evaluation of expanded
pharmacists' roles in health care delivery, Development and evaluation of educational units and
their effects on professional behavior.
Ashok C. Shah, Ph.D. (U. Wise.)— Adjunct. Pharmaceutics.
Associate Professors
Marie A. Abate,* Pharm.D. (U. Mich.). Drug information, Adult internal medicine.
David B. Brushwood, J.D., (U. Kans.). Pharmacy administration, Drug regulation, Health law and
ethics.
Peter R. Gwilt, Ph.D. (U. Ky.). Pharmacokinetics.
Buford T. Lively, Ed.D. (WVU), Behavioral and administrative pharmacy, Social and financial
trends affecting pharmacy practice and consumer behavior, including patient education and
patient use of medication.
Joseph K. H. Ma, Ph.D. (Duquesne U.). Pharmaceutical chemistry.
Charles D. Ponte,* Pharm.D. (U. Utah). Clinical pharmacy, Family practice.
Donald H. Waters, Ph.D. (Cornell U.). Pharmacokinetics and pharmacodynamics of CNS drugs,
Computer modeling and simulations.
Assistant Professors
E. Kim Fifer, Ph.D., (U. Miss.). Medicinal chemistry, Chemical carcinogenesis/Drug metabolism.
Nahla Khoury,* Ph.D. (WVU)— Adjunct. Pharmaceutics.
Lee E. Kirsch, Ph.D. (Ohio St. U.)— Adjunct. Pharmaceutics.
Paula Jo Meyer Stout, Ph.D. (WVU). Pharmaceutics, Dissolution models, Industrial
pharmacy/product formulation.
School of Physical Education
General Program
Professor
Patricia K. Fehl,* Ph.D. (Ind. U.)— Chairperson. Early and middle childhood, Elementary physical
education.
Associate Professor
Mary K. Wiedebusch,* M.A. (WVU). Dance in higher education, Creative dance for children,
Physical education.
Professional Physical Education
Professors
Carl P. Bahneman, Ph.D. (U. Pitt)— Chairperson. Teacher behavior, Administration.
J. William Douglas, Ph.D. (Ohio U.) — Dean. Management theory, history and philosophy of sport.
Robert L. Wiegand, Ed.D. (U. Ga.). Physical education, Teacher preparation, Special physical
education.
Associate Professors
Linda M. Carson,* (WVU). Physical education, Motor development, Early childhood physical
education.
Andrew H. Hawkins, Ph.D. (Ohio St. U.). Physical education, Teacher education, Special
physical education.
Daniel Ziatz,* Ph.D. (U. Utah). Pedagogy, Coaching education, Curriculum.
Assistant Professor
Greg A. Ott,* M.S. (U. Ariz.). Physical education, Athletic training, Physical therapy.
Safety & Health Studies
Professors
Daniel E. Della-Giustina, Ph.D. (Mich. St. U.)— Chairperson. Safety management services, Sports
safety, Transportation safety.
Kenard McPherson, Ed.D. (Mich. St. U.). Safety management, Alcohol and transportation
research.
Associate Professors
Pete Shaffron, Jr., Ed.D. (WVU). Safety studies, Driver and traffic safety education, Safety
education. Kenneth J. Simon, Ed.D. (Columbia U.). Health education, Program design, Research
and evaluation, Drug education.
Andrew Sorine, Ed.D. (WVU). Safety studies/management/education.
Assistant Professor
Karen K. Douglas,* Ph.D. (Tex. Worn. U.). Health education, Wellness, Curriculum development.
'Associate Member
GRADUATE FACULTY 433
Sport and Exercise Studies
Professors
Robert L. Kurucz,* Ph.D. (Ohio St. U.). Kinesiology, Biomechanics, Exercise physiology.
Andrew C. Ostrow, Ph.D. (U. Calif.— Berkeley). Physical education, Sport psychology, Physical
activity and aging.
Rachel Yeater, Ph.D. (WVU). Exercise physiology, Exercise and osteoporosis,
Cardiac/rehabilitation.
Associate Professors
William L. Alsop,* Ed.D. (WVU)— Chairperson. Sport studies, Sport management.
Dana Brooks, Ed.D. (WVU). Physical education, Social psychological aspects of sport, Youth
sport.
Reproductive Physiology
Professors
Roy L. Butcher, Ph.D. (Iowa St. U.). Aging as a factor in reproduction, superovulation and
embryonic anomalies.
William E. Collins,* Ph.D. (U. Wise). Endocrinology of bovine reproduction.
Robert A. Dailey, Ph.D. (U. Wise). Neuroendocrine control of reproduction, Follicular
development, Ovulation.
Donald J. Horvath,* Ph.D. (Cornell U.). Reproductive management of swine, Nutritional factors.
E. Keith Inskeep, Ph.D. (U. Wise). Uterine and ovarian prostaglandins in sheep and cattle.
Paul E. Lewis, Ph.D. (WVU). Puberty, Postpartum and seasonal anestrus as limiting factors in
reproduction.
Michael G. Mawhinney, Ph.D. (WVU). Endocrine pharmacology and metabolism of male sex
accessory tissues.
Joginder Nath, Ph.D. (U. Wise). Genetics and evolution.
Associate Professor
Robert L. Goodman, Ph.D. (U. Pitt). Neuroendocrine control of ovarian function.
Adjunct Professor
Robert Cochrane, Ph.D. (U. Wise). Reproduction in laboratory and fur animals.
School of Social Work
Professors
Sung Lai Boo, Ph.D. (Fla. St. U.)— Assistant Dean. Social policy, Cross-cultural practice, Social
work education.
Nancy L. Lohmann, Ph.D. (Brandeis U.)— Dean. Social gerontology, Research measurement.
Roger A. Lohmann, Ph.D. (Brandeis U.). Non-profit management, Social gerontology, Rural social
services.
Robert A. Porter, Ph.D. (Brandeis U.). Ecology, Community development, Ethnography.
LeRoy G. Shul'tz,* M.S.W. (Wash. U.). Victimology, Forensic social work.
Associate Professors
Patty A. Gibbs, Ed.D. (WVU). Death and dying, Women's issues.
John F. Isaacson,* M.S.W. (U. Penn). Family life theory, Homesexuality.
Harold R. White,* M.S.W. (SUNY— Buffalo)— Coordinator of Field Instruction. Field instruction,
Practice in health settings.
Assistant Professors
Ernest J. Barbeau,* M.S.W. (U. Pitt). Social gerontology, Ethics.
Linner W. Griffin,* Ed.D. (U. Houston). Adult protective services, Physically/mentally impaired
adult.
Barry Locke,* M.S.W. (Va. Cmwealth. U.). B.S.W. curriculum, Social work in rural areas and
small towns, Program planning.
John A. Peters,* M.S.W. (WVU). Locality development, Community mental health practice in
rural areas.
Oliver J. Williams,* Ph.D. (U. Pitt). Domestic violence, Family and sexuality in social work
practice.
Women's Studies
Professor
Judith G. Stitzel, Ph.D. (U. Minn.)— Director. Feminist pedagogy, Women in development.
* Associate Member
434 GRADUATE FACULTY
INDEX
Abbreviations used in listings 15
Academic Common Market 14
Accreditation 14
Accountancy, Professional 16-18
Administration
Admission to graduate study 359-361
Advising 401
Aerospace Engineering 200
Agricultural Biochemistry 19-20
Agricultural Economics 20
Agricultural Education 23-24
Agricultural Mechanics 343
Agricultural Microbiology 25
Agriculture 26
Agronomy 27
Animal Nutrition 32, 33
Animal and Veterinary Science 33;
Animal Physiology 34; Animal
Production 34
Anatomy 29-32
Application for Graduate Study
Art 35-39; MFA in Visual Arts 37;
MA in Art 38; Art Education 38;
Art History 38; Studio Art 38
Assistantships 400, 402
Biochemistry 40-41
Biology 42-46
Biomedical Sciences 47-49
Board of Regents 4
Business Administration 49-57; MBA 50;
Accounting 51; Business Law 53;
Economics 53; Finance 53;
Management 54; Marketing 56
Calendar 2, 3
Candidacy 375
Chemical Engineering 57-62
Chemistry 62-66
Civil Engineering 66-74
Credit Limitations 364
Communication Studies 74-77
Community Health 77-79;
Health Education 77
Computer Science 79-83
Computing Services 405
Contractual Nature of
Graduate Study 370
Correspondence 6
Costs per year 397
Counseling 83-89; Community
Counseling 85; Human Resource
Development 85; Counseling
Certification 85
Course numbering 15
Deans and Directors
Degree programs 11-14
Dissertations 375, 381
Distinguished professors
Doctoral degrees 379-383; Residence 379;
Requirements 380; Foreign language 380;
Publication 382
Economics 93-99; Economic Theory 96;
Quantitative Economics 96; Monetary
Economics 97; Public Finance 97; Public
Regulation and Control 97; International
Economics 98; Regional Economics 98;
Labor Economics 98; Economic History
98; Economic Development 98
Education 99-100; Certificate of Advanced
Study 99; Doctor of Education 99;
Curriculum and Instruction 100, 350
Education Administration 100-104
Education Foundations 343
Educational Psychology 104-109
Electrical and Computer Engineering
109-119; Digital Systems 110;
Control Systems 110; Signal Processing
111; Electromagnetics 112; Electronics
112
Elementary Education 119-124; Early
Childhood Education 120
Endodontics 125-126
Energy and Water Research Center
350-353; Energy Division 350;
Mining and Mineral Resources Research
Institute 351; Generic Technology
Center for Respirable Dust 351;
Consortium for Fossil Fuel Liquefaction
Science 351; Oak Ridge Associated
Universities 351; Water Research
Institute 352; National Small Flows
Clearinghouse 353
English 126-133
Entomology 133-134
Examinations 377; 380; 381
Faculty 406-434
Family Resources 134-139; Child
Development 136; Home Economics
Education 137; Human Nutrition
138; Interior Design 138; Textiles 139
Fees 393-401; Waivers 396; Refunds 396
Fellowships 400-401, 402
Financial Aid 401
Foreign Languages 139-147; Teaching
ESL 141; Linguistics 141;
Comparative Literature 142; Study
Abroad 143
Forestry 148-152; Forest Management 149;
Wood Science 150
Genetics and Developmental
Biology 152-153
Geography 158-162
Gerontology 344-345
Government and Organization
of WVU 358-359
435
Graduate Degrees 11-14;
Classification 383; Special
Requirements: Agriculture and
Forestry 393; Creative Arts 384;
Dentistry 384; Engineering 385;
M.S. 385; Ph.D. 386; Human
Resources 387; Ed.D. 388; C.A.S. 390
Graduate Programs 15-342;
See specific titles
Graduate Record Examination 361
Harley O. Staggers National
Transportation Center 354
History 162-170; History of Science
and Technology 164, 363
Horticulture 170-171
Housing Information and Research
Center 353
Industrial Engineering 172-177
Industrial and Labor Relations 178-185
International Students 363
Journalism 185-192
Landscape Architecture 345
Liberal Studies 192-194
Library Science 345
Library Services 404
Masters Degrees 377;
Requirements 377; Procedures 378
Mathematics 194-198
Mechanical and Aerospace
Engineering 198-211; Solid
Mechanics, Materials, and
Structures 203; System Control and
Design 203; Thermal Sciences 204;
Bioengineering 204
Medical Technology 211-214
Microbiology (medical) 214-217
Mineral and Energy Resources
218-220; Mineral Resource
Economics 218-220; Mineral Processing
Engineering 218, 220-222
Mining Engineering 222-226; Mineral
Engineering (Ph.D.) 222
Morgantown 403-404
Multidisciplinary Studies 346
Music 226-238; Music Education 228;
History of Music 229; Applied
Music 229; Composition 229; Theory 230
Nursing 238-245
Occupational Health and Safety
Engineering 242-243
Off-Campus Graduate Study 374
Orthodontics 244-245
Pathology 347
Petroleum Engineering 245-248
Pharmaceutical Chemistry 249-250
Pharmaceutical Sciences 248-249
Pharmacognosy 250
Pharmacology and Toxicology 251-254
Pharmacy 250
Philosophy 348
Physical Education 254-260;
Professional Physical Education
255; Sport and Exercise Studies
255; Dance 259
Physical Science 349
Physics 260-264; Astronomy 264
Physiology 265-268
Plant Pathology 268-269
Policies and Procedures at WVU 356-358
Political Science 269-275; Public
Policy 269-270
Psychology 275-282
Public Administration 282-284
Reading 285-288
Recreation and Parks Management
288-290
Rehabilitation Counseling 290-292
Religious Studies 349
Reproductive Physiology 293
Request for Degree 377
Residency 397-399
Safety Studies 293-297
Scholarships
Secondary Education 297-302
Social Work 302-311
Sociology and Anthropology 311-315
Special Education 315-323;
Certification Curricula 317-319
Special Fees 394
Speech Pathology and Audiology 323-327
Statistics 327-330
Student Committees 376
Summer Tuition 394
Table of Contents 5
Technology Education 330-334
Technology Field Service Center 353
Theatre 335-340; Studio Acting
Option 336; Design Option 336-337
Theses and Dissertations 375
Time Limits 365
Transfer Procedures 363
Undergraduates in Graduate Courses 366
University Affiliated Center for
Developmental Disabilities 354
Veterans Assistance 400
West Virginia Rehabilitation Research
and Training Center 354
Wildlife Management 341
Women's Studies 349-350
436
1988-89 Graduate Catalog West Virginia University Bulletin
West Virginia University (USPS 676-980) (ISSN 0362-3009)
Office of Admissions and Records Second-class postage paid at
Morgantown, WV 26506 Morgantown, WV 26505
and additional mailing offices.
Live Music Archive
Librivox Free Audio
Metropolitan Museum
Cleveland Museum of Art
Internet Arcade
Console Living Room
Books to Borrow
Open Library
TV News
Understanding 9/11